JP7485376B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

Conventionally, a starting hole and a big prize hole are provided in the game area where the game ball flows down, and when a game ball enters the starting hole, a lottery for a special symbol is held, and when this lottery for a special symbol is won, the big prize game state is controlled (so-called type 1 pachinko game machine), and when a game ball enters the starting hole, the big prize hole is changed to an open state, and the big prize game state is controlled on the condition that the game ball that entered the big prize hole enters a specific area (so-called type 2 pachinko game machine) are known.

Furthermore, in order to increase the interest of pachinko machines, so-called type 1/type 2 pachinko machines are also known, which are a combination of a so-called type 1 pachinko machine and a so-called type 2 pachinko machine (see Patent Document 1).

JP 2009-178259 A

However, rather than simply combining the so-called Type 1 pachinko gaming machine with the so-called Type 2 pachinko gaming machine, there was a desire to create unprecedented gameplay and increase the entertainment value of the game.

The objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the enjoyment of gaming.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention (e.g., the ninth pachinko gaming machine) comprises a start variable display game execution means (e.g., the main CPU 201, etc.) capable of executing a start variable display game (e.g., variable display of special symbols, etc.) based on the passage of a gaming medium into a start area (e.g., the first start port 9120 or the second start port 9140), a specific variable display game execution means (e.g., the main CPU 201, etc.) capable of executing a specific variable display game (e.g., variable display of normal symbols, etc.) based on the passage of a gaming medium into a specific area (e.g., the normal symbol operation area 9126), a determination means (e.g., the main CPU 201 that performs a lottery for special symbols or a lottery for normal symbols) capable of determining the result of the start variable display game or the specific variable display game, and a displacement device (e.g., the normal electric role unit 9145) provided in the gaming area when it is determined that the execution result of the specific variable display game satisfies a predetermined result based on the determination result of the determination means. A shift device operation control means (e.g., the main CPU 201) capable of shifting the skill medium from a difficult-to-win state to an easy-to-win state, a performance control means (e.g., the sub-control circuit 300 and the sub-CPU 301) for controlling a performance execution means (e.g., the display device 7, the speaker 32, and the LED group 46) capable of executing a performance, a game state control means (e.g., the main CPU 201) capable of controlling a game state, a specific variable display mode determination means (e.g., the main CPU 201) capable of determining a variable display mode (e.g., a normal pattern variable pattern) of the specific variable display game, and a special game state control means (e.g., the main CPU 201) capable of controlling the special game state (e.g., a jackpot game state) in which a predetermined number of game values can be given to a player after the special result is established when the start variable display game satisfies a special result, and the performance control means includes a decorative pattern control means for displaying a decorative pattern corresponding to the start variable display game or the specific variable display game,
The game state control means is capable of controlling the game state to any one of a normal game state and a specific game state (e.g., a time-saving game state) having a different degree of advantage for a player from the normal game state,
The predetermined result includes at least a first predetermined result and a second predetermined result (e.g., a long opening of the second starting hole 9140) that has a relatively longer time to facilitate the winning of the displacement device than the first predetermined result (e.g., a short opening of the second starting hole 9140),
The specific variable display mode determination means, when the execution result of the specific variable display game last changed in the specific gaming state is the first predetermined result, determines a first variable display mode (e.g., normal symbol variable pattern 13H to 15H) that can vary over a first time (e.g., 15 seconds, 12 seconds, or 40 seconds) after the derivation of the first predetermined result, and when the execution result of the specific variable display game last changed in the specific gaming state is the second predetermined result, determines a second variable display mode (e.g., normal symbol variable pattern 16H) that can vary over a second time that is longer than the first time (e.g., 60 seconds) after the derivation of the second predetermined result;
The presentation control means is capable of displaying a predetermined display (e.g., an image of the number of game balls to be acquired or an image of the number of game balls already acquired) regarding the number of game values that can be acquired in a plurality of special game states to which the game state can be shifted after the second predetermined result is derived by the specific variable display game,
The decorative pattern control means is capable of displaying a first decorative pattern in a first area of the display means, and a second decorative pattern in a second area of the display means that is smaller than the first area, and is characterized in that at a predetermined timing before a first special game state among the plurality of special game states is executed and before the predetermined display is displayed, the decorative pattern corresponding to the start variable display game is displayed in the second area without being displayed in the first area.

The present invention can improve the enjoyment of games.

1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the front right. 1 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the front right. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the rear direction. 1 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit of a first pachinko game machine. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view showing an LED unit of the first pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 2 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine; 1 is an example of a game flow of a pachinko game machine. 13 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of a game state. 1 is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (estimate) for each setting value in a first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol winning determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. 1A is an example of a special symbol stopping mode determination table in a first pachinko gaming machine; and FIG. 1B is an example of a decorative symbol stopping mode determination table in a first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning type determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is a modified example of the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 13 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning determination table for normal symbols of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol determination table of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol winning type determination table for the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table for the first pachinko gaming machine. 1 is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of a main control process in a first pachinko gaming machine. 11 is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of the main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 11 is a flowchart (part 3) showing an example of the main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 4 is a flowchart (part 4) showing an example of the main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of an initial setting process at startup in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a power cut process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol management process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display ending process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game determination process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game ending process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a time-saving management process of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a counter update process of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a time-saving counter update process of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a ceiling counter update process of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a counter determination process of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a time-saving transition determination process of a first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a time-saving transition process of a first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a time-saving setting process of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a preparation process for opening a large prize opening in the first pachinko gaming machine. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a special prize opening control process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of external maskable interrupt processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a system timer interrupt process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting control process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting change process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting confirmation process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a first normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a second normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a switch input detection process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a starting hole winning detection process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a sub-control circuit process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a sub-variable presentation pattern determination table in the normal gaming state of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a table for determining a pre-reading winning type presentation pattern in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a pre-reading winning type presentation pattern determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination table (when a winning combination occurs) in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination table (when losing) in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a flowchart showing a process for determining a pre-reading presentation pattern in a first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a look-ahead presentation pattern of the first pachinko gaming machine, and shows the process by which the jackpot-related look-ahead presentation format changes. This is an example of a look-ahead presentation pattern of the first pachinko gaming machine, and shows the process by which the time-saving hit look-ahead presentation form changes. This is an example of a look-ahead presentation pattern for the first pachinko gaming machine, and shows the process by which the reserved image changes from a common win type look-ahead presentation form to a big win type look-ahead presentation form. This is an example of a look-ahead presentation pattern for the first pachinko gaming machine, showing the process by which the reserved image changes from a dedicated common win type look-ahead presentation form to a jackpot type look-ahead presentation form. This is an example of a look-ahead presentation pattern for the first pachinko gaming machine, and shows the process by which the reserved image changes from a dedicated common win type look-ahead presentation form to a time-saving win type look-ahead presentation form. 11 is a table showing an example of output conditions for signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a timing chart of the signal "prize ball information 1" among the signals outputted to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. 11 is a table showing an example of an overview of errors in the first pachinko gaming machine. 11 is a table showing an example of output conditions for signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine depending on the gaming status. 13 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit of the second pachinko game machine. FIG. 13 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of a second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol winning determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning type determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols for a low start of the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols for a high start of the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol management process in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of a special symbol variable display ending process in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of a special symbol variable display ending process in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of a special symbol game determination process in a second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of a special pattern game determination process in the second pachinko game machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game ending process in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a preparation process for opening a large prize opening in a second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special prize opening control process in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit of the third pachinko game machine. FIG. 13 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol winning determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning type determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol management process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display ending process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game determination process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game ending process in the third pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a V winning device opening preparation process in a third pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a V winning device opening control process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a large prize opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special prize opening control process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process in the third pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the large prize opening and the opening timing of a specific area in a specific round of play during execution of an extended example of a large prize game control process, and shows a case where (A) the opening mode of the specific area is the first opening mode, (B) the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode, and (C) the opening mode of the specific area is the third opening mode. 13 is an example of a special symbol determination table in an extended example. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table in an extended example. This is another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the large prize opening and the opening timing of a specific area in a specific round of play during execution of an extended example of a large prize game control process, showing (A) a case where the opening mode of the specific area is the first opening mode, and (B) a case where the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode. An example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. FIG. 13 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol winning determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning type determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in a normal game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the C time-saving game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. 13 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the A time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table after a limiter function is activated in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning determination table for normal symbols in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol winning type determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol management process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern variable display start process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a process for determining a variation pattern of a special symbol in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern variable display ending process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game determination process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a limiter number update process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game end process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a V winning device opening preparation process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. A flowchart showing an example of a V winning device opening control process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. A flowchart showing an example of a large prize opening preparation process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a large prize opening control process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol control process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a switch input detection process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of game states in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a time chart showing an example of the opening mode of a normal electric device in a normal game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a time chart showing an example of the opening mode of a normal electric device in the C time-saving play state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 13 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in a normal gaming state and a C time-saving gaming state in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table after a limiter function is activated in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a time chart showing an example of the opening mode of a normal electric device in a normal game state or a C-time shortened game state in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. 13 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit of the fifth pachinko game machine. FIG. 13 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol winning determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning type determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in a normal game state in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning determination table for normal symbols in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol winning type determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol management process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display ending process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game determination process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game ending process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a large prize opening preparation process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special prize opening control process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of variable normal symbol display start processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a sub-control circuit process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a presentation mode determination process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a presentation pattern determination process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of game states in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 13 is an example of an explanatory diagram explaining the bonus time in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image illustrating the presentation of a bonus time in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a perspective view showing the external appearance of the sixth pachinko gaming machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the front right. 13 is an example of a conceptual diagram showing the change in the operation mode of the effect button device of the sixth pachinko gaming machine. An example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit of a sixth pachinko game machine. 13 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of a sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol winning determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning type determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of game states in a sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a first half variation pattern table of special symbols in a normal game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a latter-stage change pattern table of special symbols in a normal game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a first half variation pattern table and a second half variation pattern table of special symbols in a right-hit play state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning determination table for normal symbols in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol winning type determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol management process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of a special symbol variable display ending process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of a special symbol variable display ending process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern game determination process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game ending process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a large prize opening preparation process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special prize opening control process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of variable normal symbol display start processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a presentation flow in a normal game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of the presentation flow for the right-hit game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table in a normal game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table for a right-hit playing state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a second half icon number determination table in a normal gaming state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a first half icon number determination table in a normal gaming state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a first half icon display scenario determination table for the normal game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a first half icon collection order scenario determination table for the normal game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a cherry blossom accumulation notification determination table in the normal game state of the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a support icon display scenario determination table for a confrontation reach in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a lotus flower notice determination table for right-hand play in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a fan notice determination table for a jackpot game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a sub-control circuit process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a presentation mode determination process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of a presentation pattern determination process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 2 is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of a presentation pattern determination process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a normal display image in the Western team mode and the Eastern team mode in the normal game state of the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image (part 1) explaining the cherry blossom accumulation announcement presentation in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image (part 2) explaining the cherry blossom accumulation announcement presentation in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image (part 1) explaining the pseudo consecutive performance in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image (part 2) explaining the pseudo consecutive performance in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image (part 3) explaining the pseudo consecutive performance in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image (part 1) illustrating the presentation of the road to the final battle in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image (part 2) illustrating the presentation of the road to the final battle in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image illustrating the presentation of the "Path to the Ultimate Showdown" in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image (part 1) explaining the presentation of a showdown reach in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image (part 2) explaining the presentation of a showdown reach in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image illustrating the lotus flower announcement presentation in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image (part 1) explaining the presentation of a battle reach in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image (part 2) explaining the presentation of a battle reach in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a block diagram illustrating the configuration of the operation presentation time and reception time of the presentation button device of the Road to the Final Battle in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a table showing an example of output conditions for signals output to the outside of the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a timing chart of the signal "External Information 3" among the signals outputted to the outside of the sixth pachinko gaming machine. An example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the seventh pachinko game machine. An example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol winning determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning type determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in a normal game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in a time-saving game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a transition diagram of a special symbol variation pattern table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of data relating to pre-reading of special symbols in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning determination table for normal symbols in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a table for determining the opening pattern of a normal electric device in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of the operation of a normal electric device in the first time-saving play state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a right-hit instruction period setting table for the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol management process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern variable display start process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a process for determining a variation pattern of a special symbol in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display ending process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a time-saving management process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a time-saving counter update process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game determination process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game ending process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a small win game state setting process in the seventh pachinko game machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a small win game state control process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a large prize opening preparation process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special prize opening control process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a jackpot game state ending process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of variable normal symbol display start processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a switch input detection process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of game states in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a presentation flow of the gaming state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table for the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a start time determination table for the second normal game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table for the second normal game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table for the first time-saving game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table other than the final change of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table at the time of final change of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a preview performance pattern determination table for a window preview in the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hold notice presentation pattern determination table for the hold change notice in the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a winning notice presentation pattern determination table for a flash notice in the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a prohibition condition setting table for the pre-reading performance in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a small win presentation pattern determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a V passing performance pattern determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a presentation stage selection table after a jackpot gaming state ends in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a sub-control circuit process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a presentation mode determination process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of a presentation pattern determination process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 2 is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of a presentation pattern determination process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart (part 3) showing an example of a presentation pattern determination process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a pre-reading performance determination process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal display image in the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image illustrating the card effects and door effects in the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image illustrating the presentation of a Sengoku entry chance in the first time-saving gaming state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image illustrating the selection of a presentation stage by a player in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image illustrating the Sengoku Time presentation when a male character stage is selected in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image illustrating the Sengoku Time presentation when a female character stage is selected in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image that explains the presentation that takes place when the game ball does not pass through the V winning hole during a small win game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. 13 is an example of a display image illustrating the presentation when Sengoku Time ends in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image illustrating the presentation of a continuous battle in the second normal game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. An example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the eighth pachinko game machine. An example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of an eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol winning determination table in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a jackpot type determination table for the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a small win type determination table in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a game status related setting table in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in a normal game state or a special time-saving game state in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the general time-saving game state in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of data relating to pre-reading of special symbols in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning determination table for normal symbols in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a table for determining the opening pattern of a normal electric device in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol management process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern variable display start process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a process for determining a variation pattern of a special symbol in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern variable display ending process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a time-saving management process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern game determination process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a process for updating the number of small wins in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern game ending process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of processing during the closing of a small win game in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of processing during opening of a small win game in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a large prize opening preparation process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special prize opening control process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a jackpot game state ending process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a limiter information update process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal pattern variable display start process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of system timer interrupt processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 23 is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of system timer interrupt processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a switch input detection process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a preview performance pattern determination table for the time-saving game state in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a sub-control circuit process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a presentation mode determination process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. An example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of game states in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a presentation flow of a gaming state in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image illustrating a battle presentation in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image illustrating card effects in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image illustrating the ending presentation in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image illustrating card effects in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image illustrating a preview performance in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the ninth pachinko game machine. An example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol winning determination table in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a small win type determination table in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a game status related setting table in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in a normal game state in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in a time-saving game state in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of data relating to pre-reading of special symbols in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning determination table for normal symbols in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a second starting hole opening pattern determination table in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of special pattern management processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern variable display start process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern variable display ending process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a process for determining whether to transition to the B time-saving gaming state in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern game determination process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern game ending process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of processing during the closing of a small hit game in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of processing during opening of a small win game in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a preparation process for opening a large prize opening in a ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special prize opening control process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a jackpot game state ending process in the ninth pachinko game machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal pattern variable display start process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol winning end process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of system timer interrupt processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a switch input detection process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a sub-control circuit process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a presentation mode determination process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of game states in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. An example of an explanatory diagram of the basic configuration of a display image displayed in the display area of a display device in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image illustrating the presentation of the BONUS state in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

As examples of gaming machines according to an embodiment of the present invention, a first pachinko gaming machine, a second pachinko gaming machine, and a third pachinko gaming machine will be described.

In this specification, unless otherwise specified, the front side of the pachinko machine is defined as the front direction, the back side of the pachinko machine is defined as the rear direction, the left side when viewed from the front is defined as the left direction, the right side when viewed from the front is defined as the right direction, the top side of the pachinko machine is defined as the up direction, the bottom side of the pachinko machine is defined as the down direction, the clockwise direction when viewed from the front is defined as the rightward direction, and the conversely, the counterclockwise direction is defined as the leftward direction.

The first pachinko gaming machine and the second pachinko gaming machine are both so-called type one pachinko gaming machines known as digital pachinko. Of these, the first pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel, but only one of them is variably displayed. In contrast, the second pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel.

The third pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine called a type 1/2 mixed machine, which is a combination of a type 1 gaming machine called a digital pachinko machine and a type 2 gaming machine called a feather mono. The third pachinko gaming machine described in this specification also has a first special symbol and a second special symbol, but this specification describes an example in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel, but only one of them is variably displayed. However, this is not intended to exclude type 1/2 mixed pachinko gaming machines in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel.

In this specification, when the term "special design" is used, it means both the first special design and the second special design unless otherwise specified.

In addition, the term "variable display" in this specification includes, for example, both "variable display" in which the pattern is displayed by changing, and "stop display" in which the pattern is displayed by stopping, and the operation from the start of the variable display to the stop display is called one "variable display". When the variable display pattern is stopped (hereinafter also referred to as "derivation"), the result of the special pattern hit determination process (hereinafter also referred to as "special pattern lottery") and the result of the normal pattern hit determination process (hereinafter also referred to as "normal pattern lottery") described later are determined. Note that although the pattern appears to be stopped, there are cases where the pattern is displayed in a state where the result of the special pattern hit determination process or the normal pattern hit determination process is not determined (for example, a state where it is temporarily stopped), and such a state is included in the variable display. Note that even if the pattern is temporarily stopped, for example, the result of the special pattern hit determination process or the normal pattern hit determination process is not determined at this point, so the pattern can be displayed again by changing.

In addition, in this specification, when explaining the first pachinko gaming machine, the second pachinko gaming machine, and the third pachinko gaming machine, the case where there are two special symbols (a first special symbol and a second special symbol) will be explained as an example. However, for the first pachinko gaming machine and the third pachinko gaming machine, the number of special symbols may be one.

[1. The first pachinko game machine]
First, the first pachinko gaming machine will be described.

As for pachinko gaming machines in which the first and second special symbols are not displayed in parallel, but only one of them is displayed, there are pachinko gaming machines in which, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are on hold, the starting conditions of the second special symbol are established with priority over the starting conditions of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as a "priority variable machine"), and pachinko gaming machines in which the starting conditions are established in the order of winning, including the first and second starting holes (hereinafter referred to as a "sequential variable machine").

In a priority variable machine, the start conditions for the first special symbol are met when certain requirements are met, such as neither the first nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the game is not in a jackpot game state, the variable display of the second special symbol is not on hold, and the variable display of the first special symbol is on hold. Also, in a priority variable machine, the start conditions for the second special symbol are met when certain requirements are met, such as neither the first nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the game is not in a jackpot game state, and the variable display of the second special symbol is on hold.

In a sequential variable machine, the start conditions for the first special symbol are met when at least all of the following are met: neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the game is not in a jackpot game state, the variable display of the first special symbol is on hold, and the earliest reserved symbol is the reserved variable display of the first special symbol. In a sequential variable machine, the start conditions for the second special symbol are met when at least all of the following are met: neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the game is not in a jackpot game state, the variable display of the second special symbol is on hold, and the earliest reserved symbol is the reserved variable display of the second special symbol.

The following explains using a priority variable machine as an example.

[1-1. Appearance]
Fig. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally above the front right. Fig. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally above the front right. Fig. 3 is an example of a perspective view of the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally above the rear right.

[1-1-1. Basic configuration
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the first pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame 2, a base door 3, a glass door 4, a tray unit 5, a launching device 6, a display device 7 (see FIG. 2), a payout unit, and a payout unit. 8 (see FIG. 2 and FIG. 3), a board unit 9 (see FIG. 2 and FIG. 3), and a game board unit 10 (see FIG. 2). 160 (see FIG. 2). Here, the outer frame 2, the base door 3, the glass door 4, the tray unit 5, the launching device 6, the display device 7, the dispensing unit 8 and the base unit 9 will be briefly described. The game board unit 10 and the LED unit 160 will be described in detail below. Note that the above parentheses indicate reference drawings for configurations that are not shown in FIG.

(Outer frame)
The outer frame 2 is a frame body having a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has an opening 21 penetrating in the front-rear direction. This outer frame 2 is fixedly attached to an island facility of an amusement park. A hinge (no reference number) is provided on the front side of, for example, the left end of the outer frame 2, and the base door 3 is supported on this hinge. In this way, it is possible to rotate the base door 3 forward relative to the outer frame 2 with the hinge as an axis.

The outer frame 2 must be strong to support many components, such as the payout unit 8, board unit 9, display device 7, game board unit 10, glass door 4, and tray unit 5, via the base door 3. On the other hand, there is a demand for larger display device 7 (see FIG. 2) and game board unit 10 to enhance the presentation effect. For this reason, by constructing the outer frame 2 from, for example, a thin metal plate, it is possible to increase the size of the display device 7 and game board unit 10 while maintaining high strength. In particular, if the outer frame 2 is made of aluminum, it is possible to reduce the weight.

(Base door)
The base door 3 has, for example, a dispensing unit 8 and a base unit 9 attached to its back side and supports these.

A game board unit 10 is fitted onto the front side of the base door 3. In addition, hinges (not referenced) are provided at the top end, the middle part below the vertical center, and the bottom end, for example on the front side of the left end of the base door 3, and the glass door 4 is journaled on the hinges at the top end and the middle part, and the plate unit 5 is journaled on the hinges at the middle part and the bottom end. In this way, the glass door 4 and the plate unit 5 can be rotated forward, either together or individually, relative to the base door 3, with the hinges as an axis.

The launcher 6 is fixedly attached, for example, to the lower right side of the front surface of the base door 3, and speakers 32 (see FIG. 2) are fixedly attached, for example, to the left and right of the upper side. The speakers 32 output, for example, sound effects of characters displayed on the display device 7, music, sound effects, audio notifications, error notifications, and other sound effects.

Furthermore, a locking device (not shown) is provided on the side of the base door 3 opposite the hinge (i.e., the right end). This locking device has the function of locking the base door 3 to the outer frame 2 and locking the glass door 4 to the base door 3.

(Glass door)
The glass door 4 is a frame-shaped member in which an opening 41 is formed. A transparent protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2) is attached to the opening 41 from the rear side. When the glass door 4 is closed to the base door 3, the protective glass 43 faces a game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later) formed in the game board unit 10. In this way, when the glass door 4 is closed to the base door 3, the game area 105 can be viewed from the front, and game balls flowing down the game area 105 can be prevented from flying out forward.

The protective glass 43 may be made of multiple pieces of glass (e.g., two pieces) attached with a gap between them, or multiple pieces of glass may be unitized with a gap between them. Furthermore, if the protective glass 43 is unitized, a light guide plate, for example, may be provided between the pieces of glass. The protective glass 43 is not limited to being made of glass, and may be made of, for example, transparent resin.

In addition, an operation unit 66 is provided at the bottom of the glass door 4, which can be operated by, for example, a player to receive a gaming information service (for example, "Unimemo (registered trademark)"). This operation unit 66 can also function as an operation unit that can be operated by an arcade manager or the like on the hall menu screen.

A speaker cover 45 is provided on the top of the glass door 4, located in front of the speaker 32. A large number of LED groups 46 used for light-emitting effects and the like are arranged around the periphery of the opening 41 of the glass door 4, and an LED cover is provided in front of these LED groups 46. Strictly speaking, the reference numeral 46 shown in Figs. 1 and 2 is an LED cover, but for convenience, it will be described as an LED group 46. The LED group 46 is, for example, a light-emitting means for use in light announcements and light-emitting effects in various variations, but is not limited to LEDs as long as it can perform such light-emitting effects and the like, and may be, for example, liquid crystal or a lamp.

(Dish unit)
The dish unit 5 is a unit consisting of an upper dish 51 and a lower dish 52. The dish unit 5 is located at the front lower part of the base door 3, below the glass door 4. As described above, the dish unit 5 is configured to be rotated relative to the base door 3 to open and close, so that, for example, when balls become jammed, an amusement arcade staff member can clear the jam. Note that the dish unit 5 does not necessarily have to have an upper dish 51 and a lower dish 52, and may be configured as an integrated dish.

The upper tray 51 is provided so that game balls can be stored therein, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 51 are launched from the launching device 6 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described below). The upper tray 51 is provided with a payout outlet 53 and a performance button 54. Game balls to be lent out or paid out as prize balls are paid out from the payout outlet 53 to the upper tray 51. The performance button 54 is what is called a "CHANCE button" or "push button". The performance button 54 may have a predetermined performance function in addition to an operation function operated by a player. An example of the predetermined performance function is a function to vibrate or protrude upward based on the result of a process to determine whether a special symbol has been hit. It may also serve the function of the operation unit 66.

The lower tray 52 is primarily intended to store game balls that have spilled over from the upper tray 51. The lower tray 52 is provided with a payout outlet 55 that communicates with the upper tray 51, and game balls that have spilled over from the upper tray 51 are paid out from the payout outlet 55 to the lower tray 52.

An opening (no reference number) is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 52, which can be opened and closed by the player. When the opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 52 is opened, the game balls stored in the lower tray 52 can be transferred to a ball box placed below the lower tray 52. If a so-called per-machine counting system is installed on each machine, not only is the ball box unnecessary, but the game balls counted by the per-machine counting system can be stored and the stored game balls can be used again for play.

(Launch device)
The launching device 6 is for launching the game balls stored in the upper tray 51 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later). The launching device 6 is disposed in the lower right front portion of the base door 3 and below the right of the tray unit 5. The launching device 6 includes a panel body 61, a drive unit (not shown), and a launching handle 62.

The panel body 61 is arranged so that when the plate unit 5 is closed relative to the base door 3, the plate unit 5 and the launching device 6 fixedly attached to the base door 3 appear integrated in appearance.

The launch handle 62 is configured to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise, and is disposed on the front side of the panel body 61. The drive device is disposed on the back side of the panel body 61, and is configured, for example, by a launch solenoid (not shown). When the player operates the launch handle 62, the game ball is launched by the operation of the drive device. Note that when operating the launch handle 62, the greater the amount of clockwise rotation (amount of operation), the stronger the launch strength of the game ball.

The game balls launched from the launching device 6 located at the lower right of the dish unit 5 roll in an arc along the guide rail 110 (see FIG. 4 described below) via the launching rail (not shown) and are launched into the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described below). The location of the launching device 6 is not limited to the lower right of the dish unit 5, but may be the lower left of the dish unit 5. In this case, the launching rail is not necessary, and the area below the glass door 4 can be effectively utilized, making it possible to increase versatility.

(Display Device)
The display device 7 (see FIG. 2) has a display area for displaying various effect images related to the game, and is attached so that the display area faces the opening of the game panel 100. The display device 7 may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, a 7-segment display device, a dot matrix display device, a display device composed of electroluminescence, or may be a device that projects images using a projection device such as a projector. In the display area of the display device 7, for example, an effect identification pattern (for example, a decorative pattern) is variably displayed to display the result of a hit determination process of a special pattern, an effect image according to the result of a hit determination process of a special pattern, an effect image during a big win game state, a demo effect image, an effect image showing the pending status of the variable display of a special pattern, etc. are displayed. In this embodiment, the display device 7 is attached to the game board unit 10, but the display device 7 may be attached to the base door 3 as long as the display area of the display device 7 is arranged to face the opening of the game panel 100.

In this embodiment, one display device 7 is provided to display the various performance images described above, but multiple display devices (e.g., two) may be provided and the performance images may be displayed using these multiple display devices.

(Payout unit)
The payout unit 8 (see Figures 2 and 3) is disposed on the rear side of the base door 3, and is composed of a ball passage 81, a payout device 82, etc. Game balls are supplied to the ball passage 81 from a storage tank 80 (see Figures 2 and 3). Game balls are supplied to the storage tank 80 from an island facility (not shown). When a payout condition is met, the payout device 82 pays out a predetermined number of game balls from the game balls supplied to the ball passage 81 from the storage tank 80, for example, to the upper tray 51. In addition, a power switch 95 is provided on the rear side of the payout unit 8, as shown in Figure 3.

(Board unit)
The board unit 9 (see Figs. 2 and 3) is disposed on the rear side of the base door 3. The board unit 9 is provided with various control boards and the like.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, the board unit 9 is provided with a main control board 91 on which a main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6 described below) is mounted, a sub-control board 92 on which a sub-control circuit 300 (see FIG. 6 described below) is mounted, a payout/launch control board 93 on which a payout/launch control circuit 400 (see FIG. 6 described below) that controls the payout/launch of game balls is mounted, and a power supply board on which a power supply circuit 450 (see FIG. 6 described below) that supplies power is mounted.

For the sake of convenience, in FIG. 3, the main control board 91, the sub-control board 92, the payout/launch control board 93, and the power supply board 94 are indicated by reference numerals, but all of these boards are housed in a board case.

In addition, in this embodiment, the sub-control board 92 is configured as a one-board board (a board on which one control LSI or multiple LSIs are provided). However, this is not limited to this, and the sub-control board 92 may be configured with multiple boards, for example, by making all or part of the display control circuit 304, audio control circuit 305, LED control circuit 306, and role control circuit 307 (all of which are shown in FIG. 6, described below) separate boards.

[1-1-2. Game board unit]
4 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 10 included in the first pachinko game machine. A game area 105 is formed on the front side of the game board unit 10, in which the launched game balls can roll and flow down.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board unit 10 mainly includes a game panel 100 in which a game area 105 is formed in which a launched game ball can roll down, a guide rail 110, a center role 115 located approximately in the center of the game area 105, a first starting hole 120, a general winning hole 122, a passing gate unit 125, a special electric role unit 130, a second starting hole 140, a normal electric role unit 145, an LED unit 160, an outlet 178, and a back unit (not shown) located behind the game board unit 10. As mentioned above, the LED unit 160 will be described later.

(Game panel)
An opening (no reference number) is formed in the gaming panel 100 at a position facing the display area of the display device 7. A guide rail 110 is provided on the front surface of the gaming panel 100, and gaming pegs (no reference number) and the like are planted therein. A gaming ball launched from the launching device 6 (see Figs. 1 and 2) flies out from the guide rail 110 toward the gaming area 105, collides with the gaming pegs, etc., and flows downward below the gaming area 105 while changing its direction of travel.

In addition, a back unit (not shown) with decorative bodies is disposed behind the gaming panel 100 to enhance the presentation effect. The gaming panel 100 is constructed of transparent resin so that the decorative bodies on the back unit can be seen when viewed from the front. In this case, the entire gaming panel 100 may be constructed of transparent materials, or, for example, only the parts of the gaming panel 100 where the decorative bodies on the back unit can be seen when viewed from the front may be constructed of transparent materials. In addition, the gaming panel 100 may be constructed of materials that do not have transparent parts (for example, wood), and transparent materials may be provided in some parts to enhance the presentation effect.

In this embodiment, the gaming panel 100 is made of transparent resin so that the rear unit can be seen from the front, but the entire gaming panel 100 may be made transparent, or only a portion of it may be made transparent.

(Guide rail)
The guide rail 110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (both of which have no reference numerals). The play area 105 is defined by the guide rail 110. The outer rail and the inner rail have the function of guiding the game balls launched from the launching device 6 (see FIG. 6 described later) to the upper part of the play area 105.

(Center role)
The center device 115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference number) of the game panel 100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 116 at its upper portion. Game balls launched toward the game area 105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 116.

In this first pachinko gaming machine, the area of the gaming area 105 to the left of the center role 115 is referred to as the left area 106, and the area to the right of the center role 115 is referred to as the right area 107. The definitions of the left area and the right area are the same for the second and third pachinko gaming machines described below.

A game ball launched by the launching device 6 toward the game area 105 flows down the left area 106 or the right area 107. A game ball flowing down the left area 106 or the right area 107 changes direction as it flows downward due to collision with game pegs or the like planted in the game panel 100. If the amount of operation of the launching handle 62 (see Figures 1 and 2) is small, the launched game ball flows down the left area 106. On the other hand, if the amount of operation of the launching handle 62 (see Figure 1) is large, the launched game ball flows down the right area 107.

In this specification, the manner in which the launch handle 62 is operated (hitting style) is referred to as a "left hit" when the game ball is launched so that it flows down the left side area 106, and as a "right hit" when the game ball is launched so that it flows down the right side area 107. In this way, the player can choose to hit the game ball toward either the left side area 106 or the right side area 107.

The center device 115 also has a warp entrance 117 formed on the outer periphery on the left side, through which game balls flowing down the left area 106 can enter. Game balls that enter the warp entrance 117 are configured to be guided to a stage 118 formed in the center device 115. The stage 118 is formed in front of the lower edge of the display area of the display device 7 so that the game balls can roll in the left-right direction. The stage 118 may be formed in multiple stages, such as an upper stage and a lower stage, for example.

A chance entrance 119 through which game balls can enter is formed at the rear of the stage 118, approximately in the center in the left-right direction, and game balls that enter the chance entrance 119 are configured to be released directly above the first start entrance 120. Therefore, game balls that enter the chance entrance 119 have a higher probability of entering (passing through) the first start entrance 120 than game balls that do not enter the warp entrance 117, or game balls that enter the warp entrance 117 but do not enter the chance entrance 119.

(First starting point)
The first starting hole 120 is disposed below the display area of the display device 7, and is disposed so that a game ball hit from the left can win (a game ball hit from the right has difficulty or is impossible to win). When a game ball wins in the first starting hole 120, it is detected by a first starting hole switch 121 (see FIG. 6 described later). It is also possible that a game ball hit from the right can win in the first starting hole 120. Also, instead of or in addition to the above-mentioned first starting hole 120, a first starting hole that allows a game ball hit from the right to win (a game ball hit from the left has difficulty or is impossible to win) may be provided.

When the first start hole switch 121 (see FIG. 6 described later) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the first start hole 120, various data related to the first special symbol (for example, various random numbers such as a random number value for determining a big win of the first special symbol, a random number value for the symbol of the first special symbol, a random number value for determining the reach of the first special symbol, and a random number value for selecting the performance of the first special symbol) are extracted, and the extracted various data are stored up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). When the start condition of the first special symbol (also referred to as the "variation start condition of the first special symbol" in this specification) is established, the stored various data is used for the hit determination process of the first special symbol. When a game ball enters the first start hole 120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 120 is not limited to this.

In this specification, the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 120 is referred to as the starting entry of the first special pattern, and various data related to the first special pattern (for example, various random number values such as the random number value for determining a jackpot for the first special pattern, the pattern random number value for the first special pattern, the random number value for determining reach for the first special pattern, and the random number value for selecting effects for the first special pattern) are referred to as the starting information of the first special pattern. In addition, storing the starting information of the first special pattern until the starting conditions are met is referred to as holding. The same applies to the second special pattern.

(General prize entry)
The general winning openings 122 are arranged in a plurality of general winning openings 122 at the lower left of the display area of the display device 7, and are arranged so that a game ball hit from the left can win a prize (a game ball hit from the right has difficulty or cannot win a prize). When a game ball wins in any of the general winning openings 122, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described later).

When the general prize opening switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described below) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the general prize opening 122, for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the general prize opening 122 is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 122 is positioned so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit from the right to win, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the general winning opening 122 described above, a general winning opening through which a game ball hit from the right can win may be provided.

(Passing gate unit)
The pass gate unit 125 is located in the right area 107 and is a unit that integrates a pass gate 126 that is configured to allow almost all game balls hit to the right to pass through, and a pass gate switch 127 (see Figure 6 described below) that detects the passage of the game ball through the pass gate 126.

When the passing gate switch 127 detects the passage of a gaming ball through the passing gate 126, various data related to the normal symbols (e.g., random number values for determining whether the normal symbols are winning) are extracted, and the extracted various data are stored up to a predetermined number (e.g., up to four). The stored various data are used in the process of determining whether the normal symbols are winning. Note that even if the passing gate switch 127 detects the passage of a gaming ball through the passing gate 126, no prize balls are paid out. The passing gate unit 125 may be located in the left area 106 instead of or in addition to the right area 107.

In this specification, the passage of the gaming ball through the passing gate 126 is referred to as a start passing, and various data related to the normal symbol extracted by the passing of the gaming ball through the passing gate 126 (for example, a random number value for determining whether the normal symbol is a winning symbol, etc.) is referred to as the start information of the normal symbol. In addition, storing the start information of the normal symbol until the start condition is met is referred to as holding.

(Special electric feature unit)
The special electric device unit 130 is a unit body that integrates a big winning opening 131, a count switch 132 (see FIG. 6 described later) that detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the big winning opening 131, and a special electric device 133. The special electric device unit 130 is disposed below the passing gate unit 125 in the right side area 107.

The large prize opening 131 is arranged so that game balls hit from the right can win (game balls hit from the left have difficulty or difficulty winning). However, this is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the large prize opening 131 described above, a large prize opening that can win game balls hit from the left may be arranged, or a large prize opening that can win game balls may be arranged above the center gimmick 115.

The large prize opening 131 is an opening that is opened to allow a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) to enter (pass through) when the game is controlled to a large win game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. When the count switch 132 (see FIG. 6 described below) detects the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 131, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 131 is not limited to 10.

The special electric device 133 includes a special electric shutter 134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 135 (see FIG. 6 described later) that operates the special electric shutter 134. The special electric device 133, i.e., the special electric shutter 134, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for game balls to enter (pass) through the large prize opening 131, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for game balls to enter (pass) through the large prize opening 131. In addition, in the big win game state, the transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. In other words, the big win game state is a game state in which a large number of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the large prize opening 131 transitions from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period over multiple rounds.

(Second starting hole)
The second starting hole 140 is disposed in the left area 106 (more specifically, below the left side of the first starting hole 120). However, the second starting hole 140 is configured such that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit from the left to win, for example, due to game pins, etc., and a game ball hit from the right is guided to the vicinity of the second starting hole 140 so that it can win. However, it is not essential to configure the second starting hole 140 in this way, and it may be provided in the right area 107, for example. The second starting hole 140 may also be configured such that a game ball hit from the left can win.

When the second start hole switch 141 (see FIG. 6 described later) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the second start hole 140, various data related to the second special symbol (for example, various random numbers such as a random number value for determining a big win of the second special symbol, a random number value for the symbol of the second special symbol, a random number value for determining the reach of the second special symbol, and a random number value for selecting the performance of the second special symbol) are extracted, and the extracted various data are stored up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). When the start condition of the second special symbol (also referred to as the "variation start condition of the second special symbol" in this specification) is established, the stored various data is used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol. When a game ball enters the second start hole 140, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 140 is not limited to this.

(Normal electric role unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 145 is disposed in the left area 106 (more specifically, below the left side of the first starting hole 120), and is a unit body that integrates a winning hole through which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters (passes through) the winning hole, a switch that detects the entry of the game ball into the winning hole, and the normal electric accessory 146. In this embodiment, the winning hole is the second starting hole 140, and the switch is the second starting hole switch 141.

The normal electric device 146 includes a normal power movable member 147, which is a so-called electric chute and is made of, for example, a blade member, and a normal power solenoid 148 (see FIG. 6 described below) that operates the normal power movable member 147. The normal electric device 146, i.e., the normal power movable member 147, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the second start hole 140, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second start hole 140. The normal power movable member 147 includes blade types, door types, protruding plate types, etc.

(Outlet)
The outlet 178 is for discharging game balls that have been shot toward the game area 105 but have not won any of the various winning ports (e.g., the first starting port 120, the second starting port 140, the big winning port 131, the general winning port 122, etc.) to the outside of the machine. This outlet 178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 105 so that both game balls hit from the left and game balls hit from the right can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned outlet 178, an outlet may be provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between multiple general winning ports 122, so that game balls flowing down the game area 105 can be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(Back unit)
The back unit (not shown) is for decorating the game board unit 10, and is provided on the rear side of the transparent game panel 100. This back unit includes a group of performance-use props 58 (see FIG. 6 described later) such as movable props controlled by the sub-control circuit 300. The group of performance-use props 58 is arranged, for example, around the display area of the display device 7. At least one of the props or prop-use prop component members constituting the props among the group of performance-use props 58 functions as a performance-use prop that can be operated based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol.

[1-1-3. LED unit]
The LED unit 160 is disposed in the lower right portion of the game board unit 10, outside the play area 105 (see FIG. 4, for example). The LED unit 160 is a unit body that integrates various display sections.

Figure 5 is an example of a front view showing the LED unit 160 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 5, the LED unit 160 includes a normal symbol display section 161, a normal symbol hold display section 162, a first special symbol display section 163, a second special symbol display section 164, a first special symbol hold display section 165, a second special symbol hold display section 166, a probability change notification display section 167, and a time-saving notification display section 168.

(Normal pattern display section)
The normal symbol display unit 161 displays the result of the normal symbol winning judgment process, and includes normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b. When the conditions for starting the variable display of the normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as the "normal symbol starting conditions") are met, the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b start to alternately turn on and off to start the variable display of the normal symbol. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display of the normal symbol started, the variable display of the normal symbol stops, and the result of the normal symbol winning judgment process is derived.

When the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the combination of the lighting and extinguishing of the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b becomes a specific stop display mode. For example, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the normal symbol display LED 161a lights up and the normal symbol display LED 161b turns off. On the other hand, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a miss, for example, the normal symbol display LED 161a turns off and the normal symbol display LED 161b lights up. However, the stop display mode of the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b that indicate the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is not limited to this. Then, when the normal symbol is displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is decided to operate the normal electric role 146, and the normal electric movable member 147 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, making it easier for the game ball to enter (pass through) the second starting hole 140.

(Regular pattern reserved display section)
The reserved display unit 162 for normal symbols displays the number of reserved variable displays of normal symbols (hereinafter referred to as the "reserved number of normal symbols") when the start information of the normal symbols, i.e., the variable display, is reserved, and is equipped with reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b for normal symbols. The above "variable display of normal symbols is reserved" refers to the state from when the passage of the game ball through the passing gate 126 is detected and various data related to the normal symbols (for example, random number values for determining whether the normal symbols are hit, etc.) are extracted until the start condition of the normal symbols is established. The start condition of the normal symbols is established when at least the following is satisfied: the normal symbols are not being variable displayed, and the variable display of the normal symbols is reserved.

The normal symbol reserved display unit 162 displays the number of reserved normal symbols by a combination of the on/off state of the normal symbol reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b. For example, when the number of reserved normal symbols is one, the normal symbol reserved display LED 162a is lit and the normal symbol reserved display LED 162b is turned off. When the number of reserved normal symbols is two, both the normal symbol reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b are lit. When the number of reserved normal symbols is three, the normal symbol reserved display LED 162a flashes and the normal symbol reserved display LED 162b is lit. When the number of reserved normal symbols is four, both the normal symbol reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b flash. However, the display mode of the normal symbol reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b, which indicate the number of reserved normal symbols, is not limited to this.

(Special design display section)
The special symbol display unit displays the result of the special symbol winning determination process, and includes a first special symbol display unit 163 and a second special symbol display unit 164. The first special symbol display unit 163 includes a first special symbol display LED group consisting of, for example, eight LEDs 163a to 163h. Similarly, the second special symbol display unit 164 includes a second special symbol display LED group consisting of, for example, eight LEDs 164a to 164h.

When the conditions for starting the variable display of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as the "initiation conditions for the first special symbol") are met, the variable display of the first special symbol begins, in which all or some of the eight LEDs 163a-163h that make up the first special symbol display unit 163 alternately or mutually turn on and off. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display of the first special symbol began, the variable display of the first special symbol stops, and the result of the winning determination process for the first special symbol is derived.

If the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot, the combination of on/off of the eight LEDs 163a-163h that make up the first special symbol display section 163 will be a specific stop display mode. Then, when the first special symbol display section 163 is displayed as stopped in a specific stop display mode, a transition to a jackpot game state is determined.

When the conditions for starting the variable display of the second special pattern (hereinafter referred to as the "start condition of the second special pattern") are met, the variable display of the second special pattern is started in which all or some of the eight LEDs 164a to 164h that make up the second special pattern display unit 164 alternately or mutually turn on and off. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display of the second special pattern was started, the variable display of the second special pattern stops, and the result of the winning determination process for the second special pattern is derived.

If the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a jackpot, the combination of on/off of the eight LEDs 164a-164h that make up the second special symbol display section 164 will be a specific stop display mode. Then, when the second special symbol display section 164 is displayed as stopped in a specific stop display mode, a transition to a jackpot game state is determined.

(Special design reserved display section)
The special pattern reserve display unit displays the number of reserved special pattern variable displays (hereinafter referred to as the "reserved number of special patterns") when start information for a special pattern, i.e., a variable display, is reserved, and is provided with a first special pattern reserve display unit 165 and a second special pattern reserve display unit 166.

The first special symbol reserved display unit 165 displays the number of reserved first special symbols when the variable display of the first special symbol is reserved, and is equipped with first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a, 165b. "The variable display of the first special symbol is reserved" refers to the state from when the entry (passage) of the game ball into the first start hole 120 is detected and the start information of the first special symbol is extracted, until the start condition of the first special symbol is established.

The first special symbol reserved display unit 165 displays the number of reserved symbols of the variable display of the first special symbol by a combination of the lighting and extinguishing of the first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b. For example, when the number of reserved symbols of the first special symbol is one, the first special symbol reserved display LED 165a is lit and the first special symbol reserved display LED 165b is extinguished. When the number of reserved symbols of the first special symbol is two, both the first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b are lit. When the number of reserved symbols of the first special symbol is three, the first special symbol reserved display LED 165a flashes and the first special symbol reserved display LED 165b is lit. When the number of reserved symbols of the first special symbol is four, both the first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b flash. However, the display mode of the first special pattern reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b, which indicate the reserved number of first special patterns, is not limited to this.

The second special symbol reserved display unit 166 displays the number of reserved second special symbols when the variable display of the second special symbol is reserved, and is equipped with second special symbol reserved display LEDs 166a, 166b. "Variable display of the second special symbol is reserved" refers to the state from when the entry (passage) of the game ball into the second start hole 140 is detected and the start information of the second special symbol is extracted, until the start condition of the second special symbol is established.

The second special symbol reserved display unit 166 displays the number of reserved symbols of the variable display of the second special symbol by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the second special symbol reserved display LEDs 166a and 166b. For example, when the number of reserved symbols of the second special symbol is one, the second special symbol reserved display LED 166a is lit and the second special symbol reserved display LED 166b is extinguished. When the number of reserved symbols of the second special symbol is two, both the second special symbol reserved display LEDs 166a and 166b are lit. When the number of reserved symbols of the second special symbol is three, the second special symbol reserved display LED 166a flashes and the second special symbol reserved display LED 166b is lit. When the number of reserved symbols of the second special symbol is four, both the second special symbol reserved display LEDs 166a and 166b flash. However, the display mode of the second special pattern reserved display LEDs 166a and 166b, which indicate the reserved number of second special patterns, is not limited to this.

(Display unit for probability change notification)
The probability change notification display unit 167 can be turned on while the probability change control described below is being executed, and is composed of, for example, an LED or a lamp.

The probability change notification display unit 167 may be lit while probability change control is being executed, but it may also be configured not to light up so that it is not possible to tell from the outside that probability change control is being executed, thereby concealing the fact that probability change control is being executed.

However, when the power is cut off while the special rate control is being executed, the data indicating that the special rate control is being executed is not lost due to the function of the backup capacitor 207 described below. Therefore, if the power is cut off while the special rate control is being executed and then turned on, the special rate notification display unit 167 lights up in a manner that allows the user to know from the outside that the special rate control is being executed.

Even if whether or not the special rate control is being executed is kept secret before the power is cut off, when the power is turned on, the special rate control display unit 167 is turned on so that it is possible to know that the special rate control is being executed.

(Time-saving notification display unit)
The time-saving notification display unit 168 can be turned on while the time-saving control described below is being executed, and is configured with, for example, an LED or a lamp.

In this embodiment, the time-saving notification display unit 168 has, for example, a first time-saving notification display unit 168a and a second time-saving notification display unit 168b, but the number of time-saving notification display units 168 is not limited to this.

As will be described in detail later, the time-saving play state includes time-saving play state A, time-saving play state B, and time-saving play state C. And, for example, it is configured so that it is possible to know which time-saving play state is being used by the combination of lighting or extinguishing of the first time-saving notification display unit 168a and the second time-saving notification display unit 168b.

The time-saving notification display unit 168 may light up the first time-saving notification display unit 168a and/or the second time-saving notification display unit 168b depending on the time-saving control being executed, but may be turned on or off in a manner that makes it impossible to know from the outside whether or not time-saving control is being executed or the type of time-saving control being executed (for example, all lights off, all lights on, or a manner unrelated to the time-saving control being executed), thereby concealing the fact that time-saving control is being executed or the type of time-saving control being executed. In particular, while it may be possible to know from the outside whether or not time-saving control is being executed, it may be difficult to know from the outside which time-saving control is being executed, so by concealing the type of time-saving control being executed, it is possible to increase interest.

However, when the power supply is cut off while time-saving control is being executed, due to the function of the backup capacitor 207 described below, not only the data indicating that time-saving control is being executed, but also the data indicating the type of time-saving control being executed is not lost. Therefore, if the power supply is cut off while time-saving control is being executed and then the power supply is turned on again, the time-saving notification display unit 168 turns on or off in a manner that allows the user to know from the outside that time-saving control is being executed and the type of time-saving control being executed.

Even if the fact that time-saving control is being executed and the type of time-saving control being executed are concealed so that they cannot be seen from the outside before the power is cut off, when the power is turned on, the time-saving notification display unit 168 is configured to turn on and/or turn off in a manner that allows the fact that time-saving control is being executed and the type of time-saving control being executed to be seen from the outside.

[1-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 6. Fig. 6 is an example of a block diagram showing the control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 6, the first pachinko game machine is mainly composed of a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 300 that controls the presentation according to the progress of the game, a payout/launch control circuit 400, and a power supply circuit 450.

[1-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 200 controls, for example, processes executed when the power is turned on and processes related to game operations, and is equipped with a main CPU 201, a main ROM 202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 203 (read/write memory), an initial reset circuit 204, and a backup capacitor 207, and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

The main CPU 201 is connected to a main ROM 202, a main RAM 203, an initial reset circuit 204, etc. The main CPU 201 has built-in functions such as a watchdog timer (WDT) that monitors operation and a function for preventing fraud.

The main ROM 202 stores programs for controlling the operation of the first pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 201, various tables, etc. The main CPU 201 has the function of executing various processes according to the programs stored in the main ROM 202.

The main RAM 203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game. This main RAM 203 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 201. Note that, although in this embodiment, RAM is used as the temporary storage area for the main CPU 201, this is not limiting and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

The initial reset circuit 204 monitors the main CPU 201 and outputs a reset signal when necessary.

The backup capacitor 207 has the function of temporarily supplying power to prevent data stored in the main RAM 203 from being lost in the event of a power outage, etc.

The main control circuit 200 also includes an I/O port 205 that is connected to various devices and other devices so as to be able to communicate with each other, and a command output port 206 that is connected to the sub-control circuit 300 so as to be able to output various commands to the sub-control circuit 300.

In addition, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 200. For example, the above-mentioned normal symbol display unit 161, normal symbol reserved display unit 162, first special symbol display unit 163, second special symbol display unit 164, first special symbol reserved display unit 165, second special symbol reserved display unit 166, probability change notification display unit 167, time reduction notification display unit 168, normal power solenoid 148, and special power solenoid 135 are connected to the main control circuit 200. In addition to these, the performance display monitor 170 and error notification monitor 172 are also connected to the main control circuit 200. The main control circuit 200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals via the I/O port 205.

The performance display monitor 170 displays performance display data and setting values (described later) under the control of the main CPU 201. The performance display data is data that indicates, for example, the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state for a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 60,000 balls) shot, and is also called a base value.

The error notification monitor 172 displays an error code. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 172 can also display a setting change code indicating that a setting change process is in progress, a setting confirmation code indicating that a setting confirmation process is in progress, etc., in the case of a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, which will be described later. Note that the setting change code may be configured to display a symbol that is not normally displayed as a special symbol (for example, a setting change symbol indicating that a setting change is in progress).

The main control circuit 200 is also connected to the first start port switch 121, the second start port switch 141, the pass gate switch 127, the count switch 132, and the general winning port switch 123. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is output to the main control circuit 200 via the I/O port 205.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 200 is connected to a calling device (not shown) having functions such as calling a hall attendant and displaying the number of jackpots, an external terminal board 184 used to send data to a hall computer 186 that manages the pachinko machines in the hall, a setting key 174 that is operated to change or check the setting value in the case of a pachinko machine with a setting function described later, and a backup clear switch 176 that can clear the backup data stored in the main RAM 203 in response to the operation of the gaming center manager. In this embodiment, the backup clear switch 176 also serves as a switch for changing the setting value described later, but is not limited to this, and a setting switch for changing the setting value may also be provided.

The setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are preferably housed in a specified case so that they cannot be easily touched by third parties (e.g., players) other than the arcade manager. "Inside a specified case" does not only mean a case in which the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also a case in which notches are provided only at the locations corresponding to the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176, so that the arcade manager can touch the setting key 174 and/or the backup clear switch 176 when the pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the arcade manager to expose the back.

In this embodiment, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are connected to the main control circuit 200, but this is not limited thereto, and they may be configured to be connected to the payout/launch control circuit 400 or the power supply circuit 450, for example. In this case, too, it is preferable to prevent third parties other than the arcade manager from easily touching the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176.

[1-2-2. Sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 300 includes a sub-CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, a sound control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, a role control circuit 307, and a command input port 308. The sub-control circuit 300 executes effects according to the progress of the game in response to commands from the main control circuit 200. Although not shown in Fig. 6, the sub-control circuit 300 is also connected to effect buttons 54 (see Fig. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 302 stores programs for controlling the game presentation of the first pachinko game machine by the sub-CPU 301, various tables, etc. The sub-CPU 301 has the function of executing various processes according to the programs stored in the program ROM 302. In particular, the sub-CPU 301 controls the game presentation according to various commands sent from the main control circuit 200.

The work RAM 303 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub-CPU 301.

The display control circuit 304 is a circuit for controlling the display of the display device 7. The display control circuit 304 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM in which data for generating various types of image data is stored, a frame buffer for temporarily storing image data, a D/A converter for converting image data into an image signal, and the like.

The display control circuit 304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 7 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command from the sub-CPU 301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 7 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data showing decorative patterns, background image data, and performance image data.

Then, the display control circuit 304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 7 at a predetermined timing. When the image signal is supplied to the display device 7, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 7. In this way, the display control circuit 304 can control the display device 7 to display images related to the game.

The audio control circuit 305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 32. The audio control circuit 305 includes a sound source IC for controlling the audio, an audio data ROM for storing various types of audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as an AMP) for amplifying the audio signal, and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speaker 32. In response to a sound generation command from the sub-CPU 301, the sound source IC selects one piece of sound data from multiple pieces of sound data stored in the sound data ROM. The sound source IC also reads the selected sound data from the sound data ROM, converts the sound data into a specified sound signal, and supplies the converted sound signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as sound and sound effects output from the speaker 32.

The LED control circuit 306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 46, which includes decorative LEDs. The LED control circuit 306 includes a drive circuit for supplying LED control signals, a decoration data ROM in which multiple types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The reel control circuit 307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each reel (for example, one or more reels among the group of performance reels 58). The reel control circuit 307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each reel, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and a reel data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored.

The reel control circuit 307 selects one of the multiple operation patterns stored in the reel data ROM in response to a reel operation command from the sub-CPU 301. The selected operation pattern is then read from the reel data ROM, and a drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is then supplied to control the mechanical operation of each reel. The lighting circuit selects one of the multiple lighting patterns stored in the reel data ROM in response to a lighting command from the sub-CPU 301. The selected lighting pattern is then read from the reel data ROM, and a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern is then supplied to control the lighting operation of each reel.

The command input port 308 is connected to the command output port 206 and receives various commands sent from the main control circuit 200.

[1-2-3. Payout/launch control circuit]
The payout/launch control circuit 400 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls, and is connected to a payout device 82 capable of paying out game balls, a launch device 6 capable of launching game balls, a card unit 180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like.

When the payout/launch control circuit 400 receives a prize ball control command sent from the main control circuit 200, it sends a specified signal to the payout device 82 and controls the payout device 82 to pay out game balls.

The card unit 180 is connected to a ball lending operation panel 182. The ball lending operation panel 182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending, and a loan/return button for receiving the return of a ball lending card on which cache data is stored (neither is shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a loan ball control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 180. The payout/launch control circuit 400 controls the payout device 82 to pay out game balls based on the loan ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 180. The operation panel 182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 180 side.

In addition, when the launch handle 62 is rotated clockwise, the payout/launch control circuit 400 supplies power to a launch solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (amount of rotation) and controls the launch of the game ball.

[1-2-4. Power supply circuit]
The power supply circuit 450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required during play to the main control circuit 200, the sub control circuit 300, the payout/launch control circuit 400, etc.

The power supply circuit 450 is connected to a power switch 95 and other components. The power switch 95 is turned on when the necessary power is to be supplied to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 300, the payout/launch control circuit 400, etc.).

[1-3. Game flow]
Next, an example of a game flow will be described with reference to Fig. 7 and Fig. 8. Fig. 7 is an example of a game flow. Fig. 8 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of a game state. Note that the game flow shown in Fig. 7 is not a control flow, but a flow that can be grasped from the outside.

As shown in FIG. 7, in a pachinko game, a game ball is launched by a user operation such as a player, and when the game ball enters one of the various winning holes (for example, the first starting hole 120, etc.), a payout control process for the game ball is performed. Pachinko games include a "special symbol game" using a special symbol and a "normal symbol game" using a normal symbol. The special symbol game is, for example, a game in which a hit determination process for a special symbol is performed based on the winning of a game ball into the starting hole 120, 140, and whether or not to transition to a jackpot game state is determined. The normal symbol game is, for example, a game in which a hit determination process for a normal symbol is performed based on the passage of a game ball through the passing gate 126, and whether or not to open the winning hole (in this embodiment, the second starting hole 140) by operating the normal electric role 146 is determined. In this specification, "special symbol games" are sometimes referred to as "games," but "games" is a term used in a broad sense, and for example, normal symbol games and games with effects that use operation units such as the effect button 54 (see, for example, Figure 1) are also included in "games."

In addition, in this specification, one special pattern game is defined as the period from when the variable display of the special pattern begins until this variable display ends and the result of the special pattern hit determination process is definitively displayed (derived) (more specifically, until the special pattern determination time has passed). However, if the game is controlled to a big hit game state after the result of the special pattern hit determination process is derived, one special pattern game is defined as the period until the end of the big hit game state. Note that in the first pachinko game machine, small hits are not included in the result of the special pattern hit determination process, but in the pachinko game machine in which small hits are included in the result of the special pattern hit determination process, one special pattern game is defined as the period until the end of the small hit game state after the result of the special pattern hit determination process is derived and the game is controlled to a small hit game state.

When a stop display mode indicating a jackpot in a special symbol game is output to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164, the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. In the jackpot game state, a round game is executed in which the special electric device 133 is operated to keep the jackpot winning hole 131 open for a predetermined time (for example, up to 30,000 msec), and the possibility of winning in the jackpot winning hole 131 is relatively increased.

In addition, when a stop display mode indicating a normal symbol win is output to the normal symbol display unit 161 in a normal symbol game, the normal electric device 146 is activated to open the winning hole (for example, the second starting hole 140 in this embodiment), and the possibility of winning through the second starting hole 140, for example, is relatively increased.

The games that can be played in a pachinko game are not limited to special symbol games and normal symbol games, and new games other than these may also be playable.

The following provides an overview of the game flow for special symbol games and regular symbol games.

[1-3-1. Special symbol game]
As shown in Figure 7, the special pattern game mainly includes a special pattern start winning process which is carried out when there is a winning (passing through) of the first start port 120 or the second start port 140, and a special pattern control process which is carried out based on the establishment of the start conditions for the special pattern.

When a game ball enters the first start hole 120 or the second start hole 140, a special symbol start winning process is performed. In this special symbol start winning process, various data related to the special symbol (e.g., various random number values such as a random number value for determining a jackpot, a random number value for a pattern, a random number value for determining a reach, and a random number value for selecting a performance) are extracted (obtained) from various counters for the special symbol (e.g., a counter for determining a jackpot, a counter for determining a pattern, etc.). Each extracted random number value is reserved as start information. This special symbol start winning process is performed even when the special symbol control process is being executed.

In addition, in the special symbol control process, it is determined whether or not the start conditions for the special symbol are met. When the start conditions for the special symbol are met, a special symbol hit determination process is performed to determine whether or not there is a "jackpot" by referring to the random number value for jackpot determination extracted from the special symbol's jackpot determination counter. After that, a stop symbol determination process is performed to determine the stop symbol. In the stop symbol determination process, the special symbol to be stopped is determined by referring to the random number value for pattern determination extracted from the special symbol's pattern determination counter and the result of the special symbol hit determination process.

In this embodiment, if the probability variable flag is on, the probability variable control is executed. In the hit determination process for the special symbol described above, if the probability variable flag is off, it is determined to be a "jackpot" with a relatively low probability, and if the probability variable flag is on, it is determined to be a "jackpot" with a relatively high probability. Hereinafter, in this specification, the probability of being determined to be a "jackpot" is referred to as the "jackpot probability."

The high probability flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 203, and is a flag for managing whether or not high probability control is executed. When the high probability flag is on, the game proceeds in a game state in which high probability control is executed (for example, in this embodiment, a high probability time-saving game state). On the other hand, when the high probability flag is off, the game proceeds in a game state in which high probability control is not executed (for example, a normal game state or a low probability time-saving game state).

Next, a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol is performed. In this process, a random number is extracted from the variation pattern determination counter, and the variation pattern of the special symbol (variable display pattern) is determined by referencing the random number, the result of the special symbol winning judgment process described above, and the special symbol to be stopped and displayed as described above. Then, a process for controlling the variable display of the special symbol is performed based on the result of the special symbol variation pattern determination process.

Once the variation pattern of the special symbols is determined, a presentation pattern determination process is then performed to determine the presentation pattern. Then, based on the results of the presentation pattern determination process, presentation control process is performed for display presentation such as decorative symbols and character presentations displayed in the display area of the display device 7, and sound presentation such as voice and sound effects output from the speaker 32. The presentation control process is performed by the sub-CPU 301.

Then, when the special pattern variable display control process and presentation control process are completed and a jackpot has been hit, a jackpot game control process is carried out. The jackpot game control process is a process executed in the jackpot game state. When the jackpot game state ends, the special pattern game ends, and a game state transition control process to a non-jackpot game state is carried out. In this case, the game state transitions depending on the type of jackpot. For example, if the jackpot type is one in which both the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag are set to on, a transition to a high-probability time-saving game state occurs after the jackpot game state ends.

On the other hand, if there is no big win, i.e., if it is a miss, the special symbol game ends. Note that in the first pachinko gaming machine, the result of the special symbol hit determination process does not include a small win, but in pachinko gaming machines in which the result of the special symbol hit determination process includes a small win, a small win game control process is performed when a small win is won. Also, if there is no big win but a time-saving hit, which will be described later, the game will transition to a time-saving game state.

Then, each time the conditions for starting the special symbol are met, the various processes of the special symbol control process described above are repeated.

If a game ball enters the start hole 120, 140 during the special symbol control process, the special symbol start entry process is executed. In addition, the start information of the special symbol extracted when the game ball enters the start hole 120, 140 (for example, various data such as random numbers for determining a jackpot, a symbol random number for the special symbol, a random number for reaching a target, and a random number for selecting a performance) is held until the start condition of the special symbol is met.

In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, a maximum of eight pieces of start information for special patterns can be reserved, consisting of four pieces of start information for the first special pattern and four pieces of start information for the second special pattern, but the number of start information for special patterns that can be reserved is not limited to this. For example, more start information for the first special pattern may be reserved than start information for the second special pattern, or more start information for the second special pattern may be reserved than start information for the first special pattern.

Also, although not shown in FIG. 7, a look-ahead determination (see, for example, S396 in FIG. 52 described below) may be made between the start of the special symbol and the establishment of the start condition of the special symbol, to determine whether or not a "jackpot" has been won and the change pattern prior to the hit determination process of the special symbol based on the start information extracted when the game ball enters (passes) the start hole 120, 140, and a look-ahead performance function may be provided to perform a predetermined performance based on the result of this look-ahead determination. Note that the look-ahead determination may be made before or after the start information extracted by the game ball entering the start hole 120, 140 is reserved.

[1-3-2. Normal symbol game]
As shown in FIG. 7, the normal pattern game mainly includes a normal pattern start passing process which is carried out when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126, and a normal pattern control process which is carried out based on the establishment of the normal pattern start condition.

When a game ball passes through the passing gate 126, a normal symbol start passing process is executed. In this normal symbol start passing process, start information for the normal symbol (e.g., a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is a hit) is extracted (obtained) from the winning determination counter for the normal symbol, and the extracted start information is reserved.

In addition, in the normal symbol control process, the main CPU 201 judges whether or not the start condition for the normal symbol has been met. When starting the variable display of the normal symbol, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit judgment random number value extracted from the hit judgment counter for the normal symbol, executes the normal symbol hit judgment process to determine whether or not the "normal symbol hit" has occurred, and then executes the variation pattern determination process. In this process, the result of the normal symbol hit judgment process is referred to, and the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined.

Next, the main CPU 201 refers to the result of the winning judgment process for the normal symbol and the determined variation pattern of the normal symbol, and executes a variable display control process that controls the variable display of the normal symbol, and a performance control process that performs a predetermined performance. Note that there are cases in which the performance control process is not executed.

Then, when the variable display control process and the performance control process of the normal symbol are completed, the main CPU 201 judges whether or not a normal winning symbol indicating a "normal winning symbol" has been derived to the normal symbol display unit 161 (see FIG. 5 and FIG. 6). When it is judged that a stop display mode indicating a normal winning symbol has been derived, the main CPU 201 executes a normal symbol winning game control process. In this normal symbol winning game control process, the normal electric device 146 (see FIG. 4) is operated, and the winning hole (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting hole 140 (see FIG. 4)) is opened so that the winning ball can enter (pass through) the winning hole or the opening state is easily opened. On the other hand, when it is judged that a stop display mode indicating a normal winning symbol has not been derived, the main CPU 201 does not execute the normal symbol winning game control process and ends the normal symbol control process.

In addition, in a game state where the time-saving control is not executed (for example, a normal game state), the probability that a stop display mode indicating a normal win will be derived may be set to 0. The time-saving control corresponds to at least one of the following controls: special symbol shortening control, which shortens the variable display time of the special symbol, and electric support control, which operates the normal electric role device 146 to increase the frequency with which the winning port (for example, the second starting port 140 (see FIG. 4) in this embodiment) is opened, compared to when the time-saving control is not executed. This time-saving control may be a control that performs both the special symbol shortening control and the electric support control, or a control that performs only one of the special symbol shortening control and the electric support control.

The electric support control is a control that improves the time-saving performance of at least one of the winning probability of a "normal pattern hit", the variable display time of the normal pattern, and the opening pattern of the normal electric device 146 (number of openings, opening time, wait time). The time-saving performance is a performance that changes the ease of a game ball entering a winning hole (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting hole 140 (see FIG. 4)), and refers to the winning probability of a "normal pattern hit", the variable display time of the normal pattern, and/or the opening pattern of the normal electric device 146 (number of openings, opening time, wait time, etc.). In addition, improving the time-saving performance means, for example, making it easier for a game ball to enter a winning hole (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting hole 140 (see FIG. 4)). In other words, when electric support control is executed, the winning probability of a "normal symbol hit" increases, the variable display time of the normal symbol is shortened, and/or winning is made easier with the normal electric device 146 (increasing the number of times it opens, extending the opening time, shortening the wait time, etc.) compared to when electric support control is not executed.

Then, each time the normal symbol start conditions are met, the various processes of the normal symbol control process described above are repeated.

When the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 during the normal symbol control process, the normal symbol start passing process is executed. In addition, the start information of the normal symbol (for example, a random number value for determining whether the normal symbol is a hit, etc.) extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 is held until the start condition of the normal symbol is met.

The variable display of normal symbols will start in the order they were reserved, and when the start conditions for the normal symbols are met, the variable display will be performed for the earliest reserved start information for the normal symbols.

The method for extracting various random numbers (for example, the random number value for determining whether the first special symbol is a jackpot, the design random number value for the first special symbol, the random number value for determining whether the first special symbol is in reach, the random number value for determining whether the second special symbol is a jackpot, the design random number value for the second special symbol, the random number value for determining whether the second special symbol is in reach, and the random number value for determining whether the normal symbol is in reach, etc.) may be a soft random number method that generates random numbers within a predetermined range (width) by executing a program by the main CPU 201, or a hard random number method that extracts random numbers from a counter in a random number generator in which random numbers are updated at a predetermined cycle.

[1-3-3. Game state transition]
As shown in FIG. 8, the game state can be roughly divided into a non-jackpot game state and a jackpot game state. In the non-jackpot game state, the special symbol game is executed as described above, and when a jackpot is derived as a result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, the game state transitions from the non-jackpot game state to the jackpot game state. In the jackpot game state, the round game is executed as described above, and the variable display of the special symbol is not executed. However, the variable display of the normal symbol can be executed even in the jackpot game state. Note that the explanation of the small jackpot game state will be omitted.

Non-jackpot game states can be broadly divided into low-probability states in which the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol hit determination process is relatively low, and high-probability game states in which the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol hit determination process is relatively high.

The high probability game state includes a high probability time-saving game state (high probability, high base) in which time-saving control is executed. Note that, although not included in the high probability game state in the first pachinko game machine, a high probability non-time-saving game state (high probability, low base state) in which time-saving control is not executed may also be included in the high probability game state, as shown in FIG. 8.

The low probability state includes a normal game state (low probability, low base) in which time-saving control is not executed, and a time-saving game state (low probability, high base) in which time-saving control is executed.

Furthermore, the time-saving play state includes time-saving play state A, time-saving play state B, and time-saving play state C.

The A time-saving game state is a time-saving game state to which a player can transition after a specific jackpot game state ends, and the A time-saving game state ends when a specified number of special symbol games are played or when a transition to the jackpot game state occurs. When the A time-saving game state ends due to a specified number of special symbol games being played, the game will generally transition to the normal game state.

The B time-saving game state is a time-saving game state to which a player can enter when, for example, a jackpot game state ends and the variable display of special symbols begins in a non-high probability game state (i.e., a game state in which the probability flag is off), or when the number of times the special symbols are variable displayed (e.g., a ceiling counter) reaches a ceiling value (e.g., 1,000 times), starting from when the RAM is cleared (described below). The B time-saving game state ends when a specified number of special symbol games are played or when a transition is made to the jackpot game state. When the B time-saving game state ends as a result of a specified number of special symbol games being played, the game will generally transition to the normal game state.

The time-saving C game state is a time-saving game state that can be entered when the result of the special symbol hit determination process performed in the low probability state is a "time-saving hit" and the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived, and the time-saving C game state ends when a specified number of special symbol games determined by winning the "time-saving hit" are played or when a transition is made to a jackpot game state. When the time-saving C game state ends by playing the specified number of special symbol games, as a general rule, a transition is made to a normal game state. Note that, for example, if multiple time-saving game states overlap, even if the specified number of special symbol games are played, the time-saving C game state continues rather than transitioning to a normal game state.

In this specification, whether or not multiple time-saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner, the time-saving game states are said to "overlap" when the transition conditions to the time-saving game state are satisfied in the time-saving game state, or when the transition conditions to multiple time-saving game states are satisfied simultaneously. When multiple time-saving game states overlap, the main CPU 201 internally operates all of the overlapping time-saving game states, that is, operates the overlapping time-saving game states internally in parallel, which is called "executing them in an overlapping manner." However, even if the main CPU 201 internally executes multiple time-saving game states in an overlapping manner, the time-saving control that is actually executed is only the time-saving control that corresponds to one of the time-saving game states. In other words, even if multiple time-saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner, the player will understand that the game is controlled to one of the multiple time-saving game states.

Next, we will explain how the game state changes.

Even if the game is controlled in the normal game state, the time-saving game state (time-saving game state A, time-saving game state B, time-saving game state C), or the high-probability game state (for example, the high-probability time-saving game state), if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a jackpot, the game will transition to the jackpot game state.

When the jackpot game state ends, depending on the game specifications, it is possible to transition to any of the following game states: normal game state, time-saving game state, and high-probability game state (e.g. high-probability time-saving game state). However, the time-saving game state to which you can transition when the jackpot game state ends is limited to the A time-saving game state.

When controlled to a high probability game state, there is no transition from the high probability game state to a time-limited game state or a normal game state, except for some pachinko game machines such as so-called ST machines and loop machines. Similarly, there is no transition from the time-limited game state or the normal game state to the high probability game state unless the jackpot game state is passed through.

When controlled to the normal game state, it is possible to transition to the time-saving game state B or time-saving game state C, but it is not possible to transition to the time-saving game state A without passing through the jackpot game state. However, when a specified number of special symbol games are played in the time-saving game state A, the game transitions to the normal game state, so it is possible to transition from the time-saving game state A to the normal game state. Note that, regardless of whether the game is controlled to the time-saving game state B or time-saving game state C, the game transitions to the normal game state when a specified number of special symbol games are played, so it is also possible to transition from the time-saving game state B or time-saving game state C to the normal game state.

Next, we will explain how to transition between time-saving play states.

When controlled in the time-saving game state A, the number of time-saving plays that can be performed in the time-saving game state A is set to a number less than the ceiling value, which is the transition condition for the time-saving game state B, so there is no transition from the time-saving game state A to the time-saving game state B. Also, since the time-saving game state A is controlled via the jackpot game state, there is no transition from the time-saving game state B to the time-saving game state A. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol in the time-saving game state A is a "time-saving hit," the transition condition for the time-saving game state C is met, so the time-saving game state A and the time-saving game state C may overlap. However, as described above, since the time-saving game state A is controlled via the jackpot game state, there is no transition from the time-saving game state C to the time-saving game state A.

When controlled to the B time-saving game state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the condition for transitioning to the C time-saving game state is met, and the B time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state may overlap. Also, if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state, the C time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state may overlap.

When controlled to the C time-saving play state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the condition for transitioning to the C time-saving play state is met, and the C time-saving play state and the C time-saving play state may overlap.

More details about overlapping time-saving game modes will be provided later.

[1-4. Basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the first pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. 9 to FIG.

The first pachinko game machine is provided with a normal game state in which neither probability variable control nor time-saving control is executed, a high-probability time-saving game state in which both probability variable control and time-saving control are executed, and a low-probability time-saving game state in which probability variable control is not executed but time-saving control is executed, and the main CPU 201 is capable of progressing the game in any of these game states. However, the game states progressed under the control of the main CPU 201 are not limited to these.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, hitting to the left is considered to be the regular game mode, and in the high-probability time-saving game state and the low-probability time-saving game state, hitting to the right is considered to be the regular game mode. The sub-CPU 301 executes control to display the hitting method considered to be the regular game mode, for example, in the display area of the display device 7. Note that the "regular game mode" corresponds to the game mode that is the least disadvantageous to the player (the most advantageous to the player) among multiple game modes (for example, firing modes).

[1-4-1. Jackpot Probability for Each Setting Value]
9 is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (estimate) for each setting value in the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in Fig. 9, in the first pachinko gaming machine, the setting key 174 or the backup clear switch 176 (see Fig. 6) can be used to set one of a number of settings, for example, settings 1 to 6. In the case of such a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, the jackpot probability differs depending on the setting value, and the main CPU 201 executes a special symbol winning judgment process based on the set setting value.

Specifically, the probability of winning in a game state where the probability variable flag is off and the probability variable control is not executed (for example, in the normal game state and the low probability time-saving game state in this embodiment), regardless of whether the first special symbol hit determination process or the second special symbol hit determination process is executed, is, for example, about 1 in 319 in setting 1, about 1 in 314 in setting 2, about 1 in 309 in setting 3, about 1 in 304 in setting 4, about 1 in 299 in setting 5, and about 1 in 294 in setting 6. In addition, the probability of winning in a game state where the probability variable flag is on and the probability variable control is executed (for example, in the high probability time-saving game state in this embodiment), is about 1 in 77 in setting 1, about 1 in 76 in setting 2, about 1 in 75 in setting 3, about 1 in 74 in setting 4, about 1 in 73 in setting 5, and about 1 in 72 in setting 6.

The probability of a time-saving hit is the same for all settings, unlike the probability of a jackpot. For example, the probability of a time-saving hit when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is executed is 1 in 160, and the probability of a time-saving hit when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is executed is 1 in 240. The probability of a time-saving hit may be different when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is executed and when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is executed, or it may be the same.

However, even if the probability of a time-saving hit is the same for all setting values, the time-saving continuation rate (e.g., the number of time-saving times set) may be different depending on the setting value. For example, if the result of the hit determination process for the special pattern is a "time-saving hit," the number of time-saving times may be set to 50 for setting 1, and 100 for setting 6.

In the first pachinko game machine, small wins are not included in the lottery, but small wins may be included in the lottery. When small wins are included in the lottery, the small win probability may be set to a common probability for all setting values. When small wins are included in the lottery, a small win may be won only when a hit determination process for one of the first special pattern and the second special pattern (e.g., the second special pattern) is performed. In this case, the hit determination process for the other special pattern (e.g., the first special pattern) may not determine whether or not a small win has been won, or may determine whether or not a small win has been won with the small win probability set to 0.

The probability of winning the time-saving bonus and the probability of winning a small bonus when the bonus is included in the lottery are the same for all setting values as described above, but are not limited to this and may be different depending on the setting value.

In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability is different for each setting value, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the jackpot probability may be the same for multiple setting values, such as a common jackpot probability for setting 1 and setting 2, a common jackpot probability for setting 3 and setting 4, and a common jackpot probability for setting 5 and setting 6.

In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot differs depending on the setting value, but if the degree of advantage for the player differs depending on the setting value, the target that differs depending on the setting value is not necessarily limited to the probability of winning a jackpot. For example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state when a gaming ball enters a specific winning hole, the probability of winning a prize in the specific winning hole may be made to differ depending on the setting value. Note that it is not essential that the pachinko gaming machine be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function.

[1-4-2. Special symbol winning judgment table]
10 is an example of a special symbol winning judgment table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol winning judgment table shown in FIG. 10 is an example of the case of setting 1 shown in FIG.

The special symbol winning judgment table is a table referenced in the winning judgment process for the special symbol, that is, a table referenced when determining by lottery whether a "time-saving win", "jackpot", or "miss" is to be obtained based on the random number value for jackpot judgment extracted when a game ball enters the starting hole 120, 140. In this embodiment, the objects to be selected are "time-saving win", "jackpot", and "miss", and other objects to be selected (e.g., small win) are not included, but other objects to be selected may be determined when a game ball enters the first starting hole 120 and/or the second starting hole 140.

As described above, the random number value for determining a jackpot is a random number value used in the process of determining whether or not a special symbol has won. In this embodiment, the random number value for determining a jackpot is selected from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 determines "time-saving hit", "jackpot", or "miss" based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination in the hit determination process for the first special symbol. The hit determination table for the first special symbol specifies, for each value of the probability change flag (0 or 1), the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as "time-saving hit" and the corresponding time-saving hit determination value data, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot determination value data, and the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as "miss" and the corresponding miss determination value data.

In this specification, when the value of the probability change flag is "0", the probability change flag is off, and when the value of the probability change flag is "1", the probability change flag is on.

In addition, in the hit determination process for the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 determines whether the result is a "time-saving hit", "jackpot", or "miss" based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination, just as in the hit determination process for the first special symbol. In the hit determination table for the second special symbol, for each value of the probability change flag (0 or 1), the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as a "time-saving hit" and the corresponding time-saving hit determination value data, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot determination value data, and the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as a "miss" and the corresponding miss determination value data are specified.

In this embodiment, for example, if the probability variable flag is off during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 0 to 408, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit" and determines the hit/loss determination value data as "time-saving hit determination value data." Also, if the probability variable flag is off during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 409 to 613, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and determines the hit/loss determination value data as "jackpot determination value data." Also, if the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 614 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "miss" and determines the determination value data as "miss determination value data."

For example, if the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 0 to 408, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit" and determines the determination value data as "time-saving hit determination value data." If the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 409 to 1259, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and determines the determination value data as "jackpot determination value data." If the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 1260 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "miss" and determines the determination value data as "miss determination value data."

Similarly, for example, if the probability variable flag is off during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 0 to 272, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit" and determines the determination value data as "time-saving hit determination value data." Also, if the probability variable flag is off during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 273 to 477, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and determines the determination value data as "jackpot determination value data." Furthermore, if the probability variable flag is off during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 478 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "miss" and determines the determination value data as "miss determination value data."

For example, if the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 0 to 272, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit" and determines the determination value data as "time-saving hit determination value data." If the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 273 to 1123, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and determines the determination value data as "jackpot determination value data." If the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 1124 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "miss" and determines the determination value data as "miss determination value data."

In this embodiment, for example, of the random numbers for determining a jackpot that are generated in the range of 0 to 65535, a predetermined range from 0 (for example, 0 to 408 for the hit determination process of the first special symbol) is assigned to other determination value data (for example, time-saving hit determination value data) excluding the jackpot determination value data and the miss determination value data. Also, the end of the predetermined range (for example, 614 to 65535 if the probability variable flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol) is assigned to the miss determination value data. Furthermore, the jackpot determination value data and the miss determination value data are assigned adjacent to each other. By doing this, for example, when the probability variable flag goes from off to on (or on to off), it is possible to change the jackpot probability without changing the range of other determination value data (for example, time-saving hit determination value data) by simply narrowing (or widening) the width of the miss determination value data by the amount that the width of the jackpot determination value data is widened (or narrowed).

In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of winning the "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed is made different from the probability of winning the "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed, thereby adding variety to the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 10, by making the probability of winning a "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed higher than the probability of winning a "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the normal game state, which tends to become monotonous.

However, the probability of winning the "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed may be made higher than the probability of winning the "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed. In this case, for example, by executing the time-saving play state in a overlapping manner when a "time-saving hit" is won during a time-saving play state, if a "time-saving hit" is won just before the end of the time-saving play state, the time-saving play state is effectively extended, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest.

As shown in FIG. 10, in this embodiment, a "time-shortened win" can be won whether the special chance flag is on or off. However, when the special chance flag is off (normal game state, time-shortened game state), the main CPU 201 controls the game to the time-shortened game state if the result of the win determination process is a "time-shortened win", but when the special chance flag is on, the main CPU 201 does not control the game to the time-shortened game state even if the result of the win determination process is a "time-shortened win".

[1-4-3. Special symbol determination table]
FIG. 11 shows an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is a table that is referenced when selecting a "select symbol command" and a "symbol designation command" that determine the stopped symbol based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball enters the starting hole 120, 140 and the aforementioned determination value data. The "select symbol command" is a command for designating the winning symbol determined according to the type of jackpot when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, and the "symbol designation command" is a command for designating the symbol that is displayed when the variable display of the special symbol stops. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 selects, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 69, the main CPU 201 selects "z0" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Also, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any of 70 to 96, the main CPU 201 selects "z1" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Also, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any of 97 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z2" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 0 and 9, the main CPU 201 selects "z3" as the selected symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 10 and 59, the main CPU 201 selects "z4" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 60 and 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z5" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, if loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the winning determination process for the first special symbol, regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z6" as the selected symbol command and "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, 0 to 96, the main CPU 201 selects "z7" as the selected symbol command and "zA6" as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, any of 97 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z8" as the selected symbol command and "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 0 and 59, the main CPU 201 selects "z9" as the selected symbol command and "zA8" as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 60 and 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z10" as the selected symbol command and "zA9" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, if loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the winning determination process for the second special symbol, regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z11" as the selected symbol command and "zA10" as the symbol designation command.

In this embodiment, the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 10) is referenced to determine the hit/lose determination value data based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination, and then the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 11) is referenced to determine the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, but this is not limited to this. For example, the hit/lose of the special symbol, the selected symbol command, and the symbol designation command may be determined together based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination and the symbol random number value of the special symbol.

[1-4-4. Special symbol stop mode determination table]
12A is an example of a special symbol stop mode determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table is referenced when determining the stop mode of the special symbol to be output to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164 (see FIG. 5) when the variable display of the special symbol stops, in response to the selected symbol command.

As shown in FIG. 12(A), the stopping mode of the special symbol output to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 (see FIG. 5) is composed of a 1-byte control signal composed of areas 0 to 7, for example. Each of the areas 0 to 7 of the first special symbol corresponds one-to-one to one of the eight LEDs 163a to 163h (see FIG. 5) that compose the first special symbol display unit 163. For example, area 0 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163a, area 1 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163b, area 2 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163c, area 3 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163d, area 4 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163e, area 5 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163f, area 6 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163g, and area 7 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163h.

Similarly, each of the areas 0 to 7 of the second special symbol corresponds one-to-one to one of the eight LEDs 164a to 164h (see FIG. 5) that make up the second special symbol display unit 164. For example, area 0 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164a, area 1 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164b, area 2 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164c, area 3 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164d, area 4 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164e, area 5 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164f, area 6 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164g, and area 7 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164h.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the display mode (time-saving hit display mode) of the LEDs output to the special symbol display units 163, 164 is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0," the main CPU 201 determines to stop displaying the first special symbol display unit 163 by turning on LED 163a corresponding to area 0 of the first special symbol and LED 163h corresponding to area 7 of the first special symbol, among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163, and turning off the other LEDs. When the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 201 determines to display the first special symbol display unit 163 in a stopped state by turning on the LED 163a corresponding to the area 0 of the first special symbol, the LED 163b corresponding to the area 1 of the first special symbol, and the LED 163h corresponding to the area 7 of the first special symbol, among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163, and turning off the other LEDs. When the selected symbol command is "z2", the main CPU 201 determines to display the first special symbol display unit 163 in a stopped state by turning on the LED 163a corresponding to the area 0 of the first special symbol, the LED 163c corresponding to the area 2 of the first special symbol, and the LED 163h corresponding to the area 7 of the first special symbol, among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163, and turning off the other LEDs. Also, when the selected symbol command is "z7", the main CPU 201 determines to display the second special symbol display unit 164 in a stopped state by turning on the LED 164a corresponding to the second special symbol area 0, the LED 164b corresponding to the second special symbol area 1, and the LED 164h corresponding to the second special symbol area 7, among the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164, and turning off the other LEDs. When the selected symbol command is "z8", the main CPU 201 determines to display the second special symbol display unit 164 in a stopped state by turning on the LED 164a corresponding to the second special symbol area 0, the LED 164c corresponding to the second special symbol area 2, and the LED 164h corresponding to the second special symbol area 7, among the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164, and turning off the other LEDs.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot," the display mode (jackpot display mode) of the LEDs output to the special symbol display units 163, 164 is determined as follows. For example, if the selected symbol command is "z3," the main CPU 201 determines that the first special symbol display unit 163 should be displayed in a stopped state such that, of the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163, LED 163d corresponding to area 3 of the first special symbol, LED 163e corresponding to area 4 of the first special symbol, and LED 163g corresponding to area 6 of the first special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z4", the main CPU 201 determines to display the first special symbol display unit 163 in a stopped state by turning on the LED 163d corresponding to the first special symbol area 3, the LED 163f corresponding to the first special symbol area 5, and the LED 163g corresponding to the first special symbol area 6, among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163, and turning off the other LEDs. When the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 201 determines to display the first special symbol display unit 163 in a stopped state by turning on the LED 163d corresponding to the first special symbol area 3, the LED 163e corresponding to the first special symbol area 4, the LED 163f corresponding to the first special symbol area 5, and the LED 163g corresponding to the first special symbol area 6, among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163, and turning off the other LEDs. When the selected symbol command is "z9", the main CPU 201 determines to display the second special symbol display unit 164 in a stopped state by turning on the LED 164d corresponding to the second special symbol area 3, the LED 164e corresponding to the second special symbol area 4, and the LED 164g corresponding to the second special symbol area 6, among the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164, and turning off the other LEDs. When the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 201 determines to display the second special symbol display unit 164 in a stopped state by turning on the LED 164d corresponding to the second special symbol area 3 and the LED 164f corresponding to the second special symbol area 5, among the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164, and turning off the other LEDs.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "miss," the display mode of the LEDs (miss display mode) output to the special symbol display units 163, 164 is determined as follows. For example, if the selected symbol command is "z6," the main CPU 201 determines to display the first special symbol display unit 163 in a stopped state with only LED 163h corresponding to area 7 of the first special symbol out of the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163 lit and the other LEDs turned off. If the selected symbol command is "z11," the main CPU 201 determines to display the second special symbol display unit 164 in a stopped state with only LED 164h corresponding to area 7 of the second special symbol out of the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164 lit and the other LEDs turned off.

When the main CPU 201 determines the stopping mode of the special pattern based on the result of the special pattern winning judgment process, it outputs a control signal corresponding to the determined mode to each LED constituting the first special pattern display unit 163 or the second special pattern display unit 164, and controls the stopping mode of the special pattern output to the first special pattern display unit 163 or the second special pattern display unit 164.

In FIG. 12(A), for convenience, the display mode of the LEDs led to the first special symbol display unit 163 and the display mode of the LEDs led to the second special symbol display unit 164 are shown in the same table. However, it is preferable that the control signals are transmitted separately for the first special symbol display unit 163 and the second special symbol display unit 164.

Figure 12 (B) is an example of a decorative symbol stop mode determination table stored in the program ROM of the sub-control circuit 300 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine. The decorative symbol stop mode determination table is referenced when determining the stop mode (symbol combination) of the decorative symbols derived when the variable display of the decorative symbols displayed on the display device 7 stops in response to a symbol designation command. Note that the "Notes" column shown in Figure 12 (B) is shown for convenience to make it easier to understand.

In the first pachinko gaming machine, since only one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed, the sub-CPU 1301 controls the display device 7 to perform a display effect for the variably displayed special symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, it is preferable for the sub-CPU 301 to perform the display effect in a manner that allows the player to know whether the variably displayed special symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

In this embodiment, the decorative symbols displayed on the display device 7 are, for example, nine symbols 1 to 9 on the left, ten symbols 1 to 9 and a time-saving symbol on the middle, and nine symbols 1 to 9 on the right. The time-saving symbol is a symbol that is displayed as a stop when the game state transitions to a time-saving game state, for example, when the result of a special symbol lottery is a time-saving hit. By displaying the middle symbol as a time-saving symbol, the player can know that he or she has won the time-saving hit. In this embodiment, odd symbols are defined as symbols that are more advantageous to the player than even symbols, but this is not limited to this.

In the first pachinko game machine, the result of the special pattern lottery does not include a small win, but if the result of the special pattern lottery includes a small win, for example, the patterns that make up the middle pattern may include a small win pattern (a pattern that stops and is displayed when the result of the special pattern lottery is a small win). In this case, if the result of the special pattern lottery is a small win, the sub-CPU 301 stops and displays the middle pattern as a small win pattern, so that the player can know that he or she has won a small win.

As shown in FIG. 12(B), when the symbol designation command is "zA1" or "zA6" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "time-saving hit"), the sub-CPU 301 stops the decorative symbols, for example, by stopping the left and right symbols as even-numbered symbols and stopping the center symbol as a time-saving symbol.

When the symbol designation command is "zA2" or "zA7" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "time-saving hit"), the sub-CPU 301 stops the left and right symbols as odd symbols and stops the center symbol as a time-saving symbol as the stopping mode of the decorative symbols, for example. Note that when the symbol designation command is "zA2" or "zA7" (when the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8"), as can be seen by referring to FIG. 13 described below, the number of time-saving times set is greater than when the symbol designation command is "zA1" or "zA6" (when the selected symbol command is "z0", "z1", or "z7"), and the degree of advantage for the player is high.

When the symbol designation command is "zA3" or "zA8" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "jackpot"), the sub-CPU 301 stops the decorative symbols, for example, by stopping the left symbol, right symbol, and center symbol in a matching odd-numbered pattern (double number).

When the symbol designation command is "zA4" or "zA9" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "jackpot"), the sub-CPU 301 stops the left symbol, right symbol, and center symbol as the stopping mode of the decorative symbols, for example, when the even number symbols are aligned (double number). Note that, as can be seen by referring to FIG. 13 described later, when the symbol designation command "zA4" is used, after the end of the jackpot game state, there are cases where the probability variable flag is set on (when the selected symbol command is "z4") and cases where the probability variable flag is not set on (when the selected symbol command is "z5"). Therefore, in this embodiment, whether the selected symbol command is "z4" or "z5", the sub-CPU 301 controls the decorative symbols to stop when the even number symbols are aligned (double number), and in the jackpot game state, it is preferable to perform a promotion performance indicating that it is a probability variable hit (a hit where the probability variable flag is set on).

Also, as can be seen by referring to FIG. 13 described below, when the symbol designation command is "zA4" or "zA9", the expected value of the probability ...

When the symbol designation command is "zA5" or "zA10" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "miss"), the sub-CPU 301 stops the decorative symbols in a scattered pattern. A scattered pattern corresponds to, for example, a stopping mode in which at least one of the left, right, and center symbols is different from the other symbols.

Figure 12 (B) shows an example of the stopping mode of the decorative pattern according to the pattern designation command (for example, when the pattern designation command is "zA1", the left pattern is "2", the middle pattern is "time saving", and the right pattern is "4"), but the stopping modes shown in the decorative pattern stopping mode column in Figure 12 (B) are merely examples and are not limited to these.

[1-4-5. Winning Type Determination Table]
13 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the first pachinko game machine. The winning type determination table is referred to when determining the mode of the big win game state (more specifically, for example, the number of rounds) or/and the mode of the subsequent game state according to the selection symbol command determined in response to the symbol random number value of the special symbol. The mode of the subsequent game state indicates the mode of the game state after the big win game state ends. However, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a time-saving hit, the game state is controlled to the C time-saving game state without being controlled to the big win game state, so the mode of the subsequent game state indicates the mode of the C time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the mode of the C time-saving game state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0," the main CPU 201 decides to set only the time-saving flag of the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag to on, and decides to set the number of time-saving times to 10. When the selected symbol command is "z1" or "z7," the main CPU 201 decides to set only the time-saving flag of the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag to on, and decides to set the number of time-saving times to 50. When the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8," the main CPU 201 decides to set only the time-saving flag of the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag to on, and decides to set the number of time-saving times to 100. If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the main CPU 201 derives the display mode of the above-mentioned time-saving hit to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164, and then sets the time-saving flag on and the determined number of time-saving times without controlling to the jackpot game state, and can control to the C time-saving game state. Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the game is not controlled to the jackpot game state, so the mode of the jackpot game state is not determined. Note that in this embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the number of time-saving times set is the same regardless of the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed. However, this is not limited to this, and the number of time-saving times set may be different depending on the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the number of time-saving turns that is set varies depending on the selected symbol command that is determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol. By doing this, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," it is possible to provide variety to the progress of the game thereafter, and to prevent a decline in interest.

As described above, when the probability variable flag is on, the main CPU 201 does not control to the time-saving game state even if the result of the hit determination process is a "time-saving hit." For example, even if the probability variable flag is on (high probability game state), the main CPU 201 may draw a "time-saving hit" as shown in FIG. 10, and when the result of the hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the main CPU 201 may derive a time-saving hit display mode indicating that a "time-saving hit" has been won on the special pattern display units 163, 164, but may continue the high probability game state without controlling to the C time-saving game state.

The main CPU 201 may also draw a "time-saving hit" when the probability-changing flag is on, and forcibly derive a losing display mode to the special symbol display sections 163 and 164 even if the result of the hit determination process is a "time-saving hit."

Furthermore, when the probability variable flag is on, the time-saving hit determination value data is not assigned to the random number value for jackpot determination, i.e., a hit determination process may be performed that does not include "time-saving hit" in the lottery result (the result of the hit determination process for the special pattern). In this case, when the probability variable flag is off, the time-saving hit determination value data is assigned to the random number value for jackpot determination, and when the probability variable flag is on, the time-saving hit determination value data is not assigned. Therefore, the range of random numbers that was assigned to the time-saving hit determination value data when the probability variable flag is off is assigned to miss determination value data, jackpot determination value data, or both miss determination value data and jackpot determination value data, instead of the time-saving hit determination value data.

In this embodiment, when the probability variable flag is on, the game is configured not to transition to the C time-saving game state, but this is not limited to this. For example, in a pachinko game machine that can be controlled to a high-probability non-time-saving game state in which the time-saving flag is off even if the probability variable flag is on, the game may be configured to transition to a high-probability time-saving game state when the result of the hit determination process is a "time-saving hit."

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot," the winning game state and the subsequent game state are determined as follows:

For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3" or "z9", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state to be 10 rounds. In addition, as the mode of the subsequent game state, it determines to set both the high probability flag and the time-saving flag on, and determines to set both the number of high probability rounds and the number of time-saving rounds to 10,000. In these cases, the main CPU 201 controls the game state to a jackpot game state after deriving the display mode of the jackpot described above to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, and after the jackpot game state ends, it becomes possible to control the game state to a high probability time-saving game state.

In addition, when the selected symbol command is "z4", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state to be 4 rounds. In addition, as the mode of the subsequent game state, it determines to set both the high probability flag and the time-saving flag on, and determines to set both the number of high probability rounds and the number of time-saving rounds to 10,000. In this case, the main CPU 201 controls the game state to a jackpot game state after deriving the display mode of the jackpot described above to the first special symbol display unit 163, and after the end of this jackpot game state, it becomes possible to control the game state to a high probability time-saving game state.

Furthermore, when the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state to be 4 rounds. Furthermore, as the mode of the subsequent game state, it determines that only the time-saving flag out of the probability change flag and the time-saving flag is set to on. It also determines that the number of time-saving times to be set is set to, for example, 200 times. In this case, the main CPU 201 controls the jackpot game state after deriving the display mode of the jackpot described above to the first special symbol display unit 163, and after the jackpot game state ends, it becomes possible to control it to the time-saving game state. The time-saving game state controlled here is the A time-saving game state.

Furthermore, when the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state to be 10 rounds. Furthermore, as the mode of the subsequent game state, it determines that only the time-saving flag out of the probability change flag and the time-saving flag is set to on. It also determines that the number of time-saving times to be set is set to, for example, 300 times. In this case, the main CPU 201 controls the jackpot game state after deriving the display mode of the jackpot described above to the second special symbol display unit 164, and after the jackpot game state ends, it becomes possible to control it to the time-saving game state. The time-saving game state controlled here is also the A time-saving game state.

It is preferable that the time-saving performance in the high-probability time-saving game state is the same as the time-saving performance in the A time-saving game state, but it may be different from the time-saving performance in the A time-saving game state.

Also, for example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss" (for example, if the selected symbol command is "z6" or "z11"), the main CPU 201 does not set either the state of the big win game state or the state of the game state thereafter. In other words, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, the main CPU 201 does not change the game state, but continues to control the game state up to that point.

Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss" (for example, if the selected symbol command is "z6" or "z11"), neither the state of the jackpot game state nor the state of the subsequent game state is set as described above, so there is no need to illustrate this in the hit type determination table of FIG. 13. However, in this embodiment, for the sake of convenience, it is illustrated in FIG. 13 to clearly show that neither the state of the jackpot game state nor the state of the subsequent game state is determined when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss".

Thus, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol hit determination table of Fig. 10, determines the hit/lose determination value data based on the jackpot determination random number value extracted when the game ball enters the first start hole 120 or the second start hole 140 (performs a hit/lose determination), and determines the hit/lose ("time-saving hit", "jackpot", or "miss"). After that, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol determination table of Fig. 11, determines the selected symbol command based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball enters the first start hole 120 or the second start hole 140 and the hit/lose determination value data, and determines the type of display mode (type of time-saving hit or type of jackpot) to be derived to the special symbol display units 163, 164. Note that the above winning/losing judgment and selection of the symbol command are performed when the variable display of the special symbol begins, but this does not exclude the possibility of performing this between the start of the variable display of the special symbol and the final display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 13, in this embodiment, the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving game state that is controlled after the end of the big win game state is, for example, 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z5") or 300 times (when the selected symbol command is "z10"). In contrast, the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state that is controlled when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" is, for example, 10 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1" or "z7"), or 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8"). In other words, the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving game state is higher than the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state. In this way, the positioning of the "big win" can be increased by making the A time-saving game state more advantageous for the player than the C time-saving game state.

In addition, instead of making the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving game state higher than the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state, for example, as shown in FIG. 14, the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state may be made higher than the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving game state. FIG. 14 is a modified example of the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 13. In this FIG. 14, the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving game state is, for example, 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z5" or "z10"). In contrast, the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state is, for example, 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1" or "z7"), or 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8"). In this way, by making the C time-saving game state more advantageous for the player than the A time-saving game state, the positioning of the "time-saving win" can be increased. For example, even if a long period of time passes without a "jackpot" being won, if a "time-saving hit" is won, the player will be controlled to the relatively advantageous C time-saving game state, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest.

In this specification, as with the special bonus flag, when the value of the time-saving flag is "0", the time-saving flag is off, and when the value of the time-saving flag is "1", the time-saving flag is on.

The time-saving flag, like the probability change flag, is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 203, and is a flag for managing whether or not to execute time-saving control.

The number of time-saving times is the number of times that the special symbols can be displayed variably while the time-saving control is being continued. That is, for example, if the number of time-saving times is determined to be "50," and 50 times of variable display of special symbols are performed without winning a jackpot in this time-saving game state, this time-saving game state ends and transitions to a non-time-saving game state (for example, a normal game state).

The "10,000" number of times the special mode and the time-saving mode are shown in FIG. 13 and other figures is intended to allow the special mode control to be continuously executed after the end of the special mode game state, until it is determined that a special mode has occurred (i.e., the next special mode).

[1-4-6. Special symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 15 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol of the first pachinko game machine. The "Notes" column in FIG. 15 is shown for convenience in order to make it easier to understand. The time-saving hit-type reaches A, B, and C shown in the "Notes" column in FIG. 15 are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is likely to be a time-saving hit (no possibility of a jackpot). Similarly, the jackpot-type reaches A, B, and C are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is likely to be a jackpot (no possibility of a time-saving hit). Furthermore, the common reaches A, B, C, D, and E are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is likely to be both a time-saving hit and a jackpot. Note that FIG. 15 is a variation pattern table of a special symbol when the probability variable flag is off, and the illustration of the variation pattern table of a special symbol when the probability variable flag is on is omitted.

The main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when it is based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 140. The special symbol variation pattern table in FIG. 15 is a table that is referenced when executing the special symbol variation pattern determination process of S96 in FIG. 28 described below.

As shown in FIG. 15, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win/lose), the value of the time-saving flag (0 or 1), the random number value for reach determination, and/or the random number value for performance selection, but is not limited to this and may be determined based on other values instead of or in addition to any of the above.

The random number value for reach determination is selected from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for effect selection is selected from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 sets a look-ahead flag if the random number value for effect selection extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 120 is a specific random number value. The sub-CPU 301, which receives the special symbol variation pattern command sent from the main CPU 201, performs a look-ahead effect if the look-ahead flag is set.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 sets the look-ahead flag when the time-saving flag is off, and does not set the look-ahead flag when the time-saving flag is on or the probability bonus flag is on.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 decides whether or not to perform a look-ahead performance, but this is not limited to this, and the sub-CPU 301 may decide.

The main CPU 201 may also set the look-ahead flag (to perform a look-ahead performance) when the time-saving flag or the probability-change flag is on. The main CPU 201 may also set the look-ahead flag (to perform a look-ahead performance) when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol.

When the time-saving flag is on, the expected number of changes per unit time for the special symbol fluctuation pattern determined is smaller than when the time-saving flag is off. In other words, the time it takes for the special symbol to fluctuate when the time-saving flag is on is likely to be shorter than the time it takes for the special symbol to fluctuate when the time-saving flag is off.

The determined variation pattern information is sent from the main CPU 201 to the command input port 308 of the sub-CPU 301 via the command output port 206. The sub-CPU 301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effects output from the speaker 32 based on the variation pattern information sent from the main CPU 201.

Although not shown in FIG. 15, the variation pattern (variable display time) of the special symbol that is determined may be different for each setting value, for example by changing the range of the random number value for effect selection.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, when the result of the hit determination process is a miss, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined depending on whether the time-saving flag is on or not, regardless of the type of time-saving, but this is not limited to this. For example, the expected value of the number of times the special symbol will be variably displayed per unit time may be made different depending on the type of time-saving. For example, the expected value of the number of times the special symbol will be variably displayed per unit time may be made different between time-saving play state A, time-saving play state B, and time-saving play state C.

[1-4-7. Time-saving game state]
As described above, in this embodiment, the time-saving gaming states are the time-saving gaming state A, the time-saving gaming state B, and the time-saving gaming state C. These time-saving gaming states will be described below.

The A time-saving play state is a time-saving play state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot play state when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" and the selected symbol command is, for example, "z5" or "z10". That is, in this embodiment, the condition for transitioning to the A time-saving play state is winning a jackpot (a jackpot with a selected symbol command of "z5" or "z10"). However, even if the condition for transitioning to the A time-saving play state is met, transition to the A time-saving play state is not necessarily made; if a condition that prevents transition to the A time-saving play state is met (for example, if the backup is cleared), transition to the A time-saving play state is not made.

The condition for ending the A time-saving game state is when either of the following conditions is met: the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" and a jackpot game state based on the "jackpot" is initiated, or a variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) for the number of time-saving times determined in response to the selected symbol command (hereinafter referred to as the "A time-saving specified number of times") is executed (see the "Number of time-saving times" column in Figure 13).

The B time-saving game state is a time-saving game state that is controlled when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value by updating (adding 1) the ceiling counter, starting, for example, when the jackpot game state ends and the variable display of the special symbol in the non-high probability game state (for example, the normal game state and the low probability time-saving game state in this embodiment) begins. That is, the condition for transitioning to the B time-saving game state is that the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. The transition to the B time-saving game state may be when the variable display of the special symbol when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value (hereinafter referred to as the "ceiling final fluctuation") begins, when the ceiling final fluctuation ends, or when the variable display of the special symbol next to the ceiling final fluctuation begins. That is, the timing of transition to the B time-saving game state may be any time between the start of the ceiling final fluctuation and the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. In addition, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the final ceiling fluctuation is "miss", the display mode of miss is derived on the special symbol display section 163, 164, but the game will transition to the B time-saving game state. In this case, the sub-CPU 301 may control the display device 7 to display a display effect (for example, a decorative symbol is stopped with a special symbol, a special effect by a character is performed, or both of these are performed) that indicates to the player that the transition condition to the B time-saving game state has been established (for example, in this embodiment, the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value). Note that even if the transition condition to the B time-saving game state is established, the game will not necessarily transition to the B time-saving game state, but if a condition that prevents the transition to the B time-saving game state is established (for example, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the final ceiling fluctuation is a jackpot, etc.), the game will not transition to the B time-saving game state.

The ceiling counter is not updated when the probability variable flag is on, and when the probability variable flag is off, it is always counted regardless of whether the time-saving flag is on or off. When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, it is controlled to the B time-saving game state unless the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a "big hit". In a pachinko game machine in which the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol includes a small hit, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is a "small hit", the B time-saving game state may be started when the display mode of the small hit is derived to the special symbol display unit 163, 164, or the B time-saving game state may be started after the small hit game state ends. In other words, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is a "small hit", only the display mode of the small hit is displayed on the special symbol display unit 163, 164, and no display effect is displayed to indicate to the player that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value as described above. In the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the ceiling value may be different depending on the setting value. Also, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is a "jackpot," the machine is controlled to the jackpot game state without being controlled to the B time-saving game state.

The ceiling counter is reset when a specific condition is met, such as when the power is turned on, when the machine is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, when the working area (volatile area) in the RAM 203 is cleared (backup clearing), when a switch other than the backup clear switch 176 (for example, the setting key 174 or a dedicated switch) is operated, or when the high probability of hitting a normal symbol ends in a gaming machine in which the probability of hitting a normal symbol can be changed. When updating of the ceiling counter is permitted, the ceiling counter is updated each time a variable display of a special symbol is executed. For example, when the probability flag is on, updating of the ceiling counter is not permitted.

After clearing the ceiling counter, the main CPU 201 starts counting the ceiling counter from the next variable display of the special symbol. The ceiling value may be set by the main CPU 201 each time the ceiling counter is cleared, or may be predetermined as a value specific to the pachinko game machine rather than being set each time.

When the ceiling counter is cleared due to control to the jackpot gaming state, if the probability variable flag is not on after the jackpot gaming state ends, the main CPU 201 updates (+1) the ceiling counter at the start or end of the first variable display of the special pattern. Also, if the probability variable flag is on after the jackpot gaming state ends, the ceiling counter is not updated even if the variable display of the special pattern is performed, but for example, in the case of an ST machine or a specification that performs a probability variable drop lottery, the ceiling counter is updated at the start or end of the first variable display of the special pattern after the probability variable flag is turned off. Note that in the case of a specification that performs a probability variable drop lottery, the probability variable flag is changed from on to off at the start of the variable display of the special pattern, so when updating the ceiling counter at the end of the variable display of the special pattern, if the probability variable flag is off at the end of the variable display of the special pattern, the ceiling counter may be updated.

In the case of a pachinko game machine in which the main CPU 201 performs a lottery for changing into a high probability state, it is preferable that the sub-CPU 301, upon receiving a command sent from the main CPU 201, does not perform any effects suggesting that the lottery for changing into a high probability state has been won or any effects suggesting a transition from a high probability state to a low probability state. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the start point of the count by the ceiling counter, i.e., the timing of the transition to the B time-saving game state, based on the display effects displayed on the display device 7, making it possible to provide an interesting game. If it is difficult to grasp the timing of the transition to the B time-saving game state, for example, a countdown effect suggesting the timing of the transition to the B time-saving game state or a false countdown effect can be displayed on the display device 7 under the control of the sub-CPU 301, thereby making it possible to further increase interest.

In addition, when a clearing process (backup clearing process) is performed on the working area (volatile area) in RAM 203, the main CPU 201 updates (increments by 1) the ceiling counter at the start or end of the first variable display of the special pattern after the clearing process of the working area in RAM 203.

Furthermore, if a switch other than the backup clear switch 176 (for example, the setting key 174 or a dedicated switch) is operated, the main CPU 201 updates (increments by 1) the ceiling counter at the start or end of the first variable display of the special symbol after the other switch is operated.

The end condition of the B time-saving game state is when either of the following conditions is met: the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a "jackpot" and a jackpot game state based on the "jackpot" is started, or the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed a predetermined number of times (hereinafter referred to as the "prescribed number of B time-saving times"). One of the end conditions of the B time-saving game state, "the variable display of the special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times for B time-saving", may be when the variable display of the special symbol for the prescribed number of B time-saving times (hereinafter referred to as the "final variation of B time-saving") is started, or when the final variation of B time-saving is completed. In other words, the end timing of the B time-saving game state may be any time between the start of the final variation of B time-saving and the end of the variable display of the special symbols related to this final variation of B time-saving.

The C time-saving game state is a time-saving game state that is controlled when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a "time-saving hit". In other words, the condition for transitioning to the C time-saving game state is that a time-saving hit (the selected symbol command is a time-saving hit of "z0" to "z2", "z7" or "z8") is won, and the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived (determined display) on the special symbol display unit 163, 164. Note that even if the transition condition to the C time-saving game state is met, the game does not necessarily transition to the C time-saving game state. If a condition that prevents the transition to the C time-saving game state is met (for example, when the specifications are such that the B time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state are not executed at the same time (details will be described later), and the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the B time-saving game state is a "time-saving hit", etc.), the game will not transition to the C time-saving game state. In addition, if the conditions for transitioning to the C time-saving game state are met but a condition preventing transition to the C time-saving game state is met, the main CPU 201 executes control to derive the display mode of the time-saving win to the special pattern display units 163, 164, even though it does not transition to the C time-saving game state.

The end condition of the C time-saving game state is when either of the following conditions is met: the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a "jackpot" and a jackpot game state based on the "jackpot" is started; or the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) for the number of time-saving times determined in response to the selected symbol command (hereinafter referred to as the "prescribed number of C time-saving times") is executed (see the "number of time-saving times" column in FIG. 13). The prescribed number of C time-saving times, which is one of the end conditions of the C time-saving game state, may be when the variable display of the special symbol for the number of time-saving times determined in response to the selected symbol command (hereinafter referred to as the "final C time-saving change") starts, or when the final C time-saving change ends. In other words, the end timing of the C time-saving game state may be any time between the start of the final C time-saving change and the end of the variable display of the special symbol related to this final C time-saving change.

The time-saving performance may be different between the A time-saving play state, the B time-saving play state, and the C time-saving play state. Also, the time-saving performance of two of the A time-saving play state, the B time-saving play state, and the C time-saving play state may be the same, and the time-saving performance of these two time-saving play states may be different from the time-saving performance of the other one of the time-saving play states. Furthermore, the time-saving performance of the A time-saving play state, the B time-saving play state, and the C time-saving play state may be the same.

In addition, the end conditions for the time-saving play state A, the time-saving play state B, and the time-saving play state C may include, in addition to the above, for example, that the number of times the second special symbol is displayed has reached a specified number of times, that the normal electric device 146 has opened a specified number of times, or that a specific opening mode has been selected as the opening mode of the normal electric device 146. In a pachinko game machine in which the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol includes a small hit, the above end conditions may include that the number of small hits has reached a specified number of times. Furthermore, the above end conditions may include that a time-saving fall lottery is held and that the time-saving fall lottery is won.

[1-4-8. Normal symbol winning judgment table]
FIG. 16 is an example of a winning determination table for normal symbols stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table referenced in the normal symbol hit determination process, i.e., when determining whether a "normal symbol hit" or "miss" is determined by lottery based on the game state and the normal symbol hit determination random number value extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 (see Figure 4) (i.e., when executing the normal symbol game determination process of S295 in Figure 43 described below).

As described above, the random number value for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol is a random number value used in the process of determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol. In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 selects the random number value for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, in the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 determines whether the normal symbol is a hit or a miss based on the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value. The normal symbol hit determination table specifies, for each type of time reduction, the relationship between the range (width) of the normal symbol hit determination random number value determined to be a "normal symbol hit" and the corresponding normal symbol hit determination value data, and the relationship between the range (width) of the normal symbol hit determination random number value determined to be a "miss" and the corresponding miss determination value data.

In this embodiment, in a non-time-saving game state (for example, a normal game state), if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 0 and 79, the main CPU 201 determines that the win/loss determination value is a "normal symbol win" and sets the win/loss determination value data to "normal symbol win determination value data." Also, in a non-time-saving game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 80 and 99, the main CPU 201 determines that the win is a "miss" and sets the determination value data to "miss determination value data."

In addition, in the A time-saving game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 0 and 98, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "normal symbol win" and sets the win/loss determination value data to "normal symbol win determination value data."In addition, in the A time-saving game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is 99, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "miss" and sets the determination value data to "miss determination value data."

In addition, in the B time-saving game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 0 and 79, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "normal symbol win" and sets the win/loss determination value data to "normal symbol win determination value data."In addition, in the B time-saving game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 80 and 99, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "miss" and sets the determination value data to "miss determination value data."

In addition, in the C time-saving game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 0 and 79, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "normal symbol win" and sets the win/loss determination value data to "normal symbol win determination value data."In addition, in the C time-saving game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 80 and 99, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "miss" and sets the determination value data to "miss determination value data."

In this way, in this embodiment, the probability of winning on a normal symbol in the time-saving game state A (selection rate (estimated) shown in Figure 16) is the highest among the non-time-saving game state, the time-saving game state A, the time-saving game state B, and the time-saving game state C.

In addition, the winning probability of a normal symbol in the B time-saving game state (the selection rate (estimate) shown in FIG. 16) is the same as the winning probability of a normal symbol in the non-time-saving game state. Similarly, the winning probability of a normal symbol in the C time-saving game state (the selection rate (estimate) shown in FIG. 16) is the same as the winning probability of a normal symbol in the non-time-saving game state. Therefore, even if the game state shifts between the non-time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state, the winning probability of a normal symbol will not change.

The winning probability for a normal symbol may be the same in the non-time-saving game state, the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state. In this case, the winning probability for a normal symbol does not change, and the ratio of the types of normal symbols described below only needs to be varied for each state, simplifying the control process.

[1-4-9. Normal symbol determination table]
FIG. 17 is an example of a normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol determination table is a table that is referenced when selecting a "normal symbol winning symbol selection command" that determines the normal symbol stopping symbol based on the type of time reduction, the aforementioned winning/losing determination value data, and the normal symbol random number value extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 (see FIG. 4). The "normal symbol winning symbol selection command" is a command for specifying the winning normal symbol determined according to the normal symbol winning type when the result of the normal symbol winning determination process is a normal symbol winning symbol. The normal symbol random number value is extracted, for example, from 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 17, when normal symbol winning determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol winning determination process, for example, the selected symbol command when a normal symbol wins is selected as follows:

For example, in a non-time-saving game state, when normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 selects "fz0" as the normal symbol hit selection pattern command, regardless of whether the normal symbol random number value is 0 to 99.

In addition, in the A time-saving play state, when normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 selects "fz1" as the symbol command to be selected when a normal symbol hits if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 0 and 29, selects "fz2" as the symbol command to be selected when a normal symbol hits if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 30 and 69, and selects "fz3" as the symbol command to be selected when a normal symbol hits if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 70 and 99.

In addition, in the B time-saving play state, when normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 selects "fz4" as the symbol command to be selected when the normal symbol hits if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 0 and 29, selects "fz5" as the symbol command to be selected when the normal symbol hits if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 30 and 69, and selects "fz6" as the symbol command to be selected when the normal symbol hits if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 70 and 99.

In addition, in the C time-saving play state, when normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 selects "fz7" as the symbol command to be selected when the normal symbol hits if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 0 and 29, selects "fz8" as the symbol command to be selected when the normal symbol hits if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 30 and 69, and selects "fz9" as the symbol command to be selected when the normal symbol hits if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 70 and 99.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the winning judgment table for the normal pattern (see FIG. 16) to determine the winning/losing judgment value data based on the extracted random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern, and then refers to the normal pattern judgment table (see FIG. 17) to determine the pattern command selected when the normal pattern is a winning pattern based on the pattern random number value of the normal pattern, but is not limited to this. For example, the winning/losing of the normal pattern and the pattern command selected when the normal pattern is a winning pattern may be determined together based on the extracted random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern and the pattern random number value of the normal pattern.

[1-4-10. Normal pattern type determination table]
18 is an example of a normal symbol winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the first pachinko game machine. The normal symbol winning type determination table is referenced when determining the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric role 146 (see FIG. 4), in response to the normal symbol winning time selection symbol command determined in response to the normal symbol random number value (i.e., when executing the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric role 146 executed in the variable display start process of the normal symbol in S293 in FIG. 43 described later).

In this embodiment, if the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is "normal symbol hit", the normal symbol hit type is determined as follows. For example, if the symbol command selected when a normal symbol hits is "fz0", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric device 146 (see FIG. 4), to be a first opening time of 1000 msec, no wait time, and no second opening. In other words, the opening pattern is determined to be one in which the normal electric device 146 is opened only once for 1000 msec.

In addition, when the selection pattern command for a normal symbol hit is "fz1", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric device 146 (see Figure 4), to be a first opening time of 2000 msec, a wait time of 200 msec, and a second opening time of 2000 msec.

In addition, when the selected symbol command is "fz2" when a normal symbol is hit, the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric device 146 (see Figure 4), to be a first opening time of 2500 msec, a wait time of 200 msec, and a second opening time of 2500 msec.

In addition, when the selected symbol command when a normal symbol is hit is "fz3", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric role device 146 (see Figure 4), to be a first opening time of 3000 msec, a wait time of 200 msec, and a second opening time of 3000 msec.

In addition, when the selected pattern command when a normal pattern is hit is "fz4" or "fz7", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric role device 146 (see Figure 4), to be a first opening time of 2500 msec, no wait time, and no second opening.

In addition, when the selected pattern command when a normal pattern is hit is "fz5" or "fz8", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric role device 146 (see Figure 4), to be a first opening time of 2000 msec, a wait time of 600 msec, and a second opening time of 2000 msec.

In addition, when the selected pattern command when a normal pattern is hit is "fz6" or "fz9", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric role device 146 (see Figure 4), to be a first opening time of 2500 msec, a wait time of 600 msec, and a second opening time of 2500 msec.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol in the non-time-saving play state is "normal symbol hit," the opening pattern of the normal electric device 146 (see FIG. 4) will be the most unfavorable mode among the opening patterns of the normal electric device 146 in the non-time-saving play state, the A time-saving play state, the B time-saving play state, and the C time-saving play state.

The degree of advantage of the opening pattern of the normal electric device 146 is the degree of ease with which the game ball will enter the second starting hole 140 when the normal electric device 146 is opened.

When the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol in the A time-saving play state is "normal symbol hit," the opening pattern of the normal electric device 146 (see FIG. 4) will be the most advantageous pattern among the opening patterns of the normal electric device 146 in the non-time-saving play state, the A time-saving play state, the B time-saving play state, and the C time-saving play state.

In addition, the opening pattern of the normal electric device 146 (see FIG. 4) when the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol in the B time-saving play state is a "normal symbol hit" has the same degree of advantage as the opening pattern of the normal electric device 146 when the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol in the C time-saving play state is a "normal symbol hit", but is not limited to this.

[1-4-11. Normal pattern variation table]
FIG. 19 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table of the first pachinko game machine. The normal symbol variation pattern table is referred to when determining the normal symbol variation pattern (i.e., when executing the normal symbol variation pattern determination process executed in the normal symbol variable display start process of S293 in FIG. 43 described later). The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table and determines the normal symbol variation pattern based on the game state and the normal symbol effect selection random number value extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 (see FIG. 4). The normal symbol effect selection random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above.

As shown in FIG. 19, in the non-time-saving game state, regardless of whether the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is 0 to 99, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 300,000 msec. The variable display time of the normal symbol in the non-time-saving game state is the longest among the non-time-saving game state, time-saving game state A, time-saving game state B, and time-saving game state C.

In addition, in the A time-saving game state, if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any value between 0 and 89, the variable display time for the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any value between 90 and 99, the variable display time for the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 800 msec.

In addition, in the B time-saving game state, if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any one between 0 and 39, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any one between 40 and 79, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1000 msec, and if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any one between 80 and 99, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1500 msec.

In addition, in the C time-saving game state, if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any one between 0 and 39, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any one between 40 and 79, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1000 msec, and if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any one between 80 and 99, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1500 msec.

In this way, the expected value of the variable display time of the normal pattern per variable display is the shortest among the variable display times of the normal pattern in the non-time-saving game state, the A-time-saving game state, the B-time-saving game state, and the C-time-saving game state. Therefore, the A-time-saving game state has the shortest time until the normal electric device 146 is opened among the non-time-saving game state, the A-time-saving game state, the B-time-saving game state, and the C-time-saving game state.

In addition, the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbol in the B time-saving play state is the same as the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbol in the C time-saving play state, but is not limited to this.

[1-5. Details of processing related to time-saving gaming state]
[1-5-1. Number of time-saving times set when time-saving hits]
In the above description, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the number of time-saving times to be set is the same regardless of the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed. However, this is not limited to this, and the number of time-saving times to be set when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" may be determined according to the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed.

Even in a high probability game state where the probability flag is set to ON, the result of the special symbol hit determination process may include "time-saving hit". In this case, the main CPU derives the display mode of the time-saving hit on the special symbol display section, but does not execute control to transition to the time-saving game state, and continues to control the high probability game state. However, there are known gaming machines, such as pachinko gaming machines called ST machines, that change the probability flag from ON to OFF when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a prescribed number of times. In such ST machines, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process performed in the final game in the high probability game state is "time-saving hit", if the process of deriving the display mode of the time-saving hit is later than the process of turning off the probability flag, the main CPU may control to the C time-saving game state after deriving the display mode of the time-saving hit.

[1-5-2. Overlapping of time-saving game states]
When multiple time-saving game states are provided, the time-saving game states may overlap. For example, in the A time-saving game state, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time-saving hit", the A time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state will overlap. Also, for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state, the C time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state will overlap. When the time-saving game states overlap in this way, the time-saving game states may be executed in an overlapping manner, or the time-saving game states may not be overlapped (i.e., the "time-saving hit" may be ignored). In order to prevent the A time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state from overlapping, the A time-saving prescribed number of times, which is the end condition of the A time-saving game state, is specified to be smaller than the ceiling value, which is the transition condition to the B time-saving game state.

Below is an explanation of how the time-saving game states overlap when they are executed in a overlapping manner, and how they do not overlap.

[1-5-2-1. Mode of overlapping execution of time-saving gaming state]
Possible modes of overlapping the time-shortened game states when the time-shortened game states overlap include a mode in which the time-shortened game state C is overlapped and executed when a time-shortened prize is won in any one of the time-shortened game states A, B, and C, and a mode in which the time-shortened game state B is overlapped and executed when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the time-shortened game state C.

[1-5-2-1-1. Mode of executing C time-saving gaming state on one time-saving gaming state]
When a "time-saving win" is won in any one of the time-saving game states A, B, and C, the main CPU 201 derives a display mode of the time-saving win on the special symbol display units 163 and 164. In this case, the main CPU 201 adopts, as the number of times of time-saving, the state which has the greater number of variable displays of the special symbols that can be executed until the end condition of the time-saving game state is established, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the one time-saving game state.

For example, if a "time-saving hit" is won in the A time-saving game state, and the remaining number of time-saving plays in the A time-saving game state is greater than the number of time-saving plays that can be executed based on this "time-saving hit", the main CPU 201 will control the time-saving game state until the remaining number of time-saving plays in the A time-saving game state is consumed, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the A time-saving game state, unless a "jackpot" is derived. To explain using specific numbers, for example, if a "time-saving hit" is won when the remaining number of time-saving plays in the A time-saving game state is 200, and the number of time-saving plays that can be executed based on this "time-saving hit" is 50, the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived on the special pattern display units 163 and 164, but the number of time-saving plays from this point on will be 200, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the A time-saving game state, unless a "jackpot" is derived. Therefore, even if a "time-saving hit" is won in one of the time-saving game states A, B, or C, the appearance of the number of time-saving hits and time-saving performance will be the same as if the time-saving game state A had not been won and the game continued.

On the other hand, for example, if a "time-saving hit" is won in the A time-saving game state, and the number of time-saving times that can be executed based on this "time-saving hit" is greater than the number of time-saving times remaining in the A time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 controls the time-saving game state until the number of time-saving times set based on the "time-saving hit" is consumed, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the A time-saving game state, unless a "jackpot" is derived. To explain using specific numbers, for example, if a "time-saving hit" is won when the number of time-saving times remaining in the A time-saving game state is 20, and the number of time-saving times that can be executed based on this "time-saving hit" is 50, the number of time-saving times from this point on will be 50, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the A time-saving game state, unless a "jackpot" is derived. In other words, even if the variable display of the special pattern is executed for 20 times, which is the number of time-saving times remaining in the A time-saving game state, the variable display of the special pattern is then further executed for 30 times, which is the difference between the two, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the A time-saving game state.

[1-5-2-1-2. Mode in which the time-saving gaming state B is superimposed on the time-saving gaming state C]
When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value during the C time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 executes control according to the display mode (i.e., the result of the special pattern hit determination process) output to the special pattern display sections 163, 164 during the final ceiling fluctuation.

Note that in the first pachinko gaming machine, the results of the special symbol hit determination process do not include small hits, but the following explanation also includes cases where the results of the special symbol hit determination process include small hits.

First, we will explain the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination process during the final ceiling fluctuation is a "small hit" or "miss."

When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the time-saving C state, if the remaining number of time-saving times in the time-saving C state is greater than the specified number of time-saving B times, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of the time-saving C state and controls the time-saving C state until the remaining number of time-saving times in the time-saving C state is consumed, unless a "jackpot" is derived. To explain using specific numbers, for example, if the remaining number of time-saving times in the time-saving C state is 300, the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value and the specified number of time-saving B times is 200, the number of time-saving times from this point on will be 300, unless a "jackpot" is derived, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the time-saving C state. Therefore, even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the time-saving C state, the appearance of the number of time-saving times and the time-saving performance is the same as when the time-saving C state continues without the ceiling counter reaching the ceiling value.

On the other hand, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the time-saving C game state, if the B time-saving prescribed number of times is greater than the remaining number of time-saving in the time-saving C game state, the main CPU 201 controls the time-saving game state until the B time-saving prescribed number of times is consumed, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the C time-saving game state, unless a "jackpot" is derived. To explain using specific numbers, for example, if the remaining number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state is 20 times, the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and the number of time-saving times that can be executed in the B time-saving game state is 300 times, the number of time-saving times from this point on will be 300 times while maintaining the time-saving performance of the C time-saving game state, unless a "jackpot" is derived. In other words, even if the variable display of the special pattern is executed for 20 times, which is the remaining number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state, the variable display of the special pattern is then further executed for 280 times, which is the difference between the two, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the C time-saving game state.

When the variable display of the special symbol ends during the final ceiling variation, the main CPU 201 derives a display mode in the special symbol display sections 163, 164 according to the result of the special symbol hit determination process. That is, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small hit", a small hit display mode is derived, and if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss", a miss display mode is derived. When the small hit display mode is derived, control is given to the small hit game state, but the main CPU 201 keeps the time-saving flag on even during the small hit game state.

Next, we will explain the case where the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol at the final ceiling fluctuation is a "time-shortened hit," that is, the case where the transition condition to the B time-shortened play state and the transition condition to the C time-shortened play state are met at the final ceiling fluctuation. In this case, the main CPU 201 can execute different controls depending on whether it starts control of the B time-shortened play state before the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is output to the special symbol display units 163, 164 or whether it starts control of the B time-shortened play state after the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is output to the special symbol display units 163, 164.

First, if control of the B time-shortened game state is started before the result of the special symbol hit determination process is output to the special symbol display units 163, 164, the game is already controlled to the B time-shortened game state at the time the display mode of the time-shortened hit is output to the special symbol display units 163, 164. Therefore, while maintaining the time-shortened performance of the B time-shortened game state, the main CPU 201 controls the game to the time-shortened game state until the greater of the B time-shortened prescribed number of times or the C time-shortened game state number of times is consumed, unless a "jackpot" is output.

Next, when control of the B time-shortened game state is started after the result of the special symbol hit determination process is output to the special symbol display units 163, 164, the time-shortened game state is not yet controlled to the B time-shortened game state at the time when the display mode of the time-shortened hit is output to the special symbol display units 163, 164. Therefore, while maintaining the time-shortened performance of the C time-shortened game state, the main CPU 201 controls the time-shortened game state until the greater of the B time-shortened prescribed number of times and the C time-shortened number of times is consumed, unless the end condition of the time-shortened game state in which the time-shortened performance is maintained or executed is satisfied. In this case, it is preferable to end the time-shortened game state when the end condition of the time-shortened game state in which the time-shortened performance is maintained or executed is satisfied.

In addition, when the conditions for transition to the time-saving B game state and the conditions for transition to the time-saving C game state are satisfied at the final change of the ceiling, the sub-CPU 301 may perform a special display effect different from the B time-saving transition display effect performed when only the conditions for transition to the time-saving B game state are satisfied, and the C time-saving transition display effect performed when only the conditions for transition to the time-saving C game state are satisfied. Alternatively, for example, if the time-saving performance of the time-saving B game state is maintained, the B time-saving transition display effect is performed, and if the time-saving performance of the time-saving C game state is maintained, the C time-saving transition display effect is performed, and so on.

In addition, if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state and the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol in the final ceiling fluctuation is a "jackpot," the main CPU 201 ends the C time-saving game state and controls the game state to the jackpot game state without also controlling the game state to the B time-saving game state.

[1-5-2-1-3. Time-saving performance when multiple time-saving game states are executed at the same time]
The above describes a mode in which a time-shortened game state C is superimposed on one time-shortened game state, and a mode in which a time-shortened game state B is superimposed on a time-shortened game state C.

When multiple time-saving game states can be executed in a superimposed manner, the time-saving performance of the previously executed time-saving game state is maintained. In a pachinko game machine with such specifications, the time-saving performance of the multiple time-saving game states that can be executed in a superimposed manner may be different, but it is preferable to make the time-saving performance of the multiple time-saving game states that can be executed in a superimposed manner the same.

For example, if the specifications allow a time-saving play state C to be overlaid on a time-saving play state, it is preferable to make the time-saving performance of the time-saving play state C the same as that of the time-saving play state C. Also, if the specifications allow a time-saving play state B to be overlaid on a time-saving play state C, it is preferable to make the time-saving performance of the time-saving play state C the same as that of the time-saving play state B.

In addition, in a pachinko gaming machine that is capable of executing multiple time-saving game states in a superimposed manner, a time-saving game state that can be executed later on a previously executed time-saving game state may be provided with, for example, one time-saving performance that is the same as the previously executed time-saving game state, and another time-saving performance that is different from the one time-saving performance. When a time-saving game state is executed in a superimposed manner on a previously executed time-saving game state, the one time-saving performance may be activated, and when a time-saving game state is not executed in a superimposed manner, such as when a time-saving game state is activated in a normal game state, the other time-saving performance may be activated.

For example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine that can execute the time-saving gaming state B in a C time-saving gaming state by overlapping it with the time-saving gaming state C, the time-saving performance of the B time-saving gaming state is set to, for example, two time-saving performances, one time-saving performance that is the same as the time-saving gaming state C, and another time-saving performance that is different from the one time-saving performance. Then, for example, if the ceiling counter reaches a ceiling value in the time-saving gaming state C, the one time-saving performance may be activated, and, for example, if the ceiling counter reaches a ceiling value in a normal gaming state that is not one of the time-saving gaming states, the other time-saving performance may be activated.

[1-5-3. Mode in which time-saving gaming states are not executed in succession]
As a mode in which the time-saving game state is not executed in a superimposed manner, there are a mode in which a hit determination process is performed so that the "time-saving hit" is not included in the lottery object in the time-saving game state, and a mode in which a hit determination process is performed so that the "time-saving hit" is included in the lottery object in the time-saving game state, and even if the time-saving game state is overlapped, the time-saving game state is not executed in a superimposed manner (hereinafter referred to as the "latter mode"). As the latter mode, there are two modes in which even if a time-saving hit is won in any one of the time-saving game states A, B, and C, the time-saving game state is not executed in a superimposed manner by ignoring this, and even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the time-saving game state C, the time-saving game state is not executed in a superimposed manner by ignoring this. The above two modes considered as the latter mode will be described below.

[1-5-3-1. Mode in which the C time-saving gaming state is not executed in addition to one time-saving gaming state]
When a "time-saving win" is won in any one of the time-saving game states A, B, and C, the main CPU 201 derives the display mode of the time-saving win on the special symbol display units 163 and 164, as described above. However, unless the final variable display of the special symbol in one time-saving game state (hereinafter referred to as "final time-saving change") is the last, the main CPU 201 does not control the game to the time-saving game state C based on the "time-saving win", but controls the game to the time-saving game state until the remaining number of time-saving plays in the time-saving game state in the time-saving game state is consumed. In this case, being controlled to the time-saving game state (excluding the final time-saving change) is a condition that prevents a transition to the time-saving game state C.

On the other hand, if a "time-saving hit" is won in the final time-saving fluctuation in one time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 can execute different control depending on whether the one time-saving game state ends before the display mode of the time-saving hit is introduced to the special pattern display units 163, 164 or whether the one time-saving game state ends when the display mode of the time-saving hit is introduced to the special pattern display units 163, 164.

First, if one time-saving game state ends before the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived on the special pattern display units 163 and 164, the main CPU 201 will derive the display mode of the time-saving hit and then start controlling the C time-saving game state.

Next, if one time-shortened game state ends when the display mode of the time-shortened win is derived on the special symbol display units 163, 164, i.e., if the derivation of the display mode of the time-shortened win and the end of one time-shortened game state are performed within the same interrupt process, the main CPU 201 may or may not start control of the C time-shortened game state depending on the program processing. Specifically, if the process of deriving (determined display) the display mode of the time-shortened win is performed before the end process of one time-shortened game state, the main CPU 201 ends one time-shortened game state without controlling it to the C time-shortened game state. In this case, performing the process of deriving the display mode of the time-shortened win before the end process of one time-shortened game state is a condition that prevents transition to the C time-shortened game state.

On the other hand, if the process of deriving (determining) the display mode of the time-saving hit is performed after the end process of the first time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 ends the first time-saving game state and controls it to the C time-saving game state. In this case, the main CPU 201 does not maintain the time-saving performance of the first time-saving game state, but sets it to the time-saving performance of the C time-saving game state. In other words, at the time when the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived, if the end process of the first time-saving game state has not been processed, the main CPU 201 ends the first time-saving game state without controlling it to the C time-saving game state, and if the end process of the first time-saving game state has already been processed, the main CPU 201 controls it to the C time-saving game state.

[1-5-3-2. Mode in which the B time-saving gaming state is not executed in parallel with the C time-saving gaming state]
When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value during the C time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 executes control according to the display mode (i.e., the result of the special pattern hit determination process) output to the special pattern display sections 163, 164 during the final ceiling fluctuation.

First, we will explain the cases where the result of the special symbol hit determination process during the final ceiling fluctuation is a "time-saving hit," "small hit," or "miss."

In the C time-saving play state, if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol in the final ceiling fluctuation is a "time-saving hit," "small hit," or "miss," the main CPU 201 controls the game to the C time-saving play state until the remaining number of times the time-saving play in the C time-saving play state is consumed.

However, when the remaining number of time-shortened times in the C time-shortened game state is 0 at the final ceiling fluctuation, the main CPU 201 may or may not start control of the B time-shortened game state, depending on the processing of the program. Specifically, when the end processing of the C time-shortened game state is performed before the start processing of the B time-shortened game state, the main CPU 201 ends the C time-shortened game state and controls it to the B time-shortened game state. On the other hand, when the end processing of the C time-shortened game state is performed after the start processing of the B time-shortened game state, the main CPU 201 ends the C time-shortened game state without controlling it to the B time-shortened game state. In other words, when the main CPU 201 is about to start the B time-shortened game state, if the end processing of the C time-shortened game state has not been processed, the main CPU 201 ends the C time-shortened game state without controlling it to the B time-shortened game state, and if the end processing of the C time-shortened game state has already been processed, the main CPU 201 controls it to the B time-shortened game state. In this case, performing the end processing of the C time-shortened game state after the start processing of the B time-shortened game state is a condition that prevents the transition to the B time-shortened game state.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process at the final ceiling fluctuation is a "jackpot," the main CPU 201 ends the C time-saving game state and starts control of the jackpot game state.

[1-6. Main control processing]
Next, the contents of various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 will be described.
[1-6-1. Main control main processing]
First, the main processing (main control main processing) executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Figures 20 to 23. Figures 20 to 23 are flow charts showing an example of the main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether the power interruption signal is at a high level (S11). Although not shown, it goes without saying that the main CPU 201 sets the stack pointer and the address of the interrupt vector table prior to S11.

If it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is not at a high level (if S11 is determined as NO), the main CPU 201 repeats the determination process of S11.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is at a high level (if S11 is judged as YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S12.

In S12, the main CPU 201 performs flag management processing for the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 (S12). In this processing, a process of saving the on/off state of the backup clear switch 176 and the on/off state of the setting key 174 is performed. In other words, the on/off state of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is stored in the start control flag area in the main RAM 203. Also, in this processing, the play permission flag is set to off. After executing the processing of S12, the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S13.

In S13, the main CPU 201 performs a wait process. In this process, the sub-control circuit 300 waits for startup. In this case, the startup wait time (wait period) is, for example, 12000.07 msec. After executing the process of S13, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S14.

In addition, while waiting for the sub-control circuit 300 to start up, the main CPU 201 may perform, for example, checking an interrupt request signal, outputting a WDT when an interrupt request signal occurs, and outputting various sensor initialization signals at predetermined timing.

In S14, the main CPU 201 determines whether the power interruption before startup (the previous time) was normal or not. In this process, it is determined whether the power interruption was normal or abnormal based on the value stored in the power interruption detection flag area in the main RAM 203.

If it is determined in S14 that the power interruption was not normal (if S14 is judged as NO), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S18.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S14 that the power interruption was normal (YES in S14), the main CPU 201 calculates the checksum value of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 (S15), and then performs a comparison process of the checksum value of the work area (S16). After executing the process of S16, the main CPU 201 proceeds to S17.

In S17, the main CPU 201 determines whether the comparison result is abnormal.

If the collation result is not abnormal, i.e., is determined to be normal in S17 (if S17 is judged as NO), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S22. Note that the process from S22 onwards will be described later.

On the other hand, if the comparison result is determined to be abnormal in S17 (YES in S17), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S18.

In S18, the main CPU 201 determines whether at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off. In other words, if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, the result is NO. If both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are off, or if either the setting key 174 or the backup clear switch 176 is off, the result is YES.

If it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is not OFF, i.e., that both are ON (if S18 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S21. The process of S21 will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off (if S18 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S19.

In S19, the main CPU 201 sets the security signal of the external terminal to ON. After executing the process of S19, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S20.

In S20, the main CPU 201 performs an error display process on the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6). This process sets data for displaying an error to the output port of the I/O port 205 that outputs a signal to the performance display monitor 170. This causes a specified LED in the performance display monitor 170 to light up, displaying an error. After executing the process of S20, the main CPU 201 enters an endless loop.

In this way, if the previous power outage was not normal, or if the checksum value of the working area stored in the main RAM 203 does not match the normal value, the first pachinko game machine will not be able to play the game until it is determined that both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on.

Next, the process of S21 will be described. In S21, the main CPU 201 stores a value indicating a setting change in the startup control flag area in the main RAM 203. This process is performed upon abnormal startup, and is intended to store again the value indicating a setting change. After executing the process of S21, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S22.

In S22, the main CPU 201 clears the XINT detection flag area and the power interruption detection flag area in the main RAM 203. After executing S22, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S23.

In S23, the main CPU 201 performs a startup state determination process. In this process, the current startup state (power outage recovery/setting change/setting confirmation/RAM clear) is determined based on the value of the startup control flag stored in the startup control flag area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S23, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S24.

In S24, the main CPU 201 performs a RAM setting process at startup. In this process, a clearing process (e.g., construction of a work area and address setting) is performed on the working area (volatile area) in the main RAM 203 that manages flags and the like. Note that this process is performed both when power is restored after a power outage and when initialization is performed, and the backup area is not cleared. After executing the process of S24, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S25.

In S25, the main CPU 201 performs startup initial setting processing. In this processing, the initial setting processing is performed according to the current startup state (power outage recovery/setting change/setting confirmation/RAM clear). Details of the startup initial setting processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 24. After executing the processing of S25, the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S26.

In S26, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt inhibition processing. After executing the processing of S26, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S27.

In S27, the main CPU 201 performs a power cut process. After executing the process of S27, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S28. Details of the power cut process will be described later with reference to FIG. 25.

In S28, the main CPU 201 performs an update process of the initial random numbers. In this process, the initial random numbers of various random number counters (e.g., random number counters for determining whether a special symbol has won) are updated. After executing the process of S28, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S29.

In S29, the main CPU 201 determines whether play is permitted. This determination is made based on the value of the play permission flag.

If it is determined in S29 that play is not permitted (if S29 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S30.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S29 that play is permitted (if S29 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S31.

In S30, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing the processing of S30, the main CPU 201 returns the processing to S26 and performs the processing from S26 onward.

In S31, the main CPU 201 performs a register save process. After executing the process of S31, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S32.

In S32, the main CPU 201 performs a performance display monitor tabulation calculation process. In this process, various base values are calculated and updated. This process is also performed using an area separate from (outside) the work area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S32, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S33.

In S33, the main CPU 201 performs a process of restoring the registers that were saved in S31. After executing the process of S33, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S34.

In S34, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing the processing of S34, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S35.

In S35, the main CPU 201 determines whether the system cycle time has elapsed. The system cycle time is, for example, 6 msec, which is three times the interrupt cycle (for example, 2 msec).

If it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has not elapsed (if S35 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes from S26 onwards.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has elapsed (if S35 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S36.

In S36, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the interrupt counter stored in the interrupt counter area of the main RAM 203 three times. This process resets the value of the interrupt counter that manages the interrupt prohibited section in the main control main process. After executing the process of S36, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S37.

In this embodiment, within the main control process, an interrupt prohibition section (processing section S26 to S35) of, for example, 6 msec is provided before various processes related to game control (for example, processes S37 to S44) described below are executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, various processes related to game control (described below) are executed, for example, every 6 msec (every system cycle). In this embodiment, an example has been described in which the interrupt prohibition section is three times the interrupt cycle, but this is not limited to this.

In S37, the main CPU 201 performs a process of updating the system timer. The system timer is a timer that manages the system period (e.g., 6 msec). The value of the system timer is stored in a system period management timer area in the working area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S37, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S38.

In S38, the main CPU 201 performs main control command transmission/reception processing. In this processing, payout control command transmission/reception processing is mainly performed. After executing S38, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S39.

In S39, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol control processing. In this processing, processing related to the special symbol game is performed. Details of this special symbol control processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 26. After executing the processing of S39, the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S40.

In S40, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol control processing. In this processing, processing related to the normal symbol game is performed. Details of this normal symbol control processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 43. After executing the processing of S40, the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S41.

In S41, the main CPU 201 performs a game action display unit control process. In this process, a process for setting the display data to be output to each display section of the LED unit 160 (e.g., the first special symbol display section 163, the second special symbol display section 164, etc.) is performed. After executing the process of S41, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S42.

In S42, the main CPU 201 performs a game information data generation process. In this process, control of the external terminal board pulse signal, setting of output data, generation of a test firing signal, etc. are performed. Note that the generation of the test firing signal is performed using an area separate from (outside) the working area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S42, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S43.

In S43, the main CPU 201 performs a port output process. In this process, output data is set (transferred) to the command output port 206 (see FIG. 6). After executing the process of S43, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S44.

In S44, the main CPU 201 performs a status monitoring process. In this process, a launch position determination process, a game abnormality detection determination process, a payout abnormality detection determination process, and the like are performed. In the launch position determination process, if there is a change in the launch position (e.g., right hit or left hit), a launch position command is reserved for transmission. In the game abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, a game abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. In the payout abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, a payout abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. After executing the process of S44, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes from S26 onwards.

[1-6-2. Initial setting process at startup]
Next, the startup initial setting process performed in S25 in the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 24. Fig. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of the startup initial setting process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a process to load the start control flag (S51). After executing the process of S51, the main CPU 201 proceeds to S52.

In S52, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the startup control flag is a value indicating power recovery.

If it is determined in S52 that the value of the startup control flag is not a value indicating power recovery (if S52 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S54.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S52 that the value of the startup control flag is a value indicating power recovery (if S52 returns YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S53.

In S53, the main CPU 201 performs a second normal game pre-processing. Details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 50. When the second normal game pre-processing is performed, the play permission flag is set to ON, and the game is permitted. After executing the process of S53, the main CPU 201 ends the startup initial setting process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In S54, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the startup control flag indicates a setting change or setting confirmation.

If it is determined in S54 that the value of the startup status flag is not a value indicating a setting change or setting confirmation, i.e., a value indicating RAM clear (if S54 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S56.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S54 that the value of the startup status flag is a value indicating a setting change or setting confirmation (if S54 is determined to be YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S55.

In S55, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a setting operation command. The setting operation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S336 in FIG. 46 described below). After executing the process of S55, the main CPU 201 ends the startup initial setting process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIG. 20 to FIG. 23).

In S56, the main CPU 201 performs a first normal game pre-processing. Details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 49. When the first normal game pre-processing is performed, the play permission flag is set to ON, and the game is permitted. After executing the process of S56, the main CPU 201 ends the startup initial setting process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

[1-6-3. Electrical disconnection processing]
Next, the power cut process performed in S27 in the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 25. Fig. 25 is a flow chart showing an example of the power cut process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the XINT detection flag is on (S61).

If it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is not on (if S61 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the power cut processing and returns processing to the main control main processing (see Figures 20 to 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is on (if S61 is determined as YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S62.

In S62, the main CPU 201 performs a process of calculating a checksum value. After executing the process of S62, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S63.

In S63, the main CPU 201 stores the checksum value and the power interruption detection flag value in corresponding predetermined storage areas in the main RAM 203. In this case, they are stored in the backup area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S63, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S64.

In S64, the main CPU 201 clears the XINT detection flag. After executing S64, the main CPU 201 executes a RAM access inhibition value setting process (S65). After executing S65, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S66.

In S66, the main CPU 201 repeats the CPU reset wait process until power is cut off.

[1-6-4. Special symbol control process]
Next, the special symbol control process performed in S39 in the main control process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 26. Fig. 26 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 26, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S71. The control state number of the special symbol is a number that indicates the state (status) of the control process related to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S71, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S72.

Although not shown, when the main CPU 201 executes the special symbol control process, prior to the process of S71, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process to set the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, etc., in a predetermined register.

Although not shown, when executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 201 also performs a process to check the reserved number of the first special symbol and the reserved number of the second special symbol. Then, if the reserved number of the first special symbol and the reserved number of the second special symbol are both "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 201 performs a process to reserve the transmission of a demo display command. Note that the demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later). Then, when the sub-control circuit 300 receives the demo display command, the sub-CPU 301 performs a demo display performance.

In S72, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S71 is 0, i.e., whether the special symbol is in a variable display waiting state.

If it is determined in S72 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (if S72 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S75.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S72 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (if S72 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S73.

In S73, the main CPU 201 determines whether the second special symbol has started to be variably displayed, i.e., whether start information for the second special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S73 that the second special symbol has not started to be variable displayed, i.e., that the start information for the second special symbol is not pending (if S73 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S74.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S73 that the second special symbol has started to be variably displayed, i.e., that the start information for the second special symbol is pending (if S73 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S75.

In S74, the main CPU 201 determines whether the first special symbol has started to be variably displayed, i.e., whether start information for the first special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S74 that the first special symbol has not started to be variable displayed, i.e., that the start information for the first special symbol is not pending (if S74 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see Figures 20 to 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S74 that the first special symbol has started to be variably displayed, i.e., that the start information for the first special symbol is pending (if S74 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S75.

In S75, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 27. After executing the processing of S75, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIG. 20 to FIG. 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S71 to S75) within the interrupt prohibited section.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the first pachinko gaming machine is described as a priority variable machine in which the special symbol management process (S75) is executed with a higher priority than the first special symbol when the start information of the second special symbol is reserved, but this is not limited to this. For example, the first pachinko gaming machine may be a priority variable machine in which the special symbol management process (S75) is executed with a higher priority than the second special symbol when the start information of the first special symbol is reserved, or a sequential variable machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winning in the first start port 120 or the second start port 140.

[1-6-5. Special design management process]
Next, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 in S75 of the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26) will be described with reference to Fig. 27. Fig. 27 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

When the control state number is "0", the special pattern management process processes the second special pattern when the process of S73 (see FIG. 26) is judged as YES, and processes the first special pattern when the process of S74 (see FIG. 26) is judged as YES. Also, when the control state number is not "0", the special pattern management process processes the special pattern currently being executed.

The numbers ("0" to "5") in parentheses to the right of each process in FIG. 27 are the control state numbers for the special symbols. The main CPU 201 progresses the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the waiting time for the special pattern is 0 (S81).

If it is determined in S81 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (if S81 is determined to be NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S81 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (if S81 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S82.

In S82, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S82, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S83. The main CPU 201 performs the process of S83 and subsequent steps based on the control state number read in the process of S82.

In S83, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display start process. This S83 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 28. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S84.

In S84, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display end process. This S84 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 29. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S85.

In S85, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game determination process. This S85 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 30. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S86.

In S86, the main CPU 201 performs a process for preparing to open the large prize opening. This process of S86 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this process for preparing to open the large prize opening will be described later with reference to FIG. 40. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S87.

In S87, the main CPU 201 performs a large prize opening control process. This process of S87 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this large prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 41. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S88.

In S88, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot end process. This process in S88 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

After completing steps S83 to S88, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26).

[1-6-6. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in S83 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described with reference to Fig. 28. Fig. 28 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display start process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 28, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S91).

If it is determined in S91 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (if S91 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S91 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (if S91 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S92.

In S92, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of the start information of the special symbol. After executing the process of S92, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S93.

In S93, the main CPU 201 performs a hit determination process for the special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the hit determination table for the special symbol (see FIG. 10) and uses the random number value for the special symbol hit determination to determine whether the special symbol is a hit. In addition, the main CPU 201 sets the time-saving hit flag to ON if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a time-saving hit, and sets the big hit flag to ON if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a big hit. In the first pachinko game machine, the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol does not include a small hit, but in the case of a pachinko game machine in which the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol includes a small hit, the small hit flag is set to ON if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a small hit. After executing the process of S93, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S94. The time-saving hit flag is turned off when transitioning to the C time-saving game state, and the big hit flag is turned off when the big hit game state begins. If the result of the special symbol hit determination process for a pachinko game machine includes a small hit, the small hit flag is turned off when the small hit game state begins.

In the special symbol hit determination process (see S93), first, a process is performed to determine whether or not there is a jackpot, and if this process determines that there is no jackpot, a process is performed to determine whether or not there is a time-saving hit, and if this process determines that there is no time-saving hit, it is determined that there is a miss.

In S94, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol determination process. This process is a process for determining or deciding the stopping symbol of the special symbol that corresponds to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S93) (e.g., a time-saving hit, a big hit, or a miss). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 11) is referenced, and the symbol random number value of the special symbol is used to determine the above-mentioned "select symbol command" or "symbol designation command." After executing the process of S94, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S95.

In S95, the main CPU 201 performs a win type determination process. This process is a process for determining or deciding the type of win when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a hit (time-saving hit, big win). In this process, the win type determination table (see FIG. 13) is referenced and the type of win is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S94). In this embodiment, there are multiple types of wins, but there may be only one type of big win, or one type of time-saving hit. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to multiple types of wins, multiple types of misses may be provided. In this embodiment, the result of the special symbol hit determination process does not include a small win, but the result of the special symbol hit determination process may include a small win, and multiple types of such small wins may be provided. After executing the process of S95, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S96.

In S96, the main CPU 201 performs a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. This process is a process for judging or determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 15) is referenced, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, for example, according to the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S93), the value of the time-saving flag (0 or 1), the random number value for reach determination and/or the random number value for effect selection. Note that the variation pattern table referenced when performing the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol may differ depending on the game state, etc. After executing the process of S96, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S97.

In S97, the main CPU 201 performs a variable display time setting process for the special symbol. In this process, the change pattern table (see FIG. 15) is referenced, and the change time corresponding to the change pattern determined in the change pattern determination process for the special symbol (S96) is determined as the change time for the special symbol. After executing the process of S97, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S98.

In S98, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the special symbol variable display start process ends, the special symbol variable display end process (see S84 in FIG. 27) is performed. After executing the process of S98, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S99.

In S99, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, a process of updating parameters related to the game state (e.g., the number of times remaining in the special mode and the number of times remaining in the time-saving mode) stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 is performed. After executing the process of S99, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S100.

In S100, the main CPU 201 performs game status management processing. In this processing, the main CPU 201 performs update processing of various flags related to the management of the game status (e.g., probability bonus flag, time-saving flag, etc.). After executing the processing of S100, the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S101.

In S101, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process (particularly the game state management process (S100) and the special symbol presentation start command transmission reservation process (S101)) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[1-6-7. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, a special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S84 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described with reference to Fig. 29. Fig. 29 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display end process in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S111).

If it is determined in S111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (if S111 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (if S111 is determined as YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S112.

In S112, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (see S85 in FIG. 27) is performed after the special symbol variable display ending process is completed. After executing the process of S112, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S113.

In S113, the main CPU 201 executes a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect stop command. This process also includes a process for stopping the variable display of the special symbol. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later). After executing the process of S113, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S114.

In S114, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the determined symbol counter. The determined symbol counter is a counter for counting the number of times a special symbol is determined (the number of times the special symbol game has been played), and the count value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203. For example, a counter may be provided for managing the number of games of the special symbol game played under a specific state, such as the number of remaining times of the special symbol game or the number of remaining times of the time-saving game, or the number of games of the special symbol game played under a specific state may be managed by the determined symbol counter. After executing the process of S114, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-6-8. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S85 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described with reference to Fig. 30. Fig. 30 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game determination process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S121).

If it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (if S121 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (if S121 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S122.

At S122, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot.

If it is determined in S122 that a jackpot has been reached, i.e., that the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display pattern that indicates a jackpot (if S122 returns YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S123.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S122 that the jackpot has not been reached, i.e., that the stopped special symbol is not in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot (if S122 is judged as NO), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S130.

In S123, the main CPU 201 performs start setting processing for the jackpot game control processing. In this processing, signals (e.g., jackpot signals, etc.) output to the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6 for both) via the external terminal board 184 are generated and updated. Note that the signals generated and updated in this processing are signals related to the special symbols that are the subject of the special symbol game determination processing. After executing the processing of S123, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S124. Note that the signals output to, for example, the hall computer 186 or the island computer via the external terminal board 184 will be described later.

In addition, in the start setting process of the jackpot game control in S123, the main CPU 201 also performs processing to clear various flags and counters, such as the special chance flag, special chance counter, time-saving flag, and time-saving counter.

In S124, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as a process of setting the upper limit of the number of times the large prize opening 131 can be opened (S125), a process of setting a large prize signal to the external terminal board 184 (S126), a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S127), a process of setting a game state designation parameter (S128), and a process of reserving the transmission of a large prize start display command (S129). Note that by performing a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S127) to switch the control state number, the large prize opening preparation process (see S86 in FIG. 27) will be performed after the special symbol game judgment process is completed. After that, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game judgment process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

In S130, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 31. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 27).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited period and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S121 to S130) within the interrupt prohibited period.

[1-6-9. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, a special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 201 at S130 in the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 30) will be described with reference to Fig. 31. Fig. 31 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game ending process in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a time-saving management process (S131). Details of this time-saving management process will be described later with reference to Figures 32 to 39 for the first pachinko gaming machine. After executing the process of S131, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S132.

In S132, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" in this way, it becomes possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, i.e., the next special symbol game. After executing the process of S132, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S133.

In S133, the main CPU 201 performs a process for setting game state designation parameters for the special symbol. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving transmission of a special symbol game end command (S134). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later). Then, after processing S134, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 30).

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S93 in FIG. 28) is a miss, the main CPU 201 does not set or reset either the probability hit flag or the time-saving flag. Therefore, even if a miss display mode is derived, the game state does not change.

[1-6-10. Time-saving management process]
Next, the time-saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 32. Fig. 32 is a flow chart showing an example of the time-saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 in S131 during the special symbol game ending process (see Fig. 31) in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a counter update process (S141). Details of this counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 33. After executing the process of S141, the main CPU 201 advances the process to S142.

In S142, the main CPU 201 performs a counter determination process. Details of this counter determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36. After executing the process of S142, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving management process and returns the process to the special symbol game end process (see FIG. 31).

[1-6-11. Counter update process]
Next, the counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 33. Fig. 33 is a flow chart showing an example of the counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S141 during the time-shortening management process (see Fig. 32) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a time-saving counter update process (S151). Details of this time-saving counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34. After executing the process of S151, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S152.

In S152, the main CPU 201 performs a ceiling counter update process. Details of this ceiling counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 35. After executing the process of S152, the main CPU 201 ends the counter update process and returns the process to the time-saving management process (see FIG. 32).

[1-6-12. Time-saving counter update process]
Next, a time-saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 34. Fig. 34 is a flow chart showing an example of the time-saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S151 during the counter update process (see Fig. 33) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The time-saving counter update process shown in FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the process when multiple time-saving game states overlap and multiple time-saving game states are executed at the same time.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the time-saving flag is on and the time-saving counter is greater than 0 (S161). In this process, if both the time-saving flag is on and the time-saving counter is greater than 0, a YES determination is made, and if either of these conditions is not met, a NO determination is made.

The time-saving flag is set to ON when transitioning to time-saving play state A, time-saving play state B, or time-saving play state C. When transitioning to a high probability play state, the probability change flag is set to ON.

The time-saving counter indicates the number of time-saving operations executed in the A time-saving play state, the B time-saving play state, or the C time-saving play state.

When the conditions for transitioning to time-saving play state A, time-saving play state B and/or time-saving play state C are met, the time-saving counter for the time-saving play state for which the transition conditions are met is set.

In this embodiment, a subtraction method is adopted in which the time-saving counter is subtracted when the variable display of the special symbol ends, and the time-saving game state ends when the time-saving counter reaches 0. However, this is not limited to this, and an addition method may be adopted in which the time-saving counter is added when the variable display of the special symbol ends, and the time-saving game state ends when the time-saving counter reaches the set number of time-saving times. Also, instead of updating (subtracting or adding) the time-saving counter when the variable display of the special symbol ends, the time-saving counter may be updated when the variable display of the special symbol begins, and the time-saving game state may end when the time-saving counter reaches 0 (in the case of the subtraction method) or when the time-saving counter reaches the set number of time-saving times (in the case of the addition method).

If it is determined in S161 that both the time-saving flag on and the time-saving counter are not greater than 0 (if S161 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (Figure 33).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S161 that the time-saving flag is on and the time-saving counter is greater than 0 (YES in S161), the main CPU 201 performs a process to subtract 1 from the time-saving counter (S162). After executing the process of S162, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S163.

In S163, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time-saving mode is 3 and the C time-saving counter is greater than 0. In this process, if the time-saving mode is 3 and the C time-saving counter is greater than 0, a YES determination is made. If a YES determination is made in S163, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S164.

The C time-saving counter is a counter that is set when the conditions for transitioning to the C time-saving game state are met during the time-saving game state. Although this C time-saving counter is not shown in the flowchart, it is reset by the main CPU 201 when the B time-saving counter described below is set.

The time-saving mode is a flag that is set when multiple time-saving game states are executed in overlapping fashion. In this embodiment, the time-saving mode is configured, for example, with 2 bits, and is set to "time-saving mode = 3" when time-saving game state C is executed in overlapping fashion with a previously executed time-saving game state. Also, when time-saving game state B is executed in overlapping fashion with a previously executed time-saving game state, it is set to "time-saving mode = 2."

On the other hand, if it is determined in S163 that both the time-saving mode = 3 and the C time-saving counter is not greater than 0 are not satisfied (if S163 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S165.

In S164, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the C time-saving counter. This process may also be an addition process instead of a subtraction process. After executing the process of S164, the main CPU 201 advances the process to S165.

In S165, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time-saving mode is 2 and the B time-saving counter is greater than 0. In this process, if the time-saving mode is 2 and the B time-saving counter is greater than 0, a YES determination is made. If a YES determination is made in S165, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S166.

The B time-saving counter is a counter that is set when the conditions for transitioning to the B time-saving game state are met during the time-saving game state (in this embodiment, during the C time-saving game state). Although this B time-saving counter is not shown in the flowchart, it is reset by the main CPU 201 when the C time-saving counter is set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S165 that both the time-saving mode = 2 and the B time-saving counter being greater than 0 are not satisfied (if S165 is determined to be NO), the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

In S166, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the B time-saving counter. This process may also be an addition process rather than a subtraction process. After executing the process of S166, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

Although not shown, if the C time-saving counter = 0 as a result of processing S164, or if the B time-saving counter = 0 as a result of processing S166, the main CPU 201 sets the time-saving mode to off (= 0).

When multiple time-saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner, it is not limited to overlapping two time-saving game states, but three or more time-saving game states may be executed in an overlapping manner. In this case, as described above, the A time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state do not overlap, so a case in which three or more time-saving game states overlap corresponds to a case in which the A time-saving game state or the B time-saving game state overlaps with two or more C time-saving game states, and a case in which three or more C time-saving game states overlap.

[1-6-13. Ceiling counter update process]
Next, the ceiling counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 35. Fig. 35 is a flow chart showing an example of the ceiling counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S152 during the counter update process (see Fig. 33) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the ceiling count prohibition flag is off (S171). The ceiling count prohibition flag is a flag that is set on when the probability variable flag is set on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. In other words, when the probability variable flag is off and the ceiling counter has not reached the ceiling value, the ceiling count prohibition flag is off. The value of the ceiling counter is saved in the main RAM 203.

The ceiling value is a predetermined value specific to the pachinko game machine as a condition for transitioning to the B time-saving game state. However, instead of this, the main CPU 201 may perform processing to set the ceiling value when the big win game state ends, when a backup clear process is performed, when a dedicated operation means for resetting the value of the ceiling counter is operated, etc.

In S171, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is not off (if S171 is judged as NO), i.e., if the ceiling count prohibition flag is on, the main CPU 201 ends the ceiling counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

If the ceiling count prohibition flag is off in S171 (if S171 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S172.

In S172, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the ceiling counter. After executing the process of S172, the main CPU 201 ends the ceiling counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

[1-6-14. Counter Determination Process]
Next, the counter determination process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 36. Fig. 36 is a flow chart showing an example of the counter determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S142 during the time-shortening management process (see Fig. 32) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a time-saving transition determination process (S181). Details of this time-saving transition determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 37. After executing the process of S181, the main CPU 201 advances the process to S182.

In S182, the main CPU 201 performs a time-saving transition process. Details of this time-saving transition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 38. After executing the process of S182, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S183.

In S183, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time-saving counter is less than 1.

If it is determined in S183 that the time-saving counter is not less than 1 (NO in S183), i.e., the time-saving counter is 1 or greater, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S185.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S183 that the time-saving counter is less than 1 (YES in S183), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S184.

In S184, the main CPU 201 turns off the time-saving flag. After executing the process of S184, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S185.

If the time-saving counter is judged to be less than 1 in S183 (if S183 is judged YES), both the B time-saving counter and the C time-saving counter should be less than 1 (i.e., 0). However, in consideration of the possibility that some malfunction may occur in the execution of processing by the main CPU 201, for example, if the B time-saving counter or the time-saving counter is 1 or more despite the judgement of YES in S183, an abnormality process such as outputting an abnormality warning may be executed. Also, instead of or in addition to this abnormality process, when the judgement of YES in S183 is made, not only the time-saving flag may be turned off (see S184), but also the B time-saving counter and the C time-saving counter may be reset to ensure consistency between the time-saving counter, the B time-saving counter, and the C time-saving counter.

In S185, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process for the special symbol. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a time-saving transition command transmission reservation process (S186). The time-saving transition command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described below). Then, after processing S186, the main CPU 201 ends the counter determination process and returns the process to the time-saving management process (see FIG. 32).

[1-6-15. Time-saving transition determination process]
Next, the time-saving transition judgment process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 37. In this process, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, a judgment process for transitioning to the B time-saving game state is performed. Fig. 37 is a flow chart showing an example of the time-saving transition judgment process executed by the main CPU 201 in S181 during the counter judgment process (see Fig. 36) in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the special chance flag is off (S191).

If it is determined in S191 that the high probability flag is not OFF (if S191 is a NO determination), i.e., if the high probability flag is ON, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving transition determination process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36). In other words, if the high probability flag is ON, it is possible to prevent transition to the B time-saving game state.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S191 that the special chance flag is OFF (if S191 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S192.

In S192, the main CPU 201 determines whether the ceiling counter is at the ceiling value.

If it is determined in S192 that the ceiling counter is not at the ceiling value (if S192 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving transition determination process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S192 that the ceiling counter is at the ceiling value (if S192 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S193.

In S193, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling count prohibition flag to ON. After executing the process of S193, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S194.

In S194, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling flag to ON. The ceiling flag is a flag that indicates that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value. After executing the process of S194, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S195.

In S195, the main CPU 201 clears the ceiling counter. After executing the process of S195, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving transition determination process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

[1-6-16. Time-saving transition process]
Next, the time-saving transition process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 38. Fig. 38 is a flow chart showing an example of the time-saving transition process executed by the main CPU 201 in S182 during the counter determination process (see Fig. 36) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the special chance flag is off (S202).

If it is determined in S202 that the high probability flag is not off (if S202 is determined as NO), that is, if the high probability flag is on, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving transition process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36). By doing this, if the high probability flag is on, neither the B time-saving play state nor the C time-saving play state can be started.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S202 that the special chance flag is OFF (YES in S202), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S203.

In S203, the main CPU 201 determines whether the ceiling flag is ON.

If it is determined in S203 that the ceiling flag is not on (if S203 returns a NO judgment), i.e., if the ceiling flag is off, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S206.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S203 that the ceiling flag is on (YES in S203), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S205.

In S205, the main CPU 201 executes a B time-saving control mode determination process as a process related to transition to the B time-saving game state. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines the number of time-saving times to be set in the B time-saving counter, whether the time-saving mode is set to 2, and the time-saving performance, etc. After executing the process of S205, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S208.

The number of time-saving times set in the B time-saving counter is a predetermined number. Among the time-saving performances, the winning probability of a "normal symbol hit" is as shown in the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16). Among the time-saving performances, the opening pattern (number of times opening, opening time, wait time) of the normal electric device 146 is as shown in the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17) and the normal symbol hit type determination table (see FIG. 18). Among the time-saving performances, the variable display time of the normal symbol is as shown in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 19).

In S206, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time-saving hit flag is on.

If it is determined in S206 that the time-saving hit flag is not on (if S206 is judged as NO), i.e., if the time-saving hit flag is off, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving transition process and returns the process to the counter judgment process (see FIG. 36).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S206 that the time-saving hit flag is on (YES in S206), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S207.

In S207, the main CPU 201 executes a C time-saving control mode determination process as a process related to the transition to the C time-saving game state. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines the number of time-saving times to be set in the C time-saving counter, whether the time-saving mode is set to 3, and the time-saving performance, etc. After executing the process of S207, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S208.

The number of time-saving times set in the C time-saving counter is determined according to the selected symbol command by referring to the winning type determination table (see FIG. 13, for example). Among the time-saving performances, the winning probability of a "normal symbol hit" is as shown in the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16). Among the time-saving performances, the opening pattern (number of times opened, opening time, wait time) of the normal electric role device 146 is as shown in the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17) and the normal symbol hit type determination table (see FIG. 18). Among the time-saving performances, the variable display time of the normal symbol is as shown in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 19).

In S208, the main CPU 201 performs a time-saving setting process. Details of this time-saving setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 39. After executing the process of S208, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving transition process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

[1-6-17. Time-saving setting process]
Next, the time-saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 39. Fig. 39 is a flow chart showing an example of the time-saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 in S208 during the time-saving transition process (see Fig. 38) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the time-saving flag is on (S211).

If it is determined in S211 that the time-saving flag is on (if S211 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S212.

When S211 judges YES, this corresponds to the case where the sure-change flag is off and, for example, the time-saving play state B is executed in addition to the time-saving play state C being executed first (when the ceiling counter = ceiling value), or the time-saving play state A, time-saving play state B, or time-saving play state C is executed in addition to the time-saving play state C being executed first (when a "time-saving win" is won).

Although not shown, when the time-saving game state B is executed after the time-saving game state C has been executed first, the main CPU 201 sets "time-saving mode = 2" and sets the time-saving counter B determined in S205. When the time-saving game state C is executed after the time-saving game state A, the time-saving game state B, or the time-saving game state C has been executed first, the main CPU 201 sets "time-saving mode = 3" and sets the time-saving counter C determined in S207.

If it is determined in S211 that the time-saving flag is not on (S211 is a NO determination), i.e., if the time-saving flag is off, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S214.

In S212, the main CPU 201 compares the current time-saving counter (the number of remaining time-saving times in the previously executed time-saving game state) with the new number of time-saving times (the number of time-saving times determined in S205 or S207), and determines whether the current time-saving counter is smaller than the new number of time-saving times.

If it is determined in S212 that the current time-saving counter is not smaller than the new number of time-saving times (if S212 is a NO determination), i.e., if the current time-saving counter is greater than the new number of time-saving times, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving setting process and returns the process to the time-saving transition process (see FIG. 38).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S212 that the current time-saving counter is greater than the new number of time-saving times (if S212 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S213.

In S213, the main CPU 201 performs a time-saving counter reset process. In this process, when the time-saving game state B is executed while the time-saving game state C is executed first, or when the time-saving game state C is executed while the time-saving game state A, the time-saving game state B, or the time-saving game state C is executed first, the larger of the current time-saving counter value (i.e., the remaining number of time-saving times) and the new number of time-saving times is reset as the new time-saving counter. However, even if the time-saving counter reset process (S213) is performed, the main CPU 201 does not reset the time-saving counter B and the time-saving counter C. After executing the process of S213, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving setting process and returns the process to the time-saving transition process (FIG. 38).

When the time-saving game state B is executed while the time-saving game state C is executed first, or when the time-saving game state C is executed while the time-saving game state A, the time-saving game state B, or the time-saving game state C is executed first, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of the time-saving game state that was executed first. In other words, the time-saving performance of the time-saving game state that was executed first is not changed to the time-saving performance of the new time-saving game state, nor is it changed to the time-saving performance of the time-saving game state that corresponds to the larger of the current time-saving counter and the new number of time-saving times.

As described above, the time-saving performance is the performance that changes the ease with which the game ball can enter the winning hole (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting hole 140 (see FIG. 4)), and refers to the winning probability of a "normal symbol hit", the variable display time of the normal symbol, and/or the opening pattern of the normal electric device 146 (number of openings, opening time, wait time, etc.).

In this embodiment, the B time-saving counter and the C time-saving counter are provided to allow management of the fact that two time-saving game states are being executed in a superimposed manner internally. In the above-mentioned time-saving counter resetting process (S213), the larger of the current time-saving counter value and the new number of time-saving times is reset as the new time-saving counter. However, even if two time-saving game states are being executed in a superimposed manner internally, the time-saving performance that appears on the surface (that the player can grasp) is only the time-saving performance of one of the two time-saving game states that are being executed in a superimposed manner internally. Therefore, when multiple time-saving game states are executed in a superimposed manner without managing the fact that two time-saving game states are being executed in a superimposed manner internally (i.e., without providing the B time-saving counter and the C time-saving counter), the larger of the current time-saving counter value and the new number of time-saving times may be reset as the new time-saving counter.

In S214, the main CPU 201 performs a time-saving mode setting process. This process is performed when S211 is judged as NO, that is, when a transition is made from a non-time-saving game state to a time-saving B game state (when the ceiling counter = the ceiling value) or when a transition is made from a non-time-saving game state to a time-saving C game state (when a "time-saving hit" is won). In this process, the number of time-saving times and the time-saving performance determined in the time-saving B control mode determination process (S205) or the time-saving C control mode determination process (S207) are set. After executing the process of S214, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S215.

In S215, the main CPU 201 sets the time-saving flag to ON. After executing the process of S215, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving setting process and returns the process to the time-saving transition process (FIG. 38).

In this way, in the time-saving management process described above with reference to Figures 32 to 39, the main CPU 201 performs the process of transitioning to the B time-saving game state when the variable display of the special symbol as the ceiling final variation has ended. In this embodiment, the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol does not include a small hit, but in the case of a pachinko game machine in which the result of the hit determination process for the hit determination process includes a small hit, there may be cases in which the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol in the ceiling final variation is a small hit. In this way, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol in the ceiling final variation is a small hit, the main CPU 201 may perform the process of transitioning to the B time-saving game state based on the end of the small hit game state.

In the time-saving management process described above with reference to Figures 32 to 39, the main CPU 201 performs the transition process to the B time-saving game state when the variable display of the special symbol as the ceiling final variation ends, but this is not limited to this, and the transition process to the B time-saving game state may be performed based on the start of the variable display of the special symbol as the ceiling final variation. In particular, in the first pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variable displayed in parallel, it is preferable to perform the transition process to the B time-saving game state based on the start of the variable display of the special symbol as the ceiling final variation. This is because, if the transition to the B time-saving game state is made when the variable display of the special symbol as the ceiling final variation ends, if the variable display of one of the special symbols as the ceiling final variation begins during the variable display of the other special symbol, the benefit of the variable display of the other special symbol as the B time-saving game state cannot be obtained, and there is a risk of reducing interest. In the first pachinko game machine, the variable display of the special symbol is not performed with a long fluctuation of, for example, 600,000 msec. However, in a pachinko game machine in which the variable display of the special symbol can be performed with such a long fluctuation, by performing a transition process to the B time-saving game state based on the start of the variable display of the special symbol as the ceiling final fluctuation, it is possible to avoid a delay in the start of the B time-saving game state even if the variable display of the special symbol, which is the ceiling final fluctuation, is performed with a long fluctuation.

In addition, in the time-saving management process described above with reference to Figures 32 to 39, the B time-saving control mode determination process (S205) as the process related to the transition to the B time-saving play state is performed with priority over the C time-saving control mode determination process (S207) as the process related to the transition to the C time-saving play state (see S203 to S207 in Figure 38), but this is not limited to this. For example, the C time-saving control mode determination process (S207) as the process related to the transition to the C time-saving play state may be performed with priority over the B time-saving control mode determination process (S205) as the process related to the transition to the B time-saving play state.

In addition, in the above-mentioned ceiling counter update process described with reference to FIG. 35, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is not OFF (S171 in FIG. 35 judges NO), the ceiling counter is not updated, but this is not limited to the above. For example, in ST machines and pachinko gaming machines that perform a probability change drop lottery, the ceiling counter may be updated when a variable display of a special pattern is performed even if the probability change flag is ON. In this case, even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the game may not transition to the B time-shortened game state, but may transition to the B time-shortened game state when the difference between the ceiling counter and the probability change counter becomes the ceiling value. In this case, the main CPU 201 will not transition to the B time-shortened game state just because the "ceiling counter = ceiling value", but will perform processing to transition to the B time-shortened game state when the difference between the ceiling counter and the probability change counter becomes the ceiling value.

The ceiling value, which is the condition for transitioning to the B time-saving game state, is preferably within a predetermined range of the denominator of the jackpot probability when the special symbol flag is off (for example, 2.5 to 3.0 times). In this embodiment, as shown in the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 10), for example, the jackpot probability when the special symbol flag is off is 1 in 319 (when the setting value is 1), so the ceiling value is preferably within the range of 319 x 2.5 to 319 x 3.0 (times).

The upper limit of the B time-saving specified number of times, which is the end condition of the B time-saving game state, is preferably set to a specified multiple (e.g., 3.8 times) of the denominator of the jackpot probability when the special probability flag is off. Similarly, the upper limit of the C time-saving specified number of times, which is the end condition of the C time-saving game state, is preferably set to a value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability when the special probability flag is off by a specified number (e.g., up to 3.8 times the denominator of the jackpot probability). In this embodiment, since the jackpot probability when the special probability flag is off is 1 in 319 (when the setting value is 1), it is preferable to set the upper limit of both the B time-saving specified number and the C time-saving specified number to approximately 1212 (319 x 3.8). Note that it is not essential that the upper limit of the B time-saving specified number and the upper limit of the C time-saving specified number be the same value.

In the case of a pachinko machine like the first one, which can be set to any one of a number of settings with different jackpot probabilities, such as settings 1 to 6, the time-saving hit probability is the same for all settings, as described above. In such a case, if the ceiling value, which is the condition for transitioning to the B time-saving game state, is set to a value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability (when the probability variable flag is off) by a specified number (for example, 3.0) regardless of the setting value, the ceiling value will differ depending on the setting value, and there is a risk that the set setting value will be discovered by the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is preferable to set the ceiling value to the same value regardless of the setting value, regardless of the set setting value, rather than determining it by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability (when the probability variable flag is off) by a specified number.

[1-6-18. Modifications related to time-saving management processing]
In the time-saving management process described above with reference to Figs. 32 to 39 (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving management process of this embodiment"), the ceiling counter update process (see Fig. 35) is executed in the special symbol game end process (see Fig. 31). In addition, the process related to the transition to the B time-saving game state is performed with priority over the process related to the transition to the C time-saving game state. Furthermore, a transition flag (ceiling flag) to the B time-saving game state and a transition flag (time-saving hit flag) to the C time-saving game state are separately provided, and when the ceiling flag is on, the game is transitioned to the B time-saving game state, and when the time-saving hit flag is on, the game is transitioned to the C time-saving game state. However, the execution timing of the time-saving management process including the ceiling counter update process, the priority order between the transition to the B time-saving game state and the transition to the C time-saving game state, and whether the transition flag to the B time-saving game state and the transition flag to the C time-saving game state are separate or common are not limited to the above, and the time-saving management process can be performed with various variations.

For example, the timing for executing the time-saving management process, which includes the ceiling counter update process, may be set to when the fluctuation stops, and the process at the time of transition may be prioritized to the time-saving play state B, with a transition flag to the time-saving play state B and a transition flag to the time-saving play state C being set separately.

In addition, the timing for executing the time-saving management process, which includes the ceiling counter update process, may be set to when the fluctuation stops, and the process at the time of transition may be prioritized to the C time-saving play state, with a transition flag to the B time-saving play state and a transition flag to the C time-saving play state being set separately.

In addition, the timing for executing the time-saving management process, which includes the ceiling counter update process, may be set to when the fluctuation stops, and the game may transition to time-saving game state B after confirming that the "time-saving hit" is not a winning combination when the ceiling is reached.

In addition, the timing for executing the time-saving management process, which includes the ceiling counter update process, may be set to the start of fluctuation, and the process at the time of transition may be prioritized to the B time-saving play state, with a transition flag to the B time-saving play state and a transition flag to the C time-saving play state being set separately.

In addition, the timing for executing the time-saving management process, which includes the ceiling counter update process, may be set to the start of fluctuation, and the process at the time of transition may be prioritized to the time-saving play state C, with a transition flag to the time-saving play state B and a transition flag to the time-saving play state C being set separately.

In addition, the timing for executing the time-saving management process, which includes the ceiling counter update process, may be set to the start of fluctuation, the process at the time of transition may be prioritized to the time-saving B play state, and the transition flag to the time-saving B play state and the transition flag to the time-saving C play state may be set as a common flag.

In addition, the timing for executing the time-saving management process, which includes the ceiling counter update process, may be set to the start of fluctuation, the process at the time of transition may be prioritized to the time-saving play state C, and the transition flag to the time-saving play state B and the transition flag to the time-saving play state C may be set as a common flag.

Furthermore, if multiple time-saving game states are not executed at the same time, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the time-saving counter when the time-saving flag is on and the time-saving counter is greater than 0, and does not subtract 1 from the time-saving counter in other cases.

[1-7. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, referring to Fig. 40, a special prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 in S86 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 27) will be described. Fig. 40 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening preparation process in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S251).

If it is determined in S251 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (if S251 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S251 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (if S251 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S252.

In S252, the main CPU 201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of rounds played in the jackpot game state. The count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S252, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S253.

In S253, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of times the jackpot opening has been opened is the upper limit. In this process, it is determined whether the number of times the round play has been performed in the jackpot play state is the upper limit.

If it is determined in S253 that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened is the upper limit (if S253 is a YES judgement), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S254. On the other hand, if it is determined in S253 that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened is not the upper limit (if S253 is a NO judgement), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S257.

In S254, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5." In this way, by switching the control state number by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S254), the jackpot end process (see S88 in FIG. 27) is performed after the jackpot opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S254, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S255.

In S255, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a jackpot end display command (S256). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described below). Then, after processing S256, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

In S257, the main CPU 201 performs processing to add 1 to the round counter value. After executing the processing of S257, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S258.

In S258, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the large prize opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large prize opening 131 is opened, the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 131, the maximum number of winning balls into the large prize opening 131, the number of winning balls when the large prize opening 131 wins, etc. are set. The number of times the large prize opening 131 is opened corresponds to the number of rounds. Note that this is not intended to exclude cases where the large prize opening is opened multiple times in one round. In this case, however, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of times the large prize opening is opened and closed as separate processes. After executing the process of S258, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S259.

In S259, the main CPU 201 performs a special prize opening/closing control process. In this process, the main CPU 201 generates data for controlling the opening/closing of the special prize opening 131. After executing S259, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S260.

In S260, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4." In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S260) and switching the control state number, the large prize opening opening control process (see S87 in FIG. 27) is performed after the large prize opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S260, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S261.

In S261, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S261, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S262.

In S262, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of the large prize opening display command. The large prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described below). After executing the process of S262, the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-7-1. Large prize opening control process]
Next, referring to Fig. 41, a special prize opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S87 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 27) will be described. Fig. 41 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening control process in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S271).

If it is determined in S271 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (if S271 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S271 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (if S271 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S272.

In S272, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 131 is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the count switch 132 (see FIG. 6), which counts the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 131, is the maximum number of winning balls. The value of the large prize opening winning counter counted by the count switch 132 is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203.

If it is determined in S272 that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 131 is not the maximum number of winning balls (if S272 returns NO), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S273.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S272 that the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 131 is the maximum number of winning balls (if S272 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S274.

In S273, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the special prize opening 131 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the special prize opening related various setting process (see S258 in FIG. 40) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S273 that the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 131 has not elapsed (if S273 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening opening control process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S273 that the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 131 has elapsed (if S273 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S274.

In S274, the main CPU 201 performs a process for setting the closure of the large prize opening 131. After executing the process of S274, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S275.

In S275, the main CPU 201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S275) and switching the control state number, the large prize opening preparation process (see S86 in FIG. 27) will be performed again after this large prize opening control process is completed. After executing the process of S275, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S276.

In S276, the main CPU 201 executes a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing S276, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S277.

In S277, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving transmission of an inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described below) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S277, the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening control process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-7-2. Big win end processing]
Next, the big win end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S88 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described with reference to Fig. 42. Fig. 42 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win end process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S281).

If it is determined in S281 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (if S281 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end process and returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

If it is determined in S281 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (if S281 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S282.

In S282, the main CPU 201 executes a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, various flags (e.g., a probability change flag, a time-saving flag, etc.) are set, and the values of various counters (e.g., a probability change counter, a time-saving counter, a number of confirmed symbols counter, a round counter, a large prize slot winning counter, etc.) are set or reset. After executing S282, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S283.

In S283, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this processing, the special symbol game end processing described with reference to FIG. 31 is performed. After executing the processing of S283, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end processing and returns to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 27).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 set an interrupt prohibited area and perform the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interrupt prohibited area.

[1-7-3. Normal symbol control process]
Next, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S40 during the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 43. It goes without saying that, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in Fig. 43, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start condition for the normal symbol is satisfied, as in the special symbol control process.

Figure 43 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. Note that the numbers ("0" to "4") written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in Figure 43 are the control state numbers of the normal symbols. The main CPU 201 progresses the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol. Note that, for convenience, each process shown in Figure 43 is not shown as a subroutine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the waiting time for normal symbols is 0 (S291).

If it is determined in S291 that the waiting time for the normal symbol is not 0 (if S291 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process and returns the process to S41 (see FIG. 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S291 that the waiting time for the normal pattern is 0 (if S291 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S292.

In S292, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing the process of S292, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S293. The main CPU 201 performs the process of S293 and subsequent steps based on the control state number read in the process of S292.

In S293, the main CPU 201 performs variable display start processing for the normal symbol. This S293 processing is performed when the control state number for the normal symbol is "0". In this variable display start processing for the normal symbol, the main CPU 201 performs a win determination process for the normal symbol, a process to determine the variation pattern of the normal symbol, and if the result of the win determination process for the normal symbol is a win for the normal symbol, a process to set the opening pattern (number of times opening, opening time, wait time) of the normal electric role device 146. Note that if the control state number for the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S294.

In S294, the main CPU 201 performs processing to end the variable display of the normal symbol. This processing of S294 is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". In this processing, the main CPU 201 performs various processing when ending the variable display of the normal symbol. Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S295.

In S295, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol gameplay determination process. This S295 process is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". In this normal symbol gameplay determination process, a determination process is performed of the derived result of the normal symbol (for example, whether the normal symbol is a hit or a miss). Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S296.

In S296, the main CPU 201 performs a normal electric role release process. This S296 process is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". In this process, for example, the normal electric role 146 is released in a predetermined manner. Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S297.

In S297, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol win end processing. This S297 processing is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 ends this normal symbol win end processing, it ends the normal symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see Figures 20 to 23).

In this embodiment, as shown in the winning judgment table for normal symbols (see FIG. 16), the random numbers for winning judgment for normal symbols are generated in a range (width) of, for example, 0 to 99, and the winning judgment value data for normal symbols is, for example, 0 to 79 (in the case of a non-time-saving game state). The winning probability of a normal symbol is determined by the number of winning judgment value data for normal symbols relative to the total random numbers for winning judgment for normal symbols, so that, for example, the winning probability of a normal symbol is 80/100 in this embodiment. In this embodiment, this winning probability of a normal symbol is different when time-saving control is executed and when time-saving control is not executed, but may be the same or approximately the same. In addition, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed for a relatively long time, for example, 600,000 msec, in a non-time-saving game state in which time-saving control is not executed, whereas it is executed for a relatively short time, for example, 1,000 msec, in a game state in which time-saving control is executed. In this way, when time-saving control is executed, the frequency with which the normal electric device opening process is executed, i.e., the frequency with which game balls enter the second starting hole 140, is increased.

[1-7-4. External Maskable Interrupt Processing]
Next, an external maskable interrupt process executed under the control of the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 44. This process is an interrupt process executed in response to an external interrupt request generated, for example, when power is interrupted. Fig. 44 is a flow chart showing an example of the external maskable interrupt process in the first pachinko game machine.

First, the main CPU 201 performs a process of saving the protection register (S301). After executing the process of S301, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S302.

In S302, the main CPU 201 reads the state of a specific input port of the I/O port 205. The specific input port is, for example, an input port in which the state of a power interruption detection line, a backup clear switch line, a sensor abnormality detection line, a radio wave sensor line, an open detection line, a magnetic sensor line, a vibration sensor line, a solenoid monitoring sensor line, etc. is set. After executing the process of S302, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S303.

In S303, the main CPU 201 determines whether a power outage has been detected.

If it is determined in S303 that a power interruption has not been detected (if S303 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S305. On the other hand, if it is determined in S303 that a power interruption has been detected (if S303 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S304.

In S304, the main CPU 201 sets (turns on) the XINT detection flag. The XINT detection flag is a flag that indicates a power outage, and the value of the XINT detection flag is stored in the XINT detection flag area in the work area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S304, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S305.

In S305, the main CPU 201 performs a process of restoring the protection register that was saved in S301. After executing the process of S305, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S306.

In S306, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 ends the external maskable interrupt processing.

[1-7-5. System timer interrupt processing]
Next, a system timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 201 at an interrupt period of, for example, 2 msec will be described with reference to Fig. 45. Fig. 45 is a flow chart showing an example of the system timer interrupt process executed in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a protection register backup process (S311).

Next, the main CPU 201 determines whether the XINT detection flag is off (S312). If it is determined that the XINT detection flag is not off (i.e., a power interruption has been detected) (if S312 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S326. On the other hand, if it is determined that the XINT detection flag is off (i.e., a power interruption has not been detected) (if S312 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S313.

In S313, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process of reading the state of the input port of the I/O port 205 (S314) and moves the process to S315.

In S315, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not play is permitted. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not play is permitted based on, for example, the value of the startup control flag. The startup control flag is a flag for determining whether the startup state when the power is turned on is one of power failure recovery, setting change, setting check, RAM clear, etc. For example, if power failure recovery is selected, it is determined that play is permitted, and if setting change, setting check, RAM clear, etc. is selected, it is determined that play is not permitted.

The startup control flag is composed of a combination of on/off information for the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 when the power is turned on. For example, when the power is turned on, if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are off, it is determined that power has been restored; if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, it is determined that settings have been changed; if the backup clear switch 176 is off and the setting key 174 is on, it is determined that settings have been confirmed; and if the backup clear switch 176 is on and the setting key 174 is off, it is determined that the RAM has been cleared.

If it is determined in S315 that the game is not permitted (if S315 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 performs a setting control process (S316). In this setting control process, a setting change process or a setting confirmation process is performed. That is, in this embodiment, the setting change process and the setting confirmation process are performed within a system timer interrupt process that is performed, for example, at a 2 msec cycle, and are performed when the game is not permitted, i.e., when the game is not permitted. After executing the setting control process (S316), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S326. Details of the setting control process of S316 will be described later with reference to FIG. 46.

If play is not permitted (if S315 is judged as NO), it is preferable for the main CPU 201 to prohibit the launch of game balls from the launching device 6 (see FIG. 6), disable various switches except for specific switches (e.g., setting key 174, backup clear switch 176, etc.), and prohibit the payout of prize balls from the payout device 82.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S315 that play is permitted (if S315 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S317.

In S317, the main CPU 201 executes a process to increment the value of the interrupt counter by 1. The interrupt counter is a counter for counting (managing) interrupt prohibited intervals during the main control main process (see Figures 20 to 23), and the count value of the interrupt counter is stored in an interrupt counter area in the work area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S317, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S318.

In S318, the main CPU 201 performs an update process for the interrupt cycle timer. After executing the process of S318, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S319. Note that the interrupt cycle timer is a timer for managing the interrupt cycle (e.g., 2 msec), and the count value of the interrupt cycle timer is stored in the interrupt cycle management timer area in the working area of the main RAM 203.

In S319, the main CPU 201 performs a random number update process. In this random number update process, various random number counters (for example, a random number counter for determining a jackpot for a special symbol) are updated. In this way, by performing the random number update process at a predetermined cycle (2 msec in this embodiment), it is possible to ensure the reliability of various random numbers, which are an important factor in determining the number of balls dispensed. After executing the process of S319, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S320.

In S320, the main CPU 201 performs a switch input detection process. Details of this switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 51. After executing the process of S320, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S321.

In S321, the main CPU 201 executes a winning information command setting process. In this process, a winning information command (payout information) setting process is performed. After executing S321, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S322.

In S322, the main CPU 201 performs a performance control command transmission process. In this process, the command that is scheduled for transmission is transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub-control circuit 300. After executing the process of S322, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S323.

In S323, the main CPU 201 performs a register save process. After executing S323, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S324.

In S324, the main CPU 201 performs a performance display monitor control process. In this process, game judgment process, prize ball addition judgment process, display content update process of the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6), etc. are performed. The data stored in this process is stored in an area (outside the area) separate from the working area in which data necessary for the progress of the game is stored, that is, in an area that is backed up and where the data is not cleared even if, for example, the RAM is cleared. After executing the process of S324, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S325.

In S325, the main CPU 201 performs a process of restoring the registers that were saved in S323. After executing the process of S325, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S326.

In S326, the main CPU 201 performs the process of restoring the protection registers that were saved in S311, and ends the system timer interrupt process.

[1-7-6. Setting control process]
Next, the setting control process performed in S316 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 45) will be described with reference to Fig. 46. Fig. 46 is a flow chart showing an example of the setting control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 46, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the value of the startup control flag indicates a setting change (S331).

If it is determined in S331 that the value of the launch control flag is a value indicating a setting change (if S331 is determined as YES), the main CPU 201 performs a setting change process (S332). Details of this setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47. After executing the setting change process (S332), the main CPU 201 advances the process to S335.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S331 that the value of the start-up control flag is not a value indicating a setting change (if S331 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S333.

At S333, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the startup control flag is a value indicating setting confirmation.

If it is determined in S333 that the value of the launch control flag is a value indicating setting confirmation (if S333 is determined as YES), the main CPU 201 performs setting confirmation processing (S334). Details of this setting confirmation processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 48. After executing the setting confirmation processing (S334), the main CPU 201 advances the processing to S335.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S333 that the value of the startup control flag is not a value indicating confirmation of the setting, i.e., that the RAM is to be cleared (if S333 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S337.

In S335, the main CPU 201 executes a setting operation display process. In this process, the currently set setting value is displayed. After executing S335, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S336.

In S336, the main CPU 201 performs a performance control command transmission process. In this process, a command (initialization command, power interruption recovery command, or setting operation command) that is reserved for transmission in the setting change process (S332), setting confirmation process (S334), or startup initial setting process (see FIG. 25) is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300. After executing S336, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S337.

In S337, the main CPU 201 performs a WDT (watchdog timer) output process. In this process (WDT output process), a WDT clear register address read process, a WDT clear process, and a WDT restart process are performed in this order. Although not described in other processes, this WDT output process is performed as appropriate. Then, after processing of S337, the main CPU 201 ends the setting control process, and returns the process to the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 45).

[1-7-7. Setting change process]
Next, the setting change process performed in S332 in the setting control process (see FIG. 46) will be described with reference to Fig. 47. Note that Fig. 47 is a flow chart showing an example of the setting change process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the backup clear switch 176 has been pressed (S341). This process is performed by reading the information set in the input port of the I/O port 205.

If it is determined in S341 that the backup clear switch 176 has not been pressed (if S341 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S343. On the other hand, if it is determined that the backup clear switch 176 has been pressed (if S341 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S342.

In S342, the main CPU 201 performs a process of updating the set value within the range. After executing the process of S342, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S343.

In this embodiment, the setting value can be changed by operating the backup clear switch 176 in the setting change process, but instead of or in addition to this, for example, a setting switch may be provided so that the setting value can be changed by operating this setting switch.

In S343, the main CPU 201 determines whether the setting key 174 has been turned off (S343).

If it is determined in S343 that the setting key 174 has not been turned off (if S343 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46). On the other hand, if it is determined in S343 that the setting key 174 has been turned off (if S343 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S344.

In S344, the main CPU 201 performs a first normal game pre-processing. Details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 49. As described above, when this first normal game pre-processing is performed, the play permission flag is set to ON, and the game is permitted. After executing the first normal game pre-processing (S344), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change processing, and returns the processing to the setting control processing (see FIG. 46).

[1-7-8. Setting confirmation process]
Next, the setting confirmation process performed in S334 in the setting control process (see FIG. 46) will be described with reference to Fig. 48. Note that Fig. 48 is a flow chart showing an example of the setting confirmation process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the setting key 174 has been turned off (S351). This determination process is performed in the same manner as the process of S343 in the setting change process described above (see FIG. 47).

If it is determined in S351 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (if S351 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S351 that the setting key 174 has been turned off (if S351 is determined as YES), the main CPU 201 performs a second normal game pre-processing (S352). Details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 50. As described above, when this second normal game pre-processing is performed, the play permission flag is set to ON, and the game is permitted. After the second normal game pre-processing (S352) is executed, the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46).

[1-7-9. First normal game pre-processing]
Next, referring to Fig. 49, the first normal game pre-processing performed at S344 during the setting change processing (see Fig. 47) will be described. Fig. 49 is a flow chart showing an example of the first normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko game machine. Note that this first normal game pre-processing is also performed as the initial setting processing when the power failure recovery, setting change, and setting confirmation are not performed in the startup initial setting processing (see Fig. 24), that is, when the RAM is cleared.

The main CPU 201 first performs an initialization RAM setting process (S361). In this process, a clearing process (e.g., construction of a working area and address setting, etc.) of the area in the main RAM 203 where backup data is stored when power is interrupted (hereinafter referred to as the "backup area") is performed. Note that the area where data is stored in the performance display monitor control process (see S324 in FIG. 45) is not cleared. In this process, initial data is generated, and the generated initial data is stored in the constructed working area in the main RAM 203. That is, the data backed up when power is interrupted is erased, and the game state can be returned to the initialized state. Note that, although not shown, in this process, the game state is returned to the initialized state, making it possible to start playing, and the play permission flag is set to ON, resulting in a play permission state. After executing the initialization RAM setting process (S361), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S362.

In S362, the main CPU 201 executes a process for reserving transmission of an initialization command. The initialization command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in a presentation control command transmission process (S336) in the setting control process (see FIG. 46). When the process of S362 is executed, the main CPU 201 ends the first normal game pre-processing. When this first normal game pre-processing is ended, the play permission flag is set to ON, and the game is permitted.

[1-7-10. Second normal game pre-processing]
Next, referring to Fig. 50, the second normal game pre-processing performed in S352 during the setting confirmation process (see Fig. 48) will be described. Fig. 50 is a flow chart showing an example of the second normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. Note that this second normal game pre-processing is also executed as the initial setting process when the power is restored in the startup initial setting process (see Fig. 24).

The main CPU 201 first performs a RAM setting process when power is restored (S371). In this process, for example, data stored in the backup area in the main RAM 203 is read, and the read data is stored in the work area in the main RAM 203 that has been constructed. The above data is, for example, various information required to proceed with the game, such as game status information, the on/off state of the hit flags for special and normal symbols, and reserved number information. In other words, by restoring the data backed up at the time of power loss to the work area in the main RAM 203 again, it is possible to return to the same game status as before the power loss. Although not shown, in this process, the game can be started by returning to the same game status as before the power loss, and the game permission flag is set to on, resulting in a game permission state. After executing the RAM setting process when power is restored (S371), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S372.

In S372, the main CPU 201 determines whether the probability of winning is increased or decreased. This process is performed by reading data stored in the working area of the main RAM 203.

If it is determined in S372 that the special bonus flag is not on (if S372 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S374.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S372 that the probability of winning is increased (if S372 returns YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S373.

In S373, the main CPU 201 sets the high probability notification flag to ON. This is done to notify the state of the high probability notification flag when power is restored after the power outage. If the high probability notification flag is ON, the main CPU 201 controls, for example, a high probability notification LED (not shown) to be lit. This makes it possible to know from the outside whether the high probability flag is ON or not when power is restored after the power outage. After executing the process of S373, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S374.

In S374, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a power interruption recovery command. The power interruption recovery command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in a performance control command transmission process (S336) during the setting control process (see FIG. 46). After executing the process of S374, the main CPU 201 ends the second normal game pre-processing.

[1-7-11. Switch input detection process]
Fig. 51 is a flow chart showing an example of the switch input detection process by the main CPU 201. The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-mentioned system timer interrupt process. As shown in Fig. 51, the main CPU 201 executes the start hole winning detection process (S381). After executing the process of S381, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S382. The start hole winning detection process will be described later with reference to Fig. 52.

Next, the main CPU 201 executes a general prize opening passage detection process (S382). In the general prize opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts etc. when a prize is won through the general prize opening 122 is set. After executing the process of S382, the main CPU 201 proceeds to S383.

Next, the main CPU 201 executes a large prize opening passage detection process (S383). In the large prize opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts etc. at the time of a win at the large prize opening 131 is set. After executing the process of S383, the main CPU 201 advances the process to S384.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a ball passage detection process (S384). In the ball passage detection process, various random numbers (such as random numbers for determining whether a normal pattern is a winning symbol) for normal symbols are extracted based on the detection of the passage of the game ball through the pass gate 126 by the pass gate switch 127. The main RAM 203 has a normal pattern start memory area (1) to a normal pattern start memory area (4) in which various random numbers (such as random numbers for determining whether a normal pattern is a winning symbol) extracted based on the passage of the game ball through the pass gate 126 are reserved until the start condition of the normal pattern is satisfied. In addition, in the ball passage detection process, it is also determined whether there is free space in the normal pattern start memory area (1) to the normal pattern start memory area (4), that is, whether the number of reserved normal symbols extracted based on the passage of the game ball through the pass gate 126 is, for example, less than four. When this process is completed, the main CPU 201 ends the switch input detection process.

[1-7-12. Starting hole winning detection process]
52 is a flow chart showing an example of the start hole winning detection process by the main CPU 201. The start hole winning detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-mentioned switch input detection process.

As shown in FIG. 52, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first start switch 121 (S391).

If it is determined that the first start switch 121 has not detected a game ball (if S391 returns a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S398.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a game ball has been detected by the first start switch 121 (if S391 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S392.

In S392, the main CPU 201 extracts various random number values (for example, a random number value for determining whether the first special symbol is a jackpot, a symbol random number value for the first special symbol, a random number value for determining whether the first special symbol is in a reach state, and a random number value for selecting a performance for the first special symbol, etc.), and performs processing to set payout information according to the winning of the first starting port. After executing processing of S392, the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S393.

In S393, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of reserved first special symbols extracted based on the winning of the first start hole 120 is, for example, less than four. The main RAM 203 has the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory area (4) in which various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball in the first start hole 120 are reserved until the start condition is met, and in this process, it is determined whether there is free space in the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory area (4). In addition to the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory area (4), the main RAM 203 also has the first special symbol start memory area (0), which will be described later.

If the number of reserved first special symbols is not less than four, i.e., the upper limit of four (if S393 judges NO), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S398.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved first special symbols is less than four (if S393 returns YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S394.

In S394, the main CPU 201 performs a process to increment the number of reserved first special symbols by 1. After executing the process of S394, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S395.

In S395, the main CPU 201 performs a process of storing various random number values extracted based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first starting hole 120 in the main RAM 203 until the condition for starting the variation of the first special symbol is met. As a result, the display of the variation of the first special symbol for the extracted random number is suspended until the condition for starting the variation is met. After executing the process of S395, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S396.

In S396, the main CPU 201 performs a look-ahead determination process. This process is a process that uses the random number value extracted in S392 to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol and perform a win determination process, etc., prior to the special symbol winning determination process (see S93 in FIG. 28). It also determines whether or not the look-ahead flag is set.

The look-ahead determination process may be performed at any time between the extraction of the random number value in S392 and the execution of the special symbol winning determination process. However, in consideration of the fact that the sub-control circuit 300 performs the look-ahead performance before the variable display of the special symbol begins, it is preferable to perform the look-ahead determination process, for example, around the time of S395. After executing S396, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S397.

In S397, the main CPU 201 executes a process for reserving the transmission of a winning command for the first special pattern. The winning command for the first special pattern is a command that includes information for increasing the number of reserved first special patterns by 1, information on the variation pattern of the first special pattern (i.e., the variation pattern command for the special pattern), etc., and the winning command for the first special pattern reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45). After executing the process of S397, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S398.

In S398, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a game ball has been detected by the second start switch 141.

If it is determined that the second start port switch 141 has not detected a game ball (if S398 returns a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 ends the start port winning detection process and returns the process to the switch input detection process (see FIG. 51).

On the other hand, if it is determined that a game ball has been detected by the second start switch 141 (if S398 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S399.

In S399, the main CPU 201 extracts various random number values (for example, a random number value for determining whether the second special symbol is a jackpot, a symbol random number value for the second special symbol, a random number value for determining whether the second special symbol is in a reach state, and a random number value for selecting a performance for the second special symbol, etc.), and performs processing to set payout information according to winning the second starting port. After executing processing in S399, the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S400.

In S400, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of reserved second special symbols extracted based on winning at the second starting hole 140 is, for example, less than four.

The main RAM 203 has the second special symbol start memory area (1) to the second special symbol start memory area (4) in which various random number values extracted based on the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 140 are held until the start conditions are met, and in this process, it is determined whether there is free space in the second special symbol start memory area (1) to the second special symbol start memory area (4). The main RAM 203 also has the second special symbol start memory area (0) in addition to the second special symbol start memory area (1) to the second special symbol start memory area (4), but this will be described later.

If the number of reserved second special symbols is not less than four, i.e., the upper limit of four (if S400 judges NO), the main CPU 201 ends the start hole winning detection process and returns the process to the switch input detection process (see FIG. 51).

On the other hand, if the number of reserved second special symbols is less than four (if S400 returns YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S401.

In S401, the main CPU 201 performs a process to increment the number of reserved second special symbols by 1. After executing the process of S401, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S402.

In S402, the main CPU 201 performs a process of storing various random number values extracted based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 140 in the main RAM 203 until the condition for starting the variation of the second special symbol is met. As a result, the display of the variation of the second special symbol for the extracted random number is suspended until the condition for starting the variation is met. After executing the process of S402, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S403.

In S403, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a winning command for the second special symbol (S403). The winning command for the second special symbol is a command that includes information for increasing the number of reserved second special symbols by 1 and information on the variation pattern of the second special symbol, and the winning command for the second special symbol reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S403, the main CPU 201 ends the start hole winning detection process and returns the process to the switch input detection process (see FIG. 51).

[1-8. Sub-control processing]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control circuit 300 will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the sub-control circuit processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 53, the sub-CPU 301 first performs an initialization process (S501). In this initialization process, for example, RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, etc. are performed. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 moves the process to S502.

The above-mentioned initialization process (S501) is executed when the power is turned on or the backup is cleared, and after the power is turned on, the processes S502 to S508 described below are executed repeatedly.

In S502, the sub-CPU 301 performs a read process on the command input port 308 (see FIG. 6). This process is performed by reading the command sent from the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6) that is set in the command input port 308. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 moves the process to S503.

In S503, the sub-CPU 301 executes a command analysis process. In this process, the command read in the process of S502 is analyzed. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S504.

In S504, the sub-CPU 301 executes a presentation mode determination process. In this process, for example, the display presentation mode to be displayed on the display device 7 (see FIG. 4 and FIG. 6) and the sound presentation mode to be output from the speaker 32 (see FIG. 6) are determined based on the winning command sent from the main CPU 201.

In the performance mode determination process (S504), the sub-CPU 301 generates an animation request including designation information for the performance content, and generates various requests (e.g., drawing requests, sound requests, lamp requests, and prop requests) for operating various performance devices based on the generated animation request. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 moves the process to S505.

In S505, the sub-CPU 301 executes a drawing control process. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 transmits a drawing request to the display control circuit 304 (see FIG. 6). The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control to display an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on the message (drawing request) transmitted from the sub-CPU 301. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S506.

In S506, the sub-CPU 301 executes a voice control process. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 transmits a sound request to the voice control circuit 305 (see FIG. 6). The voice control circuit 305 performs voice control to output sound from the speaker 32 based on the message (sound request) transmitted from the sub-CPU 301. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S507.

In S507, the sub-CPU 301 executes an LED control process. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 sends an LED request to the LED control circuit 306 (see FIG. 6). Based on the message (LED request) sent from the sub-CPU 301, the LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control to light up or blink all or a portion of the LEDs that make up the LED group 46. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 moves the process to S508.

In S508, the sub-CPU 301 executes a reel control process. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 sends a reel request to the reel control circuit 307 (see FIG. 6). Based on the message (reel request) sent from the sub-CPU 301, the reel control circuit 307 performs drive control to operate the performance drive motors (not shown) for all or some of the reels that make up the performance reel group 58. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 ends the sub-control circuit main process.

[1-9. Specific example of the performance mode determination process by the sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 300 (more specifically, the sub-CPU 301) performs a presentation mode determination process (see S504 in FIG. 53) based on the winning command sent from the main control circuit 200.

As one of the various processes performed in the presentation mode determination process, the sub-CPU 301 performs, for example, a sub-variation presentation pattern determination process that determines the presentation pattern (hereinafter referred to as the "sub-variation presentation pattern") of the sub-variation presentation corresponding to the current special symbol variation (hereinafter referred to as the "variation"), and a look-ahead presentation pattern determination process that determines the presentation pattern (hereinafter referred to as the "look-ahead presentation pattern") of the look-ahead presentation. In addition, the presentation mode determination process also performs determination processes of various presentation modes related to the progress of the game, such as the presentation mode of a countdown presentation that suggests that the ceiling counter is approaching the ceiling value, and the presentation mode of a B time-saving play state transition presentation that suggests that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value.

The sub-variation presentation pattern determination process is performed based on the results of the special symbol hit determination process. The sub-variation presentation pattern is a presentation pattern (e.g., decorative symbol variation pattern, character presentation pattern, etc.) that is performed by the sub-CPU 301 in the display area of the display device 7 in conjunction with the variable display of the special symbol as a presentation that indicates the expected outcome of the variation.

In the sub-variable performance, depending on the sub-variable performance pattern being executed, it is possible to show that the expectation level for the result of the special symbol winning determination process is maintained or increased as time passes from when the variable display of the special symbol starts to when the special symbol stops.

The sub-variable performance patterns include, for example, time-saving hit type reaches A, B, C, jackpot hit type reaches A, B, C, and common reaches A, B, C, D, E, etc., as shown in FIG. 54 described below. As described above, time-saving hit type reaches A, B, C are reach performances that indicate that the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol (see S93 in FIG. 28) may be a time-saving hit (no possibility of a jackpot). Jackpot hit type reaches A, B, C are reach performances that indicate that the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol may be a jackpot (no possibility of a time-saving hit). Common reaches A, B, C, D, E are reach performances that indicate that the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol may be either a time-saving hit or a jackpot.

For example, if the timing of executing a countdown effect that indicates the timing of transition to the B time-saving game state overlaps with the timing of executing a reach effect, the sub-CPU 301 may give priority to executing one of the effects.

The pre-reading performance pattern determination process is performed based on, for example, the variation pattern of the special symbol determined as a result of the pre-reading judgment process. The pre-reading performance is a performance pattern performed by the sub-CPU 301 in the display area of the display device 7 while in a pending state (i.e., after a winning entry into the first starting hole 120, until the starting information such as various random numbers extracted based on this winning entry is provided to the winning judgment process of the special symbol (the variable display of the special symbol begins)) as a performance indicating the degree of expectation for the result of the pre-reading judgment process.

Depending on the look-ahead performance pattern being executed, when in a pending state, the look-ahead performance can show that the expectation level for the result of the look-ahead determination process is maintained or increased as time passes (more specifically, as the variable display of the previously held start information progresses).

The look-ahead performance is performed, for example, by using a pending image displayed on the display device 7. The pending image is an image that shows the current pending status.

The look-ahead performance pattern includes a look-ahead winning type performance pattern that can suggest the expected value for the result type (whether it is a time-saving winning or a jackpot) of the look-ahead judgment process, i.e., the special pattern winning judgment process, and a look-ahead expectation value performance pattern that can suggest the expected value for the result of the special pattern winning judgment process being a winning (jackpot or time-saving winning). In other words, the look-ahead performance can suggest both or either of the expected value for the result type of the special pattern winning judgment process and the expected value for the result of the special pattern winning judgment process being a winning. In addition, in the look-ahead performance pattern determination process (see FIG. 59 described below), a look-ahead winning type performance pattern determination process (see S3006 in FIG. 59 described below) and a look-ahead expectation value performance pattern determination process (see S3008, S3009 in FIG. 59 described below) are performed. Specific examples of the look-ahead hit type presentation pattern, the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern, the look-ahead hit type presentation pattern determination process, and the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination process will be described later.

[1-9-1. Sub-variable performance pattern determination process]
First, the sub-variation presentation pattern determination process will be described. Figure 54 is an example of a sub-variation presentation pattern determination table (detailed description omitted) in a game state where the time-saving flag is off (normal game state). This sub-variation presentation pattern determination table is stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 of the first pachinko game machine. The program ROM 302 also stores a sub-variation presentation pattern determination table in a game state where the time-saving flag is on (high-probability time-saving game state, low-probability time-saving game state), but the description will be omitted here.

The sub-CPU 301 refers to the sub-variation presentation pattern determination table in the normal game state of FIG. 54, and determines the sub-variation presentation pattern (shown as "variation pattern" in FIG. 54) to be displayed on the display device 7 as the variation presentation pattern corresponding to the variation based on the variation pattern command of the special symbol sent from the main control circuit 200. As described above, in this embodiment, the sub-variation presentation patterns include time-saving hit type reaches A, B, and C, big hit type reaches A, B, and C, and common reaches A, B, C, D, and E.

As described above, the time-saving hit system reaches A, B, and C are reach effects that indicate the possibility of a time-saving hit, and are reach effects that allow the player to grasp the possibility of a time-saving hit from the appearance. The time-saving hit system reach A is not displayed if the result of the hit determination process for the special pattern is a miss or a big hit, and is a time-saving hit guaranteed reach effect that is displayed only when it is a "time-saving hit" (see FIG. 15). This time-saving hit system reach A is not a sub-variable performance pattern for the pre-reading target, but is not limited to this, and may be a sub-variable performance pattern for the pre-reading mode. The time-saving hit system reach B and the time-saving hit system reach C have the same or approximately the same performance mode in appearance. However, while the time-saving hit system reach B is not a sub-variable performance pattern for the pre-reading target, the time-saving hit system reach C is a sub-variable performance pattern for the pre-reading target (see the "pre-reading flag" column in FIG. 15, FIG. 54, and FIG. 55 described below).

As described above, the jackpot-related reaches A, B, and C are reach effects that indicate the possibility of a jackpot, and can be seen from the outside to indicate the possibility of a jackpot. The jackpot-related reach A is a jackpot-guaranteed reach effect that is not displayed if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a miss or a "time-saving hit" and is displayed only if it is a "jackpot" (see FIG. 15). This jackpot-related reach A is not a sub-variation performance pattern that is a pre-reading target, but is not limited to this and may be a sub-variation performance pattern that is a pre-reading mode. The appearance of the jackpot-related reach B and the jackpot-related reach C is the same or approximately the same. However, while the jackpot-related reach B is not a sub-variation performance pattern that is a pre-reading target, the jackpot-related reach C is a sub-variation performance pattern that is a pre-reading target (see the "pre-reading flag" column in FIG. 15).

As described above, common reaches A, B, C, D, and E are reach effects that indicate the possibility of either a jackpot or a time-saving hit, and are reach effect modes that make it difficult to know whether there is a possibility of a time-saving hit or a jackpot in terms of appearance. Common reach A is a hit (jackpot, time-saving hit) confirmed reach effect that is not displayed if the result of the hit determination process for the special pattern is a miss, and is displayed only if there is a jackpot or a "time-saving hit" (see Figure 15). Common reach B and common reach C have the same or nearly the same appearance effect mode. Furthermore, common reach D is an effect that develops from common reach C to time-saving hit reach C. Furthermore, common reach E is an effect that develops from common reach C to jackpot reach C. Note that common reach A and common reach B are not sub-variable performance patterns that are subject to pre-reading, whereas common reach C, common reach D, and common reach E are sub-variable performance patterns that are subject to pre-reading (see the "Pre-reading flag" column in Figure 15).

In this way, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the sub-variation performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 54) and determines the sub-variation performance pattern based on the special symbol variation pattern command sent from the main CPU 201. Then, the sub-CPU 301 controls the display device 7 to display the determined sub-variation performance pattern.

[1-9-2. Pre-reading performance pattern determination process]
Next, a pre-reading winning type presentation pattern determination process and a pre-reading expected value presentation pattern determination process, which are performed as the pre-reading presentation pattern determination process, will be described.

In addition, the work RAM 303 (see FIG. 6) is provided with the first sub-reserved area (0), the first sub-reserved area (1), the first sub-reserved area (2), the first sub-reserved area (3), and the first sub-reserved area (4) as areas corresponding to the first special symbol start memory area (0), the first special symbol start memory area (1), the first special symbol start memory area (2), the first special symbol start memory area (3), and the first special symbol start memory area (4) provided in the main RAM 203, respectively. Various reserved information related to the extracted random number value is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory area (4) and the first sub-reserved area (1) to the first sub-reserved area (4). In addition, the first special symbol start memory area (0) and the first sub-reserved area (0) store information corresponding to the fluctuation. When the sub-CPU 301 receives a winning command for the first start port winning, it stores the received information in the first sub-reserve area that corresponds to the current first special symbol start memory area.

In addition, the work RAM 303 is provided with a second sub-reserve area (0), a second sub-reserve area (1), a second sub-reserve area (2), a second sub-reserve area (3), and a second sub-reserve area (4) as areas corresponding to the second special pattern start memory area (0), the second special pattern start memory area (1), the second special pattern start memory area (2), the second special pattern start memory area (3), and the second special pattern start memory area (4) provided in the main RAM 203, respectively.

In this embodiment, the pre-reading performance is performed for the first special symbol in the normal game state, but it is not limited to this and may be performed in other game states (e.g., high probability time-saving game state, low probability time-saving game state), or may be performed for the second special symbol.

The pre-reading performance is performed, for example, by using pending images displayed in the display area of the display device 7. The display area of the display device 7 has the following areas for displaying pending images: a zeroth area corresponding to the first sub-pending area (0), a first pending area corresponding to the first sub-pending area (1), a second pending area corresponding to the first sub-pending area (2), a third pending area corresponding to the first sub-pending area (3), and a fourth pending area corresponding to the first sub-pending area (4).

[1-9-2-1. Tables referenced in the pre-reading winning type performance pattern determination process]
The tables referenced in the pre-reading winning type presentation pattern determination process will be described below.

The reserved image forms in which the pre-reading performance is executed with the determined pre-reading hit type performance pattern include a time-saving hit type pre-reading performance form that indicates that there is a possibility of a time-saving hit, a jackpot type pre-reading performance form that indicates that there is a possibility of a jackpot, and a common hit type pre-reading performance form that indicates that there is a possibility of both a time-saving hit and a jackpot.

The predictive hit type presentation pattern is a presentation pattern that can suggest a change in the expected value for the result type of the special symbol hit determination process by changing the form of the reserved image, for example, from a common hit type predictive presentation form to a time-saving hit type predictive presentation form, or from a common hit type predictive presentation form to a jackpot type predictive presentation form.

Figure 55 is an example of a pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number determination table. Of the variation patterns shown in Figure 54, Figure 55 shows only the variation patterns that are the pre-reading targets. Also, Figure 56 is an example of a pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table. These tables are stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in the pre-reading winning type presentation pattern determination table number determination table in FIG. 55, when the sub-CPU 301 receives a fluctuation pattern in which the pre-reading flag is set, the sub-CPU 301 determines the pre-reading winning type presentation pattern determination table number, for example, based on the fluctuation pattern and the reserved number. The reserved number here includes the start information to be pre-read. In other words, when the start information extracted based on the winning of the first start port 120 is reserved, the reserved number after the reservation corresponds to the reserved number shown in FIG. 55.

For example, if the fluctuation pattern is "03H" and the reserved number is "3", the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number is determined to be "3". Also, for example, if the fluctuation pattern is "0EH" and the reserved number is "2", the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number is determined to be "22".

When the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number is determined, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table in FIG. 56 to determine the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern. In more detail, as shown in the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table in FIG. 56, for example, the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern is determined based on the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number and the sub-presentation selection random number value 1.

In FIG. 56, for the sake of convenience, the "pre-reading winning type presentation pattern determination table number" is shown as the "SASPT number" and the "pre-reading winning type presentation pattern" is shown as the "SAS presentation pattern." The random number value 1 for sub-presentation selection is a random number value extracted by the sub-CPU 301 based on a specified trigger, such as when a special symbol variation pattern command is received.

For example, if the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number is "3" and the extracted random number value 1 for selecting sub-presentation is "55", the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern is determined to be "07H". Also, if the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number is "7" and the extracted random number value 1 for selecting sub-presentation is "77", the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern is determined to be "16H".

Note that "1" to "4" shown in the Notes (Reserved) column in Figure 56 indicate the first to fourth reserved areas, respectively.

In addition, in each of the "1" to "4" columns of the Notes (Reserved) in Figure 56, the "A" shown in correspondence with the look-ahead hit type presentation pattern determination table number and the random value 1 for sub-presentation selection indicates that the reserved image is displayed in a time-saving hit type look-ahead presentation format, which indicates that the result of the special pattern hit determination process may be a time-saving hit. When the reserved image is displayed in a time-saving hit type look-ahead presentation format, it can be seen from the outside that there is a possibility of a time-saving hit.

In addition, in each of the "1" to "4" columns of the Notes (Reserved) in Figure 56, the "B" shown in correspondence with the look-ahead hit type presentation pattern determination table number and the random number value 1 for sub-presentation selection indicates that the reserved image is displayed in a jackpot-type look-ahead presentation format, which indicates that the result of the special pattern hit determination process may be a jackpot. When the reserved image is displayed in a jackpot-type look-ahead presentation format, it can be seen from the outside that there is a possibility of a jackpot.

In addition, in each of the "1" to "4" columns of the Notes (Reserved) in Figure 56, the "C" shown in correspondence with the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number and the random value 1 for sub-presentation selection indicates that the reserved image is displayed in a common-hit pre-reading presentation format, which indicates that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be either a time-saving hit or a jackpot. When the reserved image is displayed in a common-hit pre-reading presentation format, it is difficult to tell from the outside whether there is a possibility of a time-saving hit or a jackpot.

For example, if the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern is determined to be "07H", the common hit type pre-reading presentation form "C" is displayed in the third reserved area, and the common hit type pre-reading presentation form "C" is also displayed in the second reserved area after shifting from the third reserved area. Then, when shifting from the second reserved area to the first reserved area, the common hit type pre-reading presentation form "C" changes to the time-saving hit type pre-reading presentation form "A", and the time-saving hit type pre-reading presentation form "A" is displayed in the first reserved area.

In addition, if the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern is determined to be, for example, "16H", the common hit type pre-reading presentation form "C" is displayed in the third reserved area. Then, when shifting from the third reserved area to the second reserved area, the common hit type pre-reading presentation form "C" changes to the big hit type pre-reading presentation form "B", and the big hit type pre-reading presentation form "B" is displayed in the second reserved area and in the first reserved area after being shifted from the second reserved area.

That is, the pre-reading hit type performance pattern includes the following patterns A) to E) as shown in Fig. 56. In this embodiment, the pattern of changing from the big hit type pre-reading performance form "B" to the time-saving hit type pre-reading performance form "A" and the pattern of changing from the time-saving hit type pre-reading performance form "A" to the big short hit pre-reading performance form "B" are not included in the pre-reading hit type performance pattern, but these patterns may be included in the pre-reading hit type performance pattern.
(i) A pre-reading time-saving hit presentation pattern in which a pre-reading presentation form for a time-saving hit is displayed at the time of being put on hold, and the presentation form does not change thereafter, and a pre-reading presentation form for a time-saving hit is displayed (for example, pre-reading hit type presentation pattern "09H").
(b) A pre-reading jackpot presentation pattern in which a jackpot-type pre-reading presentation form is displayed at the time of being put on hold, and the presentation form does not change thereafter, and the jackpot-type pre-reading presentation form is displayed (for example, pre-reading jackpot type presentation pattern "17H").
(c) At the time of being put on hold, a common hit type pre-reading presentation form is displayed, and then it changes to a time-saving hit type pre-reading presentation form, pre-reading common hit presentation pattern A (for example, pre-reading hit type presentation pattern "24H").
ii) When placed on hold, it is displayed in a common win type pre-reading presentation format, and then changes to a jackpot type pre-reading presentation format, a pre-reading common win presentation pattern B (for example, pre-reading win type presentation pattern "12H").
(e) When the ball is put on hold, it is displayed in a common hit type pre-reading presentation format, and the presentation format does not change thereafter, and the common hit type pre-reading presentation format is displayed in a pre-reading common hit presentation pattern C (for example, pre-reading hit type presentation pattern "06H").

In this way, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number determination table (see, for example, FIG. 55) and determines the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number (SASPT number) based on the fluctuation pattern and the number of reserved items. Then, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table (see FIG. 56) and determines the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern (SAS presentation pattern) based on the determined pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number (SASPT number) and the random number value 1 for sub-presentation selection.

In FIG. 56, the time-saving hit type pre-reading performance form "A" is displayed at the time of reservation, and the pre-reading hit type performance pattern that changes to the jackpot type pre-reading performance form "B" after that is not shown, but the pre-reading hit type performance pattern that changes from the time-saving hit type pre-reading performance form "A" to the jackpot type pre-reading performance form "B" in this way may be determined by the sub-CPU 301. By doing so, it is possible to increase the interest that the pre-reading performance can provide to the player.

56, the big win type pre-reading performance form "B" is a big win type pre-reading performance form that indicates that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be a big win (i.e., there is also a possibility of a miss), as described above, but in addition to this, a big win confirmation pre-reading performance form that indicates that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big win confirmation may be displayed. In this case, the pre-reading hit type performance pattern determined by the sub-CPU 301 may include any or all of the following pre-reading type performance patterns E) to H).
(e) A pre-reading jackpot confirmed presentation form is displayed at the time of being put on hold, and the presentation form does not change thereafter, and the pre-reading jackpot confirmed presentation form is displayed.
(d) When the display is put on hold, other pre-reading presentation forms (for example, a time-saving hit type pre-reading presentation form "A", a jackpot type pre-reading presentation form "B", a common hit type pre-reading presentation form "C", etc.) are displayed, and then the pre-reading jackpot confirmed presentation form changes to a jackpot confirmed pre-reading presentation form, a pre-reading jackpot confirmed presentation pattern B.
(c) At the time of being put on hold, another look-ahead presentation form (for example, a time-saving hit type look-ahead presentation form "A", a common hit type look-ahead presentation form "C", etc.) is displayed, then a big hit type look-ahead presentation form "B" is displayed, and then it changes to a look-ahead big hit confirmed presentation form C, which changes to a big hit confirmed look-ahead presentation form.

In addition, in FIG. 56, among the time-saving hit type pre-reading presentation form "A", the jackpot type pre-reading presentation form "B", and the common hit type pre-reading presentation form "C", the common hit type pre-reading presentation form "C" is most frequently displayed at the time of reservation, but this is not limited to this. For example, the time-saving hit type pre-reading presentation form "A" may be displayed most frequently at the time of reservation, or the jackpot type pre-reading presentation form "B" may be displayed most frequently at the time of reservation. Furthermore, the common hit type pre-reading presentation form "C" may be displayed least frequently at the time of reservation.

In addition, in FIG. 56, a random number value of 1 for selecting sub-effects within a predetermined range is assigned to all "pre-reading winning type effect pattern determination table numbers (SASPT numbers)", but this is not limited to this, and it is also possible to not assign a random number value for selecting sub-effects to only certain SASPT numbers (i.e., the allocation rate for certain SASPT numbers is set to 0 so that they are not selected).

[1-9-2-2. Tables referenced in the process of determining the expected value effect pattern ahead of time]
Next, a table to be referred to in the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination process will be described.

Figure 57 is an example of a look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination table (when a win occurs) that is referenced when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" or a "jackpot." Also, Figure 58 is an example of a look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination table (when a miss occurs) that is referenced when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss.

The form of the reserved image in which the look-ahead performance is executed in the determined look-ahead expected value performance pattern differs depending on the expected value for a win (time-saving win, jackpot).

When a reserved image is displayed as a time-saving hit-reading performance format, for example, the reserved image, which is usually displayed as a triangle, can be changed in shape to show a change in expected value, such as "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle < star." In this case, the expected value is lowest when the reserved image is a square, and highest when the image is a star.

In addition, when a reserved image is displayed as a jackpot-type pre-reading performance, for example, the reserved image, which is usually displayed in white, can be changed in color to show a change in expected value, such as "blue < yellow < green < red < rainbow." In this case, when the reserved image is blue, the expected value is the lowest, and when the reserved image is rainbow, the expected value is the highest.

In addition, although details will be described later, when the reserved image is displayed as a common win type pre-reading presentation format that indicates the possibility of either a jackpot or a time-saving win, the reserved image may be displayed, for example, as both a color indicating the expected value level for a jackpot and a shape indicating the expected value level for a time-saving win, or it may be displayed in a dedicated common win type pre-reading presentation format.

Although the reserved image for which the look-ahead performance is performed can change from a performance form with a relatively low expected value to a performance form with a relatively high expected value, it is preferable not to change from a performance form with a relatively high expected value to a performance form with a relatively low expected value. Furthermore, when changing the performance form of the reserved image, it is not necessarily necessary to change one by one in the order of "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle < star" or "blue < yellow < green < red < rainbow", but it may be changed, for example, from "pentagon → circle" or "yellow → rainbow". Furthermore, it is not necessarily necessary to start the reserved image form with a square or blue, which have the lowest expected value, but it may start with a circle or red, for example.

Note that "1" to "4" shown in the Notes (Reserved) column in Figure 57 indicate the first to fourth reserved areas, respectively, just like in Figure 56.

In addition, in each of the "1" to "4" columns in the "Notes (Reserved)" column in FIG. 57, the "0" to "5" shown in correspondence with the pre-reading winning type performance pattern determination table number and the random number value 2 for selecting sub-performance indicates the expected value for a win (time-saving win, big win). For example, the above-mentioned "triangle" and "white" correspond to "0", the above-mentioned "square" and "blue" correspond to "1", the above-mentioned "pentagon" and "yellow" correspond to "2", the above-mentioned "hexagon" and "green" correspond to "3", the above-mentioned "circle" and "red" correspond to "4", and the above-mentioned "star" and "rainbow" correspond to "5".

Hereinafter, in the "1" to "4" columns of the Notes (Reserved) column in Figure 57, the "0" to "5" shown in correspondence with the pre-reading winning type presentation pattern determination table number and the random number value 2 for selecting sub-presentations will be referred to as expected value levels "0" to "5".

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" or a "jackpot", the look-ahead expectation value presentation pattern is determined based on, for example, the reserved number and the random number value 2 for selecting the sub-effect, as shown in the look-ahead expectation value presentation pattern determination table (when a hit) in FIG. 57. Similarly, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, the look-ahead expectation value presentation pattern is determined based on, for example, the reserved number and the random number value 2 for selecting the sub-effect, as shown in the look-ahead expectation value presentation pattern determination table (when a miss) in FIG. 58. The random number value 2 for selecting the sub-effect is a random number value extracted by the sub-CPU 301 based on a specified trigger, such as when a special symbol change pattern command is received. Note that in FIG. 57 and FIG. 58, only the reserved number values of "1" to "3" are illustrated, and the illustration of the reserved number value of "4" is omitted for convenience.

For example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the reserved number is "3", and the random number value 2 for selecting sub-effects is "750", the look-ahead expected value performance pattern is determined to be "43H". If the look-ahead expected value performance pattern is determined to be "43H", for example, the expected value level is "2" in the third reserved area, the expected value level changes from "2" to "3" when shifting from the third reserved area to the second reserved area, and the expected value level changes from "3" to "5" when shifting from the second reserved area to the first reserved area.

Also, for example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, the reserved number is "3", and the random number value 2 for selecting sub-effects is "680", the look-ahead expected value performance pattern is determined to be "3FH". If the look-ahead expected value performance pattern is determined to be "3FH", for example, the expected value level is "2" in the third reserved area, the expected value level is "2" in the second reserved area, and when shifting from the second reserved area to the first reserved area, the expected value level changes from "2" to "4".

In this way, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination table (when a win occurs) (see FIG. 57) or the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination table (when a miss occurs) (see FIG. 58) based on the result of the special pattern hit determination process, and determines the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern based on the number of reserved numbers and the random number value 2 for selecting sub-presentations.

In addition, if the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" or a "jackpot," the allocation rate of each pre-reading expected value presentation pattern is not limited to the allocation rate shown in FIG. 57 and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss," a bias is created by increasing the selection rate of pre-reading expected value presentation patterns with relatively low expected value levels (for example, "01H" or "0BH"), but this is not limited to this and can be changed as appropriate, for example by distributing them evenly.

In addition, in Figures 57 and 58, a predetermined range of random number values 2 for selecting sub-effects are assigned to all "look-ahead expected value performance patterns", but this is not limited to this, and it is also possible to not assign random number values 2 for selecting sub-effects to only certain "look-ahead expected value performance patterns" (i.e., the allocation rate of a certain "look-ahead expected value performance pattern" is set to 0 so that it is not selected).

[1-9-3. Pre-reading performance pattern determination process]
Next, the look-ahead performance pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 with reference to each table of Figures 54 to 58 will be described with reference to Figure 59. Figure 59 is an example of a flowchart showing the look-ahead performance pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301. As described above, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead performance pattern determination process only in a normal game state in which hitting from the left is considered to be a regular game mode, but is not limited to this.

The sub-CPU 301 first determines whether or not a winning command has been received from the main CPU 201 (S3001).

If no winning command has been received (if S3001 returns NO), the sub-CPU 301 ends the pre-reading performance pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a winning command has been received (if S3001 returns a YES judgment), the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S3002.

In S3002, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether there are currently no pending items to be pre-read, i.e., whether a pre-read performance is being performed for the current pending items. If there are multiple pending items, the pre-read performance may be performed for multiple pending images, but in this embodiment, the pre-read performance is performed for only one pending image.

If a look-ahead performance is being performed for the current hold (if S3002 is judged as NO), the sub-CPU 301 ends the look-ahead performance pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if a look-ahead performance is not being performed for the current hold (if S3002 returns YES), the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S3003.

In S3003, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the variation pattern information received in the winning command is subject to pre-reading (see FIG. 55).

If the variation pattern information received in the winning command is not subject to pre-reading (if S3003 is judged as NO), the sub-CPU 301 ends the pre-reading performance pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern information received in the winning command is to be pre-read (if S3003 returns YES), the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S3004.

In S3004, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the difference between the ceiling value and the ceiling counter is greater than the upper limit number of reserved balls (e.g., 4 or 8). This process is to avoid a transition to time-saving game state B before the variable display of the special symbol is executed for the reserved ball for which the pre-reading performance has been executed, despite the pre-reading performance having been executed. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest. After executing this process, the sub-CPU 301 moves the process to S3005.

In this embodiment, in S3004, it is determined whether the difference between the ceiling value and the ceiling counter is greater than the maximum number that can be reserved, but this is not limited to this, and if the fluctuation pattern information received in the winning command is a target for pre-reading (if S3003 is determined to be YES), it may be determined whether the difference is greater than the number of reserved balls including the target for pre-reading. In addition, the ceiling value and ceiling counter may receive information as a command from the main CPU 201, or may be managed by the sub-CPU 301 separately from the main CPU 201.

In S3005, the sub-CPU 301 performs a pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number determination process. In this process, the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number determination table (see FIG. 55) is referenced to determine the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number. After executing this process, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S3006.

In S3006, the sub-CPU 301 performs a process for determining a pre-reading hit type presentation pattern. In this process, the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern is determined by referring to the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table (see FIG. 56). After executing this process, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S3007.

In S3007, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" or a "jackpot". In this process, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is determined based on the fluctuation pattern information received in the winning command sent from the main CPU 201, and if the result is a "time-saving hit" or a "jackpot", a YES determination is made. However, this is not limited to this, and a "time-saving hit" or a "jackpot" may be determined by sending hit/loss information for the special symbol from the main CPU 201 to the sub-CPU 301.

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" or a "jackpot" (YES determination in S3007), the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S3008.

On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is neither a "time-saving hit" nor a "jackpot" (S3007 judges NO), the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S3009.

In S3008, the sub-CPU 301 performs a process for determining a look-ahead expected value presentation pattern (when a win occurs). In this process, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination table (when a win occurs) in FIG. 57 to determine a look-ahead presentation pattern (when a win occurs). After executing this process, the sub-CPU 301 ends the look-ahead presentation pattern determination process.

In addition, in S3009, the sub-CPU 301 performs a process for determining a look-ahead performance pattern when the result is a loss. In this process, the look-ahead expected value performance pattern determination table (when the result is a loss) in FIG. 58 is referenced, and a look-ahead expected value performance pattern (when the result is a loss) is determined. After executing this process, the sub-CPU 301 ends the look-ahead performance pattern determination process.

[1-9-4. Effects of pre-reading performance, examples of pre-reading performance extensions]
In the above-mentioned look-ahead performance, not only is it interesting to see whether the reserved image changes into a big win type look-ahead performance form or a time-saving hit type look-ahead performance form, but it is also possible to change the expected value level of a hit (big win, time-saving hit), and it is possible to increase interest by performing a new performance that has never been performed before. Note that the timing for changing the reserved image form is not limited to when the reserved image shifts, and may be during the variable display of the special pattern of the change, for example.

In addition, the form of the reserved image used as a pre-reading effect (for example, the form of the reserved image displayed within the range of the first sub-reserved area (4) to the first sub-reserved area (1)) may be determined at the time of winning at the first starting port 120, and the form of the reserved image in the variable display of the special pattern of the change may be determined at the start of the variable display of the special pattern.

By the way, when comparing the probability of being determined as a variation pattern in which a look-ahead performance is executed in a look-ahead time-saving hit performance pattern (see, for example, "03H" and "0EH" in FIG. 54) with the probability of being determined as a variation pattern in which a look-ahead performance is executed in a look-ahead jackpot performance pattern (see, for example, "06H" and "11H" in FIG. 54), the former probability is higher (see, for example, FIG. 15). In other words, the execution rate of the look-ahead performance is higher in the look-ahead time-saving hit performance pattern than in the look-ahead jackpot performance pattern. Therefore, compared to conventional pachinko gaming machines in which a look-ahead performance is executed only when there is a possibility of a jackpot, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the look-ahead performance while suppressing the decrease in the expected value of a win, and to increase interest.

The execution rate of the look-ahead performance in the look-ahead jackpot performance pattern may be higher than the execution rate of the look-ahead performance in the look-ahead time-saving performance pattern. In this case, when the look-ahead performance is executed, the expected value for a jackpot is higher than the expected value for a time-saving hit, making it possible to increase interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a game state where the probability change flag is off (in this embodiment, the normal game state and the low-probability time-saving game state), a "time-saving hit" can be won in the hit determination process of the special symbol (see FIG. 10). However, in this embodiment, a pre-reading performance is performed in the normal game state, but not in the low-probability time-saving game state. Even if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the low-probability time-saving game state is a "time-saving hit," the number of time-saving times is unlikely to increase in either the case where the time-saving game state C is superimposed on the time-saving game state A, or the case where the time-saving game state C is not superimposed on the time-saving game state A. Therefore, by making it as much as possible for the player to not know that there is a possibility of winning a "time-saving hit" in the time-saving game state A, it is possible to reduce the disappointment given to the player by winning a "time-saving hit," and to suppress a decrease in interest.

However, it is not essential to prevent the pre-reading effect from being performed in the low-probability time-saving game state, and the pre-reading effect may be performed not only in the normal game state but also in the low-probability time-saving game state and the high-probability low-time-saving game state. Also, in this embodiment, the pre-reading effect is performed only for the first special symbol, but it is not limited to this, and the pre-reading effect may also be performed for the second special symbol.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, a time-saving hit type reach, a jackpot type reach, or a common reach can be executed as the sub-variation presentation pattern. In this embodiment, as can be seen by referring to FIG. 15 and FIG. 54 to FIG. 56, when the sub-CPU 301 executes a look-ahead presentation with a look-ahead time-saving hit presentation pattern, it executes a time-saving hit type reach as the sub-variation presentation pattern, and does not execute a jackpot type reach. In addition, when the sub-CPU 301 executes a look-ahead presentation with a look-ahead jackpot presentation pattern, it executes a jackpot type reach as the sub-variation presentation pattern, and does not execute a time-saving hit type reach.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the sub-CPU 301 executes a look-ahead performance with a look-ahead time-saving hit performance pattern or a look-ahead common hit performance pattern, it can execute a time-saving hit type reach as a sub-variable performance pattern. However, when the sub-CPU 301 executes a look-ahead performance with a look-ahead big hit performance pattern, it does not execute a time-saving hit type reach as a sub-variable performance pattern.

In addition, regardless of whether a pre-reading jackpot presentation pattern (for example, pre-reading hit type presentation pattern (SAS presentation pattern) "37H" shown in FIG. 56), a pre-reading time-saving hit presentation pattern (for example, pre-reading hit type presentation pattern "29H" shown in FIG. 56), or a pre-reading common hit presentation pattern (for example, pre-reading presentation pattern (SAS presentation pattern) "27H" shown in FIG. 56) is executed, the sub-CPU 301 may execute a common reach (for example, the sub-variable presentation patterns "0AH" and "0BH" shown in FIG. 55) as a sub-variable presentation pattern.

Also, a presentation pattern may be set in which a time-saving hit type reach is executed, and after the time-saving hit type reach indicates a miss, a big win type reach is executed. In this case, the player can play with a sense of anticipation until the end, wondering whether or not a high-profit big win type reach will be executed, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Also, as shown in FIG. 15, in the variable display of special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "target variation") performed for start information in which a pre-reading effect has been executed, if a common reach E is executed, an effect common to the common reach C is displayed, and then it is possible to transition to an effect common to the jackpot reach C. On the other hand, if no effect common to the common reach C is executed, it will not transition to the jackpot reach C. Similarly, in the target variation, if a common reach E is executed, an effect common to the common reach C is displayed, and then it is possible to transition to an effect common to the time-saving hit reach C. On the other hand, if no effect common to the common reach C is executed, it will not transition to the time-saving hit reach C.

In this embodiment, the look-ahead performance is performed only for one reserved image (see S3002). Therefore, even if a look-ahead performance mode (hereinafter referred to as a "jackpot look-ahead performance") that indicates that the result of the special pattern hit determination process may be a jackpot has already been performed, the sub-CPU 301 will not perform a new look-ahead performance. Note that even in a pachinko gaming machine in which look-ahead performance is performed for multiple reserved images, it is preferable not to perform a new look-ahead performance if a jackpot look-ahead performance has already been performed.

For example, if there are multiple reserves including one reserve (hereinafter referred to as the "first reserve") and another reserve (hereinafter referred to as the "second reserve") in which the variable display of the special pattern starts after the first reserve, and a look-ahead jackpot performance pattern (for example, the look-ahead hit type performance pattern "17H" in FIG. 56) is being executed in the first reserve, even if a look-ahead performance is executed in the second reserve, the look-ahead performance in the second reserve may be meaningless. In particular, if a jackpot is derived for the first reserve and the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, and the game state is controlled to an A time-saving game state after the end of this jackpot game state, even if a "time-saving hit" is derived for the second reserve, the player may not be able to receive the benefit of this "time-saving hit", and in this case, the interest will be significantly reduced. Therefore, if a jackpot look-ahead performance has already been executed, it is preferable not to execute a look-ahead performance for a reserve that is consumed after the reserve in which the jackpot look-ahead performance is being executed.

In addition, even if the first hold is a jackpot hold (a hold from which a jackpot is derived), if a look-ahead performance has not been performed for the first hold, the look-ahead performance may or may not be performed for the second hold.

In addition, even if a false jackpot pre-reading effect (for example, pre-reading jackpot type effect pattern "53H" in FIG. 56) is being executed in the first hold, it is preferable not to execute the pre-reading effect in the second hold.

However, if a time-saving hit pre-reading effect (for example, the pre-reading hit type effect pattern "05H" in FIG. 56) is being executed in the first hold, a jackpot pre-reading effect or a time-saving hit pre-reading effect may be executed in the second hold. This is because even if a time-saving hit is derived for the first hold, it is possible to make the player expect a jackpot that is more profitable than that.

In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol does not include a small hit, but in a pachinko gaming machine in which the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol includes a small hit, even if a small hit pre-reading effect is executed in the first reserve, a big hit pre-reading effect or a time-saving hit pre-reading effect may be executed in the second reserve. This is because even if a small hit is derived for the first reserve, it is possible to make the player expect a big hit that is more profitable than that.

In addition, if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol includes a small hit, and a look-ahead performance mode indicating that the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol may be a small hit (hereinafter referred to as a "small hit look-ahead performance") is executed in the first hold, a big hit look-ahead performance or a time-saving hit look-ahead performance may be executed in the second hold. This is because, even if a small hit is derived for the first hold, it is possible to make the player expect a small hit that is more profitable than that.

In addition, if, for example, a winning ball is entered into the first starting hole 120 during the execution of a jackpot-related reach as a sub-variable performance pattern, and start information is reserved, the sub-CPU 301 will not execute a look-ahead performance for this reservation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the sub-CPU 301 executes the look-ahead performance only in the normal game state. Therefore, when the variable display of the special pattern ends and the jackpot display mode is derived, if the start information determined to be a "time-saving hit" by the look-ahead judgment made by the main CPU 201 is reserved (this reservation is referred to as a "specific reservation" in this paragraph), whether the look-ahead performance is executed for this specific reservation or not, the sub-CPU 301 will not execute the look-ahead performance for the specific reservation after the jackpot game state ends unless the normal game state is in effect. However, the sub-CPU 301 may be able to not execute the look-ahead performance for the specific reservation even if the normal game state is in effect after the jackpot game state ends. Furthermore, even in a pachinko game machine that executes a look-ahead performance in a game state other than the normal game state (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state or a low-probability time-saving game state), if there is a specific reserve when the jackpot display mode is derived, the sub-CPU 301 may be able to not execute a look-ahead performance for the specific reserve after the jackpot game state ends.

In addition, when the variable display of the special pattern ends and the jackpot display mode is derived, if the start information determined to be a "time-saving hit" by the pre-reading judgment made by the main CPU 201 is held (this hold is referred to as a "specific hold" in this paragraph), even if this specific hold is a hold for a "time-saving hit", the main CPU 201 may not be controlled to the C time-saving play state based on the "time-saving hit" after the jackpot game state ends. For example, if the specification is such that multiple time-saving play states are not executed in overlap when the time-saving play states overlap, and the A time-saving play state is executed after the jackpot game state ends, the main CPU 201 will not execute the C time-saving play state based on the "time-saving hit" even if the specific hold is a hold for a "time-saving hit".

[1-10. Examples of pre-reading performance]
A specific example of the look-ahead effect will be described below with reference to Figures 60 to 64. In this embodiment, the sub-CPU 301 is capable of executing the look-ahead effect using a reserved image based on a command transmitted from the main CPU 201.

[1-10-1. Specific examples of when a pre-reading performance is performed with a pre-reading jackpot performance pattern]
As described above, the look-ahead performance pattern includes a look-ahead winning type performance pattern and a look-ahead expectation value performance pattern. First, a specific example of a look-ahead performance in a look-ahead big win performance pattern as the look-ahead winning type performance pattern will be described with reference to FIG.

Figures 60(a) to 60(f) are examples of look-ahead presentation patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and show the process by which the big win look-ahead presentation form, which indicates the possibility of a big win, changes. Note that the look-ahead hit type presentation patterns shown in Figures 60(a) to 60(f) correspond to "1CH", "3CH", "58H", or "78H" in Figure 56. Also, the look-ahead expected value presentation patterns corresponding to the look-ahead expected value presentation patterns shown in Figures 60(a) to 60(f) are omitted from Figure 57.

As shown in Figures 60(a) to 60(f), the first hold area 411 to the fourth hold area 414 are displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7. As described above, the first hold area 411 to the fourth hold area 414 are areas that indicate whether hold information is stored in the first sub-hold area (1) to the first sub-hold area (4), respectively. In addition, the 0th area 410 is an area that corresponds to the first sub-hold area (0) in which information corresponding to the change is stored.

In this embodiment, when hold information is stored in the first sub-hold area, the sub-CPU 301 displays the hold areas 411-414 corresponding to the first sub-hold area in which the hold information is stored with a hold image (hereinafter simply referred to as a "hold image") indicated by a triangle. Also, when no hold information is stored in the first sub-hold area, the sub-CPU 301 does not display a hold image, but displays only the frame of the hold area.

In FIG. 60(a), the first hold area 411 to the third hold area 413 display normal hold images with no pre-reading effect being performed, and the fourth hold area 414 displays only a frame and no hold image. This indicates that hold information is stored in the first sub-hold areas (1) to (3), but no hold information is stored in the first sub-hold area (4).

In FIG. 60(b), a new pending image is displayed in the fourth pending area 414, which is different from the state shown in FIG. 60(a). This indicates that new pending information has been stored in the first sub-pending area (4), which is different from the state shown in FIG. 60(a).

As described above, the sub-CPU 301 displays the reserved images shown in the first reserved area 411 to the fourth reserved area 414 in different forms (e.g., colors) depending on the expected value for a jackpot. In this embodiment, with the exception of rainbows, differences in color are illustrated by shades of color.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 60(b), the color of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 to the third reserved area 413 is white (expected value level "0"), and the color of the reserved image shown in the fourth reserved area 414 is blue (expected value level "1").

Figure 60 (c) is an image in which the pending image has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 60 (b), and shows that the color of the pending image displayed in the fourth pending area 414 in Figure 60 (b) has changed from blue to yellow (expected value level "2") when it is shifted to the third pending area 413.

Figure 60 (d) is an image in which the pending image has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 60 (c), and shows that the color of the pending image displayed in the third pending area 413 in Figure 60 (c) has changed from yellow to green (expected value level "3") when it is shifted to the second pending area 412.

Figure 60 (e) is an image in which the pending image has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 60 (d), and shows that the color of the pending image displayed in the second pending area 412 in Figure 60 (d) has changed from green to red (expected value level "4") when it is shifted to the first pending area 411.

Figure 60 (f) is an image in which the pending image has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 60 (e), and shows that the color of the pending image displayed in the first pending area 411 in Figure 60 (e) has changed from red to rainbow (expected value level "5") when it is shifted to the zeroth area 410.

In addition, the color (expected value level) of the reserved image indicating the expected value for a jackpot does not necessarily need to change when the reserved image shifts, and may change during the variable display of the special pattern for that change, for example.

In addition, in FIG. 60, the jackpot-based pre-reading presentation form is changed to indicate a change in the expected value from which a jackpot is derived, but instead of or in addition to this, a pre-reading presentation that changes from a jackpot-based pre-reading presentation form to a jackpot confirmation pre-reading presentation form may be executed by the sub-CPU 301. In this case, if it is before the change to the jackpot confirmation pre-reading presentation form, the expected value level may also be changed accordingly.

[1-10-2. Specific examples of when pre-reading effects are performed with pre-reading time-saving performance patterns]
Next, a specific example of a pre-reading performance performed with a pre-reading time-saving winning performance pattern as the above-mentioned pre-reading winning type performance pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 61.

Figures 61(a) to 61(f) are examples of look-ahead presentation patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and are diagrams showing the process by which the time-saving hit type look-ahead presentation form, which indicates the possibility of a time-saving hit, changes. Note that the look-ahead time-saving hit type presentation patterns shown in Figures 61(a) to 61(f) correspond to "0EH", "2EH", "4AH", or "6AH" in Figure 56. Also, the look-ahead expected value presentation patterns corresponding to the look-ahead expected value presentation patterns shown in Figures 61(a) to 61(f) are omitted from Figure 57.

In FIG. 61(a), the first pending area 411 to the third pending area 413 display normal pending images with no preview performance being performed, and the fourth pending area 414 displays no pending images, only a frame.

In FIG. 61(b), a new reserved image is displayed in the fourth reserved area 414 from the state shown in FIG. 61(a). As described above, the sub-CPU 301 displays the reserved images shown in the first reserved area 411 to the fourth reserved area 414 in different forms (e.g. shapes) depending on the expected value for the time reduction.

In this way, in this embodiment, the expected value for a jackpot is represented by the color of the reserved image, and the expected value for a time-saving hit is represented by the shape of the reserved image.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 61(b), the shape of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 to the third reserved area 413 is a triangle (expected value level "0"), and the shape of the reserved image shown in the fourth reserved area 414 is a rectangle (expected value level "1").

Figure 61 (c) is an image in which the pending image has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 61 (b), and shows that the shape of the pending image displayed in the fourth pending area 414 in Figure 61 (b) has changed from a square to a pentagon (expected value level "2") when it is shifted to the third pending area 413.

Figure 61 (d) is an image in which the pending image has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 61 (c), and shows that the shape of the pending image displayed in the third pending area 413 in Figure 61 (c) has changed from a pentagon to a hexagon (expected value level "3") when it is shifted to the second pending area 412.

Figure 61 (e) is an image in which the pending image has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 61 (d), and shows that the shape of the pending image displayed in the second pending area 412 in Figure 61 (d) has changed from a hexagon to a circle (expected value level "4") when it is shifted to the first pending area 411.

Figure 61 (f) is an image in which the pending image has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 61 (e), and shows that the shape of the pending image displayed in the first pending area 411 in Figure 61 (e) has changed from a circle to a star (expected value level "5") when it is shifted to the zeroth area 410.

The shape of the reserved image, which indicates the expected value for the time-saving hit, does not necessarily have to change one by one in the order of "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle < star" and may change, for example, from "pentagon to circle."

In addition, the shape of the reserved image (expected value level) indicating the expected value for the time-saving win does not necessarily need to change when the reserved image shifts, and may change, for example, during the variable display of the special pattern for that change.

In addition, in Fig. 61, the time-saving hit system pre-reading performance form is changed to show the change in the expected value from which the time-saving hit is derived, but instead of or in addition to this, for example, the pre-reading performance shown below may be executed by the sub-CPU 301. In this case, if it is before changing to the big win confirmation pre-reading performance form, the expected value level may also be changed accordingly.
-A pre-reading performance that changes from a time-saving hit type pre-reading performance form to a jackpot type pre-reading performance form.
-A pre-reading performance that changes from a time-saving hit type pre-reading performance form to a guaranteed jackpot pre-reading performance form.
-A pre-reading performance that changes from a time-saving hit type pre-reading performance form to a jackpot type pre-reading performance form, and then changes to a jackpot confirmed pre-reading performance form.

[1-10-3. Specific examples of when pre-reading effects are performed with pre-reading common winning effects patterns]
Next, a specific example of a pre-reading effect performed with a pre-reading common winning effect pattern as the above-mentioned pre-reading winning type effect pattern will be described with reference to FIG.

Figures 62(a) to 62(d) are examples of look-ahead presentation patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and show the process by which the reserved image changes from a common win type look-ahead presentation form, which indicates that there is a possibility of either a jackpot or a time-saving win, to a jackpot type look-ahead presentation form. Changes in the common win type look-ahead presentation form include a change in the expected value level of a win (time-saving win, jackpot), and a change in the type of win to one that clearly indicates whether it is a jackpot or a time-saving win. The look-ahead type win presentation patterns shown in Figures 62(a) to 62(d) correspond to "15H", "35H", "51H", or "71H" in Figure 56, and the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern shown in Figures 62(a) to 62(d) corresponds to "43H" in Figure 57.

In this embodiment, a common hit type pre-reading presentation form that indicates the possibility of both a jackpot and a time-saving hit is displayed by displaying both a color that indicates the expected value level for a jackpot and a shape that indicates the expected value level for a time-saving hit.

In FIG. 62(a), the first pending area 411 and the second pending area 412 display normal pending images with no preview performance being performed, while the third pending area 413 and the fourth pending area 414 display only frames and no pending images.

In FIG. 62(b), a new reserved image is displayed in the third reserved area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 62(a). The sub-CPU 301 displays the reserved images shown in the first reserved area 411 to the fourth reserved area 414 in different forms (e.g., color and shape) depending on the expected value for a hit (big hit or short-time hit). In this embodiment, when the pre-reading performance is not executed or the expected value for a hit is the lowest, the reserved image is displayed as a white triangle, and the expected value for a short hit increases in the following order: "blue square < yellow pentagon < green hexagon < red circle < rainbow star."

In this embodiment, in FIG. 62(b), the shape of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 and the second reserved area 412 is a white triangle (expected value level "0"), and the shape of the reserved image shown in the third reserved area 413 is a yellow pentagon (expected value level "2").

Figure 62 (c) is an image in which the pending image has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 62 (b), and shows that the shape of the pending image displayed in the third pending area 413 in Figure 62 (b) has changed from a yellow pentagon to a green hexagon (expected value level "3") when it is shifted to the second pending area 412.

Figure 62 (d) is an image in which the reserved image has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 62 (c), and shows that the shape of the reserved image displayed in the second reserved area 412 in Figure 62 (c) has changed from a green hexagon (a common win-type pre-reading presentation form with an expected value level of "3") to a rainbow triangle (a big win-type pre-reading presentation form with an expected value level of "5") when it is shifted to the first reserved area 411.

In other words, the look-ahead effects shown in Figures 62(b) and 62(c) are effects in which it is difficult to determine from the shape of the reserved image whether the shape of the reserved image indicates the expected value for a jackpot or the expected value for a time-saving hit. In contrast, the look-ahead effect shown in Figure 62(d) is an effect in which it is possible to determine that the shape of the reserved image indicates the expected value for a jackpot, and that the expected value is extremely high (for example, expected value level "5").

In this way, in this embodiment, depending on the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the look-ahead performance can be executed in one of the following patterns: a look-ahead time-saving hit performance pattern that indicates the expected value for a time-saving hit, a look-ahead jackpot performance pattern that indicates the expected value for a jackpot, and a look-ahead common hit performance pattern that indicates the expected value for a hit (jackpot or time-saving hit). When the look-ahead performance is executed in the look-ahead common hit performance pattern, the player can enjoy the excitement of wondering whether the reserved image will change to a jackpot-type look-ahead performance form or a time-saving hit-type look-ahead performance form, which can increase the excitement.

The form of the reserved image showing the expected value for a time-saving hit does not necessarily have to change one by one in the order of "blue square < yellow pentagon < green hexagon < red circle < rainbow star" and may change, for example, from "yellow pentagon (common hit type pre-reading presentation form) → red triangle (big hit type pre-reading presentation form)" or from "green hexagon (common hit type pre-reading presentation form) → triangular star (time-saving hit type pre-reading presentation form)". Also, the form of the reserved image showing the expected value for a hit does not necessarily have to start from the blue square which has the lowest expected value and may start from, for example, a red circle.

In addition, the form of the reserved image indicating the expected value for a win does not necessarily need to change when the reserved image shifts, and may change, for example, during the variable display of the special pattern for that change.

In addition, in Fig. 62, the common hit system pre-reading performance form is changed to change the expected value derived from any hit (big hit or time-saving hit) or to change the expected hit from an unknown state to a big hit, but instead of or in addition to this, for example, the pre-reading performance shown below may be executed by the sub-CPU 301. In this case, if it is before changing to the big hit confirmed pre-reading performance form, the expected value level may also be changed.
-A pre-reading performance that changes from a common hit type pre-reading performance form to a guaranteed jackpot pre-reading performance form.
-A pre-reading performance that changes from a common hit type pre-reading performance form to a jackpot type pre-reading performance form, and then changes to a jackpot confirmed pre-reading performance form.

[1-10-4. Modification of common hit type pre-reading performance form]
In addition, the common win type pre-reading presentation form, which indicates the possibility of both a jackpot and a time-saving win as the form of the reserved image, is not necessarily limited to a form that is expressed by both a color indicating the expected value for a jackpot and a shape indicating the expected value for a time-saving win. Instead of this, for example, a dedicated common win type pre-reading presentation form may be provided. When a dedicated common win type pre-reading presentation form is provided, it becomes possible to have a sense of expectation for both a jackpot and a time-saving win, and since the expected values of each are unknown, it becomes possible to play with a sense of expectation for future changes in the presentation form, thereby improving interest.

Figures 63(a) to 63(d) are examples of look-ahead presentation patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and show the process by which the reserved image changes from a dedicated common win look-ahead presentation to a big win look-ahead presentation. Note that the look-ahead winning type presentation patterns shown in Figures 63(a) to 63(d) correspond to "15H", "35H", "51H", or "71H" in Figure 56, and the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern shown in Figures 63(a) to 63(d) corresponds to "31H" in Figure 57 or Figure 58.

Figures 64(a) to 64(d) are examples of look-ahead presentation patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and show the process by which the reserved image changes from a dedicated common win look-ahead presentation to a time-saving win look-ahead presentation. The look-ahead winning type presentation patterns shown in Figures 64(a) to 64(d) correspond to "07H", "27H", "43H", or "63H" in Figure 56, and the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern shown in Figures 64(a) to 64(d) corresponds to "31H" in Figure 57 or Figure 58.

In Figures 63(a) and 64(a), the first pending area 411 and the second pending area 412 display a normal pending image in which no preview performance is being performed, and the third pending area 413 and the fourth pending area 414 display no pending image, only a frame.

In FIG. 63(b), a new reserved image is displayed in the third reserved area 413, following the state shown in FIG. 63(a).

Similarly, in FIG. 64(b), a new reserved image is displayed in the third reserved area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 64(a).

In both Figures 63(b) and 64(b), the form of the reserved image shown in the third reserved area 413 is a dedicated common winning type pre-reading performance form, for example, a shining form. By changing the degree of brightness of the light, the expected value level can be changed.

Figure 63 (c) is an image in which the reserve has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 63 (b), and shows that the dedicated common win type pre-reading presentation form displayed in the third reserve area 413 in Figure 63 (b) has been shifted in the same form to the second reserve area 412.

Similarly, Figure 64 (c) is an image in which the reserve has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 64 (b), and shows that the dedicated common win type pre-reading presentation form displayed in the third reserve area 413 in Figure 64 (b) has been shifted in the same form to the second reserve area 412.

Figure 63 (d) is an image in which the reserved position has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 63 (c), and shows that the form of the reserved image displayed in the second reserved area 412 in Figure 63 (c) has changed from a special common hit type pre-reading presentation form to a red triangle (expected value level of a jackpot "4") when it is shifted to the first reserved area 411.

On the other hand, Figure 64 (d) is an image in which the reserved position has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 64 (c), and shows that the form of the reserved image displayed in the second reserved area 412 in Figure 64 (c) has changed from a special common hit type pre-reading presentation form to a white circle (expected value level for time-saving hits of "4") when it is shifted to the first reserved area 411.

In this way, even if the look-ahead presentation form is expressed as a dedicated common win type look-ahead presentation form, the player can be entertained by wondering whether the dedicated common win type look-ahead presentation form will change to a jackpot type look-ahead presentation form or a time-saving win type look-ahead presentation form, thereby increasing the player's interest.

[1-11. Signals output to outside the device]
Next, a signal output from the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) to the outside of the first pachinko game machine (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6), an island computer (not shown) provided on each island) will be described. Note that, in this embodiment, a signal output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine will be described, but it is also possible to input a signal from outside the first pachinko game machine.

In this embodiment, the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) has CH1 to CH12 as connectors for outputting signals to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. The signals output from each CH of the external terminal board 184 to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine are, for example, various signals such as "prize ball information 1," "door/frame open," "external information 1" to "external information 8," "prize ball information 2," and "security." However, the types of signals output from each CH to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine are not limited to these, and there may be other signals output to the outside of the machine in addition to these signals, or the machine may be configured so that none of these signals are output.

Figure 65 is a table showing an example of the output conditions for signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in Figure 65, a "prize ball information 1" signal is output from CN1, a "door/frame open" signal is output from CH2, signals for "external information 1" to "external information 8" are output from CH3 to CH10 respectively, a "prize ball information 2" signal is output from CH11, and a "security" signal is output from CH12. The output conditions for signals from the first pachinko gaming machine to the outside of the machine are as shown in Figure 65.

Next, an example of a timing chart of signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine will be explained using the "prize ball information 1" signal as an example. As shown in FIG. 65, in this embodiment, the "prize ball information 1" signal is output for 120 msec every time 10 prize balls are paid out.

Figure 66 is an example of a timing chart of the "prize ball information 1" signal, one of the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 66, the payout detection switch (not shown) turns from off to on each time a prize ball is paid out. As described above, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the large prize opening 131 (see FIG. 4), for example, 10 prize balls are paid out, when a game ball enters a start opening (first start opening 120 or second start opening 140 (both see FIG. 4)), for example, 3 prize balls are paid out, and when a game ball enters the general prize opening 122 (see FIG. 4), for example, 4 prize balls are paid out.

Then, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) outputs the signal "prize ball information 1" to the outside of the first pachinko game machine for, for example, 120 msec each time 10 prize balls are paid out. More specifically, the main CPU 201 outputs the signal "prize ball information 1" for, for example, 120 msec, at the timing when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on, starting from the previous output of the signal "prize ball information 1". Note that outputting the signal "prize ball information 1" at the timing when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on is merely an example, and it may be any time between when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on and when it is turned off. Also, outputting the signal "prize ball information 1" each time 10 prize balls are paid out or for 120 msec is merely an example, and the output timing and output time of the signal "prize ball information 1" can be set appropriately.

Next, we will explain an example of a "security" signal, which is one of the signals output from the first pachinko gaming machine to the outside. The "security" signal is a signal that is mainly output when an error occurs.

Figure 67 is a table showing an example of an overview of errors in the first pachinko gaming machine, and more specifically, for each error name, the table shows the trigger for the error in the main control circuit 200, the trigger for the error to be released in the main control circuit 200 (see Figure 6), the output time of the "security" signal (shown as "security signal" in Figure 67), and any notes.

Note that the first pachinko game machine does not have a large prize opening for small wins, but for the sake of convenience, Figure 67 also describes an abnormal prize winning error at the large prize opening for small wins. Also, in Figure 67, the large prize opening 131 is described as a large prize opening for big wins.

The outline of the errors shown in FIG. 67 is an example, and only some of them may be judged to be errors, or, for example, those not shown in FIG. 67 may be judged to be errors. Examples of errors that are judged to be errors that are not shown in FIG. 67 include a solenoid monitoring sensor error when a solenoid monitoring sensor (not shown) is on or off for a predetermined time or more, a large prize opening entry/ejection abnormality error when there are undischarged game balls inside the large prize opening (large prize opening for a large win or large prize opening for a small win) or when a prize is won inside the large prize opening when the large prize opening is not open, and a vibration sensor error when the vibration sensor is on for a predetermined time. In addition, for example, if a specific area is provided within the jackpot large prize opening, and the special probability control is executed after the jackpot game control ends based on the game ball passing through the specific area while the jackpot game control is being executed, it is preferable to configure it so that an error is determined when there is an abnormal passage to the specific area, or when the game ball passes through the specific area even though there are no game balls yet to be discharged inside the jackpot large prize opening.

When the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) determines that an error has occurred, it sends a fraud detection-related command to the sub-CPU 301 (see FIG. 6). The sub-CPU 301, which receives the fraud detection-related command, executes notification control according to the content of the error.

The following briefly explains the control by the main CPU 201 and sub-CPU 301 (see Figure 6 for both), using the example of an abnormal winning error at the big win slot.

As shown in FIG. 67, for example, after the initial power is turned on, if one winning is detected before the first big win opening is opened, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) determines that an abnormal winning error has occurred at the big win opening, and outputs a "security" signal for 12 seconds. It also sends a fraud detection-related command to the sub-CPU 301 (see FIG. 6) indicating that an abnormal winning error has occurred at the big win opening.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67, the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds regardless of the type of error, so that an external device (e.g., hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or island computer (not shown)) can know that an error has occurred by receiving the "security" signal, but cannot know the content of the error. However, this is not limited to the above, and for example, the output time of the "security" signal may be changed depending on the content of the error, so that an external device that receives the "security" signal can know the content of the error.

When the sub-CPU 301 (see Figure 6) receives a fraud detection-related command indicating, for example, an abnormal winning error at the large winning port for a jackpot, it executes all or part of the notification control shown below, and when, for example, 30 seconds have elapsed since receiving the fraud detection-related command, it terminates the notification control shown below.
Notification control for displaying, for example, the text "Abnormal winning error at large prize port" on the display device 7 (see, for example, FIG. 6) via the display control circuit 304.
- Notification control to output a voice such as "There is an abnormal winning error at the large prize port" from the speaker 32 (see, for example, Figure 6) via the voice control circuit 305.
Notification control for outputting, for example, a beep from the speaker 32 via the voice control circuit 305.
Notification control for lighting up all of the LEDs 46 (see FIG. 6, for example) in red via the LED control circuit 306.

If a power outage occurs, for example, before 30 seconds have elapsed since receiving the fraud detection-related command, the sub-CPU 301 ends the above-mentioned notification control.

In addition, for example, if the sub-CPU 301 receives a fraud detection-related command indicating an abnormal winning error at the large jackpot winning port while executing the above-mentioned notification control indicating the occurrence of an abnormal winning error at the large jackpot winning port, it will re-execute the above-mentioned notification control.

Next, the signals output from the first pachinko gaming machine according to the gaming status will be described with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is a table showing an example of the output conditions of signals output from the first pachinko gaming machine according to the gaming status. In FIG. 68, signals that are output are indicated by ◯, and signals that are not output are indicated by ×.

As shown in FIG. 68, in this embodiment, the signals output vary depending on the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201. For example, during normal gameplay (other than during a big win or small win, other than during a special probability or time-saving mode), no signals are output, during low-probability time-saving gameplay (other than during a big win or small win), the signals "External Information 3" and "External Information 7" are output, and during high-probability time-saving gameplay (other than during a big win or small win), the signals "External Information 3", "External Information 5", and "External Information 7" are output. Also, in a pachinko game machine that can be controlled to a high-probability non-time-saving gameplay state, the signals "External Information 3" and "External Information 6" are output during a high-probability non-time-saving gameplay (other than during a big win or small win).

In this way, by outputting different signals according to the game status controlled by the main CPU 201, devices outside the machine that can receive the signals (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or the island computer (not shown)) can grasp the game status of the pachinko game machine that is the source of the external information.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the signal output during the small win game control process (in the normal game state) is the same as the signal output during the normal game state (other than during a big win or small win, other than during a special mode or time-saving mode). Similarly, the signal output during the small win game control process (in the low-probability time-saving game state) is the same as the signal output during the low-probability time-saving game state (other than during a big win or small win), the signal output during the small win game control process (in the high-probability time-saving game state) is the same as the signal output during the high-probability time-saving game state (other than during a big win or small win), and the signal output during the small win game control process (in the high-probability non-time-saving game state) is the same as the signal output during the high-probability non-time-saving game state (other than during a big win or small win). In other words, an external device capable of receiving the signal (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or the island computer (not shown)) cannot know whether or not the small win game control process is being executed in the pachinko game machine that sent the external information. However, instead of this, the signal output during the small win game control process may be made different from the signal output when the small win game control process is not being executed, so that an external device capable of receiving the signal can know whether or not the small win game control process is being executed in the pachinko game machine that sent the external information.

Also, during the low-probability time-saving game state (other than during a big win or a small win), during the high-probability time-saving game state (other than during a big win or a small win), during small win game control processing (low-probability time-saving game state), and during small win game control processing (high-probability time-saving game state) shown in FIG. 68, the signal is output during execution of time-saving control. In this case, it may be considered that the time-saving control is being executed when both the electric support control and the special chart shortening control are being executed, or it may be considered that the time-saving control is being executed when only the electric support control of the electric support control and the special chart shortening control is being executed, or it may be considered that the time-saving control is being executed when only the special chart shortening control of the electric support control and the special chart shortening control is being executed.

In addition, in the above description of the first pachinko gaming machine, it is assumed that the main CPU can control the time-shortened game state A, the time-shortened game state B, and the time-shortened game state C (the time-shortened game state function A, the time-shortened game state function B, and the time-shortened game state function C are installed), but this is not limited to the above. For example, the pachinko gaming machine may be equipped with only one of the time-shortened game state functions A, B, and C, and not equipped with the other functions (for example, the time-shortened game state function B and the time-shortened game state function C). Also, the pachinko gaming machine may be equipped with only two of the functions of the time-saving play state A, the time-saving play state B, and the time-saving play state C (for example, the time-saving play state A function and the time-saving play state B or the time-saving play state C function), and not equipped with the other functions (for example, the time-saving play state B or the time-saving play state C function).

In addition, for example, in pachinko gaming machines called ST machines, where the probability of ...

[2. The second pachinko game machine]
Next, the second pachinko game machine will be described. As mentioned above, the second pachinko game machine is a so-called type one pachinko game machine called digital pachinko. However, the second pachinko game machine is different from the first pachinko game machine in that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed in parallel. Therefore, the game board unit and the electrical configuration are also different from the first pachinko game machine.

In the following description of the second pachinko gaming machine, we will omit as much as possible the description of the functions, shapes, and positions that are common to the first pachinko gaming machine, such as the basic configuration of the outer frame 2 and base door 3, and the signals output from the external terminal board 1184 (see FIG. 70 described below) to the outside of the second pachinko gaming machine (for example, the hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 70 described below) and the island computers (not shown) installed on each island).

In addition, when describing the second pachinko gaming machine, the configuration will be described with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko gaming machine, using the same reference numbers and step numbers as the first pachinko gaming machine. However, when describing the configuration with reference to new drawings adopted in the description of the second pachinko gaming machine, the configuration will be described with reference to different reference numbers and step numbers than the first pachinko gaming machine, even if the configuration has the same functions, etc. as the first pachinko gaming machine.

Incidentally, pachinko gaming machines that can changeably display the first and second special symbols in parallel include pachinko gaming machines in which, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are on hold, the start conditions of the second special symbol are established with priority over the start conditions of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "priority change machines"), and pachinko gaming machines in which the start conditions are established in the order of winning, including the first and second start ports (hereinafter referred to as "sequential change machines").

[2-1. Game board unit]
69 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit 1010 included in the second pachinko gaming machine. As shown in Fig. 69, the game board unit 1010 has a play area 1105 formed thereon.

Note that the various components (e.g., first starting hole 1120, etc.) arranged in the play area 1105 of the second pachinko gaming machine share some in common with the various components arranged in the play area 105 of the first pachinko gaming machine (see Figure 4), but will be explained in detail again.

As shown in FIG. 69, the game board unit 1010 mainly includes a game panel 1100 in which a game area 1105 is formed in which the launched game ball can roll down, a guide rail 1110, a center role 1115 located approximately in the center of the game area 1105, a first start port 1120, a general winning port 1122, a passing gate unit 1125, a special electric role unit 1130, a second start port 1140A, 1140B, a normal electric role unit 1145, a small win unit 1150, an LED unit 1160, an outlet 1178, and a back unit (not shown) located behind the game board unit 1010. Note that the LED unit 1160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko game machine, and a description of the LED unit 1160 of the second pachinko game machine will be omitted.

(Game panel)
An opening (no reference number) is formed in the gaming panel 1100 at a position facing the display area of the display device 1007. A guide rail 1110 is provided on the front surface of the gaming panel 1100, and gaming pegs (no reference number) and the like are planted thereon. A gaming ball launched from the launching device 6 (see Figs. 1 and 2) flies out from the guide rail 1110 toward the gaming area 1105, collides with the gaming pegs, etc., and flows downward below the gaming area 1105 while changing its direction of travel.

In addition, a back unit (not shown) with decorative bodies is disposed behind the gaming panel 1100 to enhance the presentation effect. The gaming panel 1100 is made of transparent resin so that the decorative bodies on the back unit can be seen when viewed from the front. In this case, the entire gaming panel 1100 may be made of transparent materials, or, for example, only the parts where the decorative bodies on the back unit can be seen when viewed from the front may be made of transparent materials. In addition, the gaming panel 1100 may be made of materials that do not have transparent parts (for example, wood), and transparent materials may be provided in some parts to enhance the presentation effect.

(Guide rail)
The guide rail 1110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (both of which have no reference number). The play area 1105 is defined by the guide rail 1110. The outer rail and the inner rail have the function of guiding the game balls launched from the launching device 1006 (see FIG. 70 described later) to the upper part of the play area 1105.

(Center role)
The center device 1115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (without reference number) of the game panel 1100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 1116 at its upper portion. Game balls launched toward the game area 1105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 1116.

A game ball launched by the launching device 1006 toward the game area 1105 flows down the left area 1106 or the right area 1107. A game ball flowing down the left area 1106 or the right area 1107 changes direction as it flows downward due to collision with game pegs or the like planted in the game panel 1100. If the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 (see Figures 1 and 2) is small, the launched game ball flows down the left area 1106. On the other hand, if the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right area 1107.

The center device 1115 also has a warp entrance 1117 formed on the outer periphery on the left side, through which game balls flowing down the left area 1106 can enter. Game balls that enter the warp entrance 1117 are configured to be guided to a stage 1118 formed in the center device 1115. The stage 1118 is formed below and in front of the display area of the display device 1007 so that the game balls can roll left and right. The stage 1118 may be formed in multiple stages, such as an upper stage and a lower stage, for example.

A chance entrance 1119 through which game balls can enter is formed at the rear of the stage 1118, approximately in the center in the left-right direction, and game balls that enter the chance entrance 1119 are configured to be released directly above the first start opening 1120. Therefore, game balls that enter the chance entrance 1119 have a higher probability of entering (passing through) the first start opening 1120 than game balls that do not enter the warp entrance 1117, or game balls that enter the warp entrance 1117 but do not enter the chance entrance 1119.

(First starting point)
The first starting hole 1120 is disposed below the display area of the display device 1007, and is disposed so that a game ball hit from the left can win (a game ball hit from the right has difficulty or is impossible to win). When a game ball wins in the first starting hole 1120, it is detected by a first starting hole switch 1121 (see FIG. 70 described later). It is also possible that a game ball hit from the right can win in the first starting hole 1120. Also, instead of or in addition to the above-mentioned first starting hole 1120, a first starting hole that allows a game ball hit from the right to win (a game ball hit from the left has difficulty or is impossible to win) may be provided.

When the first start hole switch 1121 (see FIG. 70 described below) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the first start hole 1120, start information for the first special pattern is extracted, and a predetermined number of the extracted start information (for example, up to four) are held. When the start conditions are met, the held start information is used in the winning determination process for the first special pattern. When a game ball enters the first start hole 1120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 1120 is not limited to this.

(General Prize Winners)
The general winning openings 1122 are arranged in a plurality of locations on the lower left side of the display area of the display device 1007, and are arranged so that game balls hit from the left can win (game balls hit from the right have difficulty or no chance of winning). When a game ball wins in a general winning opening 1122, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 1123 (see FIG. 70 described later).

When the general prize opening switch 1123 (see FIG. 70 described below) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the general prize opening 1122, for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the general prize opening 1122 is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 1122 is positioned so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit from the right to win, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the general winning opening 1122 described above, a general winning opening through which a game ball hit from the right can win may be provided.

(Passing gate unit)
The pass gate unit 1125 is located in the right area 1107 and is a unit that integrates a pass gate 1126 that is configured to allow almost all game balls hit to the right to pass through, and a pass gate switch 1127 (see Figure 70 described below) that detects the passage of the game ball through the pass gate 1126.

When the passing gate switch 1127 detects the passage of a game ball through the passing gate 1126, the start information of the normal pattern is extracted, and the extracted start information of the normal pattern is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to four). The reserved start information of the normal pattern is used for the winning determination process of the normal pattern. Note that even if the passing gate switch 1127 detects the passage of a game ball through the passing gate 1126, no prize balls are paid out. The passing gate unit 1125 may be arranged in the left area 1106 instead of or in addition to the right area 1107.

The pass gate 1126 may also function as a trigger for activating the consecutive operation device of the special feature. In other words, the condition for transitioning from a non-jackpot gaming state (such as a normal gaming state) to a jackpot gaming state is that both the condition device and the consecutive operation device of the special feature are activated, but when a stop display mode (symbol combination) indicating a jackpot is derived, the condition device may be activated but the consecutive operation device of the special feature may not be activated. Then, assuming that the condition device is activated, the consecutive operation device of the special feature may be activated when a gaming ball passes through the pass gate 1126, i.e., when a gaming ball is detected by the pass gate switch 1127 (see FIG. 70 described below), thereby transitioning to the jackpot gaming state.

(Special electric feature unit)
The special electric accessory unit 1130 is a unit body that integrates a big winning hole 1131 for a big winning, a big winning hole count switch 1132 (see FIG. 70 described later) for detecting the entry (passage) of a game ball into the big winning hole 1131 for a big winning, and a special electric accessory 1133. The special electric accessory unit 1130 is disposed below the passing gate unit 1125 in the right side area 1107.

The big winning opening 1131 for big wins is arranged so that game balls hit from the right can win (game balls hit from the left have difficulty or difficulty winning). However, this is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the big winning opening 1131 for big wins described above, a big winning opening for big wins that can win game balls hit from the left may be arranged, or a big winning opening for big wins that can win game balls may be arranged above the center device 1115.

The big jackpot winning opening 1131 is an opening that is opened to allow a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) to enter (pass through) when the machine is controlled to a big jackpot game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. When the big jackpot winning opening count switch 1132 (see FIG. 70 described below) detects the entry of a game ball into the big jackpot winning opening 1131, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the big jackpot winning opening 1131 is not limited to 10.

The special electric device 1133 includes a special electric shutter 1134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 1135 (see FIG. 70 described later) that operates the special electric shutter 1134. The special electric device 1133, i.e., the special electric shutter 1134, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass) through the big winning opening 1131 for a big win, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter (pass) through the big winning opening 1131 for a big win. The transition from the closed state to the open state of the big winning opening 1131 for a big win is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. In other words, the big winning game state is a game state in which a large number of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the big winning opening 1131 for a big win transitions from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period over multiple rounds.

(Second starting hole)
In this embodiment, the second starting holes 1140A and 1140B are arranged in the game area 1105 as the second starting holes, and both of these second starting holes 1140A and 1140B are designed so that a game ball hit to the right can win (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win). However, this is not limited to this, and a game ball hit to the left may be able to win the second starting hole 1140A and/or the second starting hole 1140B.

When a game ball enters the second start hole 1140A, it is detected by the second start hole switch 1141A (see FIG. 70 described below). Also, when a game ball enters the second start hole 1140B, it is detected by the second start hole switch 1141B (see FIG. 70 described below). Regardless of whether the game ball enters the second start hole 1140A or 1140B, this triggers the process of determining whether the second special symbol has been won.

When the second start port switches 1141A, 1141B (see FIG. 70 described below) detect the entry (passage) of a game ball into the second start port 1140A, 1140B, the start information of the second special pattern is extracted, and the extracted start information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to four). The reserved start information is used for the winning determination process of the second special pattern. When a game ball enters the second start port 1140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the second start port 1140B, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the second start port 1140A, 1140B is not limited to this.

In this embodiment, two flow paths 1107a, 1107b are formed on the downstream side of the flow direction of the game ball that is hit from the right but does not enter the big winning opening 1131 for the big win. The game ball that is hit from the right and does not enter the big winning opening 1131 for the big win and flows further downstream is sorted by the branching nail 1108 shown in FIG. 69, for example, to the upper flow path 1107a or the lower flow path 1107b.

The second starting port 1140A is arranged so that game balls sorted into the upper flow path 1107a can win, and most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 1107a can win. However, it is not essential to configure most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 1107a to win at the second starting port 1140A. For example, it may be configured so that almost no game balls can be expected to win at the second starting port 1140A, or it may be configured so that a predetermined expected value (for example, approximately one-third to one-fifth) of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 1107a can win. Note that game balls that flow down the upper flow path 1107a but do not win at the second starting port 1140A are configured to be discharged outside the machine from the outlet 1178.

The second starting hole 1140B is positioned so that the game balls distributed to the downward flow path 1107b can enter, but details will be given later in the explanation of the normal electric role unit 1145.

(Normal electric role unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 1145 is arranged on the lower flow path 1107b side, and is a unit body that integrates a winning hole through which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when the game ball enters (passes through), a switch that detects the entry of the game ball into this winning hole, and a normal electric accessory 1146. In this embodiment, the winning hole is the second start hole 1140B, and the switch is the second start hole switch 1141B. However, it is not essential that the winning hole is the second start hole 1140B, and for example, the first start hole may be the winning hole.

The normal electric device 1146 is equipped with a protruding plate-type normal power shutter 1147 that can move back and forth, and a normal power solenoid 1148 (see FIG. 70 described below) that operates the normal power shutter 1147. The normal electric device 1146, i.e., the normal power shutter 1147, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the second starting hole 1140B, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 1140B. Note that instead of the above-mentioned normal power shutter 1147 that can move back and forth, a movable member made of, for example, a blade member, known as a so-called electric tulip, may be used. The movable member may also be a blade type, a door type, a protruding plate type, or the like.

(Small hit unit)
The small win unit 1150 is a unitary body that integrates a small win large prize opening 1151, a small win large prize opening count switch 1152 (see Figure 70 described below) that detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the small win large prize opening 1151, a small win shutter 1153 that can move back and forth, and a small win solenoid 1154 that can operate this small win shutter 1153.

The small win shutter 1153 is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter (pass through) the large winning opening 1151 for small wins, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the large winning opening 1151 for small wins, by moving it back and forth.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening for small wins 1151 when it is opened, the winning game ball is detected by the large prize opening for small wins count switch 1152 (see FIG. 70 described below). When the large prize opening for small wins count switch 1152 detects a game ball, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening for small wins 1151 is not limited to 10.

The small win unit 1150 is located on the lower flow path 1107b downstream of the normal electric role unit 1145. Therefore, when the second starting port 1140B is opened by the operation of the normal electric role 1146, even if the small win large prize opening 1151 is open, the game ball that flows down the lower flow path 1107b will enter the second starting port 1140B located upstream before reaching the small win large prize opening 1151, making it difficult (or impossible) for the ball to enter the small win large prize opening 1151.

In this embodiment, the large prize opening 1131 for the large prize and the large prize opening 1151 for the small prize are provided separately, but this is not limited to this, and the large prize opening that is opened when the large prize game control process is executed and the large prize opening that is opened when the small prize game control process is executed may be the same large prize opening.

(Outlet)
The outlet 1178 is for discharging game balls that have been shot toward the game area 1105 but have not won any of the various winning holes (for example, the first starting hole 1120, the second starting hole 1140A, 1140B, the big winning hole 1131 for big wins, the general winning hole 1122, etc.) to the outside of the machine. This outlet 1178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 1105 so that both game balls hit from the left and game balls hit from the right can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned outlet 1178, an outlet may be provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between multiple general winning holes 1122 or between the normal electric role unit 1145 and the small winning unit 1150, so that game balls flowing down the game area 1105 can be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(Back unit)
The back unit (not shown) has a decorative body, and is provided on the rear side of the transparent game panel 1100 as described above. This back unit includes a group of performance-use accessories 1058 such as movable accessories controlled by a sub-control circuit 1300 (see FIG. 70 described later). The group of performance-use accessories 1058 is arranged around the display area of the display device 1007, for example. At least one of the performance-use accessory group 1058 or a performance-use accessory component constituting the accessory functions as a performance-use accessory that can be operated based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol.

[2-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the second pachinko game machine will be described with reference to Fig. 70. Fig. 70 is an example of a block diagram showing the control circuit of the second pachinko game machine. Note that the control circuit of the second pachinko game machine has some parts in common with the control circuit of the first pachinko game machine, but they will be described in detail again.

As shown in FIG. 70, the second pachinko game machine is mainly composed of a main control circuit 1200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 1300 that controls the presentation according to the progress of the game, a payout/launch control circuit 1400, and a power supply circuit 1450.

[2-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 1200 controls, for example, processes executed when the power is turned on and processes related to game operations, and is equipped with a main CPU 1201, a main ROM 1202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 1203 (read/write memory), an initial reset circuit 1204, and a backup capacitor 1207, and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

The main CPU 1201 is connected to the main ROM 1202, the main RAM 1203, the initial reset circuit 1204, etc. The main CPU 1201 has built-in functions such as a watchdog timer (WDT) that monitors operation and a function to prevent fraud.

The main ROM 1202 stores programs for controlling the operation of the second pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 1201, various tables, etc. The main CPU 1201 has the function of executing various processes according to the programs stored in the main ROM 1202.

The main RAM 1203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game. This main RAM 1203 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 1201. Note that, although in this embodiment, RAM is used as the temporary storage area for the main CPU 1201, this is not limiting and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

The initial reset circuit 1204 monitors the main CPU 1201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 1207 has the function of temporarily supplying power to prevent data stored in the main RAM 1203 from being lost in the event of a power outage, etc.

The main control circuit 1200 also includes an I/O port 1205 that is connected to various devices and other devices so as to be able to communicate with each other, and a command output port 1206 that is connected to the sub-control circuit 1300 so as to be able to output various commands to the sub-control circuit 1300.

In addition, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 1200. For example, the main control circuit 1200 is connected to the normal symbol display unit 1161, the normal symbol reserved display unit 1162, the first special symbol display unit 1163, the second special symbol display unit 1164, the first special symbol reserved display unit 1165, the second special symbol reserved display unit 1166, the sure-change notification display unit 1167, the time-saving notification display unit 1168, the normal power solenoid 1148, the special power solenoid 1135, and the small win solenoid 1154. In addition to these, the main control circuit 1200 is also connected to the performance display monitor 1170 and the error notification monitor 1172. The main control circuit 1200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals via the I/O port 1205.

The performance display monitor 1170 displays performance display data and setting values (described later) under the control of the main CPU 1201. The performance display data is data that indicates, for example, the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state for a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 60,000 balls) shot, and is also called a base value.

The error notification monitor 1172 displays an error code. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 1172 can also display a setting change code indicating that a setting change process is in progress, a setting confirmation code indicating that a setting confirmation process is in progress, etc., for example, in a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function described below. Note that the setting change code may be configured to display a symbol that is not normally displayed as a special symbol (for example, a setting change symbol indicating that a setting change is in progress).

The main control circuit 1200 is also connected to the first start port switch 1121, the second start port switches 1141A and 1141B, the pass gate switch 1127, the big win large prize port count switch 1132, the general prize port switch 1123, and the small win large prize port count switch 1152. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is output to the main control circuit 1200 via the I/O port 1205.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 1200 is connected to a calling device (not shown) having functions such as calling a hall attendant and displaying the number of jackpots, an external terminal board 1184 used to send data to a hall computer 1186 that manages the pachinko machines in the hall, a setting key 1174 that is operated to change or check the setting value in the case of a pachinko machine with a setting function described later, and a backup clear switch 1176 that can clear the backup data stored in the main RAM 1203 in response to the operation of the gaming center manager. In this embodiment, the backup clear switch 1176 also serves as a switch for changing the setting value described later, but is not limited to this, and a setting switch for changing the setting value may also be provided.

The setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 are preferably housed in a specified case so that they cannot be easily touched by third parties (e.g., players) other than the arcade manager. "Inside a specified case" includes not only a case in which the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also a case in which notches are provided only at the locations corresponding to the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176, so that the arcade manager can touch the setting key 1174 and/or the backup clear switch 1176 when the pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the arcade manager to expose the back.

In this embodiment, the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 are connected to the main control circuit 1200, but this is not limited thereto, and they may be configured to be connected to the payout/launch control circuit 1400 or the power supply circuit 1450, for example. In this case, too, it is preferable to prevent third parties other than the arcade manager from easily touching the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176.

[2-2-2. Sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 1300 includes a sub-CPU 1301, a program ROM 1302, a work RAM 1303, a display control circuit 1304, a sound control circuit 1305, an LED control circuit 1306, a role control circuit 1307, and a command input port 1308. The sub-control circuit 1300 executes effects according to the progress of the game in response to commands from the main control circuit 1200. Although not shown in Fig. 70, the sub-control circuit 1300 is also connected to effect buttons 54 (see Fig. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 1302 stores programs for controlling the game presentation of the second pachinko game machine by the sub-CPU 1301, various tables, etc. The sub-CPU 1301 has the function of executing various processes according to the programs stored in the program ROM 1302. In particular, the sub-CPU 1301 controls the game presentation according to various commands sent from the main control circuit 1200.

The work RAM 1303 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub-CPU 1301.

The display control circuit 1304 is a circuit for controlling the display of the display device 1007. The display control circuit 1304 includes a VDP, an image data ROM in which data for generating various types of image data is stored, a frame buffer for temporarily storing image data, a D/A converter for converting image data into an image signal, and the like.

The display control circuit 1304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command from the sub-CPU 1301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data showing decorative patterns, background image data, and performance image data.

Then, the display control circuit 1304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 1007 at a predetermined timing. When the image signal is supplied to the display device 1007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 1007. In this way, the display control circuit 1304 can control the display device 1007 to display an image related to the game.

The audio control circuit 1305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 1032. The audio control circuit 1305 includes a sound source IC for controlling the audio, an audio data ROM for storing various types of audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as an AMP) for amplifying the audio signal, and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speaker 1032. In response to a sound generation command from the sub-CPU 1301, the sound source IC selects one piece of sound data from multiple pieces of sound data stored in the sound data ROM. The sound source IC also reads the selected sound data from the sound data ROM, converts the sound data into a specified sound signal, and supplies the converted sound signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as sound and sound effects output from the speaker 1032.

The LED control circuit 1306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 1046, which includes decorative LEDs. The LED control circuit 1306 includes a drive circuit for supplying LED control signals, a decoration data ROM in which multiple types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The reel control circuit 1307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each reel (for example, one or more reels among the group of reels for performance 1058). The reel control circuit 1307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each reel, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and a reel data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored.

The reel control circuit 1307 selects one operation pattern from among multiple operation patterns stored in the reel data ROM in response to a reel operation command from the sub-CPU 1301. The selected operation pattern is then read from the reel data ROM, and a drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is then supplied to control the mechanical operation of each reel. The lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from among multiple lighting patterns stored in the reel data ROM in response to a lighting command from the sub-CPU 1301. The selected lighting pattern is then read from the reel data ROM, and a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern is then supplied to control the lighting operation of each reel.

The command input port 1308 is connected to the command output port 1206 and receives various commands sent from the main control circuit 1200.

The payout/launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls, and is connected to a payout device 1082 capable of paying out game balls, a launch device 1006 capable of launching game balls, a card unit 1180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like.

When the payout/launch control circuit 1400 receives a prize ball control command sent from the main control circuit 1200, it sends a predetermined signal to the payout device 1082 and controls the payout device 1082 to pay out game balls.

The card unit 1180 is connected to a ball lending operation panel 1182. The ball lending operation panel 1182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending, and a loan/return button for receiving the return of a ball lending card on which cache data is stored (neither is shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a loan ball control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 1180. The payout/launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout device 1082 to pay out game balls based on the loan ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 1180. The operation panel 1182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 1180 side.

In addition, when the launch handle 62 (see Figures 1 and 2) is rotated clockwise, the payout/launch control circuit 1400 supplies power to a launch solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (amount of rotation), and controls the launch of the game ball.

The power supply circuit 1450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required during play to the main control circuit 1200, the sub control circuit 1300, the payout/launch control circuit 1400, etc.

The power supply circuit 1450 is connected to a power switch 1095 and other components. The power switch 1095 is turned on when the necessary power is to be supplied to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 1200, the sub control circuit 1300, the payout/launch control circuit 1400, etc.).

[2-3. Basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the second pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Figures 71 to 75. The second pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function will be omitted below.

In the second pachinko game machine, a normal game state in which neither the probability variable control nor the time-saving control is executed, a high-probability time-saving game state in which both the probability variable control and the time-saving control are executed, a high-probability non-time-saving game state in which the probability variable control is executed but the time-saving control is not executed, and a low-probability time-saving game state in which the probability variable control is not executed but the time-saving control is executed are prepared, and the main CPU 1201 is capable of progressing the game in any of these game states. However, the game states progressed by the control of the main CPU 1201 are not limited to these, and it is also possible to prevent any of the normal game state, the high-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability non-time-saving game state, and the low-probability time-saving game state from progressing. For example, it is possible to allow the game to progress in any of the normal game state, the high-probability time-saving game state, and the low-probability time-saving game state, and not allow the game to progress in the high-probability non-time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, hitting to the left is the normal game mode, and in the high-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability non-time-saving game state, and the low-probability time-saving game state, hitting to the right is the normal game mode. The sub-CPU 1301 executes control to display the normal game mode (e.g., whether to hit to the right or left) in, for example, the display area of the display device 1007.

[2-3-1. Special symbol winning judgment table]
FIG. 71 shows an example of a special symbol winning determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 provided in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table referenced in the hit determination process for the special symbol (see S1034 in FIG. 78 described later), that is, a table referenced when determining by lottery whether a "time-saving hit", "small hit", "big hit" or "miss" is a hit based on a random number value for big hit determination extracted when a game ball enters the first start hole 1120 or the second start hole 1140A, 1140B. In this embodiment, the objects of the lottery in the hit determination process for the first special symbol are a "time-saving hit", a "big hit", and a "miss", and a "small hit" is not included in the objects of the lottery. In contrast, the objects of the lottery in the hit determination process for the second special symbol are a "time-saving hit", a "small hit", a "big hit", and a "miss". However, a "small hit" may be included in the objects of the lottery in the hit determination process for the first special symbol.

As described above, the random number value for determining a jackpot is a random number value used in the process of determining whether or not a special symbol has won. In this embodiment, the random number value for determining a jackpot is selected from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the result is a "time-saving hit", "jackpot", or "miss" in the hit determination process for the first special symbol based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination. The hit determination table for the first special symbol specifies, for each value of the probability change flag (0 or 1), the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as a "time-saving hit" and the corresponding time-saving hit determination value data, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot determination value data, and the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as a "miss" and the corresponding miss determination value data.

In addition, in the hit determination process for the second special symbol, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the result is a "time-saving hit", "small hit", "big hit", or "miss" based on the extracted random number value for determining a big hit. In the hit determination table for the second special symbol, for each value of the probability change flag (0 or 1), the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a big hit determined as a "time-saving hit" and the corresponding time-saving hit determination value data, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a big hit determined as a "small hit" and the corresponding small hit determination value data, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a big hit determined as a "big hit" and the corresponding big hit determination value data, and the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a big hit determined as a "miss" and the corresponding miss determination value data are specified.

In this embodiment, for example, if the probability of a win flag is off during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for determining a jackpot is any value between 0 and 408, the main CPU 1201 determines that there is a "time-saving hit" and determines the hit/loss determination value data as "time-saving hit determination value data." Also, if the probability of a win flag is off during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for determining a jackpot is any value between 409 and 613, the main CPU 1201 determines that there is a "jackpot" and determines the hit/loss determination value data as "jackpot determination value data." Also, if the extracted random number value for determining a jackpot is any value between 614 and 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that there is a "miss" and determines the determination value data as "miss determination value data."

For example, if the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any of 0 to 408, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit" and determines the determination value data as "time-saving hit determination value data." If the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any of 409 to 1259, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and determines the determination value data as "jackpot determination value data." If the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any of 1260 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "miss" and determines the determination value data as "miss determination value data."

Similarly, for example, if the probability variable flag is off during hit determination processing for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 0 to 272, the main CPU 1201 determines it as a "time-saving hit" and determines the determination value data as "time-saving hit determination value data." Also, if the probability variable flag is off during hit determination processing for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 273 to 22117, the main CPU 1201 determines it as a "small hit" and determines the determination value data as "small hit determination value data." Also, if the probability variable flag is off during hit determination processing for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 22118 to 22322, the main CPU 1201 determines it as a "jackpot" and determines the determination value data as "jackpot determination value data." Furthermore, if the probability of a big win flag is off during the hit determination process for the second special symbol, and the extracted random number value for determining a big win is any of 22323 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines it as a "miss" and sets the determination value data to "miss determination value data."

Also, for example, if the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 0 to 272, the main CPU 1201 determines it as a "time-saving hit" and determines the determination value data as "time-saving hit determination value data." Also, if the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 273 to 22117, the main CPU 1201 determines it as a "small hit" and determines the determination value data as "small hit determination value data." Also, if the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 22118 to 22968, the main CPU 1201 determines it as a "jackpot" and determines the determination value data as "jackpot determination value data." Furthermore, if the probability of a big win flag is on during the hit determination process for the second special symbol, and the extracted random number value for determining a big win is any of 22969 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines it as a "miss" and sets the determination value data to "miss determination value data."

In this way, in this embodiment, of the random number values for determining a jackpot that are generated in the range of 0 to 65535, for example, a predetermined range from 0 (for example, 0 to 22117 in the hit determination process for the second special symbol) is assigned to other determination value data (for example, time-saving hit determination value data and small hit determination value data) excluding the jackpot determination value data and miss determination value data. In addition, the end of the predetermined value (for example, 22323 to 65535 if the special bonus flag is off during the hit determination process for the second special symbol) is assigned to miss determination value data. Furthermore, the jackpot determination value data and miss determination value data are assigned adjacent to each other. By doing this, for example, when the probability change flag changes from OFF to ON (or ON to OFF), it is possible to change the probability of a jackpot without changing the width of other judgment value data (for example, time-saving hit judgment value data and small hit judgment value data) by simply narrowing (or widening) the width of the miss judgment value data by the same amount that the width of the jackpot judgment value data is widened (or narrowed).

In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of winning the "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed is made different from the probability of winning the "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed, thereby adding variety to the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 71, by making the probability of winning a "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed higher than the probability of winning a "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the normal game state, which tends to become monotonous.

However, the probability of winning the "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed may be made higher than the probability of winning the "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed. In this case, for example, by overlapping the time-saving play state when a "time-saving hit" is won during a time-saving play state, if a "time-saving hit" is won just before the end of the time-saving play state, the time-saving play state is effectively extended, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest.

As shown in FIG. 71, in this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 can determine that the result of the hit determination process is a "time-shortened hit" whether the special-hit flag is on or off. However, when the special-hit flag is off (normal game state, time-shortened game state), the main CPU 1201 controls the game to the time-shortened game state if the result of the hit determination process is a "time-shortened hit", but when the special-hit flag is on, the main CPU 1201 does not control the game to the time-shortened game state even if the result of the hit determination process is a "time-shortened hit".

[2-3-2. Special symbol determination table]
FIG. 72 shows an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 provided in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is a table that is referenced when selecting a "selected symbol command" and a "symbol designation command" that determine the stopped symbol based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball enters the first starting hole 1120 or the second starting hole 1140A, 1140B and the aforementioned winning/losing determination value data (i.e., when executing the special symbol determination process of S1035 in FIG. 78 described below). The "selected symbol command" is a command for designating a symbol that is determined according to the result of the special symbol winning/losing determination process, and the "symbol designation command" is a command for designating a symbol that is displayed when the variable display of the special symbol stops. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted, for example, from 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 72, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 1201 selects, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 69, the main CPU 1201 selects "z0" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Also, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any of 70 to 96, the main CPU 1201 selects "z1" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Also, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any of 97 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z2" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 1201 selects, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is 0 or 1, the main CPU 1201 selects "z3" as the selected symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 2 and 9, the main CPU 1201 selects "z4" as the selected symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 10 and 59, the main CPU 1201 selects "z5" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, if the random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 60 and 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z6" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the winning determination process for the first special symbol, for example, even if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 0 and 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z7" as the selected symbol command and "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, 0 to 96, the main CPU 1201 selects "z8" as the selected symbol command and "zA6" as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, any value from 97 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z9" as the selected symbol command and "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, if small win determination value data is obtained as a result of the win determination process for the second special symbol, for example, even if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any value between 0 and 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z10" as the selected symbol command and "zA8" as the symbol designation command.

When small win determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, the main CPU 1201 executes small win game control processing. In the small win game control processing, for example, the small win shutter 1153 (see FIG. 69) is operated to execute control so that the small win large winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 69) is opened so that the game ball can enter (pass through) the small win large winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 69) or can be easily opened, and the prize ball can be paid out.

In addition, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 0 and 29, the main CPU 1201 selects "z11" as the selected symbol command and "zA9" as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 30 and 59, the main CPU 1201 selects "z12" as the selected symbol command and "zA10" as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 60 and 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z13" as the selected symbol command and "zA10" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the winning determination process for the second special symbol, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected, for example, as follows. That is, regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z14" as the selected symbol command and "zA11" as the symbol designation command.

In this embodiment, the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 71) is referenced to determine the hit/lose determination value data based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination, and then the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 72) is referenced to determine the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, but this is not limited to this. For example, the hit/lose of the special symbol, the selected symbol command, and the symbol designation command may be determined together based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination and the symbol random number value of the special symbol.

Although the second pachinko gaming machine will not be described, the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 stores a special symbol stop mode determination table equivalent to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) described in the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table is a table that is referenced when determining the stop mode of the special symbol that is output to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164 (see FIG. 70) when the variable display of the special symbol stops, in response to a selected symbol command. In addition, the special symbol display units 1163 and 1164 derive the display mode of a time-saving hit, a big hit, a small hit, or a miss based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. In addition, a decorative symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative symbol stop mode determination table described in the first pachinko game machine (see FIG. 12(B)) is also stored in the program ROM 1302 of the sub-control circuit 1300.

[2-3-3. Winning Type Determination Table]
FIG. 73 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 of the second pachinko game machine. The winning type determination table is referred to when determining the winning game state and/or the subsequent game state in response to the selection symbol command determined in response to the symbol random number value of the special symbol (i.e., when executing the winning type determination process of S1036 in FIG. 78 described later). The winning game state shown in FIG. 73 indicates the big win game state or the small win game state. In addition, the subsequent game state indicates the game state after the winning game state ends. However, if the result of the winning determination process of the special symbol is a time-saving winning, the game state is controlled to the C time-saving game state without being controlled to the winning game state, so that the subsequent game state indicates the C time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the mode of the C time-saving game state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0," the main CPU 1201 determines that only the time-saving flag is set on among the high probability flag and the time-saving flag, and determines that the number of time-saving times is set to 10. When the selected symbol command is "z1" or "z8," the main CPU 1201 determines that only the time-saving flag is set on among the high probability flag and the time-saving flag, and determines that the number of time-saving times is set to 50. When the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z9," the main CPU 1201 determines that only the time-saving flag is set on among the high probability flag and the time-saving flag, and determines that the number of time-saving times is set to 100. If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", the main CPU 1201 derives the display mode of the above-mentioned time-saving hit to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then sets the time-saving flag on and the determined number of time-saving times without controlling to the big hit game state, and can control to the C time-saving game state. Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", the hit game state is not controlled, so the mode of the hit game state is not determined. In this embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", the number of time-saving times set is the same regardless of the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed. However, this is not limited to this, and the number of time-saving times set may be different depending on the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the number of time-saving turns that is set varies depending on the selected symbol command that is determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol. By doing this, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," it is possible to provide variety to the progress of the game thereafter, and to prevent a decline in interest.

As described above, when the probability variable flag is on, the main CPU 1201 does not control to the time-saving game state even if the result of the winning judgment process is a "time-saving win". For example, even if the probability variable flag is on (high probability game state), the main CPU 1201 performs a lottery for a "time-saving win" as shown in FIG. 72, and when the result of the winning judgment process is a "time-saving win", the main CPU 1201 derives the display mode of the time-saving win indicating that the "time-saving win" has been won to the special pattern display units 1163 and 1164, but does not control to the C time-saving game state. In addition, the main CPU 1201 may perform a lottery for a "time-saving win" even if the probability variable flag is on, and when the result of the winning judgment process is a "time-saving win", the main CPU 1201 may forcibly derive the display mode of a loss to the special pattern display units 1163 and 1164. Furthermore, if the probability of winning flag is on, the random number value for determining a jackpot may not be assigned time-saving hit determination value data, i.e., a win determination process may be performed in which the "time-saving hit" is not included in the lottery result.

In this embodiment, when the probability variable flag is on, the game is configured not to transition to the C time-saving game state, but this is not limited to this. For example, in a high-probability non-time-saving game state in which the probability variable flag is on but the time-saving flag is off, if the result of the hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the game may transition to a high-probability time-saving game state.

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small hit", the mode of the hit game state and the mode of the subsequent game state are determined as follows. For example, if the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of times the small hit large winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 69) is opened to be one time as the mode of the small hit game state. If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small hit", the main CPU 1201 derives the display mode of the small hit described above to the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then sets the determined number of times the small hit large winning opening 1151 is opened, making it possible to control the game state to a small hit. Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small hit", after the small hit game state ends, the main CPU 1201 does not change either the probability change flag or the time reduction flag, and returns to the game state immediately before being controlled to the small hit game state.

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot," the winning game state and the subsequent game state are determined as follows:

For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3" or "z11", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state to be 10 rounds, and as the mode of the subsequent game state, determines that only the high probability flag out of the high probability flag and the time-saving flag is set to on, and determines that the number of high probability flags is set to 10,000. In this case, the main CPU 1201 derives the display mode of the jackpot described above to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then after the jackpot game state ends, it becomes possible to control the game state to a high probability non-time-saving game state.

When the selected symbol command is "z4", "z5", or "z12", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of rounds to be 10, 4, or 10, respectively, as the mode of the jackpot game state. In addition, in each case, as the mode of the subsequent game state, it determines to set both the probability change flag and the time-saving flag on, and determines to set both the number of probability change rounds and the number of time-saving rounds to 10,000. In these cases, the main CPU 1201 controls the jackpot game state after deriving the display mode of the jackpot described above to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then controls it to a jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game state ends, it becomes possible to control it to a high-probability time-saving game state.

In addition, when the selected symbol command is "z6" and when it is "z13", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state to be 4 rounds and 10, respectively. In addition, as the mode of the subsequent game state, in either case, it determines that only the time-saving flag out of the probability change flag and the time-saving flag is set to on. In addition, the number of time-saving times to be set is determined to be set to, for example, 200 times when the selected symbol command is "z6", and to be set to, for example, 300 times when the selected symbol command is "z13". In these cases, the main CPU 1201 controls the display mode of the above-mentioned jackpot to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then controls it to the jackpot game state, and after the end of this jackpot game state, it can be controlled to the time-saving game state. The time-saving game state controlled here is the A time-saving game state. In addition, the mode of time-saving control in the high-probability time-saving game state (hereinafter also referred to as "time-saving performance") is preferably the same as the time-saving performance in the A time-saving game state, but may be different from the time-saving performance in the A time-saving game state.

Also, for example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss" (for example, if the selected symbol command is "z7" or "z14"), the main CPU 1201 does not set either the hit game state or the subsequent game state. In other words, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, the main CPU 1201 does not change the game state, but continues to control the previous game state.

Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z7" or "z14"), neither the state of the winning game state nor the state of the subsequent game state is set as described above, so there is no need to illustrate this in the hit type determination table of FIG. 73. However, in this embodiment, for the sake of convenience, it is illustrated in FIG. 73 to clearly show that, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss", neither the state of the winning game state nor the state of the subsequent game state is determined.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 refers to the special symbol hit determination table in FIG. 71, and determines the hit/loss determination value data based on the random number value for jackpot determination extracted when the game ball enters the first start hole 1120 or the second start hole 1140A, 1140B (performs hit/loss determination), and determines the hit/loss ("time-saving hit", "small hit", "jackpot", or "miss"). After that, the main CPU 1201 refers to the special symbol determination table in FIG. 72, and determines the selected symbol command based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball enters the first start hole 1120 or the second start hole 1140A, 1140B and the hit/loss determination value data, and determines the type of display mode (for example, the type of time-saving hit, the type of jackpot) to be derived to the special symbol display section 1163, 1164. Note that the above winning/losing judgment and selection of the symbol command are performed when the variable display of the special symbol begins, but this does not exclude the possibility of performing this between the start of the variable display of the special symbol and the final display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 73, in this embodiment, the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving game state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state is, for example, 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z6") or 300 times (when the selected symbol command is "z13"). In contrast, the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state that is controlled when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit" is, for example, 10 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1"), or 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z2"). In other words, the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving game state is higher than the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state. In this way, the positioning of the "jackpot" can be increased by making the A time-saving game state more advantageous for the player than the C time-saving game state. For example, even if you win a "jackpot", it will be possible to suppress the decline in interest that may occur when you are at a disadvantage compared to not winning the "jackpot" (winning a "time-saving jackpot").

In addition, instead of making the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving play state higher than the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving play state, the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving play state may be made higher than the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving play state. In this way, by making the C time-saving play state more advantageous to the player than the A time-saving play state, the positioning of a "time-saving hit" can be increased. For example, even if a long period of time continues without a "jackpot", if a "time-saving hit" is won, the game will be controlled to the relatively advantageous C time-saving play state, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest.

[2-3-4. Special symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 74 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol for a low start of the second pachinko game machine. FIG. 75 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol for a high start of the second pachinko game machine. All of these tables are stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 of the second pachinko game machine. The "Notes" column in FIG. 74 and FIG. 75 is shown for convenience of understanding. The main CPU 1201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball enters the first start hole 1120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the game ball enters the second start hole 1140A, 1140B. The variation pattern tables of the special symbols in FIG. 74 and FIG. 75 are tables that are referred to when executing the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol in S1037 in FIG. 78 described later.

In normal game mode, where hitting from the left is the normal game mode, the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for low starts shown in FIG. 74, for example.

As shown in the special symbol variation pattern table for low starts in FIG. 74, the main CPU 1201 sets a look-ahead flag when the random number value for effect selection extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first start hole 1120 is a specific random number value. The sub-CPU 1301, which receives the special symbol variation pattern command sent from the main CPU 1201, performs a look-ahead effect when the look-ahead flag is set.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 decides whether or not to perform a look-ahead performance, but this is not limited to this, and the sub-CPU 1301 may decide.

On the other hand, in a game state where right-hand play is the normal game mode, i.e., in a high-probability time-saving game state, a high-probability non-time-saving game state, or a low-probability time-saving game state, the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern table for special symbols for high starts shown in, for example, FIG. 75.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 does not set a look-ahead flag when determining the special symbol variation pattern by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for high starts, but this is not limited to this.

As shown in Figures 74 and 75, the variation pattern of the special symbols is determined based on the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win/lose), the random number value for reach determination, and the random number value for effect selection. However, it is not limited to this, and may be determined based on other values instead of or in addition to any of the above.

The random number value for reach determination is selected from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for effect selection is selected from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

When the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high start in FIG. 75, the expected number of times the special symbol is variably displayed per unit time is larger than when the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start in FIG. 74. In particular, when the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start, the second special symbol is variably displayed for an extremely long period of time, for example, approximately 600,000 msec (for example, long fluctuation A to C). On the other hand, when the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high start, the second special symbol is variably displayed for only an extremely short period of time, for example, 1,000 msec (for example, super-fast fluctuation).

The main CPU 1201 transmits the determined variation pattern information to the sub-CPU 1301. The sub-CPU 1301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 1007 and the sound effects output from the speaker 1032 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 1201.

Although not shown in Figures 74 and 75, the variation pattern (variable display time) of the special symbols that are determined may be different for each setting value, for example by changing the range of the random number value for effect selection.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, in a normal game state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to a special symbol fluctuation pattern table for a low start (see FIG. 74), and in a high-probability time-saving game state, a high-probability non-time-saving game state, and a low-probability time-saving game state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to a special symbol fluctuation pattern table for a high start (see FIG. 75), but this is not limited to this. For example, as the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for a high start, multiple fluctuation pattern tables with different expected values for the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed per unit time may be provided, and the table to be referenced when determining the special symbol fluctuation pattern may be different depending on the type of time-saving game state, for example.

In addition, the time-saving hit type reaches A and B shown in the "Notes" column of Figures 74 and 75 are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process for the special pattern may be a time-saving hit (no possibility of a jackpot). Similarly, the jackpot type reaches A and B are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process for the special pattern may be a jackpot (no possibility of a time-saving hit). Furthermore, the common reaches A and B are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process for the special pattern may be either a time-saving hit or a jackpot.

Although the second pachinko gaming machine will not be described, like the first pachinko gaming machine, the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 stores a normal symbol winning determination table (see FIG. 16), a normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17), a normal symbol winning type determination table (see FIG. 18), and a normal symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 19). The main CPU 1201 then determines the opening pattern of the normal electric device 1146 (see FIG. 69) in the same way as the first pachinko gaming machine, and controls the operating mode of the normal electric device 1146 based on this.

[2-4. Main control processing]
In the second pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 1201 of the main control circuit 1200 are the same as those executed by the main CPU 1201 except for the special symbol control process executed in S39 in the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23). Therefore, the special symbol control process will be described below, and the other processes executed by the main CPU 1201 will not be described. Note that the special symbol control process in the second pachinko game machine includes the same processes as those executed in the first pachinko game machine (e.g., the jackpot end process (Figs. 42 and 86)), but the special symbol control process will be described again below, including the same processes as those executed in the first pachinko game machine, with the step numbers changed.

[2-4-1. Special symbol control process]
Next, the special symbol control process performed in S39 in the main control process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 76. Fig. 76 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol control process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 76, the main CPU 1201 first loads the control state number of the second special symbol in S1001. The control state number of the special symbol is a number that indicates the state (status) of the control process related to the variable display of each special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S1001, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1002.

Although not shown, when the main CPU 1201 executes the special symbol control process, prior to the process of S1001, the main CPU 1201 performs an address setting process to set the address of the working area of each special symbol in the main RAM 1203 in a predetermined register.

Although not shown, when executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 1201 also performs a process to check the reserved number of the first special symbol and the reserved number of the second special symbol. If the reserved number of the first special symbol is "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 1201 performs a process to reserve the transmission of a demo display command for the first special symbol, and if the reserved number of the second special symbol is "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 1201 performs a process to reserve the transmission of a demo display command for the second special symbol. The demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. If the sub-control circuit 1300 receives the demo display command, and the demo display command is a demo display command for the main special symbol, the sub-CPU 1301 performs a demo display performance.

Although the second pachinko game machine can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, the sub-CPU 1301 sets one of the first and second special symbols as the main special symbol and the other as the sub-special symbol, and mainly controls the presentation of the main special symbol. In this embodiment, in the normal game state in which left-handed play is the regular game mode, the first special symbol is the main special symbol, and in the game state in which right-handed play is the regular game mode (for example, high-probability time-saving game state, high-probability non-time-saving game state, low-probability time-saving game state), the second special symbol is the main special symbol. The sub-CPU 1301 then performs variably displaying decorative symbols and displaying characters, etc., for the main special symbol, as well as sound presentation, etc., for the main special symbol. For example, if the result of the hit determination process for the sub-special symbol is, for example, a jackpot, the main special symbol may be displayed while the sub-special symbol is displayed. In addition, in a low-probability time-saving game state among game states in which right-hitting is the regular game mode, another display image (for example, a countdown display of the remaining number of time-saving turns until the time-saving game state ends) may be displayed instead of the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, which is the main special symbol.

In S1002, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is time for the second special symbol to start being variably displayed based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S1001.

If it is determined in S1002 that it is not the timing to start the variable display of the second special symbol (if S1002 is a NO judgment), that is, if any processing related to the second special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 1201 transfers the processing to S1003. For example, if a jackpot game control processing based on the result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol is being executed, a NO judgment is made in S1002.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1002 that it is time for the second special symbol to begin to change display (if S1002 returns YES), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1004.

In S1003, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. After executing the processing of S1003, the main CPU 1201 transfers the processing to S1004.

In S1004, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S1004, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1005.

In S1005, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is time for the first special symbol to start being variable displayed based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S1004.

If it is determined in S1005 that it is not the timing to start the variable display of the first special symbol (if S1005 is a NO judgment), that is, if any processing related to the first special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 1201 transfers the processing to S1006. For example, if a jackpot game control processing based on the result of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol is being executed, a NO judgment is made in S1005.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1005 that it is time for the first special symbol to begin to change display (if S1005 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1007.

In S1006, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, details of the special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. After executing the processing of S1006, the main CPU 1201 transfers the processing to S1007.

In S1007, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the second special symbol. After executing the process of S1007, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1008.

In S1008, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is time for the second special symbol to start being variable displayed based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S1007.

If it is determined in S1008 that it is not time for the second special symbol to start being variable displayed (if S1008 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1010.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1008 that it is time to start the variable display of the second special symbol (if S1008 returns a YES judgment), that is, if no processing related to the second special symbol has been performed and variable display can begin, the main CPU 1201 transfers processing to S1009.

In S1009, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, details of the special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. After executing the processing of S1009, the main CPU 1201 transfers the processing to S1010.

In S1010, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S1010, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1011.

In S1011, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is time for the first special symbol to start being variable displayed based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S1010.

If it is determined in S1011 that it is not time for the first special symbol to start being variable displayed (if S1011 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see Figures 20 to 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1011 that it is time to start the variable display of the first special symbol (if S1011 returns a YES judgment), that is, if no processing related to the first special symbol has been performed and variable display can begin, the main CPU 1201 transfers processing to S1012.

In S1012, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, details of the special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. After executing the processing of S1012, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIG. 20 to FIG. 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibited period and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S1001 to S1012) within the interrupt prohibited period.

In this way, in this embodiment, the special pattern management process described below is executed in the following order of priority: when any process related to the second special pattern is being executed, when any process related to the first special pattern is being executed, when no process related to the second special pattern is being executed and variable display can be started, when no process related to the first special pattern is being executed and variable display can be started.

[2-4-2. Special design management process]
Next, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1003, S1006, S1009, and S1012 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76) will be described with reference to Fig. 77. Fig. 77 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

For example, if the special pattern management process is called and executed in S1003 or S1009 during the special pattern control process, the second special pattern is the target of processing, and if the special pattern management process is called and executed in S1006 or S1012 during the special pattern control process, the first special pattern is the target of processing.

The numbers ("0" to "5") in parentheses to the right of each process in FIG. 77 are the control state numbers of the special symbols that are the subject of the process. The main CPU 1201 progresses the special symbol game by executing each process that corresponds to the control state number.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the waiting time for the special pattern is 0 (S1021).

If it is determined in S1021 that the waiting time for the special pattern is not 0 (if S1021 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special pattern management process and returns the process to the special pattern control process (see FIG. 76).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1021 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (if S1021 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1022.

In S1022, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S1022, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1023. The main CPU 1201 performs the process from S1023 onwards based on the control state number read in the process of S1022.

In S1023, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This S1023 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 78. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 1201 transfers the processing to S1024.

In S1024, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. This S1024 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to Figures 79 and 80. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 1201 transfers the processing to S1025.

In S1025, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game determination process. This S1025 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to Figures 81 and 82. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1026.

In S1026, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for preparing to open the large prize opening. This process of S1026 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this process for preparing to open the large prize opening will be described later with reference to FIG. 84. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1027.

In S1027, the main CPU 1201 performs a large prize opening control process. This process of S1027 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this large prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 85. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1028.

In S1028, the main CPU 1201 performs a jackpot end process. This S1028 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86.

After completing the processes of S1023 to S1028, the main CPU 1201 returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76). If the special symbol management process is called in S1003 during the special symbol control process, the main CPU 1201 returns the process to S1004; if it is called in S1006, the main CPU 1201 returns the process to S1007; if it is called in S1009, the main CPU 1201 returns the process to S1010; and if it is called in S1012, the special symbol control process also ends.

[2-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1023 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described with reference to Fig. 78. Fig. 78 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display start process in the second pachinko game machine.

When the special symbol variable display start process is called in S1023 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start process is called in S1023 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

As shown in FIG. 78, the main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S1031).

If it is determined in S1031 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (if S1031 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1031 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (if S1031 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1032.

In S1032, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the special symbol pause flag is off. The special symbol pause flag is a flag that stops the progress of the game so that it does not proceed to the next process. Therefore, in this S1032, even if S1031 is judged as YES (i.e., even if the start condition of the special symbol is met), if the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is on (S1032 is judged as NO), the special symbol variable display start process ends without proceeding.

If it is determined in S1032 that the special symbol pause flag is not OFF, i.e., is ON (if S1032 is a NO determination), as described above, the special symbol variable display start process does not proceed, and the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display start process. After that, the main CPU 1201 returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1032 that the special pattern pause flag is off (if S1032 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers processing to S1033.

In S1033, the main CPU 1201 performs a shift process of the start information of the special pattern. After executing the process of S1033, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1034.

In S1034, the main CPU 1201 performs a hit determination process for the special symbol. In this process, the hit determination process for the special symbol is performed by referring to the hit determination table for the special symbol (see FIG. 71) and using a random number value for determining whether the special symbol is a big hit. In this embodiment, the first special symbol is determined to be a time-saving hit, a big hit, or a miss, and the second special symbol is determined to be a time-saving hit, a small hit, a big hit, or a miss. In addition, the main CPU 1201 sets the time-saving hit flag on when the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a time-saving hit, sets the small hit flag on when the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a small hit, and sets the big hit flag on when the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a big hit. After executing the process of S1034, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1035. The time-saving hit flag is turned off when transitioning to the C time-saving play state, the small hit flag is turned off when the small hit play state begins, and the big hit flag is turned off when the big hit play state begins.

In the process of determining whether or not the special symbol is a hit (see S1034), first, a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit is performed, and if this process determines that it is not a big hit, a process of determining whether or not it is a small hit is performed, and if this process determines that it is not a small hit, a process of determining whether or not it is a time-saving hit is performed, and if this process determines that it is not a time-saving hit, it is determined that it is a miss.

In S1035, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol determination process. This process is a process for determining or deciding the stopping symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S1034) (for example, a time-saving hit, a small hit, a big hit, or a miss). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 72) is referenced, and the random number value of the special symbol is used to determine the above-mentioned "selection symbol command" or "symbol designation command". In this embodiment, since there is only one type of miss, it is not necessary to determine the stopping symbol when the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, but multiple types of misses may be provided and the stopping symbol may be determined when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss. After executing the process of S1035, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1036.

In S1036, the main CPU 1201 performs a win type determination process. This process is a process for determining or deciding the type of win when the result of the special symbol win determination process is, for example, a win (time-saving win, small win, or big win). In this process, the win type determination table (see FIG. 73) is referenced and the type of win is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S1035). Note that in this embodiment, there are multiple types of wins, but there may be only one type of big win or one type of time-saving win. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to multiple types of wins, multiple types of other wins (for example, small wins) may be provided, or multiple types of misses may be provided. After executing the process of S1036, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1037.

In S1037, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. This process is a process for judging or determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table (see Figs. 74 and 75), for example, according to the type of the special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit judgment process (S1034), the random number value for reach judgment and/or the random number value for performance selection, etc. In this embodiment, in a normal game state in which left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start (see Fig. 74), and in a game state in which right-handed hitting is the regular game mode (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state, a high-probability non-time-saving game state, a low-probability time-saving game state), the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start (see Fig. 75). After executing S1037, the main CPU 1201 transfers processing to S1038.

In S1038, the main CPU 1201 performs a variable display time setting process for the special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see Figures 74 and 75) is referenced, and the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the variation pattern determination process for the special symbol (S1037) is determined as the variation time for the special symbol. After executing the process of S1038, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1039.

In S1039, the main CPU 1201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the special symbol variable display start process ends, the special symbol variable display end process (see S1024 in FIG. 77) is performed. After executing the process of S1039, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1040.

In S1040, the main CPU 1201 executes a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, a process of updating parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 is performed. After executing the process of S1040, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1041.

In S1041, the main CPU 1201 performs game status management processing. In this processing, the main CPU 1201 mainly performs update processing of various flags related to the management of the game status (e.g., probability bonus flag, time-saving flag, etc.). After executing the processing of S1041, the main CPU 1201 transfers the processing to S1042.

In S1042, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process (particularly the game state management process (S1041) and the special symbol presentation start command transmission reservation process (S1042)) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[2-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, referring to Fig. 79 and Fig. 80, a special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1024 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 77) will be described. Fig. 79 and Fig. 80 are a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display end process in the second pachinko game machine.

When the special symbol variable display end process is called at S1024 during special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is called at S1024 during special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target. Also, in the special symbol variable display end process described below, the special symbol that is the processing target is simply referred to as the "special symbol," and the special symbol that is not the processing target is referred to as the "other special symbol."

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S1051).

If it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (if S1051 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (if S1051 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1052.

In S1052, the main CPU 1201 loads the special symbol pause flag value. After executing the process of S1052, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1053.

In S1053, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the special pattern pause flag is off based on the special pattern pause flag value loaded in S1052.

If it is determined in S1053 that the special pattern pause flag is not off, i.e., is on (if S1053 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special pattern variable display end process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1053 that the special pattern pause flag is off (if S1053 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1054.

In S1054, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (see S1025 in FIG. 77) is performed after the special symbol variable display ending process is completed. After executing the process of S1054, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1055.

In S1055, the main CPU 1201 executes a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect stop command. This process also includes a process for stopping the variable display of the special symbol. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1055, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1056.

In S1056, the main CPU 1201 adds 1 to the value of the determined symbol counter. The determined symbol counter is a counter for counting the number of times a special symbol has been determined (the number of times the special symbol game has been played), and the count is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 1203. For example, a counter may be provided for managing the number of games of the special symbol game played under a specific state, such as the number of remaining chance modes or the number of remaining time-saving modes, or the determined symbol counter may be used to manage the number of games of the special symbol game played under a specific state. After executing the process of S1056, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1057.

In S1057, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a small hit.

In S1057, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is determined to be not a small hit (if S1057 returns a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1059.

On the other hand, in S1057, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is determined to be a small hit (if S1057 returns a YES determination), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1058.

In S1058, the main CPU 1201 sets a special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from starting or stopping while the small win game control process is being executed. After executing the process of S1058, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1059.

In S1059, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a jackpot.

In S1059, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is determined to be not a big hit (if S1059 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, in S1059, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is determined to be a jackpot (if S1059 returns a YES determination), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1060.

In S1060, the main CPU 1201 sets a special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from starting while the jackpot game control process is being executed. After executing the process of S1060, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1061.

In S1061, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the other special symbol is being variably displayed.

If it is determined in S1061 that the other special symbol is not being variably displayed (if S1061 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variably display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1061 that the other special symbol is being variably displayed (if S1061 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1062.

In S1062, the main CPU 1201 increments the value of the determined symbol number counter by 1. After executing the process of S1062, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1063.

In S1063, the main CPU 1201 sets the variable display stop flag. When this process is performed, a test firing signal is output to the outside. This test firing signal is a signal indicating that the other special symbol has been forcibly stopped as a miss. After executing the process of S1063, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1064.

In S1064, the main CPU 1201 forcibly changes and sets the hit flag of the other special symbol to a miss. By performing this process, if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol being processed (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a jackpot, the other special symbol will be forcibly stopped as a miss even if the other special symbol is being variably displayed and the result of the hit determination process for this other special symbol is a jackpot. After executing the process of S1064, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1065.

In S1065, the main CPU 1201 performs processing to clear the working area related to the variable display of the other special symbol. After executing processing of S1065, the main CPU 1201 transfers processing to S1066.

In S1066, the main CPU 1201 performs processing to set a predetermined fixed waiting time on the timer for the other special symbol. In this processing, the fixed waiting time is set so that when the special symbol stops in a stop display mode indicating a jackpot, the other special symbol stops in a stop display mode indicating a miss. After executing processing in S1066, the main CPU 1201 transfers processing to S1067.

In S1067, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the other special symbol to "2." After executing the process of S1067, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1068.

In S1068, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1068, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1069.

In S1069, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of the other special symbol effect stop command. The other special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1069, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

In this way, in the special symbol variable display end processing of this embodiment, if the special symbol pause flag is not set for the special symbol being processed, the result of the hit determination processing for this special symbol (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a jackpot, and the other special symbol is being variable displayed, processing is performed to forcibly change the variable display of the other special symbol to a miss.

[2-4-5. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, with reference to Figures 81 and 82, a special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1025 during the special symbol management process (see Figure 77) will be described. Figures 81 and 82 are flow charts showing an example of the special symbol game determination process in the second pachinko game machine.

When this special symbol game judgment process is called at S1025 during special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol game judgment process is called at S1025 during special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S1071).

If it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (if S1071 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game play determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (if S1071 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1072.

At S1072, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot.

If it is determined in S1072 that the reel is not a jackpot, i.e. that the stopped special symbol is not in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot (if S1072 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1073. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1072 that the reel is a jackpot, i.e. that the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot (if S1072 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1075.

At S1073, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not a small win has occurred, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a small win.

If it is determined in S1073 that the special symbol is not a small win, i.e. that the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a miss (if S1073 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1074.

In S1074, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 83. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1073 that a small win has occurred, i.e., that the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a small win (if S1073 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1075.

In S1075, the main CPU 1201 performs start setting processing for the big win game control processing or the small win game control processing. In this processing, signals are generated and updated that are output via the external terminal board 1184 to, for example, the hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 70 for both) or the island computer (not shown). Note that the signals generated and updated in this processing are signals related to the special symbol that is the subject of the special symbol game determination processing. After performing processing in S1075, the main CPU 1201 transfers the processing to S1076.

In addition, in the start setting process of the jackpot game control process of S1075, the main CPU 1201 also performs processing to clear various flags and counters, such as the special chance flag, special chance counter, time-saving flag, and time-saving counter.

In S1076, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs processes such as a process of setting the upper limit of the number of times the large prize opening (for example, the large prize opening for large prizes 1131 for large prizes or the large prize opening for small prizes 1151 for small prizes) to be opened (S1077), a process of setting a large prize signal to the external terminal board 1184 (S1078), a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1079), a process of setting a game state designation parameter (S1080), and a process of reserving the transmission of a large prize start display command (S1081). In addition, by performing a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1079) to switch the control state number, the large prize opening opening preparation process (see S1026 in FIG. 77) will be performed after the special symbol game judgment process is completed. The main CPU 1201 then ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibited period and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S1071 to S1081) within the interrupt prohibited period.

[2-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, a special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1074 during the special symbol game determination process (see Figs. 81 and 82) will be described with reference to Fig. 83. Fig. 83 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game end process in the second pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 1201 first performs a time-saving management process (S1091). Details of this time-saving management process are similar to those described with reference to Figures 32 to 39 for the first pachinko gaming machine, so a detailed description will be omitted. After executing the process of S1091, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1092.

In S1092, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". When the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" is thus performed, the next special symbol game can be executed. After executing the process of S1092, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1093.

In S1093, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for setting game state designation parameters for the special symbol. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for reserving transmission of a special symbol game end command (S1094). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S1094, the main CPU 1201 terminates the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 81).

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a miss, the main CPU 1201 does not set or reset either the sure win flag or the time-saving flag. Therefore, even if a miss display mode is derived, the game state does not change.

[2-4-7. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, referring to Fig. 84, a special prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1026 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 77) will be described. Fig. 84 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening preparation process in the second pachinko game machine.

When this large prize opening preparation process is called in S1026 during special pattern management process in which the first special pattern is the processing target, the first special pattern is the processing target. Similarly, when this large prize opening preparation process is called in S1026 during special pattern management process in which the second special pattern is the processing target, the second special pattern is the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S1101).

If it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (if S1101 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (if S1101 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1102.

In S1102, the main CPU 1201 loads the large prize opening counter value. When a large prize opening counter is being executed, the large prize opening counter is a counter that counts the number of rounds executed in a large prize game state. When a small prize game control process is being executed, the large prize opening counter is a counter that counts the number of times a small prize game control process is executed. The count value of the large prize opening counter (large prize opening counter value) is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 1203. After executing S1102, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1103.

In S1103, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the number of times a large prize opening (e.g., the large prize opening 1131 for a large prize or the large prize opening 1151 for a small prize) has been opened is at the upper limit. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of rounds, which is the number of times the large prize opening 1131 for a large prize that is opened in a large prize game state, is 4 rounds or 10 rounds, as shown in the prize type determination table (see FIG. 73), for example. On the other hand, the upper limit of the number of times the large prize opening 1151 for a small prize that is opened in a small prize game state is 1 time, for example.

If it is determined in S1103 that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened has reached the upper limit (if S1103 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1104.

In S1104, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5." In this way, by switching the control state number by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S1104), the jackpot end process (see S1028 in FIG. 77) is performed after the jackpot opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S1104, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1105.

In S1105, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a jackpot end display command (S1106). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S1106, the main CPU 1201 ends the jackpot opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

Returning to S1103, if it is determined that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened is not the upper limit (if S1103 is judged as NO), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1107.

In S1107, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the large prize opening count counter. After executing the process of S1107, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1108.

In S1108, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of selecting the large prize opening to open. In this process, if a large prize game control process is being executed, the large prize opening for a large prize 1131 (see FIG. 69) is selected as the large prize opening to open, and if a small prize game control process is being executed, the large prize opening for a small prize 1151 (see FIG. 69) is selected. After executing the process of S1108, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1109.

In S1109, the main CPU 1201 performs various settings related to the large prize opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large prize openings (large prize openings for large prizes 1131 for large prizes and large prize openings for small prizes 1151 for small prizes) are opened, the maximum opening time of the large prize openings, the maximum number of winning balls into the large prize openings, the number of winning balls when the large prize openings are opened, etc. are set. The number of times the large prize openings are opened corresponds to the number of rounds when the large prize opening control process is executed, and corresponds to the number of times the small prize opening 1151 is opened when the small prize opening control process is executed. Note that this is not intended to exclude cases where the large prize openings are opened multiple times in one round or small prize opening control process. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of times the large prize openings are opened and closed as separate processes. After executing the process of S1109, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1110.

In this embodiment, the maximum opening time of the large prize opening is set to, for example, a maximum of 30,000 msec when the large prize game control process is being executed, and is set to, for example, a maximum of 1,800 msec when the small prize game control process is being executed. The maximum number of winning balls entering the large prize opening is set to, for example, a maximum of 10 balls when the large prize game control process is being executed, and is set to, for example, a maximum of 5 balls when the small prize game control process is being executed. The number of winning balls entering the large prize opening is set to, for example, 10 balls for both the large prize opening 1131 for a large prize opening for a large prize opening for a small prize opening and the large prize opening 1151 for a small prize opening. However, the values set in the various setting processes related to the large prize opening are not limited to the above.

In S1110, the main CPU 1201 performs a large prize opening/closing control process. In this process, the main CPU 1201 generates data for controlling the opening/closing of the large prize openings (large prize opening for large wins 1131 and large prize opening for small wins 1151). After executing S1110, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1111.

In S1111, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4." In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S1111) and switching the control state number, the large prize opening opening control process (see S1027 in FIG. 77) is performed after the large prize opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S1111, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1112.

In S1112, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1112, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1113.

In S1113, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of the large prize opening display command. The large prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1113, the main CPU 1201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

[2-4-8. Big prize opening control process]
Next, referring to Fig. 85, a special prize opening control process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1027 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 77) will be described. Fig. 85 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening control process in the second pachinko game machine.

When this large prize opening control process is called in S1027 during special pattern management process in which the first special pattern is the processing target, the first special pattern is the processing target. Similarly, when this large prize opening control process is called in S1027 during special pattern management process in which the second special pattern is the processing target, the second special pattern is the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S1121).

If it is determined in S1121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (if S1121 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1121 that the control state number of the special pattern is "4" (if S1121 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1122.

In S1122, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the large prize openings (large prize opening for big wins 1131, large prize opening for small wins 1151) is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the large prize opening entry counter (for example, the large prize opening count switch for big wins 1132, the large prize opening count switch for small wins 1152 (see FIG. 70 for both)) that counts the number of game balls that have entered the large prize openings is the maximum number of winning balls. The large prize opening entry counter value counted by the large prize opening entry counter is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 1203.

If it is determined in S1122 that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize openings (large prize opening 1131 for large wins, large prize opening 1151 for small wins) is not the maximum number of winning balls (if S1122 returns NO), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1123.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1122 that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize openings (large prize opening 1131 for large wins, large prize opening 1151 for small wins) is the maximum number of winning balls (if S1122 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1124.

In S1123, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the large prize openings (large prize opening 1131 for large prizes, large prize opening 1151 for small prizes) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the various settings process related to the large prize openings (see S1109 in FIG. 84) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S1123 that the maximum opening time of the large prize opening (large prize opening for large win 1131, large prize opening for small win 1151) has not elapsed (if S1123 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the large prize opening opening control process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1123 that the maximum opening time of the large prize openings (large prize opening 1131 for large prizes, large prize opening 1151 for small prizes) has elapsed (if S1123 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1124.

In S1124, the main CPU 1201 performs a process to close the large prize openings (large prize opening 1131 for a large win, and large prize opening 1151 for a small win). After executing the process of S1124, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1125.

In S1125, the main CPU 1201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1125) and switching the control state number, the large prize opening preparation process (see S1026 in FIG. 77) will be performed again after this large prize opening control process is completed. After executing the process of S1125, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1126.

In S1126, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1126, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1127.

In S1127, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of an inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S1127, the main CPU 1201 ends the large prize opening control process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

[2-4-9. Jackpot end processing]
Next, the big win end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1028 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described with reference to Fig. 86. Fig. 86 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win end process in the second pachinko game machine.

If this jackpot end process is called in S1028 during special pattern management process in which the first special pattern is the processing target, the first special pattern is the processing target. Similarly, if this jackpot end process is called in S1028 during special pattern management process in which the second special pattern is the processing target, the second special pattern is the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S1131).

If it is determined in S1131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (if S1131 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76). In this case, it returns to the process from which the special symbol management process was called.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1131 that the control state number of the special pattern is "5" (if S1131 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1132.

In S1132, the main CPU 1201 executes a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, the values of various flags (e.g., probability variable flag, time-saving flag, ceiling count prohibition flag, etc.) are set or reset, and the values of various counters (e.g., probability variable counter, time-saving counter, number of confirmed symbols counter, number of times large prize openings have been opened counter, large prize opening winning counter, ceiling counter, etc.) are set or reset. The special symbol pause flag and ceiling counter are both reset in the special symbol game end setting process (S1132). In addition, when the probability variable flag is set to ON, the ceiling count prohibition flag is also set to ON. As a result, in a high probability game state where the probability variable flag is ON, the ceiling counter is not updated. After executing the process of S1132, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1133.

In S1133, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this processing, the special symbol game end processing described with reference to FIG. 31 is performed. After executing the processing of S1133, the main CPU 1201 ends the jackpot end processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 set an interrupt prohibited section and perform the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interrupt prohibited section.

[2-5. Small Hit Rush]
In the second pachinko gaming machine described above, a so-called small win rush can be realized. The small win rush will be described below.

As described above, the second pachinko game machine has a normal game state, a high-probability time-saving game state, a high-probability non-time-saving game state, and a low-probability time-saving game state, and the main CPU 1201 controls the game state to one of these game states. As described above, in the normal game state, hitting from the left is considered to be the regular game mode, so the first special symbol game based on the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 1120 is mainly executed. In the other game states (high-probability time-saving game state, high-probability non-time-saving game state, and low-probability time-saving game state), hitting from the right is considered to be the regular game mode, so the second special symbol game based on the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 1140A, 1140B is mainly executed. In addition, if the winning hole included in the normal electric role unit 1145 is set as the first starting hole, the first special symbol game is primarily played in either the normal game state, the high probability time-saving game state, or the low probability time-saving game state, and the second special symbol game is primarily played in the high probability non-time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, in the high-probability non-time-saving game state, the frequency with which game balls enter the large winning port 1151 for small wins is increased compared to other game states (e.g., normal game state, high-probability time-saving game state, low-probability time-saving game state), resulting in a small win rush in which the expected value of the game value (e.g., number of winning balls, etc.) paid out per number of balls fired per unit time can exceed 1.

Here, an example of the mechanism of the small win rush will be described. First, the game ball hit to the right passes through the passing gate 1126. In the high probability non-time-saving game state, the electric support control that operates the normal electric device 1146 to increase the frequency of opening the winning port (for example, the second start port 1140B in this embodiment) is not executed. In addition, the big win large winning port 1131 will not be in an open state unless the big win game control process is executed, so the frequency of the second start port 1140B being in an open state in the high probability non-time-saving game state is lower than in the game state in which the time-saving control is executed. Therefore, if the small win large winning port 1151 is open, the game ball hit to the right and distributed to the downward flow path 1107b can win the small win large winning port 1151. When the game ball wins the small win large winning port 1151, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out as described above. In addition, a game ball that is hit to the right and distributed to the upper flow path 1107a can enter the second start port 1140A. When a game ball enters the second start port 1140A, 1140B, not only is a stop display mode that indicates a small win with a relatively high probability of 1 in 3 (approximately) as shown in the hit determination table for special symbols (see FIG. 71), but also a super-fast fluctuation (for example, variable display time 1000 msec) is executed as shown in the fluctuation pattern table for special symbols for high start (see FIG. 75), so that the frequency of game balls entering the large winning port 1151 for small wins is increased compared to other game states (for example, normal game state, high probability time-saving game state, low probability time-saving game state). In this way, it is possible to realize a small win rush in which the expected value of the game value (for example, number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time can exceed 1.

On the other hand, in a game state where time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state or a low-probability time-saving game state), the second start port 1140B is opened by the execution of the electric support control, and most of the game balls that are hit to the right and distributed to the downward flow path 1107b enter the second start port 1140B. Therefore, even if the small win large winning port 1151 is open, the expectation of a game ball entering the small win large winning port 1151 is low. Moreover, as described above, even if a game ball enters the second start port 1140B, for example, only one prize ball is paid out. When a game ball that is hit to the right and distributed to the upper flow path 1107a enters the second starting port 1140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out, but only about one-third to one-fifth of the game balls that are hit to the right and distributed to the upper flow path 1107a enter the second starting port 1140A. In this way, in a game state in which time-saving control is executed, the expected value of the game value (e.g., number of prize balls) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time does not exceed 1.

In addition, in the normal game state, a left hit is considered to be the normal game mode, but if a right hit is performed, when the game ball hit from the right passes through the passing gate 1126 and a stop display mode indicating a normal pattern win is derived, the normal electric device 1146 is activated, and the game ball enters the second start port 1140B, which may open the large winning port for small wins 1151. However, in the normal game state, the variation pattern of the special pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special pattern for low start (see FIG. 74), so even if the game ball enters the second start port 1140A, 1140B, the variable display of the second special pattern is performed in one of the long variations A to C, which have an extremely long variation time, and the frequency with which the large winning port for small wins 1151 is opened is extremely low. Therefore, there is no practical benefit for the player to hit from the right in the normal game state. In addition, if the winning hole included in the normal electric role unit 1145 is the first starting hole, the probability of winning a normal symbol in the normal game state may be set to 0, for example, so that there is no practical benefit to hitting to the right. In the normal game state, the expected value of the game value (e.g., the number of winning balls) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time does not exceed 1, and is smaller than the game state in which the time-saving control is executed.

In this embodiment, the small win rush occurs in a high probability non-time-saving game state, but this is not limited to this. For example, the small win rush may occur in a high probability time-saving game state in which special symbol shortening control is executed to shorten the variable display time of the special symbol without executing electric support control.

[3. The third pachinko game machine]
Next, the third pachinko game machine will be described. As described above, the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine called a type 1/type 2 mixed machine, and there are a first route and a second route as routes until the machine is controlled to a jackpot game state. The first route is when a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" is derived. The second route is when the V attacker is opened by deriving a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is a "gimmick opening hit", and the game ball that entered the opened V attacker enters the V winning hole in the V attacker.

The third pachinko gaming machine is a priority variable machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed in parallel, and the start condition of the second special symbol is established with priority over the start condition of the first special symbol. However, it is not limited to this, and may be a sequential variable machine as described above.

In the following explanation of the third pachinko gaming machine, we will omit as much as possible explanation of the functions, shapes, and positions that are common to the first pachinko gaming machine, such as the basic configuration of the outer frame 2 and base door 3, and the signals output from the external terminal board 2184 (see Figure 88 described below) to outside the third pachinko gaming machine (for example, the hall computer 2186 (see Figure 88 described below) and the island computers (not shown) installed on each island).

In describing the third pachinko gaming machine, the configuration will be described with reference to the drawings used in describing the first pachinko gaming machine, using the same reference numbers and step numbers as the first pachinko gaming machine. However, the configuration will be described with reference to new drawings used in describing the third pachinko gaming machine, using different reference numbers and step numbers than the first pachinko gaming machine, even if the configuration has the same functions, etc. as the first pachinko gaming machine.

[3-1. Game board unit]
The game board unit 2010 of the third pachinko game machine will be described with reference to Fig. 87. This game board unit 2010 is also disposed in front of the base door 3 (see Fig. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see Fig. 2) like the first pachinko game machine.

Figure 87 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 2010 provided in the third pachinko game machine. A game area 2105 is formed on the front side of the game board unit 2010, in which the released game balls can roll and flow down.

Note that the various components (e.g., the first starting hole 2120, etc.) arranged in the play area 2105 of the third pachinko gaming machine share some in common with the various components arranged in the play area 105 of the first pachinko gaming machine, but will be explained in detail again.

As shown in FIG. 87, the game board unit 2010 mainly includes a game panel 2100 in which a game area 2105 is formed in which a launched game ball can roll down, a guide rail 2110, a center role 2115 located approximately in the center of the game area 2105, a first start opening 2120, a second start opening 2140, a general winning opening 2122, a passing gate unit 2125, a special electric role unit 2130, a normal electric role unit 2145, an LED unit 2160, a V winning device 2150, an outlet 2178, and a back unit (not shown). Note that the LED unit 2160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko game machine, and a description thereof will be omitted for this third pachinko game machine.

(Game panel)
An opening (no reference number) is formed in the gaming panel 2100 at a position facing the display area of the display device 2007. A guide rail 2110 is provided on the front surface of the gaming panel 2100, and gaming nails (no reference number) and the like are planted therein. A gaming ball launched from the launching device 6 (see Figs. 1 and 2) flies out from the guide rail 2110 toward the gaming area 2105, collides with the gaming nails, etc., and flows downward below the gaming area 2105 while changing its direction of travel.

In addition, a back unit (not shown) with decorative bodies is arranged behind the gaming panel 2100 to enhance the presentation effect. The gaming panel 2100 is made of transparent resin so that the decorative bodies on the back unit can be seen when viewed from the front. In this case, the entire gaming panel 2100 may be made of transparent materials, or, for example, only the parts where the decorative bodies on the back unit can be seen when viewed from the front may be made of transparent materials. In addition, the gaming panel 2100 may be made of materials that do not have transparent parts (for example, wood), and transparent materials may be provided in some parts to enhance the presentation effect.

(Guide rail)
The guide rail 2110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (both of which have no reference number) similar to the first pachinko game machine. The play area 2105 is partitioned (defined) by the guide rail 2110. The outer rail and the inner rail have the function of guiding the game balls launched from the launching device 2006 (see FIG. 88 described later) to the upper part of the play area 2105.

(Center role)
The center device 2115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (without reference number) of the game panel 2100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 2116 at its upper portion. Game balls launched toward the game area 2105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 2116.

A game ball launched by the launching device 2006 towards the game area 2105 flows down the left area 2106 or the right area 2107. A game ball flowing down the left area 2106 or the right area 2107 changes direction as it flows downward due to collision with game pegs or the like planted in the game panel 2100. When the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 (see Figures 1 and 2) is small, the launched game ball flows down the left area 2106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right area 2107.

The center device 2115 also has a warp entrance 2117 formed on the outer periphery on the left side, through which game balls flowing down the left area 2106 can enter. Game balls that enter the warp entrance 2117 are configured to be guided to a stage 2118 formed in the center device 2115. The stage 2118 is formed in front of the lower edge of the display area of the display device 2007 so that the game balls can roll in the left-right direction. The stage 2118 may be formed in multiple stages, such as an upper stage and a lower stage, for example.

A chance entrance 2119 through which game balls can enter is formed at the rear of the stage 2118, approximately in the center in the left-right direction, and game balls that enter the chance entrance 2119 are configured to be released directly above the first start opening 2120. Therefore, game balls that enter the chance entrance 2119 have a higher probability of entering (passing through) the first start opening 2120 than game balls that do not enter the warp entrance 2117, or game balls that enter the warp entrance 2117 but do not enter the chance entrance 2119.

(First starting point)
The first starting hole 2120 is disposed below the display area of the display device 2007, and is disposed so that a game ball hit from the left can win (a game ball hit from the right has difficulty or is impossible to win). When a game ball wins in the first starting hole 2120, it is detected by a first starting hole switch 2121 (see FIG. 88 described later). It is also possible that a game ball hit from the right can win in the first starting hole 2120. Also, instead of or in addition to the above-mentioned first starting hole 2120, a first starting hole that allows a game ball hit from the right to win (a game ball hit from the left has difficulty or is impossible to win) may be provided.

When the first start hole switch 2121 (see FIG. 88 described below) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the first start hole 2120, start information for the first special pattern is extracted, and a predetermined number of the extracted start information (for example, a maximum of four) is reserved. When the start conditions are met, the reserved start information is used in the winning determination process for the first special pattern. When a game ball enters the first start hole 2120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 2120 is not limited to three.

(Second starting hole)
The second starting hole 2140 is arranged so that a game ball hit from the right can win (a game ball hit from the left has difficulty or cannot win). However, this is not limited to this, and a game ball hit from the left may be able to win in the second starting hole 2140.

When a game ball enters the second start hole 2140, it is detected by the second start hole switch 2141. When the second start hole switch 2141 (see FIG. 88 described below) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the second start hole 2140, start information for the second special pattern is extracted, and a predetermined number of the extracted start information (for example, up to four) are reserved. The reserved start information is used in the winning determination process for the second special pattern. When a game ball enters the second start hole 2140, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 2140 is not limited to this.

(General Prize Winners)
A plurality of general winning openings 2122 are arranged at the lower left of the display area of the display device 2007, and are arranged so that a game ball hit from the left can win a prize (a game ball hit from the right has difficulty or cannot win a prize). When a game ball wins in any of the plurality of general winning openings 2122, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 2123 (see FIG. 88 described later).

When the general prize opening switch 2123 (see Figure 88 described below) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the general prize opening 2122, for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the general prize opening 2122 is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 2122 is positioned so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit from the right to win, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the general winning opening 2122 described above, a general winning opening through which a game ball hit from the right can win may be provided.

(Passing gate unit)
The passing gate unit 2125 is located in the right area 2107 and is a unit that integrates a passing gate 2126 that is configured to allow almost all game balls hit to the right to pass through, and a passing gate switch 2127 (see Figure 88 described below) that detects the passage of the game ball through the passing gate 2126.

When the passage of a gaming ball through the passing gate 2126 is detected, start information for the normal pattern is extracted, and the extracted start information is held for a predetermined number of times (for example, up to four). The various held data are used for the winning determination process for the normal pattern. Note that even if the passing gate switch 2127 detects the passage of a gaming ball through the passing gate 2126, no prize balls are paid out. Also, the passing gate unit 2125 may be located in the left area 2106 instead of or in addition to the right area 2107.

(Special electric feature unit)
The special electric accessory unit 2130 is a unit body that integrates a large prize opening 2131, a large prize opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88 described later) that detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the large prize opening 2131, and a special electric accessory 2133. The special electric accessory unit 2130 is disposed below the passing gate unit 2125 in the right side area 2107.

The large prize opening 2131 is positioned so that game balls hit from the right can win (game balls hit from the left have difficulty or difficulty winning). However, this is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the large prize opening 2131 described above, a large prize opening that allows game balls hit from the left to win may be arranged, or a large prize opening that allows game balls to win may be arranged above the center gimmick 2115.

The large prize opening 2131 is an opening that is opened to allow a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10) to enter (pass through) when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. When the large prize opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88 described below) detects the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 2131, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 2131 is not limited to 10.

The special electric device 2133 includes a special electric shutter 2134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 2135 (see FIG. 88 described later) that operates the special electric shutter 2134. The special electric device 2133, i.e., the special electric shutter 2134, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which the game ball can enter (pass through) the large prize opening 2131 or easily, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the large prize opening 2131 or is difficult to enter. The large prize opening 2131 transitions from a closed state to an open state when the game enters a jackpot game state via the first route described above. When the game enters a jackpot game state via the first route described above, the transition from the closed state to the open state is performed for a predetermined number of rounds. In other words, the jackpot game state via the first route is a game state that allows a large number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls by playing multiple rounds of round play in which the jackpot opening 2131 transitions from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period of time.

(Normal electric role unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 2145 is a unit body that integrates a winning hole through which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters (passes through), a switch that detects the entry of the game ball into this winning hole, and a normal electric accessory 2146, and is disposed in the right area 2107. In this embodiment, the winning hole is the second start hole 2140, and the switch is the second start hole switch 2141.

The normal electric device 2146 is equipped with a protruding plate-type normal power shutter 2147 that can move back and forth, and a normal power solenoid 2148 (see FIG. 88 described below) that operates the normal power shutter 2147. The normal electric device 2146, i.e., the normal power shutter 2147, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter (pass through) the second starting hole 2140, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 2140. Note that instead of the normal power shutter 2147 that can move back and forth, a movable member known as an electric chute may be used.

(V prize device)
The V winning device 2150 is provided downstream of the passing gate 2126 in the right area 2107. The V winning device 2150 comprises an opening and closing winning port 2151 opened to allow a game ball to enter the inside of the V winning device 2150, a V attacker 2152 capable of opening and closing the opening and closing winning port 2151, a V attacker solenoid 2154 which operates the V attacker 2152 to open and close the opening and closing winning port 2151, a V attacker count switch 2153 which detects that a game ball has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 when the opening and closing winning port 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152, a V winning port 2155 through which a game ball which has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the opening and closing winning port 2151 can pass, and a V attacker count switch 2153 which detects that a game ball has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 when the opening and closing winning port 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152, and a V winning port 2155 through which a game ball which has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the opening and closing winning port 2151 can pass. The V winning device 2150 includes a V winning port switch 2156 for detecting that a game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the opening/closing winning port 2151 has entered (passed) the V winning port 2155, a losing port 2157 through which game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the opening/closing winning port 2151 but have not entered the V winning port 2155 can enter (pass), a V shutter 2158 for opening and closing the V winning port 2155, a V shutter solenoid 2159 for operating the V shutter 2158 to open and close the V winning port 2155, and a locking member 2160 for holding only one of the game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150. The V winning device 2150 may be provided upstream of the passing gate 2126 or in the left area 2106.

The V attacker 2152 is made of an arc-shaped member, and is normally in a closed state in which the opening and closing winning opening 2151 is closed. Then, when the variable display of the special symbol ends and a stop display mode is derived indicating a "hit on the opening of the special device" described below, the V attacker solenoid 2154 (see FIG. 88 described below) is activated to activate the V attacker 2152, for example, once, almost simultaneously with the end of the variable display of the special symbol. When the V attacker 2152 is activated once, the opening and closing winning opening 2151 is in an open state in which it is open for, for example, 1800 msec. Then, while the opening and closing winning opening 2151 is open due to the activation of the V attacker 2152, the maximum number of game balls that can enter the inside of the V winning device 2150 per opening is, for example, 10.

The manner in which the V attacker 2152 is opened when a stop display mode indicating a "hit on the opening of the special feature" is derived is not limited to the above, and for example, it may be opened twice for 900 msec, or may be closed when a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., one) enter the interior of the V winning device 2150.

The V attacker count switch 2153 detects the entry of a game ball into the V winning device 2150. When the V attacker count switch 2153 detects the entry of a game ball into the V winning device 2150, the main CPU 2201 pays out, for example, 10 prize balls via the payout/launch control circuit 2400, and increments the value of the V attacker winning counter, which is a function of the main CPU 2201. When the V attacker winning counter reaches a specified value, the V attacker 2152 is activated by the V attacker solenoid 2154, and the opening/closing winning port 2151 is closed, even if the maximum time (for example, 1800 msec) that the opening/closing winning port 2151 can be opened has not elapsed.

The V attacker 2152 continues to be controlled to open when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 2155. In other words, the V winning hole 2155 is the winning hole that triggers control to a jackpot game state via the second route described above.

The V winning hole switch 2156 detects the passage of a game ball into the V winning hole 2155. When the main CPU 2201 (see FIG. 88) detects the passage of a game ball into the V winning hole 2155 within a predetermined time (e.g., 4000 msec) after the V attacker 2152 opens, it continues to control the opening of the V attacker 2152. In other words, it is controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route. When it is controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route, a round game in which the V attacker 2152 transitions from a closed state to an open state is played for a predetermined number of rounds.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the jackpot game state is controlled via the first route, a round game is executed in which the large prize winning port 2131 is transitioned from a closed state to an open state, whereas when the jackpot game state is controlled via the second route, a round game is executed in which the V attacker 2152 is transitioned from a closed state to an open state. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, when the jackpot game state is controlled via the second route, the V attacker 2152 is transitioned from a closed state to an open state in the first round, but a round game in which, for example, the large prize winning port 2131 is transitioned from a closed state to an open state may be executed midway through the round game.

In addition, for example, by providing a V entry port inside the special electric device 2133 (i.e., the area where the game ball can enter when the special electric shutter 2134 is in the open state), it is possible to have one V entry port and one attacker that is opened in the jackpot game state. In this case, when a stop display mode indicating a "game device open hit" is derived, the special electric shutter 2134 is opened, and when a game ball enters the V entry port 2155 provided inside the special electric device 2133, control is performed to the jackpot game state (jackpot game state via the second route).

The losing port 2157 is configured to allow game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 but have not passed through the V winning port 2155 to enter (pass through). Game balls that pass through the losing port 2157 are discharged outside the machine. Note that if all game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 pass through the losing port 2157 and no game balls pass through the V winning port 2155, the opening control of the V attacker 2152 is not continued and ends.

The V shutter 2158 constantly operates in a constant manner between a closed state in which it is impossible (or difficult) for game balls to pass through the V winning opening 2155 and an open state in which it is possible (or easy) for game balls to pass through the V winning opening 2155, by the operation of the V shutter solenoid 2159 (see FIG. 88 described below). In this embodiment, for example, the V shutter 2158 constantly operates in a cycle (period) of 7000 msec, repeating the operation of "closed for 6000 msec -> open for 1000 msec -> closed for 6000 msec".

The locking member 2160 is provided above the V winning port 2155, and is configured to be able to hold, for example, only one of the game balls that enter the V winning device 2150. Game balls that enter the V winning device 2150 but are not held by the locking member 2160 are discharged outside the machine from the losing port 2157. Even if multiple game balls enter the V winning device 2150, all game balls that are not held by the locking member 2160 are discharged outside the machine from the losing port 2157.

In addition, after a certain time (e.g., 3000 msec) has elapsed since the V attacker 2152 was activated, the locking member 2160 releases the game ball by the activation of a locking solenoid (not shown). The game ball that has been released from the locking member 2160 falls toward the V winning port 2155, and if the V winning port 2155 is open at this time, it enters (passes through) the V winning port 2155, and if the V winning port 2155 is closed at this time, it passes through the losing port 2157. Note that the locking member 2160 may not be provided and game balls that enter the inside of the V winning device 2150 may be distributed to the V winning port 2155 or the losing port 2157.

(Outlet)
The outlet 2178 is for discharging game balls that have been shot toward the game area 2105 but have not won or entered any of the various winning ports (for example, the first start port 2120, the second start port 2140, the large winning port 2131, the V winning device 2150, the general winning port 2122, etc.) to the outside of the machine. This outlet 2178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 2105 so that both game balls hit from the left and game balls hit from the right can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned outlet 2178, an outlet may be provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between multiple general winning ports 2122 or between the special electric role unit 2130 and the second start port 2140, so that game balls flowing down the game area 2105 can be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(Back unit)
The back unit (not shown) is used to decorate the game board unit 2010, as in the first pachinko game machine, and is provided on the rear side of the game panel 2100. This back unit is arranged around the display area of the display device 2007, and is provided with a group of performance-use accessories 2058, such as movable accessories, controlled by the sub-control circuit 2300. At least one of the performance-use accessory group 2058 or a performance-use accessory component constituting the accessory functions as a performance-use accessory that can be operated based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol.

[3-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the third pachinko game machine will be described with reference to Fig. 88. Fig. 88 is an example of a block diagram showing the control circuit of the third pachinko game machine. Note that the control circuit of the third pachinko game machine has some parts in common with the control circuit of the first pachinko game machine, but will be described again in detail.

As shown in FIG. 88, the third pachinko gaming machine, like the first pachinko gaming machine, is mainly composed of a main control circuit 2200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 2300 that controls the presentation according to the progress of the game, a payout/launch control circuit 2400, and a power supply circuit 2450.

[3-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 2200 includes a main CPU 2201, a main ROM 2202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 2203 (read-write memory), an initial reset circuit 2204, a backup capacitor 2207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

The main CPU 2201 is connected to the main ROM 2202, the main RAM 2203, the initial reset circuit 2204, etc. The main CPU 2201 has built-in functions such as a WDT that monitors operation and a function for preventing fraud.

The main ROM 2202 stores programs for controlling the operation of the third pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 2201, various tables, etc. The main CPU 2201 has the function of executing various processes according to the programs stored in the main ROM 2202.

The main RAM 2203 has a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game, and this main RAM 2203 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 2201. Note that, although in this embodiment, RAM is used as the temporary storage area for the main CPU 2201, this is not limited to this, and any readable and writable storage medium can be used.

The initial reset circuit 2204 monitors the main CPU 2201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 2207 has the function of temporarily supplying power to prevent data stored in the main RAM 2203 from being lost in the event of a power outage, etc.

The main control circuit 2200 also includes an I/O port 2205 that is connected to various devices and other devices so as to be able to communicate with each other, and a command output port 2206 that is connected to the sub-control circuit 2300 so as to be able to output various commands to the sub-control circuit 2300.

In addition, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 2200. For example, the main control circuit 2200 is connected to the normal symbol display unit 2161, the normal symbol reserved display unit 2162, the first special symbol display unit 2163, the second special symbol display unit 2164, the first special symbol reserved display unit 2165, the second special symbol reserved display unit 2166, the time-saving notification display unit 2168, the normal power solenoid 2148, the special power solenoid 2135, the V attacker solenoid 2154, and the V shutter solenoid 2159. In addition to these, the main control circuit 2200 is also connected to the performance display monitor 2170 and the error notification monitor 2172. The main control circuit 2200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals via the I/O port 2205.

The performance display monitor 2170 displays performance display data, setting values, etc. under the control of the main CPU 2201. The performance display data is data that indicates, for example, the proportion of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state for a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 60,000 balls) shot, and is also called a base value.

The error notification monitor 2172 displays an error code. In addition to the error code, for example, if the pachinko game machine has a setting function, the error notification monitor 2172 can also display a setting change code indicating that a setting change process is in progress, a setting confirmation code indicating that a setting confirmation process is in progress, etc. Note that the setting change code may be a special symbol that is not normally displayed (for example, a setting change symbol indicating that a setting change is in progress).

The main control circuit 2200 is also connected to the first start port switch 2121, the second start port switch 2141, the pass gate switch 2127, the large prize port count switch 2132, the V attacker count switch 2153, the V prize port switch 2156, and the general prize port switch 2123. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is sent to the main control circuit 2200 via the I/O port 2205.

The main control circuit 2200 is further connected to a calling device (not shown) having functions such as calling a hall attendant and displaying the number of jackpots, an external terminal board 2184 used to transmit data to a hall computer 2186 that manages the pachinko machines in the entire hall, a setting key 2174 operated to change or check the setting value if the pachinko machine has a setting function, and a backup clear switch 2176 that can clear the backup data stored in the main RAM 2203 according to the operation of the gaming center manager. Note that if the pachinko machine has a setting function, the backup clear switch 2176 may also be used as a switch for changing the setting value, or a setting switch for changing the setting value may be provided.

The setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 are preferably housed in a specified case so that they cannot be easily touched by third parties (e.g., players) other than the manager of the game arcade. "Inside a specified case" includes not only a case in which the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also a case in which notches are provided only at the locations corresponding to the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176, so that the manager of the game arcade can touch the setting key 2174 and/or the backup clear switch 2176 when the pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the manager of the game arcade to expose the back.

In this embodiment, the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 are connected to the main control circuit 2200, but this is not limited thereto, and they may be configured to be connected to the payout/launch control circuit 2400 or the power supply circuit 2450, for example. In this case, too, it is preferable to prevent third parties other than the person in charge of the amusement facility from easily touching the setting key 2174 or the backup clear switch 2176.

[3-2-2. Sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 2300 includes a sub-CPU 2301, a program ROM 2302, a work RAM 2303, a display control circuit 2304, a sound control circuit 2305, an LED control circuit 2306, a role control circuit 2307, and a command input port 2308. The sub-control circuit 2300 executes effects according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 2200. Although not shown in FIG. 88, the sub-control circuit 2300 is also connected to the effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player, as in the first pachinko game machine.

The program ROM 2302 stores programs for controlling the game presentation of the third pachinko game machine by the sub-CPU 2301, various tables, etc. The sub-CPU 2301 has the function of executing various processes according to the programs stored in the program ROM 2302. In particular, the sub-CPU 2301 controls the game presentation according to various commands sent from the main control circuit 2200.

The work RAM 2303 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub-CPU 2301.

The display control circuit 2304 is a circuit for controlling the display of the display device 2007. The display control circuit 2304 includes a VDP, an image data ROM in which data for generating various types of image data is stored, a frame buffer for temporarily storing image data, a D/A converter for converting image data into an image signal, and the like.

The display control circuit 2304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command from the sub-CPU 2301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data showing decorative patterns, background image data, and performance image data.

Then, the display control circuit 2304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 2007 at a predetermined timing. When the image signal is supplied to the display device 2007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 2007. In this way, the display control circuit 2304 can control the display device 2007 to display images related to the game.

The audio control circuit 2305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 2032. The audio control circuit 2305 includes a sound source IC for controlling the audio, an audio data ROM for storing various types of audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as an AMP) for amplifying the audio signal, and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speaker 2032. In response to a sound generation command supplied from the sub-CPU 2301, the sound source IC selects one piece of sound data from multiple pieces of sound data stored in the sound data ROM. The sound source IC also reads the selected sound data from the sound data ROM, converts the sound data into a specified sound signal, and supplies the converted sound signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as sound and sound effects output from the speaker 2032.

The LED control circuit 2306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 2046, which includes decorative LEDs. The LED control circuit 2306 includes a drive circuit for supplying LED control signals, a decoration data ROM in which multiple types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The reel control circuit 2307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each reel (for example, one or more reels among the group of reels for performance 2058). The reel control circuit 2307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each reel, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and a reel data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored.

The reel control circuit 2307 selects one of the multiple operation patterns stored in the reel data ROM in response to a reel operation command from the sub-CPU 2301. The selected operation pattern is then read from the reel data ROM, and a drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is supplied to control the mechanical operation of each reel. The lighting circuit selects one of the multiple lighting patterns stored in the reel data ROM in response to a lighting command from the sub-CPU 2301. The selected lighting pattern is then read from the reel data ROM, and a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern is supplied to control the lighting operation of each reel.

The command input port 2308 is connected to the command output port 2206 and receives commands sent from the main control circuit 2200.

The payout/launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls from the pachinko game machine, and is connected to a payout device 2082 for paying out game balls, a launch device 2006 for launching game balls, a card unit 2180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like.

When the payout/launch control circuit 2400 receives a prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 2200, it transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 2082 and controls the payout device 2082 to pay out game balls.

A ball lending operation panel 2182 is connected to the card unit 2180. The ball lending operation panel 2182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending, and a loan/return button for receiving the return of a ball lending card on which cache data is stored (neither is shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a loan ball control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 2180. The payout/launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout device 2082 to pay out game balls based on the loan ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 2180. The operation panel 2182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 2180 side.

In addition, when the launch handle 62 (see Figures 1 and 2) is rotated clockwise, the payout/launch control circuit 2400 supplies power to a launch solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (amount of rotation), and controls the launch of the game ball.

The power supply circuit 2450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required during play to the main control circuit 2200, the sub control circuit 2300, the payout/launch control circuit 2400, etc.

The power supply circuit 2450 is connected to a power switch 2095 and other components. The power switch 2095 is turned on when the necessary power is to be supplied to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 2200, the sub-control circuit 2300, the payout/launch control circuit 2400, etc.).

[3-3. Basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the third pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Figures 89 to 92. The third pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function will be omitted below.

The third pachinko gaming machine does not execute the probability bonus control. The third pachinko gaming machine also has a normal gaming state in which the time-saving control is not executed, and a time-saving gaming state in which the time-saving control is executed, and the main CPU 2201 can proceed with the game in the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state.

In this embodiment, in the normal game mode, left hitting is the regular game mode, and in the time-saving game mode, right hitting is the regular game mode. The sub-CPU 2301 executes control to display the hitting method that is the regular game mode, for example, in the display area of the display device 2007.

[3-3-1. Special symbol winning judgment table]
FIG. 89 shows an example of a special symbol winning determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 89, when a game ball enters (passes) the first starting hole 2120, the main CPU 2201 determines the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol to be a "time-saving hit", "jackpot", or "miss" based on the hit determination process for the first special symbol using a random number value for jackpot determination of the first special symbol. Also, when a game ball enters (passes) the second starting hole 2140, the main CPU 2201 determines the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol to be a "time-saving hit", "jackpot", or "gimmick release hit" based on the hit determination process for the second special symbol using a random number value for jackpot determination of the second special symbol.

It is not essential that a "hit on the release of the special feature" is not determined when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed, but even if a "hit on the release of the special feature" is determined, it is preferable that the probability of the "hit on the release of the special feature" is extremely low compared to when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed (for example, a probability equal to or lower than a "jackpot"). Also, it is not essential that a "miss" is not determined when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed, but if a "miss" is determined, the probability may be higher than the probability of the "hit on the release of the special feature" or lower than the probability of the "hit on the release of the special feature".

In the hit determination table for the special symbols stored in the main ROM 2202, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a hit that is determined to be a "time-saving hit", a "jackpot", or a "miss" and the corresponding determination value data ("time-saving hit determination value data", "jackpot determination value data", "miss determination value data") is specified as data used in the hit determination process for the first special symbol executed based on the winning of the first starting hole 2120. In addition, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a hit that is determined to be a "time-saving hit", a "jackpot", or a "gimmick release hit" and the corresponding determination value data ("time-saving hit determination value data", "jackpot determination value data", "gimmick release hit determination value data") is specified as data used in the hit determination process for the second special symbol executed based on the winning of the second starting hole 2140.

In addition, this third pachinko game machine does not have a function to change the jackpot probability determined for a "jackpot," but this is not essential, and the jackpot probability may be increased, for example, by setting a probability-change flag to ON depending on the type of jackpot, etc.

In addition, in this third pachinko gaming machine, the total random number value for the random number value used to determine a jackpot is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In other words, the random number value for determining a jackpot is generated within the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

When the third pachinko machine is a pachinko machine with a setting function, for example, the jackpot probability and/or the probability of hitting the special feature opening may be set to be higher in the high setting than in the low setting. In this case, for example, both the jackpot probability and the probability of hitting the special feature opening may be set to be higher in the high setting than in the low setting, or the probability of hitting the special feature opening may be set to be constant regardless of the setting value and the jackpot probability may be set to be higher in the high setting than in the low setting, or the probability of hitting the jackpot may be set to be constant regardless of the setting value and the probability of hitting the special feature opening may be higher in the high setting than in the low setting. However, even if the third pachinko machine is a pachinko machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable to set the probability of hitting the time-saving feature to be the same for all settings.

In addition to or instead of changing the jackpot probability or the probability of winning the special feature opening according to the set value, for example, the opening time of the V attacker 2152 may be changed for each set value to change the winning rate for the V winning device 2150, the opening frequency or opening time of the V winning port 2155 may be changed for each set value to change the passing rate to the V winning port 2155, or the number of times the time-saving continuation may be changed for each set value. In other words, by adopting one or more of the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the jackpot probability, the probability of winning the special feature opening, the opening frequency of the V winning port 2155 (i.e., the operation frequency of the V attacker 2152), the opening time, and the number of times the time-saving continuation may be changed, the expected value controlled in the jackpot game state may be configured to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting.

[3-3-2. Special symbol determination table]
FIG. 90 shows an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is a table that is referenced when selecting a "select symbol command" and a "symbol designation command" that determine the stopping symbol based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the gaming ball enters the starting hole 2120, 2140 and the aforementioned determination value data. The "select symbol command" is a command for designating the winning symbol determined according to the type of jackpot when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, and the "symbol designation command" is a command for designating the symbol that is displayed when the variable display of the special symbol stops. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 90, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 2201 selects "z0" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command, regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 99.

In addition, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 2201 selects, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 0 to 3, the main CPU 2201 selects "z1" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 4 to 60, the main CPU 2201 selects "z2" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 61 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z3" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, if loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the winning determination process for the first special symbol, regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z4" as the selected symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 0 and 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z5" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 0 and 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z6" as the selected symbol command and "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

Furthermore, when the winning determination process for the second special symbol results in the obtaining of the winning determination value data for the release of the reel, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, regardless of whether the symbol random number value for the second special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z7" as the selected symbol command and "zA6" as the symbol designation command.

Although the third pachinko gaming machine will not be described, the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 stores a special symbol stop mode determination table equivalent to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) described in the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table is a table that is referenced when determining the stop mode of the special symbol that is output to the first special symbol display unit 2163 or the second special symbol display unit 2164 (see FIG. 88) when the variable display of the special symbol stops, in response to a selected symbol command. In addition, the special symbol display units 2163 and 2164 derive the display mode of the time-saving hit, the display mode of the jackpot, the display mode of the gimmick opening hit, or the display mode of the miss based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process. In addition, a decorative symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative symbol stop mode determination table described in the first pachinko game machine (see FIG. 12(B)) is also stored in the program ROM 2302 of the sub-control circuit 2300.

[3-3-3. Winning Type Determination Table]
FIG. 91 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 of the third pachinko game machine. The winning type determination table is referred to when determining the mode of the big win game state (more specifically, the number of rounds) and the mode of the subsequent game state (more specifically, the time-saving flag and the end condition of the time-saving) according to the selection pattern command determined in response to the pattern random number value of the special pattern. The mode of the subsequent game state indicates the mode of the game state after the big win game state ends. However, if the result of the hit determination process of the special pattern is a time-saving hit, the game state is controlled to the C time-saving game state without being controlled to the big win game state. "L" shown in the column of the time-saving end condition in FIG. 91 indicates the sum of the variable display number of the first special pattern and the variable display number of the second special pattern. Similarly, "M" indicates the variable display number of the second special pattern, and "N" indicates the number of times of the opening of the special device. Note that the remarks in the remarks column of FIG. 91 are written for convenience and to make it easier to understand.

In this embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", the mode of the C time-saving game state is determined as follows. For example, if the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 2201 decides to set the time-saving flag on, and determines the time-saving end conditions to be L=30, M=6, and N=3. Also, if the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 2201 decides to set the time-saving flag on, and determines the time-saving end conditions to be L=30, M=3, and N=3. Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", the number of rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state is not determined.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "jackpot", the number of rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state and the mode of the subsequent game state (A time-saving game state) are determined as follows. For example, if the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, determines to set the time-saving flag on, and determines the time-saving end conditions to be L = 50, M = 5, N = 2. In addition, if the selected symbol command is "z2", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds, determines to set the time-saving flag on, and determines the time-saving end conditions to be L = 50, M = 5, N = 1. In addition, if the selected symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds, and determines not to set the time-saving flag on. Furthermore, if the selected symbol command is "z6," the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, determines to set the time-saving flag to ON, and determines the conditions for ending the time-saving mode to be L=50, M=5, and N=2.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "release of the special feature" (for example, the selected symbol command is "z7") and the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route, the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, decides to set the time-saving flag to ON, and determines the time-saving end conditions to be L = 50, M = 5, and N = 2. However, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "release of the special feature", if the game state is not controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route, the main CPU 2201 not only does not execute the jackpot game state, but also does not set the time-saving flag to ON, and after executing control based on the special feature hit, returns to the game state immediately before the special feature hit.

Also, for example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss" (for example, if the selected symbol command is "z4"), the main CPU 2201 does not set either the mode of the big win game state or the mode of the game state thereafter. In other words, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, the main CPU 2201 does not change the game state, but continues to control the previous game state.

Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss" (for example, if the selected symbol command is "z4"), as described above, neither the state of the jackpot game state nor the state of the subsequent game state is set, so there is no need to illustrate this in the hit type determination table of FIG. 91. However, in this embodiment, for the sake of convenience, it is illustrated in FIG. 91 to clearly show that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss", neither the state of the jackpot game state nor the state of the subsequent game state is determined.

The "L", "M", and "N" shown in the column of the time-saving termination conditions in FIG. 91 are all the same conditions regardless of the game state, but are not limited to this and may be different conditions depending on the game state. For example, all of the termination conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different for the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state, respectively, or may be different only for one of the time-saving game states among the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state. Also, only one of the termination conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different for the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state, respectively, or may be different only for one of the time-saving game states among the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state. In other words, at least one of the end conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different in at least one of the time-saving play states A, B, and C.

[3-3-4. Special symbol variation pattern table]
Fig. 92 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols of the third pachinko game machine. The "Notes" column in Fig. 92 is shown for convenience. The main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the winning is based on the winning of a game ball into the first start hole 2120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the winning is based on the winning of a game ball into the second start hole 2140.

As shown in FIG. 92, the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 2120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the gaming ball enters the second starting hole 2140.

As shown in FIG. 92, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "time-saving hit," the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the random number value for effect selection extracted when the gaming ball enters (passes through) the first starting hole 2120.

In addition, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "jackpot," the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the random number value for effect selection extracted when the gaming ball enters (passes through) the first starting hole 2120.

In addition, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "miss," the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the value of the time-saving flag, the reach determination random number value and the effect selection random number value extracted when the gaming ball enters (passes) the first starting hole 2120. Note that, since hitting to the right is considered the regular gaming mode in the time-saving gaming state, it is considered that the gaming ball will rarely enter the first starting hole 2120.

In addition, if the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a "time-saving hit," the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the random number value for effect selection extracted when the gaming ball enters (passes through) the second starting hole 2140.

In addition, if the result of the second special symbol lottery is a "jackpot," the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol based on the random number value for effect selection extracted when the gaming ball enters (passes through) the second starting hole 2140.

If the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a "hit with the release of the special feature" and the value of the time-saving flag is "1", the main CPU 2201 determines the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol based on the reach determination random number value and the performance selection random number value extracted when the gaming ball enters the second start hole 2140.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a "hit on the release of the reel" and the value of the time-saving flag is "0", the main CPU 2201 determines the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol to be a long fluctuation presentation with an extremely long fluctuation time, for example, 600,000 msec. If the value of the time-saving flag is "0", the game ball will not basically enter (pass) the second start hole 2140, but even if an unforeseen event occurs and the game ball does enter the second start hole 2140, this is done to minimize the profit that can be given to the advantageous player, but this is not necessarily required.

The random number value for reach determination is selected from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for effect selection is selected from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 2201 sets a look-ahead flag if the random number value for effect selection extracted based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 2120 is a specific random number value. The sub-CPU 2301, which receives the special symbol variation pattern command sent from the main CPU 2201, performs a look-ahead effect if the look-ahead flag is set.

For convenience, although it is not shown in the special symbol variation pattern table in FIG. 92, in this embodiment, the main CPU 2201 sets the look-ahead flag when the time-saving flag is off, and does not set the look-ahead flag when the time-saving flag is on or the probability bonus flag is on.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main CPU 2201 decides whether or not to perform a look-ahead performance, but this is not limited to this, and the sub-CPU 2301 may decide.

The main CPU 2201 may also set the look-ahead flag (to perform a look-ahead performance) when the time-saving flag or the probability-change flag is on. The main CPU 2201 may also set the look-ahead flag (to perform a look-ahead performance) when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol.

When the time-saving flag is on, the expected number of changes per unit time for the special symbol fluctuation pattern determined is smaller than when the time-saving flag is off. In other words, the time it takes for the special symbol to fluctuate when the time-saving flag is on is likely to be shorter than the time it takes for the special symbol to fluctuate when the time-saving flag is off.

The main CPU 2201 transmits the determined variation pattern information to the sub-CPU 2301. The sub-CPU 2301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 2007 and the sound effects output from the speaker 2032 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 2201.

In addition, the time-saving hit type reaches A and B shown in the "Notes" column of Figure 92 are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process for the special pattern may be a time-saving hit (no possibility of a jackpot). Similarly, the jackpot type reaches A and B are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process for the special pattern may be a jackpot (no possibility of a time-saving hit). Furthermore, the common reaches A and B are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process for the special pattern may be either a time-saving hit or a jackpot.

Although the third pachinko gaming machine will not be described, like the first pachinko gaming machine, the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 stores a normal symbol winning determination table (see FIG. 16), a normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17), a normal symbol winning type determination table (see FIG. 18), and a normal symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 19). The main CPU 2201 then determines the opening pattern of the normal electric device 2146 (see FIG. 87) in the same manner as the first pachinko gaming machine, and controls the operation mode of the normal electric device 2146 based on this.

[3-4. Main control processing]
In the third pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 2201 of the main control circuit 2200 are the same as those executed by the main CPU 2201 except for the special symbol control process executed in S39 in the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23). Therefore, the following will describe the special symbol control process, and will omit a description of the other processes executed by the main CPU 2201. Note that, although some of the processes executed in the special symbol control process in the third pachinko game machine are the same as those executed in the first pachinko game machine (for example, the jackpot end process (Figs. 42 and 103)), the following will describe the same processes as those executed in the first pachinko game machine with different step numbers.

[3-4-1. Special symbol control process]
Next, the special symbol control process performed in S39 in the main control process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 93. Fig. 93 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol control process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 93, the main CPU 2201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S2001. The control state number of the special symbol is a number that indicates the state (status) of the control process related to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S2001, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2002.

Although not shown, when the main CPU 2201 executes the special symbol control process, prior to the processing of S2001, the main CPU 2201 performs an address setting process to set the address of the working area of the special symbol in the main RAM 2203, etc., in a predetermined register.

Although not shown, when executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 2201 also checks the reserved number of the first special symbol and the reserved number of the second special symbol. If both the reserved number of the first special symbol and the reserved number of the second special symbol are "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of reserving a demo display command. The demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. When the sub-control circuit 2300 receives the demo display command, the sub-CPU 2301 performs a demo display performance. Note that the third pachinko game machine is not a pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, and therefore does not have the concept of a main special symbol as described in the first pachinko game machine.

In S2002, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S2001 is 0, i.e., whether the special symbol is in a state waiting for variable display.

If it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (if S2002 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2005.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (if S2002 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2003.

In S2003, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the second special symbol has started to be variably displayed, i.e., whether start information for the second special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S2003 that the second special symbol has not started to be variable displayed, i.e., that the start information for the second special symbol is not pending (if S2003 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2004.

In S2004, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the first special symbol has started to be variably displayed, i.e., whether start information for the first special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S2004 that the first special symbol has not started to be variable displayed, i.e., that the start information for the first special symbol is not pending (if S2004 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see Figures 20 to 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2004 that the first special symbol has started to be variably displayed, i.e., that the start information for the first special symbol is pending (if S2004 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2005.

Returning to S2003, if it is determined that the second special symbol has started to be variably displayed, i.e., that the start information for the second special symbol is pending (if S2003 returns YES), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2005.

In S2005, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 94. After executing the processing of S2003, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIG. 20 to FIG. 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibited period and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S2001 to S2005) within the interrupt prohibited period.

Thus, in this embodiment, the third pachinko gaming machine is described as a priority variable machine in which the special pattern management process (S2005) is executed with a higher priority than the first special pattern when the start information of the second special pattern is reserved, but this is not limited to this. For example, the third pachinko gaming machine may be a priority variable machine in which the special pattern management process (S2005) is executed with a higher priority than the second special pattern when the start information of the first special pattern is reserved, or a sequential variable machine in which the special pattern management process is executed in the order of winning in the first start port 2120 or the second start port 2140.

[3-4-2. Special design management process]
Next, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2005 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93) will be described with reference to Fig. 94. Fig. 94 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

When the control state number is 0 (when S2002 is judged as YES), the special pattern management process processes the second special pattern if S2003 is judged as YES, and processes the first special pattern if S2004 is judged as YES. Also, when the control state number is not 0 (when S2002 is judged as NO), the special pattern management process processes the special pattern currently being executed.

The numbers ("0" to "7") in parentheses to the right of each process in FIG. 94 are the control state numbers of the special symbols that are the subject of the process. The main CPU 2201 progresses the special symbol game by executing each process that corresponds to the control state number.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S2011).

If it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (if S2011 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (if S2011 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2012.

In S2012, the main CPU 2201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S2012, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2013. The main CPU 2201 performs the process from S2013 onwards based on the control state number read in the process of S2012.

In S2013, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This S2013 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 95. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 2201 transfers the processing to S2014.

In S2014, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. This S2014 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 96. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 2201 transfers the processing to S2015.

In S2015, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game determination process. This process of S2015 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 97. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2016.

In S2016, the main CPU 2201 performs a V winning device opening preparation process. This S2016 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this V winning device opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 99. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2017.

In S2017, the main CPU 2201 performs a V winning device opening control process. This S2017 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this V winning device opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 100. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2018.

In S2018, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for preparing to open the large prize opening. This process in S2018 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this process for preparing to open the large prize opening will be described later with reference to FIG. 101. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2019.

In S2019, the main CPU 2201 performs a large prize opening control process. This process of S2019 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". Details of this large prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 102. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2020.

In S2020, the main CPU 2201 performs a jackpot end process. This S2020 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". Details of this jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 103.

After completing steps S2013 to S2020, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). In this case, the process returns to the process from which the special symbol management process was called.

[3-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2013 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described with reference to Fig. 95. Fig. 95 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display start process in the third pachinko game machine.

Note that if the special symbol variable display start process is a process called in S2013 during special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, if the special symbol variable display start process is a process called in S2013 during special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

As shown in FIG. 95, the main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S2021).

If it is determined in S2021 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (if S2021 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2021 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (if S2021 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2022.

In S2022, the main CPU 2201 performs a shift process of the start information of the special symbol. After executing the process of S2022, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2023.

In S2023, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol hit determination process. In this process, a special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 89) is referenced, and a special symbol hit determination is performed using a random number value for determining whether the special symbol is a hit. In this embodiment, if the first special symbol is the target of processing, it is determined whether it is a time-saving hit, a jackpot, or a miss. Also, if the second special symbol is the target of processing, it is determined whether it is a time-saving hit, a jackpot, or a special feature release hit. After executing the process of S2023, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2024.

In S2024, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol determination process. This process is a process for determining or deciding the stopping symbol of the special symbol that corresponds to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023) (for example, a time-saving hit, a big hit, a role-opening hit, or a miss). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 90) is referenced, and the symbol random number value of the special symbol is used to determine the above-mentioned "select symbol command" or "symbol designation command." After executing the process of S2024, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2025.

In S2025, the main CPU 2201 performs a jackpot type determination process. This process is a process for determining or deciding the type of win when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit (time-saving hit, jackpot, or special feature release hit). In this process, the type of win is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S2024) by referring to the hit type determination table (see FIG. 91). Note that the type of win determined when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a special feature release hit is the type of jackpot when the jackpot game control process is executed by the game ball passing through the V winning hole 2155 opened based on the special feature release hit. In addition, in this embodiment, the types of time-saving hit, jackpot, and special feature release hit are all multiple types, but the type of time-saving hit, jackpot, and/or special feature release hit may be one type. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to providing multiple types of time-saving hits, jackpots, and/or feature release hits, multiple types of misses may be provided. After executing the process of S2025, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2026.

In S2026, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. This process is a process for judging or determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the special symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 92) is referenced, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, for example, according to the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit judgment process (S2023), the value of the time-saving flag, the random number value for reach judgment and/or the random number value for performance selection, etc. After executing the process of S2026, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2027.

In S2027, the main CPU 2201 performs a variable display time setting process for the special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 92) is referenced, and the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the variation pattern determination process for the special symbol (S2026) is determined as the variation time for the special symbol. After executing the process of S2027, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2028.

In S2028, the main CPU 2201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1". By performing the process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1" in this way, after the special symbol variable display start process ends, the special symbol variable display end process (see S2014 in FIG. 94) is performed. After executing the process of S2028, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2029.

In S2029, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, a process of updating parameters related to the game state (e.g., the number of times remaining in the special mode and the number of times remaining in the time-saving mode) stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 is performed. After executing the process of S2029, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2030.

In S2030, the main CPU 2201 performs game status management processing. This processing mainly involves updating various flags related to game status management (e.g., probability bonus flags, time-saving flags, etc.). After executing S2030, the main CPU 2201 transfers processing to S2031.

In S2031, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process (particularly the game state management process (S2030) and the special symbol presentation start command transmission reservation process (S2031)) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[3-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, a special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2014 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described with reference to Fig. 96. Fig. 96 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display end process in the third pachinko game machine.

If the special symbol variable display end process is called in S2014 during special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, if the special symbol variable display end process is a process called in S2014 during special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S2041).

If it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (if S2041 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (if S2041 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2042.

In S2042, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", the special symbol game determination process (see S2015 in FIG. 94) is performed after the special symbol variable display end process is completed. After executing the process of S2042, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2043.

In S2043, the main CPU 2201 executes a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect stop command. This process also includes a process for stopping the variable display of the special symbol. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2043, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2044.

In S2044, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the value of the determined symbol counter. As described above in the explanation of the first pachinko gaming machine and the second pachinko gaming machine, the determined symbol counter is a counter for counting the number of times a special symbol is determined (the number of times a special symbol game has been played), but it may also manage the number of games of a special symbol game played under a specific state, such as the number of times a special symbol game is remaining or the number of times a time-saving game is remaining. After executing the process of S2044, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-5. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, a special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2015 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described with reference to Fig. 97. Fig. 97 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game determination process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

Note that if this special symbol game determination process is called in S2015 during special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the target of processing, the first special symbol is the target of processing. Similarly, if the special symbol game determination process is called in S2015 during special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the target of processing, the second special symbol is the target of processing.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S2051).

If it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (if S2051 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game play determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (if S2051 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2052.

In S2052, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot.

If it is determined in S2052 that the result is not a jackpot, i.e. that the stopped special symbol is not in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot (if S2052 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2060. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2052 that the result is a jackpot, i.e. that the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot (if S2052 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2053. Note that if the special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a win when the special symbol is released, or if the special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a miss, then a NO judgment is made in S2052.

In S2053, the main CPU 2201 performs start setting processing for jackpot game control. In this processing, signals (e.g., jackpot signals, etc.) that are output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88 for both) via the external terminal board 2184 are generated and updated. Note that the signal that is generated and updated in this processing is a hit signal for the special symbol that is the subject of the special symbol game determination processing. After executing the processing of S2053, the main CPU 2201 transfers the processing to S2054.

In addition, in the start setting process for jackpot game control in S2053, the main CPU 2201 also performs processing to clear various flags and counters, such as the time-saving flag and the time-saving counter.

In S2054, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs processes such as a process of setting the upper limit of the number of times the large prize opening 2131 can be opened (S2055), a process of setting a large prize signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2056), a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2057), a process of setting a game state designation parameter (S2058), and a process of reserving the transmission of a large prize start display command (S2059). By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2057), the large prize opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 94) is performed after the special symbol game judgment process is completed. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game judgment process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

At S2060, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not a special feature has been opened, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a special feature has been opened.

If it is determined in S2060 that the special symbol that has stopped is not a winning combination, i.e., that the special symbol that has stopped is a winning combination (if S2060 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2061. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2060 that the special symbol that has stopped is a winning combination, i.e., that the special symbol that has stopped is a winning combination (if S2060 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2061.

In S2061, the main CPU 2201 performs start setting processing for game control when a special feature is opened. In this processing, signals (e.g., a special feature opening signal, etc.) that are output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88 for both) via the external terminal board 2184 are generated and updated. Note that the signals generated and updated in this processing are signals related to the special symbol that is the subject of the special symbol game determination processing. After executing the processing of S2061, the main CPU 2201 transfers the processing to S2062.

In S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs a process to set the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 can be opened. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 can be opened, set in this process, is, for example, 1 time. After executing the process of S2062, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2063.

In S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs processes such as setting a signal for opening a special device to the external terminal board 2184 (S2063), setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S2064), setting a game state designation parameter (S2065), and reserving the transmission of a display command for starting a special device to be opened (S2066). By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S2064), the V winning device opening preparation process (see S2016 in FIG. 94) is performed after the special symbol game judgment process is completed. Thereafter, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game judgment process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

In S2067, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 98. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94).

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibited period and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S2051 to S2067) within the interrupt prohibited period.

[3-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, a special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2067 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 97) will be described with reference to Fig. 98. Fig. 98 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game ending process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first performs time-saving management processing (S2071). The third pachinko gaming machine, which is called a type 1/type 2 mixed machine, is not controlled to a high probability gaming state, so the time-saving management processing executed in the third pachinko gaming machine differs from the processing described with reference to Figures 32 to 39 for the first pachinko gaming machine. Specifically, in the first pachinko gaming machine, it was described that the ceiling count prohibition flag is set to on when the probability variable flag is set to on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, but the third pachinko gaming machine is not controlled to a high probability gaming state. Therefore, it differs in that the ceiling count prohibition flag is set to on only when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, instead of being set to on when the probability variable flag is set to on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. Also, in the first pachinko gaming machine, in the time-saving transition determination process (see FIG. 37), it is determined whether the probability variable flag is off (see S191), and then the process of S192 is performed on the condition that the probability variable flag is off. However, in the third pachinko gaming machine, as described above, it is not controlled to a high probability gaming state, so it differs in that it performs the process of S192 without performing the process of S191. The other processes in the time-saving management process are the same as those described with reference to FIG. 32 to FIG. 39 for the first pachinko gaming machine. After executing the process of S2071, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2072.

In S2072, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". By carrying out the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" in this way, the current special symbol game ends, and it becomes possible to carry out the special symbol variable display start process, i.e., the next special symbol game. After carrying out the process of S2072, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2073.

In S2073, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for setting game state designation parameters for the special symbol. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for reserving transmission of a special symbol game end command (S2074). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S2074, the main CPU 2201 terminates the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 97).

[3-4-7. V winning device opening preparation process]
Next, referring to Fig. 99, a V winning device opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2016 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 94) will be described. Fig. 99 is a flow chart showing an example of the V winning device opening preparation process in the third pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S2081).

If it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (if S2081 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (if S2081 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2082.

In S2082, the main CPU 2201 sets, for example, the maximum opening time and the maximum number of openings as the opening pattern of the V winning device 2150 (i.e., the operation pattern of the V attacker 2152). In this embodiment, the opening pattern is set to a maximum of 1800 msec opening only once, but the opening pattern is not limited to this. For example, a maximum of 900 msec opening may be performed a maximum of two times per opening, or the first opening may be performed for a maximum of 600 msec, and the second opening may be performed for a maximum of 1200 msec. Furthermore, multiple opening patterns may be provided for each opening of the role within a total time not exceeding a specified time (for example, 1800 msec), and one of these multiple opening patterns may be set based on, for example, the random number value of the special pattern. After executing the process of S2082, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2083.

In S2083, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening/closing control processing. In this processing, processing is performed to generate opening/closing control data for the V winning port 2155. After executing the processing of S2083, the main CPU 2201 transfers the processing to S2084.

In S2084, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S2084), the V winning device opening control process (see S2017 in FIG. 94) is performed after the V winning device opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S2084, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2085.

In S2085, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2085, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2086.

In S2086, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process for the V winning device open display command. The V winning device open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2086, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device open preparation process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-8. V winning device opening control process]
Next, referring to Fig. 100, a V winning device opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2017 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 94) will be described. Fig. 100 is a flowchart showing an example of a V winning device opening control process in the third pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S2091).

If it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (if S2091 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device release control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (if S2091 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2092.

In S2092, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the number of game balls that entered the V winning device 2150 when the opening and closing winning port 2151 was opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152 is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the V attacker count switch 2153 (see FIG. 88), which counts the number of winning game balls that entered the V winning device 2150, is the maximum number of winning balls. The value of the V attacker winning counter counted by the V attacker count switch 2153 is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 2203.

If it is determined in S2092 that the number of game balls that have won in the V winning device 2150 is not the maximum number of winning balls (if S2092 is judged as NO), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2093.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2092 that the number of game balls that have won in the V winning device 2150 is the maximum number of winning balls (if S2092 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2094.

In S2093, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 (i.e., the maximum opening time of the open/close winning port 2151) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the process of S2082 (see FIG. 99) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has not elapsed (if S2093 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has elapsed (if S2093 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2094.

In S2094, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of closing the V winning device 2150 (i.e., the open/close winning port 2151). After executing the process of S2094, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2095.

In S2095, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not a V entry has been detected. In this process, it is determined whether or not a game ball has passed through the V entry port 2155 within a specified time (i.e., whether or not detection has occurred by the V entry port switch 2156). Note that the above-mentioned specified time may be any time related to the entry of a game ball into the V entry device 2150, and may be, for example, within a specified time from when the V attacker 2152 begins to operate, or within a specified time from when the game ball is released from the engagement by the engagement member 2160, etc.

If it is determined in S2095 that a V win has been detected (if S2095 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers processing to S2096.

In S2096, the main CPU 2201 performs a start setting process for V hit game control. In this process, a signal (e.g., a V hit signal, etc.) output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88 for both) via the external terminal board 2184 is generated and updated. The signal generated and updated in this process is a hit signal for the special symbol that is the target of the special symbol game judgment process. When the V hit game control is executed, for example, 10 rounds of round play are executed as shown in the hit type determination table (see FIG. 91), so that the player can win a large number of prize balls as in the case where the jackpot game control process is executed. In this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the V hit game control and the jackpot game control process are distinguished and called, but the V hit game control can also be called the jackpot game control process. After executing the process of S2096, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2097.

In addition, in the V hit game control start setting process of S2096, the main CPU 2201 also performs processing to clear various flags and counters, such as the time-saving flag and time-saving counter.

In S2097, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. By performing this process, the opening of the V winning device 2150 (i.e., the operation of the V attacker 2152), which was first performed based on the opening of the reel, is processed as the first round of round play. In other words, the V winning game control, which is executed when it is determined that a V winning has been detected (S2095 is determined as YES), will start from the second round of round play. After performing the process of S2097, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2098.

In S2098, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs processes such as a process of setting the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 is opened (i.e., the number of times the V attacker 2152 is operated) (S2099), a process of setting a V hit signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2100), a process of setting the control state number of the special pattern to "5" (S2101), a process of setting a game state designation parameter (S2102), and a process of reserving the transmission of a V hit start display command (S2103). By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special pattern to "5" (S2101), a process of preparing to open the large winning port (see S2018 in FIG. 94) is performed after the special pattern game judgment process is completed. The main CPU 2201 then ends the special pattern game determination process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 94).

Returning to S2095, if it is determined that no V winning was detected in S2095 (if S2095 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2104.

In S2104, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this processing, the special symbol game end processing described with reference to FIG. 98 is performed. After executing the processing of S2104, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-9. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, referring to Fig. 101, a special prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2018 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 94) will be described. Fig. 101 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening preparation process in the third pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S2111).

If it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (if S2111 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (if S2111 is judged as YES), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2112.

In S2112, the main CPU 2201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of rounds played in the jackpot game state. The round counter count value (round counter value) is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 2203. After executing the process of S2112, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2113.

In S2113, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the number of times the jackpot opening has been opened is the upper limit. In this process, it is determined whether the number of times the round play has been performed in the jackpot play state is the upper limit.

If it is determined in S2113 that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened has reached the upper limit (if S2113 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers processing to S2114.

In S2114, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "7". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7" (S2114), the jackpot end process (see S2020 in FIG. 94) will be performed after the jackpot opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S2114, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2115.

In S2115, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a jackpot end display command (S2116). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S2116, the main CPU 2201 ends the jackpot opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

Returning to S2113, if it is determined that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened is not the upper limit (if S2113 is judged as NO), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2117.

In S2117, the main CPU 2201 performs processing to add 1 to the round counter value. After executing processing of S2117, the main CPU 2201 transfers processing to S2118.

In S2118, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of selecting the large prize opening to be opened. In this process, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 95) is a big prize, and the stop display mode indicating a big prize is derived (YES judgment is made at S2052 in FIG. 97), and the game control is started by the big prize opening, the large prize opening 2131 is selected as the large prize opening to be opened. On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a role release hit, and the stop display mode indicating the role release is derived (YES judgment is made at S2060 in FIG. 97), and further, the V winning is detected (YES judgment is made at S2095 in FIG. 100), and the game control is started by the V winning, the V winning device 2150 (i.e., the open/close winning opening 2151) is selected as the large prize opening to be opened. After executing processing of S2118, the main CPU 2201 transfers processing to S2119.

In S2119, the main CPU 2201 performs various setting processes related to the large prize opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize opening device 2150 is opened, the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize opening device 2150, the maximum number of winning balls into the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize opening device 2150, the number of winning balls when the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize opening device 2150 is won, etc. are set. The number of times the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize opening device 2150 is opened corresponds to the number of rounds. Note that this is not intended to exclude cases where the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize opening device 2150 is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of times the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize opening device 2150 is opened and closed as separate processes. After executing S2119, the main CPU 2201 transfers processing to S2120.

The above "large prize opening 2131 or V prize device 2150" corresponds to the large prize opening selected in S2118 as the large prize opening to be opened between the large prize opening 2131 and the V prize device 2150. The same applies to the following processing.

In S2120, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for controlling the opening and closing of the large prize opening. In this process, the process for generating the opening and closing control data for the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150 is performed. After executing the process of S2120, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2121.

In S2121, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "6". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6" (S2121), the large prize opening opening control process (see S2019 in FIG. 94) is performed after the large prize opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S2121, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2122.

In S2122, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2122, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2123.

In S2123, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of the large prize opening display command. The large prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2123, the main CPU 2201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-10. Large prize opening control process]
Next, referring to Fig. 102, a special prize opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2019 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 94) will be described. Fig. 102 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening control process in the third pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special pattern is "6" (S2131).

If it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6" (if S2131 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (if S2131 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2132.

In S2132, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150 is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the large prize opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88), which counts the number of winning game balls in the large prize opening 2131, or the V attacker count switch 2153 (see FIG. 88), which counts the number of game balls that have entered the V prize device 2150, is the maximum number of winning balls. The value of the V attacker winning counter counted by the large prize opening count switch 2132 or the V attacker count switch 2153 is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 2203.

If it is determined in S2132 that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150 is not the maximum number of prizes (if S2132 returns a NO judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2133.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2132 that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150 is the maximum number of prizes (if S2132 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2134.

In S2133, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the large prize opening related various setting process (see S2119 in FIG. 101) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150 has not elapsed (if S2133 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the large prize opening opening control process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150 has elapsed (if S2133 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2134.

In S2134, the main CPU 2201 performs a process to close the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150. After executing the process of S2134, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2135.

In S2135, the main CPU 2201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2135), the large prize opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 94) will be performed again after this large prize opening control process is completed. After executing the process of S2135, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2136.

In S2136, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2136, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2137.

In S2137, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of an inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S2137, the main CPU 2201 ends the large prize opening control process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-11. Jackpot end processing]
Next, the big win end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2020 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described with reference to Fig. 103. Fig. 103 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win end process in the third pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (S2141).

If it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "7" (if S2141 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). In this case, it returns to the process from which the jackpot end process was called.

If it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (if S2141 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers processing to S2142.

In S2142, the main CPU 2201 executes a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, various flags (e.g., a probability change flag, a time-saving flag, etc.) are set, and the values of various counters (e.g., a probability change counter, a time-saving counter, a number of confirmed symbols counter, a round counter, a large prize slot winning counter, etc.) are set or reset. After executing S2142, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2143.

In S2143, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this processing, the special symbol game end processing described with reference to FIG. 98 is performed. After executing the processing of S2143, the main CPU 2201 ends the jackpot end processing and also ends the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94), and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 93). In this case, as described above, the processing returns to the processing from which the jackpot end processing was called.

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 set an interrupt prohibited section and perform the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interrupt prohibited section.

[4. Extension Example]
The following describes an example of an extension common to the first, second, and third pachinko game machines. Since the symbols attached to the components are different depending on the first, second, and third pachinko game machines, the symbols are omitted in the following description except when the description is limited to a specific pachinko game machine (especially the third pachinko game machine).

[4-1. Example of extended probability control]
In the first pachinko game machine and the second pachinko game machine, whether or not to set the special probability flag on is determined depending on the type of jackpot, and when the special probability flag is set on, the number of special probability rounds is determined, but this is not limited to this and may be, for example, in the following manner.

For example, the machine may be a so-called V-type high probability machine that determines whether or not a specific area provided in a large prize opening has been passed during execution of the jackpot game control process, and sets a high probability flag to ON when the jackpot game control process ends if it is determined that at least one game ball has passed through the specific area. Note that the specific area can be changed between an open state where game balls can or easily pass through and a closed state where game balls cannot or have difficulty entering, for example, by the operation of a movable member during a specific round of play during execution of the jackpot game control process.

In such a V-type high probability machine, for example, the ease with which the game ball passes through the above-mentioned specific area during execution of the jackpot game control process, i.e., the probability that the high probability flag will be set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process, may be different between when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a jackpot, as will be described later with reference to Figures 104 to 107.

Figure 104 is an example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the jackpot opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round of play during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, and shows a case where (A) the opening mode of the specific area is the first opening mode, (B) the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode, and (C) the opening mode of the specific area is the third opening mode. Note that the first opening mode and the second opening mode are modes in which it is easy for the game ball to pass through to the specific area, and the third opening mode is a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through to the specific area. Note that in the example shown in Figure 104, the specific area is controlled to be in an open state by time control.

Note that, although FIG. 104 shows the large prize opening being opened for a short time and then opened for a long time, the opening manner of the large prize opening is not limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 104(A), in the first opening mode, the specific area is open while the large prize opening is open, except for a predetermined time after the long opening of the large prize opening has begun. Therefore, while the jackpot game control process is being executed, it is easy for at least one of the multiple game balls that have entered the large prize opening to pass through the specific area. In other words, the special probability flag is likely to be set to ON when the jackpot game control process ends. However, if no game balls have passed through the specific area despite the specific area being open, the special probability flag is not set to ON when the jackpot game control process ends.

Also, as shown in FIG. 104(B), in the second opening mode, the specific area is in an open state from the start of the short opening of the large prize opening to the end of the long opening of the large prize opening. Therefore, while the jackpot game control process is being executed, it is extremely easy for at least one of the multiple game balls that have entered the large prize opening to pass through the specific area. In other words, the special probability flag is very easily set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, if the specific area is in an open state but no game balls have passed through the specific area, the special probability flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 104(C), in the third opening mode, the specific area is closed except for the time when the large prize opening is short-open and for a predetermined time after the large prize opening has started to be long-opened (both of these times are short). Therefore, compared to either the first or second opening mode, it is more difficult for even one of the multiple game balls that have entered the large prize opening to pass through the specific area during execution of the jackpot game control. In other words, it is difficult for the probability variable flag to be set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area during execution of the jackpot game control, if the game ball passes through the specific area at the right time, the probability variable flag will be set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

In FIG. 104, an example is described in which two opening modes, a first opening mode and a second opening mode, are provided as examples of opening modes of a specific area in which at least one of a plurality of game balls that have entered a large prize opening can easily pass through the specific area during execution of a jackpot game control process. However, the number of opening modes of a specific area in which at least one of a plurality of game balls that have entered a large prize opening can easily pass through the specific area during execution of a jackpot game control process is not limited to two modes, and may be only one mode or three or more modes.

In addition, FIG. 104 describes an example of a third opening mode as an example of a specific area opening mode in which it is difficult for even one of the multiple game balls that have entered the large prize opening to pass through the specific area during execution of the jackpot game control process. However, the number of opening modes of the specific area in which it is difficult for even one of the multiple game balls that have entered the large prize opening to pass through the specific area during execution of the jackpot game control process is not limited to one mode, and two or more modes may be provided.

Figure 105 is an example of a special symbol determination table in an extended example. According to the special symbol determination table shown in this Figure 105, when the winning/losing determination value data is "jackpot determination value data" (when the result of the special symbol winning determination process is a winning), the winning time selection symbol commands for the first special symbol and the second special symbol are selected as follows. That is, when the result of the first special symbol winning determination process is a winning, the winning time selection symbol command is, for example, "z0" with a selection rate of 40%, "z1" with a selection rate of 10%, and "z2" with a selection rate of 50%. Also, when the result of the second special symbol winning determination process is a winning, the winning time selection symbol command is, for example, "z3" with a selection rate of 15%, "z4" with a selection rate of 50%, and "z5" with a selection rate of 35%.

Figure 106 is an example of a jackpot type determination table in an extended example. According to the jackpot type determination table shown in this Figure 106, the type of jackpot (for example, the number of rounds, the opening mode of the specific area, etc.) is determined as follows. That is, when the winning time selection pattern command is "z0", the number of rounds is "3" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be a jackpot of the third opening mode (3R normal jackpot A). Also, when the winning time selection pattern command is "z1", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be a jackpot of the third opening mode (10R normal jackpot A). Also, when the winning time selection pattern command is "z2", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be a jackpot of the first opening mode (10R certainty jackpot A). Also, when the winning time selection pattern command is "z3", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be a jackpot of the third opening mode (10R normal jackpot B). If the symbol command for selecting a winning combination is "z4", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the first opening mode of the winning combination (10R special winning combination B). If the symbol command for selecting a winning combination is "z5", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the second opening mode of the winning combination (10R special winning combination C).

That is, according to the above-mentioned Figs. 104 to 106, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a hit, the type of the hit is determined to be 3R normal hit A with a selection rate of 40%, 10R normal hit A with a selection rate of 10%, and 10R sure-win A with a selection rate of 50%. On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a hit, the type of the hit is determined to be 10R normal hit B with a selection rate of 15%, 10R sure-win B with a selection rate of 50%, and 10R sure-win C with a selection rate of 35. In this way, it is possible to make the probability that the sure-win flag is set to ON at the end of the hit game control process different between when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a hit.

In addition, in a specific round of play during execution of the jackpot game control process, the specific area is not limited to being opened by time control as shown in Figures 104 (A) to (C), but may be opened in response to a game ball entering a jackpot opening, for example, as shown in Figure 107 described below.

Figure 107 is another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the large prize opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round of play during execution of the expanded example of the jackpot game control process (an example in which the specific area is controlled to be in an open state based on a win in the large prize opening), showing (A) a case in which the opening mode of the specific area is the first opening mode, and (B) a case in which the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode.

As shown in FIG. 107(A), in the first opening mode of another example, after the large prize opening is opened, when the first game ball enters the large prize opening and the entry of the first game ball is detected by the large prize opening count switch, the specific area is opened for a certain period of time based on this detection. Then, when the second game ball enters the large prize opening and the entry of the second game ball is detected by the large prize opening count switch, the specific area is opened based on this detection until the large prize opening is closed. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, it is easy for at least one of the multiple game balls that entered the large prize opening to pass through the specific area. In other words, the probability variable flag is easily set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, if no game ball passes through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability variable flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

Also, as shown in FIG. 107(B), in the second opening mode of another example, after the large prize winning hole is opened, the specific area is opened for a certain period of time only when the first game ball enters the large prize winning hole and the entry of the first game ball is detected by the large prize winning hole count switch. Even if the second game ball enters the large prize winning hole and the entry of the second game ball is detected by the large prize winning hole count switch, the specific area does not become open and remains closed until the winning hole is closed. Therefore, during the execution of the large prize game control, it is more difficult for even one of the multiple game balls that have entered the large prize winning hole to pass through the specific area compared to the first opening mode. In other words, it is difficult for the probability variable flag to be set to ON at the end of the large prize game control process. However, even in this case, if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area while the jackpot game control is being executed, if the game ball passes through the specific area at the right time, the probability of winning flag is set to ON when the jackpot game control process ends.

In the above, an example was described in which if the game ball passes through a specific area while the jackpot game control process is being executed, the probability variable flag is set to ON when the jackpot game control process ends. However, this is not limited to this. For example, if the game ball passes through a specific area while the jackpot game control process is being executed, the time-saving flag may be set to ON when the jackpot game control process ends. This type of specification is particularly effective in the case of a type 1/type 2 mixed machine, such as a third type pachinko game machine.

In addition, in the above, an example was described in which the same opening pattern is set as the opening pattern of the specific area when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a hit, but this is not limited to this, and for example, an opening pattern dedicated to the first special symbol and an opening pattern dedicated to the second special symbol may be set.

In addition, in the above, an example was described in which the third mode may be determined to be one in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a hit, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured so that when the result of the hit determination process for either one of the special symbols (e.g. the second special symbol) is a hit, only a mode in which it is easy for at least one game ball to pass through the specific area (the first mode or the second mode) is determined.

Also, in the above, in the third mode in which it is difficult for game balls to pass through to the specific area, the specific area is in an open state twice (both for a short period of time) while the large prize opening is short-open and for a predetermined period of time after the large prize opening starts to be long-opened; however, if it is difficult for game balls to pass through to the specific area, the specific area may be in an open state once or multiple times.

The closure of a specific area may be controlled to occur after a predetermined opening time has elapsed, or after the round in which the specific area is open has ended, or in response to a set number of large prize openings or winnings in the specific area. There may also be one or more combined conditions for closure.

It may also be a so-called limiter machine in which the jackpot game state and the game state in which the probability variable control is executed (for example, a high probability time-saving game state, a high probability non-time-saving game state, etc.) are alternately executed repeatedly until a predetermined upper limit number (hereinafter referred to as the "limiter number") is reached. In such a limiter machine, when the above-mentioned number of repetitions (hereinafter referred to as the "loop number") reaches a predetermined limiter number, the game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is controlled to a game state in which the probability variable control is not executed (for example, a normal game state, a time-saving game state, etc.). At this time, the loop number is also reset. In such a gaming machine, the limiter number may be a fixed number, or may be determined according to, for example, the random number value of the special pattern, or may be determined by a predetermined lottery. In addition, if it is a setting machine, the limiter number may be different depending on the setting value.

In the above, we have described a so-called limiter machine in which the jackpot game state and the game state in which the probability variable control is executed are alternately and repeatedly executed until the limiter number of times is reached, but this is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot game state and the game state in which the time-saving control is executed may be alternately and repeatedly executed until the limiter number of times is reached. This is particularly effective in the case of a type 1/type 2 mixed machine such as the third type pachinko game machine.

In addition, in the case of the above-mentioned V-type high probability machine, if the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the game state in which the high probability control is executed continues. Therefore, in such a V-type high probability machine, if the limiter number is, for example, N times, when the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the Nth jackpot game control process, it is considered that the predetermined limiter number has been reached, and the game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is controlled to a game state in which the high probability control is not executed. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the execution of the Nth jackpot game control process, although it is not considered that the predetermined limiter number has been reached, since the game ball has not passed through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, even in such a case, the game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is controlled to a game state in which the high probability control is not executed. The same applies to gaming machines in which, if a gaming ball passes through a specific area while a jackpot game control process is being executed, the time-saving flag is set to ON when the jackpot game control process ends.

In addition, after the end of the jackpot game control process, the machine is controlled to a game state (e.g., high probability time-saving game state, high probability non-time-saving game state, etc.) in which the probability variable control is executed until a predetermined number of special symbol games are played, and when the predetermined number of special symbol games are played, the machine may be a so-called ST machine in which the probability variable control is not executed (e.g., normal game state, time-saving game state, etc.). In such a game machine, the number of special symbol games in which the probability variable control is executed (hereinafter referred to as the "ST number") may be a fixed number, or may be different each time. In addition, if it is a setting machine, the expected value of the ST number may be different depending on the setting value. Furthermore, the machine may be a so-called falling type game machine in which a falling lottery is performed and the probability variable control ends based on the result of the falling lottery, or it may be a so-called V probability variable type game machine in which the probability variable control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state when the game ball passes through a specific area during the jackpot game state.

[4-2. Example of time-saving control extension]
In the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine and the third pachinko game machine, if the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a jackpot, the time-saving control can be executed after the jackpot game control process is completed, but the time-saving control may also be executed even if the result of the special pattern hit determination process is not a jackpot.

For example, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit or a miss, a time-saving hit/miss determination process may be performed separately from the special symbol hit determination process to determine whether or not to execute time-saving control, using a specific random number value (e.g., a random number value for special symbol hit determination, a pattern random number value of a special symbol, etc.) from among the random number values extracted based on the entry of a game ball into the starting hole. When a time-saving hit/miss determination is performed when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit or a miss, for example, when the pattern random number value of a special symbol extracted based on the entry of a game ball into the starting hole is a specific pattern random number value, it can be determined to be a "time-saving hit" in which time-saving control is executed. Note that the time-saving hit/miss determination process may also be performed when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit.

In addition, if the time-saving winning/losing determination process is performed separately from the special pattern winning/losing determination process, the time-saving winning/losing determination process may be performed prior to the special pattern winning/losing determination process in the same frame.

In addition, when performing the above-mentioned time-saving winning/losing judgment process, a random number for time-saving winning/losing judgment that is used exclusively for the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be generated within a predetermined range, and the random number value for time-saving winning/losing may be extracted based on, for example, the entry of a game ball into the starting hole, and the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be performed using the extracted random number value for time-saving winning/losing.

The random number value used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process does not necessarily have to be extracted based on the game ball winning the start port, but may be extracted based on the game ball winning in other areas (for example, the general winning port, the small winning port, the large winning port, etc.). Furthermore, for example, a dedicated area that triggers the execution of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be provided, and the random number value used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be extracted based on the game ball passing through this dedicated area.

For example, if the time-saving winning/losing determination process and the special pattern winning/losing determination process are executed at different times, the time-saving winning/losing determination process may be executed during the variable display of the special pattern, which, when confirmed, derives a stop display mode indicating a jackpot, and the result of this time-saving winning/losing determination process may be a "time-saving winning". In such a case, the main CPU may forcibly derive, for example, a display mode indicating a "time-saving losing" even though the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process is a "time-saving winning".

The sub-CPU also preferably controls the display of a performance image (such as a decorative pattern change performance or a character display performance) on the display device that allows or makes it easy to understand from the outside whether the result of the time-saving win/loss judgment process is a "time-saving win" or a "time-saving miss." In this case, the result of the time-saving win/loss judgment process is displayed on the display device separately from the result of the special pattern win/loss judgment process, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest.

In addition, instead of displaying on the display device an effect image that makes it possible or easy to grasp from the outside whether the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is a "time-saving winning" or a "time-saving losing" result, it is also possible to execute control to display on the display device an effect image (for example, a decorative pattern change effect or a character display effect, etc.) that makes it impossible or difficult to grasp from the outside whether the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is a "time-saving winning" or a "time-saving losing" result. In this case, it is possible to maintain interest until the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is disclosed.

In addition, in a typical pachinko game machine, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the sub-CPU controls the display device (e.g., liquid crystal display device) to display, for example, a performance image showing a right-hit instruction as the recommended method of launching game balls in a jackpot game state. In this regard, in this embodiment, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is not a jackpot, if the result of the time-saving hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", the sub-CPU controls the display device to display, for example, a performance image showing a right-hit instruction as the recommended method of launching game balls when time-saving control is executed. However, if the result of the time-saving hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", the performance image showing the recommended method of launching game balls when time-saving control is executed may be displayed on the display device at all times, or may be displayed only when a specific condition is met. For example, if the number of time-saving hits set based on the "time-saving hit" is a predetermined number or more (e.g., 2 or more), it may be displayed, but if it is less than the predetermined number (e.g., less than 2), it may not be displayed. Note that the above specific conditions are not limited to the number of time-saving conditions, but can be any conditions as appropriate.

In addition, if the time-saving hit/lose determination process is executed before the special pattern hit determination process is executed, the sub-CPU may execute control to display on the display device a performance image that is externally comprehensible or easily comprehensible as to whether or not the special pattern hit determination process will be executed under the "time-saving hit" condition (i.e., under the condition in which the time-saving flag is set to on).

The following is a summary of the processes related to time-saving, such as the type of random number used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process, the timing of extracting the random number used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process, the conditions for judging a time-saving winning/losing in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process, the execution timing of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process, the game state in which the time-saving winning/losing judgment process can be executed, the state of the time-saving game state, the number of time-saving times set when a time-saving winning/losing is achieved, the start timing of the time-saving game state, the end timing of the time-saving game state, the timing of rewriting the number of time-saving times, the probability of winning the time-saving game, and the display of the results of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process.

(Type of random numbers used in time-saving winning/losing judgment processing)
The random number value used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be any of a plurality of types of random number values, such as a random number value for special symbol winning judgment, a random number value for special symbol determination, a random number value for normal winning judgment, a random number value for normal symbol determination, a random number value for special symbol fall judgment, and a dedicated random number value for time-saving winning/losing judgment. In addition, in the case of a setting machine, when the setting is changed, the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be performed using the changed setting value.

In addition, the random number value used in the time-saving winning/losing determination process is not limited to one type (for example, only a random number value for time-saving winning/losing determination), but may be determined using multiple types of random number values (for example, a random number value for determining whether a special pattern has been won and a random number value for determining the pattern).

(Timing of extracting random numbers used in time-saving winning/losing judgment processing)
The timing of extraction of the random number value used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be any timing, such as when the game ball enters the start gate which triggers the special symbol winning judgment process, when the game ball passes through the pass gate which triggers the execution of the normal symbol winning judgment process, when the game ball passes through a dedicated area which triggers the execution of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process, etc. The extraction of the random number value used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be performed based on the winning of a specific winning gate or the like which has a prize ball payout, or may be performed based on the passing through a specific gate or a specific out-gate which has no prize ball payout.

In addition, if the random number value for the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is extracted based on the entry (passage) of the game ball into the start port, the random number value for the time-saving winning/losing judgment may be extracted regardless of whether the game ball enters the first start port or the second start port, or the random number value for the time-saving winning/losing judgment may be extracted only when the game ball enters one of the specific start ports.

(Conditions for determining whether a time-saving win has been won in the time-saving winning/losing determination process)
When the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed using the extracted random number value for time-saving winning/losing judgment process, it is preferable to determine that the time-saving winning/losing is a winning when the extracted random number value for time-saving winning/losing judgment is a specific random number value for time-saving winning/losing judgment (for example, specific time-saving winning/losing judgment value data). When the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed using the random number value for special pattern winning/losing judgment, it is preferable to determine that the time-saving winning/losing is a winning when the data is a specific losing judgment value data, a specific small winning judgment value data, or/and a specific big winning judgment value data. When the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed using the pattern random number value of the special pattern, it is preferable to determine that the time-saving winning/losing is a winning when the data is a specific losing pattern, a specific small winning pattern, or a specific big winning pattern. When the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed using the random number value for special pattern falling judgment, it is preferable to determine that the time-saving winning/losing is a winning when the data is a specific random number value for special pattern falling judgment. When the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed using the changed setting value, it is preferable to determine that the time-saving winning/losing is a winning when the setting value is changed to a specific setting value. The same applies when the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed using the random number value for normal winning judgment or the random number value for normal pattern determination. Furthermore, the conditions for determining the time-saving winning/losing in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process are not limited to the above conditions and can be arbitrarily determined to be various conditions.

In the third pachinko game machine, even if the result of the time-saving hit/loss judgment process is a "time-saving hit," if the result of the special symbol hit judgment process (see S2023 in FIG. 68) is a hit to open the special symbol and the game ball that entered the V winning device 2150 when the V attacker 2152 is opened passes through the V winning port 2155, it is preferable to determine whether or not to execute time-saving control and the number of time-saving times according to the type of hit to open the special symbol. And, if the result of the special symbol hit judgment process is a hit to open the special symbol and the V attacker 2152 is opened but the passage of the game ball to the V winning port 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game control process is not executed, if the result of the time-saving hit/loss judgment process is a "time-saving hit," the main CPU 2201 may determine whether or not to execute time-saving control and the number of time-saving times based on the "time-saving hit." However, if the result of the time-saving hit/miss determination process is "time-saving miss," and the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit to open the device, and the game ball that entered the V winning device 2150 when the V attacker 2152 opens does not pass through the V winning port 2155, the time-saving control will not be executed.

(Time-saving winning/losing judgment processing execution timing)
When the time-saving winning/losing determination process is executed at the start of the variable display of the special pattern using a random number value for time-saving winning/losing determination obtained based on the winning (passing) of the game ball at the starting hole, the main CPU may retain the obtained random number value for time-saving winning/losing determination, in the same manner as the start information of the special pattern.

The main CPU may execute the time-saving winning/losing judgment process immediately after extracting the random number value to be used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process (e.g., before it is reserved), or may reserve the extracted random number value and execute the time-saving winning/losing judgment process until the variable display of the special pattern begins, or may execute the time-saving winning/losing judgment process at the start of the variable display of the special pattern.

(Game state in which time-saving winning/losing judgment processing can be executed)
The time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be executed in any of the normal game state, the high-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability non-time-saving game state, and the time-saving game state, or may be executed only in a game state in which the time-saving control is not executed (for example, the normal game state, the high-probability non-time-saving game state, etc.). In addition, for example, a condition for executing the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be determined in advance, such as executing the time-saving winning/losing judgment process in any game state, or executing the time-saving winning/losing judgment process only in a specific game state, and the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be executed when the determined condition is satisfied.

(Mode of time-saving control)
The mode of time-saving control executed according to the type of jackpot and the mode of time-saving control executed according to the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be the same or different. For example, a first time-saving flag and a second time-saving flag may be prepared, and when the time-saving control is executed according to the type of jackpot, the first time-saving flag may be set to on, and when the time-saving control is executed based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process, the second time-saving flag may be set to on. In this case, when the first time-saving flag is set to on and when the second time-saving flag is set to on, it is preferable to execute time-saving control with different functions. For example, when the first time-saving flag is set to on, both the special chart shortening control and the electric support control are performed, and when the second time-saving flag is set to on, only one of the special chart shortening control and the electric support control is performed. Also, when the first time-saving flag is set to on, the first time-saving game state is controlled in which only the special chart shortening control is performed among the special chart shortening control and the electric support control, and when the second time-saving flag is set to on, the second time-saving game state is controlled in which only the electric support control is performed among the special chart shortening control and the electric support control. However, which of the multiple time-saving flags is set to on is not limited to the above, and may be determined based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process, for example, or may be determined according to the game state when the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is executed.

(Number of time-saving times set when time-saving hits)
It is preferable that the number of time-saving times to be set when the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is "time-saving winning/losing", is determined according to the game state when the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, when multiple random numbers for time-saving winning/losing judgment are specified as time-saving winning/losing judgment value data, the number of time-saving times to be set may be determined according to the extracted random numbers for time-saving winning/losing judgment instead of or in addition to the game state when the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed. For example, when the random number for time-saving winning/losing judgment extracted based on the entry of a game ball into the starting hole is the first time-saving winning/losing judgment value data, the number of time-saving times is determined to be "100", and when it is the second time-saving winning/losing judgment value data, the number of time-saving times is determined to be "50".

In addition, the time-saving winning/losing determination process may be executed even in a game state where time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state, a time-saving game state, etc.), and if the result of this time-saving winning/losing determination process is a "time-saving winning," the main CPU may set the number of time-saving times determined based on the "time-saving winning" in place of the remaining number of time-saving times (i.e., reset the remaining number of time-saving times). In this case, the degree of benefit to the player changes depending on whether the newly set number of time-saving times is more or less than the remaining number of time-saving times, thereby expanding the scope of gameplay, and making the time-saving game state where the time-saving flag is on more interesting and increasing interest.

In addition, the time-saving win/loss determination process may be executed even in a game state in which time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state, a time-saving game state, etc.), and if the result of this time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win," the main CPU may add the number of time-saving times determined based on the "time-saving win" to the remaining number of time-saving times. In this case, the number of time-saving times will never be less than the current remaining number of time-saving times, allowing the player to play with peace of mind in a game state in which time-saving control is executed.

In addition, the time-saving win/loss determination process may be executed even in a game state in which time-saving control is executed (e.g., a high-probability time-saving game state, a time-saving game state, etc.), and if the result of this time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win," the main CPU may predetermine one of two processes: a process of replacing the remaining number of time-saving wins with the number of time-saving wins determined based on the "time-saving win" and setting it as a new number, or a process of adding the number of time-saving wins determined based on the "time-saving win" to the remaining number of time-saving wins, and set the number of time-saving wins in a manner that satisfies the predetermine condition.

In addition, in a pachinko game machine in which a time-saving control having a different function is executed when the first time-saving flag is set to on and when the second time-saving flag is set to on, if the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is a "time-saving winning", the main CPU may change the process of setting the number of time-saving times depending on whether the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "time-saving winning" are time-saving controls of the same function or different functions. For example, if the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "time-saving winning" are time-saving controls of the same function, the number of time-saving times determined based on the "time-saving winning" may be added to the remaining number of time-saving times, and if the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "time-saving winning" are time-saving controls of different functions, the number of time-saving times determined based on the "time-saving winning" may be newly set (i.e., the remaining number of time-saving times may be reset) instead of the remaining number of time-saving times being executed. In addition, if the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "time-saving hit" are time-saving controls with different functions, the time-saving control based on the "time-saving hit" may be executed after all remaining times of the time-saving being executed have been consumed.

When the number of time-saving times is set based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process being "time-saving winning", the number of time-saving times may be set to "0". In other words, if the number of time-saving times to be set is determined to be "0", the time-saving flag is set to on even though the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is "time-saving winning". Also, if the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process performed during the execution of time-saving control is "time-saving winning" and the number of time-saving times is set to "0", the time-saving control being executed will end.

(Time-saving control start timing)
The timing for starting the time-saving control, which is executed based on the result of the time-saving hit/loss determination process being a "time-saving hit," can be the end of the special symbol game. For example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, the time-saving control can be started based on the passage of the special symbol determination time during which the special symbol is determined. Also, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit, the time-saving control can be started based on the end of the small hit game control process. Also, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the time-saving control can be started based on the end of the big hit game control process.

When the start timing of the time-saving control, which is executed based on the result of the time-saving hit/miss determination process being a "time-saving hit", is the end of the special pattern game, and the time-saving hit/miss determination process is performed prior to the special pattern hit determination process in the same frame, even if the result of the time-saving hit/miss determination process is a "time-saving hit", if the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a jackpot, it is preferable to invalidate the "time-saving hit" (the time-saving flag is not set on based on the "time-saving hit") and set the time-saving flag on based on the hit time selection pattern command (the time-saving flag may not be set on depending on the type of jackpot).

In addition, the start timing of the time-saving control, which is executed based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process being a "time-saving winning/losing win," is not limited to the end of the special symbol game. For example, if the time-saving winning/losing determination process is executed prior to the special symbol winning/losing determination process in the same frame, the time-saving control may be started immediately (before the special symbol winning/losing determination process is executed) based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process. In this case, the game state (i.e., whether or not the time-saving control is executed) may differ between the time when the random number value used in the time-saving winning/losing determination process is extracted and the time when the time-saving winning/losing determination process is executed, which can increase interest.

Furthermore, the timing for starting the time-saving control, which is executed based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process being a "time-saving winning" may be after a predetermined number of games have been played. In this case, after the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process is a "time-saving winning" and before the time-saving control starts, the sub-CPU can execute a teasing performance as to whether or not the time-saving control will start, which can increase interest.

In the third pachinko game machine, when the jackpot game control is executed based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol being a jackpot (a jackpot for which time-saving control is executed), the time-saving control based on the jackpot may be started based on the end of the jackpot game control. Also, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a role-opening hit (a role-opening hit for which time-saving control is executed) and the jackpot game control is executed because the passage of the game ball into the V winning hole 2155 is detected when the V attacker 2152 is opened, the time-saving control may be started based on the end of the jackpot game control. In addition, if the result of the time-saving hit/miss determination process is a "time-saving hit" and the result of the special pattern hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 68) is a hit to open the special device, and therefore the V attacker 2152 opens, but the passage of the game ball into the V winning hole 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game control is not executed, the main CPU may start time-saving control based on the "time-saving hit" based on the opening/closing winning hole 2151 being closed.

(End timing of time-saving game mode)
The timing at which the time-saving game state ends is, for example, "when, in a game state in which time-saving control is being executed, a variable display of a special pattern is executed for a set number of time-saving times,""when, in a game state in which time-saving control is being executed, the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state based on the result of a special pattern hit determination process," or "when the number of time-saving times is set to 0 even though the result of the time-saving hit/loss determination process is a time-saving hit," etc.

In addition, if a small win game control process is executed based on the results of the special symbol hit determination process during a game state in which time-saving control is executed, time-saving control will continue to be executed even after the small win game control process ends.

In the third pachinko game machine, if the opening and closing winning hole 2151 is opened when the special symbol hit determination process derives a stopped symbol pattern indicating a jackpot opening hit during the execution of the time-saving control, but the passage of the game ball into the V winning hole 2155 is not detected when the V attacker 2152 opens, and the jackpot game control process is not started, the main CPU 2201 continues to execute the time-saving control even after the opening and closing winning hole 2151 is closed.

(Rewrite the number of time-saving times)
A time-saving win/loss determination process is executed in a game state in which time-saving control is executed (e.g., a high-probability time-saving game state, a time-saving game state, etc.), and if the result of this time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win," the main CPU may rewrite the number of time-saving times, or may not rewrite the number of time-saving times (i.e., execute the time-saving control until the number of time-saving times in the currently executing time-saving control has been exhausted).

When rewriting the number of time-saving times, the main CPU may rewrite (set) the number of time-saving times determined based on the "time-saving hit" when the number of time-saving times in the currently running time-saving control has been consumed, or may set it when the special pattern hit determination process is executed, or may set it when the variable display of the special pattern starts or stops, or may set it during the time-saving hit/loss determination process, and may set it at various times. When setting it during the time-saving hit/loss determination process, the number of time-saving times determined based on the "time-saving hit" will overwrite the number of time-saving times in the currently running time-saving control. Also, it may be set in advance to either "rewrite the number of time-saving times" or "add to the previous number of time-saving times," and the number of time-saving times may be set in a manner that satisfies this predetermined condition.

(Time-saving hit probability)
When the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed based on the winning of a game ball into the first start port or the second start port, the time-saving winning/losing judgment process performed based on the winning of a game ball into the first start port (hereinafter referred to as the "first time-saving winning/losing judgment process") and the time-saving winning/losing judgment process performed based on the winning of a game ball into the second start port (hereinafter referred to as the "second time-saving winning/losing judgment process") may have different winning probabilities for time-saving. For example, the winning probability for time-saving when the second time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed may be higher than the winning probability for time-saving when the first time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed, the winning probability for time-saving when the first time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed may be higher than the winning probability for time-saving when the second time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed, or the winning probability for time-saving when the first time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed may be the same or approximately the same as the winning probability for time-saving when the second time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed.

(Displaying the results of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process)
A time-saving winning/losing judgment result display unit that displays the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process (whether the time-saving winning/losing is a winning or losing) and/or a winning number of time-saving times display unit that displays the number of time-saving times determined based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process (whether the time-saving winning/losing is a winning) may be provided. The time-saving winning/losing judgment result display unit and/or the winning number of time-saving times display unit may be provided in an LED display group that includes a special pattern display unit or the like, and may be controlled by the main CPU. However, instead of or in addition to this, the sub-CPU may display the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process and/or the number of time-saving times determined based on the winning of the time-saving on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device.

(interval)
When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss and the result of the time-saving hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the main CPU may make the interval time after stopping the variable display of the special symbol in the game longer than the above-mentioned interval time when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss and the result of the time-saving hit determination process is a "time-saving miss." Note that, since the variable display of the decorative symbol is synchronized with the variable display of the special symbol, in this case, it is preferable that the sub-CPU displays an effect image indicating a "time-saving hit" on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device until the above-mentioned interval time has elapsed.

In addition, in the third pachinko game machine, when the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a hit to open the special feature and the jackpot game control process is not executed based on this hit to open the special feature, the main CPU 2201 may set the interval time after the end of the operation related to the hit to open the special feature when the result of the time-saving hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" longer than the above-mentioned interval time when the result of the time-saving hit determination process is a "time-saving miss", or may set it to the same or approximately the same time.

[4-3. Examples of extensions related to management of game media]
The first, second and third pachinko game machines described in this specification can be applied to all gaming machines in which a game is played using a gaming medium and a bonus (e.g., prize balls, prize data, etc.) is awarded based on the result of the game. In other words, not only can the game be played by shooting or inserting a gaming medium (e.g., a gaming ball, a medal, etc.) by a physical action of a player, and the gaming medium is paid out based on the result of the game, but the main control circuit itself can electromagnetically manage the gaming medium held by the player and enable a game to be played by circulating the enclosed gaming balls or a medal-less game. In addition, the electromagnetic management of the gaming medium held by the player can be a gaming medium management device that is attached (connected) to the main control circuit and manages the gaming medium.

In the case of gaming machines that circulate enclosed gaming balls, the gaming balls serving as gaming media are configured to be playable without being discharged to the outside, so that when a prize is won, prize ball data is awarded as a gaming medium instead of prize balls being paid out. In this specification, "paid-out gaming value" includes both prize balls and prize ball data. For example, if 15 prize balls are won in a prize slot, in the case of an enclosed gaming machine, prize ball data with a value corresponding to 15 prize balls is awarded. Furthermore, the gaming value is not necessarily limited to prize balls or prize ball data, and may be anything equivalent to prize balls or prize ball data.

In addition, when the game media are managed by a game media management device connected to the main control circuit, the game media management device is a device having a ROM and RWM (or RAM) and installed in the game machine, and is connected to an external game media handling device (not shown) via a specified interface with a two-way communication function, and can perform the operation of lending game media (i.e., the operation of providing game media necessary for the player to insert game media), or the operation of paying out game media when a winning combination related to the payout of game media is won (the winning combination is established) (i.e., the operation of making the player acquire the game media necessary for the payout of game media), or the operation of electromagnetically recording game media used for play. In addition, the game media management device can not only manage the actual number of game media, but also, for example, a game media number display device (not shown) that displays the number of game media held on the front of the pachinko game machine based on the management results of the game media number, and can manage the number of game media displayed on this game media number display device. In other words, the gaming media management device should be able to electromagnetically record and display the total number of gaming media that a player can use for gaming.

In this case, the gaming media management device has the capability to allow the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded gaming media to an external gaming media handling device, and also has the capability to prevent the number of recorded gaming media from being reduced except by direct operation by the player, and if an external connection terminal board (not shown) is provided between the device and the external gaming media handling device, it is desirable that the device has the capability to prevent the player from transmitting a signal indicating the number of recorded gaming media except through the external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the gaming machine is provided with a loan operation means, a return (settlement) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player, and the gaming medium handling device may be provided with an insertion slot for valuables such as bills, an insertion slot for recording media (e.g., IC cards), a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money from a mobile terminal, and various other operation means such as a loan operation means and a return operation means, and an external connection terminal board on the gaming medium handling device side (all not shown).

In this case, the game flow is as follows: the player deposits a value into the game media handling device by any method, subtracts a predetermined amount of value by operating any of the above-mentioned lending operation means, and increases the game media corresponding to the subtracted value from the game media handling device to the game media management device. The player then plays the game, and repeats the above operation if more game media are required. After that, the player acquires a predetermined number of game media as a result of the game, and when the game ends, the player operates any of the return operation means to transmit the number of game media from the game media management device to the game media handling device, and the game media handling device ejects a recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. When the game media number is transmitted, the game media management device clears the number of game media stored in itself. The player takes the ejected recording medium to a prize counter or the like to exchange it for a prize, or moves to another game machine to play based on the game media recorded on another machine.

In the above example, all game media were sent to the game media handling device, but the game machine or game media handling device may send only the number of game media desired by the player, and the game media owned by the player may be divided and processed. Also, instead of just discharging the recording medium, cash or cash equivalents may be dispensed, or the media may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. The game media handling device may also be capable of inserting a member recording medium of the amusement center, and the media may be stored in the member recording medium so that it can be played again at a later date.

In addition, in the gaming machine or gaming media handling device, a locking operation may be performed to lock the gaming media or valuable data communication to the gaming media handling device or gaming media management device by operating a specified operating means (not shown). In this case, information that only the player can know, such as a one-time password, may be set, and the player may be recorded by an imaging means provided in the gaming media handling device.

In addition, the above describes the application of the gaming media management device to a pachinko gaming machine, but gaming media management devices can also be installed in pachislot machines, slot machines that use gaming balls, and sealed gaming machines to manage the gaming media of players.

In this way, by providing the gaming medium management device described above, it is possible to reduce the number of parts inside the gaming machine compared to when the gaming medium is physically provided for play, and not only can the cost and manufacturing costs of the gaming machine be reduced, but it is also possible to prevent the player from directly touching the gaming medium, improving the gaming environment and reducing noise, and the reduction in parts also reduces the power consumption of the gaming machine. It is also possible to prevent fraudulent activities via the gaming medium and the gaming medium insertion and payout slots. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve the various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

In addition, when the present invention is applied to a gaming system having an enclosed gaming machine configured so that gaming media can be played without being ejected to the outside, and a gaming media management device connected to the gaming machine so that data regarding increases and decreases in gaming media associated with consumption, lending, and dispensing of gaming media can be sent and received by optical signals via a communication cable, the gaming system may be configured as follows.

The outline of the enclosed gaming machine is explained below. In the enclosed gaming machine, the launching device is located above the game area and launches the game balls as the game medium from above into the game area. When the player operates the handle, the payout control circuit drives the ball feed solenoid, and the ball feed pestle pushes the waiting game ball toward the launching pad. This moves the game ball to the launching pad. In addition, a subtraction sensor is provided on the path from the waiting position to the launching pad to detect the game ball moving to the launching pad. When the subtraction sensor detects the game ball, the number of balls held is subtracted by one. In this way, since the enclosed gaming machine is configured to launch the game balls as the game medium from above into the game area, it is possible to avoid so-called return balls (foul balls). Then, the game balls discharged from the game area after rolling in the game area are polished by the ball polishing device. The game balls polished by the ball polishing device are transported upward by the lifting device and guided to the launching device. The game balls are not discharged outside the enclosed game machine, but are configured so that a certain number of game balls (for example, 50 balls) circulate through a series of paths in the game machine. Alternatively, instead of providing a ball polishing device, a discharge mechanism that discharges game balls outside the game machine and a take-in mechanism that takes in the game balls that have been polished outside the game machine into the game machine may be provided. In this case, the take-in mechanism may be provided with a gutter dedicated to take-in, or may be configured to take in the balls from a winning hole provided in the game area.

In an enclosed gaming machine, the game balls are not discharged to the outside of the gaming machine, so there is no upper or lower tray for temporarily holding the game balls. In an enclosed gaming machine, the game balls are not actually in the player's hands, and the number of game balls does not actually increase or decrease as the player plays. In an enclosed gaming machine, the player starts playing after obtaining balls by loaning them from a gaming medium management device. Here, obtaining balls means that the player obtains gaming media for data management purposes. Then, the balls are consumed by the launching device when the game balls are launched, and the number of balls in hand decreases. In addition, when the game balls pass through each winning hole or the like provided in the playing area, the number of balls in hand is paid out according to the conditions set for each winning hole, and the number of balls in hand increases. Furthermore, the number of balls in hand increases by loaning them from the gaming medium management device. In addition, for example, when the game ends and all or a part of the balls are integrated into the game value managed by the game media management device by clearing all of the game value (i.e., the balls in hand) stored in the enclosed game machine, or by performing an operation to transmit some of the balls in hand to the game media management device, the game value stored in the enclosed game machine is subtracted or cleared, and the number of balls in hand is reduced. Furthermore, although there is no concept of foul balls in a game machine in which game balls are shot from above the game area, foul balls may occur when game balls are shot from below as in conventional game machines. Therefore, in the case of a game machine in which game balls are shot from below, the number of balls in hand increases or decreases depending on whether or not a foul ball occurs. Note that "consumption, lending, and payout of game media" refers to consumption, lending, and payout of balls in hand. Also, "increase or decrease in game media" refers to the increase or decrease in the number of balls in hand due to consumption, lending, and payout. In addition, "data regarding the increase and decrease in game media due to consumption, lending, and payout of game media" refers to data regarding the decrease in balls held due to game balls being fired, and the increase in balls held due to lending and payout.

The enclosed gaming machine has a payout control circuit and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors that detect the passage of gaming balls through each winning hole, etc. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a gaming ball passes through each winning hole, the number of game balls paid out as a result is added to the number of balls held. Also, when a gaming ball is released, the number of balls held is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data regarding the number of balls held to a gaming media management device by the player's operation. Also, the above-mentioned liquid crystal display device is located at the top of the gaming machine, and accepts requests to convert the gaming value managed by the gaming media management device to balls held (ball lending) and to count the number of balls held (return). Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the gaming media management device, and the payout control circuit instructs the payout control circuit to transmit data regarding the current number of balls held to the gaming media management device. Here, "game value" refers to currency/paper money, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, etc., which can be converted into balls by the game media management device. In this embodiment, the game media management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to be able to accept paper money, prepaid media, etc. Furthermore, the counted balls can be used for prize exchange, etc., in the game center where the game system is installed.

The enclosed gaming machine also has a backup power supply. This allows the data immediately prior to the power being turned off to be retained even if the power is turned off at night, etc. This backup power supply may also be used to, for example, continue to detect the opening of the door frame using a door opening sensor. This also makes it possible to prevent fraudulent activities at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be stored. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be output to a liquid crystal display device or the like of the gaming machine.

Enclosed gaming machines are only required to be configured so that players cannot touch the gaming balls. For example, machines that do not circulate gaming balls in an island facility but circulate them only in the gaming machine itself, and machines that circulate gaming balls in an island facility but do not allow players to touch them are also included in enclosed gaming machines.

The gaming media management device has a gaming machine connection board. The gaming media management device is configured to transmit and receive data (transmission signals) to and from the gaming machine via the gaming machine connection board. The transmitted and received data is information such as the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the gaming machine manufacturer code stored in the gaming machine, the security chip manufacturer code, and the gaming machine model code. Then, with either the gaming machine or the gaming media management device as the source and the other as the destination, when the source transmits a transmission signal, the destination that receives the transmission signal transmits a confirmation signal that is the same as the transmission signal to the source, and the source compares the transmission signal with the confirmation signal to determine whether they are the same or not.

In this way, the source of transmission can compare the confirmation signal sent from the destination with the transmission signal to determine whether they are identical, thereby confirming that the signal sent from the source of transmission has been sent to the source without being tampered with. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent activities such as tampering with the transmitted and received signals between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device.

In addition, in the gaming system, the source may have a modulation unit that modulates a signal and transmits the signal modulated by the modulation unit as the transmission signal, and the destination may have a demodulation unit that demodulates the signal modulated by the modulation unit.

As a result, even if the signals transmitted between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device are read, it is difficult to decipher these signals, and fraudulent activities such as tampering with the signals transmitted between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device can be prevented.

In addition, in the gaming system, when the destination receives the transmission signal from the source, the destination may transmit an acknowledgment signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, to the source separately from the confirmation signal.

By comparing the transmission signal with the confirmation signal, it is possible to not only confirm that a legitimate signal has been sent and received, but also to confirm that a legitimate signal has been sent and received based on the approval signal, thereby further strengthening the prevention of fraudulent activities. Also, instead of directly connecting the main control circuit and the gaming media management device for communication, a frame control circuit may be provided between the main control circuit and the gaming media management device, and the main control circuit and the gaming media management device may be connected for communication via the frame control circuit. Also, a firing control circuit may be provided separately from the main control circuit, and a frame control circuit may be provided between the firing control circuit and the gaming media management device. In this case, error control of the main control circuit and the firing control circuit may be performed by the frame control circuit.

In addition, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel, the main CPU performs processing so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol do not stop at a symbol combination that indicates a jackpot symbol.

In more detail, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one of the special symbols stops in a symbol combination that indicates a jackpot symbol, the main CPU performs control to forcibly stop the other special symbol in a symbol combination that indicates a loss regardless of the result of the special lottery. When one of the special symbols stops in a symbol combination that indicates a jackpot symbol, as described above, the game transitions from the general game state to the jackpot game state, but in this jackpot game state, neither the start condition for the first special symbol nor the start condition for the second special symbol is met, and the main CPU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol.

In addition, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination that indicates a small win symbol, the main CPU suspends the measurement of the variable time of the other special symbol based on the transition from the general game state to the small win game state (stopping at a symbol combination that indicates a small win symbol), and resumes the measurement of the variable time of the other special symbol based on the transition from the small win game state to the general game state (end of the small win game). When one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination that indicates a small win symbol, the general game state transitions to the small win game state as described above, but in this small win game state, neither the start condition of the first special symbol nor the start condition of the second special symbol is met, and the main CPU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol. However, when both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are being displayed in a variable manner, if one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination that indicates a small win symbol, the main CPU will perform a variable display of the other special symbol that is being displayed in a similar manner to when it is being displayed in a variable manner, consisting of a group of LEDs, but as described above, timing of the variable time will be interrupted.

[4-4. Other extension examples]
In this specification, the first pachinko gaming machine, the second pachinko gaming machine, and the third pachinko gaming machine have been given as examples, but the technology described in this specification can be applied to other gaming machines, such as pachislot machines.

Regardless of whether the technology described in this specification is applied to a pachinko game machine or a pachislot, the effects involving a temporary stop of the symbols may include a temporary stop of the reels. Note that a "stop" of the symbols can be a permanent stop or a temporary stop, and the "stop" can be interpreted in either way. Furthermore, the operation by the player to play the game can be any of the following: operation of a lever, handle, button, etc., touch, etc.

In pachinko machines, the administrator of the machine may set the effects by operating the effect button, and the machine may be operated so that the player starts playing after the settings are made using the effect button. In this case, it is assumed that the operations by the administrator will ultimately be the operations by which the player plays the game. Similarly, in pachislot machines, it is assumed that the administrator plays a 2-bet game, and when the BB flag corresponding to the 2-bet game is established, the player plays a 3-bet game. In this case, although the player can play either a 2-bet game or a 3-bet game, the administrator of the machine may play the 2-bet game, and therefore the game played by the administrator (e.g., a 2-bet game, etc.) or the selection of the hall menu may be the operations by which the player plays the game.

In a pachinko game machine, the main CPU controls the player to inform them of whether they are hitting from the right or left, thereby managing the player's playing style, and if the player's playing style is not as intended, the sub-CPU may control the player to inform them of the unintended play, such as an error or warning.

In pachislot, the main CPU may control the player's playing method, such as the order in which the buttons are pressed (assist), but if the player's playing method is not as intended, the sub-CPU may control the player to issue an error, warning, or other notification that the play is unintended.

In pachinko machines, the main control board and payout control board are mounted on separate boards, but they may be on a single board. In pachislot machines, the payout control board may not exist, but the payout may be controlled by the main control board, or the board may be separated into the main control board and the payout control board.

Pachislot machines usually have a rectangular cabinet that houses various devices necessary for play, and a door that can be opened and closed relative to the cabinet, but the cabinet in a pachislot machine can be considered as the frame. In contrast, in a pachinko machine, the outer frame can be considered as the cabinet, the outer frame and base door can be considered as the cabinet, or the entire gaming machine consisting of the outer frame, base door, glass door and plate unit can be considered as the cabinet. Note that between the cabinet and the door, or between the frames and the doors, there may be a unit with various control boards, a middle frame, an intermediate part, etc., and various control boards, display means, decorative parts, gimmicks, etc. may be present in the door, frame, cabinet, etc.

[5. First embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine]
Next, the fourth pachinko game machine will be described. The fourth pachinko game machine has a first embodiment and a second embodiment, and both embodiments are pachinko game machines called one-type two-type mixed machines, like the third pachinko game machine. The first embodiment and the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine have different basic specifications of playability compared to the third pachinko game machine, and therefore the configurations of various members arranged in the play area are partially different.

The first and second embodiments of the fourth pachinko gaming machine are priority variable machines in which the first and second special symbols are not displayed in parallel, and the starting conditions for the second special symbol are established with priority over the starting conditions for the first special symbol, just like the third pachinko gaming machine. However, this is not limited to this, and the machine may be a sequential variable machine as described above.

First, a first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine will be explained, followed by a second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. Hereinafter, in explaining the first and second embodiments of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the same components as those in the first pachinko gaming machine will be given the same reference numerals and step numbers, and detailed explanations of their configurations and processing will be omitted.

<First embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine>
[5-1. Game board unit]
The game board unit 3010 of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine will be described with reference to Fig. 108. This game board unit 3010 is also disposed in front of the base door 3 (see Fig. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see Fig. 2) like the first pachinko game machine.

Figure 108 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 3010 provided in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. The game board unit 3010 has a game panel 3100 on which various components are arranged, and a game area 105 is formed on the front side of the game panel 3100 in which the released game balls can roll and flow down.

As shown in FIG. 108, the game board unit 3010 of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine differs from the first pachinko gaming machine mainly in the configuration and arrangement of the first passing gate 3126A, the second passing gate 3126B, the first starting hole 3120, the second starting hole 3140, the normal electric role unit 3145, the special electric role unit 3130, and the V winning device 3150. The configuration and arrangement of each of these are explained below.

(First Passage Gate)
The first passing gate 3126A is disposed below the display area of the display device 7, and is disposed so that a game ball hit from the left can pass through it (a game ball hit from the right has difficulty or cannot pass through it). The first passing gate 3126A is provided with a first passing gate switch 3127A (see FIG. 109 described later) that detects the passage of a game ball through the first passing gate 3126A.

(Second Passage Gate)
The second passage gate 3126B is disposed below the normal electric role unit 3145 described later in the right side area 107, and is disposed so that only game balls hit from the right side can pass through. The second passage gate 3126B is provided with a second passage gate switch 3127B (see FIG. 109 described later) that detects the passage of the game ball through the second passage gate 3126B.

When a game ball passes through the first passing gate 3126A or the second passing gate 3126B (hereinafter also referred to as "passing gates 3126A, 3126B" as appropriate), a normal symbol lottery or a variable display of normal symbols is performed. Note that in this embodiment, even if a game ball passes through the passing gates 3126A, 3126B, no prize balls are paid out, but a predetermined prize ball (for example, one game ball) may be paid out.

The passing gates 3126A and 3126B may also function as a trigger for activating a consecutive operation device for special devices. Assuming that the condition device is in operation, the passing of a game ball through the passing gates 3126A and 3126B may activate the consecutive operation device for special devices, and transition to a jackpot game state.

The same applies to the passage gate 126 of the first pachinko gaming machine and the passage gate 2126 of the third pachinko gaming machine described above.

(First starting point)
The first starting hole 3120 is disposed in the direction of travel of the game ball that has passed through the first passing gate 3126A (i.e., directly below the first passing gate 3126A) and is disposed close to and separated by a distance of approximately one game ball from the first passing gate 3126A. Furthermore, the first starting hole 3120 is disposed so that game nails or the like make it difficult for game balls other than those that have passed through the first passing gate 3126A to enter the hole.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 3120, a special pattern lottery will be held, the first special pattern will be displayed variably, and a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., three game balls) will be paid out.

In this embodiment, the distance between the first starting opening 3120 and the first passing gate 3126A is set to the distance of approximately one game ball, but it may be set to the distance of approximately one or two game balls. In principle, the shorter the distance between the first starting opening 3120 and the first passing gate 3126A, the better, but in order to make the functions of the first starting opening 3120 and the first passing gate 3126A independent of each other, it is desirable to leave a distance of at least one game ball between the first starting opening 3120 and the first passing gate 3126A.

In this way, by positioning the first starting hole 3120 directly below and adjacent to the first passing gate 3126A, the game ball that passes through the first passing gate 3126A immediately enters the first starting hole 3120, and it is possible to coordinate the start time of the variable display of the normal pattern triggered by the game ball passing through the first passing gate 3126A and the start time of the variable display of the special pattern triggered by the game ball entering the first starting hole 3120 (the variable display can start at approximately the same time).

In addition, by positioning the first starting hole 3120 so that it is difficult for any ball other than the game ball that has passed through the first passing gate 3126A to enter the hole, it is possible to prevent an event in which only the variable display of special symbols is performed while the variable display of normal symbols is not performed, and it is possible to operate the variable display of special symbols triggered by the game ball entering the first starting hole 3120 and the variable display of normal symbols triggered by the game ball passing through the first passing gate 3126A as a set.

(Second starting hole)
The second starting hole 3140 is positioned so that a game ball hit from the right can enter the hole (but it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit from the left to enter the hole).

When a game ball enters the second starting hole 3140, a special pattern lottery will be held, a second special pattern will be displayed variably, and a specified prize ball (for example, one game ball) will be paid out.

(Normal electric role unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 3145 is a unit body that integrates a winning hole into which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when game balls enter the winning hole, a switch that detects the entry of game balls into the winning hole, and a normal electric accessory 3146, and is disposed in the right area 107. In this embodiment, the winning hole is the second start hole 3140, and the switch is the second start hole switch 3141.

The normal electric device 3146 is equipped with a protruding plate-type normal power shutter 3147 that can move forward and backward, and a normal power solenoid 3148 (see FIG. 109 described below) that operates the normal power shutter 3147. The normal electric device 3146, i.e., the normal power shutter 3147, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy to insert a game ball into the second starting hole 3140, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to insert a game ball into the second starting hole 3140.

Specifically, the normal power shutter 3147 is composed of a substantially triangular ball entry prevention section disposed in front of the entrance of the second starting port 3140 and a plate-shaped ball entry guidance section inclined toward the second starting port 3140. When the normal power shutter 3147 is in the open state, the substantially triangular ball entry prevention section protrudes a distance equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball from the surface of the game panel 3100, so as not to impede the game ball from entering the second starting port 3140, and the plate-shaped ball entry guidance section protrudes a distance smaller than the diameter of the game ball from the surface of the game panel 3100 to receive the game ball flowing down to the right side area 107 and guide the received game ball to the second starting port 3140. On the other hand, when the normal power shutter 3147 is in the closed state, the approximately triangular ball entry prevention part protrudes a distance smaller than the diameter of the game ball from the surface of the game panel 3100 to prevent the game ball from entering the second starting hole 3140, and the plate-shaped ball entry guide part is embedded in the surface of the game panel 3100, and does not accept the game ball flowing down to the right side area 107, but allows it to flow downward. Note that instead of the normal power shutter 3147 that can move forward and backward, a movable member called a so-called electric chute may be used.

(Special electric feature unit)
The special electric accessory unit 3130 is a unit body that integrates a large prize opening 3131, a large prize opening count switch 3132 (see FIG. 109 described later) that detects the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 3131, and a special electric accessory 3133. The special electric accessory unit 3130 is disposed at the lower part in the right side area 107.

The large prize opening 3131 is located in the right area 107 so that game balls hit from the right can enter (game balls hit from the left have difficulty or cannot enter). However, this is not limited to this, and a large prize opening that can enter game balls hit from the left may be located, or a large prize opening that can enter game balls may be located above the center device 115.

The big prize opening 3131 is an opening that opens to allow up to a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) to enter when the machine is controlled to a big win game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. When a game ball enters this big prize opening 3131, a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., 10 game balls) will be paid out.

The big prize opening 3131 transitions from a closed state to an open state in the first route when the result of the special symbol hit determination process derives a stop display mode indicating a "big prize", and in the second route when the V attacker 3152 opens due to the result of the special symbol determination deriving a stop display mode indicating a "gimmick opening hit", and the game ball that enters the opened V attacker 3152 enters the V prize opening within the V attacker 3152.

The special electric device 3133 is equipped with a special electric shutter 3134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 3135 (see FIG. 109 described below) that operates the special electric shutter 3134. The special electric device 3133, i.e., the special electric shutter 3134, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the large prize opening 3131, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the large prize opening 3131.

Specifically, the special electric shutter 3134 is composed of an opening and closing door with a pivot support at the bottom. When the special electric shutter 3134 is in the open state, the opening and closing door falls to the front side, opening the large prize opening 3131, receiving game balls flowing down into the right side area 107 and guiding the received game balls to the large prize opening 3131. On the other hand, when the special electric shutter 3134 is in the closed state, the opening and closing door is inverted to close the large prize opening 3131, making it impossible or difficult for game balls to enter the large prize opening 3131.

(V prize device)
The V winning device 3150 is provided downstream of the normal electric role unit 3145 in the right area 107. The V winning device 3150 includes an opening and closing winning port 3151 that is opened to allow game balls to enter the inside of the V winning device 3150, a V attacker 3152 that can open and close the opening and closing winning port 3151, a V attacker solenoid 3154 that activates the V attacker 3152 to open and close the opening and closing winning port 3151, a V attacker count switch 3153 that detects the entry of game balls into the opening and closing winning port 3151, and a game ball count switch 3154 that detects the entry of game balls into the V winning device 3150 from the opening and closing winning port 3151. The V winning port 3155 through which the game ball can pass, a V winning port switch 3156 that detects that the game ball has passed through the V winning port 3155, a loss port 3157 through which the game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 3150 from the opening and closing winning port 3151 but have not entered the V winning port 3155 can pass, a V shutter 3158 that opens and closes the V winning port 3155, and a V shutter solenoid 3159 that operates the V shutter 3158 to open and close the V winning port 3155. The V winning device 3150 may be provided upstream of the normal electric role unit 3145, or may be provided in the left area 106.

The V attacker 3152 is made of a protruding plate-shaped member that can move forward and backward, and is configured to be able to move between a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to insert a game ball into the opening and closing winning opening 3151 by advancing the V attacker 3152 forward, and an open state in which it is possible or easy to insert a game ball into the opening and closing winning opening 3151 by retracting the V attacker 3152 backward.

The opening and closing winning opening 3151 is a winning opening that is opened by the operation of the V Attacker 3152 when a "hit is made on the opening of the device", and up to a predetermined number of game balls (e.g. 10 balls) can enter each time it is opened. When a game ball enters this opening and closing winning opening 3151, the value of the V Attacker winning counter is incremented, and a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g. 10 game balls) are paid out.

V winning hole 3155 is a winning hole that triggers control to a jackpot game state via the second route described above, provided that a game ball passes through it within a predetermined time (e.g., 4000 msec) after V attacker 3152 opens.

When the game is controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route, the opening of the V Attacker 3152 when the game ball passes through the V winning port 3155 is counted as the first round, and after the game ball passes through the V winning port 3155 (from the second round onwards), a round game is executed in which the large winning port 3131 transitions from a closed state to an open state. Note that when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route, a round game in which the V Attacker 2152 transitions from a closed state to an open state may be executed for a predetermined number of rounds even after the game ball passes through the V winning port 3155 (from the second round onwards) so that the opening control of the V Attacker 2152 is continued.

In addition, for example, by providing a V entry port inside the special electric device 3133 (i.e., the area where the game ball can enter when the special electric shutter 3134 is in the open state), it is possible to have one V entry port and one attacker that is opened in the jackpot game state. In this case, when a stop display mode indicating a "game device open hit" is derived, the special electric shutter 3134 is opened, and when a game ball enters the V entry port 3155 provided inside the special electric device 3133, control is performed to the jackpot game state (jackpot game state via the second route).

The losing port 3157 is configured to allow game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 3150 but have not passed through the V winning port 3155 to enter (pass through). Game balls that pass through the losing port 3157 are ejected outside the machine. Note that if all game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 3150 pass through the losing port 3157 and no game balls pass through the V winning port 3155, the game ends without being controlled to a jackpot game state.

The V shutter 3158 operates between a closed state in which it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 3155, and an open state in which it is possible (or easy) for the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 3155, by the operation of the V shutter solenoid 3159 (see FIG. 109 described below).

[5-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 109. Fig. 109 is an example of a block diagram showing the control circuit of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 109, the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, like the first pachinko game machine, is mainly composed of a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 300 that controls the presentation according to the progress of the game, a payout/launch control circuit 400, and a power supply circuit 450.

However, the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine differs from the first pachinko gaming machine in the configuration of the devices connected to the main control circuit 200. Specifically, the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine differs in the configuration of the normal power solenoid 3148, the special power solenoid 3135, the V attacker solenoid 3154, the V shutter solenoid 3159, the first start port switch 3121, the second start port switch 3141, the first passing gate switch 3127A, the second passing gate switch 3127B, the big prize port count switch 3132, the V attacker count switch 3153, and the V prize port switch 3156. The configuration and arrangement of each of these are described below.

In addition, the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine does not execute the probability bonus control, and therefore does not have the probability bonus notification display unit 167 of the first pachinko gaming machine. Furthermore, as described below, the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine does not have a reservation function that reserves the start information of normal symbols and special symbols up to a predetermined number, and therefore does not have the reservation display unit 162 for normal symbols, the reservation display unit 165 for the first special symbol, or the reservation display unit 166 for the second special symbol of the first pachinko gaming machine.

(Solenoid for general purpose)
The normal power solenoid 3148 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the normal power shutter 3147. When the normal power solenoid 3148 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it advances the normal power shutter 3147 forward to open the second starting port 3140, and when it is not energized (OFF) by the main CPU 201, it retreats the normal power shutter 3147 backward to close the second starting port 3140.

(Special power solenoid)
The special power solenoid 3135 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the special power shutter 3134, which is an opening and closing door. When the main CPU 201 applies electricity to the special power solenoid 3135 (ON), the special power shutter 3134 is tilted forward to open the large prize opening 3131, and when the main CPU 201 does not apply electricity to the special power solenoid 3135 (OFF), the special power shutter 3134 is inverted backward to close the large prize opening 3131.

(Solenoid for V-Attacker)
The V attacker solenoid 3154 is an electromagnetic solenoid that activates the V attacker 3152. When the V attacker solenoid 3154 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it moves the V attacker 3152 backwards and opens the opening/closing winning hole 3151, and when it is not energized (OFF) by the main CPU 201, it moves the V attacker 3152 forward and closes the opening/closing winning hole 3151.

(Solenoid for V shutter)
The V shutter solenoid 3159 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the V shutter 3158. When the V shutter solenoid 3159 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it moves the V shutter 3158 backwards to open the V winning opening 3155, and when it is not energized (OFF) by the main CPU 201, it moves the V shutter 3158 forwards to close the V winning opening 3155. In this embodiment, the V shutter solenoid 3159 is activated 200 msec after the opening of the opening/closing winning opening 3151 to open the V winning opening 3155. In other words, the V winning opening 3155 is opened 200 msec after the opening/closing winning opening 3151 is opened.

(First start switch)
The first start hole switch 3121 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 3120. When the first start hole switch 3121 detects the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 3120, the main CPU 201 extracts start information of the first special symbol, and uses the extracted start information of the special symbol in a winning determination process of the first special symbol, performs a variable display process of the first special symbol, and instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform a payout process of a predetermined prize ball (for example, three game balls).

(Second start switch)
The second start hole switch 3141 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 3140. When the second start hole switch 3141 detects the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 3140, the main CPU 201 extracts start information of the second special symbol, and uses the extracted start information of the special symbol in a winning determination process of the second special symbol, performs a variable display process of the second special symbol, or instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform a payout process of a predetermined prize ball (for example, one game ball).

(First pass gate switch)
The first passing gate switch 3127A is a through-type proximity switch that detects the passage of a gaming ball through the first passing gate 3126A. When the first passing gate switch 3127A detects the passage of a gaming ball through the first passing gate 3126A, the main CPU 201 extracts start information of the normal symbol, and uses the extracted start information of the normal symbol in a winning determination process of the normal symbol, or performs a variable display process of the normal symbol.

(Second pass gate switch)
The second passing gate switch 3127B is a through-type proximity switch that detects the passage of a gaming ball through the second passing gate 3126B. When the second passing gate switch 3127B detects the passage of a gaming ball through the second passing gate 3126B, the main CPU 201 extracts start information of the normal pattern, and uses the extracted start information of the normal pattern in a winning determination process of the normal pattern, or performs a variable display process of the normal pattern.

The same winning determination process for the normal symbol is performed regardless of whether the first pass gate switch 3127A detects the passage of a game ball through the first pass gate 3126A or the second pass gate switch 3127B detects the passage of a game ball through the second pass gate 3126B. Also, even if the first pass gate switch 3127A or the second pass gate switch 3127B (hereinafter also referred to as "pass gate switches 3127A, 3127B" as appropriate) detects the passage of a game ball through the pass gates 3126A, 3126B, no prize balls are paid out.

(Big prize slot count switch)
The large prize opening count switch 3132 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 3131. When the large prize opening count switch 3132 detects the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 3131, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls that enter per round and instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of a predetermined prize ball (for example, 10 game balls).

(V attacker count switch)
The V attacker count switch 3153 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the opening/closing winning hole 3151. When the V attacker count switch 3153 detects the entry of a game ball into the opening/closing winning hole 3151, the main CPU 201 increments the value of the V attacker winning counter and instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform a payout process of a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10 game balls). When the V attacker winning counter reaches a specified value, the V attacker 3152 is operated by the V attacker solenoid 3154 to close the opening/closing winning hole 3151 even if the maximum time for opening the opening/closing winning hole 3151 has not elapsed.

(V prize entry switch)
The V winning hole switch 3156 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the passage of a game ball into the V winning hole 3155. When the V winning hole switch 3156 detects the entry of a game ball into the V winning hole 3155 within a predetermined time (e.g., 4000 msec) after the V attacker 3152 opens, the main CPU 201 performs control to transition to a big win game state. Note that even if the V winning hole switch 3156 detects the passage of a game ball into the V winning hole 3155, no prize balls are paid out.

[5-3. Basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine will be described with reference to Figures 110 to 120. Note that the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function will be omitted below.

In the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, although the probability variable control is not executed, a time-saving gaming state in which the time-saving control is executed and a normal gaming state in which the time-saving control is not executed are prepared, and the main CPU 201 is capable of progressing the game in the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. Note that in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the probability variable control is not executed, but this is not essential, and for example, the probability variable control may be executed by setting the probability variable flag to ON depending on the type of jackpot, etc.

In addition, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, which will be described in detail later, the number of consecutive jackpots that transition to a jackpot game state under specific conditions (A time-saving game state) is counted, and when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined limiter number, a "limiter function" is provided that partially restricts the game state to which the game state transitions after the jackpot game state ends.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, left hitting is the regular game mode, and in the time-saving game state A and time-saving game state B, right hitting is the regular game mode. In the time-saving game state C, the game mode between left hitting and right hitting changes appropriately depending on the opening state of the normal electric device 3146. The sub-CPU 301 executes control to display the hitting method that is considered to be the regular game mode, for example, in the display area of the display device 7.

[5-3-1. Special symbol winning judgment table]
FIG. 110 is an example of a special symbol winning judgment table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol winning judgment table shown in FIG. 110 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

In the special symbol hit determination table, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for the hit determination determined to be a "jackpot", "a hit with the opening of the special feature" or "a hit with the time-saving feature" and the corresponding determination value data ("jackpot determination value data", "a hit with the opening of the special feature" and "a hit with the time-saving feature") is specified as the data used in the hit determination process of the first special symbol executed based on the ball entering the first starting hole 3120. In addition, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for the hit determination determined to be a "jackpot" or "a hit with the opening of the special feature" and the corresponding determination value data ("jackpot determination value data", "a hit with the opening of the special feature") is specified as the data used in the hit determination process of the second special symbol executed based on the ball entering the second starting hole 3140. In addition, the total random number value of the random number value for the hit determination is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In other words, the random number value used to determine the jackpot is generated within the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

As shown in FIG. 110, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 3120, the main CPU 201 determines the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol to be a "jackpot," "a hit with the release of the special symbol," or a "time-saving hit" based on the hit determination process for the first special symbol using a random number value for determining a hit with the first special symbol. Also, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 3140, the main CPU 201 determines the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol to be a "jackpot" or a "hit with the release of the special symbol" based on the hit determination process for the second special symbol using a random number value for determining a hit with the second special symbol.

In addition, the configuration may be such that a "miss" is determined when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed. Also, the configuration may be such that a "gimmick release hit" is not determined when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed. In other words, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, it is an essential requirement that a "jackpot" or a "time-saving hit" is determined when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed, but other requirements can be freely modified as appropriate.

In addition, when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed, a "miss" may be determined, but if a "miss" is determined, it is preferable to set a relatively low probability so that the judgment made in the hit determination process of the second special symbol is more favorable than the judgment made in the hit determination process of the first special symbol. In addition, when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed, a "time-saving hit" may be determined. In other words, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, it is an essential requirement that a "jackpot" or a "gimmick release hit" is determined when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed, but other requirements are free to be designed as appropriate.

When the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, the jackpot probability and/or the probability of hitting the special feature opening may be set to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting. In this case, for example, both the jackpot probability and the probability of hitting the special feature opening may be set to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting, or the probability of hitting the special feature opening may be set to be constant regardless of the setting value and the jackpot probability may be set to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting, or the probability of hitting the jackpot may be set to be constant regardless of the setting value and the probability of hitting the special feature opening may be set to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting. However, even if the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable to set the probability of hitting the time-saving feature to be a common probability for all settings.

In addition to or instead of changing the jackpot probability or the probability of winning the special feature according to the set value, for example, the opening time of the V attacker 3152 may be changed for each set value to change the winning rate for the V winning device 3150, the opening frequency or opening time of the V winning port 3155 may be changed for each set value to change the passing rate to the V winning port 3155, or the number of times the time-saving continuation may be changed for each set value. In other words, by adopting one or more of the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the jackpot probability, the probability of winning the special feature opening, the opening frequency of the V winning port 3155 (i.e., the operation frequency of the V attacker 3152), the opening time, and the number of times the time-saving continuation may be changed, the expected value controlled in the jackpot game state may be higher in a high setting than in a low setting.

[5-3-2. Special symbol determination table]
FIG. 111 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 111 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is a table that is referenced when selecting the "select symbol command" and "designate symbol command" that determine the stopping symbol based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball enters the first start hole 3120 or the second start hole 3140 and the aforementioned determination value data.

The "selection symbol command" is a command for specifying the winning symbol determined according to the type of jackpot when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, and the "symbol designation command" is a command for designating the symbol that is displayed when the variable display of the special symbol stops. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is selected from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 111, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 0 to 3, the main CPU 201 selects "z1" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Also, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 4 to 60, the main CPU 201 selects "z2" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 61 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z3" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the winning judgment process for the first special symbol results in the reel opening winning judgment value data being obtained, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 0 and 59, the main CPU 201 selects "z4" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command. In addition, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 60 and 89, the main CPU 201 selects "z5" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command. In addition, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 90 and 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z6" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the reel opening hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the selected symbol command is configured to be more likely to be selected in the order of "z6" < "z5" < "z4" according to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 111.

In addition, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 selects "z7" as the selected symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command, regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 99.

In addition, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, even if the symbol random number value for the second special symbol is any value between 0 and 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z8" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

Furthermore, when the bonus item opening hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, even if the symbol random number value for the second special symbol is any value between 0 and 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z9" as the selected symbol command and "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

Although the description will be omitted in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 stores a special symbol stop mode determination table equivalent to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) described in the first pachinko game machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table is a table that is referenced when determining the stop mode of the special symbol that is output to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 (see FIG. 109) when the variable display of the special symbol stops, in response to the selected symbol command. In addition, the first special symbol display unit 163 and the second special symbol display unit 164 derive the display mode of the time-saving hit, the display mode of the jackpot, the display mode of the gimmick opening hit, or the display mode of the miss based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. In addition, a decorative symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative symbol stop mode determination table described in the first pachinko game machine (see FIG. 12(B)) is also stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300.

[5-3-3. Winning Type Determination Table]
Fig. 112 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. The winning type determination table shown in Fig. 112 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. Fig. 112(a) is an example of a winning type determination table referred to when the limiter function is not activated (when the limiter function is not activated), and Fig. 112(b) is an example of a winning type determination table referred to when the limiter function is activated (when the limiter function is activated).

As shown in FIG. 112, the winning type determination table associates the selected symbol command with the opening mode of the special feature, the mode of the jackpot game state, the mode of the game state after the jackpot game state (time-saving flag and number of time-saving times), the opening mode of the special feature, and the number of limiters at the time of the first win.

The main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table and determines the opening mode when the special feature is released, the mode of the jackpot game state, the mode of the game state after the jackpot game state (time-saving flag and number of time-saving times), the opening mode when the special feature is released, and the number of limiters based on the selected symbol command.

The "opening mode when the device is opened" indicates the opening mode of the opening/closing winning opening 3151 (the opening mode of the V winning device 3150) that is opened when the device is opened. The "first opening mode" is an opening mode in which the opening/closing winning opening 3151 is opened for a short time (for example, 200 msec in this embodiment), which is disadvantageous to the player. Also, as described above, in this embodiment, the V winning opening 3155 is opened 200 msec after the opening of the opening/closing winning opening 3151, so even if the opening/closing winning opening 3151 is opened in the first opening mode and the game ball enters the opening/closing winning opening 3151, it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 3155, and from this perspective, it is an opening mode that is disadvantageous to the player. Also, the "second opening mode" is an opening mode in which the opening/closing winning opening 3151 is opened for a long time (for example, 18,000 msec), which is advantageous to the player. When the opening and closing winning opening 3151 is opened in the second opening mode and the game ball enters the opening and closing winning opening 3151, the game ball can easily pass through the V winning opening 3155, which is an opening mode that is advantageous to the player from this point of view as well.

In this embodiment, the "first opening mode" has a short opening time for the open/close winning opening 3151, and the "second opening mode" has a long opening time for the open/close winning opening 3151; however, the opening times for the open/close winning opening 3151 may be substantially the same in the "first opening mode" and the "second opening mode" so that the V shutter 3158 is more likely to operate in the "second opening mode" than in the "first opening mode" (by keeping the V winning opening 3155 in an open state, it is more likely for the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 3155).

The "mode of the jackpot game state" indicates the mode of opening of the jackpot opening 3131 that opens when a jackpot occurs, and in this embodiment, indicates the number of rounds of the jackpot. In addition to the number of rounds of the jackpot, the opening time per round and the jackpot opening may also be determined.

"Subsequent game state status" refers to the status of the game state after the jackpot game state ends, and means the setting of the "time-saving flag" and "number of time-saving times." If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, the game will not be controlled to the jackpot game state but will be controlled to the C time-saving game state, and the "time-saving flag" and "number of time-saving times" will be set.

The "limiter count" indicates the limiter count that is set when a jackpot occurs in a state other than the A time-saving game state (normal game state, B time-saving game state, or C time-saving game state). The limiter count is decremented each time a transition is made to a jackpot game state under specific conditions (A time-saving game state), and when the limiter count = 0, the limiter function is activated and the win type determination table shown in Figure 112 (b) is referenced.

As shown in FIG. 112(a), when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is the selected symbol command "z4-z6" corresponding to a "hit on the release of the special feature", the main CPU 201 is configured to determine the "first release mode" that is disadvantageous to the player as the "opening mode for the hit on the special feature", and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is the selected symbol command "z9" corresponding to a "hit on the release of the special feature", the main CPU 201 is configured to determine the "second release mode" that is advantageous to the player as the "opening mode for the hit on the special feature".

In this embodiment, as described above, either a "jackpot" or a "hit with the opening of the special feature" is determined in the hit determination process of the second special feature. When a "hit with the opening of the special feature" is determined as a result of the hit determination process of the second special feature, a "second opening mode" advantageous to the player is determined, and the game ball is more likely to pass through the V winning port 3155 in the opening and closing winning port 3151, and it is easier to transition to a jackpot game state from the second route. Therefore, if the game ball enters the second starting port 3140, it is easier to transition to a jackpot game state from the first route or the second route, and it is configured so that the game ball entering the second starting port 3140 can effectively transition to a jackpot game state.

In contrast, even if a "gimmick release hit" is determined as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, a "first opening mode" that is unfavorable to the player is determined, and it is difficult to transition to a jackpot game state from the second route. Therefore, a gimmick release hit triggered by a game ball entering the first starting hole 3120 is essentially treated the same as a miss. Note that, although a gimmick release hit triggered by a game ball entering the first starting hole 3120 is treated the same as a miss, it is referenced when switching the variation pattern table, which will be described later.

In this embodiment, when a "reel opening hit" is determined as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, only the "first opening mode" that is disadvantageous to the player is determined as the "reel opening mode of the reel opening hit", but it may also be configured to determine a "second opening mode" that is advantageous to the player. In such a configuration, it is preferable that the "second opening mode" that is advantageous to the player is set to be more difficult to select than the "first opening mode" that is disadvantageous to the player.

As shown in FIG. 112(a), when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a selected symbol command "z1-z3" corresponding to a "jackpot", the main CPU 201 decides to set the time-saving flag to ON and decides to set the number of time-saving times to 100. When the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 201 decides to set the number of rounds to 10 rounds and decides to set the limiter number to 5 times only when the jackpot occurs in a state other than the A time-saving play state. When the selected symbol command is "z2", the main CPU 201 decides to set the number of rounds to 4 rounds and decides to set the limiter number to 3 times only when the jackpot occurs in a state other than the A time-saving play state. When the selected symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 201 decides to set the number of rounds to 4 rounds and decides to set the limiter number to 3 times only when the jackpot occurs in a state other than the A time-saving play state.

In this way, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "jackpot," a different number of rounds and limiter count are set according to the selected symbol command. This makes it possible to vary the benefits given to the player for each type of jackpot (symbol), thereby improving the excitement of the game.

Also, as shown in Figures 112(a) and (b), when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is the selected symbol command "z7" corresponding to a "time-saving hit", the main CPU 201 decides to set the time-saving flag to on and decides to set the number of time-saving times to 1.

In this way, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "time-saving hit," an extremely short period of time-saving game state is determined compared to when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "jackpot."

The winning type determination table when the limiter function is activated shown in FIG. 112(b) has different settings for the "Subsequent game state mode" and "Limiter count" compared to the winning type determination table when the limiter function is not activated shown in FIG. 112(a), but the settings for the "Release mode when a special feature is released" and "Big win game state mode" are the same. Note that, as shown in FIG. 112(b), since the limiter function is activated, the "Limiter count" is naturally not set.

As shown in FIG. 112(b), when the limiter function is activated (when the limiter function is activated), if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a "time-saving hit," the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state, and the time-saving flag and the number of time-saving times will be set in the same way as in FIG. 112(a).

However, when the limiter function is activated (when the limiter function is activated), if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is "jackpot" or "hit with release of special feature", then regardless of the selected symbol command, the game state after the jackpot game state ends will be that the time-saving flag is set to off and the number of time-saving times will not be set. In other words, when the limiter function is activated (when the limiter function is activated), the game state after the jackpot game state ends will transition to the normal game state.

[5-3-4. Special symbol variation pattern table]
113 to 116 are examples of the variation pattern table of the special symbols in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. FIG. 113 is an example of the variation pattern table of the special symbols in the normal game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, and FIG. 114 is an example of the variation pattern table of the special symbols in the C time-saving game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. Also, FIG. 115 is an example of the variation pattern table of the special symbols in the A time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, and FIG. 116 is an example of the variation pattern table of the special symbols after the limiter function is activated in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. The variation pattern tables of the special symbols shown in FIG. 113 to 116 are stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

As shown in Figures 113 to 116, the special symbol variation pattern table associates the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol winning determination process, the random number value for reach determination, the random number value for effect selection, the special symbol variation pattern, and the variable display time of the special symbol. The random number value for reach determination is selected, for example, from 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for effect selection is selected, for example, from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of the generated random numbers is not limited to the above. Also, the "Notes" column in Figures 113 to 116 is shown for convenience to make it easier to understand.

The main CPU 201 determines one of the special pattern variation pattern tables shown in Figures 113 to 116 depending on the game status, etc., and refers to the determined special pattern variation pattern table to determine the variation pattern of the special pattern and the variable display time of the special pattern based on the type of special pattern, the result of the special pattern hit determination process, the random number value for reach determination, and the random number value for performance selection.

When the main CPU 201 determines the fluctuation pattern, it transmits a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern to the sub-CPU 301. The sub-CPU 301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effects output from the speaker 32 based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201. The fluctuation pattern command is configured to be able to identify whether the fluctuation pattern is triggered by a game ball entering the first starting hole 3120 or the second starting hole 3140.

The jackpot reach and jackpot normal reach shown in the "Notes" column of Figures 113 to 116 are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is likely to be a jackpot (no chance of a time-saving hit). The chance fluctuation is a fluctuation effect that indicates that the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is likely to be a time-saving hit.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in normal game state)
In this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 113, three special symbol variation pattern tables are provided as variation pattern tables for special symbols in the normal game state: a special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in Fig. 113(1), a special symbol variation pattern table T2 shown in Fig. 113(2), and a special symbol variation pattern table T3 shown in Fig. 113(3). Note that the number of special symbol variation pattern tables in the normal game state is not limited to three, and may be one or two or more.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 113(1) is a fluctuation pattern table that is selected after the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine is backed up and cleared (i.e., the initial value fluctuation pattern table), after the first special symbol corresponding to the "hit on opening the special symbol" selection symbol command "z4" is displayed stationary, after the limiter function is activated and the normal gaming state is entered, and after the first hit determination process for the first special symbol is completed (i.e., after the transition from the special symbol fluctuation pattern table Z1 shown in FIG. 116(1) described later).

The special symbol variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 113 (2) is a variation pattern table that is selected after the first special symbol corresponding to the selection symbol command "z5" for "hit on opening the reel" is stopped and displayed.

The special symbol variation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 113 (3) is a variation pattern table that is selected after the first special symbol corresponding to the selection symbol command "z6" for "hit on opening the reel" is stopped and displayed.

In the special symbol fluctuation pattern tables T1 to T3 in the normal game state shown in Figures 113 (1) to (3), when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "time-saving hit," one of the fluctuation patterns is selected: fluctuation pattern "01H" (hereinafter also referred to as "chance fluctuation A") in which the variable display time of the special symbol is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol, and fluctuation pattern "02H" (hereinafter also referred to as "chance fluctuation B") in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol.

Details will be described later using Figure 137, but in the normal game state, chance fluctuation A, which is longer than the variable display time of the normal pattern, is likely to cause the second starting hole 3140 to open in an unfavorable manner due to the operation of the normal electric device 3146 in relation to the variable display time of the normal pattern, and chance fluctuation B, which is shorter than the variable display time of the normal pattern, is likely to cause the second starting hole 3140 to open in an advantageous manner due to the operation of the normal electric device 3146 in relation to the variable display time of the normal pattern.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern tables T1 to T3 in the normal game state shown in Figures 113 (1) to (3) have different selection rates for chance fluctuation A and chance fluctuation B. Chance fluctuation B, which is likely to result in an advantageous opening state of the second starting hole 3140 in the normal game state, is configured to be more likely to be selected in the order of special symbol fluctuation pattern table T1 < special symbol fluctuation pattern table T2 < special symbol fluctuation pattern table T3.

For this reason, among the special symbol variation pattern tables T1 to T3 in the normal game state, the special symbol variation pattern table T3 is the most advantageous variation pattern table for the player. However, as described above in FIG. 111, the selected symbol commands are configured to be most likely to be selected in the order of "z6" < "z5" < "z4", so the special symbol variation pattern table T3 corresponding to the selected symbol command "z6" is configured to be the least likely to be selected.

(C Time-saving special symbol variation pattern table)
In this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 114, three special symbol variation pattern tables are provided as variation pattern tables for the special symbols in the C time-saving game state: a special symbol variation pattern table C1 shown in Fig. 114(1), a special symbol variation pattern table C2 shown in Fig. 114(2), and a special symbol variation pattern table C3 shown in Fig. 114(3). Note that the number of special symbol variation pattern tables in the C time-saving game state is not limited to three, and may be one or two or more.

The special symbol variation pattern table C1 shown in FIG. 114 (1) is a variation pattern table that is selected after a transition from a normal game state to a C time-saving game state, or after the first special symbol corresponding to the "reel opening hit" selection symbol command "z4" is stopped and displayed.

The special symbol variation pattern table C2 shown in FIG. 114 (2) is a variation pattern table that is selected after the first special symbol corresponding to the selection symbol command "z5" for "hit on opening the reel" is stopped and displayed.

The special symbol variation pattern table C3 shown in FIG. 114 (3) is a variation pattern table that is selected after the first special symbol corresponding to the selection symbol command "z6" for "hit on opening the reel" is stopped and displayed.

In the special symbol fluctuation pattern tables C1 to C3 in the C time-saving play state shown in Figures 114 (1) to (3), similarly to the special symbol fluctuation pattern tables T1 to T3 in the normal play state shown in Figure 113, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "time-saving hit," one of the fluctuation patterns is selected: "Chance fluctuation A," in which the variable display time of the special symbol is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol, or "Chance fluctuation B," in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol.

Details will be described later using Figure 138, but even in the C time-saving play state, chance fluctuation A, which is longer than the variable display time of the normal pattern, is likely to cause the second starting hole 3140 to open in an unfavorable manner due to the operation of the normal electric device 3146 in relation to the variable display time of the normal pattern, and chance fluctuation B, which is shorter than the variable display time of the normal pattern, is likely to cause the second starting hole 3140 to open in an advantageous manner due to the operation of the normal electric device 3146 in relation to the variable display time of the normal pattern.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern tables C1 to C3 in the C time-saving play state shown in Figures 114 (1) to (3) have different selection rates for this chance fluctuation A and chance fluctuation B. Chance fluctuation B, which is likely to result in an advantageous opening state of the second starting hole 3140 in the C time-saving play state, is configured to be more likely to be selected in the order of special symbol fluctuation pattern table C1 < special symbol fluctuation pattern table C2 < special symbol fluctuation pattern table C3.

For this reason, among the special symbol fluctuation pattern tables C1 to C3 in the C time-saving play state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table C3 is the most advantageous fluctuation pattern table for the player. However, as described above in FIG. 111, the selected symbol commands are configured to be most likely to be selected in the order "z6" < "z5" < "z4", so the special symbol fluctuation pattern table C3 corresponding to the selected symbol command "z6" is configured to be the least likely to be selected.

The special symbol variation pattern tables T1 to T3 in the normal game state shown in Fig. 113 and the special symbol variation pattern tables C1 to C3 in the C time-saving game state shown in Fig. 114 have the same variation pattern for the first special symbol, but the variation pattern for the second special symbol when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a "hit on the release of the special symbol" is different. That is, in the special symbol variation pattern tables T1 to T3 in the normal game state shown in Fig. 113, when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a "hit on the release of the special symbol," the main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern for the second special symbol to be a long variation performance with an extremely long variation time, for example, 500,000 msec or 600,000 msec. This is because, in normal game play, a gaming ball will not generally enter (pass through) the second starting hole 3140, but even if an unforeseen event occurs and a gaming ball does enter the second starting hole 3140, this is done to minimize the benefit that may be given to the advantageous player, but this is not necessarily required.

For this reason, a common special symbol variation pattern table may be adopted for the special symbol variation pattern tables T1 to T3 in the normal game state shown in FIG. 113 and the special symbol variation pattern tables C1 to C3 in the C time-saving game state shown in FIG. 114.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in time-saving game state A or time-saving game state B)
The special pattern variation pattern table A shown in FIG. 115 is a variation pattern table that is selected when the game is controlled to the A time-saving game state or the B time-saving game state.

The variable pattern table A for the special symbols is configured so that the variable display time of the special symbols is relatively short, except when the result of the hit determination process is a "jackpot." This allows the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 3155 in the open/close winning hole 3151 in a short time in the A time-saving game state or the B time-saving game state, via the second route, to transition to the jackpot game state.

(Special pattern variation table after limiter function activation)
The special symbol fluctuation pattern table Z1 shown in FIG. 116 (1) is a specific fluctuation pattern table selected in the first special symbol winning determination process after the transition to the normal game state following the activation of the limiter function.

In the special symbol fluctuation pattern table Z1 shown in FIG. 116 (1), if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "time-saving hit," chance fluctuation B, which is likely to result in an advantageous opening state of the second starting hole 3140 in normal game mode, is always selected.

When Chance Variation B is selected in the normal game state, the second start hole 3140 opens in a favorable manner, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second start hole 3140. In this embodiment, as described above, if the game ball enters the second start hole 3140, it is easy to transition to a jackpot game state from the first route or the second route, and it is possible to essentially transition to a jackpot game state by the game ball entering the second start hole 3140.

Therefore, even if a winning streak in the time-saving play state ends due to the activation of the limiter function, if the result of the first hit determination process for the first special symbol after transition to the normal play state is a "time-saving hit," it is possible to transition again to the jackpot play state via the second route, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game due to the activation of the limiter function.

In addition, in this embodiment, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table Z1 is configured so that chance fluctuation B is always selected when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "time-saving hit," but it may also be configured so that chance fluctuation A, which is more likely to result in an unfavorable opening state of the second starting hole 3140, is selected with a lower probability than chance fluctuation B.

In addition, after the transition to the normal game state following the activation of the limiter function and the completion of the first winning determination process for the first special symbol, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 113(1) will be selected from the special symbol fluctuation pattern table Z1 shown in FIG. 116(1).

The special symbol fluctuation pattern table Z2 shown in FIG. 116(2) is a modified example of the special symbol fluctuation pattern table Z1 shown in FIG. 116(1), and is a specific fluctuation pattern table that is selected based on the first special symbol hit determination process after the transition to the normal game state following the activation of the limiter function. The special symbol fluctuation pattern table Z2 is configured so that if the result of the first special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," chance fluctuation A is selected with a probability of 20% and chance fluctuation B with a probability of 80%.

Even if you do this, if the result of the first hit determination process for the first special symbol after transitioning to the normal game state is a "time-saving hit," the probability of transitioning again to the jackpot game state via the second route increases, preventing a decrease in interest in the game due to the activation of the limiter function.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern tables Z1 and Z2 are fluctuation pattern tables that are selected based on the first special symbol hit determination process after the transition to the normal game state following the activation of the limiter function, but are not limited to the first time. For example, in the case of a special symbol reservation function, the fluctuation pattern tables may be selected based on the special symbol hit determination process up to the fourth time, or may be fluctuation pattern tables selected based on the special symbol hit determination process up to an arbitrary predetermined number of times.

In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "time-saving hit," there is one chance fluctuation A and one chance fluctuation B, but it may be configured with multiple chance fluctuation A groups in which the variable display time of the special symbol is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol, and multiple chance fluctuation B groups in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol, based on the variable display time of the normal symbol.

[5-3-5. Normal symbol winning judgment table]
117 is an example of a winning judgment table for normal symbols in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. The winning judgment table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 117 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

The normal symbol winning judgment table is a table referenced in the normal symbol winning judgment process, that is, a table referenced when determining by lottery whether a "normal symbol winning" or "losing" is based on the game state and the normal symbol winning judgment random number value extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gates 3126A and 3126B.

The winning judgment table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 117 specifies the game state, the range (width) of the random number value for winning judgment of normal symbols, and the winning judgment value data for normal symbols ("winning normal symbols" or "missing") in correspondence with each other.

As described above, the random number value for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol is a random number value used in the winning determination process for the normal symbol. In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 selects the random number value for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the winning judgment table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 117, and determines the winning judgment value data for normal symbols based on the game state and the range (width) of the random number value for winning judgment for normal symbols.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 0 and 89, the main CPU 201 determines that the win/loss determination value data is a "normal symbol win determination value data." In addition, in the non-time-saving game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 90 and 99, the main CPU 201 determines that the win/loss determination value data is a "loss" determination value data.

In addition, in the A time-saving game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 0 and 98, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "normal symbol win" and sets the win/loss determination value data to "normal symbol win determination value data."In addition, in the A time-saving game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is 99, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "miss" and sets the determination value data to "miss determination value data."

In addition, in the B time-saving game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 0 and 89, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "normal symbol win" and sets the win/loss determination value data to "normal symbol win determination value data."In addition, in the B time-saving game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 90 and 99, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "miss" and sets the determination value data to "miss determination value data."

In addition, in the C time-saving game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 0 and 89, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "normal symbol win" and sets the win/loss determination value data to "normal symbol win determination value data."In addition, in the C time-saving game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 90 and 99, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "miss" and sets the determination value data to "miss determination value data."

In this embodiment, the probability of winning on a normal symbol in the time-saving game state A (estimated selection rate shown in FIG. 117) is the highest among the normal game state, the time-saving game state A, the time-saving game state B, and the time-saving game state C.

In addition, the winning probability of hitting a normal symbol in the B time-saving game state is the same as the winning probability of hitting a normal symbol in the normal game state. Similarly, the winning probability of hitting a normal symbol in the C time-saving game state is the same as the winning probability of hitting a normal symbol in the normal game state. Therefore, even if the game state transitions between the normal game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state, the winning probability of hitting a normal symbol will not change.

The winning probability for a normal symbol may be the same in the normal game state, the time-saving game state A, the time-saving game state B, and the time-saving game state C. In this case, the winning probability for a normal symbol does not change, and the ratio of the types of normal symbols described below only needs to be varied for each state, simplifying the control process.

[5-3-6. Normal symbol determination table]
118 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. The normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 118 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

The normal symbol determination table is a table that is referenced when selecting a "normal symbol winning symbol selection command" that determines the normal symbol stopping symbol based on the above-mentioned winning/losing determination value data and the normal symbol random number value extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gates 3126A and 3126B. The "normal symbol winning symbol selection command" is a command for specifying the winning normal symbol, which is determined according to the normal symbol winning type, when the result of the normal symbol winning determination process is a normal symbol winning symbol.

The normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 118 specifies the normal symbol winning determination value data ("normal symbol winning" or "miss"), the normal symbol random number value, and the symbol command selected when the normal symbol wins, in association with each other. The normal symbol random number value is selected from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal pattern determination table shown in FIG. 118 and determines the pattern command to be selected when a normal pattern is hit based on the normal pattern hit determination value data and the pattern random number value of the normal pattern.

According to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 118, when normal symbol winning determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol winning determination process, for example, the selected symbol command when the normal symbol is winning is selected as follows.

For example, when normal pattern hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal pattern hit determination process, the main CPU 201 selects "fz1" as the pattern selection command when the normal pattern hits if the pattern random number value of the normal pattern is any value between 0 and 29, selects "fz2" as the pattern selection command when the normal pattern hits if the pattern random number value of the normal pattern is any value between 30 and 69, and selects "fz3" as the pattern selection command when the normal pattern hits if the pattern random number value of the normal pattern is any value between 70 and 99.

In particular, in this embodiment, unlike the first pachinko gaming machine, the "selection pattern command when a normal pattern is hit" is selected based on the win/loss judgment value data (the result of the normal pattern hit judgment process) and the normal pattern random number value, regardless of the game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the winning judgment table for the normal pattern (see FIG. 117) to determine the winning/losing judgment value data based on the extracted random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern, and then refers to the normal pattern judgment table (see FIG. 118) to determine the pattern command selected when the normal pattern is a winning pattern based on the pattern random number value of the normal pattern, but is not limited to this. For example, the winning/losing of the normal pattern and the pattern command selected when the normal pattern is a winning pattern may be determined together based on the extracted random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern and the pattern random number value of the normal pattern.

[5-3-7. Normal pattern type determination table]
119 is an example of a normal symbol type determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. The normal symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 119 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

The normal symbol hit type determination table is referenced when determining the opening pattern of the normal electric device 3146 as the opening mode of the normal electric device 3146, according to the game state and the normal symbol hit selection pattern command, which is determined in response to the normal symbol random number value.

The normal symbol winning type determination table shown in FIG. 119 specifies the game state, the symbol selection command when a normal symbol is won, and the opening pattern as the opening mode of the normal electric device 3146, which are associated with each other.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol winning type determination table shown in FIG. 119, and determines the opening pattern of the normal electric role 3146 based on the game state and the normal symbol winning selection pattern command. After that, the main CPU 201 transmits to the sub-CPU 301 the opening pattern command of the normal electric role 3146 that corresponds to the opening pattern of the determined normal electric role 3146.

In this embodiment, when in normal game mode, the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the opening manner of the normal electric device 3146, as 200 msec for the first opening, no wait time, and no second opening, regardless of the normal symbol selection command, regardless of the normal symbol selection command.

In addition, in the normal game state, the first opening time may be different depending on the normal pattern selection command. For example, in the normal game state, if the normal pattern selection command is "fz1", the opening pattern that is the opening mode of the normal electric role 3146 may be set to a first opening time of 200 msec, if the normal pattern selection command is "fz2", the opening pattern that is the opening mode of the normal electric role 3146 may be set to a first opening time of 250 msec, if the normal pattern selection command is "fz3", the opening pattern that is the opening mode of the normal electric role 3146 may be set to a first opening time of 300 msec, and the second opening time may be set to 0 regardless of the normal pattern selection command.

In addition, when the main CPU 201 is in the A time-saving play state and the symbol command selected when a normal symbol hits is "fz1", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the opening mode of the normal electric device 3146, to be a first opening time of 2000 msec, a wait time of 200 msec, and a second opening time of 2000 msec. In addition, when the main CPU 201 is in the A time-saving play state and the symbol command selected when a normal symbol hits is "fz2", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the opening mode of the normal electric device 3146, to be a first opening time of 2500 msec, a wait time of 200 msec, and a second opening time of 2500 msec. In addition, when in the A time-saving play state, if the normal pattern selection command is "fz3", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern of the normal electric device 3146 to be a first opening time of 3000 msec, a wait time of 200 msec, and a second opening time of 3000 msec.

In addition, when the main CPU 201 is in the B time-saving play state or the C time-saving play state, if the symbol command selected when a normal symbol hits is "fz1", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the opening mode of the normal electric device 3146, to be a first opening time of 2500 msec, no wait time, and no second opening. In addition, when the main CPU 201 is in the B time-saving play state or the C time-saving play state, if the symbol command selected when a normal symbol hits is "fz2", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the opening mode of the normal electric device 3146, to be a first opening time of 2000 msec, a wait time of 600 msec, and a second opening time of 2000 msec. In addition, when in the B time-saving play state or the C time-saving play state, if the normal pattern selection command is "fz3", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the opening mode of the normal electric role device 3146, to be a first opening time of 2500 msec, a wait time of 600 msec, and a second opening time of 2500 msec.

In this way, in this embodiment, even if the same normal symbol selection command (e.g., "fz1") is used, the opening pattern of the normal electric device 3146 is configured to differ depending on the game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol in the normal game state is "normal symbol hit," the opening pattern of the normal electric device 3146 becomes the most unfavorable mode among the opening patterns of the normal electric device 3146 in each game state. The favorable degree of the opening pattern of the normal electric device 3146 is the degree of ease of a game ball entering the second starting hole 3140 when the normal electric device 3146 is opened.

When the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol in the A time-saving play state is "normal symbol hit," the opening pattern of the normal electric device 3146 becomes the most advantageous pattern among the opening patterns of the normal electric device 3146 in each play state.

In addition, the opening pattern of the normal electric device 3146 when the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol in the B time-saving play state is "normal symbol hit" has the same degree of advantage as the opening pattern of the normal electric device 3146 when the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol in the C time-saving play state is "normal symbol hit", but is not limited to this.

[5-3-8. Normal symbol variation pattern table]
Fig. 120 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in Fig. 120 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 120 associates the game state, the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gates 3126A and 3126B, the variation pattern of the normal symbol, and the variable display time of the normal symbol. The random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table and determines the normal symbol variation pattern and the normal symbol variable display time based on the game state and the normal symbol effect selection random number value extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gates 3126A and 3126B. Then, when the main CPU 201 determines the normal symbol variation pattern, it transmits a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined normal symbol variation pattern to the sub-CPU 301.

As shown in FIG. 120, in the normal game state or the C time-saving game state, regardless of whether the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is 0 to 99, the variable display time for the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 10,000 msec.

In addition, in the A time-saving game state, if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any value between 0 and 89, the variable display time for the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any value between 90 and 99, the variable display time for the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 800 msec.

In addition, in the B time-saving game state, if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any one between 0 and 39, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any one between 40 and 79, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1000 msec, and if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any one between 80 and 99, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1500 msec.

In this way, the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbol per variable display in the A time-saving game state is the shortest among the variable display times of the normal symbol in each game state. Therefore, in the A time-saving game state, the time until the normal electric device 3146 is opened is the shortest among all game states.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the normal game state and the C time-saving game state, the variable display time of the normal symbol is fixed to 10,000 msec. For this reason, in the special symbol variation pattern table shown in Figs. 113 to 115, as described above, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time-saving hit", the chance variation A longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol is a variable display time of 13,000 msec, which is longer than 10,000 msec, and the chance variation B shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol is a variable display time of 9,000 msec, which is shorter than 10,000 msec. As will be described in detail later with reference to Figs. 137 and 138, the normal electric device 3146 opening pattern (opening mode of the second starting hole 3140) as the opening mode of the normal electric device 3146 changes due to the relationship between the game state and the variable display time of the normal symbol and the variable display time of the special symbol.

[5-4. Main control processing]
In the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 are similar to those of the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23), except for the special symbol control process, normal symbol control process, and switch input detection process executed in S39. Therefore, the following will explain the special symbol control process, normal symbol control process, and switch input detection process, and will not explain the other processes executed by the main CPU 201.

Note that some of the processes performed in the special symbol control process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine are the same as those performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, the jackpot end process (Figures 42 and 133)), but below, the same processes as those performed in the first pachinko gaming machine will be explained again with different step numbers.

[5-4-1. Special symbol control process]
Next, the special symbol control process performed in S39 in the main control process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 121. Fig. 121 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol control process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 121, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S3001. The control state number of the special symbol is a number that indicates the state (status) of the control process related to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S3001, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3002.

Although not shown, when the main CPU 201 executes the special symbol control process, prior to the process of S3001, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process to set the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, etc., in a predetermined register.

In S3002, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S3001 is 0, i.e., whether the special symbol is in a state waiting for variable display.

If it is determined in S3002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (if S3002 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3005.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (if S3002 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3003.

In S3003, the main CPU 201 determines whether the second special symbol has started to be variable displayed.

If it is determined in S3003 that the second special symbol has not started to be variable displayed (if S3003 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3004.

In S3004, the main CPU 201 determines whether the first special symbol has started to be variable displayed.

If it is determined in S3004 that the first special symbol has not started to be variable displayed (if S3004 is determined to be NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see Figures 20 to 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3004 that the first special symbol has begun to be variable displayed (if S3004 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3005.

Returning to S3003, if it is determined that the second special symbol has begun to be variable displayed (if S3003 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3005.

In S3005, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 122. After executing the processing of S3003, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S3001 to S3005) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[5-4-2. Special symbol management process]
Next, a special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3005 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 121) will be described with reference to Fig. 122. Fig. 122 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

When the control state number is 0 (when S3002 is judged as YES), the special pattern management process processes the second special pattern if S3003 is judged as YES, and processes the first special pattern if S3004 is judged as YES. Also, when the control state number is not 0 (when S3002 is judged as NO), the special pattern management process processes the special pattern currently being executed.

The numbers ("0" to "7") in parentheses to the right of each process in FIG. 122 are the control state numbers of the special symbols that are the subject of the process. The main CPU 201 progresses the special symbol game by executing each process that corresponds to the control state number.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the waiting time for the special pattern is 0 (S3011).

If it is determined in S3011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (if S3011 is determined to be NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 121).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (if S3011 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3012.

In S3012, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S3012, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3013. The main CPU 201 performs the process from S3013 onwards based on the control state number read in the process of S3012.

In S3013, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This S3013 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 123. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S3014.

In S3014, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. This S3014 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 125. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S3015.

In S3015, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game determination process. This S3015 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 126. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3016.

In S3016, the main CPU 201 performs a V winning device opening preparation process. This S3016 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this V winning device opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 129. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3017.

In S3017, the main CPU 201 performs a V winning device opening control process. This S3017 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this V winning device opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 130. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3018.

In S3018, the main CPU 201 performs a process for preparing to open the large prize opening. This process of S3018 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this process for preparing to open the large prize opening will be described later with reference to FIG. 131. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3019.

In S3019, the main CPU 201 performs a large prize opening control process. This S3019 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". Details of this large prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 132. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3020.

In S3020, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot end process. This S3020 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". Details of this jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 133.

After completing steps S3013 to S3020, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 121). In this case, the process returns to the process from which the special symbol management process was called.

[5-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, referring to Fig. 123, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3013 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 122) will be described. Fig. 123 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display start process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

Note that if the special symbol variable display start process is a process called in S3013 during special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, if the special symbol variable display start process is a process called in S3013 during special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

As shown in FIG. 123, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S3021).

If it is determined in S3021 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (if S3021 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3021 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (if S3021 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3022.

In S3022, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol hit determination process. In this special symbol hit determination process, a special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 110) is referenced, and a special symbol hit determination is performed using a random number value for special symbol hit determination stored in the special symbol determination area. In this embodiment, if the first special symbol is the target of processing, it is determined whether it is a big hit, a special feature release hit, or a time-saving hit. Also, if the second special symbol is the target of processing, it is determined whether it is a big hit or a special feature release hit. After executing the process of S3022, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3023.

In S3023, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol determination process. This process is a process for determining or deciding the stopping symbol of the special symbol that corresponds to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S3022) (for example, a big hit, a role release hit, or a time-saving hit). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 111) is referenced, and the random number value of the special symbol stored in the special symbol determination area is used to determine the above-mentioned "select symbol command" or "symbol designation command." After executing the process of S3023, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3024.

In S3024, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot type determination process. This process is a process for determining or deciding the type of win when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit (jackpot, special feature opening hit, or time-saving hit). In this process, the type of win is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S3023) by referring to the hit type determination table (see FIG. 112). Note that the type of win determined when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a special feature opening hit is the type of jackpot when the jackpot game control process is executed by the game ball passing through the V winning hole 3155 opened based on the special feature opening hit. In addition, in this embodiment, both the types of jackpot and special feature opening hit are multiple types, but the type of jackpot and/or special feature opening hit may be one type. Furthermore, the type of time-saving hit may be multiple types. After executing processing of S3024, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S3025.

In S3025, the main CPU 201 performs a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. This process is a process for judging or determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, a variation pattern table of one of the special symbols shown in FIG. 113 to FIG. 116 is determined according to the game state, etc., and the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol winning determination process, the random number value for reach determination, and the random number value for effect selection, with reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol determined. Details of this process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol will be described later with reference to FIG. 124. After executing the process of S3025, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3026.

In S3026, the main CPU 201 performs a variable display time setting process for the special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the variation pattern table (see Figures 113 to 116) determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S3025), and determines the variable display time for the special symbol based on the determined variation pattern. The main CPU 201 then sets the determined variable display time for the special symbol, and causes the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 to start variable display of the special symbol. After executing the process of S3026, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3027.

In S3027, the main CPU 201 performs time-saving management processing. In the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, unlike the first pachinko gaming machine, when variable display of special symbols starts, a ceiling counter update process is performed to add 1 to the ceiling counter and a time-saving counter update process is performed to subtract 1 from the time-saving count counter. Specifically, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the time-saving flag is set to 1 (the time-saving flag is turned on), the time-saving count counter is set to a specified number, the time-saving identification number is set to 2, which identifies the B time-saving gaming state, and transition control is performed to the B time-saving gaming state. In addition, when the time-saving count counter becomes 0, the time-saving flag and the time-saving identification number are cleared, and transition control is performed from the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state.

Also, since the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, which is called a type 1/type 2 mixed machine, is not controlled to a high probability gaming state, the time-saving management process executed in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine also differs from the process described with reference to Figures 32 to 39 for the first pachinko gaming machine. Specifically, in the first pachinko gaming machine, it was described that the ceiling count prohibition flag is set to on when the probability variable flag is set to on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, but the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine is not controlled to a high probability gaming state. Therefore, it differs in that instead of setting the ceiling count prohibition flag to on when the probability variable flag is set to on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, it is set to on only when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. In the first pachinko game machine, in the time-saving transition judgment process (see FIG. 37), it is determined whether the probability variable flag is off (see S191), and then the process of S192 is performed on the condition that the probability variable flag is off. However, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, since the game is not controlled to a high probability game state as described above, the process of S192 is performed without performing the process of S191. Also, in the time-saving transition process (see FIG. 38), the transition control to the B time-saving game state (see S208) is performed by the ceiling flag that is turned on when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, without performing the process of S202. The other processes in the time-saving management process are the same as those described with reference to FIG. 32 to FIG. 39 in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. After performing the process of S3027, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3028.

In S3028, the main CPU 201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1". By performing the process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1" in this way, after the special symbol variable display start process ends, the special symbol variable display end process (see S3014 in FIG. 122) is performed. After executing the process of S3028, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3029.

In S3029, the main CPU 201 executes a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, a process of updating parameters related to the game state (e.g., the number of remaining time-saving times, etc.) stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 is performed. After executing the process of S3029, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3030.

In S3030, the main CPU 201 performs game status management processing. This processing mainly involves updating various flags related to game status management (e.g., time-saving flags, etc.). After executing S3030, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S3031.

In S3031, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process (particularly the game state management process (S3030) and the special symbol presentation start command transmission reservation process (S3031)) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[5-4-4. Special symbol variation pattern determination process]
Next, the details of the special symbol variation pattern determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3025 during the special symbol variable display start process (see FIG. 123) will be described with reference to Fig. 124. Fig. 124 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variation pattern determination process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the limiter activation flag is on (S3025-1). If the main CPU 201 determines in S3025-1 that the limiter activation flag is on, it transfers processing to S3025-2, and if it determines that the limiter activation flag is not on, it transfers processing to S3025-5.

The "limiter activation flag" here counts the number of consecutive jackpots that have transitioned to a jackpot gaming state under specific conditions (time-saving gaming state A), and is a flag that activates when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a specified limiter number, and is turned on during the limiter number update process (see Figure 127) described below.

In S3025-2, the main CPU 201 determines whether the ceiling counter is 0. If the main CPU 201 determines in S3025-2 that the ceiling counter is 0, it transfers the process to S3025-3, and if it determines that the ceiling counter is not 0, it transfers the process to S3025-5.

Unlike the first pachinko gaming machine, the "ceiling counter" is a counter that updates the ceiling counter (increments by 1) when the variable display of the special symbol starts, and controls the game to the B time-saving game state when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. In the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, when the process of determining the variation pattern of the special symbol is performed, the ceiling counter has not yet been incremented in the "time-saving management process" of S3027, so when the ceiling counter = 0, this means the start of the first variable display of the special symbol in the normal game state.

In S3025-3, the main CPU 201 turns off the limiter activation flag and moves the process to S3025-4.

In S3025-4, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table Z1 shown in FIG. 116(1) as the specific variation pattern table after the limiter function is activated. Note that, as shown in the modified example, the special symbol variation pattern table Z2 shown in FIG. 116(2) may also be determined.

In addition, in S3025-4, the small win pattern switching information described below is set to 0, and from the next time onwards, preparations are made so that the special pattern variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 113(1) is selected from the special pattern variation pattern table Z1 or Z2 shown in FIG. 116.

In S3025-5, the main CPU 201 acquires information on the game state (time-saving identification number) to determine whether the current game state is being controlled as the normal game state, time-saving game state A, time-saving game state B, or time-saving game state C.

In S3025-6, the main CPU 201 acquires information about the pattern that was stopped and displayed on the first special pattern display unit 163 when a "play mechanism release hit" was previously determined as a result of the hit determination process for the first special pattern (hereinafter referred to as "small hit pattern switching information").

The "small win pattern switching information" is updated by overwriting one piece of information in the small win pattern switching information overwrite process (see S3062 in FIG. 126) described later. When the first special pattern hit determination process determines that a "gimmick release hit" has occurred, if the first special pattern corresponding to the selected pattern command "z4" is stopped and displayed, small win pattern switching information = 0 is stored, if the first special pattern corresponding to the selected pattern command "z5" is stopped and displayed, small win pattern switching information = 1 is stored, and if the first special pattern corresponding to the selected pattern command "z6" is stopped and displayed, small win pattern switching information = 2 is stored.

In S3025-7, the main CPU 201 determines one of the multiple variation pattern tables based on the acquired game status information and small win symbol switching information.

Specifically, when the main CPU 201 determines that it is being controlled to the normal game state, if the small win pattern switching information in response to the selection pattern command "z4" = 0, it determines the special pattern variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 113 (1), if the small win pattern switching information in response to the selection pattern command "z5" = 1, it determines the special pattern variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 113 (2), and if the small win pattern switching information in response to the selection pattern command "z6" = 2, it determines the special pattern variation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 113 (3).

In addition, when the main CPU 201 determines that it is being controlled to the C time-saving game state, if the small win pattern switching information in response to the selection pattern command "z4" is 0, it determines the special pattern variation pattern table C1 shown in FIG. 114 (1), if the small win pattern switching information in response to the selection pattern command "z5" is 1, it determines the special pattern variation pattern table C2 shown in FIG. 114 (2), and if the small win pattern switching information in response to the selection pattern command "z6" is 2, it determines the special pattern variation pattern table C3 shown in FIG. 114 (3).

In addition, when the main CPU 201 determines that the game is being controlled to the A time-saving game state or the B time-saving game state, it determines the special symbol variation pattern table A shown in FIG. 115, regardless of the small win symbol switching information.

In S3025-8, the main CPU 201 acquires the type of special symbol and the winning/losing information (jackpot, special feature release win, and time-saving win) as a result of the special symbol winning determination process.

In S3025-9, the main CPU 201 obtains a random number value for reach determination and a random number value for effect selection from the special symbol determination area.

In S3025-10, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol variation pattern table determined in S3025-4 or S3025-7 above, and determines the special symbol variation pattern based on the type of special symbol, the winning/losing information, the random number value for reach determination, and the random number value for effect selection.

[5-4-5. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, referring to Fig. 125, a special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3014 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 122) will be described. Fig. 125 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display end process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

If the special symbol variable display end process is called in S3014 during special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, if the special symbol variable display end process is a process called in S3014 during special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special pattern is "1" (S3041).

If it is determined in S3041 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (if S3041 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3041 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (if S3041 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3042.

In S3042, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", the special symbol game determination process (see S3015 in FIG. 122) is performed after the special symbol variable display end process is completed. After executing the process of S3042, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3043.

In S3043, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect stop command. This process also includes a process for stopping the variable display of the special symbol. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S3043, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3044.

In S3044, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the determined symbol counter. As described above in the explanation of the first to third pachinko gaming machines, the determined symbol counter is a counter for counting the number of times a special symbol has been determined (the number of times a special symbol game has been played), but it may also manage the number of games of a special symbol game played under a specific condition, such as the number of times remaining in the special symbol mode or the number of times remaining in the time-saving mode. After executing the process of S3044, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

[5-4-6. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, a special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3015 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122) will be described with reference to Fig. 126. Fig. 126 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game determination process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

Note that if this special symbol game determination process is called in S3015 during special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the target of processing, the first special symbol is the target of processing. Similarly, if the special symbol game determination process is called in S3015 during special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the target of processing, the second special symbol is the target of processing.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S3051).

If it is determined in S3051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (if S3051 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game play determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (if S3051 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3052.

In S3052, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot.

If it is determined in S3052 that the result is not a jackpot, i.e. that the stopped special symbol is not in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot (if S3052 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3061. On the other hand, if it is determined in S3052 that the result is a jackpot, i.e. that the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot (if S3052 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3053. Note that if the special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a win when the special symbol is released, or if the special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a miss, a NO judgment is made in S3052.

In S3053, the main CPU 201 subtracts the limiter count each time the A time-saving gaming state transitions to the jackpot gaming state, and performs a limiter count update process to determine whether or not to activate the limiter function. This limiter count update process in S3053 is a process that updates the limiter count when the state transitions from the first route to the jackpot gaming state. As will be described later, when the state transitions from the second route to the jackpot gaming state, the limiter count is updated in the V winning device opening control process (see FIG. 130) (see S3096). Details of the limiter count update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 127. After executing the process of S3053, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3054.

In S3054, the main CPU 201 performs start setting processing for jackpot game control. In this processing, signals (e.g., jackpot signals, etc.) that are output to the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 109 for both) via the external terminal board 184 are generated and updated. Note that the signal that is generated and updated in this processing is a hit signal for the special symbol that is the subject of the special symbol game determination processing. After executing the processing of S3054, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S3055.

In addition, in the start setting process for the jackpot game control in S3054, the main CPU 201 also performs processing to clear various flags and counters, such as the time-saving flag and the time-saving counter.

In S3055, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as a process of setting the upper limit of the number of times the large prize opening 3131 can be opened (S3056), a process of setting a large prize signal to the external terminal board 184 (S3057), a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S3058), a process of setting a game state designation parameter (S3059), and a process of reserving the transmission of a large prize start display command (S3060). By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S3058), the large prize opening preparation process (see S3018 in FIG. 122) is performed after the special symbol game judgment process is completed. After that, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game judgment process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

In S3061, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a special feature has been opened, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a special feature has been opened.

If it is determined in S3061 that the special symbol is not a winning combination, i.e. that the stopped special symbol is a stopped display mode indicating a time-saving winning combination or a losing combination (if S3061 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3071. On the other hand, if it is determined in S3061 that the special symbol is a winning combination, i.e. that the stopped special symbol is a stopped display mode indicating a winning combination (if S3061 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3062.

In S3062, when the main CPU 201 determines that the first special symbol hit determination process has resulted in a "hit on the release of the reel", it refers to the selected symbol command, and when the selected symbol command is "z4", it overwrites and updates the small hit symbol switching information with "0", when the selected symbol command is "z5", it overwrites and updates the small hit symbol switching information with "1", and when the selected symbol command is "z6", it overwrites and updates the small hit symbol switching information with "2". When the second special symbol hit determination process has resulted in a "hit on the release of the reel", it does not overwrite the small hit symbol switching information and moves the process to S3063. After executing the process of S3062, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3063.

In S3063, the main CPU 201 performs start setting processing for game control per release of a special feature. In this processing, signals (e.g., a signal per release of a special feature, etc.) that are output to the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 109 for both) via the external terminal board 184 are generated and updated. Note that the signals generated and updated in this processing are signals related to the special symbol that is the subject of the special symbol game determination processing. After executing the processing of S3063, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S3064.

In S3064, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 3150 can be opened. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 3150 can be opened, set in this processing, is, for example, 1 time. After executing processing of S3064, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S3065.

In S3064, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as setting a signal for opening a special device to the external terminal board 184 (S3065), setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S3066), setting a game state designation parameter (S3067), and reserving the transmission of a display command for starting a special device to be opened (S3068). By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S3066), the V winning device opening preparation process (see S3016 in FIG. 122) is performed after the special symbol game judgment process is completed. After that, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game judgment process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

In S3069, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a time-saving hit has occurred, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a time-saving opening hit.

If it is determined in S3069 that the time-saving hit has not occurred, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S3071. On the other hand, if it is determined in S3061 that the time-saving hit has occurred, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S3070.

In S3070, the main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 112, determines the mode of the game state (time-saving flag and number of time-saving times) based on the time-saving winning selection pattern command "z7", and sets the data of the determined mode of the game state. Specifically, it sets the time-saving flag = 1 (turns the time-saving flag on), sets the time-saving number counter = 1, and sets the time-saving identification number = 3, which identifies the time-saving game state C. Note that the time-saving identification number is set to 1 when the game transitions to the time-saving game state A, and is set to 2 when the game transitions to the time-saving game state B.

In addition, in this embodiment, the winning type determination table has two winning type determination tables depending on whether the limiter function is activated or not, but for time-saving winnings, the winning type determination table when the limiter function is not activated is referenced regardless of whether the limiter function is activated or not. After executing the process of S3070, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3071.

In S3071, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 128. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 122).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S3051 to S3071) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[5-4-7. Limiter count update process]
Next, the details of the limiter number update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3053 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 126) will be described with reference to Fig. 127. Fig. 127 is a flow chart showing an example of the limiter number update process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the game is in the A time-saving game state (S3053-1). If the main CPU 201 determines in S3053-1 that the game is in the A time-saving game state, it transfers processing to S3053-2, and if it determines that the game is not in the A time-saving game state, it transfers processing to S3053-5.

In S3053-2, the main CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the limiter count to update it. After executing the process of S3053-2, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3053-3.

In S3053-3, the main CPU 201 determines whether the limiter count is 0 or not. If the main CPU 201 determines that the limiter count is 0, it transfers the process to S3053-4, and if it determines that the limiter count is not 0, it ends the limiter count update process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 126).

Here, if it is determined that the limiter count = 0, it means that the number of transitions to the jackpot game state in the A time-saving game state has reached the limiter count.

In S3053-4, the main CPU 201 turns on the limiter activation flag. After executing the process of S3053-4, the main CPU 201 ends the limiter count update process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 126).

In S3053-5, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the limiter number of times at the time of the first win. The main CPU 201 refers to the win type determination table when the limiter function is not activated shown in FIG. 112(a), determines the limiter number of times based on the selected symbol command, and sets the determined limiter number of times. After executing the processing of S3053-5, the main CPU 201 ends the limiter number update processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol game determination processing (see FIG. 126).

[5-4-8. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, a special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3071 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 126) will be described with reference to Fig. 128. Fig. 128 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game end process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0" (S3072). In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game ends, and it becomes possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, i.e., the next special symbol game. After executing the process of S3072, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3073.

In S3073, the main CPU 201 performs a process for setting game state designation parameters for the special symbol. It also clears various random number values stored in the special symbol determination area. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving transmission of a special symbol game end command (S3074). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S3074, the main CPU 201 terminates the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 126).

[5-4-9. V winning device opening preparation process]
Next, referring to Fig. 129, a V winning device opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3016 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 122) will be described. Fig. 129 is a flow chart showing an example of the V winning device opening preparation process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S3081).

If it is determined in S3081 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (if S3081 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3081 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (if S3081 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3082.

In S3082, the main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 112, determines the opening mode per opening of the role as the opening pattern of the V winning device 3150, and sets the determined opening mode (for example, the maximum opening time and the maximum number of openings, etc.). In this embodiment, when the "first opening mode" is unfavorable to the player, the opening pattern is set to a maximum of 200 msec opening only once, and when the "second opening mode" is advantageous to the player, the opening pattern is set to a maximum of 1800 msec opening only once. Note that the opening pattern is not limited to this, and for example, when the "second opening mode" is advantageous to the player, the opening may be performed up to two times with a maximum of 900 msec opening per time, or the first time may be opened for a maximum of 600 msec, and the second time may be opened for a maximum of 1200 msec. Furthermore, multiple opening patterns may be provided for each opening of a reel within a total time not exceeding a specified time (e.g., 1800 msec), and one of these multiple opening patterns may be set based on, for example, the random number value of a special pattern.

Also, in S3082, the main CPU 201 determines the operation mode of the V shutter 3158 that opens and closes the V winning port 3155, and sets the determined operation mode (e.g., maximum opening time and maximum number of openings, etc.). In this embodiment, the operation mode is set to open the V winning port 3155 200 msec after the V winning device 3150 is opened. After executing the process of S3082, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3083.

In S3083, the main CPU 201 performs V winning device opening/closing control processing. In this processing, processing is performed to generate opening/closing control data for the V winning port 3155. After executing the processing of S3083, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S3084.

In S3084, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S3084), the V winning device opening control process (see S3017 in FIG. 122) is performed after the V winning device opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S3084, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3085.

In S3085, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S3085, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3086.

In S3086, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for the V winning device open display command. The V winning device open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S3086, the main CPU 201 ends the V winning device open preparation process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 122).

[5-4-10. V winning device opening control process]
Next, referring to Fig. 130, the V winning device opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3017 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 122) will be described. Fig. 130 is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening control process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special pattern is "4" (S3091).

If it is determined in S3091 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (if S3091 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the V winning device opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3091 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (if S3091 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3092.

In S3092, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of game balls that entered the V winning device 3150 when the opening and closing winning port 3151 was opened by the operation of the V attacker 3152 is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the V attacker count switch 3153 (see FIG. 109), which counts the number of winning game balls that entered the V winning device 3150, is the maximum number of winning balls. The value of the V attacker winning counter counted by the V attacker count switch 3153 is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203.

If it is determined in S3092 that the number of game balls that have won in the V winning device 3150 is not the maximum number of winning balls (if S3092 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3093.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3092 that the number of game balls that have won in the V winning device 3150 is the maximum number of winning balls (if S3092 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3094.

In S3093, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the V winning device 3150 (i.e., the maximum opening time of the open/close winning port 3151) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the process of S3082 (see FIG. 129) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S3093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 3150 has not elapsed (if S3093 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the V winning device opening control process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 3150 has elapsed (if S3093 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3094.

In S3094, the main CPU 201 performs a process of closing the V winning device 3150 (i.e., the open/close winning port 3151). After executing the process of S3094, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3095.

In S3095, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a V winning has been detected. In this process, it is determined whether or not a game ball has passed through the V winning port 3155 within a specified time (i.e., whether or not detection has occurred by the V winning port switch 3156). Note that the above-mentioned specified time may be any time related to the entry of a game ball into the V winning device 3150, and for example, the above-mentioned specified time may be within a specified time from when the V attacker 3152 starts operating.

If it is determined in S3095 that a V win has been detected (if S3095 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S3096.

In S3096, the main CPU 201, like S3053 above, subtracts the limiter count each time the A time-saving gaming state transitions to the jackpot gaming state, and performs a limiter count update process to determine whether or not to activate the limiter function. This limiter count update process in S3096 is a process that updates the limiter count when the state transitions from the second route to the jackpot gaming state. After executing the process of S3096, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3097.

In S3097, the main CPU 201 performs a start setting process for V hit game control. In this process, a signal (e.g., a V hit signal, etc.) output to the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 109 for both) via the external terminal board 184 is generated and updated. The signal generated and updated in this process is a hit signal for the special symbol that is the target of the special symbol game judgment process. When the V hit game control is executed, a round game of, for example, 4 rounds or 10 rounds is executed as shown in the hit type determination table (see FIG. 112), so that the player can win a large number of prize balls in the same way as when the jackpot game control process is executed. In this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the V hit game control and the jackpot game control process are distinguished and called, but the V hit game control can also be called the jackpot game control process. After executing the process of S3097, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3098.

In addition, in the V hit game control start setting process of S3097, the main CPU 201 also performs processing to clear various flags and counters, such as the time-saving flag and the time-saving counter.

In S3098, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. By performing this process, the opening of the V winning device 3150 (i.e., the operation of the V attacker 3152), which was first performed based on the opening of the reel, is processed as the first round of round play. In other words, the V winning game control, which is executed when it is determined that a V winning has been detected (S3095 is determined as YES), will start from the second round of round play. After performing the process of S3098, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3099.

In S3099, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as a process of setting the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 3150 is opened (i.e., the number of times the V attacker 3152 is operated) (S3100), a process of setting a V hit signal to the external terminal board 184 (S3101), a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S3102), a process of setting a game state designation parameter (S3103), and a process of reserving the transmission of a V hit start display command (S3104). By performing a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S3102), after the special symbol game judgment process is completed, a process of preparing to open the large winning port (see S3018 in FIG. 122) is performed. After that, the main CPU 201 completes the special symbol game judgment process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

Returning to S3095, if it is determined that no V winning was detected in S3095 (if S3095 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3105.

In S3105, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this processing, the special symbol game end processing described with reference to FIG. 128 is performed. After executing the processing of S3105, the main CPU 201 ends the V winning device opening control processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 122).

[5-4-11. Preparation for opening the large prize hole]
Next, referring to Fig. 131, a special symbol management process (see Fig. 122) executed by the main CPU 201 in S3018 will be described. Fig. 131 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special pattern is "5" (S3111).

If it is determined in S3111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (if S3111 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (if S3111 is determined as YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3112.

In S3112, the main CPU 201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of rounds played in the jackpot game state. The count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S3112, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3113.

In S3113, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of times the jackpot opening has been opened is the upper limit. In this process, it is determined whether the number of times the round play has been performed in the jackpot play state is the upper limit.

If it is determined in S3113 that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened has reached the upper limit (if S3113 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S3114.

In S3114, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "7." In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7" (S3114), the jackpot end process (see S3020 in FIG. 122) will be performed after the jackpot opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S3114, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3115.

In S3115, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a jackpot end display command (S3116). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S3116, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

Returning to S3113, if it is determined that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened is not the upper limit (if S3113 is judged as NO), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3117.

In S3117, the main CPU 201 performs processing to add 1 to the round counter value. After executing processing of S3117, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S3118.

In S3118, the main CPU 201 performs a process of selecting the large prize opening to be opened. In this process, the large prize opening 3131 is selected as the large prize opening to be opened to the large prize game state. If the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big prize, and the big prize game control process is started by deriving a stop display mode indicating a big prize, the large prize opening 3131 is selected as the large prize opening to be opened, and if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a hit to open the role, and the stop display mode indicating the role opening is derived, and the V win game control is started by detecting a V win, the V win device 3150 (i.e., the open/closed prize opening 3151) may be selected as the large prize opening to be opened, instead of the large prize opening 3131. After executing the process of S3118, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3119.

In S3119, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the large prize opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large prize opening 3131 is opened, the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 3131, the maximum number of winning balls into the large prize opening 3131, the number of winning balls when the large prize opening 3131 wins, etc. are set. The number of times the large prize opening 3131 is opened corresponds to the number of rounds. Note that this is not intended to exclude cases where the large prize opening 3131 is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of times the large prize opening 3131 is opened and closed as separate processes. After executing the process of S3119, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3120.

In S3120, the main CPU 201 performs a process for controlling the opening and closing of the large prize opening. In this process, the process for generating the opening and closing control data for the large prize opening 3131 or the V prize device 3150 is performed. After executing the process of S3120, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3121.

In S3121, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "6". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6" (S3121), the large prize opening opening control process (see S3019 in FIG. 122) is performed after the large prize opening opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S3121, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3122.

In S3122, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S3122, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3123.

In S3123, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of the large prize opening display command. The large prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S3123, the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

[5-4-12. Large prize opening control process]
Next, referring to Fig. 132, a special prize opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3019 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 122) will be described. Fig. 132 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening control process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (S3131).

If it is determined in S3131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6" (if S3131 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (if S3131 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3132.

In S3132, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 3131 is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the large prize opening count switch 3132 (see FIG. 109), which counts the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 3131, is the maximum number of winning balls. The value of the large prize opening counter counted by the large prize opening count switch 3132 is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203.

If it is determined in S3132 that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 3131 is not the maximum number of prizes (if S3132 returns a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3133.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3132 that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 3131 is the maximum number of winning balls (if S3132 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3134.

In S3133, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the special prize opening 3131 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the special prize opening related various setting process (see S3119 in FIG. 131) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S3133 that the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 3131 has not elapsed (if S3133 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening opening control process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3133 that the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 3131 has elapsed (if S3133 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3134.

In S3134, the main CPU 201 performs processing to close the large prize opening 3131. After executing processing of S3134, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S3135.

In S3135, the main CPU 201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S3135), the large prize opening preparation process (see S3018 in FIG. 122) will be performed again after this large prize opening control process is completed. After executing the process of S3135, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3136.

In S3136, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S3136, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3137.

In S3137, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving transmission of an inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S3137, the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening control process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

[5-4-13. Jackpot end processing]
Next, the big win end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3020 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122) will be described with reference to Fig. 133. Fig. 133 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win end process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special pattern is "7" (S3141).

If it is determined in S3141 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "7" (if S3141 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 121). In this case, it returns to the process from which the jackpot end process was called.

If it is determined in S3141 that the control state number of the special pattern is "7" (if S3141 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S3142.

In S3142, the main CPU 201 executes a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, various flags are set, and the values of various counters (e.g., ceiling counter, round counter, big prize slot winning counter, etc.) are set or reset. After executing S3142, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3143.

In S3143, the main CPU 201 performs a state setting process after the end of the jackpot. In this state setting process after the end of the jackpot, the main CPU 201 refers to the on/off of the limiter activation flag, and if the limiter activation flag is off, it determines the hit type determination table shown in FIG. 112(a), and if the limiter activation flag is on, it determines the hit type determination table shown in FIG. 112(b). Then, it refers to the determined hit type determination table, determines the mode of the game state after the jackpot game state (time-saving flag and time-saving count), and sets the data of the determined game state mode. Specifically, if the limiter activation flag is off, it sets the time-saving flag = 1 (time-saving flag on), sets the time-saving count counter = 100, and also sets the time-saving identification number = 1 that identifies the A time-saving game state. Also, if the limiter operation flag is on, the time-saving flag is set to 0 (time-saving flag is turned off), and the time-saving count counter is set to 0 and the time-saving identification number is set to 0. After executing the process of S3143, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 121). In this case, as described above, the process returns to the process from which the jackpot end process was called.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 set an interrupt prohibited area and perform the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interrupt prohibited area.

[5-4-14. Normal symbol control process]
Next, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S40 during the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 134. It goes without saying that, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in Fig. 134, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start condition for the normal symbol is satisfied, as in the special symbol control process.

Figure 134 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The numbers ("0" to "4") written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in Figure 134 are the control state numbers of the normal symbols. The main CPU 201 progresses the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol. For convenience, each process shown in Figure 134 is not shown as a subroutine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the waiting time for normal symbols is 0 (S3291).

If it is determined in S3291 that the waiting time for the normal symbol is not 0 (if S3291 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process and transfers the process to S41 (see FIG. 21) of the main control main process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3291 that the waiting time for the normal pattern is 0 (if S3291 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3292.

In S3292, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing the process of S3292, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3293. The main CPU 201 performs the process of S3293 and subsequent processes based on the control state number read in the process of S3292.

In S3293, the main CPU 201 performs variable display start processing for the normal symbol. This S3293 processing is performed when the control state number for the normal symbol is "0". Note that if the control state number for the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S3294.

In this variable display start process for normal symbols, if various random number values are stored in the normal symbol determination area as start information, the main CPU 201 performs "normal symbol hit determination process", "normal symbol determination process", "normal symbol variation pattern determination process", and "normal symbol time reduction management process", and then performs a process to set the normal symbol control state number to "1". Note that if a random number value for normal symbol hit determination etc. has not been extracted (if various random number values have not been stored in the normal symbol determination area), the normal symbol hit determination process, normal symbol determination process, normal symbol variation pattern determination process, etc. will not be performed, the normal symbol control state number will be held at "0", and the game ball will wait to pass through the passing gates 3126A and 3126B.

In the normal symbol winning judgment process in the normal symbol variable display start process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol winning judgment table shown in FIG. 117, and determines the winning/losing judgment value data ("normal symbol winning" or "miss") based on the game state and the random number value for winning judgment of the normal symbol stored in the normal symbol judgment area.

In the normal pattern determination process in the variable display start process of the normal pattern, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal pattern determination table shown in FIG. 118, and determines the "normal pattern hit selection pattern command" based on the above-mentioned hit/miss determination value data (the result of the normal pattern hit determination process) and the normal pattern random number value stored in the normal pattern determination area.

In addition, in the process of determining the normal pattern variation pattern in the process of starting the variable display of the normal pattern, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal pattern variation pattern table shown in FIG. 120, and determines the normal pattern variation pattern and the variable display time of the normal pattern based on the random number value for selecting the normal pattern effect stored in the normal pattern determination area. After that, the main CPU 201 sets the determined variable display time of the normal pattern, and causes the normal pattern display unit 161 to start the variable display of the normal pattern.

In the regular pattern time-saving management process in the variable display start process for regular patterns, it is determined whether the time-saving count counter is 1 or more, and if it is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time-saving count counter. If the time-saving count counter = 0 as a result of the subtraction, the time-saving flag and time-saving identification number are cleared, and transition control from the time-saving play state to the normal play state is performed. Also, if the time-saving count counter is not 1 or more, the regular pattern time-saving management process is terminated, and if the time-saving count counter is 1 or more but the subtraction result from the time-saving count counter is not time-saving count counter = 0, the regular pattern time-saving management process is terminated without clearing the time-saving flag and time-saving identification number.

In this embodiment, the time-saving count counter is configured to subtract 1 from the time-saving count counter when the variable display of the normal symbols starts in any of the time-saving play states A, B, and C. However, the time-saving play state may be configured to subtract 1 from the time-saving play counter when the variable display of the normal symbols starts only in the time-saving play state C, and not to subtract 1 from the time-saving play counter when the variable display of the normal symbols starts in the time-saving play state A and time-saving play states B.

In S3294, the main CPU 201 performs variable display end processing for the normal symbol. This S3294 processing is performed when the control state number for the normal symbol is "1". Note that if the control state number for the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S3295.

In this normal symbol variable display end process, the main CPU 201 manages whether the normal symbol variable display time has ended, and when the normal symbol variable display time has ended, it sets the normal symbol control state number to "2." If the normal symbol variable display time has not ended, it keeps the normal symbol control state number at "1" and waits for the normal symbol variable display time to end.

In S3295, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol gameplay determination processing. This S3295 processing is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S3296.

In this normal symbol game judgment process, the main CPU 201 performs a judgment process of the derived result of the normal symbol (for example, normal symbol hit or miss). Then, if the result of the normal symbol hit judgment process is a normal symbol hit, the opening pattern setting process (number of times to open, opening time, wait time) of the normal electric device 146 is performed, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "3". On the other hand, if the result of the normal symbol hit judgment process is a miss, the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric device 146 is not performed, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "0".

In addition, in the process of setting the opening pattern of the normal electric device 146 in the normal symbol game judgment process, the normal symbol hit type determination table shown in FIG. 119 is referenced, and the opening pattern of the normal electric device 3146 is determined based on the game state and the symbol selection command when a normal symbol hits, and the determined opening pattern is set. After that, the main CPU 201 transmits to the sub-CPU 301 the opening pattern command of the normal electric device corresponding to the determined opening pattern of the normal electric device 3146.

In S3296, the main CPU 201 performs a normal electric role release process. This S3296 process is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3297.

In this normal electric role release process, the main CPU 201 performs the normal electric role 146 release process according to the release pattern of the normal electric role 3146 determined in the normal symbol game determination process of S3295 above. Then, when the normal electric role 146 release process ends, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "5".

In S3297, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit end processing. This S3297 processing is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 ends this normal symbol hit end processing, it ends the normal symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see Figures 20 to 23).

In this normal symbol winning end process, the main CPU 201 performs a process to reset (clear) various parameters related to the normal symbol determined in steps S3293 to S3296 above, and various random number values stored in the normal symbol determination area.

As described above, the normal symbol hit determination process is determined based on the game state when the variable display time of the normal symbol is set (when the variable display of the normal symbol is started) in the normal symbol variable display start process of S3293 above, and the opening pattern of the normal electric device 146 is determined based on the game state when the variable display time of the normal symbol ends (when the variable display of the normal symbol ends) in the normal symbol game determination process of S3295 above. Therefore, if the game state is changed while the variable display of the normal symbol is being performed, the hit determination of the normal symbol and the opening pattern of the normal electric device 146 will be determined based on the game state that differs between when the variable display of the normal symbol is started and when the variable display of the normal symbol ends.

[5-4-15. Switch input detection process]
Next, the switch input detection process executed by the main CPU 201 in S320 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 45) will be described with reference to Fig. 135. Fig. 135 is a flow chart showing an example of the switch input detection process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

Compared to the first pachinko machine, the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko machine does not have a hold function that holds the start information of normal symbols and special symbols up to a specified number until the start conditions are met, and the processing content of the start port winning detection processing and the ball passing detection processing is partially different. Also, compared to the first pachinko machine, the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko machine has the configuration of the big winning port count switch 3132, V attacker count switch 3153, and V winning port switch 3156 added, so some of such processing has been added.

First, the main CPU 201 executes the first start port winning detection process (S3381). After executing the process of S3381, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3382.

In this first start port winning detection process, when the first start port switch 3121 detects the entry of a game ball into the first start port 3120, the main CPU 201 sets payout information corresponding to the first start port 3120 and determines whether there is an empty space in one of the first special symbol determination areas. When the main CPU 201 determines that there is an empty space in one of the first special symbol determination areas, it extracts various random number values (for example, various random number values such as a random number value for determining a jackpot for the first special symbol, a pattern random number value for the first special symbol, a random number value for determining a reach for the first special symbol, and a random number value for selecting a performance for the first special symbol) as start information for the first special symbol, and stores the various extracted random number values in one of the first special symbol determination areas. On the other hand, when it determines that there is no empty space in one of the first special symbol determination areas, it ends the first start port winning detection process without extracting various random number values.

Next, the main CPU 201 executes the second start port winning detection process (S3382). After executing the process of S3382, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3383.

In this second start port winning detection process, when the second start port switch 3141 detects the entry of a game ball into the second start port 3140, the main CPU 201 sets payout information corresponding to the second start port 3140 and determines whether there is an empty space in one of the second special symbol determination areas. When the main CPU 201 determines that there is an empty space in one of the second special symbol determination areas, it extracts various random number values (for example, various random number values such as a random number value for determining a jackpot for the second special symbol, a pattern random number value for the second special symbol, a random number value for determining the reach of the second special symbol, and a random number value for selecting the performance of the second special symbol) as start information for the second special symbol, and stores the various extracted random number values in one of the second special symbol determination areas. On the other hand, when it determines that there is no empty space in one of the second special symbol determination areas, it ends the second start port winning detection process without extracting various random number values.

In this way, in this embodiment, in order to perform the hit determination process for the first special pattern and the hit determination process for the second special pattern, only one first special pattern determination area and one second special pattern determination area are provided, and the first special pattern start memory area (1) to the first special pattern start memory area (4) for holding the start information for the special pattern until the start condition is met are not provided.

Next, the main CPU 201 executes a general prize opening passage detection process (S3383). In the general prize opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts etc. when a prize is won through the general prize opening 122 is set. After executing the process of S3383, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3384.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a large prize opening passage detection process (S3384). In the large prize opening passage detection process, when the main CPU 201 detects an entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 3131 by the large prize opening count switch 3132, the main CPU 201 sets payout information corresponding to the large prize opening 3131, and adds 1 to the large prize opening counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 3131 to update it. After executing the process of S3384, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3385.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a V attacker passage detection process (S3385). In the V attacker passage detection process, when the main CPU 201 detects the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 3131 by the large prize opening count switch 3132, it sets payout information corresponding to the V prize device 3150 (open/close prize opening 3151) and adds 1 to the V attacker prize counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the V prize device 3150 (open/close prize opening 3151) to update it. After executing the process of S3385, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3386.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a V prize opening passage detection process (S3386). In the V prize opening passage detection process, when the V prize opening switch 3156 detects the passage of a gaming ball into the V prize opening 3155, the main CPU 201 turns on the V prize opening passage flag. Note that even if a gaming ball passes through the V prize opening 3155, no payout information is set. After executing the process of S3386, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3387.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a ball passage detection process (S3387). In the ball passage detection process, when the first passage gate switch 3127A or the second passage gate switch 3127B detects the passage of a game ball to the first passage gate 3126A or the second passage gate 3126B, it determines whether or not there is an empty space in one normal symbol determination area. When the main CPU 201 determines that there is an empty space in one normal symbol determination area, it extracts various random number values (for example, various random number values such as a random number value for determining whether a normal symbol is hit, a pattern random number value for a normal symbol, and a random number value for selecting a performance of a normal symbol) as start information for the normal symbol, and stores the various extracted random number values in one normal symbol start determination area. On the other hand, when it determines that there is no empty space in one normal symbol start determination area, it ends the ball passage detection process without extracting various random number values.

As such, in this embodiment, only one normal pattern determination area is provided to perform the normal pattern winning determination process, and normal pattern start memory area (1) to normal pattern start memory area (4) are not provided to hold the start information of the normal pattern until the start condition is met.

[5-5. Game state transition diagram]
Next, the transition of the game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine will be described with reference to Fig. 136. Fig. 136 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

As described above, in this embodiment, in the normal game state, left hitting is the normal game mode, and in the time-saving game state A and time-saving game state B, right hitting is the normal game mode. In the time-saving game state C, the game mode changes between left hitting and right hitting as appropriate depending on the opening state of the normal electric device 3146.

For this reason, in the normal game state, a transition in game state is triggered by a game ball entering the first start hole 3120, and in the time-saving game state A and time-saving game state B, a transition in game state is triggered by a game ball entering the second start hole 3140. Also, in the time-saving game state C, a transition in game state is triggered by a game ball entering the first start hole 3120 or the second start hole 3140. In the following, the explanation will be given on the premise that a game ball has entered the first start hole 3120 in the normal game state, and that a game ball has entered the second start hole 3140 in the time-saving game state A and time-saving game state B.

As shown in FIG. 136, in normal game mode, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 3120, it is determined to be a "jackpot," a "gimmick release hit," or a "time-saving hit" (see FIG. 110).

In the normal game mode, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 3120 and a "jackpot" is determined, the game transitions to the jackpot game mode.

In addition, in the normal game state, a game ball enters the first start hole 3120 and a "gimmick opening hit" is determined, and when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 3155, the game state transitions to a big win game state, and when the game ball does not pass through the V winning hole 3155, the game state does not transition and the normal game state is maintained.

As mentioned above, even if a game ball enters the first starting hole 3120 and a "hit to open the special feature" is determined, the opening mode of the V winning device 3150 (opening and closing winning hole 3151) is unfavorable to the player, so it is extremely difficult to transition to a jackpot game state. Therefore, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 3120 and a "hit to open the special feature" is determined, there is essentially no transition in game state, and the normal game state is maintained.

Then, after the transition from the normal game state to the jackpot game state, the game transitions to the A time-saving game state.

The A time-saving game state is set to end when either of the following conditions is met: "100 time-saving times have been completed (see FIG. 112)" or "transition to a jackpot game state."

Here, "100 time-saving cycles completed" means "the total number of times the variable display of special symbols and the variable display of normal symbols has been counted 100 times."

In this embodiment, "100 times of time-saving play" refers to "the total number of times that the variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the normal symbol is counted 100 times," but it may be that either the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times or the variable display of the normal symbol is performed 100 times is met, or it may be that only the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times.

When the A time-saving play state transitions to a jackpot play state (a series of jackpots during the A time-saving play state), the limiter number of times is counted, and if the limiter number of times has been reached, the game transitions to the normal play state, and if the limiter number of times has not been reached, the game transitions back to the A time-saving play state.

In addition, in the normal game mode, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 3120 and a "time-saving hit" is determined, the game transitions to the time-saving game mode C.

The C time-saving game state is set to end when either of the following conditions is met: "End of one time of time-saving (see FIG. 112)" or "Transition to a jackpot game state."

Here, "one time of time-saving play ends" means that either the "variable display of a special symbol is counted once" or the "variable display of a normal symbol is counted once" is met. In this embodiment, the "time-saving play count" is counted when the variable display of a special symbol or normal symbol is performed, and if the game has not been transitioned to a jackpot game state, the C time-saving play state ends and the game transitions to a normal game state when the first variable display of a special symbol or the first variable display of a normal symbol is performed.

In addition, after transitioning from the C time-saving play state to the jackpot play state, the game will transition to the A time-saving play state after the jackpot play state ends.

Furthermore, in the normal game state, when the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed (e.g., a ceiling counter) reaches a ceiling value (e.g., 1000 times), the game transitions from the normal game state to the time-saving game state B.

The B time-saving game state is set to end when either of the following conditions is met: "the end of the variable display of special symbols a specified number of times (e.g., 1212 times)" or "transition to a jackpot game state."

When the "end of variable display of special symbols a specified number of times" occurs in the B time-saving game state, the game state transitions from the B time-saving game state to the normal game state. In addition, after transitioning from the B time-saving game state to the jackpot game state, the game state transitions to the A time-saving game state after the jackpot game state ends.

In this embodiment, the time-saving game state has three time-saving game states, namely, time-saving game state A, time-saving game state B, and time-saving game state C. However, the time-saving game state B may not be provided, and instead, two time-saving game states, namely, time-saving game state A and time-saving game state C, may be provided.

[5-6. Opening mode of normal electric accessories]
In the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the opening mode (opening pattern) of the normal electric device 3146 can be changed by adjusting the variable display time of the special symbol when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time-saving hit" in relation to the variable display time of the normal symbol. An example of the opening mode of the normal electric device 3146 will be described below.

Figure 137 is a time chart showing an example of the opening mode of the normal electric device 3146 in the normal game mode in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. Also, Figure 138 is a time chart showing an example of the opening mode of the normal electric device 3146 in the C time-saving game mode in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

Figures 137 and 138 show, from top to bottom, the change and stop of the normal symbol display section 161, the change and stop of the first special symbol display section 163, the operation and stop of the normal power solenoid 3148 that constitutes the normal electric device 3146, and the transition of the game state.

In addition, Fig. 137 and Fig. 138 are based on the premise that the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol is "normal symbol hit" and the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "time-saving hit." In addition, in this embodiment, the variable display time of the normal symbol in the normal game state and the C time-saving game state is fixed at 10,000 msec (10 s), as shown in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table in Fig. 120.

In addition, in Fig. 137 and Fig. 138, as shown in the normal pattern hit type determination table in Fig. 119, the unfavorable opening mode in which the opening time (200 msec) of the normal electric device 3146 in the normal game state is short is illustrated as "short opening", and the favorable opening mode in which the opening time (2000 to 3000 msec) of the normal electric device 3146 in the C time-saving game state is long is illustrated as "long opening". Furthermore, the type of the first special pattern that is displayed as stopped in response to a "time-saving hit" is illustrated as "stopped with C time-saving pattern".

Figure 137 (a) is an example of a time chart when the main CPU 201, in the normal game state, refers to the variable pattern table of the special symbols in the normal game state of Figure 113 and determines "Chance Variation A" in which the variable display time of the special symbols is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbols.

As shown in FIG. 137(a), since the variable display time of the special symbol is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol, after the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended (after the normal symbol has finished changing), the game state transitions from the normal game state to the C time-saving game state.

Therefore, when the variable display time of the normal symbol ends (when the normal symbol fluctuation ends), the game state is the normal game state, and as shown in the normal symbol winning type determination table in FIG. 119, the opening mode of the normal electric roler 3146 is "short opening" in the normal game state.

Figure 137 (b) is an example of a time chart when the main CPU 201, in the normal game state, refers to the special symbol variation pattern table in the normal game state of Figure 113 and determines "Chance Variation B" in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 137(b), since the variable display time of the special symbol is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol, the game state transitions from the normal game state to the time-saving C game state before the variable display time of the normal symbol ends (before the normal symbol changes).

For this reason, when the variable display time of the normal symbol ends (when the normal symbol fluctuation ends), the game state is the C time-saving game state, and as shown in the normal symbol winning type determination table in FIG. 119, the opening mode of the normal electric role device 3146 is a "long opening" in the C time-saving game state.

Here, Figure 137(b) shows the opening state of the normal electric device 3146 when "fz1" is selected as the symbol command for selecting a normal symbol in the C time-saving play state, and illustrates one operation (one opening) of the normal power solenoid 3148. Note that when "fz2" or "fz3" is selected as the symbol command for selecting a normal symbol in the C time-saving play state, the normal power solenoid 3148 will be operated twice, with a wait time in between. The same applies to Figure 138(b) described below.

Figure 138 (a) is an example of a time chart when the main CPU 201, in the C time-saving game state, refers to the special symbol variation pattern table in the C time-saving game state of Figure 114 and determines "Chance Variation A" in which the variable display time of the special symbol is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 138(a), when the variable display of the special symbol is performed once in the C time-saving game state, the condition for ending the C time-saving game state (ending one time of time-saving) is met, and the game state transitions from the C time-saving game state to the normal game state at the start of the variable display of the special symbol. While the game state is normal while the variable display of the special symbol is being performed, once the variable display of the special symbol ends and "stops at the C time-saving symbol", the game state transitions again from the normal game state to the C time-saving game state.

And because the variable display time of the special symbols is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbols, after the variable display time of the normal symbols has ended (after the normal symbols have finished changing), the game state transitions from the normal game state to the C time-saving game state.

Therefore, when the variable display time of the normal symbol ends (when the normal symbol fluctuation ends), the game state is the normal game state, and as shown in the normal symbol winning type determination table in FIG. 119, the opening mode of the normal electric roler 3146 is "short opening" in the normal game state.

Figure 138 (b) is an example of a time chart when the main CPU 201, in the C time-saving game state, refers to the special symbol variation pattern table in the C time-saving game state of Figure 114 and determines "Chance Variation B" in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 138(b), when the variable display of the special pattern is performed once in the C time-saving game state, the condition for ending the C time-saving game state (ending one time of time-saving) is met, and the game state transitions from the C time-saving game state to the normal game state at the start of the variable display of the special pattern. While the game state is normal while the variable display of the special pattern is being performed, once the variable display of the special pattern ends and "stops at the C time-saving pattern", the game state transitions again from the normal game state to the C time-saving game state.

And because the variable display time of the special symbols is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbols, the game state transitions from the normal game state to the time-saving C game state before the variable display time of the normal symbols ends (before the normal symbols finish changing).

For this reason, when the variable display time of the normal symbol ends (when the normal symbol fluctuation ends), the game state is the C time-saving game state, and as shown in the normal symbol winning type determination table in FIG. 119, the opening mode of the normal electric role device 3146 is a "long opening" in the C time-saving game state.

In the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, one of the conditions for ending the C time-saving game state, "ending one time of time-saving", is based on the condition that "the variable display of the special symbol is counted once" as well as "the variable display of the normal symbol is counted once". Therefore, as shown in FIG. 137(a) and FIG. 138(a), when the C time-saving game state is entered after the variable display of the special symbol is ended, even if the player hits the right side as an unintended game and passes the game ball through the second passing gate 3126B, the game state is entered from the C time-saving game state to the normal game state at the start of the variable display of the normal symbol, and an unintended "long opening" can be prevented as the opening mode of the normal electric device 3146.

In this way, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the winning judgment process for the normal symbol is determined based on the game state when the variable display of the normal symbol is performed (when the normal symbol starts to change), and the opening state of the normal electric device 3146 is determined based on the game state when the variable display of the normal symbol ends (when the normal symbol changes). This adds new interest to the fact that the game state is changed or maintained while the variable display of the normal symbol is being performed, and can further increase the excitement of the game.

In particular, in this embodiment, by adjusting the variable display time of the special pattern when the result of the hit determination process for the first special pattern is a "time-saving hit" in relation to the variable display time of the normal pattern, it is possible to intentionally change and maintain the game state while the variable display of the normal pattern is being performed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 113 and 114, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special pattern is a "time-saving hit," multiple special pattern change pattern tables are provided with different selection rates for "chance change A," in which the variable display time of the special pattern is longer than the variable display time of the normal pattern, and "chance change B," in which the variable display time of the special pattern is shorter than the variable display time of the normal pattern, and the special pattern change pattern table is switched according to a predetermined change condition, so that the switching of the special pattern change pattern table can also be interesting, thereby making the game more exciting.

In particular, in this embodiment, the special pattern variation pattern table can be switched based on the information of the pattern stopped and displayed on the first special pattern display section 163 when a "hit to open the special feature" is determined as a predetermined change condition (small win pattern switching information), so that the "hit to open the special feature" and the small win pattern switching information can be made interesting, and the excitement of the game can be further increased.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 111 and FIG. 112, if the game ball enters the second starting hole 3140, it is easier to transition to a jackpot game state from the first route or the second route than when the game ball enters the first starting hole 3120. In particular, in this embodiment, it is configured so that the game ball can essentially transition to a jackpot game state by entering the second starting hole 3140. Therefore, as an opening mode of the normal electric device 3146, the value of the "long opening" in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second starting hole 3140 is increased, and the opening mode of the normal electric device 3146 can be made more interesting, thereby further improving the excitement of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, a limiter function is provided, but even if the operation of the limiter function ends a consecutive win in the A time-saving game state and transitions to the normal game state, the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 116 is selected in the first special symbol hit determination process in the normal game state after the operation of the limiter function. This special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 116 is a specific variation pattern table that is likely to select advantageous chance variation B in which a "long opening" is likely to occur as the opening mode of the normal electric role 3146 in the normal game state, so that if the result of the first hit determination process of the first special symbol after transition to the normal game state is a "time-saving hit," it is possible to transition again to the big win game state via the second route, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the operation of the limiter function.

In addition, in this embodiment, one of the conditions for ending the C time-saving game state, "ending one time of time-saving play", is set to "counting one variable display of a special pattern", and the game state can be changed by subtracting the number of time-saving play when the variable display of a special pattern is performed. Therefore, even if the probability that the result of the special pattern hit determination process will be a "time-saving hit" is increased, it is possible to prevent the adverse effect of the time-saving game state being constantly controlled, and playability can be maintained.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, one of the conditions for ending the C time-saving game state, "ending one time of time-saving", requires that "the variable display of the special pattern is counted once" as well as "the variable display of the normal pattern is counted once". Therefore, even if an unintended right hit is performed in the C time-saving game state and the game ball passes through the second passing gate 3126B, the game state is transitioned from the C time-saving game state to the normal game state at the start of the variable display of the normal pattern, and an unintended "long opening" is prevented from being performed as the opening mode of the normal electric device 3146.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the second passing gate 3126B is located below the normal electric device unit 3145 in the right-side area 107. Therefore, even if a game ball happens to flow down the right-side area 107 during the C time-saving game state and passes through the second passing gate 3126B, the game ball can be prevented from unintentionally entering the normal electric device 3146.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first starting hole 3120 is positioned directly below and adjacent to the first passing gate 3126A, so that the game ball that passes through the first passing gate 3126A immediately enters the first starting hole 3120, and it is possible to adjust the time when the normal pattern starts to change when the game ball passes through the first passing gate 3126A and the time when the special pattern starts to change when the game ball enters the first starting hole 3120 (the changing display can start at approximately the same time).

[6. Second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine]
Next, a second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine will be described. The second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine differs from the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine in the configuration of the game board unit (arrangement of passing gates), in the provision of a reserve function for retaining the start information of normal symbols and special symbols up to a predetermined number, and in the end conditions of the time-saving game state.

Hereinafter, in explaining the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the same components as those in the first embodiment of the first pachinko gaming machine and the fourth pachinko gaming machine will be given the same symbols and step numbers, and detailed explanations of their configurations and processing will be omitted.

[6-1. Game board unit]
A game board unit 4010 provided in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine will be described with reference to Fig. 139. This game board unit 4010 is also disposed in front of the base door 3 (see Fig. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see Fig. 2) in the same manner as the first and first embodiments of the fourth pachinko game machine.

Figure 139 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 4010 provided in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. The game board unit 4010 has a game panel 4100 on which various components are arranged, and a game area 105 is formed on the front side of the game panel 4100, in which the released game balls can roll and flow down.

As shown in FIG. 139, the game board unit 4010 provided in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine differs from the game board unit 3010 provided in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine mainly in that the right side area 107 does not include the second passing gate 3126B of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

In the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the second passing gate 3126B is not provided in the right area 107 because the machine is provided with a holding function that holds the start information for normal and special symbols up to a specified number, which prevents a game ball hit to the right from passing through the second passing gate 3126B, causing the number of reserved normal symbols only to be stored, making it impossible to adjust the variable display time for normal and special symbols.

Another difference, not shown in FIG. 139, is that the LED unit 160 is equipped with a reserve display section 162 for normal symbols, a reserve display section 165 for a first special symbol, and a reserve display section 166 for a second special symbol.

[6-2. Electrical configuration]
As for the control circuit of the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, compared to the control circuit of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine (Figure 109), the configuration of the second passing gate switch 3127B that detects the passage of the game ball through the second passing gate 3126B has been deleted, and only the configurations of the ordinary symbol reserve display unit 162, the first special symbol reserve display unit 165, and the second special symbol reserve display unit 166 in the first pachinko game machine have been added, so detailed explanation will be omitted.

In addition, in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, a reserve function is provided for reserving a predetermined number of start information for normal and special symbols, so the main RAM 203 has a normal symbol start memory area (1) to a normal symbol start memory area (4) for reserving a predetermined number of start information for normal symbols, a first special symbol start memory area (1) to a first special symbol start memory area (4) for reserving a predetermined number of start information for special symbols, and a second special symbol start memory area (1) to a second special symbol start memory area (4).

[6-3. Basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Figures 140 to 142.

The second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine differs from the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine mainly in the special symbol fluctuation pattern table, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table, etc., in order to synchronize the fluctuation times of the special symbol and the normal symbol.

In addition, in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the end condition of the A time-saving game state is set to be the establishment of either the condition "100 times of time-saving" or "transition to the jackpot game state", but "100 times of time-saving" is set to "100 times of variable display of special symbols" without counting the variable display of normal symbols. Similarly, the end condition of the C time-saving game state is set to be the establishment of either the condition "1 time of time-saving" or "transition to the jackpot game state", but "1 time of time-saving" is set to "1 time of variable display of special symbols" without counting the variable display of normal symbols.

In addition, the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine has in common the special symbol winning determination table (Figure 110), the special symbol determination table (Figure 111), the winning type determination table (Figure 112), the regular symbol winning determination table (Figure 117), the regular symbol determination table (Figure 118), and the regular symbol winning type determination table (Figure 119) of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

[6-3-1. Special symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 140 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state and the time-saving game state C in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. Also, FIG. 141 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols after the limiter function is activated in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. Note that the variation pattern table of special symbols in the time-saving game state A and the time-saving game state B is the same as that in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, so the explanation is omitted. Note that the variation pattern table of special symbols shown in FIG. 140 and FIG. 141 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

The special symbol variation pattern table shown in Figures 140 and 141 corresponds the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol winning determination process, the random number value for effect selection, the special symbol variation pattern, and the variable display time of the special symbol.

The main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table according to the game state, etc., and refers to the determined special symbol variation pattern table to determine the variation pattern and the variable display time of the special symbol based on the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol winning determination process, and the random number value for effect selection. Then, when the main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern, it transmits a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the sub-CPU 301.

Here, in the "Notes" column of Figures 140 and 141, the "Special electric feature release end time" and "Special chart processing end time" are listed for reference.

The "special electric role opening end time" refers to the opening time of the opening and closing winning opening 3151 that opens when a "role opening hit" occurs. As explained in the winning type determination table in FIG. 112, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "role opening hit", in this embodiment, the opening time of the opening and closing winning opening 3151 is 200 msec, which is the unfavorable "first opening mode", so the "special electric role opening end time" is shown as "200 msec".

"Special symbol processing end time" refers to the time from when the special symbol management processing shown in FIG. 122 starts to when it ends for the start information of one special symbol. Specifically, it refers to the time from when the special symbol variable display start processing (special symbol control state number = 0) in FIG. 123 is performed to when the special symbol game end processing in FIG. 128 is performed.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in normal game state and C time-saving game state)
The special pattern variation pattern table TC1 shown in Figure 140 is a variation pattern table that is selected after the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine is backed up and cleared, or after the first special pattern corresponding to the selection pattern command "z4" for "hit on opening the special device" is stopped and displayed.

The special symbol variation pattern table TC2 shown in FIG. 140 is a variation pattern table that is selected after the first special symbol corresponding to the selection symbol command "z5" for "hit on opening the reel" is stopped and displayed.

The special symbol variation pattern table TC3 shown in FIG. 140 is a variation pattern table that is selected after the first special symbol corresponding to the selection symbol command "z6" for "hit on opening the reel" is stopped and displayed.

In the special symbol fluctuation pattern tables TC1 to TC3 shown in FIG. 140, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "time-saving hit," one of the fluctuation patterns is selected: "Chance fluctuation A" of fluctuation pattern "01H" in which the variable display time of the special symbol is equal to or longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol (13,300 or 13,500 msec), or "Chance fluctuation B" of fluctuation pattern "02H" in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol.

In the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, as in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, in the normal game state and the C time-saving game state, due to the relationship with the variable display time of the normal pattern, chance fluctuation A is likely to cause the second start hole 3140 to open in an unfavorable manner due to the operation of the normal electric device 3146, and short chance fluctuation B is likely to cause the second start hole 3140 to open in an advantageous manner due to the operation of the normal electric device 3146.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern tables TC1 to TC3 shown in Fig. 140 (1) to (3) have different selection rates for chance fluctuation A and chance fluctuation B, similar to the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. Chance fluctuation B, which is likely to result in an advantageous opening state of the second starting hole 3140 in the normal gaming state and the C time-saving gaming state, is configured to be more likely to be selected in the order of special symbol fluctuation pattern table T1 < special symbol fluctuation pattern table T2 < special symbol fluctuation pattern table T3.

For this reason, of the special symbol variation pattern tables TC1 to TC3, the special symbol variation pattern table TC3 is the most advantageous variation pattern table for the player, but as described above, the selected symbol commands are configured to be most likely to be selected in the order "z6" < "z5" < "z4", so the special symbol variation pattern table TC3 corresponding to the selected symbol command "z6" is configured to be the least likely to be selected.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, when attention is paid to the "Special symbol processing end time" in the "Notes" column of the special symbol variation pattern tables TC1 to TC3 shown in Figures 140 (1) to (3), it has the following characteristics.

When the first special symbol is judged to be a "time-saving hit" in the hit judgment process, the special symbol fluctuation pattern (01H) of the disadvantageous chance fluctuation A is set so that the "special symbol processing end time" is "13,500 msec."

In addition, the variable display time of the special symbol is set so that the special symbol change pattern (0BH) when the first special symbol hit determination process determines that a "gimmick opening hit" occurs, and the "special symbol processing end time" is 13,500 msec.

In other words, the variable display time of the special symbol is set so that the "special symbol processing end time" of the special symbol fluctuation pattern (01H) of the disadvantageous chance fluctuation A when the hit determination process of the first special symbol determines that it is a "time-saving hit" is the same as the "special symbol processing end time" of the special symbol fluctuation pattern (0BH) when the hit determination process of the first special symbol determines that it is a "gimmick opening hit."

Here, the special symbol fluctuation pattern (01H) of the disadvantageous chance fluctuation A when the hit determination process of the first special symbol determines that it is a "time-saving hit" and the special symbol fluctuation pattern (0BH) when the hit determination process of the first special symbol determines that it is a "gimmick release hit" are special symbol fluctuation patterns that are essentially equivalent to a "special symbol miss" in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. And the special symbol variable display time is set so that all of the special symbol fluctuation patterns (01H, 0BH) that are essentially equivalent to a special symbol miss will have the same "special symbol processing end time".

(Special pattern variation table after limiter function activation)
The special pattern variation pattern table ZC1 shown in FIG. 141 (1) is a specific variation pattern table that is selected in the first special pattern winning determination process after the transition to the normal game state following the activation of the limiter function.

In the special symbol fluctuation pattern table ZC1 shown in FIG. 141 (1), if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "time-saving hit," chance fluctuation B, which is likely to result in an advantageous opening state of the second starting hole 3140 in normal game mode, is always selected.

As with the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, when Chance Variation B is selected in the normal game state, the second start hole 3140 opens in an advantageous manner, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second start hole 3140. In this embodiment, as described above, if the game ball enters the second start hole 3140, it is easy to transition to a jackpot game state from the first route or the second route, and it is possible to essentially transition to a jackpot game state by the game ball entering the second start hole 3140.

Therefore, even if a winning streak in the time-saving play state ends due to the activation of the limiter function, if the result of the first hit determination process for the first special symbol after transition to the normal play state is a "time-saving hit," it is possible to transition again to the jackpot play state via the second route, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game due to the activation of the limiter function.

In addition, in this embodiment, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table ZC1 is configured so that chance fluctuation B is always selected when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "time-saving hit," but it may also be configured so that chance fluctuation A, which is more likely to result in an unfavorable opening state of the second starting hole 3140, is selected with a lower probability than chance fluctuation B.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern table ZC2 shown in FIG. 116(2) is a modified example of the special symbol fluctuation pattern table ZC1 shown in FIG. 116(1), and is a specific fluctuation pattern table that is selected based on the first special symbol hit determination process after the transition to the normal game state following the activation of the limiter function. The special symbol fluctuation pattern table ZC2 is configured so that when the result of the first special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," chance fluctuation A is selected with a probability of 20% and chance fluctuation B with a probability of 80%.

Even if you do this, if the result of the first hit determination process for the first special symbol after transitioning to the normal game state is a "time-saving hit," the probability of transitioning again to the jackpot game state via the second route increases, preventing a decrease in interest in the game due to the activation of the limiter function.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern tables ZC1 and ZC2 are fluctuation pattern tables that are selected based on the first special symbol hit determination process after the transition to the normal game state following the activation of the limiter function, but are not limited to the first time. For example, in response to the special symbol hold function, when the special symbol start information is held up to a specific number of reserved symbols (e.g., four symbols), the fluctuation pattern tables may be selected based on the special symbol hit determination process up to the specific number of reserved symbols, or may be fluctuation pattern tables selected based on the special symbol hit determination process up to an arbitrary predetermined number of times.

In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "time-saving hit," there is one chance fluctuation A and one chance fluctuation B, but the configuration may also be such that, based on the variable display time of the normal symbol, there are multiple chance fluctuation A groups in which the variable display time of the special symbol is equal to or longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol, and multiple chance fluctuation B groups in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol.

[6-3-2. Normal pattern variation table]
Fig. 142 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in Fig. 142 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 142 corresponds to the game state at the start of the variable display of the normal symbol, the result of the winning determination process for the normal symbol, the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect extracted when the gaming ball passes through the passing gate 3126A, the normal symbol variation pattern, and the variable display time of the normal symbol. The random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table and determines the normal symbol variation pattern and the normal symbol variable display time based on the game state at the start of the normal symbol variable display, the result of the normal symbol winning determination process, and the normal symbol effect selection random number value extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 3126A. Then, when the main CPU 201 determines the normal symbol variation pattern, it transmits a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined normal symbol variation pattern to the sub CPU 301.

Here, in the "Notes" column of Figure 142, the "Game status when variable display ends," "End time of normal electric device opening," and "End time of normal map processing" are listed for reference.

"Game state at the end of the variable display" refers to the game state when the variable display of the normal symbols ends, and may differ from the game state when the variable display of the normal symbols begins. Note that the "game state at the end of the variable display" also includes time-saving game state A and time-saving game state B, but as these are not very relevant to the gameplay of this embodiment, explanations of them in the notes are omitted.

"Normal electric device opening end time" means the end time of the opening pattern of the normal electric device 3146 (first opening time + wait time + second opening time). In the normal game state, if the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol is "normal symbol hit", as explained in the normal symbol hit type determination table in FIG. 119, only the first opening time of 200 msec becomes the normal electric device opening end time. Also, in the C time-saving game state, if the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol is "normal symbol hit", as explained in the normal symbol hit type determination table in FIG. 119, the normal electric device opening end time becomes the sum of the first opening time, wait time, and second opening time, whichever is greater, 2500 msec, 4600 msec, or 5600 msec.

"Normal symbol processing end time" refers to the time from when the normal symbol control processing shown in Figure 134 starts to when it ends for one normal symbol start information.

In particular, in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, when one focuses on the "Regular symbol processing end time" in the "Notes" column of the regular symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 142, it has the following characteristics.

When the game state at the start of the variable display of the normal symbol is the normal game state or the C time shortened game state, the variable display time of the normal symbol is set so that the "normal symbol processing end time" when the game state at the end of the variable display of the normal symbol is the normal game state (01H) when the normal symbol hit determination process determines that the "normal symbol hit" is reached is "13,500 msec."

In addition, when the game state at the start of the variable display of the normal symbol is the normal game state or the C time shortened game state, the variable display time of the normal symbol is set so that the normal symbol change pattern (02H) when the normal symbol hit determination process determines that the normal symbol is a miss is always 13,500 msec, regardless of the game state at the end of the variable display of the normal symbol.

Here, if the game state at the start of the variable display of the normal symbol is the normal game state or the C time shortened game state, and the game state at the end of the variable display of the normal symbol is the normal game state, even if the normal symbol hit determination process determines that the normal symbol is a hit, as shown in FIG. 119, the opening pattern of the normal electric device 3146 will be an unfavorable opening mode. Also, if the normal symbol hit determination process determines that the normal symbol is a miss, the normal electric device 3146 will not operate, which will naturally be disadvantageous to the player.

For this reason, when the game state at the start of the variable display of the normal symbol is the normal game state or the C time shortened game state, the normal symbol variation pattern (predetermined 01H) in which the normal symbol hit determination process determines that the "normal symbol hit" is true but the game state at the end of the variable display of the normal symbol is the normal game state, and the normal symbol variation pattern (02H) in which the normal symbol hit determination process determines that the "normal symbol miss" is true are normal symbol variation patterns that correspond to a "substantially normal symbol miss" that is disadvantageous to the player. The variable display time of the normal symbol is set so that all normal symbol variation patterns that correspond to a "substantially normal symbol miss" have the same "normal symbol processing end time".

Comparing the special symbol fluctuation pattern table shown in Figures 140 and 141 with the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table shown in Figure 142, the "special symbol processing end time (13,500 msec)" (see Figures 140 and 141) in the special symbol fluctuation pattern corresponding to "substantially a special symbol miss" is configured to be the same as the "normal symbol processing end time (13,500 msec)" (see Figure 142) in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern corresponding to "substantially a normal symbol miss".

As a result, as will be described later with reference to Figure 143, even if a reserve function is provided that reserves start information for normal and special symbols up to a specified number, the difference in the start time of the variable display of normal and special symbols can be suppressed.

[6-4. Main control processing]
In the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 are different from those in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine in that the process for performing the reserve function that reserves the start information of normal symbols and special symbols up to a predetermined number, and the time reduction count is not subtracted when the variable display of normal symbols is performed, but the other processes are the same. The process for performing this reserve function is the same as that in the first to third pachinko game machines, but the differences will be explained using the drawings used in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

(Special pattern variable display start process)
In the special symbol variable display start process (see FIG. 123) in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, if the control state number of the special symbol is determined to be "0" (YES in S3021), the special symbol hit determination process is performed using the start information (random number value for determining the big hit of the special symbol, etc.) stored in the special symbol determination area (S3022). However, in the special symbol variable display start process in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, if the control state number of the special symbol is determined to be "0" (YES in S3021), the "special symbol start information shift process" is performed, and then the special symbol hit determination process (S3022) is performed.

Specifically, in the "special symbol start information shift process", when the special symbol variable display start process is processing the first special symbol, the start information stored in the first special symbol start memory area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special symbol determination area, and the start information stored in the first special symbol start memory area (2) to the first special symbol start memory area (4) is shifted to the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory area (3). Note that when the special symbol variable display start process is processing the second special symbol, instead of the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory area (4), the second special symbol start memory area (1) to the second special symbol start memory area (4) are shifted in the same way as when the first special symbol is processing.

(Normal symbol control processing)
In the variable display start process (S3293) of the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 135) in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, if various random number values are stored as start information in the normal symbol determination area, a hit determination process for the normal symbol is performed. However, in the variable display start process for the normal symbol in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, similar to the above "start information shift process for special symbols", after the start information shift process for the normal symbol is performed, if various random number values are stored as start information in the normal symbol determination area, a hit determination process for the normal symbol is performed. Also, in the variable display start process for the normal symbol in the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 134), the "time reduction management process for normal symbols" in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine is not performed.

(Switch input detection process)
In the first start hole winning detection process (S3381), the second start hole winning detection process (S3382), and the ball passing detection process (S3387) of the switch input detection process (see FIG. 135) in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the extracted start information is stored in one special symbol determination area or normal symbol start determination area. However, in the special symbol variable display start process in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the start information is stored while referring to the free spaces in the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory area (4), the second special symbol start memory area (1) to the second special symbol start memory area (4), the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory area (4), and the normal symbol start memory area (1) to the normal symbol start memory area (4). This is the same as in the first pachinko game machine.

[6-5. Opening mode of normal electric accessories]
Figure 143 is a time chart showing an example of the opening mode of a normal electric device in the normal game state or the C-time shortened game state in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

Figure 143 illustrates, from above to below, the fluctuation and stopping of the normal symbol display section 161, the operation and stopping of the normal power solenoid 3148 that constitutes the normal electric device 3146, the fluctuation and stopping of the first special symbol display section 163, and the transition of the game state.

In addition, in FIG. 143, as shown in the normal symbol hit type determination table in FIG. 119, the unfavorable opening mode in which the opening time of the normal electric device 3146 in the normal game state is short (200 msec) is illustrated as "short opening", and the favorable opening mode in which the opening time of the normal electric device 3146 in the C time-saving game state is long (2000 to 3000 msec) is illustrated as "long opening". Furthermore, the type of the first special pattern that is displayed as stopped in response to a "time-saving hit" is illustrated as "stopped at C time-saving pattern", and the opening time of the opening and closing winning port 3151 that is opened when a "device opening hit" is achieved is illustrated as "device opening end time".

At the time (A) in FIG. 143, the first special symbol and normal symbol are shown which are variable displayed for the first time, and when the game state is the C time-saving game state, the normal symbol display section 161 starts the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to a "normal symbol miss", and the first special symbol display section 163 starts the variable display time of the first special symbol corresponding to a "gimmick to open the special feature". In addition, with the start of the variable display time of the first special symbol, the game state transitions from the C time-saving game state to the normal game state.

The variable display time of the first special symbol corresponding to a "hit on the special symbol opening" is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to a "miss on the normal symbol", but the "special symbol processing end time", which is the sum of the variable display time of the first special symbol and the "special electric special symbol opening end time", is set to the same time as the "normal symbol processing end time" for the normal symbol.

For this reason, at the time (i) in Figure 143, the "special pattern processing end time" for the first special pattern and the "regular pattern processing end time" for the regular pattern are set to the same time, so the start times of the fluctuation of the first special pattern and the regular pattern that are variably displayed for the second time are roughly synchronized.

At the time (i) in Figure 143, when the game state is the normal game state, the normal pattern display section 161 starts a variable display time of the normal pattern corresponding to a "normal pattern hit", and the first special pattern display section 163 starts a variable display time of the first special pattern of the disadvantageous chance variation A corresponding to a "time-saving hit".

The variable display time of the first special symbol of the disadvantageous chance variation A corresponding to a "time-saving hit" is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to a "normal symbol hit", and the variable display time of the first special symbol ends after the variable display time of the normal symbol ends, and the game state transitions from the normal game state to the time-saving game state C.

Therefore, when the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to the "normal symbol hit" has ended, the variable display time of the first special symbol has not ended, the game state is the normal game state, and as shown in the normal symbol hit type determination table in FIG. 119, the "short opening" in the normal game state is performed as the opening mode of the normal electric role.

The variable display time of the first special symbol of the disadvantageous chance variation A corresponding to a "time-saving hit" is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to a "normal symbol hit", but the "normal symbol processing end time", which is the normal symbol variable display time plus the time of "short opening", which is the "normal electric role opening end time", is set to the same time as the "special symbol processing end time" for the first special symbol.

For this reason, even at the time (c) in Figure 143, the "special pattern processing end time" for the first special pattern and the "regular pattern processing end time" for the regular pattern are set to the same time, so the start times of the fluctuations between the first special pattern and the regular pattern that are variably displayed for the third time will be roughly synchronized.

At the time (c) in Figure 143, when the game state is the C time-saving game state, the normal pattern display section 161 starts a variable display time of the normal pattern corresponding to a "normal pattern hit", and the first special pattern display section 163 starts a variable display time of the first special pattern of the advantageous chance variation B corresponding to a "time-saving hit". In addition, with the start of the variable display time of the first special pattern, the game state transitions from the C time-saving game state to the normal game state.

At the time (E) in Figure 143, the variable display time of the first special symbol of the advantageous chance variation B corresponding to a "time-saving hit" is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to a "normal symbol hit", and the variable display time of the first special symbol ends just before the variable display time of the normal symbol ends, and the game state transitions from the normal game state to the time-saving game state C.

At the time (E) in Figure 143, when the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to the "normal symbol hit" ends, the variable display time of the first special symbol has already ended and the game state has transitioned to the C time-saving game state, and as shown in the normal symbol hit type determination table in Figure 119, the "long opening" in the C time-saving game state is performed as the opening mode of the normal electric role.

In this way, in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, in addition to the configuration that produces the effects in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the "special symbol processing end time" in the special symbol variation pattern (01H, 0BH) that corresponds to "effectively a special symbol miss" is configured to be the same as the "regular symbol processing end time" in the normal symbol variation pattern that corresponds to "effectively a normal symbol miss" (Figs. 140 to 142). As a result, even if there is a reservation function that reserves the start information of normal symbols and special symbols up to a predetermined number, it is possible to suppress the difference in the time of change between the normal symbols and the special symbols until a jackpot is hit.

<Modification of the fourth pachinko gaming machine>
Next, a fourth pachinko gaming machine that is a modified example of the first and second embodiments will be described.

In the first and second embodiments of the fourth pachinko game machine, the game balls flowing down from the left side area 106 are configured to be able to pass/enter directly into the first passing gate 3126A and the first starting port 3120 while colliding with the game nails. However, in order to pass/enter the first passing gate 3126A and the first starting port 3120, the game balls may enter a distribution device (for example, a so-called Krun, etc.), and only the game balls distributed by the distribution device to a specific outlet may pass/enter the first passing gate 3126A and the first starting port 3120. For example, the stage 118 formed in the center role 115 may be configured as a distribution device, and the game balls entering the warp entrance 117 may be configured to be distributed by the distribution device to multiple outlets not shown, and only the game balls distributed to a specific outlet may pass/enter the first passing gate 3126A and the first starting port 3120. In particular, in cases where the fourth pachinko game machine does not have a hold function for holding a predetermined number of normal and special symbol start information, the distribution device can maintain interest in the game even if the pass/entry rate to the first passing gate 3126A and the first starting port 3120 per unit time is reduced.

In the first and second embodiments of the fourth pachinko game machine, when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the variable display time of the special symbol is determined based on the remaining time of the variable display time of the normal symbol that is already displayed in a variable manner. However, when the variable display time of the special symbol is determined, the variable display time of the special symbol may be determined based on the remaining time of the variable display time of the normal symbol that is already displayed in a variable manner. For example, when the "chance variation B" of the special symbol that is advantageous to the player is determined, the variable display time of the first special symbol that is shorter than the remaining time of the variable display time of the normal symbol that is already displayed in a variable manner is calculated (for example, the remaining time of the variable display time of the normal symbol - 1 second), and the calculated time is determined as the variable display time of the first special symbol of the chance variation B. In addition, when the "chance variation A" of the special symbol that is disadvantageous to the player is determined, the variable display time of the first special symbol that is longer than the remaining time of the variable display time of the normal symbol that is already displayed in a variable manner is calculated (for example, the remaining time of the variable display time of the normal symbol + 1 second), and the calculated time is determined as the variable display time of the first special symbol of the chance variation A. In particular, if the machine is equipped with a hold function that holds the start information for normal and special symbols up to a specified number, it is effective because it allows you to adjust the end time of the variable display time for normal and special symbols in real time.

In addition, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the second passing gate 3126B is provided in the right area 107 of the gaming board unit 3010, but as shown in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the second passing gate 3126B does not have to be provided in the right area 107 of the gaming board unit 3010.

In addition, in the first and second embodiments of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the number of time-saving times is subtracted when the variable display of the special symbol is performed, allowing a transition from the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state; however, as with the first to third pachinko gaming machines, the number of time-saving times may be subtracted after the variable display of the special symbol is performed, allowing a transition from the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state.

In addition, in the first and second embodiments of the fourth pachinko game machine, the number of consecutive jackpots that transition to a jackpot game state under specific conditions (time-saving game state A) is counted, and when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined limiter number, a "limiter function" is provided that partially restricts the game state to which the game state transitions after the jackpot game state ends, but the limiter function does not have to be provided.

In addition, in the first and second embodiments of the fourth pachinko game machine, the "hit of the opening of the special feature" is determined when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed, but the machine may be configured so that the "hit of the opening of the special feature" is not determined when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed.

(others)
The fourth pachinko gaming machine described above can apply the techniques of each embodiment, including modified examples. The above-mentioned embodiment does not limit the contents of the present invention, and modifications can be made to the extent that they do not deviate from the scope of the claims.

In addition, the effects described in the fourth pachinko gaming machine are merely a list of the most favorable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in each embodiment of the present invention.

Furthermore, the above [4. Expansion Example] can also be applied to the fourth pachinko gaming machine, so long as there is no inconsistency in its gameplay or control.

[7. The fifth pachinko game machine]
Next, the fifth pachinko machine will be described. The fifth pachinko machine is a so-called type 1 pachinko machine, but it differs in that the first pachinko machine is mainly a "special symbol game" using special symbols, whereas the fifth pachinko machine is mainly a "normal symbol game" using normal symbols, and accordingly the configurations of various components are partially different.

Furthermore, unlike the first pachinko gaming machine, the fifth pachinko gaming machine does not have two types of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol), but only one type of special symbol. Therefore, there is no concept of a "priority variable machine", "sequential variable machine", or "simultaneous variable machine" as described above. However, like the first to third pachinko gaming machines, it may have two types of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol).

Hereinafter, when describing an embodiment of the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the same components as those in the first pachinko gaming machine will be given the same symbols and step numbers, and detailed descriptions of their configurations and processing will be omitted.

[7-1. Game board unit]
The game board unit 5010 of the fifth pachinko game machine will be described with reference to Fig. 144. This game board unit 5010 is also disposed in front of the base door 3 (see Fig. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see Fig. 2) like the first pachinko game machine.

Figure 144 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit 5010 equipped in a fifth pachinko game machine. The game board unit 5010 has a game panel 5100 on which various components are arranged, and a game area 105 is formed on the front side of the game panel 5100, in which a launched game ball can roll and flow down.

As shown in FIG. 144, the game board unit 5010 of the fifth pachinko gaming machine differs from the first pachinko gaming machine mainly in the configuration and arrangement of the first passing opening 5126A, the second passing opening 5126B, the starting opening 5140, the normal electric role unit 5145, and the special electric role unit 5130. The configuration and arrangement of each of these are explained below.

(First Passage)
The first passage opening 5126A is disposed below the display area of the display device 7, and is disposed so that a game ball hit from the left can pass through (a game ball hit from the right has difficulty or cannot pass through). The first passage opening 5126A is also provided with a first passage opening switch 5127A (see FIG. 145 described later) that detects the passage of a game ball through the first passage opening 5126A. The game ball that passes through the first passage opening 5126A flows down a flow path on the back side of the game panel 5100 and is discharged outside the machine.

(Second Passage)
The second passage opening 5126B is located above the normal electric role unit 5145 described later in the right-side area 107, and is arranged so that only game balls hit from the right side can pass through. The second passage opening 5126B is also provided with a second passage opening switch 5127B (see FIG. 145 described later) that detects the passage of the game ball through the second passage opening 5126B. The game ball that passes through the second passage opening 5126B flows down the right-side area 107 toward the normal electric role unit 5145.

When a game ball passes through the first passage opening 5126A or the second passage opening 5126B (hereinafter also referred to as "passage openings 5126A, 5126B" as appropriate), a normal symbol lottery is performed and a variable display of the normal symbol is performed.

In particular, the fifth pachinko game machine is configured so that when a game ball passes through the first passage port 5126A (when the first passage port switch 5127A detects the game ball), a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., three game balls) are paid out, and when the game ball passes through the second passage port 5126B (when the second passage port switch 5127B detects the game ball), no prize balls are paid out.
In addition, the configuration may be such that a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out when the game ball passes through the second passage opening 5126B, and that no prize balls are paid out when the game ball passes through the first passage opening 5126A.

(Starting point)
The starting hole 5140 is disposed in the right area 107 so that a game ball hit to the right can enter the hole (a game ball hit to the left has difficulty or is impossible to enter the hole). Also, the starting hole 5140 is disposed below the starting hole 5140 so that a game ball that has passed through the second passage hole 5126B can enter the starting hole 5140. Also, the starting hole 5140 is provided with a starting hole switch 5141 that detects the entry of a game ball into the starting hole 5140.

When a game ball enters the starting hole 5140, a special pattern lottery will be held, a special pattern will be displayed variably, and a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, one game ball) will be paid out.

(Normal electric role unit)
The normal electric device unit 5145 is a unitary body that integrates a starting hole 5140, a starting hole switch 5141 that detects the entry of a game ball into the starting hole 5140, and a normal electric device 5146, and is located in the right side area 107.

The normal electric device 5146 is equipped with a protruding plate-type normal power shutter 5147 that can move forward and backward, and a normal power solenoid 5148 (see FIG. 145 described below) that operates the normal power shutter 5147. The normal electric device 5146, i.e., the normal power shutter 5147, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy to insert a game ball into the starting hole 5140, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to insert a game ball into the starting hole 5140.

Specifically, the normal power shutter 5147 is composed of a substantially triangular ball entry prevention section disposed in front of the entrance of the starting port 5140 and a plate-shaped ball entry guidance section inclined toward the starting port 5140. When the normal power shutter 5147 is in the open state, the substantially triangular ball entry prevention section moves to a non-ball contact area located at a distance from the surface of the game panel 5100 that is longer than the diameter of the game ball, and does not impede the entry of the game ball into the starting port 5140, and the plate-shaped ball entry guidance section moves to a ball contact area located at a distance from the surface of the game panel 5100 that is shorter than the diameter of the game ball, and receives the game ball flowing down to the right side area 107 and guides the received game ball to the starting port 5140. On the other hand, when the normal power shutter 5147 is in the closed state, the approximately triangular ball entry prevention part moves to the ball contact point to prevent the ball from entering the starting hole 5140, and the plate-shaped ball entry guide part is embedded in the game panel 5100 and does not accept the game ball flowing down to the right side area 107, and does not hinder the flow of the game ball. Note that instead of the normal power shutter 5147 that can move forward and backward, a movable member called a so-called electric chute may be used.

(Special electric feature unit)
The special electric role unit 5130 is a unit body that integrates the big prize opening 5131, the big prize opening count switch 5132 that detects the entry of the game ball into the big prize opening 5131, and the special electric role 5133. The special electric role unit 5130 is disposed at the bottom in the right side area 107. The special electric role unit 5130 may be disposed below the first passage opening 5126A or above the center role 115.

The large prize opening 5131 is a prize opening that can be shifted from a closed state to an open state. The large prize opening 5131 shifts from a closed state to an open state when a stop display mode is derived that indicates that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "big hit" or a "small hit". When the large prize opening 5131 is controlled to a big hit game state or a small hit game state, up to a specified number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) can enter the large prize opening 5131, and when a game ball enters the large prize opening 5131, prize balls (e.g., 15 game balls) corresponding to the large prize opening 5131 are paid out.

The special electric device 5133 is equipped with a protruding plate-type special electric shutter 5134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 5135 (see FIG. 145 described below) that operates the special electric shutter 5134. The special electric device 5133, i.e., the special electric shutter 5134, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the large prize opening 5131, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the large prize opening 5131.

Specifically, the special power shutter 5134 is composed of a plate-shaped roof that is gently inclined (for example, 5 to 10 degrees) toward the outlet 178. When the special power shutter 5134 is in the open state, the roof is embedded in the game panel 5100, opening the large prize opening 5131 and allowing game balls flowing down the right-side area 107 and game balls rolling on the roof to enter. When the special power shutter 5134 is in the closed state, the roof protrudes from the game panel 5100, making it impossible or difficult for game balls to enter the large prize opening 5131.

In particular, in the fifth pachinko game machine, the special electricity shutter 5134 is a gently sloping plate-shaped roof portion, and when the special electricity shutter 5134 is in the closed state, the game balls can roll on the roof portion. Therefore, even if the machine is controlled to a small win game state and the large prize opening 5131 is only opened for an extremely short time, one or more game balls rolling on the roof portion are dropped toward the large prize opening 5131, making it possible for the game balls to enter the large prize opening 5131.

[7-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the fifth pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 145. Fig. 145 is an example of a block diagram showing the control circuit of the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 145, the fifth pachinko gaming machine, like the first pachinko gaming machine, is mainly composed of a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 300 that controls the presentation according to the progress of the game, a payout/launch control circuit 400, and a power supply circuit 450.

However, the fifth pachinko gaming machine differs from the first pachinko gaming machine in the configuration of the devices connected to the main control circuit 200. Specifically, the fifth pachinko gaming machine differs in the configuration of the special symbol display unit 5160, the special symbol hold display unit 5161, the normal power solenoid 5148, the special power solenoid 5135, the start port switch 5141, the first pass port switch 5127A, the second pass port switch 5127B, and the special prize port count switch 5132. In addition, since the fifth pachinko gaming machine does not execute the probability bonus control, it does not have the probability bonus notification display unit 167 of the first pachinko gaming machine. The configuration and arrangement of each of these are explained below.

(Special design display section)
The special symbol display section 5160 displays the result of the special symbol winning judgment process, and is composed of a plurality of LEDs in the LED unit 160. Specifically, the special symbol display section 5160 is composed of an LED group consisting of eight LEDs 163a to 163h that correspond to the special symbol display section 5160 of the first pachinko game machine (see FIG. 5).

When the conditions for starting the variable display of special symbols (hereinafter referred to as the "special symbol start conditions") are met, the variable display of special symbols begins, in which all or some of the eight LEDs 163a-163h that make up the special symbol display unit 5160 alternately or mutually turn on and off. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display of special symbols began, the variable display of special symbols stops, and the result of the special symbol winning determination process is derived.

(Special design reserved display section)
The reserved display section 5161 for special symbols displays the number of reserved variable displays of special symbols (hereinafter referred to as the "reserved number of special symbols") when the start information of the special symbols, i.e., the variable display of the special symbols, is reserved, and is composed of a plurality of LEDs in the LED unit 160. Specifically, the reserved display section 5161 for special symbols is composed of an LED group consisting of two LEDs 165a and 165b corresponding to the first reserved display section 165 for special symbols of the first pachinko game machine (see FIG. 5). Here, "the variable display of the special symbols is reserved" refers to a state from when the passage of the game ball into the start hole 5140 is detected and the start information of the special symbols is extracted, until the start condition of the special symbols is established.

The special symbol reserved display unit 5161, like the first special symbol reserved display unit 165 of the first pachinko gaming machine, displays the number of reserved special symbols that are displayed variably by combining the lighting and extinguishing of the two LEDs 165a and 165b.

(Solenoid for general purpose)
The normal power solenoid 5148 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the normal power shutter 5147. When the normal power solenoid 5148 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it advances the normal power shutter 5147 forward to open the starting port 5140, and when it is not energized (OFF) by the main CPU 201, it retreats the normal power shutter 5147 rearward to close the starting port 5140.

(Special power solenoid)
The special power solenoid 5135 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the special power shutter 5134. When the special power solenoid 5135 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it moves the special power shutter 5134 backward to open the large prize opening 5131, and when it is not energized (OFF) by the main CPU 201, it moves the special power shutter 5134 forward to close the large prize opening 5131.

(Start switch)
The start hole switch 5141 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the start hole 5140. When the start hole switch 5141 detects the entry of a game ball into the start hole 5140, the main CPU 201 extracts start information of the special symbol (random number value for determining a big win, random number value for symbol, random number value for effect selection, etc.), and uses the extracted start information of the special symbol in a hit determination process of the special symbol, performs a variable display process of the special symbol, or instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform a payout process of a predetermined prize ball (for example, one game ball).

(First passage switch)
The first passage switch 5127A is a through-type proximity switch that detects the passage of a game ball through the first passage 5126A. When the first passage switch 5127A detects the passage of a game ball through the first passage 5126A, the main CPU 201 extracts the start information of the normal symbol (a random number value for determining whether the normal symbol is a winning symbol, a random number value for the normal symbol, a random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect, etc.), and uses the extracted start information of the normal symbol in the winning determination process of the normal symbol, performs variable display process of the normal symbol, or instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of a predetermined prize ball (for example, three game balls).

(Second passage switch)
The second passage switch 5127B is a through-type proximity switch that detects the passage of a game ball through the second passage 5126B. When the second passage switch 5127B detects the passage of a game ball through the second passage 5126B, the main CPU 201 extracts the start information of the normal pattern (random number value for determining whether the normal pattern is a hit, random number value of the normal pattern, etc.), and uses the extracted start information of the normal pattern for the hit determination process of the normal pattern, or performs variable display process of the normal pattern. Note that even if the second passage switch 5127B detects the passage of a game ball through the second passage 5126B, it does not instruct the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of the prize ball.

(Big prize slot count switch)
The large prize opening count switch 5132 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 5131. When the large prize opening count switch 5132 detects the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 5131, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls that enter per round, and instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of prize balls (e.g., 15 game balls) corresponding to the large prize opening 5131.

(Display Device)
The display device 7 (see FIG. 144) is a device similar to that of the first pachinko gaming machine, but differs in that the display area of the display device 7 does not variably display a special identification pattern for performance that corresponds to a special pattern in the normal gaming state, but variably displays a regular identification pattern for performance that corresponds to an ordinary pattern in the normal gaming state.

[7-3. Basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the fifth pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Figures 146 to 153. The fifth pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function will be omitted below.

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, although the probability variable control is not executed, a time-saving gaming state in which the time-saving control is executed and a normal gaming state in which the time-saving control is not executed are prepared, and the main CPU 201 is capable of progressing the game in the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. Note that, although the probability variable control is not executed in this fifth pachinko gaming machine, this is not essential, and it is also possible to execute the probability variable control by setting the probability variable flag on depending on the type of jackpot, etc., for example.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, left-handed play is the regular game mode, and in the A time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state, right-handed play is the regular game mode. The sub-CPU 301 executes control to display the play style that is the regular game mode, for example, in the display area of the display device 7. Note that in the fifth pachinko game machine, the B time-saving game state is not executed, but the B time-saving game state may be executable.

[7-3-1. Special symbol winning judgment table]
FIG. 146 is an example of a special symbol winning judgment table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol winning judgment table shown in FIG. 146 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol hit determination table specifies the range (width) of the random number value for determining a jackpot, which is determined to be a "jackpot", "small hit" or "time-saving hit", and the corresponding determination value data ("jackpot determination value data", "small hit determination value data", "time-saving hit determination value data") as data used in the hit determination process for a special symbol, which is executed based on the ball entering the starting hole 5140. The total random number value of the random number value for determining a jackpot is 65536. In other words, the random number value for determining a jackpot is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

As shown in FIG. 146, when a game ball enters the starting hole 5140, the main CPU 201 determines the result of the special symbol hit determination process as a "big hit," "small hit," or "time-saving hit" based on the special symbol hit determination process using a random number value for determining a big hit for the special symbol.

In this embodiment, even if a game ball enters the starting hole 5140 and a "small win" is determined and the game state transitions to a small win game state, a game ball can enter the large winning hole 5131 and a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 150 balls) can be paid out. Even if a "time-saving win" is determined, the game state transitions to the time-saving C game state and a game ball can be entered into the starting hole 5140 again.
Therefore, if a game ball enters the starting hole 5140, a payout of the game ball will be triggered by a "big hit" or "small hit", and therefore in the normal game state, the starting hole 5140 is opened and a game is played with the goal of having the game ball enter the starting hole 5140.

In addition, when the special symbol hit determination process is performed, a "miss" may be determined. If a "miss" is determined, it is preferable to stipulate that a "small hit" or a "time-saving hit" is determined with a higher probability than a "miss."

When the fifth pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, the probability of a big win and/or a small win may be set to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting. In this case, for example, both the probability of a big win and the probability of a small win may be set to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting, or the probability of a small win may be set to be constant regardless of the setting value and the probability of a big win may be set to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting, or the probability of a big win may be set to be constant regardless of the setting value and the probability of a small win may be set to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting. However, even if the fifth pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable to set the probability of a time-saving win to be a common probability for all settings.

[7-3-2. Special symbol determination table]
FIG. 147 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 147 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is a table that is referenced when selecting the "select symbol command" and "symbol designation command" that determine the stopping symbol based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball enters the starting hole 5140 and the aforementioned determination value data.

The "selection symbol command" is a command for specifying the winning symbol determined according to the type of win when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a win, and the "symbol designation command" is a command for designating the symbol that is displayed when the variable display of the special symbol stops. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is selected from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 147, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the special symbol hit determination process, if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any value between 0 and 49, the main CPU 201 selects "z1" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Also, if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any value between 50 and 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z2" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when small win determination value data is obtained as a result of the special symbol win determination process, if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any value between 0 and 49, the main CPU 201 selects "z3" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.In addition, if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any value between 50 and 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z4" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 selects "z5" as the selected symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command, regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the special symbol is, for example, 0 to 99.

In addition, although the description of the fifth pachinko game machine is omitted, the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 stores a special symbol stop mode determination table equivalent to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) described in the first pachinko game machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table is a table that is referenced when determining the stop mode of the special symbol that is output to the special symbol display unit 5160 (see FIG. 145) when the variable display of the special symbol stops, according to the selected symbol command. In addition, the special symbol display unit 5160 outputs the display mode of the time-saving hit, the display mode of the big hit, the display mode of the small hit, or the display mode of the miss based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. In addition, the decorative symbol stop mode determination table equivalent to the decorative symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(B)) described in the first pachinko game machine is also stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300.

[7-3-3. Winning Type Determination Table]
148 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the fifth pachinko gaming machine. The winning type determination table shown in FIG. 148 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 148, the winning type determination table associates the selected symbol command with the mode of the big win game state, the mode of the small win game state, and the mode of the game state (time-saving flag and number of time-saving times).

The main CPU 201 refers to the hit type determination table and determines the mode of the big hit game state, the mode of the small hit game state, and the mode of the game state (time-saving flag and number of time-saving times) based on the selected symbol command.

Here, in the "jackpot game state", the big prize opening 5131 transitions from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined number of rounds. When the open time during which the big prize opening 5131 is open for one round has elapsed or a specified number (10) of game balls have entered the big prize opening 5131, the big prize opening 5131 transitions from an open state to a closed state, and one round ends. Then, when the predetermined number of rounds have ended, the big prize game state ends.

The "mode of jackpot gaming state" indicates the mode of opening of the large prize opening 5131 that is opened during the jackpot gaming state, and in this embodiment, indicates the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the opening time per round. Note that the number of openings may be determined so that the large prize opening 5131 is opened and closed multiple times per round, or multiple large prize openings may be provided and the large prize opening to be opened may be determined.

In this embodiment, when 10 game balls enter the big prize opening 5131 for one round, the round ends, and 15 game balls (prize balls) are paid out for each game ball that enters the big prize opening 5131. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 148, when the result of the special pattern hit determination process is the selected pattern command "z1" corresponding to a "big win", 10 rounds are determined, and 10 rounds x 10 balls x 15 prize balls = 1,500 game balls can be paid out, and when the selected pattern command is "z2", 4 rounds are determined, and 4 rounds x 10 balls x 15 prize balls = 600 game balls can be paid out.

In addition, in the "small win game state", the large prize opening 5131 transitions from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined number of openings. When the predetermined number of openings for one small win game state is completed or a prescribed number of game balls enter the large prize opening 5131, the large prize opening 5131 transitions from an open state to a closed state, and one small win game state ends.

The "mode of small win game state" indicates the mode of opening of the large prize opening 5131 that is opened during a small win game state, and in this embodiment, indicates the number of times it is opened and the opening time during the small win game state. Note that multiple large prize openings may be provided, and the large prize opening to be opened may be determined.

In this embodiment, when 10 game balls enter the large prize opening 5131 for one small win game state, the small win game state ends, and 15 game balls (prize balls) are paid out for each game ball that enters the large prize opening 5131. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 148, when the result of the special pattern hit determination process is the selected pattern command "z3, z4" corresponding to a "small win," the number of openings is determined to be 10 or 8, and 10 balls x 15 prize balls = 150 game balls can be paid out.

In addition, the opening time for one round in the small win game state (e.g., 0.15 seconds) is set shorter than the opening time for one round in the big win game state (e.g., 29 seconds), and it can be said that the big prize winning port 5131 opens in a favorable "first opening mode" in the big win game state, and the big prize winning port 5131 opens in a "second opening mode" that is less favorable than the first opening mode in the small win game state. Furthermore, the total number of game balls that can be paid out in one small win game state (e.g., 150 balls) is set smaller than the total number of game balls that can be paid out in one big win game state (e.g., 1500 balls or 600 balls), and it can be said that the big win game state is an "advantageous special game state" and the small win game state is a "disadvantageous special game state" compared to the big win game state.

The "game state state" indicates the state of the game state after the end of a jackpot game state or after a time-saving hit, and indicates the settings of the "time-saving flag" and "number of time-saving hits." If the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a time-saving hit, the game state is controlled to the C time-saving game state without being controlled to a jackpot game state, and the "time-saving flag" and "number of time-saving hits" are set.

The "time-saving flag" is a flag that indicates whether or not a time-saving game state is being executed and the type of time-saving game state that is being executed, with a time-saving flag of 0 indicating a normal game state, a time-saving flag of 1 indicating an A time-saving game state, and a time-saving flag of 3 indicating a C time-saving game state. Note that in this embodiment, the B time-saving game state is not being executed, but if the B time-saving game state can be executed, a time-saving flag of 2 indicates the B time-saving game state.

The "number of time-saving times" refers to the number of times that the winning determination process for the special symbol is performed in the time-saving play state, i.e., the number of times that the variable display of the special symbol is performed. This number of time-saving times is subtracted when the winning determination process for the special symbol is performed, i.e., when the variable display of the special symbol begins, and when the number of time-saving times = 0, the game will transition from the time-saving play state to the normal play state.

As shown in FIG. 148, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the selected symbol command "z1, z2" corresponding to a "jackpot," the main CPU 201 is configured to determine the "time-saving flag" to be "1," which indicates the A time-saving game state, and to determine the "time-saving count" to be "10 times."

As shown in FIG. 148, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the selected symbol command "z5" corresponding to a "time-saving hit," the main CPU 201 is configured to determine the "time-saving flag" to be "3," which indicates a C time-saving game state, and to determine the "time-saving count" to be "1 time."

As shown in FIG. 148, when the result of the special pattern hit determination process is the selected pattern command "z5" corresponding to a "time-saving hit," the main CPU 201 is configured to determine "1 time" as the "time-saving number of times."

In this embodiment, the number of time-saving times is determined to be 10 in the case of a jackpot, and 1 in the case of a time-saving hit, because the probability of a "jackpot" being determined as a result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is low, making it a premium situation, and by transitioning to the A time-saving play state with 10 time-saving times after the end of the jackpot play state, it is possible to transition to more small win play states while being controlled in the A time-saving play state with 10 times. In other words, in this embodiment, by setting a large number of time-saving times, it is possible to transition to more small win play states in the time-saving play state, making it possible to pay out more game balls.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the selected symbol command "z1, z2" corresponding to a "jackpot," the "time-saving number of times" may be determined to be "1 time," just as when the selected symbol command is "z5" corresponding to a "time-saving hit."

[7-3-4. Special symbol variation pattern table]
149 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols of the fifth pachinko gaming machine. The variation pattern table of special symbols shown in FIG. 149 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 149, the special symbol variation pattern table associates the results of the special symbol winning determination process, the random number value for effect selection, the special symbol variation pattern, and the variable display time of the special symbol. The random number value for effect selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above. Also, the "Notes" column in FIG. 149 is shown for convenience to make it easier to understand.

The main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 149, and determines the special symbol variation pattern and the variable display time of the special symbol based on the result of the special symbol winning judgment process and the random number value for effect selection. Note that in this embodiment, the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 149 is referenced regardless of the normal game state or the time-saving game state (time-saving game state A, time-saving game state C), but the variation pattern table to be referenced may be different depending on the game state.

Then, when the main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol, it transmits a special symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the special symbol to the sub-CPU 301. The sub-CPU 301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effects output from the speaker 32 based on the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201.

The "rewind effect" shown in the "Notes" column of FIG. 149 is an effect that suggests that the common "bonus time basic effect (special effect)" performed over multiple small win game states is rewound, and that the small win game state may continue. The "rewind effect" and the "bonus time basic effect" will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 170. The "full rotation reach" is an effect that notifies in advance that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big hit. The "big hit notification reach" is an effect that suggests that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a big hit, and specifically, an effect is performed to see whether or not three decorative symbols consisting of the word "invincible" are aligned. The "reduced variation" is a variation in which the variable display time of the special symbol is short, but between the shortened variation and the small win game state, the "bonus time basic effect or bonus time specialized effect (special effect)" is performed in terms of the performance.

In the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 149, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the special symbol variation pattern and the variable display time of the special symbol for performing a "rewind effect" are determined.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot," the special symbol variation pattern and the variable display time of the special symbol are determined to perform a "full rotation reach" or a "jackpot notification reach."

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small hit," the special symbol fluctuation pattern and the variable display time of the special symbol are determined to perform a "shortened fluctuation" or a "big hit notification reach."

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small hit," the special symbol change pattern for performing a "shortened change" is easily determined, and a short variable display time is determined by determining the special symbol change pattern for performing a "shortened change." Therefore, by determining a short variable display time as the special symbol's variable display time, it is possible to transition between multiple small hit game states in a short time.

In addition, by determining the variation pattern of the special symbols to perform the "jackpot notification reach", when the A time-saving play state or the C time-saving play state is being played, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the selection of the special symbols.

In this embodiment, the special symbol variation pattern for performing a "big hit notification reach" is determined when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small hit", but it may also be configured to provide a "miss" as a result of the special symbol hit determination process, and to determine the special symbol variation pattern for performing a "big hit notification reach" when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss".

[7-3-5. Normal symbol winning judgment table]
Fig. 150 is an example of a winning judgment table for normal symbols in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. The winning judgment table for normal symbols shown in Fig. 150 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol winning judgment table is a table referenced in the normal symbol winning judgment process, that is, a table referenced when determining by lottery whether a "normal symbol winning" or "normal symbol losing" is made based on the game state and the normal symbol winning judgment random number value extracted when the game ball passes through the passage openings 5126A and 5126B.

The winning judgment table for normal symbols shown in Figure 150 specifies the game state, the range (width) of the random number value for winning judgment of normal symbols, and the winning/losing judgment value data ("normal symbol winning" or "normal symbol missing") in correspondence with each other.

As described above, the random number value for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol is a random number value used in the winning determination process for the normal symbol. In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 selects the random number value for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the winning/losing determination table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 150, and determines the winning/losing determination value data based on the game state and the range (width) of the random number value for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 0 and 97, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "normal symbol win" and sets the win/loss determination value data to "normal symbol win determination value data." Also, in the normal game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 98 and 99, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "miss" and sets the determination value data to "miss determination value data."

In addition, in the A time-saving game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 0 and 98, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "normal symbol win" and sets the win/loss determination value data to "normal symbol win determination value data."In addition, in the A time-saving game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is 99, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "miss" and sets the determination value data to "miss determination value data."

In addition, in the C time-saving game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 0 and 97, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "normal symbol win" and sets the win/loss determination value data to "normal symbol win determination value data." In addition, in the C time-saving game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 98 and 99, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "miss" and sets the determination value data to "miss determination value data."

In this embodiment, the probability of winning a normal symbol in the A time-saving game state (selection rate shown in FIG. 150) is the highest among the normal game state, the A time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state.

In addition, the winning probability of hitting a normal symbol in the C time-saving game state is the same as the winning probability of hitting a normal symbol in the normal game state. Therefore, even if the game state transitions between the normal game state and the C time-saving game state, the winning probability of hitting a normal symbol will not change.

The winning probability for a normal symbol may be the same in the normal game state, the time-saving game state A, and the time-saving game state C. In this case, the winning probability for a normal symbol does not change, and the ratio of the types of normal symbols described below only needs to be changed for each state, simplifying the control process.

[7-3-6. Normal symbol determination table]
151 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 151 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol determination table is a table that is referenced when selecting the "normal symbol hit selection symbol command" that determines the normal symbol stopping symbol based on the above-mentioned normal symbol winning/losing determination value data and the normal symbol random number value extracted when the game ball passes through the passage openings 5126A and 5126B.

The "regular symbol selection command when a regular symbol wins" is a command for specifying the regular symbol winning symbol that is determined according to the regular symbol winning type when the result of the regular symbol winning determination process is a regular symbol winning symbol.

The normal symbol determination table shown in Figure 151 specifies the hit/miss determination value data for normal symbols ("normal symbol hit" or "miss"), the symbol random number value for normal symbols, and the symbol selection command when a normal symbol hits.

The "Reference" column in Figure 151 shows for reference the combined selection rate of the selection rate of the hit determination of a normal symbol in the normal game state (see Figure 150) and the selection rate of the "selection pattern command when a normal symbol hits", and is intended to explain the "combined selection rate in the normal game state" when a "normal symbol hit" is determined in the normal game state, and a "selection pattern command fz1 when a normal symbol hits" is determined which advantageously opens the normal electric device 5146 (normal electric shutter 5147) in the normal game state as described below.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal pattern determination table shown in FIG. 151 and determines the pattern command to be selected when a normal pattern is hit based on the winning/losing determination value data for the normal pattern and the pattern random number value for the normal pattern.

According to the normal pattern determination table shown in FIG. 151, when normal pattern winning determination value data is obtained as a result of the winning/losing determination value data for normal patterns, for example, the selection pattern command when a normal pattern is won is selected as follows.

For example, when normal pattern hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal pattern hit determination process, the main CPU 201 selects "fz1" as the pattern command to be selected when the normal pattern hits if the pattern random number value of the normal pattern is any value between 0 and 162, and selects "fz2" as the pattern command to be selected when the normal pattern hits if the pattern random number value of the normal pattern is any value between 163 and 65535.

As shown in the "Reference" column of FIG. 151, the selection rate of the normal symbol hit determination value data in the normal game state is "98/100" (see FIG. 150), and the selection rate of the "selection pattern command fz1 when a normal symbol hits" is approximately "1/402.06", while the "combined selection rate of the normal game state" for ultimately determining the "selection pattern command fz1 when a normal symbol hits" in the normal game state is set to approximately "1/410.3".

In addition, in this embodiment, unlike the first pachinko gaming machine, the "selection pattern command when a normal pattern is hit" is selected based on the normal pattern hit/loss judgment value data (the result of the normal pattern hit judgment process) and the normal pattern random number value, regardless of the game state.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the winning judgment table for the normal pattern (see FIG. 150) and determines the winning/losing judgment value data for the normal pattern based on the extracted random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern, and then refers to the normal pattern judgment table (see FIG. 151) and determines the pattern command selected when the normal pattern wins based on the pattern random number value of the normal pattern, but is not limited to this. For example, the winning/losing of the normal pattern and the pattern command selected when the normal pattern wins may be determined together based on the extracted random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern and the pattern random number value of the normal pattern.

[7-3-7. Normal pattern type determination table]
152 is an example of a normal symbol winning type determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol winning type determination table shown in FIG. 152 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol hit type determination table is referenced when determining the opening pattern of the normal electric device 5146 (normal electric shutter 5147) according to the game state and the symbol selection command when a normal symbol hits.

The normal symbol winning type determination table shown in FIG. 152 specifies the game state, the symbol selection command when a normal symbol is won, and the opening pattern of the normal electric device 5146 in correspondence with each other.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol winning type determination table shown in FIG. 152 and determines the opening pattern of the normal electric device 5146 based on the game state and the normal symbol winning selection pattern command. After that, the main CPU 201 transmits to the sub-CPU 301 the opening pattern command of the normal electric device corresponding to the opening pattern of the normal electric device 5146 that has been determined.

In this embodiment, when the main CPU 201 is in a normal game state and the symbol command selected when a normal symbol hits is "fz1", the main CPU 201 determines the first opening time to be 2000 msec, the wait time to be 500 msec, and the second opening time to be 3000 msec. Also, when the main CPU 201 is in a normal game state and the symbol command selected when a normal symbol hits is "fz2", the main CPU 201 determines the first opening time to be 100 msec, no wait time, and no second opening time.

Therefore, even in normal game mode, if the normal symbol selection command "fz1" is selected, a favorable opening pattern for the normal electric device 5146 is determined, and it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the starting hole 5140.

In addition, when the normal symbol selection command "fz1" is selected in the normal game state, a predetermined time (e.g., 10,000 msec) of waiting time for opening may be set before the first opening. By setting this waiting time for opening, it is possible to secure time for executing a promotional effect (e.g., an effect that displays "Aim to the right!") that encourages the player to enter the normal electric device 5146. By executing this promotional effect, it becomes easier to avoid the occurrence of a so-called "flat out," in which the game ball does not enter the normal electric device 5146 even though the normal symbol selection command "fz1" is selected, and therefore it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In this embodiment, when the main CPU 201 is in the A time-saving play state or the C time-saving play state and the symbol command selected when a normal symbol hits is "fz1", the main CPU 201 determines the first opening time to be 2000 msec, the wait time to be 500 msec, and the second opening time to be 3000 msec. In addition, when the main CPU 201 is in the A time-saving play state or the C time-saving play state and the symbol command selected when a normal symbol hits is "fz2", the main CPU 201 determines the first opening time to be 2500 msec, the wait time to be 500 msec, and the second opening time to be 2500 msec.

In this way, in this embodiment, even if the selected symbol command when the same normal symbol is hit (for example, "fz2"), the opening pattern of the normal electric device 5146 is configured to differ depending on the game state.

When in the A time-saving play state or the C time-saving play state, regardless of the normal pattern selection command, a favorable opening pattern for the normal electric device 5146 is determined, and the game ball can enter the starting hole 5140.

In addition, even if the normal symbol hit selection pattern command "fz1" or "fz2" is selected in the A time-saving play state or the C time-saving play state, a predetermined opening waiting time (e.g., 5000 msec) may be set before the first opening.

[7-3-8. Normal pattern variation table]
153 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 153 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 153 corresponds to the game state, the winning/losing judgment value data for the normal symbol, the symbol selection command when the normal symbol is hit, the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect extracted when the game ball passes through the passage openings 5126A and 5126B, the normal symbol variation pattern, and the variable display time of the normal symbol. Also, the "Notes" column in FIG. 153 is shown for convenience to make it easier to understand.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 153, and determines the normal symbol variation pattern and the variable display time of the normal symbol based on the game state, the normal symbol win/lose judgment value data, the normal symbol winning symbol selection command, and the normal symbol performance selection random number value.

Then, when the main CPU 201 determines the normal symbol variation pattern, it transmits a normal symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the determined normal symbol variation pattern to the sub-CPU 301. The sub-CPU 301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effects output from the speaker 32 based on the normal symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201.

Here, the "long opening" illustrated in the "Pattern selection command when a normal pattern is hit" in FIG. 153 refers to an advantageous opening pattern (see FIG. 152) in which the opening time of the normal electric device 5146 is long, and in this embodiment refers to the pattern selection command "fz1" when a normal pattern is hit in the normal game state, and the pattern selection commands "fz1" and "fz2" when a normal pattern is hit in the A time-saving game state or the C time-saving game state. Also, "short opening" refers to an unfavorable opening pattern (see FIG. 152) in which the opening time of the normal electric device 5146 is short, and in this embodiment refers to the pattern selection command "fz2" when a normal pattern is hit in the normal game state, and is not performed in the A time-saving game state or the C time-saving game state.

The "normal reach" shown in the "Notes" column of FIG. 153 is an effect that suggests that the normal symbol selection command fz1 that opens the normal electric device 5146 advantageously in the normal game state may have been determined. Also, the "super reach" is an effect that suggests that the normal symbol selection command fz1 that opens the normal electric device 5146 advantageously in the normal game state is highly likely to have been determined. Also, the "special reach" is an effect that suggests that the normal symbol selection command fz1 that opens the normal electric device 5146 advantageously in the normal game state is highly likely to have been determined. In other words, the "normal reach", "super reach" and "special reach" are effects that suggest that the "long opening" may have been determined in the normal game state, and can also be said to be effects that suggest that it is possible for a game ball to enter the starting hole 5140.

In addition, "normal variation" refers to a variation in which the variable display time of the normal pattern is normal, and "shortened variation" refers to a variation in which the variable display time of the normal pattern is short.

In the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 153, in the normal game state, when the normal symbol hit/loss judgment value data is "normal symbol hit judgment value data" and the symbol command selected when the normal symbol hits is "fz1", the normal symbol variation pattern and the normal symbol variable display time for performing a "normal reach", "super reach" or "special reach" are determined.

In addition, in the normal game state, when the winning/losing judgment value data for the normal symbol is "normal symbol winning judgment value data" and the symbol command selected when the normal symbol is hit is "fz2", the normal symbol variation pattern and the variable display time of the normal symbol for performing "normal variation", "normal reach", "super reach" or "special reach" are determined.

In addition, in the normal game state, when the winning/losing judgment value data for the normal symbol is "normal symbol losing judgment value data", the normal symbol fluctuation pattern and the variable display time of the normal symbol for performing "normal fluctuation", "normal reach", "super reach" or "special reach" are determined.

In addition, when in the A time-saving game state or the C time-saving game state, the normal symbol variation pattern and the variable display time of the normal symbol for performing the "shortened variation" are determined.

When in the A time-saving play state or the C time-saving play state, a short variable display time is determined as the variable display time for the normal pattern, so that when the game ball passes through the second passage opening 5126B, the normal electric device 5146 is quickly activated, thereby increasing the rate at which the game ball enters the start opening 5140 per unit time.

[7-4. Main control processing]
In the fifth pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 are the same except for the special symbol control process, normal symbol control process, and sub-control circuit process executed in S39 during the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23). Therefore, the following will explain the special symbol control process, normal symbol control process, and sub-control circuit process, and will omit explanations of the other processes executed by the main CPU 201.

Note that some of the processing performed in the special symbol control process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine is the same as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine, but below, the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine will be explained again with different step numbers.

[7-4-1. Special symbol control process]
Next, the special symbol control process performed in S39 in the main control process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 154. Fig. 154 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol control process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 154, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S5001. The control state number of the special symbol is a number that indicates the state (status) of the control process related to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S5001, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5002.

Although not shown, when the main CPU 201 executes the special symbol control process, prior to the process of S5001, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process to set the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, etc., in a predetermined register.

In S5002, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S5001 is 0, i.e., whether the special symbol is in a variable display waiting state.

If it is determined in S5002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (if S5002 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5004.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (if S5002 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5003.

In S5003, the main CPU 201 determines whether the special symbol has started to be displayed variably.

If it is determined in S5003 that the special symbol has not started to be variably displayed (if S5003 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see Figures 20 to 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5003 that the special symbol has begun to be variable displayed (if S5003 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5004.

In S5004, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 155. After executing the processing of S5003, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIG. 20 to FIG. 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S5001 to S5004) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[7-4-2. Special design management process]
Next, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 in S5004 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 154) will be described with reference to Fig. 155. Fig. 155 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The numbers ("0" to "5") in parentheses to the right of each process in FIG. 155 are the control state numbers of the special symbols that are the subject of the process. The main CPU 201 progresses the special symbol game by executing each process that corresponds to the control state number.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the waiting time for the special pattern is 0 (S5021).

If it is determined in S5021 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (if S5021 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 154).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5021 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (if S5021 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5022.

In S5022, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S5022, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5023. The main CPU 201 performs the process of S5023 and subsequent steps based on the control state number read in the process of S5022.

In S5023, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This S5023 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 156. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S5024.

In S5024, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. This S5024 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 157. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S5025.

In S5025, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game determination process. This S5025 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 158. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5026.

In S5026, the main CPU 201 performs a process for preparing to open the large prize opening. This process of S5026 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this process for preparing to open the large prize opening will be described later with reference to FIG. 160. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5027.

In S5027, the main CPU 201 performs a large prize opening control process. This process of S5027 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this large prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 161. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5028.

In S5028, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot end process. This S5028 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 162.

After completing the processes of S5023 to S5028, the main CPU 201 returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 154). If the special symbol management process is called in S5003 during the special symbol control process, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S5004; if it is called in S5006, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S5007; if it is called in S5009, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S5010; and if it is called in S5012, the special symbol control process also ends.

[7-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in S5023 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155) will be described with reference to FIG. 156. FIG. 156 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display start process in the fifth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 156, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special pattern is "0" (S5031).

If it is determined in S5031 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (if S5031 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5031 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (if S5031 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5033.

In S5033, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of the special symbol start information. In this process, the start information stored in the special symbol start memory area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special symbol determination area (0), and the start information stored in the special symbol start memory area (2) to the special symbol start memory area (4) is shifted to the special symbol start memory area (1) to the special symbol start memory area (3). After executing the process of S5033, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5034.

In S5034, the main CPU 201 performs a hit determination process for the special symbol. In this process, the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 146) is referenced, and the special symbol hit determination process is performed using the random number value for big hit determination of the special symbol stored in the special symbol determination area (0). In this embodiment, it is determined whether it is a time-saving hit, a small hit, or a big hit. In addition, the main CPU 201 sets the time-saving hit flag on if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, sets the small hit flag on if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit, and sets the big hit flag on if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit. After executing the process of S5034, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5035.

In S5035, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol determination process. This process determines the special symbol stop pattern that corresponds to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S5034) (e.g., time-saving hit, small hit, big hit). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 147) is referenced, and the random number value of the special symbol stored in the special symbol determination area (0) is used to determine the above-mentioned "select symbol command" or "symbol designation command." After executing the process of S5035, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5036.

In S5036, the main CPU 201 performs a win type determination process. This process is a process for determining or deciding the type of win when the result of the special symbol win determination process is, for example, a win (time-saving win, small win, or big win). In this process, a win type determination table (see FIG. 148) is referenced and the type of win is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S5035). Note that in this embodiment, there are multiple types of wins, but there may be only one type of big win, one type of small win, or multiple types of time-saving wins. After executing the process of S5036, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5037.

In S5037, the main CPU 201 performs a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. This process is a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 149) is referenced, and the variation pattern of the special symbol and the variable display time of the special symbol are determined based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process and the random number value for effect selection stored in the special symbol determination area (0). Note that in this embodiment, the variation pattern table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 149 is referenced regardless of the game state, but the variation pattern table to be referenced may be different depending on the game state. After executing the process of S5037, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5038.

In S5038, the main CPU 201 performs a variable display time setting process for the special symbol. In this process, the variable display time for the special symbol determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S5037) is set to the waiting time for the special symbol in the main RAM 203, and the special symbol display unit 5160 is caused to start varying display of the special symbol. This waiting time for the special symbol is decremented as a special symbol timer counter in a system timer interrupt process that is performed, for example, at 2 msec intervals. After executing the process of S5038, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5039.

In S5039, the main CPU 201 performs a time-saving end management process. In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, unlike the first pachinko gaming machine, the number of time-saving times is subtracted when "variable display of special symbols begins." In this process, 1 is subtracted from the time-saving number counter, and when the time-saving number counter = 0, the time-saving flag is cleared and transition control from the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state is performed. After executing the process of S5039, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5040.

In S5040, the main CPU 201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the special symbol variable display start process ends, a special symbol variable display end process (see S5024 in FIG. 155) is performed. After executing the process of S5040, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5041.

In S5041, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, an update process of parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203 is performed. Then, a transmission reservation process of a game state designation command indicating the current game state is performed. Note that the game state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S5041, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5042.

In S5042, the main CPU 201 performs game status management processing. This processing mainly involves updating various flags related to game status management (e.g., time-saving flags, etc.). After executing S5042, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S5043.

In S5043, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol variation pattern command. The special symbol variation pattern command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interruption prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process (particularly the game state management process (S5042) and the special symbol variable pattern command transmission reservation process (S5043)) within the interruption prohibited section.

[7-4-4. Special symbol variable display end process]
Next, referring to Fig. 157, a special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S5014 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 155) will be described. Fig. 157 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display end process in the fifth pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S5051).

If it is determined in S5051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (if S5051 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (if S5051 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5052.

In S5052, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", after the special symbol variable display end process is completed, the special symbol game determination process (see S5015 in FIG. 155) is performed. After executing the process of S5052, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5053.

In S5053, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect stop command. This process also includes a process for stopping the variable display of the special symbol. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S522 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S5053, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5054.

In S5054, the main CPU 201 increments the value of the determined symbol counter by 1. As described above in the explanation of the first to third pachinko gaming machines, the determined symbol counter is a counter for counting the number of times a special symbol has been determined (the number of times a special symbol game has been played), but it may also manage the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions, such as the number of times a special symbol game has remained or the number of times a time-saving game has remained. After executing the process of S5054, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

[7-4-5. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, a special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S5025 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155) will be described with reference to Fig. 158. Fig. 158 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game determination process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S5071).

If it is determined in S5071 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (if S5071 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game play determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5071 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (if S5071 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5072.

In S5072, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot.

If it is determined in S5072 that the reel is not a jackpot, i.e. that the stopped special symbols are not in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot (if S5072 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5073. On the other hand, if it is determined in S5072 that the reel is a jackpot, i.e. that the stopped special symbols are in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot (if S5072 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5078.

In S5073, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a small win has occurred, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a small win.

If it is determined in S5073 that the reel is not a small win, i.e. that the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a miss (if S5073 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5074. On the other hand, if it is determined that the reel is a small win, i.e. that the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a small win (if S5073 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5078.

At S5074, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a time-saving hit has occurred, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a time-saving opening hit.

If it is determined in S5074 that the time-saving hit has not occurred, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S5077. On the other hand, if it is determined in S5074 that the time-saving hit has occurred, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S5075.

In S5075, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the A time-shortened game state is in effect. Specifically, the main CPU 201 refers to the time-shortened flag and determines whether or not the time-shortened flag, which indicates the A time-shortened game state, is set to 1. If it is determined that the A time-shortened game state is not in effect, the process moves to S5076 to perform the C time-shortened game state setting process, and if it is determined that the A time-shortened game state is in effect, the process moves to S5077 without performing the C time-shortened game state setting process. With this process, even if a "time-shortened win" is determined by a lottery for a special symbol during the A time-shortened game state, the determination of the "time-shortened win" can be invalidated.

In S5076, the main CPU 201 performs a C time-saving state setting process. In this C time-saving state setting process, the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 148 is referenced, and the mode of the game state (time-saving flag and number of time-saving times) is determined based on the time-saving winning selection pattern command "z5", and the data of the determined mode of the game state is set. Specifically, the time-saving flag indicating the C time-saving game state is set to 3 (the time-saving flag is turned on), and the time-saving number counter is set to 1. After executing the process of S5076, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5077.

In S5077, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 159. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 155).

In S5078, the main CPU 201 performs start setting processing for the big win game control processing or the small win game control processing. In this processing, signals are generated and updated that are output via the external terminal board 1184 to, for example, the hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 145 for both) or the island computer (not shown). Note that the signals generated and updated in this processing are signals related to the special symbol that is the subject of the special symbol game determination processing. After performing processing in S5078, the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S5079.

In S5079, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the upper limit of the number of times the large prize opening 5131 can be opened (S5080), and processing to set a large prize signal to the external terminal board 1184 (S5081).

In S5082, the main CPU 201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3." By performing a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, a process to prepare for opening the large prize opening (see S5026 in FIG. 155) is performed after the special symbol game determination process is completed.

In S5083, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process (S5083). In this process, the main CPU 201 performs a process to clear various flags and counters, such as the time-saving flag and the time-saving counter, when a big win occurs. Note that in the case of a small win, the process to clear various flags and counters, such as the time-saving flag and the time-saving counter, is not performed. Then, a process to reserve the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state is performed. Note that the game state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

In S5084, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a big win start display command when a big win has occurred, and a process for reserving the transmission of a small win start display command when a small win has occurred. The big win start display command or small win start display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S522 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S5084, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited area and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S5071 to S5084) within the interrupt prohibited area.

[7-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, a special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 201 in S5077 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 158) will be described with reference to FIG. 159. FIG. 159 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game ending process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In S5092, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". When the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" is thus performed, the next special symbol game can be executed. After executing the process of S5092, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5093.

In S5093, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting game state designation parameters for the special symbol. Then, it performs a process of reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process of reserving the transmission of a special symbol game end command (S5094). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S5094, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 158).

[7-4-7. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, referring to Fig. 160, a special prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 in S5026 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 155) will be described. Fig. 160 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening preparation process in the fifth pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S5101).

If it is determined in S5101 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (if S5101 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5101 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (if S5101 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5102.

In S5102, the main CPU 201 loads the large prize opening/closing execution count counter value. When a large prize opening/closing execution count counter is executing a large prize game control process, it corresponds to a counter that counts the number of rounds in the large prize game state, and when a small prize game control process is executing, it corresponds to a counter that counts the number of times the small prize game control process is opened. The count value of the large prize opening/closing execution count counter (large prize opening/closing execution count counter value) is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S5102, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5103.

In S5103, the main CPU 201 determines whether the large prize opening/closing execution count counter value is the upper limit. In this embodiment, as shown in the win type determination table in FIG. 148, the upper limit for the number of rounds in the large prize game state is 4 rounds or 10 rounds, and the upper limit for the number of times the small prize game state can be opened is 8 times or 10 times.

If it is determined in S5103 that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened and closed has reached the upper limit (if S5103 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5104.

In S5104, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5." In this way, by switching the control state number by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S5104), the jackpot end process (see S5028 in FIG. 155) is performed after the jackpot opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S5104, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5105.

At S5105, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. Then, it performs a process to reserve the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state.

In S5106, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a big win end display command if a big win has occurred, and a process for reserving the transmission of a small win end display command if a small win has occurred. The big win end display command or small win end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S5106, the main CPU 201 ends the big prize opening opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

Returning to S5103, if it is determined that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened and closed is not the upper limit (if S5103 is judged as NO), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5107.

In S5107, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the large prize opening opening/closing execution count counter. After performing the process of S5107, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5108.

In S5108, the main CPU 201 performs a process to determine which large prize opening to open. In this process, if a large prize game control process is being executed, the large prize opening 5131 is determined as the large prize opening to open, and if a small prize game control process is being executed, the large prize opening 5131 is determined as the large prize opening to open. After executing the process of S5108, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5109.

In S5109, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the large prize opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large prize opening 5131 is opened, the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 5131, the maximum number of balls that can enter the large prize opening 5131, the number of prize balls when a ball enters the large prize opening, etc. are set. The number of times the large prize opening is opened corresponds to the number of rounds when the large prize opening control process is executed, and corresponds to the number of times the large prize opening 5131 is opened when the small prize opening control process is executed. Note that this is not intended to exclude cases where the large prize opening 5131 is opened multiple times in one round or small prize opening control process. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of times the large prize opening 5131 is opened and closed as separate processes. After executing the process of S5109, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5110.

In this embodiment, the maximum opening time of the large prize opening is set to, for example, a maximum of 29,000 msec when the large prize game control process is being executed, and is set to, for example, a maximum of 1,500 msec or a maximum of 2,000 msec when the small prize game control process is being executed. The maximum number of balls that can enter the large prize opening is set to, for example, a maximum of 10 balls when the large prize game control process is being executed, and is set to, for example, a maximum of 10 balls when the small prize game control process is being executed. The number of winning balls when a ball enters the large prize opening 5131 is set to, for example, 15 balls. However, the values that are set or configured in the various setting processes related to the large prize opening are not limited to the above.

In S5110, the main CPU 201 performs a special prize opening opening/closing control process to open the special prize opening 5131. After executing the process of S5110, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5111.

In S5111, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S5111) and switching the control state number, the large prize opening opening control process (see S5027 in FIG. 155) is performed after the large prize opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S5111, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5112.

In S5112, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. Then, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S5112, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5113.

In S5113, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of the large prize opening display command. The large prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S5113, the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

[7-4-8. Large prize opening control process]
Next, referring to Fig. 161, a special prize opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S5027 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 155) will be described. Fig. 161 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening control process in the fifth pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special pattern is "4" (S5121).

If it is determined in S5121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (if S5121 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (if S5121 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5122.

In S5122, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 5131 is the maximum number of balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the large prize opening count switch 5132 (see FIG. 145), which counts the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening, is the maximum number of balls. The large prize opening entry counter value counted by the large prize opening count switch 5132 is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203.

In S5122, if the main CPU 201 determines that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 5131 is not the maximum number of winning balls, it transfers processing to S5123, and if it determines that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 5131 is the maximum number of winning balls, it transfers processing to S5128-1.

In S5128-1, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is in a jackpot game state (the jackpot flag is on). If the main CPU 201 determines that the game is in a jackpot game state, it transfers processing to S5124, and if it determines that the game is not in a jackpot game state (i.e., the game is in a small jackpot game state), it transfers processing to S5128-2.

In S5123, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the special prize opening 5131 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the special prize opening related various setting process (see S5109 in FIG. 160) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S5123 that the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 5131 has not elapsed (if S5123 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening opening control process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 155).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5123 that the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 5131 has elapsed (if S5123 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5124.

In S5124, the main CPU 201 performs the process of closing the large prize opening 5131. After executing the process of S5124, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5125.

In S5125, the main CPU 201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S5125) and switching the control state number, the large prize opening preparation process (see S5026 in FIG. 155) will be performed again after this large prize opening control process is completed. After executing the process of S5125, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5126.

In S5126, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. Then, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S5126, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5127.

In S5127, if the game is in a big win game state, the main CPU 201 performs a process of reserving the transmission of an inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Note that in a small win game state, the process of reserving the transmission of an inter-round display command is not performed. Then, after processing S5127, the main CPU 201 ends the big win opening control process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

In S5128-2, the main CPU 201 performs a closure setting process to close the large prize opening 5131. After executing the process of S5128-2, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5128-3.

In S5128-3, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5." In this way, by performing processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5" and switching the control state number, the jackpot end processing (see S5028 in FIG. 155) will be performed after the jackpot opening control processing is completed. After executing the processing of S5128-3, the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S5128-4.

In S5128-4, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. Then, it performs a process to reserve the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S5128-4, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5128-5.

In S5128-5, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a small win end display command. The small win end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S5128-5, the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

[7-4-9. Jackpot end processing]
Next, the big win end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S5028 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155) will be described with reference to Fig. 162. Fig. 162 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win end process in the fifth pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S5131).

If it is determined in S5131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (if S5131 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 154). In this case, it returns to the process from which the special symbol management process was called.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (if S5131 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5132.

In S5132, the main CPU 201 executes a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, various counter values related to the big win game state and small win game state (large win port opening count counter value, large win port winning counter value, etc.), time-saving win flag, small win flag, big win flag, symbol confirmation count counter value, etc. are cleared. After executing S5132, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5133.

In S5133, the main CPU 201 performs the A time-saving state setting process. In this A time-saving state setting process, the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 148 is referenced, and the mode of the game state (time-saving flag and number of time-saving times) is determined based on the time-saving winning selection pattern command, and the data of the determined game state mode is set. Specifically, whether the time-saving winning selection pattern command is "z1" or "z2", the time-saving flag is set to 1 (the time-saving flag is turned on), indicating the A time-saving game state, and the time-saving number counter is set to 10. After executing the process of S5132, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5034.

In S5134, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this processing, the special symbol game end processing described with reference to FIG. 159 is performed. After executing the processing of S5134, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 155).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 set an interrupt prohibited area and perform the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interrupt prohibited area.

[7-4-10. Normal symbol control process]
Next, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S40 during the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 163. It goes without saying that, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in Fig. 163, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start condition for the normal symbol is satisfied, as in the special symbol control process.

Figure 163 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the numbers ("0" to "4") written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in Figure 163 are control state numbers for the normal symbols. The main CPU 201 progresses the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the waiting time for normal symbols is 0 (S5300).

If it is determined in S5300 that the waiting time for the normal symbol is not 0, the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process and transfers the process to S41 (see FIG. 21) of the main control main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5301.

In S5301, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing the process of S5301, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5310. The main CPU 201 performs the process of S5310 and subsequent steps based on the control state number read in the process of S5301.

In S5310, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display start processing. This S5310 processing is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". Details of this normal symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 164. Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S5320.

In S5320, the main CPU 201 performs processing to end the variable display of normal symbols. This processing of S5320 is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S5330.

In this normal symbol variable display end process, the main CPU 201 manages whether the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, and when the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, it sets the control state number of the normal symbol to "2". If the variable display time of the normal symbol has not ended, it keeps the control state number of the normal symbol at "1" and waits for the variable display time of the normal symbol to end.

In S5330, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol gameplay determination processing. This S5330 processing is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S5340.

In this normal symbol game judgment process, the main CPU 201 performs a judgment process of the derived result of the normal symbol (for example, normal symbol hit or normal symbol miss). Then, if the result of the normal symbol hit judgment process is a normal symbol hit, the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric device 146 is performed, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "3". On the other hand, if the result of the normal symbol hit judgment process is a miss, the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric device 146 is not performed, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "0".

In addition, in the process of setting the opening pattern of the normal electric device 146, the normal symbol hit type determination table shown in FIG. 152 is referenced, and the opening pattern (number of times to open, opening time, wait time) of the normal electric device 5146 is determined based on the game state and the symbol selection command when a normal symbol hits, and the determined opening pattern is set. After that, the main CPU 201 transmits to the sub-CPU 301 the opening pattern command of the normal electric device corresponding to the determined opening pattern of the normal electric device 5146.

In S5340, the main CPU 201 performs the normal electric device release process. This S5340 process is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5350.

In this normal electric role release process, the main CPU 201 performs the normal electric role 146 release process according to the normal electric role 5146 release pattern determined in the normal symbol game determination process of S5330. Then, when the normal electric role 146 release process ends, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "4".

In S5350, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit end processing. This S5350 processing is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 ends this normal symbol hit end processing, it ends the normal symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see Figures 20 to 23).

In this normal symbol winning end process, the main CPU 201 performs a process to reset (clear) various parameters related to the normal symbol determined in steps S5310 to S5340 above, and various random number values stored in the normal symbol determination area (0).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited period and performs the normal symbol control process (S5300 to S5350) described above within the interrupt prohibited period.

[7-4-11. Normal symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to Fig. 164, details of the normal symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in S5310 during the normal symbol control process (see Fig. 163) will be described. Fig. 164 is a flow chart showing an example of the normal symbol variable display start process in the fifth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 164, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the normal pattern is "0" (S5311).

If it is determined in S5311 that the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 163). On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the normal symbol is "0", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5312.

In S5312, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of the start information of the normal pattern. In this process, the start information stored in the normal pattern start memory area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the normal pattern determination area (0), and the start information stored in the normal pattern start memory area (2) to the normal pattern start memory area (4) is shifted to the normal pattern start memory area (1) to the normal pattern start memory area (3). After executing the process of S5312, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5313.

In S5313, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol winning judgment process. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol winning judgment table shown in FIG. 150, and determines winning/losing judgment value data ("normal symbol winning" or "normal symbol losing") based on the game state and the normal symbol winning judgment random number value stored in the normal symbol judgment area (0). After executing S5313, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5314.

In S5314, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol determination process. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 151, and determines a "normal symbol winning symbol selection command" based on the above-mentioned winning/losing determination value data (the result of the normal symbol winning determination process) and the normal symbol random number value stored in the normal symbol determination area (0). After executing S5314, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5315.

In S5315, the main CPU 201 performs processing to determine the normal symbol variation pattern. In this processing, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 153, and determines the normal symbol variation pattern and the normal symbol variable display time based on the game state, the normal symbol win/lose determination value data, the normal symbol winning pattern selection command, and the normal symbol performance selection random number value stored in the normal symbol determination area (0). After executing the processing of S5315, the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S5316.

In S5316, the main CPU 201 performs variable display time setting processing for the normal symbol. In this processing, the variable display time for the normal symbol determined in the normal symbol variation pattern determination processing (S5315) is set to the normal symbol waiting time in the main RAM 203, and the normal symbol display unit 161 is caused to start variable display of the normal symbol. This normal symbol waiting time is decremented as a normal symbol timer counter in a system timer interrupt processing that is performed, for example, at 2 msec intervals. After executing the processing of S5316, the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S5317.

In S5317, the main CPU 201 performs a process to set the control state number of the normal symbol to "1". In this way, by performing a process to set the control state number of the normal symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after this normal symbol variable display start process ends, a normal symbol variable display end process (see S5320 in FIG. 163) is performed. After executing the process of S5317, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5318.

In S5318, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of the normal symbol variation pattern command. The normal symbol variation pattern command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

[7-5. Sub-control processing]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control circuit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 165. Fig. 165 is a flow chart showing an example of the sub-control circuit process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 165, the sub-CPU 301 first performs an initialization process (S5500). In this initialization process, for example, RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, etc. are performed. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 moves the process to S5510.

The initialization process (S5500) described above is executed when the power is turned on or the backup is cleared. After the power is turned on, the processes S5510 to S5580 described below are executed repeatedly.

In S5510, the sub-CPU 301 performs a read process on the command input port 308 (see FIG. 145). This process is performed by reading the command sent from the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 145) that is set in the command input port 308. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S5520.

In S5520, the sub-CPU 301 executes a command analysis process. In this process, the command read in the process of S5510 is analyzed. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S5530.

At S5530, the sub-CPU 301 executes a presentation mode determination process. In this process, for example, a presentation pattern is determined based on a command sent from the main CPU 201, and various requests (e.g., a drawing request, a sound request, a lamp request, and a role request) for operating various presentation devices are generated based on the determined presentation pattern. Details of this presentation mode determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 166. Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 moves the process to S5540.

In S5540, the sub-CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this processing, the sub-CPU 301 transmits a drawing request to the display control circuit 304 (see FIG. 145). The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control for displaying an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on the message (drawing request) transmitted from the sub-CPU 301. When this processing ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the processing to S5550.

At S5550, the sub-CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this processing, the sub-CPU 301 transmits a sound request to the audio control circuit 305 (see FIG. 145). The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control to output audio from the speaker 32 based on the message (sound request) transmitted from the sub-CPU 301. Upon completing this processing, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the processing to S5560.

In S5560, the sub-CPU 301 executes an LED control process. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 sends an LED request to the LED control circuit 306 (see FIG. 145). Based on the message (LED request) sent from the sub-CPU 301, the LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control to light up or blink all or a portion of the LEDs that make up the LED group 46. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S5570.

At S5570, the sub-CPU 301 executes a reel control process. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 sends a reel request to the reel control circuit 307 (see FIG. 145). Based on the message (reel request) sent from the sub-CPU 301, the reel control circuit 307 performs drive control to operate the performance drive motors (not shown) for all or some of the reels that make up the performance reel group 58. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 ends the sub-control circuit main process.

[7-5-1. Presentation mode determination process]
Next, the details of the presentation mode determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 in S5530 during the sub control circuit process (see FIG. 165) will be described with reference to FIG. 166. FIG. 166 is a flow chart showing an example of the presentation mode determination process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

At S5531, the sub-CPU 301 executes a performance pattern determination process to determine a performance pattern. In this process, a performance pattern is determined based on a command sent from the main CPU 201, the performance pattern defining the display performance displayed on the display device 7 and the sound performance output from the speaker 32. Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S5532.

In S5532, the sub-CPU 301 executes a process for generating an animation request. In this process, an animation request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S5531 above. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S5533.

In S5533, the sub-CPU 301 executes a process for generating a drawing request. In this process, a drawing request is generated based on the animation request generated in S5532. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S5534.

In S5534, the sub-CPU 301 executes a sound request generation process. In this process, a sound request is generated based on the animation request generated in S5532. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S5535.

In S5535, the sub-CPU 301 executes lamp request generation processing. In this processing, the lamp request is generated based on the animation request generated in S5532. When this processing ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the processing to S5536.

At S5536, the sub-CPU 301 executes a reel request generation process. In this process, the reel request is generated based on the animation request generated at S5532. Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 ends the performance mode determination process and returns the process to the drawing control process (see FIG. 165).

[7-5-2. Presentation pattern determination process]
Next, the details of the effect pattern determination process executed by the sub-CPU 301 in S5531 in the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 166) will be described with reference to Fig. 167. Fig. 167 is a flow chart showing an example of the effect pattern determination process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In S5531-1, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "normal symbol variation pattern command."

If it is determined in S5531-1 that the command is a "regular symbol variation pattern command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S5531-2. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "regular symbol variation pattern command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S5531-3.

In S5531-2, the sub-CPU 301 performs processing to determine the variation of the identification symbol for the performance. This "variation of the identification symbol for the performance" is a performance in which the identification symbol for the performance is displayed in a predetermined variation manner as a performance indicating that the "long opening" of the normal electric role device 5146 has been determined. When this processing ends, the sub-CPU 301 ends the performance pattern determination processing and returns the processing to the performance mode determination processing (see FIG. 166).

In S5531-3, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "normal electric role opening pattern command corresponding to long opening."

As described above, "the opening pattern command of a normal electric device that supports long opening" refers to the symbol selection command "fz1" when a normal symbol is hit in the normal play state, and the symbol selection commands "fz1" and "fz2" when a normal symbol is hit in the A time-saving play state or the C time-saving play state.

If it is determined in S5531-3 that the command is a "normal electric role opening pattern command corresponding to a long opening", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S5531-4. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "normal electric role opening pattern command corresponding to a long opening", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S5531-5.

In S5531-4, the sub-CPU 301 performs a start hole opening effect determination process. This "start hole opening effect" is an effect that notifies the player that a "long opening" of the normal electric role device 5146 has been performed and that it is now possible for a game ball to enter the start hole 5140. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and returns the process to the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 166).

In S5531-5, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol variation pattern command."

If it is determined in S5531-5 that the command is a "special symbol variation pattern command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S5531-6. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "special symbol variation pattern command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S5531-11.

In S5531-6, the sub-CPU 301 performs a special effect determination process. This "special effect" is a variable display of special symbols, a background effect performed during a small win game state, and a common effect performed over multiple small win game states. This special effect has a "bonus time basic effect" and a "bonus time specialized effect", and the sub-CPU 301 refers to the game state and determines the "bonus time basic effect" when in the normal game state or the C time-saving game state, and determines the "bonus time specialized effect" when in the A time-saving game state. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and returns the process to the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 166).

In S5531-7, the sub-CPU 301 performs a bonus time variation effect determination process to determine the variation effect of the special symbol during the bonus time, which will be described later, according to the type of the special symbol variation pattern command sent from the main CPU 201.

In this bonus time variation presentation decision process, as shown in the "Notes" section of FIG. 149, when there is a "time-saving hit variation pattern command", a presentation pattern for a "rewind presentation" is decided, when there is a "jackpot variation pattern command", a presentation pattern for a "full rotation reach" or a "jackpot notification reach" is decided, and when there is a "small hit variation pattern command", a presentation pattern for a "shortened variation" or a "jackpot notification reach" is decided. When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the presentation pattern decision process and returns the process to the presentation mode decision process (see FIG. 166).

In S5531-8, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "small win start display command."

If it is determined in S5531-8 that the command is a "small win start display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S5531-9. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "small win start display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S5531-10.

In S5531-9, the sub-CPU 301 performs special effect determination processing. This processing is the same as S5531-6 above, and when in the normal game state or the C time-saving game state, it determines a "bonus time basic effect", and when in the A time-saving game state, it determines a "bonus time specialized effect". When this processing ends, the sub-CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination processing, and returns the processing to the effect mode determination processing (see FIG. 166).

In S5531-10, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "jackpot start display command."

If it is determined in S5531-10 that the command is a "jackpot start display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S5531-11. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "jackpot start display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S5531-12.

In S5531-11, the sub-CPU 301 performs a bonus time specialized effect determination process to determine a "bonus time specialized effect." Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and returns the process to the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 166).

In S5531-12, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "game state designation command."

If it is determined in S5531-12 that the command is a "game state designation command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S5531-13. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "game state designation command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S5531-14.

In S5531-13, the sub-CPU 301 performs a game state setting process to set the game state according to the type of game state designation command. Specifically, if the game state designation command indicates a normal game state, the normal game state data is set in the state storage area of the work RAM 303. If the game state designation command indicates an A-time shortened game state, the A-time shortened game state data is set in the state storage area of the work RAM 303. If the game state designation command indicates a C-time shortened game state, the C-time shortened game state data is set in the state storage area of the work RAM 303. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 ends the presentation pattern determination process and returns the process to the presentation mode determination process (see FIG. 166).

In S5531-14, the sub-CPU 301 determines a presentation pattern according to various other commands sent from the main CPU 201. After that, the sub-CPU 301 executes the process of S5084, ends the presentation pattern determination process, and returns the process to the presentation mode determination process (see FIG. 166).

The above-mentioned "bonus time basic effect or bonus time specialized effect (special effect)", "rewind effect" and "starting hole opening effect" will be described in more detail later using Figure 170.

[7-6. Game state transition diagram]
Next, a transition of a game state in the fifth pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 168. Fig. 168 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing a transition of a game state in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As described above, in this embodiment, left-handed play is the normal play mode in the normal play mode, and right-handed play is the normal play mode in the A time-saving play mode and the C time-saving play mode.

Therefore, in the normal game mode, when the game ball enters the first passage opening 5126A, a "normal pattern hit" is determined by a lottery for a normal pattern (a hit determination for a normal pattern), and the normal pattern hit selection pattern command fz1 corresponding to the "long opening" of the normal electric role device 5146 is determined (with a probability of approximately 1/420.3), allowing the game ball to enter the start opening 5140.

When a game ball enters the start hole 5140, start information for the special symbol is extracted. In this embodiment, since the number of reserved special symbols is four, when five or more game balls enter the start hole 5140, the start information is stored in the special symbol determination area (0) and the four special symbol start memory areas (1) to (4) for that determination, and a total of five special symbol lotteries (special symbol winning determinations) are performed.

When the special symbol lottery (special symbol hit determination) determines that there is a "jackpot" with a first probability (approximately 1/319 probability), the game moves to the jackpot game state. In this embodiment, as described above, in a 10-round jackpot game state, 1500 game balls can be paid out, and in a 4-round jackpot game state, 600 game balls can be paid out.

When the special symbol lottery (hit determination of the special symbol) determines that there is a "small hit" with a second probability (probability of approximately 1/1.64), the game state transitions to the small hit game state. In this embodiment, as described above, in the small hit game state, 150 game balls can be paid out. Note that the transition to the small hit game state does not trigger a transition to another game state.

When the special symbol lottery (special symbol hit determination) determines that there is a "time-saving hit" with the third probability (approximately 1/2.59 probability), the game will transition to time-saving play state C.

After transitioning to the jackpot game state, the game transitions to the A time-saving game state. The A time-saving game state is entered when either of the following conditions is met: "10 time-saving cycles completed (see FIG. 148)" or "transition to the jackpot game state."

The C time-saving game state is set to end when either of the following conditions is met: "End of one time of time-saving (see FIG. 148)" or "Transition to a jackpot game state."

In addition, in this embodiment, the "time-saving count" is counted when the variable display of the special symbol starts, but it may be counted when the variable display of the special symbol ends.

In the A time-saving play state and the C time-saving play state, the normal electric device 5146 is "long-opened" (see FIG. 152), allowing the game ball to enter the starting hole 5140 and allowing the special symbol to be drawn again.

In this embodiment, when a miss is not determined in the lottery for the special symbols and a game ball enters the starting hole 5140, either a "big hit", a "small hit", or a "time-saving hit" is determined. If a "big hit" or a "small hit" is determined, an opportunity to pay out a predetermined number of game balls (hereinafter referred to as "bonus time") is given, and if a "time-saving hit" is determined, the game moves to the time-saving game state C, where a game ball can again enter the starting hole 5140, further extending the "bonus time". As mentioned above, the lottery for the special symbols may be configured so that a "miss" is determined with a relatively low probability.

The time-saving play state A is set to have more time-saving plays than the time-saving play state C. Therefore, if a "time-saving win" is determined by a lottery for a special symbol during the time-saving play state A, and the player is shifted from the time-saving play state A to the time-saving play state C following the determination of the "time-saving win," there is a risk that the number of time-saving plays that could be performed will be reduced, which may result in a disadvantage to the player.

Therefore, in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, even if a "time-saving hit" is determined by drawing a special pattern during the A time-saving gaming state, the machine is controlled not to transition from the A time-saving gaming state to the C time-saving gaming state by executing a process to invalidate the determination of the "time-saving hit" (the process of S5075 shown in FIG. 158). Therefore, even if a "time-saving hit" is determined by drawing a special pattern during the A time-saving gaming state, the machine is configured so that the currently executing A time-saving gaming state can be continued.

In addition, if the start information for determining the "time-saving hit" remains stored in the reserved memory after the end of the A time-saving play state, it is possible to transition to the C time-saving play state based on the start information for determining the "time-saving hit", so even if the game transitions to the A time-saving play state, the possibility of resuming the time-saving play state is maintained.

When a "time-saving hit" is determined by drawing a special symbol during the C-time-saving play state, it is ideal to configure the machine to execute a new C-time-saving play state in the same way as the first pachinko game machine, but to simplify the control process, the machine may be configured to invalidate the determination of the C-time-saving hit during the C-time-saving play state, as in the A-time-saving play state.

The fifth pachinko gaming machine has two time-saving game states, time-saving game state A and time-saving game state C, but like the first pachinko gaming machine, it may have three time-saving game states, time-saving game state A, time-saving game state B, and time-saving game state C.

[7-7. Bonus Time Explanation]
As described above, a "bonus time" is provided when a game ball enters the starting hole 5140. The mechanism of this "bonus time" will be described. FIG. 169 is an example of an explanatory diagram for explaining the bonus time in the fifth pachinko game machine.

Here, in Fig. 169, from the top, the "judgment order" of the lottery for the special symbol, "applicable" indicating the special symbol judgment area (0), and "reserved memory" indicating the special symbol start memory areas (1) to (4) are shown, and the start information stored in "applicable" and "reserved memory" is shown as a "circle". Also, the "circle" of the start information shows "small" when the start information determines a small win, "hour" when the start information determines a time-saving win, and "large" when the start information determines a big win.

Figure 169 (a) shows an example of when the "long opening" of the normal electric device 5146 is performed, five or more game balls enter the starting hole 5140, and all the special symbols are determined to be "small wins."

As shown in FIG. 169(a), if all the special symbols are determined to be "small wins", a total of five small win games are played and the bonus time ends. In the case shown in FIG. 169(a), 5 small win games = 150 x 5 = 600 game balls can be paid out.

Figure 169 (b) shows an example of what happens after the "long opening" of the normal electric device 5146 occurs, five or more game balls enter the starting hole 5140, and the fifth special symbol is drawn to determine a "time-saving hit."

As shown in FIG. 169(b), when the first through fourth special symbols are drawn, a "small win" is determined and a small win game is played, and when the fifth special symbol is drawn, a "time-saving win" is determined and after the variable display of that special symbol ends, the game transitions to the C time-saving game state.

When the game transitions to the time-saving C game state, the passing of the game ball through the second passage opening 5126B triggers a "long opening" of the normal electric device 5146, making it possible to once again allow the game ball to enter the starting opening 5140.

After the fifth special symbol is drawn, "Applicable" and "Reserved Memory 1-4" become default data (blank data) (all start information in "Applicable" and "Reserved Memory 1-4" has been consumed), so when five or more game balls enter start hole 5140, the C time-saving game state is triggered and five new start information pieces are stored in "Applicable" and "Reserved Memory".

As shown in FIG. 169(b), when the sixth and seventh special symbols are drawn, a "small win" is determined and a small win game is played, and when the eighth special symbol is drawn, a "time-saving win" is again determined and after the variable display of that special symbol ends, the game transitions to the C time-saving game state.

When the game transitions to the time-saving C game state, the passing of the game ball through the second passage opening 5126B triggers a "long opening" of the normal electric device 5146, making it possible to once again allow the game ball to enter the starting opening 5140.

After the eighth special symbol is drawn, starting information is already stored in "Applicable" and "Reserved Memory 1," and "Reserved Memory 2-4" are set to default data (blank data). Therefore, when three or more game balls enter the starting hole 5140, the C time-saving game state is triggered, and three pieces of starting information are newly stored in "Reserved Memory 2-4."

Then, when the 9th to 13th special symbols are drawn, a "small win" is determined, the small win game is played, and the bonus time ends.

In the case shown in FIG. 169(b), 11 small wins = 150 x 11 = 1,650 game balls can be paid out.

Figure 169 (c) shows an example of what happens after the "long opening" of the normal electric device 5146 occurs, five or more game balls enter the starting hole 5140, and the fifth special symbol is selected to determine a "jackpot."

As shown in FIG. 169(c), when the first through fourth special symbols are drawn, a "small win" is determined and a small win game is played, and when the fifth special symbol is drawn, a "big win" is determined and after the big win game state ends, the game transitions to time-saving game state A.

As described above, the A time-saving game state is set to 10 time-saving times (see FIG. 148, etc.), and the A time-saving game state can continue until 10 special patterns have been drawn. In the A time-saving game state, when the game ball passes through the second passage opening 5126B, the normal electric device 5146 is "long-opened," and it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the start opening 5140 again.

Then, if the fifth special symbol is determined to be a "jackpot" and the game transitions to the A time-saving game state after the jackpot game state ends, 10 drawings for the sixth through fifteenth special symbols will be made in the A time-saving game state.

Here, in the drawing of the 9th and 13th special symbols during the A time-saving play state, a "time-saving win" is determined. However, as described above, even if a "time-saving win" is determined by drawing special symbols during the A time-saving play state, by executing a process to invalidate the determination of the "time-saving win" (the process of S5075 shown in FIG. 158), it is possible to continue the A time-saving play state without transitioning from the A time-saving play state to the C time-saving play state.

The lottery for the 16th to 19th special symbols is based on the start information (hereinafter also referred to as "remaining reserved information") stored in "reserved memories 1 to 4" after the A time-saving play state ends.

In the drawing of the 19th special symbol based on the remaining reserved information, a "time-saving hit" is determined. This drawing of the 19th special symbol is performed in the normal game state after the A time-saving game state has ended, so once a "time-saving hit" has been determined, the game will transition to the C time-saving game state after the variable display of the special symbol has ended. Therefore, even if the A time-saving game state has ended, the time-saving game state can be continued again based on the remaining reserved information, and a decrease in interest in the game due to the end of the A time-saving game state can be prevented.

When the game transitions to the time-saving C game state, the passing of the game ball through the second passage opening 5126B triggers a "long opening" of the normal electric device 5146, making it possible to once again allow the game ball to enter the starting opening 5140.

After the drawing of the 19th special symbol, "Applicable" and "Reserved Memory 1-4" are set to default data (blank data), so when five or more game balls enter the start hole 5140, the C time-saving game state is triggered and five new start information items are stored in "Applicable" and "Reserved Memory".

Then, when the 20th to 24th special symbols are drawn, a "small win" is determined, the small win game is played, and the bonus time ends.

In the case shown in FIG. 169(c), if the "jackpot" in the drawing of the fifth special symbol is "10R", a total of "4500" game balls can be paid out, which is the sum of the jackpot game (10R) x 1 = 1500 x 1 = "1500 balls" and the small jackpot game x 20 = 150 x 20 = "3000 balls". In addition, if the "jackpot" in the drawing of the fifth special symbol is "4R", a total of "3600" game balls can be paid out, which is the sum of the jackpot game (4R) x 1 = 600 x 1 = "600 balls" and the small jackpot game x 20 = 150 x 20 = "3000 balls".

In this way, in the fifth pachinko game machine, if a "time-saving hit" is determined in the lottery for the special symbol, the "bonus time" can be extended. This makes it possible to vary the time when the "bonus time" ends, allowing the player to enjoy wondering how long the bonus time will last, further increasing the enjoyment of the game. The condition for ending the bonus time is also "five consecutive small hits determined in the lottery for the special symbol."

［7-8. Bonus Time］
Next, the "bonus time" presentation will be described. Figure 170 shows an example of a display image for explaining the bonus time presentation in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

(Performance when a time-saving hit occurs during bonus time)
(a-1) to (d-1) in the left column of Figure 170 are examples of display images that explain the presentation when a "time-saving hit" occurs during bonus time, and correspond to the drawing of the first to sixth special patterns in Figure 169 (b) described above.

Figure 170 (a-1) is an example of a display image of the "bonus time basic performance" displayed in the display area of the display device 7, and corresponds to the selection of the first to fourth special symbols in Figure 169 (b) described above.

The "bonus time basic effect" is an effect that is performed in common during the variable display of special symbols in the normal game state or the C time-saving game state, and during the small win game state. More specifically, the "bonus time basic effect" is an effect that is performed when a game state designation command indicating the normal game state or the C time-saving game state is received, and when a special symbol variable pattern command is received in the normal game state or the C time-saving game state, and when a small win start display command is received in the normal game state or the C time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 170 (a-1), as a "bonus time basic effect," the "number of remaining rounds" is displayed in the upper left of the display area, "bonus time" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and "hit right" is displayed in the upper right of the display area to indicate the correct game mode. In addition, a specified character image is displayed in the center of the display area, and the "cumulative number of rounds" and "acquired points" are displayed in the lower right of the display area.

The "number of remaining rounds" is displayed by subtracting 1R from 5R, corresponding to the condition for ending the bonus time being "five consecutive small wins in the special symbol lottery". Also, the "cumulative number of rounds" displays the total number of times that the game has been controlled to a small win game state and the number of rounds that have been played in a big win game state. The "earned points" displays the cumulative number of game balls paid out each time a game ball enters the big win opening 5131.

Figure 170 (b-1) is an example of a display image of a "rewind effect" that is displayed in the display area of the display device 7 when a time-saving win is determined by drawing a special symbol, and corresponds to the drawing of the fifth special symbol in Figure 169 (b) described above.

The "rewind effect" is an effect that is performed when a special symbol variation pattern command for a time-saving hit is received (see Figure 149), and is an effect that rewinds the basic bonus time effect, suggesting that there is a possibility that the small win game state will continue. As shown in Figure 170 (b-1), the rewind effect is displayed as if the video of the basic bonus time effect so far is being rewound.

Figure 170 (c-1) is an example of a display image of the "starting gate opening effect" displayed in the display area of the display device 7 after the rewind effect shown in Figure 170 (b-1) has been performed.

The "starting hole opening effect" is an effect that notifies the player that it is possible for the game ball to enter the starting hole 5140. Specifically, the "starting hole opening effect" is an effect that is performed when the variable display of the special symbol for the time-saving hit has ended and a game state designation command indicating the C time-saving game state has been received, or when the game ball has passed through the second passing hole 5126B and a normal symbol hit selection symbol command that causes the long opening of the normal electric role device 5146 has been received. As shown in FIG. 170 (c-1), the starting hole opening effect displays "Aim for the chance starting hole!" to notify the player that the game ball has entered the starting hole 5140. Note that "Right hit" continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the display area.

Figure 170 (d-1) is an example of a display image of the "bonus time basic performance" that is displayed in the display area of the display device 7 when the game ball enters the starting hole 5140 again, and corresponds to the drawing of the sixth special symbol in Figure 169 (b) described above.

As shown in FIG. 170 (d-1), when the game ball enters the starting hole 5140 again after the "starting hole opening effect", the "bonus time basic effect" is performed again. In this "bonus time basic effect", the "remaining rounds" is displayed as increased (rewound), and the character image displays an indication that the bonus time has been extended.

In this way, the "rewind effect" that occurs when a time-saving hit is determined can notify the player that the bonus time has been extended, allowing the player to enjoy wondering how long the bonus time will continue, further increasing the player's interest in the game.

(Performance when a jackpot is hit during bonus time)
(a-2) to (d-2) in the right column of Figure 170 are examples of display images explaining the presentation when a "jackpot" is hit during bonus time, and correspond to the drawing of special patterns 1 to 16 in Figure 169 (c) described above.

Figure 170 (a-2) is an example of a display image of the "bonus time basic performance" displayed in the display area of the display device 7, and corresponds to the drawing of the first to fourth special symbols in Figure 169 (c) described above. The display contents such as "remaining rounds", "bonus time", "right hit", "cumulative rounds", and "earned points" shown in Figure 170 (a-2) are the same as those in Figure 170 (a-1).

Figure 170 (b-2) is an example of a display image of a "jackpot notification reach" that is displayed in the display area of the display device 7 when a jackpot is determined by drawing a special symbol, and corresponds to the drawing of the fifth special symbol in Figure 169 (c) described above.

The "jackpot notification reach" is an effect that is performed when a command for the variation pattern of the special jackpot symbol is received (see FIG. 149), and is an effect of whether or not three decorative symbols consisting of the word "invincible" are lined up. As shown in FIG. 170 (b-2), when there is a jackpot, the three decorative symbols "invincible", "invincible", and "invincible" are displayed together as a result of the jackpot notification reach. Note that when there is no jackpot, decorative symbols such as "invincible", "X", and "invincible" are displayed as a result of the jackpot notification reach.

Figure 170 (c-2) is an example of a display image of the "bonus time special effect" displayed in the display area of the display device 7, and corresponds to the drawing of the 6th to 15th special symbols in Figure 169 (c) described above.

The "bonus time special effect" is an effect that is performed in common during the big win game state, during the variable display of the special symbol in the A time-saving game state, and during the small win game state in the A time-saving game state. More specifically, the "bonus time special effect" is an effect that is performed when a big win start display command is received, when a game state designation command indicating the A time-saving game state is received and when a variable pattern command of the special symbol is received in the A time-saving game state, and when a small win start display command is received in the A time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 170 (c-2), "Invincible Mode" is displayed in the center of the display area as a "bonus time specialized effect," and "Right Hit" is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area to notify the normal game mode. Then, in the lower right corner of the display area, continuing from the "bonus time basic effect," "Cumulative Rounds" and "Earned Points" are displayed. This "Cumulative Rounds" displays the total number of times that the game has been controlled to the small win game state and the number of rounds that have been executed in the big win game state, and "Earned Points" displays the cumulative number of game balls paid out each time a game ball enters the big prize opening 5131 in the small win game state and the big win game state.

Figure 170 (d-2) is an example of a display image of the "bonus time basic performance" that is displayed in the display area of the display device 7 when the A time-saving game state ends and there are four remaining reserved pieces of information, and corresponds to the drawing of the 16th special symbol in Figure 169 (c) described above.

As shown in FIG. 170 (d-2), in the "bonus time basic performance" that follows the end of the bonus time special performance, the "remaining rounds," "total rounds," and "acquired points" that were continued from the bonus time special performance are still displayed, and the character image displays an indication that bonus time has resumed.

In addition, the "number of remaining rounds" is displayed as "4R" corresponding to four remaining reserved information, if there are three remaining reserved information after the A time-saving play state ends, "3R" is displayed, if there are two remaining reserved information after the A time-saving play state ends, "2R" is displayed, if there is one remaining reserved information after the A time-saving play state ends, "1R" is displayed, and if there is no remaining reserved information after the A time-saving play state ends, "End" is displayed.

In this way, the "bonus time specialized performance" that is performed during a jackpot and during the A time-saving game state creates a guaranteed period in which the bonus time will not end, allowing players to enjoy the bonus time with peace of mind and further increasing the excitement of the game.

In this way, in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, in the normal game mode, the main game is not a "special symbol game" consisting of a lottery for special symbols, but a "normal symbol game" consisting of a lottery for normal symbols, and the lottery for special symbols does not determine a "loss," but can be treated as a "bonus time" in which a predetermined number of game balls are awarded, creating new gameplay that has never been seen before and making the game even more exciting.

In addition, if a "time-saving hit" is determined by the lottery for the special symbol, the game will transition to a time-saving game state (time-saving game state C) and the game ball will be able to enter the starting hole 5140 again, and the bonus time can be extended. This makes it possible to vary the time when the bonus time ends, further increasing the excitement of the game.

In addition, in the fifth pachinko game machine, the presentation when a small win is determined by a lottery for a special symbol and the shortened variation of the special symbol is performed and the presentation that is performed when the game is controlled to a small win game state are both treated as a common "special presentation (bonus time basic presentation or bonus time specialized presentation)." Also, the presentation that spans successive shortened variations and the small win game state is also treated as a common "special presentation (bonus time basic presentation or bonus time specialized presentation)." Therefore, multiple small win game states can be presented as one bonus time.

In addition, in the fifth pachinko game machine, when a "time-saving hit" is determined by drawing a special symbol and the variable display of the special symbol is being performed, the basic bonus time performance is rewound, and a "rewind performance" is performed that suggests that the small hit game state may continue. This can increase the excitement of the game even when the variable display of the special symbol is being performed.

<Fifth modified example of pachinko gaming machine>
Next, a modified example of the fifth embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine will be described.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, as shown in FIG. 170 etc., the bonus time presentation is configured so that when the variable display of the special pattern for the time-saving hit is being performed, the bonus time basic presentation is rewound as a "rewind presentation" and the next bonus time basic presentation has the "remaining rounds" increased (rewound) but instead of displaying the "remaining rounds" in the bonus time basic presentation, the "maximum number of rounds" is displayed as the number of times the small win game state can be executed, and when the variable display of the special pattern for the time-saving hit is being performed, a "maximum number of rounds addition presentation" is performed to add the maximum number of rounds.

In addition, as the basic bonus time presentation, a battle presentation in which an ally character and an enemy character fight is performed, and in response to the condition for ending the bonus time being "five consecutive small wins in the special pattern drawing", the HP of the ally character is set to 5 points, and each time the game is controlled to a small win game state, the enemy character attacks the ally character and subtracts 1 HP, and when the variable display of the special pattern for the time-saving win is performed, the HP of the ally character is restored.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, both the basic bonus time effect and the specialized bonus time effect can be executed as special effects during bonus time, but the specialized bonus time effect may be integrated into the basic bonus time effect. In this case, when in a jackpot game state, a "jackpot effect" for the jackpot game state can be executed, and when in the A time-saving game state, the number of time-saving rounds in the A time-saving game state can be added to the "remaining rounds" of the basic bonus time effect, or the "remaining rounds" can be displayed as "HOLD" or "STOP".

As shown in FIG. 148, the fifth pachinko game machine is configured to determine the number of time-saving times when a time-saving hit occurs as one, but it may be configured to determine two or more times. Furthermore, it may be configured to provide multiple types of special symbols (multiple types of selection symbol commands) corresponding to time-saving hits, and to determine multiple types of times of time-saving. In particular, in this embodiment, by setting a large number of times of time-saving, it is possible to transition from the time-saving game state to a small hit game state more often, and to make it possible to pay out more game balls.

The fifth pachinko gaming machine is a so-called type 1 pachinko gaming machine, but like the third pachinko gaming machine, it may be configured as a type 1/2 mixed machine. When the fifth pachinko gaming machine is configured as a type 1/2 mixed machine, a specific area and a non-specific area may be provided inside the big prize opening 5131 (or another big prize opening to be added), and the big prize gaming state may be controlled by the game ball passing through the specific area.

(others)
The fifth pachinko gaming machine described above can apply the techniques of each embodiment, including modified examples. The above-mentioned embodiment does not limit the contents of the present invention, and modifications can be made to the extent that they do not deviate from the scope of the claims.

In addition, the effects described in the fifth pachinko gaming machine are merely a list of the most favorable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in each embodiment of the present invention.

Furthermore, the above [4. Expansion Example] can also be applied to the fifth pachinko gaming machine, as long as there is no inconsistency in its gameplay or control.

[8. The 6th Pachinko Game Machine]
Next, the sixth pachinko game machine will be described. The sixth pachinko game machine is a so-called type one pachinko game machine that can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, similar to the second pachinko game machine. However, the sixth pachinko game machine has a different basic specification of playability compared to the second pachinko game machine, and accordingly, the configuration of various components arranged in the play area is partially different.

Hereinafter, when describing an embodiment of the sixth pachinko gaming machine, the same components as those in the first pachinko gaming machine will be given the same symbols and step numbers, and detailed descriptions of their configurations and processing will be omitted.

The sixth pachinko gaming machine is a "simultaneous variable machine" that can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, but it may also be a "priority variable machine" that prioritizes either the start condition for the first special symbol or the start condition for the second special symbol, or a "sequential variable machine" that prioritizes the start conditions and meets them in the order of winning, including the first start port and the second start port.

[8-1. Appearance]
The external configuration of the sixth pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 171. Fig. 171 is an example of a perspective view showing the external appearance of the sixth pachinko gaming machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction.

As shown in FIG. 171, the external configuration of the sixth pachinko gaming machine is different from that of the first pachinko gaming machine in that the configuration of the performance button device 6310 (first performance operation unit 6311) provided on the upper tray 51 is different.

The effect button device 6310 is an operating device that allows the player to operate the effects. In particular, the effect button device 6310 of the sixth pachinko gaming machine is configured so that its operating mode can be changed, and the effect function can be improved by changing the operating mode of the effect button device 6310.

The following describes the changes in the operation mode of the performance button device 6310.

[8-2. Operation mode of the performance button device]
FIG. 172 is an example of a conceptual diagram showing the change in the operation mode of the presentation button device of the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

Figure 172 (a) is an example of a conceptual diagram of the effect button device 6310 when in the first operation mode, which is the initial operation mode.

As shown in FIG. 172(a), the first operation mode of the effect button device 6310 is an operation mode in which the first effect operation unit 6311 that can be operated by the player is located on the upper side. When the effect button device 6310 is in the first operation mode, the player can press the first effect operation unit 6311.

Figure 172 (b) is an example of a conceptual diagram of the effect button device 6310 when in a second operation mode changed from a first operation mode.

As shown in FIG. 172(b), the second operation mode of the effect button device 6310 is an operation mode in which the operation drive unit 6313 is rotated by approximately 45 degrees toward the protective glass 43 by a drive device such as a motor, and the second effect operation unit 6312 that can be operated by the player is located on the front side. When the effect button device 6310 is in the second operation mode, the player can press the second effect operation unit 6312 diagonally.

Figure 172 (c) is an example of a conceptual diagram of the effect button device 6310 when in a third operation mode changed from the second operation mode.

As shown in FIG. 172(c), the third operation mode of the effect button device 6310 is an operation mode in which the operation drive unit 6313 rotates approximately 90 degrees toward the protective glass 43 side, and the second effect operation unit 6312 is located on the upper surface side. When the effect button device 6310 is in the third operation mode, the player can press the second effect operation unit 6312 directly downward.

Figure 172 (d) is an example of a conceptual diagram of the effect button device 6310 when in the fourth operation mode changed from the third operation mode.

As shown in FIG. 172(d), the fourth operation mode of the effect button device 6310 is an operation mode in which the second effect operation unit 6312 protrudes upward from the operation drive unit 6313. When the effect button device 6310 is in the fourth operation mode, the player can press the second effect operation unit 6312 protruding upward directly downward.

Figure 172 (e) is an example of a conceptual diagram of the effect button device 6310 when in the fifth operation mode changed from the fourth operation mode.

As shown in FIG. 172(e), the fifth operation mode of the effect button device 6310 is an operation mode in which the operation drive unit 6313 rotates approximately 120 degrees toward the protective glass 43 side, and the protruding second effect operation unit 6312 falls backward. When the effect button device 6310 is in the fifth operation mode, it is possible to pull the second effect operation unit 6312 that has fallen backward toward the front.

Furthermore, the effect button device 6310 has a built-in vibration device (not shown), and is configured to be able to vibrate. Therefore, more specifically, the effect modes of the effect button device 6310 can be configured from combinations of the first to fifth operation modes and the vibration mode.

The operation mode of the effect button device 6310 is not limited to the above-mentioned operation modes and the number of changes. For example, the effect button device 6310 may be operated in an operation mode in which it moves back and forth or left and right, or may simply protrude upward. Furthermore, the effect button device 6310 does not have to have a built-in vibration device and does not have to vibrate.

[8-3. Game board unit]
The sixth pachinko game machine includes a game board unit 6010, which will be described with reference to Fig. 173. This game board unit 6010 is also disposed in front of the base door 3 (see Fig. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see Fig. 2) in the same manner as the first pachinko game machine.

Figure 173 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit 6010 equipped in a sixth pachinko game machine. The game board unit 6010 has a game panel 6100 on which various components are arranged, and a game area 105 is formed on the front side of the game panel 6100, in which a launched game ball can roll and flow down.

As shown in FIG. 173, the game board unit 6010 of the sixth pachinko game machine is different from the first pachinko game machine mainly in the configuration and arrangement of the ball passage 6108, the deceleration wall portion 6109, the center role 6115 located approximately in the center of the play area 105, the first start port (center) 6120A, the first start port (right) 6120B, the second start port 6140, the passing gate 6126, the normal electric role unit 6145, the big win role unit 6130, and the small win role unit 6150. The configuration and arrangement of each of these are explained below.

(Ball passage)
The ball passage 6108 is disposed in the right area 107 and is composed of a flat plate portion inclined downward, on which the game ball can roll. The plate portion of the ball passage 6108 is formed of a transparent resin, and the contact surface on which the game ball rolls is embossed. By embossing the ball passage 6108, the rolling game ball can be decelerated, and by embossing the transparent resin, the light emitted from the LED or the like is diffused, and the decorativeness can be enhanced. The ball passage 6108 may be formed of a non-translucent material instead of a transparent resin.

(Deceleration wall)
The deceleration wall portion 6109 is disposed above the ball passage 6108, and is a surface-treated portion that is textured on the surface of the game panel 6100. The deceleration wall portion 6109 processed on the surface of the game panel 6100 can decelerate the rolling game ball, and by making the game panel 6100 out of transparent resin, light emitted from an LED or the like is diffused, enhancing the decorativeness.

(Center role)
The center device 6115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (without reference number) of the game panel 6100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 116 at its upper portion. Game balls launched toward the game area 105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 116.

The center gadget 6115, like the first pachinko game machine, is equipped with a warp entrance 117, a stage 118, and a chance entrance 119, but unlike the first pachinko game machine, it also has a circular performance partition 6116 on the front side of the display device 7.

The performance partition section 6116 is disposed on the front side of the display area of the display device 7, partitioning the display area of the display device 7, and forming an upper display area 7a inside the performance partition section 6116 as the display area of the display device 7.

In addition, in the same manner as in the first pachinko gaming machine, while the special symbol is being variably displayed, the display area of the display device 7 variably displays a performance identification symbol (e.g., a decorative symbol) to display the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol, and also displays a performance image according to the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol, a performance image during a jackpot game state, a demo performance image, a hold image showing the hold status of the variable display of the special symbol, etc.

(First starting point)
The first starting hole (middle) 6120A is disposed below the display area of the display device 7, and is configured so that a game ball hit from the left can enter the hole (a game ball hit from the right is difficult or impossible to enter the hole). When a game ball enters the first starting hole (middle) 6120A, the game ball is detected by the first starting hole switch 6121A (see FIG. 174 described later).

The first starting hole (right) 6120B is located in the right area 107 and is provided in the normal electric role unit 6145 described below. When the first starting hole (right) 6120B is open, a game ball hit from the right can enter the hole (it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit from the left to enter the hole). When a game ball enters the first starting hole (right) 6120B, the game ball is detected by the first starting hole switch 6121B.

In addition, in the embodiment, the first starting port (center) 6120A and the first starting port (right) 6120B are collectively referred to as "first starting port 6120A, 6120B", and the first starting port switch 6121A and the first starting port switch 6121B are collectively referred to as "first starting port switch 6121A, 6121B".

When the first start port switches 6121A and 6121B detect the entry (passage) of a game ball into the first start port 6120A or 6120B, the start information of the first special pattern (random number value for determining a big win, random number value for a pattern, random number value for selecting a first effect, random number value for selecting a second effect, etc.) is extracted, and the extracted start information of the first special pattern is reserved up to the "first reserved number (e.g., 4)". When the start condition of the special pattern is established, the reserved start information of the first special pattern is used for the hit determination process of the first special pattern. In addition, when a game ball enters the first start port 6120A or 6120B, the first prize ball number (e.g., 3) is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the first start port 6120A or 6120B is not limited to this.

(Second starting hole)
The second starting hole 6140 is located in the right side area 107 below (downstream) of the normal electric role unit 6145 described later, and is configured so that a game ball hit from the right can enter the hole (a game ball hit from the left is difficult or impossible to enter the hole). When a game ball enters the second starting hole 6140, the game ball is detected by the second starting hole switch 6141 (see FIG. 174 described later).

In addition, in this embodiment, since the second starting hole 6140 is located downstream of the normal electric role unit 6145 (first starting hole (right) 6120B), when the first starting hole (right) 6120B is in an open state, the game ball that flows down the right side area 107 enters the first starting hole (right) 6120B located upstream before reaching the second starting hole 6140, making it difficult for the ball to enter the second starting hole 6140. This is also true when in a time-saving game state in which the first starting hole (right) 6120B is likely to be in an open state.

When the second start hole switch 6141 detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the second start hole 6140, the start information of the second special pattern is extracted, and the extracted start information of the second special pattern (random number value for determining a big win, random number value for a pattern, random number value for selecting a first effect, random number value for selecting a second effect, etc.) is reserved up to a "second reserved number (e.g., 2)" that is less than the first reserved number. When the start condition of the special pattern is established, the reserved start information of the second special pattern is used for the hit determination process of the second special pattern. In addition, when a game ball enters the second start hole 6140, a second number of prize balls (e.g., 1) that is less than the first number of prize balls is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 6140 is not limited to this.

In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second start port 6140, the number of reserved start information and the number of prize balls paid out are set to be smaller than when a game ball enters the first start port 6120A, 6120B. However, the number of reserved information and the number of prize balls may be set to be the same when a game ball enters the second start port 6140 and when a game ball enters the first start port 6120A, 6120B, or the number of reserved information and the number of prize balls may be set to be larger when a game ball enters the second start port 6140.

(Passing gate)
The passing gate 6126 is located in the right area 107 above the normal electric accessory unit 6145 described later, and is located so that the game ball hit from the right side can pass through it. The passing gate 6126 is also provided with a passing gate switch 6127 (see FIG. 174 described later) that detects the passage of the game ball through the passing gate 6126. The game ball that passes through the passing gate 6126 flows down the right area 107 toward the normal electric accessory unit 6145.

When the passing gate switch 6127 detects the passage of a game ball through the passing gate 6126, the start information of the normal pattern is extracted, and the extracted start information of the normal pattern (random number value for determining whether the normal pattern is a hit, random number value of the normal pattern, etc.) is reserved up to a third reserved number (for example, four). When the start condition of the normal pattern is established, the reserved start information of the normal pattern is used for the hit determination process of the normal pattern (lottery for the normal pattern). In addition, even if the game ball passes through the passing gate 6126, the game ball is not paid out. It is also possible to configure so that a predetermined number of game balls are paid out when the game ball passes through the passing gate 6126.

The pass gate 6126 may also function as a trigger for activating the consecutive operation device of the special feature. Here, the condition for transitioning to the big win gaming state is that both the condition device and the consecutive operation device of the special feature are activated, but when a stop display mode (symbol combination) indicating a big win is derived, the condition device may be activated but the consecutive operation device of the special feature may not be activated. Then, assuming that the condition device is activated, the consecutive operation device of the special feature may be activated upon the passage of a gaming ball through the pass gate 6126, i.e., the detection of a gaming ball by the pass gate switch 6127 (see FIG. 174 described below), thereby transitioning to the big win gaming state.

(Normal electric role unit)
The normal electric role unit 6145 is located in the right area 107, above (upstream of) the second start hole 6140, and below the passing gate 6126, and is located so that the game ball hit to the right can pass through. The normal electric role unit 6145 is a unit body that integrates the first start hole (right) 6120B, the first start hole switch 6121B that detects the entry of the game ball into the first start hole (right) 6120B, and the normal electric role 6146.

The normal electric device 6146 is equipped with a protruding plate-type normal power shutter 6147 that can move forward and backward, and a normal power solenoid 6148 (see FIG. 174 described below) that operates the normal power shutter 6147. The normal electric device 6146, i.e., the normal power shutter 6147, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy to insert a game ball into the first starting hole (right) 6120B, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to insert a game ball into the first starting hole (right) 6120B.

The normal power shutter 6147 is composed of a flat roof portion that is gently inclined (for example, 5 to 10 degrees) toward the second starting port 6140. When the normal power shutter 6147 is in the open state, the normal power shutter 6147 is embedded in the game panel 6100 and the first starting port (right) 6120B is in an open state, and game balls flowing down the right side area 107 and game balls rolling on the normal power shutter 6147 can enter the first starting port (right) 6120B. When the normal power shutter 6147 is in the closed state, the normal power shutter 6147 protrudes from the game panel 6100 and the first starting port (right) 6120B is closed, making it impossible or difficult for game balls to enter the first starting port (right) 6120B. In addition, when the normal power shutter 6147 is in the closed state, the game ball rolling on the normal power shutter 6147 is guided to the second starting hole 6140 or the small win role unit 6150 described later. Note that instead of the normal power shutter 6147 that can move forward and backward, a wing member that can move left and right, known as an electric chute, may be used.

(Big Win Unit)
The jackpot accessory unit 6130 is disposed in the right area 107 above the passage gate 6126. The jackpot accessory unit 6130 is a unit body in which a first large prize winning hole 6131, a first large prize winning hole count switch 6132 that detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize winning hole 6131, and a jackpot accessory 6133 are integrated.

The first large prize opening 6131 is a prize opening that can be shifted from a closed state to an open state. In this embodiment, the first large prize opening 6131 shifts from a closed state to an open state when a stop display mode is derived that indicates that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot". When the first large prize opening 6131 is controlled to a jackpot game state, it is possible for game balls to enter up to a first specified number (e.g., 10 balls), and when a game ball enters this first large prize opening 6131, the number of game balls corresponding to the first large prize opening 6131 (e.g., 15 balls) will be paid out.

The jackpot device 6133 is equipped with a protruding plate-type jackpot shutter 6134 that can move forward and backward, and a jackpot solenoid 6135 (see FIG. 174 described below) that operates the jackpot shutter 6134. The jackpot device 6133, i.e., the jackpot shutter 6134, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the first large winning opening 6131, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the first large winning opening 6131.

The jackpot shutter 6134 is composed of a flat roof that is gently inclined (for example, 5 to 10 degrees) toward the passage gate 6126. When the jackpot shutter 6134 is in the open state, the jackpot shutter 6134 is embedded in the game panel 6100 and the first large prize opening 6131 is in an open state, and game balls flowing down the right area 107 and game balls rolling on the jackpot shutter 6134 can enter the first large prize opening 6131. When the jackpot shutter 6134 is in the closed state, the jackpot shutter 6134 protrudes from the game panel 6100 and the first large prize opening 6131 is in a closed state, making it impossible or difficult for game balls to enter the first large prize opening 6131. In addition, when the jackpot shutter 6134 is in the closed state, the game ball rolling on the jackpot shutter 6134 is guided to the downstream passing gate 6126.

In the "jackpot game state" in which the jackpot device 6133 is activated, the first large prize opening 6131 transitions from a closed state to an open state until the maximum number of rounds. When the maximum open time during which the first large prize opening 6131 is open for one round has elapsed or when a first specified number (e.g., 10 balls) of game balls enter the first large prize opening 6131, the first large prize opening 6131 transitions from an open state to a closed state, and one round ends. Then, when the maximum number of rounds ends, the jackpot game state ends. Since game balls are paid out in the number of prize balls (e.g., 15 balls) corresponding to the first large prize opening 6131 every time a game ball enters the first large prize opening 6131, the jackpot game state is a game state that allows a large number of game balls to be paid out.

(Small win unit)
The small win role unit 6150 is disposed in the right side area 107, above the second starting hole 6140, and below the normal electric role unit 6145. The small win role unit 6150 is a unit body in which the second large winning hole 6151, the second large winning hole count switch 6152 that detects the entry of a game ball into the second large winning hole 6151, and the small win role 6153 are integrated.

The second large prize opening 6151 is a prize opening that can be shifted from a closed state to an open state. In this embodiment, the second large prize opening 6151 shifts from a closed state to an open state when a stop display mode is derived that indicates that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small hit". When the second large prize opening 6151 is controlled to a small hit game state, it is possible for game balls to enter up to a second specified number (e.g., 4 balls), and when a game ball enters this second large prize opening 6151, the number of game balls corresponding to the second large prize opening 6151 (e.g., 14 balls) will be paid out.

The small win device unit 6150 is equipped with a protruding plate-type small win shutter 6154 that can move forward and backward, and a small win solenoid 6155 (see FIG. 174 described below) that operates the small win shutter 6154. The small win device unit 6150, i.e., the small win shutter 6154, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second large winning opening 6151, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second large winning opening 6151.

The small win shutter 6154 is composed of a flat roof portion that is gently inclined (for example, 5 to 10 degrees) toward the second starting hole 6140. When the small win shutter 6154 is in the open state, the small win shutter 6154 is embedded in the game panel 6100 and the second large winning hole 6151 is in an open state, and a game ball flowing down the right side area 107 or a game ball rolling on the small win shutter 6154 can enter the second large winning hole 6151. When the small win shutter 6154 is in the closed state, the small win shutter 6154 protrudes from the game panel 6100 and the second large winning hole 6151 is in a closed state, making it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second large winning hole 6151. In addition, when the small win shutter 6154 is in the closed state, the game ball rolling on the small win shutter 6154 is guided downstream to the second starting port 6140.

In the "small win game state" in which the small win unit 6150 is activated, the second large winning opening 6151 transitions from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined number of times. When the predetermined number of times of opening is completed for one small win game state, or when a second specified number (e.g., 4 balls) less than the first specified number (e.g., 10 balls) of the large win game state enters the second large winning opening 6151, the second large winning opening 6151 transitions from an open state to a closed state, and one small win game state ends. Each time a game ball enters the second large winning opening 6151, a number of prize balls (e.g., 14 balls) corresponding to the second large winning opening 6151 that is less than the number of prize balls (e.g., 15 balls) corresponding to the first large winning opening 6131 is paid out, so the small win game state is a game state that makes it possible to pay out a predetermined number of game balls.

In this embodiment, the second specified number for the small win game state (e.g., 4) is set to be less than the first specified number for the big win game state (e.g., 10), but the second specified number for the small win game state may be set to be the same as the first specified number for the big win game state, or may be set to be greater than the first specified number for the big win game state. However, it is preferable to set the second specified number for the small win game state to 10 or less.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls corresponding to the second large prize opening 6151 (e.g., 14) is set to be less than the number of prize balls corresponding to the first large prize opening 6131 (e.g., 15), but the number of prize balls corresponding to the second large prize opening 6151 may be set to be the same as the number of prize balls corresponding to the first large prize opening 6131, or may be set to be greater than the number of prize balls corresponding to the first large prize opening 6131. However, it is desirable to set the number of prize balls corresponding to the second large prize opening 6151 to 15 or less.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the first large prize opening 6131 and the second large prize opening 6151 are provided separately, but this is not limited to this, and the large prize opening that is opened when the large prize game control process is executed and the large prize opening that is opened when the small prize game control process is executed may be the same large prize opening.

[8-4. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the sixth pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 174. Fig. 174 is an example of a block diagram showing the control circuit of the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 174, the sixth pachinko gaming machine, like the first pachinko gaming machine, is mainly composed of a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 300 that controls the presentation according to the progress of the game, a payout/launch control circuit 400, and a power supply circuit 450.

However, the sixth pachinko gaming machine differs from the first pachinko gaming machine in some respects in the configuration of the devices connected to the main control circuit 200 and the sub-control circuit 300. The configuration and layout of each are explained below.

[8-4-1. Main control circuit]
Compared to the first pachinko game machine, the sixth pachinko game machine has some different configurations for the normal power solenoid 6148, the big win solenoid 6135, the small win solenoid 6155, the first start port switch 6121A, 6121B, the second start port switch 6141, the passing gate switch 6127, the first large prize port count switch 6132, and the second large prize port count switch 6152, which are connected to the main control circuit 200.

(Solenoid for general purpose)
The normal power solenoid 6148 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the normal power shutter 6147. When the normal power solenoid 6148 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it moves the normal power shutter 6147 backward to open the first starting port (right) 6120B, and when it is not energized (OFF) by the main CPU 201, it moves the normal power shutter 6147 forward to close the first starting port (right) 6120B.

(jackpot solenoid)
The jackpot solenoid 6135 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the jackpot shutter 6134. When the jackpot solenoid 6135 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it moves the jackpot shutter 6134 backward to open the first large prize opening 6131, and when it is not energized (OFF) by the main CPU 201, it moves the jackpot shutter 6134 forward to close the first large prize opening 6131.

(Solenoid for small hits)
The small win solenoid 6155 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the small win shutter 6154. When the small win solenoid 6155 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it moves the small win shutter 6154 backward to open the second large winning opening 6151, and when it is not energized (OFF) by the main CPU 201, it moves the small win shutter 6154 forward to close the second large winning opening 6151.

(First start switch)
The first start port switches 6121A and 6121B are through-type proximity switches that detect the entry of a game ball into the first start port 6120A and 6120B. The first start port switch 6121A detects the entry of a game ball into the first start port (center) 6120A, and the first start port switch 6121B detects the entry of a game ball into the first start port (right) 6120B.

(Second start switch)
The second start port switch 6141 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the second start port switch 6140.

(Passing gate switch)
The passing gate switch 6127 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the passing gate switch 6126.

(First prize slot count switch)
The first large prize opening count switch 6132 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 6131. When the first large prize opening count switch 6132 detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 6131, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls that enter per round, and instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of the first prize ball (e.g., 15 game balls) corresponding to the first large prize opening 6131.

(Second major prize slot count switch)
The second large prize opening count switch 6152 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the second large prize opening 6151. When the second large prize opening count switch 6152 detects the entry of a game ball into the second large prize opening 6151, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls that enter per small win game state, and instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of the second prize ball (e.g., 14 game balls) corresponding to the second large prize opening 6151.

[8-4-2. Sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 300, like the first pachinko game machine, is equipped with a sub-CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, a sound control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, a gimmick control circuit 307 and a command input port 308, but differs in that it further comprises a button control circuit 310 and a performance button device 6310.

(Button Control Circuit 310)
The button control circuit 310 is a circuit for driving the effect button device 6310. That is, the button control circuit 310 is a circuit for changing the operation mode of the effect button device 6310 and vibrating the effect button device 6310. The button control circuit 310 drives the effect button device 6310 in response to a drive command from the sub-CPU 301.

The button control circuit 310 is also a circuit for inputting operation signals related to player operations detected by the effect button device 6310. When the button control circuit 310 inputs an operation signal from the effect button device 6310, it outputs predetermined operation information to the sub-CPU 301.

(Performance button device)
As shown in FIG. 172, the performance button device 6310 has an external configuration including a first performance operation unit 6311, a second performance operation unit 6312, and an operation drive unit 6313, and in addition, as internal components not shown, it is configured to have a first operation unit detection switch that detects the operation of the game ball relative to the first performance operation unit 6311, a second operation unit detection switch that detects the operation of the game ball relative to the second performance operation unit 6312, a third operation unit detection switch that detects the operation of the game ball relative to the operation drive unit 6313, a rotation motor for rotating the operation drive unit 6313, a button solenoid for protruding the second performance operation unit 6312, and a vibration motor for vibrating the vibrating body.

[8-5. Basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the sixth pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Figures 175 to 185. The sixth pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function will be omitted below.

In the sixth pachinko game machine, there are provided a "normal game state" in which a low probability game state and a non-time-saving game state are controlled, a "high probability time-saving game state" in which a high probability game state and a time-saving game state are controlled, a "high probability non-time-saving game state" in which a high probability game state and a non-time-saving game state are controlled, and a "low probability time-saving game state" in which a low probability game state and a time-saving game state are controlled, and the main CPU 201 is capable of progressing the game in any of these game states. However, the game states progressed by the control of the main CPU 201 are not limited to these, and it is also possible to prevent any of the game states among the normal game state, the high probability time-saving game state, the high probability non-time-saving game state, and the low probability time-saving game state from progressing.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, hitting to the left is the normal game mode, and in the high-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability non-time-saving game state, and the low-probability time-saving game state, hitting to the right is the normal game mode. The sub-CPU 301 executes control to display the normal game mode (e.g., whether to hit to the right or left) in, for example, the display area of the display device 7.

In the embodiment, the first and second start holes are collectively referred to as "start holes", and the first and second special symbols are collectively referred to as "special symbols". The winning determination process for the first special symbol is also referred to as "drawing for the first special symbol", the winning determination process for the second special symbol is also referred to as "drawing for the second special symbol", and the drawing for the first special symbol and the drawing for the second special symbol are collectively referred to as "drawing for the special symbol".

[8-5-1. Special symbol winning judgment table]
175 is an example of a special symbol winning judgment table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol winning judgment table shown in FIG. 175 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table used to determine whether a hit is a "big hit," "small hit," or "miss" by lottery.

The special symbol hit determination table specifies the type of special symbol (type of starting hole), the probability hit flag (whether probability hit control is executed or not), the random number value for hit determination extracted (obtained) based on the ball entering the first starting hole 6120A, 6120B or the second starting hole 6140, and the hit/miss determination value data ("jackpot determination value data", "minor hit determination value data", "miss determination value data") corresponding to "jackpot", "minor hit" or "miss" as data used in the hit determination process for the special symbol. The total random number value of the random number value for hit determination is 65536.

As shown in FIG. 175, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 6120A, 6120B corresponding to the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 determines whether the lottery result for the first special symbol is a "jackpot" or a "miss" based on the probability variable flag and the random number value for determining a jackpot for the special symbol. Here, in the lottery for the first special symbol, when the probability variable flag is 1 (when probability variable control is being executed), the random number value for determining a jackpot is specified so that a "jackpot" is determined with a higher selection rate than when the probability variable flag is 0 (when probability variable control is being executed).

When a game ball enters the second starting hole 6140 corresponding to the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 determines the result of the lottery for the second special symbol as a "big hit," "small hit," or "miss" based on the probability variable flag and the random number value for determining a big hit of the special symbol. Here, in the lottery for the second special symbol, when the probability variable flag is 1, the random number value for determining a big hit is specified so that there is a higher selection rate for determining a "big hit" than when the probability variable flag is 0, but the random number value for determining a big hit is specified so that the selection rate for determining a "small hit" is the same regardless of the probability variable flag.

When the sixth pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, the probability of a big win and/or a small win may be set to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting. In this case, for example, both the probability of a big win and the probability of a small win may be set to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting, or the probability of a small win may be set to be constant regardless of the setting value and the probability of a big win may be set to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting, or the probability of a big win may be set to be constant regardless of the setting value and the probability of a small win may be set to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting.

[8-5-2. Special symbol determination table]
176 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 176 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is a table that selects the "selected symbol information" and "symbol designation command" that determine the special symbol that will be displayed as a static symbol.

The "selected symbol information" is symbol information for specifying the winning symbol determined according to the type of win if the special symbol lottery result is a winning symbol, and the "symbol designation command" is a command for designating the symbol that is displayed when the variable display of the special symbol stops.

The special symbol determination table specifies the type of special symbol (type of starting hole), the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted (obtained) based on the ball entering the first starting hole 6120A, 6120B or the second starting hole 6140, the winning/losing determination value data described above, and the "selected symbol information" and "symbol designation command" that determine the stopping symbol, in association with each other. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted, for example, from 0 to 99 (100 types).

As shown in FIG. 176, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 6120A, 6120B corresponding to the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 selects the selected symbol information "z1" with a selection rate of 30/100, selects the selected symbol information "z2" with a selection rate of 30/100, and selects the selected symbol information "z3" with a selection rate of 40/100 based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol when the hit/miss judgment value data is the jackpot judgment value data. When the selected symbol information "z1" is selected, "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command, when the selected symbol information "z2" is selected, "zA2" is selected as the symbol designation command, and when the selected symbol information "z3" is selected, "zA3" is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 6120A, 6120B corresponding to the first special symbol, if the hit/miss determination value data is miss determination value data, the main CPU 201 will select the selected symbol information "z4" and select "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 6140 corresponding to the second special symbol, if the hit/miss determination value data is jackpot determination value data, the main CPU 201 will select the selected symbol information "z5" and select "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 6140 corresponding to the second special symbol, if the hit/loss determination value data is small hit determination value data, the main CPU 201 will select the selected symbol information "z6" and select "zA6" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 6140 corresponding to the second special symbol, if the hit/miss determination value data is miss determination value data, the main CPU 201 will select the selected symbol information "z7" and select "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

Although the sixth pachinko gaming machine will not be described, the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 stores a special symbol stop mode determination table equivalent to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) described in the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table is a table that is referenced when determining the stop mode of the special symbol that is output to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 (see FIG. 174) when the variable display of the special symbol stops, according to the selected symbol information. In addition, the display mode of a big win, a small win, or a miss is output to the first special symbol display unit 163 and the second special symbol display unit 164 based on the lottery result of the special symbol. In addition, a decorative symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative symbol stop mode determination table described in the first pachinko game machine (see FIG. 12(B)) is also stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300.

[8-5-3. Winning Type Determination Table]
177 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the sixth pachinko gaming machine. The winning type determination table shown in FIG. 177 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The hit type determination table is a table that determines the "state of the big hit game state," the "state of the small hit game state," and the "state of the subsequent game state (high probability hit flag, number of high probability hits, time-saving flag, number of time-saving hits)."

The "opening mode in the jackpot gaming state" indicates the opening mode of the first large prize winning opening 6131 that is opened in the jackpot gaming state. In this embodiment, the maximum opening time (e.g., 28 seconds) and closing time (e.g., 2 seconds) per round in the jackpot gaming state are specified in advance, and the maximum number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state is indicated as the opening mode of the first large prize winning opening 6131. Note that the maximum opening time per round may be determined, or the closing time of each round (round interval time) may be determined. Furthermore, the number of openings and the opening time may be determined so that the first large prize winning opening 6131 is opened and closed multiple times per round.

"Opening mode in small win gaming state" indicates the opening mode of the second large prize opening 6151 that opens in a small win gaming state. In this embodiment, the maximum opening time (e.g., 0.1 seconds) and closing time (e.g., 0.6 seconds) per opening in a small win gaming state are specified in advance, and indicate the maximum number of openings in a small win gaming state. Note that the maximum opening time per opening may be determined, or the closing time for each opening may be determined.

Here, the maximum opening time for one round in the big win game state (e.g., 0.1 seconds) is set shorter than the maximum opening time for one round in the big win game state (e.g., 28 seconds), and it can be said that in the big win game state, the first large prize winning opening 6131 opens in a favorable "first opening mode," and in the small win game state, the second large prize winning opening 6151 opens in a less favorable "second opening mode" than the first opening mode.

In addition, the total number of game balls that can be paid out in one small win game state (for example, 1 small win x 4 balls (second specified number) x 14 balls (number of prize balls) = 56 balls) is set to be less than the total number of game balls that can be paid out in one big win game state (for example, 3R x 10 balls (first specified number) x 15 balls (number of prize balls) = 450 balls), so it can be said that the big win game state is the advantageous "first special game," and the small win game state is the less profitable "second special game" than the big win game state.

"Subsequent game state status" indicates the game state status after the end of the jackpot game state, and indicates the settings of the "high probability bonus flag," "number of high probability bonuses," "time-saving flag," and "number of time-saving bonuses."

The "probability change flag" is a flag that indicates whether the game is in a low probability game state or a high probability game state, with a probability change flag of 0 indicating a "low probability game state" and a probability change flag of 1 indicating a "high probability game state." Additionally, the "number of probability changes" indicates the number of times the special symbol is drawn in the high probability game state, i.e., the number of times the special symbol is variably displayed.

The "time-saving flag" is a flag that indicates whether the game is in a non-time-saving game state or a time-saving game state, with a time-saving flag of 0 indicating a "non-time-saving game state" and a time-saving flag of 1 indicating a "time-saving game state." The "number of times that time-saving is performed" indicates the number of times that the special symbol is drawn in the time-saving game state, that is, the number of times that the special symbol is variably displayed. In this embodiment, the win type determination table is configured so that a different number of times that time-saving is performed can be determined depending on the game state at the time of winning when a jackpot is determined (whether it is a "normal game state" or "other" game state).

As shown in FIG. 177, the winning type determination table specifies, for the selected symbol information, the "opening mode of the big win game state", the "opening mode of the small win game state", and the "probability bonus flag", "number of probability bonuses", "time-saving flag", and "number of time-saving bonuses" as the game state modes thereafter.

The main CPU 201 determines the "opening mode of the big win game state", the "opening mode of the small win game state", the "probability change flag", the "number of probability change times", the "time-saving flag", and the "number of time-saving times" based on the selected symbol information. Note that if the lottery result for the special symbol is a "miss" (for example, if the selected symbol information is "z4" or "z7"), the state of the big win game state, the state of the small win game state, and the state of the subsequent game state are not determined, and therefore are not originally provided in the win type determination table in FIG. 177. However, in this embodiment, for the sake of convenience, it is illustrated in FIG. 177 to clearly indicate that if the lottery result for the special symbol is a "miss", the state of the big win game state, the state of the small win game state, and the state of the subsequent game state are not determined.

When the main CPU 201 determines that a "jackpot" is selected as the result of the special pattern lottery, it refers to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 177 before the start of the jackpot game state, and when the selected pattern information is "z1" corresponding to a jackpot with the first special pattern, it determines "10R" as the "jackpot game state opening mode", when the selected pattern information is "z2" corresponding to a jackpot with the first special pattern, it determines "5R" as the "jackpot game state opening mode", when the selected pattern information is "z3" corresponding to a jackpot with the first special pattern, it determines "3R" as the "jackpot game state opening mode", and when the selected pattern information is "z5" corresponding to a jackpot with the second special pattern, it determines "2R" as the "jackpot game state opening mode".

Then, after the jackpot game state ends, the main CPU 201 refers to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 177, and when the selected symbol information is "z1-z3" corresponding to a jackpot of the first special symbol, it determines the "probability change flag" to "1" indicating a high probability game state, the "probability change number of times" to "120 times", the "time-saving flag" to "1" indicating a time-saving game state, and the "time-saving number of times" to "100 times". Also, when the selected symbol information is "z5" corresponding to a jackpot of the second special symbol, it determines the "probability change flag" to "1" indicating a high probability game state, the "probability change number of times" to "120 times", and the "time-saving flag" to "1" indicating a time-saving game state. Then, in the case of the selected symbol information "z5" corresponding to the jackpot of the second special symbol, if the game state at the time of winning when it is determined that the jackpot has been won is the normal game state, the "number of time-saving times" is determined to be "100 times," and if the game state at the time of winning when it is determined that the jackpot has been won is not the normal game state, the "number of time-saving times" is determined to be "10,000 times."

In addition, when the main CPU 201 determines that a "small win" is the result of the lottery for the second special symbol, it refers to the win type determination table shown in FIG. 177 before the start of the small win game state, and when the selected symbol information is "z6", it determines "6 times" as the "opening mode of the small win game state".

In addition, after the small win gaming state ends, even if the selected symbol information corresponding to the small win of the second special symbol is "z5", the mode of the gaming state thereafter is not determined. In other words, the gaming state does not transition (change) as a result of the small win gaming state.

In this way, in this embodiment, after all jackpot game states have ended, the game will transition to a "high probability time-saving game state" in which both the time-saving game state and the high probability game state are executed. Therefore, after all jackpot game states have ended, the chances of transitioning to a jackpot game state again are increased (providing an opportunity for so-called consecutive wins), and the excitement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, after all jackpot game states have ended, the number of times that the high probability game state will have a chance of winning (120 times) is not necessarily set to a number that guarantees a transition to the jackpot game state, so that the player can hope for a transition to the jackpot game state before the number of times that the special pattern is displayed in a variable manner reaches the number of times that the chance of winning is won, thereby further increasing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, after the end of the jackpot game state for the first special symbol, the number of time-saving times (100) is set to be shorter than the number of times for the special chance mode (120 times). Therefore, after the end of the jackpot game state for the first special symbol, if the game transitions to the "high probability time-saving game state" in the first half (1 to 100 times) and then does not transition to a jackpot game state again, the game can transition to the "high probability non-time-saving game state" in the second half (101 to 120 times).

In particular, in this embodiment, when the game moves to the "high probability non-time-saving game state" in the latter half, as described below, it is possible to enter a "small win RUSH" in which the expected value of the number of game balls paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time may exceed 1. Here, if the number of times of probability change in the high probability game state (120 times) is not necessarily set to a number that guarantees a transition to a big win game state, the expected value of transitioning back to the big win game state (the expected value of a so-called consecutive win) decreases as the number of times the variable display of the special pattern approaches the number of probability changes, and the interest in the game generally decreases. However, in this embodiment, the expected value of entering the "small win RUSH" increases as the number of times the variable display of the special pattern approaches the number of probability changes, so that the expected value of entering the "small win RUSH" complements the decrease in the expected value of transitioning to the big win game state, and the interest in the game can be maintained.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the game state at the time of winning when it is determined that a jackpot has been won after the end of the jackpot game state for the second special symbol is not the "normal game state", that is, if the regular game mode is the "high probability time-saving game state", "high probability non-time-saving game state" or "low probability time-saving game state" when right-hitting, the number of time-saving times in the time-saving game state (10,000 times) is set to the number of times that guarantees a transition to the jackpot game state. For this reason, when the "high probability time-saving game state", "high probability non-time-saving game state" or "low probability time-saving game state" (especially the "high probability non-time-saving game state") is in the "high probability time-saving game state" when right-hitting, it is possible to expect a jackpot for the second special symbol, and to further increase the interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the main opportunity for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 6140, which triggers the selection of the second special symbol, is when the player is in a non-time-limited game state where the ball is being played to the right, i.e., in a "high probability non-time-limited game state." For this reason, in the "high probability non-time-limited game state," which can be entered in the latter half after the end of a jackpot game state, i.e., a "small jackpot rush," the player is made to look forward to the payout of game balls, as well as the jackpot of the second special symbol, which guarantees a transition to the next jackpot game state, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the end of the jackpot game state for the second special symbol, if the game state at the time of winning when it is determined that a jackpot has been won is the "normal game state", the number of time-saving times (100 times) in the time-saving game state is not necessarily set to the number of times that guarantees a transition to the jackpot game state. This is because, in the "normal game state", left-handed shots are performed as a regular game mode, and the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 6140 is not recognized as a game feature of this embodiment, and corresponds to an "irregular jackpot".

In this embodiment, when the game state at the time of winning when it is determined that a jackpot has been won after the end of the jackpot game state of the second special symbol is the "normal game state" (when it is an irregular jackpot), the number of time-saving times for the time-saving game state (100 times) is set to the same number as the number of time-saving times (100 times) for the time-saving game state set after the end of the jackpot game state of the first special symbol, but it may be set to a number less than the number of time-saving times for the time-saving game state set after the end of the jackpot game state of the first special symbol, and the time-saving flag and the number of time-saving times may not be set (the number of time-saving times may be 0).

[8-5-4. Game state transition diagram]
Next, the transition of the game state explained in Fig. 177 will be explained in detail with reference to Fig. 178. Fig. 178 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As described above, in this embodiment, left-handed play is the normal play mode in the "normal play state," and right-handed play is the normal play mode in the "high-probability time-saving play state," "high-probability non-time-saving play state," and "low-probability time-saving play state."

(Normal gameplay state)
In normal game play when hitting from the left, the game ball is configured to be able to enter the first starting hole (middle) 6120A (see Figure 173).

In the normal game state, when a game ball enters the first starting hole (middle) 6120A and a "jackpot" is determined by drawing lots for the first special symbol, after the jackpot game state for the first special symbol ends, the game will transition to a "high probability time-saving game state" in which the number of time-saving times is set to "100 times" and the number of chance times is set to "120 times."

(High probability time-saving game state)
In the high-probability time-saving game state in which right-hand hits are performed, the passing gate switch 6126 is configured to allow the game ball to pass, and the time-saving game state is controlled, so that when the game ball passes through the passing gate switch 6126, the first starting hole (right) 6120B is opened by the normal electric device 6146, and the game ball can enter the first starting hole (right) 6120B (see Figure 173).

When a ball enters the first starting hole (right) 6120B during high probability time-saving play, and a "jackpot" is determined by drawing lots for the first special symbol, the number of time-saving periods and the number of chance bonuses are reset after the first special symbol jackpot play state ends, and the game returns to high probability time-saving play (the so-called consecutive wins).

Here, in the high-probability time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is controlled, and the first start hole (right) 6120B is opened by the normal electric device 6146, making it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start hole 6140 located downstream of the first start hole (right) 6120B. Therefore, in the high-probability time-saving game state, it is difficult to draw a lottery for the second special symbol triggered by the game ball entering the second start hole 6140, and a lottery for the first special symbol is drawn when the game ball enters the first start hole (right) 6120B.

In the high-probability time-saving game state, if the special symbol is not determined to be a jackpot in the drawing and the number of times the special symbol has been drawn reaches the set number of time-saving times (100 time-saving times), control of the time-saving game state ends and the game transitions to a "high-probability non-time-saving game state."

(High probability non-time-saving game state)
In the high probability non-time-saving game state where right-hand play is performed, since the time-saving game state is not controlled, the first starting hole (right) 6120B is almost closed by the normal electric device 6146, and the game ball rolling on the normal electric shutter 6147 is guided to the small win device unit 6150 or the second starting hole 6140, so that the game ball can enter the second large winning hole 6151 or the second starting hole 6140 (see Figure 173).

For this reason, in the high probability non-time-saving game state, it is difficult to draw the first special symbol when the game ball enters the first starting hole (right) 6120B, and the second special symbol is drawn when the game ball enters the second starting hole 6140.

In the high probability non-time-saving game state, when a game ball enters the second starting port 6140 and a "small win" is determined by the lottery for the second special pattern, the second large prize opening 6151 opens, and each time a game ball enters the second large prize opening 6151, a number of prize balls (e.g. 14 balls) corresponding to the second large prize opening 6151 are paid out. In the lottery for the second special pattern, as shown in FIG. 175, the probability of a "small win" being determined is higher than a "miss", so that a "small win RUSH" (described later) is executed, and the number of game balls acquired increases.

In the high probability non-time-saving game state, if a game ball enters the second starting hole 6140 and a "jackpot" is determined by drawing lots for the second special symbol, after the jackpot game state for the second special symbol ends, the game will transition to a "high probability time-saving game state" in which the number of time-saving times is set to "10,000 times," which guarantees a transition to the jackpot game state, and the number of times for the special chance is set to "120 times."

In the high probability non-time-saving play state, if the special symbol drawing is not judged to be a jackpot, and the number of times the special symbol has been drawn since the end of the first special symbol jackpot play state reaches the set number of times of probability change (end of 120 times of probability change), control of the high probability play state ends, and the game returns to the "normal play state" where left-handed shots are performed.

(Low probability time-saving game state)
The low-probability time-saving game state in which right-hand play is performed is a game state to which the player is shifted when the special pattern lottery does not determine a jackpot in the "high-probability time-saving game state" shifted to after the end of the jackpot game state for the second special pattern, and the number of special pattern lotteries after the end of the jackpot game state for the second special pattern reaches the set number of chance wins (end of 120 chance wins).

In the low-probability time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is controlled in the same way as in the high-probability time-saving game state, so that when a game ball passes through the passing gate switch 6126, the normal electric device 6146 opens the first starting hole (right) 6120B, allowing the game ball to enter the first starting hole (right) 6120B (see Figure 173).

In addition, because the time-saving game state is controlled in the low-probability time-saving game state as in the high-probability time-saving game state, it is difficult to draw a lottery for the second special symbol when the game ball enters the second starting hole 6140, and instead, a lottery for the first special symbol is drawn when the game ball enters the first starting hole (right) 6120B.

Even if the game transitions to this low-probability time-saving game state, the remaining number of time-saving times is "9,880 times," so it is guaranteed that the time-saving game state will not end and the game will transition back to the jackpot game state.

In this way, in this embodiment, the configuration of the game board unit (see Figure 173), the lottery contents for special symbols (see Figure 175), the rules for transitioning to the game state (see Figure 177), etc. are organically linked to create unprecedented gameplay and further increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in the sixth pachinko gaming machine, the "high probability time-saving gaming state," "high probability non-time-saving gaming state," and "low probability time-saving gaming state," in which right-hand play is the normal gaming mode, are collectively referred to as the "right-hand play state" as appropriate.

[8-5-5. Special symbol variation pattern table]
179 to 181 are examples of a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern of the special symbols of the sixth pachinko game machine. FIG. 179 is an example of a first half variation pattern table of the special symbols in the normal game state of the sixth pachinko game machine, and FIG. 180 is an example of a second half variation pattern table of the special symbols in the normal game state of the sixth pachinko game machine. Also, FIG. 181 is an example of a first half variation pattern table and a second half variation pattern table of the special symbols in the right-hitting game state (any of the game states of "high probability time-shortening game state", "high probability non-time-shortening game state" or "low probability time-shortening game state") of the sixth pachinko game machine. The variation pattern tables of the special symbols shown in FIG. 179 to FIG. 181 are stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the sixth pachinko game machine.

The "special symbol fluctuation pattern" of the sixth pachinko gaming machine is composed of two combinations: a "first half fluctuation pattern" corresponding to the first half of the variable display of the special symbol, and a "second half fluctuation pattern" corresponding to the second half of the variable display of the special symbol. Note that, like the first pachinko gaming machine, the first half fluctuation pattern and the second half fluctuation pattern may be combined into one fluctuation pattern. In the sixth pachinko gaming machine, the first half fluctuation pattern and the second half fluctuation pattern are also referred to as the "fluctuation pattern" as appropriate.

(First half variation pattern table of special symbols in normal game state)
As shown in FIG. 179, the first half variation pattern table of the special symbol in the normal game state is associated with the type of special symbol (type of starting port), the winning or losing result of the special symbol lottery, the random number value for the first performance selection obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 6120A, 6120B or the second starting port 6140, the "first half variation pattern number" indicating the first half variation pattern, and the "first half variable display time" of the special symbol in the first half variation pattern. The random number value for the first performance selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above. Also, the "Notes" column in FIG. 179 is a convenient way to show the performance content for easy understanding.

When in the normal game state, the main CPU 201 refers to the first half variation pattern table of the special symbol in the normal game state shown in FIG. 179, and determines the first half variation pattern of the special symbol and the first half variable display time of the special symbol based on the type of special symbol (type of starting hole), the lottery result of the special symbol, and the random number value for the first performance selection. The main CPU 201 determines the first half variation pattern and the first half variable display time of the first special symbol when based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 6120A, 6120B, and determines the first half variation pattern and the first half variable display time of the second special symbol when based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 6140.

The "pseudo consecutive" shown in the "Notes" column of FIG. 179 refers to a "pseudo consecutive performance" in which the decorative symbols that are displayed while the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner are temporarily temporarily stopped, and then the temporarily stopped decorative symbols are displayed again in a variable manner. The "temporary stop display" refers to a state in which the decorative symbols slightly swing or deform, making it appear to the player as if they are stopped. This pseudo consecutive performance can be performed multiple times, and the number of times the pseudo consecutive performance is performed is indicated as "pseudo consecutive X times." Furthermore, "pseudo consecutive teasing" refers to a performance that teases whether or not a pseudo consecutive performance will be performed. "NR" is an abbreviation for normal reach. Furthermore, "long fluctuation" refers to a fluctuation in which the variable display time of the special symbols is set to be extremely long.

"Road to the Final Battle" and "Road to the Extreme Showdown" are specific effects of the same type, in which the player operates the effect button device 6310 a specified number of times to collect up to a specific number (10) of "character icons." The "First Half Icon Count" indicates the number of "character icons" that can be displayed before the Road to the Final Battle or the Road to the Extreme Showdown is performed. More details about the Road to the Final Battle, the Road to the Extreme Showdown, and character icons will be provided later using Figures 220 to 222.

According to the first half fluctuation pattern table of the special symbol in the normal game state shown in FIG. 179, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 6120A, 6120B (when the first special symbol is displayed), the first half fluctuation pattern and the first half variable display time corresponding to either "normal fluctuation", "X pseudo consecutive times", "Road to the decisive battle" or "Road to the ultimate decisive battle" are determined as the first half fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol.

According to the first half variation pattern table of the special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG. 179, in "pseudo consecutive X times",
The random number value for selecting the first effect is set so that the expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of "one pseudo consecutive hit"<"two pseudo consecutive hits"<"three pseudo consecutive hits".

According to the first half variation pattern table of the special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG. 179, in the "Road to the Final Battle" and "Road to the Ultimate Final Battle",
The random number value for selecting the first performance is set so that the expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of "Road to the Final Battle"<"Road to the Ultimate Final Battle."

In addition, according to the first half fluctuation pattern table of the special symbol in the normal game state shown in FIG. 179, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 6140 (when the symbol is the second special symbol), a first half fluctuation pattern of "long fluctuation" in which the variable display time of the special symbol is set to an extremely long time is determined.

Here, in the sixth pachinko game machine, in the normal game mode, hitting from the left is the regular game mode, and it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 6140 when hitting from the left, but if the game ball is hit from the right as an unintended game mode, it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 6140. However, according to the first half variation pattern table of the special symbol in the normal game mode shown in FIG. 179, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 6140, a first half variation pattern of "long variation" in which the variable display time of the special symbol is set to be extremely long is determined, so that the number of times the second special symbol is drawn per unit time is extremely small, and it is configured so that there is no practical benefit for the player to hit from the right in the normal game mode.

(Late-stage variation pattern table of special symbols in normal game state)
As shown in FIG. 180, the latter half variation pattern table of the special symbol in the normal game state corresponds to the first half variation pattern number, the winning or losing result of the special symbol lottery, the random number value for selecting the second performance obtained based on the ball entering the first starting hole 6120A, 6120B or the second starting hole 6140, the "second half variation pattern number" indicating the latter half variation pattern, and the "second half variable display time" of the special symbol in the latter half variation pattern. The random number value for selecting the second performance is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above. Also, the "Notes" column in FIG. 180 is a convenient way to show the content of the performance for easy understanding.

When in the normal game state, the main CPU 201 refers to the latter half variation pattern table of the special symbol in the normal game state shown in FIG. 180, and determines the latter half variation pattern of the special symbol and the latter half variable display time of the special symbol based on the already determined first half variation pattern number, the lottery result of the special symbol, and the random number value for the second performance selection. The main CPU 201 determines the latter half variation pattern and the latter half variable display time of the first special symbol when it is based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 6120A, 6120B, and determines the latter half variation pattern and the latter half variable display time of the second special symbol when it is based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 6140.

When the main CPU 201 determines the first half variation pattern and the second half variation pattern in the normal game state, it transmits a special pattern variation pattern command combining the first half variation pattern and the second half variation pattern to the sub-CPU 301 so that the type of the special pattern can be identified. Specifically, it transmits a three-byte variation pattern command consisting of "83H", "first half variation pattern number", and "second half variation pattern number" (e.g., 83H00H00H) as the "first special pattern variation pattern command", and transmits a three-byte variation pattern command consisting of "84H", "first half variation pattern number", and "second half variation pattern number" (e.g., 84HF1H00H) as the "second special pattern variation pattern command". Then, when the main CPU 201 is in the normal game state, it calculates the total variable display time by adding up the first half variable display time and the second half variable display time. The sub-CPU 301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effects output from the speaker 32 based on the special symbol variation pattern command sent from the main CPU 201.

Here, "none" shown in the "Notes" column in FIG. 180 means that the latter half variation pattern and the latter half variable display time of the special symbol have not been determined, and if the latter half variation pattern of the special symbol has not been determined, only the first half variation pattern of the special symbol will be executed. Also, "normal reach", "ninja reach", "showdown reach" and "big showdown reach" are reach effects that suggest that the lottery result for the special symbol may be a jackpot in normal game mode. "Number of icons in the latter half" indicates the number of "character icons" that can be displayed after the Road to the Showdown or the Road to the Ultimate Showdown has been performed. The showdown reach and character icons will be described in more detail below.

According to the latter half fluctuation pattern table of the special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG. 180, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 6120A, 6120B, the latter half fluctuation pattern and the latter half variable display time corresponding to either "none (first half fluctuation only)", "normal reach", "ninja reach", "showdown reach" or "great battle reach" are determined as the latter half fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol.

According to the latter half variation pattern table of the special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG. 180, in the "Normal Reach", "Ninja Reach", "Confrontation Reach" and "Great Battle Reach",
The random number value for selecting the second performance is set so that the likelihood of a jackpot increases in the following order: "Normal Reach"<"NinjaReach"<"ConfrontationReach"<"Great Battle Reach".

In addition, according to the latter half variation pattern table of the special symbol in the normal game state shown in FIG. 180, the latter half variation pattern and the latter half variable display time of the special symbol are not determined when the game ball enters the second start hole 6140. Therefore, in the normal game state, when the game ball enters the second start hole 6140, only the first half variation pattern corresponding to the "long variation", which is the first half variation pattern of the special symbol, is executed.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in right-hand play state)
Fig. 181(a) is an example of a first half variation pattern table of a special symbol in a right-hitting game state (any of the game states of "high probability time-saving game state", "high probability non-time-saving game state" or "low probability time-saving game state") in the sixth pachinko game machine. Fig. 181(b) is an example of a second half variation pattern table of a special symbol in a right-hitting game state in the sixth pachinko game machine, but in this embodiment, the second half variation pattern and the second half variable display time of the special symbol are not determined in the right-hitting game state, and it is not necessary to have this table, but it is illustrated for convenience in order to clearly show that the second half variation pattern and the second half variable display time of the special symbol are not determined in the right-hitting game state.

As shown in FIG. 181(a), the first half variation pattern table for the special symbol in the right-hand play state corresponds to the type of special symbol (type of starting port), the winning or losing result of the special symbol lottery, the random number value for selecting the first performance obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 6120A, 6120B or the second starting port 6140, the "first half variation pattern number" indicating the first half variation pattern, and the "first half variable display time" of the special symbol in the first half variation pattern.

When in a right-hand play state, the main CPU 201 refers to the first half variation pattern table of the special symbol in the right-hand play state shown in FIG. 181(a) and determines the first half variation pattern of the special symbol and the first half variable display time of the special symbol based on the type of special symbol (type of starting hole), the lottery result of the special symbol, and the random number value for the first performance selection. The main CPU 201 determines the first half variation pattern and the first half variable display time of the first special symbol when based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 6120A, 6120B, and determines the first half variation pattern and the first half variable display time of the second special symbol when based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 6140.

When the main CPU 201 determines the first half variation pattern of the special symbol during right-hand play, it does not determine the second half variation pattern and second half variable display time, but sends to the sub-CPU 301 a variation pattern command for the special symbol that combines the first half variation pattern with a default second half variation pattern number (00H) indicating that the second half variation pattern will not be executed. Then, when the main CPU 201 is in the right-hand play state, it calculates the first half variable display time as the total variable display time. Based on the variation pattern command for the special symbol sent from the main CPU 201, the sub-CPU 301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effects output from the speaker 32.

The "Battle Challenge", "Battle Reach", "Door Opening Effect" and "Open Eyes Effect" shown in the "Notes" column of Fig. 181(a) are reach effects that suggest that the lottery result for the special symbol may be a jackpot when playing from the right. Also, "Ultra-Shortened Fluctuation" is a fluctuation in which the variable display time of the special symbol is set to be extremely short.

According to the first half fluctuation pattern table of the special symbol in the right-hand play state shown in FIG. 181(a), when the game ball enters the first starting hole 6120A, 6120B (when the first special symbol is displayed), the first half fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is determined to be a first half fluctuation pattern and first half variable display time corresponding to either "super shortened fluctuation", "battle challenge" or "battle reach". Therefore, "battle challenge" and "battle reach" are also reach effects that suggest that the lottery result for the first special symbol in the right-hand play state may be a jackpot.

According to the first half variation pattern table of the special symbols in the right-hand play state shown in FIG. 181(a), in the "Battle Challenge" and "Battle Reach",
The random number value for selecting the first performance is set so that the expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of "Battle Challenge"<"BattleReach."

According to the first half variation pattern table of the special symbol in the right-hand play state shown in FIG. 181(a), when the game ball enters the second starting hole 6140 (when the symbol is the second special symbol), the first half variation pattern and first half variable display time corresponding to either the "ultra-shortened variation", "door opening effect" or "eyes opening effect" are determined as the first half variation pattern of the first special symbol. For this reason, the "door opening effect" and "eyes opening effect" are also reach effects that suggest that the lottery result for the second special symbol in the right-hand play state may be a jackpot.

According to the first half variation pattern table of the special symbol in the right-hitting game state shown in FIG. 181(a), in the "door opening performance" and "eye opening performance",
The random number value for selecting the first effect is set so that the expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of "door opening effect"<"eye opening effect".

In addition, according to the first half variation pattern table of the special symbols in the right-hand play state shown in FIG. 181(a), when no reach effect is performed, a first half variation pattern of "ultra-shortened variation" in which the variable display time of the special symbols is set to be extremely short is determined. Furthermore, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a "small win", a first half variation pattern for a reach effect is not determined, and all first half variation patterns of "ultra-shortened variation" are determined.

For this reason, when in right-hand play mode, unlike in the normal play mode, the number of times the first special symbol is drawn per unit time and the number of times the second special symbol is drawn per unit time are increased, so that it is practically beneficial for the player to hit the right hand in right-hand play mode.

Here, the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 6140, which triggers the drawing of the second special symbol, is mainly triggered by the high probability non-time-saving game state, which is one of the right-hand play states, and the drawing of the second special symbol is likely to be determined as a "small win" (see Figure 175), and if the drawing result of the second special symbol is a "small win", it is possible to immediately transition the second large winning hole 6151 to an open state (see Figure 181). Therefore, in the high probability non-time-saving game state, it is possible to realize a "small win RUSH" that increases the rate at which game balls enter the second large winning hole 6151 per unit time.

[8-5-6. Normal symbol winning judgment table]
182 is an example of a winning judgment table for normal symbols in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. The winning judgment table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 182 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol winning judgment table is a table referenced in the normal symbol winning judgment process, that is, a table referenced when determining by lottery whether a "normal symbol winning" or "normal symbol losing" is made based on the game state and the normal symbol winning judgment random number value extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 6126.

The winning judgment table for normal symbols shown in Figure 182 specifies the game state, the range (width) of the random number value for winning judgment of normal symbols, and the winning/losing judgment value data ("normal symbol winning" or "normal symbol missing") in correspondence with each other.

As described above, the random number value for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol is a random number value used in the winning determination process for the normal symbol. In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 selects the random number value for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the winning/losing determination table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 182, and determines the winning/losing determination value data based on the game state and the range (width) of the random number value for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol.

In this embodiment, in a non-time-saving game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is 0, the main CPU 201 determines that the win/loss determination value data is a "normal symbol win determination value data." Also, in a normal game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 1 and 99, the main CPU 201 determines that the win is a "miss" and determines the determination value data is a "miss determination value data."

In addition, in the time-saving game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 0 and 98, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "normal symbol win" and sets the win/loss determination value data to "normal symbol win determination value data."In addition, in the time-saving game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is 99, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "miss" and sets the determination value data to "miss determination value data."

[8-5-7. Normal symbol determination table]
183 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 183 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol determination table is a table that is referenced when selecting the "normal symbol winning symbol selection command" that determines the normal symbol stopping symbol based on the winning/losing determination value data for the normal symbol described above and the normal symbol random number value extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 6126.

The "regular symbol selection command when a regular symbol wins" is a command for specifying the regular symbol winning symbol that is determined according to the regular symbol winning type when the result of the regular symbol winning determination process is a regular symbol winning symbol.

The normal symbol determination table shown in Figure 183 specifies the match between the normal symbol win/loss determination value data ("normal symbol win" or "miss"), the normal symbol random number value, and the symbol selection command when the normal symbol wins.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 183 and determines the symbol command to be selected when a normal symbol is hit, based on the winning/losing determination value data for the normal symbol and the symbol random number value for the normal symbol.

According to the normal pattern determination table shown in FIG. 183, when normal pattern winning determination value data is obtained as a result of the winning/losing determination value data for the normal pattern, for example, the selection pattern command when the normal pattern is won is selected as follows.

For example, when normal pattern hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal pattern hit determination process, the main CPU 201 selects "fz1" as the pattern command to be selected when a normal pattern hits if the pattern random number value of the normal pattern is any value between 0 and 49, and selects "fz2" as the pattern command to be selected when a normal pattern hits if the pattern random number value of the normal pattern is any value between 50 and 100.

In addition, in this embodiment, unlike the first pachinko gaming machine, the "selection symbol command when a normal symbol hits" is selected based on the normal symbol hit/miss judgment value data (the result of the normal symbol hit judgment process) and the normal symbol random number value, regardless of the game state.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the winning judgment table for the normal pattern (see FIG. 182) and determines the winning/losing judgment value data for the normal pattern based on the extracted random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern, and then refers to the normal pattern judgment table (see FIG. 183) and determines the pattern command selected when the normal pattern wins based on the pattern random number value of the normal pattern, but is not limited to this. For example, the winning/losing of the normal pattern and the pattern command selected when the normal pattern wins may be determined together based on the extracted random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern and the pattern random number value of the normal pattern.

[8-5-8. Normal pattern type determination table]
184 is an example of a normal symbol type determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 184 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol hit type determination table is referenced when determining the opening pattern of the normal electric device 6146 (normal electric shutter 6147) according to the game state and the symbol selection command when a normal symbol hits.

The normal symbol winning type determination table shown in Figure 184 specifies the game state, the symbol selection command when a normal symbol is won, and the opening pattern of the normal electric device 6146 in correspondence with each other.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol winning type determination table shown in FIG. 184 and determines the opening pattern of the normal electric device 6146 based on the game state and the normal symbol winning selection pattern command. After that, the main CPU 201 transmits to the sub-CPU 301 the opening pattern command of the normal electric device corresponding to the opening pattern of the normal electric device 6146 that has been determined.

In this embodiment, when the game is in a non-time-saving play state and the selected symbol command for a normal symbol hit is "fz1" or "fz2", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern of the normal electric device 6146 to be "01H", and determines 210 msec as the opening time of the normal electric device 6146 corresponding to that opening pattern.

For this reason, when the game is not in the time-saving play state, regardless of the normal symbol selection command, an unfavorable opening pattern of the normal electric device 6146 is determined, making it difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter the first starting hole (right) 6120B.

In this embodiment, when the time-saving game mode is active and the selection pattern command for a normal symbol is "fz1" or "fz2", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern "02H" of the normal electric device 6146, and determines 5820 msec as the opening time of the normal electric device 6146 corresponding to that opening pattern.

For this reason, when in the time-saving play state, regardless of the normal symbol selection command, a favorable opening pattern for the normal electric device 6146 is determined, and it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the first starting hole (right) 6120B.

In the sixth pachinko game machine, the opening pattern of the normal electric device 6146 is configured to open only once, but it may be configured to open multiple times by setting a wait time.

[8-5-9. Normal symbol variation pattern table]
185 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 185 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern table shown in Figure 185 corresponds to the game state, the winning/losing judgment value data for the normal symbol, the symbol selection command when the normal symbol is hit, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern, and the variable display time of the normal symbol.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 185, and determines the normal symbol variation pattern and the normal symbol variable display time based on the game state, the normal symbol win/lose judgment value data, and the normal symbol winning symbol selection command.

Then, when the main CPU 201 determines the normal symbol variation pattern, it transmits a normal symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the determined normal symbol variation pattern to the sub-CPU 301. The sub-CPU 301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effects output from the speaker 32 based on the normal symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201.

In this embodiment, a relatively short variable display time for normal symbols is determined so that the number of times normal symbols are drawn per unit time is large. In particular, in the time-saving game state, if the result of the normal symbol drawing is a "win", it is possible to immediately transition the first starting hole (right) 6120B to an open state, thereby increasing the rate at which game balls enter the first starting hole (right) 6120B per unit time.

[8-6. Main control processing]
In the sixth pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 are the same except for the special symbol control process, normal symbol control process, and sub-control circuit process executed in the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23). Therefore, the following will explain the special symbol control process, normal symbol control process, and sub-control circuit process, and will omit explanations of the other processes executed by the main CPU 201.

Note that some of the special symbol control processing, normal symbol control processing, and sub-control circuit processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine are the same as the processing in the first pachinko gaming machine, but below, the same processing as the processing in the first pachinko gaming machine will be explained again with different step numbers.

[8-6-1. Special symbol control process]
Next, the special symbol control process performed in S39 in the main control process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 186. Fig. 186 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol control process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 186, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the second special symbol in S6001. The control state number of the special symbol is a number that indicates the state (status) of the control process related to the variable display of each special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S6001, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6002.

Although not shown, when the main CPU 201 executes the special symbol control process, prior to the process of S6001, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process to set the address of the working area of each special symbol in the main RAM 203 in a predetermined register.

Although not shown, when executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 201 also performs a process to check the reserved number of the first special symbol and the reserved number of the second special symbol. If the reserved number of the first special symbol is "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 201 performs a process to reserve the transmission of a demo display command for the first special symbol, and if the reserved number of the second special symbol is "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 201 performs a process to reserve the transmission of a demo display command for the second special symbol. The demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. If the sub-control circuit 300 receives the demo display command, and the demo display command is a demo display command for the main special symbol, the sub-CPU 301 performs a demo display performance.

In the sixth pachinko game machine, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner in parallel, but the sub-CPU 301 mainly controls the presentation of the main special symbol by selecting one of the first and second special symbols as the main special symbol and the other as the sub-special symbol. In this embodiment, the first special symbol is the main special symbol in the normal game state and the time-saving game state (high-probability time-saving game state and low-probability time-saving game state), and the second special symbol is the main special symbol in the high-probability non-time-saving game state. The sub-CPU 301 then performs the display of the decorative symbols for the main special symbol, the display of characters, etc., and the sound presentation of the main special symbol. For example, if the result of the hit determination process for the sub-special symbol is, for example, a jackpot, the presentation of the main special symbol may be performed while the presentation of the sub-special symbol is performed.

In S6002, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is time for the second special symbol to start being variably displayed based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S6001.

If it is determined in S6002 that it is not the timing to start the variable display of the second special symbol (if S6002 is a NO judgment), that is, if any processing related to the second special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S6003. For example, if a jackpot game control processing based on the result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol is being executed, a NO judgment is made in S6002.

In S6003, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 187. After executing the processing of S6003, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S6004.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6002 that it is time for the second special symbol to start being variable displayed (if S6002 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6004.

In S6004, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S6004, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6005.

In S6005, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is time for the first special symbol to start being variably displayed based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S6004.

If it is determined in S6005 that it is not the timing to start variable display of the first special symbol (if S6005 is a NO judgment), that is, if any processing related to the first special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S6006. For example, if a jackpot game control processing based on the result of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol is being executed, a NO judgment is made in S6005.

In S6006, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, details of the special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 187. After executing the processing of S6006, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S6007.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6005 that it is time for the first special symbol to begin to change display (if S6005 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6007.

In S6007, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the second special symbol. After executing the process of S6007, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6008.

In S6008, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is time for the second special symbol to start being variably displayed based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S6007.

If it is determined in S6008 that it is not time for the second special symbol to start being variable displayed (if S6008 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6010.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6008 that it is time to start the variable display of the second special symbol (if S6008 returns a YES judgment), that is, if no processing related to the second special symbol has been performed and variable display can begin, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S6009.

In S6009, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, details of the special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 187. After executing the processing of S6009, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S6010.

In S6010, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S6010, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6011.

In S6011, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is time for the first special symbol to start being variable displayed based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S6010.

If it is determined in S6011 that it is not time for the first special symbol to start being variable displayed (if S6011 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see Figures 20 to 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6011 that it is time to start the variable display of the first special symbol (if S6011 returns a YES judgment), that is, if no processing related to the first special symbol has been performed and variable display can begin, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S6012.

In S6012, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, details of the special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 187. After executing the processing of S6012, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIG. 20 to FIG. 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited area and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S6001 to S6012) within the interrupt prohibited area.

In this way, in this embodiment, the special pattern management process described below is executed in the following order of priority: when any process related to the second special pattern is being executed, when any process related to the first special pattern is being executed, when no process related to the second special pattern is being executed and variable display can be started, when no process related to the first special pattern is being executed and variable display can be started.

[8-6-2. Special design management process]
Next, a special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 in S6003, S6006, S6009, and S6012 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 186) will be described with reference to FIG. 187. FIG. 187 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

For example, if the special pattern management process is called and executed in S6003 or S6009 during the special pattern control process, the second special pattern is the target of processing, and if the special pattern management process is called and executed in S6006 or S6012 during the special pattern control process, the first special pattern is the target of processing.

The numbers ("0" to "5") in parentheses to the right of each process in FIG. 187 are the control state numbers of the special symbols that are the subject of the process. The main CPU 201 progresses the special symbol game by executing each process that corresponds to the control state number.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the waiting time for the special pattern is 0 (S6021).

If it is determined in S6021 that the waiting time for the special pattern is not 0 (if S6021 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special pattern management process and returns the process to the special pattern control process (see FIG. 186).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6021 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (if S6021 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6022.

In S6022, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S6022, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6023. The main CPU 201 performs the process of S6023 and subsequent steps based on the control state number read in the process of S6022.

In S6023, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This S6023 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 188. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S6024.

In S6024, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. This S6024 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to Figures 189 and 190. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S6025.

In S6025, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game determination process. This S6025 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 191. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6026.

In S6026, the main CPU 201 performs a process for preparing to open the large prize opening. This process of S6026 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this process for preparing to open the large prize opening will be described later with reference to FIG. 193. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6027.

In S6027, the main CPU 201 performs a large prize opening control process. This process of S6027 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this large prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 194. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6028.

In S6028, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot end process. This S6028 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 195.

After completing the processes of S6023 to S6028, the main CPU 201 returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 186). If the special symbol management process is called in S6003 during the special symbol control process, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S6004; if it is called in S6006, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S6007; if it is called in S6009, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S6010; and if it is called in S6012, the special symbol control process also ends.

[8-6-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in S6023 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187) will be described with reference to Fig. 188. Fig. 188 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display start process in the sixth pachinko game machine.

When the special symbol variable display start process is called in S6023 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start process is called in S6023 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

As shown in FIG. 188, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S6031).

If it is determined in S6031 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (if S6031 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6031 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (if S6031 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6032.

In S6032, the main CPU 201 loads the special symbol pause flag value, and determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag is off based on the loaded special symbol pause flag value. The special symbol pause flag is a flag that stops the progress of the game so as not to proceed to the next process. Therefore, in this S6032, even if S6031 is judged as YES (i.e., even if the start condition of the special symbol is met), if the special symbol pause flag is not off, i.e., is on (S6032 is judged as NO), the special symbol variable display start process ends without proceeding.

If it is determined in S6032 that the special symbol pause flag is not OFF, i.e., is ON (if S6032 is a NO determination), as described above, the special symbol variable display start process does not proceed, and the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process. After that, the main CPU 201 returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6032 that the special pattern pause flag is off (if S6032 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S6033.

In S6033, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of the start information of the special pattern. In the shift process of the start information of the first special pattern, which targets the first special pattern, since the reserved number of the first special pattern is four, the start information stored in the first special pattern start memory area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the first special pattern determination area (0), and the start information stored in the first special pattern start memory area (2) to the first special pattern start memory area (4) is shifted to the first special pattern start memory area (1) to the first special pattern start memory area (3). In addition, in the shift process of the start information of the second special symbol, which is the processing target of the second special symbol, since the reserved number of the second special symbol is two, the start information stored in the second special symbol start memory area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the second special symbol determination area (0), and the start information stored in the second special symbol start memory area (2) is shifted to the second special symbol start memory area (1). After executing the process of S6033, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6034.

In S6034, the main CPU 201 performs a hit determination process for the special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the hit determination table for the special symbol (see FIG. 175) and performs the hit determination process for the special symbol based on the game state (presence or absence of the probability change flag) and the random number value for the special symbol hit determination stored in the special symbol determination area (0). In this embodiment, the first special symbol is determined to be a hit or a miss, and the second special symbol is determined to be a hit, a small hit, or a miss. In addition, if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a small hit, the main CPU 201 sets the small hit flag to ON, and if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a hit, the main CPU 201 sets the big hit flag to ON. After executing the process of S6034, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6035.

In S6035, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol determination process. This process is a process for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result (for example, small win, big win, or miss) of the special symbol hit determination process (S6034). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 176) is referenced, and the "selected symbol information" and the "symbol designation command" are determined based on the judgment result (win or lose) of the above-mentioned special symbol hit determination process and the random number value of the special symbol stored in the special symbol determination area (0). In this embodiment, since there is only one type of miss, it is not necessary to determine the stop symbol when the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, but multiple types of misses may be provided and the stop symbol may be determined when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss. After executing the process of S6035, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6036.

In S6036, the main CPU 201 performs a win type determination process. This process is a process for determining the type of win when the result of the special symbol win determination process is, for example, a win (small win or big win). In this process, the win type determination table (see FIG. 177) is referenced and the type of win is determined according to the "selected symbol information" determined in the special symbol determination process (S6035). In this embodiment, there are multiple types of wins, but there may be only one type of big win, or multiple types of small wins. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to multiple types of wins, multiple types of other wins (e.g., time-saving wins) may be provided, or multiple types of losses may be provided. After executing the process of S6036, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6037.

In S6037, the main CPU 201 performs a process to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol. This process is a process to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol, first, a process to determine the first half variation pattern is performed, and then a process to determine the second half variation pattern is performed.

In the first half fluctuation pattern determination process, if the game is in normal play mode, the first half fluctuation pattern table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 179 is determined, and if the game is in right-hand play mode, the first half fluctuation pattern table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 181 (a) is determined. The first half fluctuation pattern of the special symbol determined is then referenced, and the first half fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process described above (win or lose) and the random number value for the first performance selection stored in the special symbol determination area (0).

In the latter half fluctuation pattern determination process, if the game is in a normal game state, the latter half fluctuation pattern table for the special symbol shown in FIG. 180 is referenced, and the latter half fluctuation pattern for the special symbol is determined based on the first half fluctuation pattern determined in the first half fluctuation pattern determination process, the judgment result (win/lose) of the hit judgment process for the special symbol described above, and the random number value for selecting the second performance stored in the special symbol judgment area (0). Also, if the game is in a right-hit game state, a default latter half fluctuation pattern number (00H) is determined, which indicates that the latter half fluctuation pattern is not executed. After executing the process of S6037, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6038.

In S6038, the main CPU 201 performs a variable display time setting process for the special symbol. In this process, when in a normal game state, the special symbol variation pattern table in FIG. 179 and FIG. 180 is referenced, and the total variable display time is calculated by adding up the first half variable display time of the first half variable pattern determined in the first half variable pattern determination process and the second half variable display time of the second half variable pattern determined in the second half variable pattern determination process. Also, when in a right-hand play state, the first half variable pattern table shown in FIG. 181 (a) is referenced, and the first half variable display time of the first half variable pattern determined in the first half variable pattern determination process is calculated as the total variable display time. Then, the calculated total variable display time is set as the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, and the special symbol display unit 163, 164 is caused to start variable display of the special symbol. This waiting time of the special symbol is subtracted as a special symbol timer counter in a system timer interrupt process that is performed, for example, at 2 msec intervals. After executing processing of S6038, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S6039.

In S6039, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting the number of times the time-saving special mode has occurred. In this process, it is determined whether or not the special mode flag is 1 (high probability gameplay state), and if the special mode flag is 1, 1 is subtracted from the number of times the time-saving special mode has occurred. If the special mode flag is 1, the number of times the time-saving special mode has occurred is not subtracted. It is also determined whether or not the time-saving flag is 1 (time-saving gameplay state), and if the time-saving flag is 1, 1 is subtracted from the number of times the time-saving special mode has occurred. If the time-saving flag is 0, the number of times the time-saving special mode has not been subtracted.

In S6040, the main CPU 201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the special symbol variable display start process ends, a special symbol variable display end process (see S6024 in FIG. 187) is performed. After executing the process of S6040, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6041.

In S6041, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, an update process of parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203 is performed. Then, a transmission reservation process of a game state designation command indicating the current game state is performed. Note that the game state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S6041, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6042.

In S6042, the main CPU 201 performs game status management processing. This processing mainly involves updating various flags related to game status management (e.g., special bonus flags, time-saving flags, etc.). After executing S6042, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S6043.

In S6043, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for the special symbol effect start command. In this process, the transmission reservation process for the "symbol designation command" and the "special symbol variation pattern command" is performed as the special symbol effect start command. In the pattern designation command transmission reservation process, the symbol designation command determined in S6035 is transmitted. In addition, in the special symbol variation pattern command transmission reservation process, the special symbol variation pattern command that combines the first half variation pattern and the second half variation pattern determined in S6037 so that the type of special symbol can be identified is transmitted. The special symbol effect start command that is transmitted and reserved in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interruption prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process (particularly the game state management process (S6042) and the special symbol presentation start command transmission reservation process (S6043)) within the interruption prohibited section.

[8-6-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, referring to Fig. 189 and Fig. 190, a special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S6024 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 187) will be described. Fig. 189 and Fig. 190 are a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display end process in the sixth pachinko game machine.

When the special symbol variable display end process is called in S6024 during special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S6024 during special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target. Also, in the special symbol variable display end process described below, the special symbol that is the processing target is simply referred to as the "special symbol," and the special symbol that is not the processing target is referred to as the "other special symbol."

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special pattern is "1" (S6051).

If it is determined in S6051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (if S6051 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (if S6051 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6052.

In S6052, the main CPU 201 loads the special pattern pause flag value and determines whether the special pattern pause flag is off based on the loaded special pattern pause flag value.

If it is determined in S6052 that the special pattern pause flag is not off, i.e., is on (if S6052 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special pattern variable display end process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6052 that the special pattern pause flag is off (if S6052 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6053.

In S6053, the main CPU 201 performs a process for setting the symbol determination time of the special symbol. In this process, a predetermined symbol determination time of the special symbol (e.g., 540 msec) is set as the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, and variable display of the special symbol is stopped on the special symbol display units 163, 164. This waiting time of the special symbol is decremented as a special symbol timer counter in a system timer interrupt process that is performed, for example, at 2 msec intervals. After executing the process of S6053, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6054.

The symbol determination time for the special symbol may differ depending on the type of win, or may differ depending on the game state. For example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big win or a miss, the first symbol determination time (e.g., 540 msec) may be set, and if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small win, the second symbol determination time (e.g., 24 msec) may be set, which is shorter than the first symbol determination time. In particular, when creating a small win rush like the sixth pachinko game machine, it is desirable to make the symbol determination time for a small win extremely short.

In S6054, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by switching the control state number by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", the special symbol game determination process (see S6025 in FIG. 187) is performed after the special symbol variable display ending process is completed. After executing the process of S6054, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6055.

In S6055, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect stop command. This process also includes a process for stopping the variable display of the special symbol. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S6055, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6056.

In S6056, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the determined symbol counter. The determined symbol counter is a counter for counting the number of times a special symbol has been determined (the number of times the special symbol game has been played), and the counted value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203. For example, a counter may be provided for managing the number of games of the special symbol game played under a specific state, such as the number of times of special bonus or time-saving, or the determined symbol counter may be used to manage the number of games of the special symbol game played under a specific state. After executing the process of S6056, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6057.

In S6057, the main CPU 201 determines whether the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 188) is a small hit.

In S6057, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 188) is determined to be not a small hit (if S6057 returns a NO determination), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6059.

On the other hand, in S6057, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 188) is determined to be a small hit (if S6057 returns a YES determination), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6058.

In S6058, the main CPU 201 sets a special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from starting or stopping while the small win game control process is being executed. After executing the process of S6058, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6059.

In S6059, the main CPU 201 determines whether the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 188) is a jackpot.

In S6059, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 188) is determined not to be a big hit (if S6059 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, in S6059, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 188) is determined to be a jackpot (if S6059 returns a YES determination), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6060.

In S6060, the main CPU 201 sets a special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from starting while the jackpot game control process is being executed. After executing the process of S6060, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6061.

In S6061, the main CPU 201 determines whether the other special symbol is being variably displayed.

If it is determined in S6061 that the other special symbol is not being variably displayed (if S6061 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variably display ending process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6061 that the other special symbol is being variably displayed (if S6061 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6062.

In S6062, the main CPU 201 increments the value of the determined symbol number counter by 1. After executing the process of S6062, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6063.

In S6063, the main CPU 201 sets the variable display stop flag. When this process is performed, a test firing signal is output to the outside. This test firing signal is a signal indicating that the other special symbol has been forcibly stopped as a miss. After executing the process of S6063, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6064.

In S6064, the main CPU 201 forcibly changes and sets the hit flag of the other special symbol to a miss. By performing this process, if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol being processed (see S6034 in FIG. 188) is a big hit or a small hit, the other special symbol will be forcibly stopped as a miss even if the other special symbol is being variably displayed and the result of the hit determination process for this other special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. After executing the process of S6064, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6065.

In S6065, the main CPU 201 executes a process to clear the working area related to the variable display of the other special symbol. After executing the process of S6065, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6066.

In S6066, the main CPU 201 executes a pattern determination time setting process for the other special pattern. In this process, a predetermined pattern determination time (e.g., 540 msec) is set as the waiting time for the other special pattern in the main RAM 203, and variable display of the other special pattern is stopped on the special pattern display sections 163 and 164. After executing the process of S6066, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6067.

In S6067, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the other special symbol to "2." After executing the process of S6067, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6068.

In S6068, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. Then, it performs a process of reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. The game state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S6068, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6069.

In S6069, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of the other special symbol effect stop command. The other special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S6069, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

In this way, in the special symbol variable display end processing of this embodiment, if the special symbol pause flag is not set for the special symbol being processed, the result of the hit determination processing for this special symbol (see S6034 in FIG. 188) is a jackpot, and the other special symbol is being variable displayed, processing is performed to forcibly stop the variable display of the other special symbol as a miss.

[8-6-5. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, a special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S6025 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187) will be described with reference to Fig. 191. Fig. 191 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game determination process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

When this special symbol game judgment process is called in S6025 during special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol game judgment process is called in S6025 during special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S6071).

If it is determined in S6071 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (if S6071 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game play determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6071 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (if S6071 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6072.

In S6072, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot.

If it is determined in S6072 that the reel is not a jackpot, i.e. that the stopped special symbols are not in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot (if S6072 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6073. On the other hand, if it is determined in S6072 that the reel is a jackpot, i.e. that the stopped special symbols are in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot (if S6072 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6075.

In S6073, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a small win has occurred, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a small win.

If it is determined in S6073 that the special symbol is not a small win, i.e. that the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a miss (if S6073 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6082.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6073 that a small win has occurred, i.e., that the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a small win (if S6073 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6075.

In S6075, the main CPU 201 performs start setting processing for the big win game control processing or the small win game control processing. In this processing, signals are generated and updated that are output via the external terminal board 184 to, for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 174 for both) or the island computer (not shown). Note that the signals generated and updated in this processing are signals related to the special symbol that is the subject of the special symbol game determination processing. After performing processing in S6075, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S6076.

In S6076, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the upper limit of the number of times the first large prize opening 6131 is opened (S6077), and processing to set a large prize signal to the external terminal board 1184 (S6078).

In S6079, the main CPU 201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3." By performing a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, a process to prepare for opening the large prize opening (see S6026 in FIG. 187) is performed after the special symbol game determination process is completed.

In S6080, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, when a big win occurs, the main CPU 201 also performs a process to clear various flags and counters such as the probability change flag, the number of probability change events, the time-saving flag, and the number of time-saving events. Note that when a small win occurs, the process to clear various flags and counters such as the probability change flag, the number of probability change events, the time-saving flag, and the number of time-saving events is not performed. Then, a process to reserve the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state is performed. Note that the game state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

In S6081, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a big win start display command when a big win has occurred, and a process for reserving the transmission of a small win start display command when a small win has occurred. The big win start display command or small win start display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S522 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S6081, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

In S6082, the main CPU 201 performs a game state transition determination process. In this game state transition determination process, both a "low probability game state transition determination process" that determines whether to transition to a low probability game state and a "non-time-limited game state transition determination process" that determines whether to transition to a non-time-limited game state are performed. After executing the process of S6082, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6083.

In the low probability play state transition judgment process, it is determined whether the probability change flag = 1 (high probability play state), and if the probability change flag = 1, it is next determined whether the number of probability change times = 0, and if the number of probability change times = 0, the probability change flag = 0 (low probability play state) is set and the game transition is made from the high probability play state to the low probability play state. Also, if the probability change flag = 0, the low probability play state transition judgment process is terminated, and if the number of probability change times is not 0, the probability change flag = 1 is retained and the low probability play state transition judgment process is terminated.

In the non-time-saving play state transition judgment process, it is determined whether the time-saving flag = 1 (time-saving play state), and if the time-saving flag = 1, it is next determined whether the number of time-saving times = 0, and if the number of time-saving times = 0, the time-saving flag = 0 (non-time-saving play state) is set, and the time-saving play state is transitioned to the non-time-saving play state. Also, if the time-saving flag = 0, the non-time-saving play state transition judgment process is terminated, and if the number of time-saving times is not 0, the non-time-saving play state transition judgment process is terminated while the time-saving flag = 1 is maintained.

In S6083, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 192. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 187).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited area and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S6071 to S6081) within the interrupt prohibited area.

[8-6-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, a special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 201 in S6083 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 191) will be described with reference to Fig. 192. Fig. 192 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game ending process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In S6092, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". When the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" is thus performed, the next special symbol game can be executed. After executing the process of S6092, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6093.

In S6093, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set game state designation parameters for the special symbol. Then, it performs processing to reserve the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. The game state designation command reserved for transmission in this processing is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission processing during the next system timer interrupt processing (see S322 in FIG. 45). After executing processing of S6093, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S6094.

In S6094, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol game end command. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After processing S6094, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 191).

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 188) is a miss, the main CPU 201 does not set or reset either the sure win flag or the time-saving flag. Therefore, even if a miss display mode is derived, the game state does not change.

[8-6-7. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, referring to Fig. 193, a special prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 in S6026 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 187) will be described. Fig. 193 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening preparation process in the sixth pachinko game machine.

When this large prize opening preparation process is called in S6026 during special pattern management process in which the first special pattern is the processing target, the first special pattern is the processing target. Similarly, when this large prize opening preparation process is called in S6026 during special pattern management process in which the second special pattern is the processing target, the second special pattern is the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S6101).

If it is determined in S6101 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (if S6101 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6101 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (if S6101 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6102.

In S6102, the main CPU 201 loads the large prize opening counter value. When the large prize opening counter value is executing a large prize game control process, it corresponds to a count value that counts the number of rounds in the large prize game state, and when the small prize game control process is executing, it corresponds to a count value that counts the number of openings of the small prize game control process. The large prize opening counter value is stored in the large prize opening counter in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S6102, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6103.

In S6103, the main CPU 201 determines whether the large prize opening count counter value is at the upper limit. In this embodiment, as shown in the win type determination table in FIG. 177, the upper limit for the number of rounds in the large prize game state is 3, 5, or 10 rounds, and the upper limit for the number of times the small prize game state is opened is 6 times.

If it is determined in S6103 that the large prize opening count counter value is at the upper limit (if S6103 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6104.

In S6104, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5." In this way, by switching the control state number by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S6104), the jackpot end process (see S6028 in FIG. 187) is performed after the jackpot opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S6104, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6105.

In S6105, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for the end of the winning display command, which is a transmission reservation process for the end of the winning display command after the end of the big winning game state, and a transmission reservation process for the end of the small winning display command after the end of the small winning game state (S6106). The end of the winning display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After processing S6106, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

Returning to S6103, if it is determined that the value of the large prize opening count counter is not the upper limit (if S6103 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6107.

In S6107, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the large prize opening count counter. After executing the process of S6107, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6108.

In S6108, the main CPU 201 performs a process of selecting the large prize opening to open. In this process, if a large prize game control process is being executed, the first large prize opening 6131 is selected as the large prize opening to open, and if a small prize game control process is being executed, the second large prize opening 6151 is selected. After executing the process of S6108, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6109.

In S6109, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the large prize opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large prize opening is opened, the maximum opening time of the large prize opening, the maximum number of winning balls into the large prize opening, the number of winning balls when a winning ball enters the large prize opening, etc. are set. Note that this is not intended to exclude cases where the large prize opening is opened multiple times in one round or small win game control process. In this case, however, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of times the large prize opening is opened and closed as separate processes. After executing the process of S6109, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6110.

In this embodiment, the maximum opening time of the large prize opening is set to, for example, a maximum of 28,000 msec when the large prize game control process is being executed, and is set to, for example, a maximum of 100 msec when the small prize game control process is being executed. The maximum number of winning balls into the large prize opening is set to, for example, a maximum of 10 balls when the large prize game control process is being executed, and is set to, for example, a maximum of 4 balls when the small prize game control process is being executed. The number of winning balls when a winning ball enters the large prize opening is set to 15 balls for the first large prize opening 6131, and 14 balls for the second large prize opening 6151. However, the values set in the various setting processes related to the large prize opening are not limited to the above.

In S6110, the main CPU 201 performs a large prize opening setting process to open the large prize openings (first large prize opening 6131, second large prize opening 6151). After executing the process of S6110, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6111.

In S6111, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4." In this way, by switching the control state number by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S6111), the large prize opening opening control process (see S6027 in FIG. 187) is performed after the large prize opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S6111, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6112.

In S6112, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of the large prize opening display command. The large prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S6112, the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

[8-6-8. Large prize opening control process]
Next, referring to Fig. 194, a special prize opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S6027 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 187) will be described. Fig. 194 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening control process in the sixth pachinko game machine.

When this large prize opening control process is called in S6027 during special pattern management process in which the first special pattern is the processing target, the first special pattern is the processing target. Similarly, when this large prize opening control process is called in S6027 during special pattern management process in which the second special pattern is the processing target, the second special pattern is the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S6121).

If it is determined in S6121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (if S6121 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6121 that the control state number of the special pattern is "4" (if S6121 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6122.

In S6122, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the large prize openings (first large prize opening 6131, second large prize opening 6151) is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the large prize opening winning counter, which counts the number of game balls that have entered the large prize openings, is the maximum number of winning balls. The large prize opening winning counter value counted by the large prize opening winning counter is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203.

In S6122, if the main CPU 201 determines that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize openings (first large prize opening 6131, second large prize opening 6151) is not the maximum number of winning balls, it transfers processing to S6123, and if it determines that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize openings (first large prize opening 6131, second large prize opening 6151) is the maximum number of winning balls, it transfers processing to S6128-1.

In S6128-1, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is in a jackpot game state (the jackpot flag is on). If the main CPU 201 determines that the game is in a jackpot game state, it transfers processing to S6124, and if it determines that the game is not in a jackpot game state (i.e., the game is in a small jackpot game state), it transfers processing to S6128-2.

In S6123, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the large prize openings (first large prize opening 6131, second large prize opening 6151) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the various settings process related to the large prize openings (see S6109 in FIG. 193) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S6123 that the maximum opening time of the large prize openings (first large prize opening 6131, second large prize opening 6151) has not elapsed (if S6123 is determined to be NO), the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening opening control process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6123 that the maximum opening time of the large prize openings (first large prize opening 6131, second large prize opening 6151) has elapsed (if S6123 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6124.

In S6124, the main CPU 201 performs a closure setting process to close the large prize openings (first large prize opening 6131, second large prize opening 6151). After executing the process of S6124, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6125.

In S6125, the main CPU 201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S6125) and switching the control state number, the large prize opening preparation process (see S6026 in FIG. 187) will be performed again after this large prize opening control process is completed. After executing the process of S6125, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6126.

In S6126, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S6126, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6127.

In S6127, if the game is in a big win game state, the main CPU 201 performs a process of reserving the transmission of an inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Note that in a small win game state, the process of reserving the transmission of an inter-round display command is not performed. Then, after processing S6127, the main CPU 201 ends the big win opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

In S6128-2, the main CPU 201 performs a closure setting process to close the large prize openings (first large prize opening 6131, second large prize opening 6151). After executing the process of S6128-2, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6128-3.

In S6128-3, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5." In this way, by performing processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5" and switching the control state number, the jackpot end processing (see S6028 in FIG. 187) is performed after the jackpot opening control processing is completed. After executing the processing of S6128-3, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S6128-4.

In S6128-4, the main CPU 201 performs game state designation parameter setting processing. After executing S6128-4, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S6128-5.

In S6128-5, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a small win end display command. The small win end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S6128-5, the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

[8-6-9. Big win end processing]
Next, the big win end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S6028 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187) will be described with reference to Fig. 195. Fig. 195 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win end process in the sixth pachinko game machine.

When this jackpot end process is called in S6028 during special pattern management process in which the first special pattern is the processing target, the first special pattern is the processing target. Similarly, when this jackpot end process is called in S6028 during special pattern management process in which the second special pattern is the processing target, the second special pattern is the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special pattern is "5" (S6131).

If it is determined in S6131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (if S6131 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 186). In this case, it returns to the process from which the special symbol management process was called.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (if S6131 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6132.

In S6132, the main CPU 201 executes a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, various counter values related to the big win game state and small win game state (large prize opening count counter value, large prize opening winning counter value, etc.), small win flag, big win flag, symbol confirmation count counter value, special symbol pause flag, etc. are cleared. After executing S6132, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6133.

In S6133, the main CPU 201 performs a game state setting process. In this game state setting process, the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 177 is referenced, and the probability variable flag, the number of probability variable times, the time-saving flag, and the number of time-saving times are set based on the selected symbol information. Specifically, as shown in the winning type determination table in FIG. 177, after the end of the jackpot game state of the first special symbol, the probability variable flag is set to 1 (high probability game state), the number of probability variable times is set to 120, the time-saving flag is set to 1 (time-saving game state), and the number of time-saving times is set to 100. In addition, after the end of the jackpot game state of the second special symbol, the probability variable flag is set to 1 (high probability game state), the probability variable count is set to 120, and the time-saving flag is set to 1 (time-saving game state). If the game state at the time of winning when it is determined that a jackpot has been won is the normal game state, the time-saving count is set to 100. If the game state at the time of winning when it is determined that a jackpot has been won is not the normal game state, the time-saving count is set to 10,000. Note that after the end of the small jackpot game state, none of the data for the probability variable flag, probability variable count, time-saving flag, or time-saving count is set. In other words, the game state does not transition (change) in response to the small jackpot game state. After executing the process of S5133, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6034.

In S6134, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this processing, the special symbol game end processing described with reference to FIG. 192 is performed. After executing the processing of S6134, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 187).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 set an interrupt prohibited area and perform the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interrupt prohibited area.

[8-6-10. Normal symbol control process]
Next, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 in the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 196. It goes without saying that, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in Fig. 196, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start condition for the normal symbol is satisfied, as in the special symbol control process.

Figure 196 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the numbers ("0" to "4") written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in Figure 196 are control state numbers for the normal symbols. The main CPU 201 progresses the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the waiting time for normal symbols is 0 (S6300).

If it is determined in S6300 that the waiting time for the normal symbol is not 0, the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process and transfers the process to S41 (see FIG. 21) of the main control main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6301.

In S6301, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing the process of S6301, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6310. The main CPU 201 performs the process of S6310 and subsequent processes based on the control state number read in the process of S6301.

In S6310, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display start processing. This S6310 processing is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". Details of this normal symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 197. Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S6320.

In S6320, the main CPU 201 performs processing to end the variable display of normal symbols. This processing of S6320 is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S6330.

In this normal symbol variable display end process, the main CPU 201 judges whether the normal symbol variable display time has ended, and when it judges that the normal symbol variable display time has ended, it sets the normal symbol wait time in the main RAM 203 to a predetermined normal symbol determination time (e.g., 540 msec), and sets the normal symbol control state number to "2". This normal symbol wait time is subtracted as a normal symbol timer counter in a system timer interrupt process that is performed, for example, at 2 msec intervals. If the normal symbol variable display time has not ended, the normal symbol control state number is held at "1", and the process waits for the normal symbol variable display time to end.

The pattern determination time for normal patterns may differ depending on the type of win, or may differ depending on the game state. For example, in the normal game state, the pattern determination time may be a first pattern determination time (e.g., 540 msec), and in the time-saving game state, the pattern determination time may be a second pattern determination time (e.g., 132 msec) that is shorter than the first pattern determination time. In particular, when creating a small win rush, as in the sixth pachinko game machine, it is desirable to make the pattern determination time in the time-saving game state extremely short.

In S6330, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol gameplay determination processing. This S6330 processing is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S6340.

In this normal symbol game judgment process, the main CPU 201 performs a judgment process of the derived result of the normal symbol (for example, normal symbol hit or normal symbol miss). Then, if the result of the normal symbol hit judgment process is a normal symbol hit, the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric device 6146 is performed, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "3". On the other hand, if the result of the normal symbol hit judgment process is a miss, the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric device 6146 is not performed, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "0".

In the process of setting the opening pattern of the normal electric device 6146, the opening pattern (number of times to open, opening time, wait time, etc.) of the normal electric device 6146 is determined based on the game state and the pattern command selected when a normal pattern is hit, by referring to the normal symbol winning type determination table shown in FIG. 184, and the determined opening pattern is set. After that, the main CPU 201 transmits to the sub-CPU 301 the opening pattern command of the normal electric device corresponding to the determined opening pattern of the normal electric device 6146.

In S6340, the main CPU 201 performs the normal electric device release process. This S6340 process is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6350.

In this normal electric role release process, the main CPU 201 performs the normal electric role release process according to the release pattern of the normal electric role 6146 determined in the normal symbol game determination process of S6330. Then, when the normal electric role 6146 release process ends, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "4".

In S6350, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol win end processing. This S6350 processing is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 ends this normal symbol win end processing, it ends the normal symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see Figures 20 to 23).

In this normal symbol winning end process, the main CPU 201 performs a process to reset (clear) various parameters related to the normal symbol determined in steps S6310 to S6340 above, and various random number values stored in the normal symbol determination area.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the normal symbol control process (S6300 to S6350) described above within the interrupt prohibited section.

[8-6-11. Normal symbol variable display start process]
Next, details of the normal symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in S6310 during the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 196) will be described with reference to FIG. 197. FIG. 197 is a flow chart showing an example of the normal symbol variable display start process in the sixth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 197, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the normal pattern is "0" (S6311).

If it is determined in S6311 that the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 196). On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the normal symbol is "0", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6312.

In S6312, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of the start information of the normal pattern. In this process, the start information stored in the normal pattern start memory area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the normal pattern determination area (0), and the start information stored in the normal pattern start memory area (2) to the normal pattern start memory area (4) is shifted to the normal pattern start memory area (1) to the normal pattern start memory area (3). After executing the process of S6312, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6313.

In S6313, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol winning judgment process. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol winning judgment table shown in FIG. 182, and determines winning/losing judgment value data ("normal symbol winning" or "normal symbol losing") based on the game state and the normal symbol winning judgment random number value stored in the normal symbol judgment area (0). After executing S6313, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6314.

In S6314, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol determination process. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 183, and determines a "normal symbol winning symbol selection command" based on the above-mentioned winning/losing determination value data (the result of the normal symbol winning determination process) and the normal symbol random number value stored in the normal symbol determination area (0). After executing S6314, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6315.

In S6315, the main CPU 201 performs processing to determine the normal symbol variation pattern. In this processing, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 185, and determines the normal symbol variation pattern and the normal symbol variable display time based on the game state, the normal symbol win/lose judgment value data, and the normal symbol winning symbol selection command. After executing the processing of S6315, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S6316.

In S6316, the main CPU 201 performs variable display time setting processing for the normal pattern. In this processing, the variable display time for the normal pattern determined in the normal pattern variation pattern determination processing (S6315) is set to the normal pattern waiting time in the main RAM 203, and the normal pattern display unit 161 is caused to start variable display of the normal pattern. This normal pattern waiting time is decremented as a normal pattern timer counter in a system timer interrupt processing that is performed, for example, at 2 msec intervals. After executing the processing of S6316, the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S6317.

In S6317, the main CPU 201 performs a process to set the control state number of the normal symbol to "1". In this way, by performing a process to set the control state number of the normal symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after this normal symbol variable display start process is completed, a normal symbol variable display end process (see S6320 in FIG. 196) is performed. After executing the process of S6317, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6318.

In S6318, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a normal symbol variation pattern command. The normal symbol variation pattern command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

[8-7. Small Hit RUSH]
In the sixth pachinko gaming machine described above, a "small win rush" can be realized. The mechanism of the small win rush will be described below.

In the sixth pachinko game machine, in the high probability non-time-saving game state, the frequency with which game balls enter the second large winning port 6151 is increased compared to other game states (e.g., normal game state, high probability time-saving game state, low probability time-saving game state), resulting in a small win rush in which the expected value of the game value (e.g., number of winning balls, etc.) paid out per number of balls fired per unit time can exceed 1.

As shown in FIG. 173, the game ball hit to the right passes through the passing gate 6126 and the normal electric role unit 6145. In the high probability non-time-saving game state, since the non-time-saving game state is controlled, it is difficult for the normal power shutter 6147 to be in the open state (see FIG. 182 to FIG. 184), and the normal power shutter 6147 is in the closed state protruding from the game panel 6100, and the game ball rolling on the normal power shutter 6147 is guided to the second large winning opening 6151 and the second starting opening 6140.

Therefore, if the second large prize opening 6151 is open, a game ball hit to the right is guided to the normal power shutter 6147 and can enter the second large prize opening 6151. Each time a game ball enters this second large prize opening 6151, for example, 14 game balls will be paid out.

When a game ball enters the second starting hole 6140, not only is a stop display mode that indicates a small win with an extremely high probability of 1/1.07 (estimated) as shown in the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 175), but also an ultra-shortened variation with an extremely short variable display time is executed as shown in the special symbol variation pattern table for the right-hand play state (see FIG. 181(a)), so the frequency of game balls entering the second large winning hole 6151 is increased compared to other play states (for example, the normal play state, the high-probability time-shortened play state, and the low-probability time-shortened play state).

In this way, in the high probability non-time shortened game state, it is possible to realize a small win rush in which the expected value of the game value (e.g. number of winning balls) paid out per number of balls fired per unit time can exceed 1.

On the other hand, in a game state where the time-saving game state is controlled (high-probability time-saving game state, low-probability time-saving game state), the normal power shutter 6147 is likely to be in an open state buried in the game panel 6100 (see Figures 182 to 184), and most of the game balls hit to the right will enter the first large winning hole (right) 6120B. Therefore, even if the second large winning hole 6151 is open, the expected value of the game ball entering the second large winning hole 6151 is low. Moreover, as mentioned above, even if a game ball enters the first starting hole (right) 6120B, for example, only one prize ball will be paid out.

In this way, in game states where the time-saving game state is controlled (high-probability time-saving game state, low-probability time-saving game state), the expected value of the game value (e.g. number of winning balls, etc.) paid out per number of balls fired per unit time is set to not exceed 1.

In addition, in the normal game state, a left hit is considered the normal game mode, but if a right hit is performed, since the non-time-saving game state is controlled, it becomes possible for the game ball hit to the right to enter the second starting hole 6140. However, as described above, as shown in the first half fluctuation pattern table of the special symbol in the normal game state (see FIG. 179), when the game ball enters the second starting hole 6140, a "long fluctuation" first half fluctuation pattern in which the variable display time of the special symbol is set to be extremely long is determined, so that the number of times the second special symbol is drawn per unit time is extremely small, and it is configured so that there is no practical benefit for the player to hit to the right in the normal game state.

In this embodiment, the small win RUSH occurs in a high probability non-time-saving game state, but this is not limited to this. For example, the small win RUSH may occur in a high probability time-saving game state in which special symbol shortening control is executed to shorten the variable display time of the special symbol, without executing electric support control to increase the frequency of opening the first starting hole (right) 6120B by activating the normal electric role 6146.

[8-8. Production flow]
Next, the outline of the presentation performed in the sixth pachinko game machine will be explained using the overall presentation flow. Fig. 198 is an example of the presentation flow in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. Fig. 199 is an example of the presentation flow in the right-hand play state in the sixth pachinko game machine.

(Flow of presentation in normal game mode)
In a normal game state where the ball is hit from the left, a game ball can enter the first starting hole (middle) 6120A, and the display of the decorative pattern of the first special pattern, the display of characters, etc., the sound display, the change in the operation mode of the display button device 6310, etc. are performed. In this embodiment, the decorative patterns are composed of three main patterns, the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right pattern, and a sub-pattern that is much smaller than the main patterns. The number and types of the decorative patterns are not limited to these.

In the normal game mode of the sixth pachinko game machine, the main gameplay is to collect "character icons" and aim for a jackpot.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole (middle) 6120A, all decorative patterns in the display area of the display device 7 start to change rapidly and independently ("All patterns start changing").

When all decorative patterns are changing, it is possible to have one of the following preview effects: "Dialogue Preview", "Button Challenge Preview", or "Cherry Blossom Accumulation Preview". Other previews may also be possible.

The "dialogue preview" is a preview effect in which, for example, one of multiple characters is displayed, and the dialogue of the displayed character suggests that the result of the lottery for the first special symbol may be a jackpot.

The "Button Challenge Notice" is a notice that displays whether or not a player can obtain a predetermined number of "character icons" or "letter icons" indicating the expected probability of a jackpot (e.g., Super Hot) or the contents of the developing reach (e.g., SP) by operating (hitting) the effect button device 6310 multiple times. Note that there are cases in which the "Button Challenge Notice" does not allow the player to obtain any icons.

The "Cherry Blossom Accumulation Notice" is a notice performance in which, for example, cherry blossoms dance across the entire display area of the display device 7, and are absorbed into the upper display area 7a (see FIG. 173) of the display device 7, accumulating cherry blossoms in stages. When the accumulated cherry blossoms are released, a "Yakuza icon" is displayed, indicating that the game will develop into either a specified number of "character icons" or the "Road to the Ultimate Showdown", and when the "Yakuza icon" is displayed, the game will develop into the "Road to the Ultimate Showdown". These cherry blossoms can be accumulated up to three levels over the current change or multiple changes due to foresight, and the more cherry blossoms are accumulated, the higher the expectation that the "Yakuza icon" will be displayed and the higher the number of "character icons" that will be displayed. The details of the "Cherry Blossom Accumulation Notice" performance will be described later using FIG. 215 and FIG. 216.

And when the number of "character icons" displayed so far is five ("5 character icons acquired"), the stage progresses to "The Road to the Final Battle."

After all the symbols start to change, and the left and right symbols are displayed as temporarily stopped ("temporary stop for left and right symbols"), it is possible for all symbols to stop, resulting in a "miss," or for a "pseudo consecutive stimulation effect" or "normal reach" to occur.

The "pseudo consecutive teasing effect" is an effect in which the right pattern, which is temporarily stopped, changes again (right pattern slip), and teases whether or not a "character icon" will stop at the position of the middle pattern. When a "character icon" stops at the position of the middle pattern, the above-mentioned "pseudo consecutive effect" occurs, and if the "character icon" does not stop at the position of the middle pattern, it is a "miss." Note that multiple "character icons" can also stop at the position of the middle pattern.

A "normal reach" is a reach effect that occurs when the left and right symbols are the same type; for example, it is a reach effect in which the middle symbol changes and is displayed at a slow speed. In a "normal reach", if the middle symbol stops and displays a different type of symbol than the left and right symbols, it is a "miss", and if the middle symbol stops and displays the same type of symbol as the left and right symbols, it is a "jackpot". In a "normal reach", if the middle symbol is not displayed and a "character icon" stops in the position of the middle symbol, it develops into a "pseudo consecutive performance", and if the middle symbol changes at high speed, it develops into a "ninja reach".

"Ninja reach" is a reach effect with a higher expectation of a jackpot than normal reach, for example, a reach effect in which a ninja character tries to stop a middle symbol of the same type as the left and right symbols. In a "ninja reach", if the middle symbol stops and displays a different type of symbol than the left and right symbols, it is a "miss", and if the middle symbol stops and displays the same type of symbol as the left and right symbols, it is a "jackpot". In a "ninja reach", if the middle symbol is not stopped and the "decisive battle icon" stops at the position of the middle symbol, it progresses to a "decisive battle reach".

Also, when the "character icons" stop and a "pseudo consecutive performance" occurs, if the number of "character icons" displayed so far is five (five character icons obtained), the "pseudo consecutive performance" will not occur and the game will progress to "Road to the Final Battle."

"Road to the Final Battle" and "Road to the Ultimate Battle" are similar specific effects in which the player operates the effect button device 6310 a specified number of times to collect a specific number (10) of "character icons." More details on "Road to the Final Battle" and "Road to the Ultimate Battle" will be provided later using Figures 220 to 222.

In "Road to the Final Battle," since the player has already acquired five character icons, the player must operate the effect button device 6310 five times to collect the remaining five "character icons."

In "The Road to the Ultimate Showdown," since the player has not yet acquired a character icon, the player operates the effect button device 6310 ten times to collect ten "character icons."

Then, on the "Road to the Final Battle" or "Road to the Ultimate Battle", if you collect less than 10 "character icons" ("Less than 10 character icons obtained"), it will progress to the "Confrontation Reach", and if you collect 10 "character icons" ("10 character icons obtained"), it will progress to the "Great Battle Reach".

The "Confrontation Reach" is a reach effect that has a higher chance of winning than the Ninja Reach, for example, an ally character faces off against an enemy character, and if they win it is a "jackpot", and if they lose it is a "miss". Furthermore, in the "Confrontation Reach", a reach effect is performed using the "character icons" collected on the "Road to the Showdown". Also, in the "Confrontation Reach", when the "Great Battle Icon" stops at the position of the middle symbol, it progresses from the "Confrontation Reach" to the "Great Battle Reach". More details about this "Confrontation Reach" will be given later using Figures 223 and 224.

The "Great Battle Reach" is the reach effect that has the highest expectation of a jackpot among all reach effects in normal gameplay. For example, if your team faces off against the enemy team, it is a "jackpot" if your team wins, and a "miss" if your team loses.

(Presentation flow in right-hand play state)
In the right-hand play state, in the "high probability time-saving play state" and the "low probability time-saving play state", a game ball can enter the first start hole (right) 6120B, and the first special symbol is given priority as a special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol, and the first special symbol is displayed as a variable decorative symbol, and a character display effect, a sound effect, and a change in the operation mode of the effect button device 6310 are performed. In the "high probability non-time-saving play state", a game ball can enter the second start hole 6140, and the second special symbol is given priority as a special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol, and the second special symbol is displayed as a variable decorative symbol, and a character display effect, a sound effect, and a change in the operation mode of the effect button device 6310 are performed. In addition, in the right-hand play state, when only the first special symbol or only the second special symbol is displayed as a variable special symbol, the special symbol being displayed as a variable special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol may be displayed as a variable special symbol.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole (right) 6120B in the "high probability time-saving game state" or "low probability time-saving game state", all decorative patterns start to change rapidly and separately in the display area of the display device 7 ("all patterns start to change"). Also, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 6140 in the "high probability non-time-saving game state", all decorative patterns start to change rapidly and separately in the display area of the display device 7 ("all patterns start to change").

When all decorative patterns are changing, it is possible to have either a "Jewel Inside Notice" or a "Lotus Flower Notice" preview.

The "treasure ball preview" is a preview effect that displays the expected probability of a jackpot (e.g., "super hot") in the upper display area 7a (see FIG. 173) of the display device 7.

The "Lotus Flower Notice" is, for example, a notice that a bud is displayed, and as the bud opens, it suggests that the event will develop into a "Door Opening Event." The bud display can vary multiple times based on pre-reading, and the bud display continues even when a small win game state is occurring. The details of this "Lotus Flower Notice" will be described later using Figure 225.

In addition, in the "high probability time-saving play state" or "low probability time-saving play state," it is possible to perform the reach effects of "Battle Challenge" or "Battle Reach."

"Battle Challenge" is a reach effect in which the effect button device 6310 changes to the fourth operation mode (see FIG. 172(d)), and the second effect operation section 6312 protruding upward is operated once (one hit), causing the group of effect props 58 (see FIG. 173) to fall, resulting in a jackpot of the first special symbol.

In the "Battle Reach", an ally character faces off against an enemy boss. Each time the ally character attacks, the operation mode of the effect button device 6310 changes (grows). When the final operation mode of the effect button device 6310 is reached and the group of effect paraphernalia 58 (see FIG. 173) falls, a jackpot of the first special symbol is reached. The details of the effect of this "Battle Reach" will be described later using FIG. 226 and FIG. 227.

In addition, in the "high probability non-time-saving play state," it is possible to perform the reach effects of "door opening effect" or "eye opening effect."

The "door opening effect" is a reach effect in which the effect button device 6310 is operated (hit repeatedly) multiple times, causing the door to gradually open, and when the door is completely open, a jackpot of the second special pattern is awarded.

The "awakening effect" is a reach effect in which an ally character gradually awakens, and if the awakening is successful, a jackpot with the second special symbol will be awarded.

The above-mentioned "development" includes the display of information necessary for the game or performance to progress, as well as the progress of the game or performance itself, and is a concept that includes the direct or indirect progress of the game or performance. Furthermore, "development" that displays information necessary for the game or performance to progress is a concept that also includes the display of specific development information (for example, icons, etc.) and the display of the displayed development information by adding or subtracting.

[8-9. Sub-control circuit]
In order to execute the above-mentioned effects, the control contents of the sub-control circuit 300 based on various commands etc. transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub-control circuit 300 will be described.

First, the details of the various tables stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 will be explained using Figures 200 to 209.

[8-9-1. Symbol presentation pattern determination table for normal game state]
A symbol presentation pattern determination table for determining a symbol presentation pattern in a normal gaming state will be described below. FIG. 200 shows an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table in a normal gaming state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

"Pattern presentation pattern" refers to information that defines the manner in which decorative patterns for special patterns change, as well as related display presentations of characters and the like, audio presentations, and presentations of changes in the operation mode of the presentation button device 6310. In addition to the pattern presentation pattern, various display presentations such as preview presentation patterns can be superimposed and executed.

The symbol presentation pattern in the normal game mode of the sixth pachinko gaming machine is composed of a combination of a "pre-reach presentation pattern" that corresponds to the first half of the special symbol variation pattern, and a "reach presentation pattern" that corresponds to the second half of the special symbol variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 200, the symbol presentation pattern determination table in the normal game state, for the first special symbol, corresponds the "first half variation pattern number" of the variation pattern command for the first special symbol with the "second half icon number" and "pre-reach presentation pattern" in which character icons described below are displayed in the second half, and corresponds the "second half variation pattern number", "second half icon number" and "reach presentation pattern" of the variation pattern command for the first special symbol. Note that when the second half variation pattern number is "00H", the "presentation end information" is determined so that only the pre-reach presentation pattern is executed as the reach presentation pattern.

In this embodiment, by combining the first half variation pattern number (09H-10H) with the second half variation pattern number (14H-16H, 24H-26H), after executing any of the pre-reach performance patterns 9-32 of "Road to the Final Battle" or "Road to the Extreme Battle", any of the reach performance patterns 4-8, 12-16 of "Confrontation Reach" or "Great Battle Reach" can be executed. And since both the pre-reach performance patterns 9-32 of "Road to the Final Battle" or "Road to the Extreme Battle" and the reach performance patterns 4-8, 12-16 of "Confrontation Reach" or "Great Battle Reach" are determined based on the "number of icons in the second half", the performances of both are related by the "number of icons in the second half", and if the number of icons in the second half is 10, the reach performance patterns 8 and 16 of "Great Battle Reach" can be executed, and if the number of icons in the second half is 8 or 9, the reach performance patterns 4-7 and 12-15 of "Confrontation Reach" can be executed.

In the symbol presentation pattern determination table for the normal game state, all second special symbol variation pattern commands are associated with "standby presentation patterns" for the second special symbols.

This "standby effect pattern" is a pattern in which the three main decorative symbols, the left symbol, the center symbol, and the right symbol, are left on standby (still displayed) without being displayed in a variable manner, and only the sub-symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in a flashing manner. Even when this standby effect pattern is executed, the player does not notice that the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and the so-called irregular fluctuation can be quietly ended.

[8-9-2. Right-Hit Game State Symbol Presentation Pattern Determination Table]
A symbol presentation pattern determination table for determining a symbol presentation pattern in a right-hand play state will be described below. Fig. 201 shows an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table in a right-hand play state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 201, the symbol presentation pattern determination table for the right-hand play state associates the special symbol variation pattern command (first half variation pattern number, second half variation pattern number), the selection rate (first random number value), and the "symbol presentation pattern."

Here, "selection rate" corresponds to the first random number being within a predetermined range for a first random number value consisting of a first random number range, but for ease of explanation, it is described as selection rate. Note that the selection rate may include 0% in addition to 1-100%, and the term "selection rate of 0%" is not excluded. The above also applies to the "selection rate" in the tables shown in Figures 202 to 209, etc. In this embodiment, multiple types of random number values with different random number ranges are provided, and explanations of the types of random number values will be omitted as appropriate.

The first symbol presentation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern command of the first special symbol, and the second symbol presentation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern command of the second special symbol. However, when both the first and second symbol presentation patterns are executed simultaneously (such as when the first and second special symbols are simultaneously varying), the execution of the first symbol presentation pattern is prioritized in the "high probability time-saving game state" or "low probability time-saving game state," and the execution of the second symbol presentation pattern is prioritized in the "high probability non-time-saving game state."

[8-9-3. Second half icon number determination table in normal game state]
In the normal game state, a second half icon number determination table for determining the number of second half icons will be described. Fig. 202 is an example of a second half icon number determination table in the normal game state of the sixth pachinko game machine. Note that the determination of the second half icon number is performed before the determination of the symbol presentation pattern (see Fig. 200) in the normal game state.

The "number of icons in the second half" refers to the total number of character icons that are ultimately displayed in "Road to the Final Battle" and "Road to the Ultimate Battle." In this embodiment, the maximum number is 10, but the number is not limited. The "number of icons in the second half" includes the "number of icons in the first half," which will be described later, and the following relationship holds: "number of icons in the second half" = "number of icons in the first half" + α.

As shown in FIG. 202, the second half icon number determination table associates the first special symbol variation pattern command (second half variation pattern number), the selection rate (second random number value), and the "second half icon number."

In this embodiment, the second half icon number determination table is configured so that when a "Great Battle Reach (reach performance patterns 8, 16: see FIG. 200)" occurs in response to the second half variation pattern number (16H, 26H), the maximum number of second half icons, 10, is determined. As a result, when 10 character icons are finally displayed in "Road to the Final Battle" or "Road to the Ultimate Battle", a "Great Battle Reach" will occur.

[8-9-4. First Half Icon Number Determination Table in Normal Game State]
A first half icon number determination table for determining the number of first half icons in the normal gaming state will be described below. Fig. 203 shows an example of a first half icon number determination table in the normal gaming state of the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The "number of icons in the first half" refers to the total number of character icons that are ultimately displayed during "normal fluctuation" and "pseudo consecutive performances." In this embodiment, the maximum number is five, but the number is not limited.

As shown in FIG. 203, the first half icon number determination table associates the winning command (first half variable pattern number) of the first special pattern, the selection rate (third random number value), and the "first half icon number."

Here, the "winning command for the first special symbol" is a command that includes information to increase the reserved number of the first special symbol by 1, information on the variation pattern of the first special symbol (i.e., the variation pattern command for the first special symbol), etc., as explained in the first pachinko gaming machine. This winning command for the first special symbol is scheduled for transmission when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 6120A, 6120B (see S397 in FIG. 52), and is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45). The same applies to the "winning command for the second special symbol" described later (see S403 in FIG. 52).

In this embodiment, the first half icon number determination table is configured so that when "The Road to the Final Battle" is performed in accordance with the first half variation pattern number (09H to 0FH), the maximum number of first half icons, 5, is determined. As a result, when five character icons are finally displayed in "Normal Variation" or "Pseudo Consecutive Performance", "The Road to the Final Battle" will be performed.

[8-9-5. First Half Icon Number Determination Table in Normal Game State]
A first half icon display scenario determination table for determining a first half icon display scenario in a normal gaming state will be described below. Fig. 204 shows an example of a first half icon display scenario determination table in a normal gaming state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

"First half icon display scenario" refers to information that defines the display trigger, display time, and number of character icons to be displayed, such as where, when, and how many of the first half icon count will be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 204, the first half icon display scenario determination table associates the winning command (first half variation pattern number) of the first special pattern, the determined number of first half icons, the selection rate (fourth random number value), and the "first half icon display scenario."

In addition, the right-most column of the first-half icon display scenario determination table shows the "contents of the first-half icon display scenario" for reference. Also, "the change" refers to the display change of the decorative pattern that is based on a lottery drawn for a special pattern for the starting information that was the subject of the first-half icon display scenario determination.

In this embodiment, the first half icon display scenario is configured to display one or more character icons each time a pseudo consecutive performance is performed when 1 to 3 pseudo consecutive performances are performed. This creates anticipation for character icons to be added each time a pseudo consecutive performance is performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first half icon display scenario is configured to be able to display one or more character icons in the "Cherry Blossom Accumulation Notice" or "Button Challenge Notice" before the pseudo consecutive performance is performed. The "Cherry Blossom Accumulation Notice" and the "Button Challenge Notice" have different execution timings, and are both configured to be executable.

[8-9-6. First Half Icon Set Order Scenario Determination Table for Normal Game State]
A first half icon collection order scenario determination table for determining a first half collection order scenario in a normal gaming state will be described below. Fig. 205 shows an example of a first half icon collection order scenario determination table in a normal gaming state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

"First half collection order scenario" refers to information that dictates the display order in which the types of character icons corresponding to the number of icons in the first half are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 205, the first half icon set order scenario determination table associates the winning command for the first special pattern, the determined number of first half icons, the selection rate (fifth random number value), and the "first half set order scenario."

In addition, the rightmost column of the First Half Icon Display Scenario Determination Table illustrates the "Contents of the First Half Gathering Order Scenario" for reference. Character icons A through E in the "West Army Mode" described below are illustrated as "A" through "E", and character icons F through J in the "East Army Mode" described below are illustrated as "F" through "J". As will be explained in more detail later using Figure 214, the display positions of "A" and "F", "B" and "G", "C" and "H", "D" and "I", and "E" and "J" correspond to each other and have similar roles.

The last number of the first half set order scenario shown in FIG. 205 indicates the "number of icons in the first half" - "display order pattern", and in the case of first half set order scenario 1-1, it indicates "number of icons in the first half 1" - "display order pattern 1".

In this embodiment, the "display sequence pattern" of the first half set sequence scenario is as follows:
"Display Order Pattern 1" displays the character icons in order from A (F) up, such as "A → B → C → D → E (F → G → H → I → J)" (see Figure 214).
"Display Order Pattern 2" displays character icons in order from D (I) down, starting with E (J) (see Figure 214), such as "D → C → B → A → E (I → H → G → F → J)";
"Display Order Pattern 3" displays the character icons in order from A(F) to the top (see Figure 214) after displaying D(I), such as "D→A→B→C→E (I→F→G→H→J)";
and "display sequence pattern 4" in which character icons are displayed in sequence from E (J) downwards (see FIG. 214), such as "E → D → C → B → A (J → I → H → G → F)." Note that the number and order contents of the display sequence patterns are not limited to those described above.

In this embodiment, "display sequence pattern 1" is the normal display sequence pattern, "display sequence pattern 2" is a display sequence pattern that increases the expectation of a jackpot, "display sequence pattern 3" is a display sequence pattern that suggests that a pseudo consecutive announcement will be made, and "display sequence pattern 4" is a display sequence pattern that suggests that the Path of Decisive Battle or Path of Extreme Decisive Battle will be performed. In this way, in this embodiment, the order in which the characters are displayed can also create interest in the upcoming game content, making the game even more exciting.

[8-9-7. Sakura Accumulation Notice Determination Table in Normal Game Mode]
A cherry blossom accumulation notice determination table for determining the cherry blossom accumulation notice in the normal gaming state will be described. Fig. 206 is an example of the cherry blossom accumulation notice determination table in the normal gaming state of the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in Figure 206, the Sakura Accumulation Notice determination table corresponds the "winning command for the first special pattern (first half variation pattern number)," the "reserved number of first special patterns," the "number of displayed character icons" (see Figure 204) displayed in the Sakura Accumulation Notice determined by the first half icon display scenario, the selection rate (sixth random number value), and the "Sakura Accumulation Notice performance pattern."

In addition, the rightmost column of the cherry blossom accumulation notice determination table shows the "contents of the cherry blossom accumulation notice performance pattern" for reference. In addition, "the change" refers to the display of the decorative pattern change that is performed based on the lottery of the special pattern for the start information that is the subject of the cherry blossom accumulation notice performance pattern determination. "Pre-change" refers to the display of the decorative pattern change that is started before the "change". This pre-change is performed multiple times depending on the number of reserved first special patterns, and if the number of reserved first special patterns is 4, three pre-changes will be performed from the next change, if the number of reserved first special patterns is 3, two pre-changes will be performed from the next change, and if the number of reserved first special patterns is 2, one pre-change will be performed from the next change. In this embodiment, a maximum of two pre-changes are configured to be executable, but a maximum of three pre-changes may be configured to be executable.

As mentioned above, the "Cherry Blossom Accumulation Notice" is a notice that accumulates cherry blossoms in stages, and when the accumulated cherry blossoms are released, a set number of "character icons" or "Yakuza icons" are displayed. For this reason, the "Cherry Blossom Accumulation Notice" can be said to be composed of a stage effect that accumulates cherry blossoms in stages, and an icon display effect that displays icons.

The stage presentation of the cherry blossom accumulation announcement is configured to be executable throughout the pre-change and the change itself, and the icon display presentation of the cherry blossom accumulation announcement is configured to be executable during the change itself.

In addition, in the cherry blossom accumulation announcement, cherry blossoms will dance all over the display area of the display device 7, and the cherry blossoms will try to be sucked into the upper display area 7a (see FIG. 173) of the display device 7, but it is also possible to execute an announcement performance (cherry blossom accumulation 0 stage announcement - YK0) in which the cherry blossoms fail to accumulate. This increases the overall appearance rate of cherry blossom accumulation announcements, and creates interest in whether or not the cherry blossoms will accumulate.

In this embodiment, the Sakura Accumulation Notice determination table is configured so that the likelihood of the "Yakuza Icon" being displayed and the number of "character icons" being displayed increases each time the stage presentation of the Sakura Accumulation Notice develops (in the order of Sakura Accumulation 1 Stage Notice < Sakura Accumulation 2 Stage Notice < Sakura Accumulation 3 Stage Notice). This adds interest to the development of the stage presentation (accumulation of cherry blossoms), and can further increase the enjoyment of the game. In particular, because the stage presentation of the Sakura Accumulation Notice is configured to be executable across the pre-change and the current change, it can increase the enjoyment of the game across multiple changes.

[8-9-8. Support Icon Display Scenario Determination Table for Showdown Reach in Normal Game State]
A support icon display scenario determination table for displaying a support icon in a showdown reach in a normal game state will be described. Fig. 207 is an example of a support icon display scenario determination table for a showdown reach in a normal game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The "support icon display scenario" refers to the display content displayed by the support icon in response to the player's operation of the effect button device 6310 during a showdown reach, and is information that is determined in association with the number of times the effect button device 6310 is operated and the display content. The "support icon" in a showdown reach will be described in more detail later using Figures 223 and 224.

As shown in FIG. 207, the support icon display scenario determination table associates a reach presentation pattern (see FIG. 200) corresponding to a showdown reach, the determined number of second half icons, a selection rate (seventh random number value), and a "support icon display scenario."

In addition, the rightmost column of the support icon display scenario determination table illustrates a "support icon display scenario" for reference. Here, "dialogue" refers to the display of a character's dialogue corresponding to the support icon, "opportunity" refers to the display of the word "opportunity" indicating that there is an expectation of a jackpot, and "hot" refers to the display of the word "hot" indicating that there is a higher expectation of a jackpot than with "opportunity". Furthermore, "LED" refers to the LED group 46 emitting a predetermined amount of light, and "big battle" refers to the display of a "big battle icon". Note that the content displayed by the "support icon display scenario" is not limited to the above, and text such as "change in reserved image" that changes the display mode of the reserved image, "performance accessory" that drops the performance accessory group 58 (see FIG. 173), and "change in performance button" that changes the operation mode of the performance button device 6310 may be displayed.

In this embodiment, the support icon display scenario determination table is configured so that the "Great Battle Icon" is always displayed when reach performance patterns 6, 7, 14, and 15 are reached, which develop from a showdown reach to a decisive battle reach. As a result, when the "Great Battle Icon" is displayed by the support icon of the showdown reach, a decisive battle reach can be performed.

[8-9-9. Lotus flower notice decision table in right-hand play mode]
In the right-hand play state, a lotus flower notice determination table for determining the lotus flower notice will be described. FIG. 208 is an example of a lotus flower notice determination table in the right-hand play state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 208, the lotus flower announcement determination table associates the "winning command for the second special symbol (first half variation pattern number and second half variation pattern number)," the "reserved number of second special symbols," the selection rate (8th random number value), and the "lotus flower announcement performance pattern."

As mentioned above, the "Lotus Flower Preview" is a preview effect in which a bud is displayed, suggesting that the bud will open and develop into a "Door Opening Effect." The bud can be displayed multiple times (pre-changes).

In addition, there are two lotus flower preview performance patterns: a "lotus flower success preview" preview performance pattern and a "lotus flower failure preview" preview performance pattern. In the "lotus flower success preview" preview performance pattern, a bud is displayed from the next change (pre-change) after the lotus flower preview performance pattern is determined by the winning command for the second special symbol, and the bud opens when the change occurs. In addition, in the "lotus flower failure preview" preview performance pattern, a bud is displayed from the next change (pre-change) after the lotus flower preview performance pattern is determined by the winning command for the second special symbol, and the bud disappears when the change occurs.

In this embodiment, the lotus flower notice determination table is configured so that when a "door opening effect" is performed in response to the first half variation pattern number (41H, 45H), the notice effect pattern of the "lotus flower success notice" is determined with a predetermined selection rate. As a result, after the lotus flower success notice is performed, the door opening effect is performed.

[8-9-10. Fan notice determination table for jackpot game state]
A folding fan notice determination table for determining a folding fan notice in a big win gaming state will be described. Fig. 209 shows an example of a folding fan notice determination table in a big win gaming state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The "fan notice" during the jackpot game state is a notice in which, during the jackpot game state of the first special symbol, a fan falls from the display area of the display device 7 every time a game ball enters the first large winning slot 6131, and the color of the fan indicates whether the start information stored in the special symbol start memory area is a jackpot or not. In other words, during the jackpot game state of the first special symbol, it is a notice that suggests a so-called reserved consecutive win. Note that, in this embodiment, the "fan notice" is configured to be made only during the jackpot game state of the first special symbol, but it may also be configured to be made during the jackpot game state of the second special symbol.

The "Fan Announcement" is performed on the condition that the number of reserved second special symbols is the upper limit of two (start information is stored in each of the second special symbol start memory areas (1) to (2)). Note that the "Fan Announcement" may be configured to be performed regardless of the number of reserved second special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 209, the fan announcement determination table associates the start information (jackpot information, round information) stored in the first special symbol start memory area (1)-(4), the start information (jackpot information, round information) stored in the second special symbol start memory area (1)-(2), the selection rate (9th random number value), and the "fan announcement performance pattern."

Furthermore, the jackpot information refers to a random number value for determining whether or not a jackpot has occurred, and the round information refers to a random number value for determining the number of rounds in a jackpot game state.

In addition, there are three types of fan preview patterns available: a "white fan preview" where a white fan falls, a "red fan preview" where a red fan falls, a "rainbow fan preview" where a rainbow fan falls, and a "gold fan preview" where a gold fan falls.

In this embodiment, the lotus flower notice determination table is configured so that the notice performance pattern of the "red fan notice" suggests that start information for a jackpot of 3R or more (3R, 5R, 10R) is stored in the first special pattern start memory area, and the notice performance pattern of the "rainbow fan notice" suggests that start information for a jackpot of 10R is stored in the first special pattern start memory area.

In addition, the lotus flower notice determination table is configured so that the notice performance pattern of the "Golden Fan Notice" suggests that the start information of a 2R jackpot is stored in the second special pattern start memory area.

For this reason, the preview performance pattern of the "Red Fan Preview" and the preview performance pattern of the "Rainbow Fan Preview" are fan previews that suggest a jackpot with the first special symbol, and the preview performance pattern of the "Golden Fan Preview" can be said to be a fan preview that suggests a jackpot with the second special symbol.

In this embodiment, when jackpot start information is stored in both the first special pattern start memory area and the second special pattern start memory area, the lotus flower notice determination table is configured so that the "golden fan notice" notice presentation pattern, which suggests a jackpot with the second special pattern, cannot be determined, but the "red fan notice" notice presentation pattern or the "rainbow fan notice" notice presentation pattern, which suggests a jackpot with the first special pattern, can be determined.

[8-9-11. Sub-control circuit processing]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control circuit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 210. Fig. 210 is a flow chart showing an example of the sub-control circuit process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 210, the sub-CPU 301 first performs an initialization process (S6500). In this initialization process, for example, RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, etc. are performed. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 moves the process to S6510.

The initialization process (S6500) described above is executed when the power is turned on or the backup is cleared. After the power is turned on, the processes S6510 to S6580 described below are executed repeatedly.

In S6510, the sub-CPU 301 performs a data input process to input data. In this data input process, both the command input port 308 read process and the effect button device 6310 input process are performed.

The command input port 308 read process reads the command sent from the main control circuit 200 that is set in the command input port 308.

In addition, in the input process of the effect button device 6310, operation information regarding the player's operation detected by the effect button device 6310 is input from the button control circuit 310. In addition, when the sub-CPU 301 inputs operation information from the button control circuit 310, it determines whether to validate the input operation information or to discard it as invalid, and sets the reception time during which input of operation information is permitted, the validity time during which the input operation information is valid, and the invalidity period during which the input operation information is invalid, depending on the current situation such as the effect.

When the reading process of the command input port 308 and the input process of the performance button device 6310 are completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6520.

In S6520, the sub-CPU 301 executes a command analysis process. In this process, the command read in the process of S6510 is analyzed. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6530.

At S6530, the sub-CPU 301 executes a presentation mode determination process. In this process, for example, a presentation pattern is determined based on a command sent from the main CPU 201, and various requests (for example, a drawing request, a sound request, a lamp request, a role request, a presentation button actuation request, etc.) for operating various presentation devices are generated based on the determined presentation pattern. Details of this presentation mode determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 211. Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 moves the process to S6540.

In S6540, the sub-CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this processing, the sub-CPU 301 transmits a drawing request to the display control circuit 304 (see FIG. 174). Based on the message (drawing request) transmitted from the sub-CPU 301, the display control circuit 304 performs drawing control to display an image in the display area of the display device 7. When this processing ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the processing to S6550.

In S6550, the sub-CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this processing, the sub-CPU 301 transmits a sound request to the audio control circuit 305 (see FIG. 174). The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control to output audio from the speaker 32 based on the message (sound request) transmitted from the sub-CPU 301. When this processing ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the processing to S6560.

In S6560, the sub-CPU 301 executes LED control processing. In this processing, the sub-CPU 301 sends an LED request to the LED control circuit 306 (see FIG. 174). Based on the message (LED request) sent from the sub-CPU 301, the LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control to light up or blink all or a portion of the LEDs that make up the LED group 46. When this processing ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the processing to S6570.

At S6570, the sub-CPU 301 executes a reel control process. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 sends a reel request to the reel control circuit 307 (see FIG. 174). Based on the message (reel request) sent from the sub-CPU 301, the reel control circuit 307 performs drive control to operate the performance drive motors (not shown) for all or some of the reels that make up the performance reel group 58. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6580.

At S6580, the sub-CPU 301 executes effect button control processing. In this processing, the sub-CPU 301 sends an effect button drive request to the button control circuit 310 (see FIG. 174). Based on the message (effect button drive request) sent from the sub-CPU 301, the button control circuit 310 performs drive control such as changing the operation mode of the effect button device 6310 or vibrating the effect button device 6310. When this processing ends, the sub-CPU 301 ends the sub-control circuit processing.

[8-9-12. Presentation mode determination process]
Next, referring to Fig. 211, the details of the presentation mode determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 in S6530 during the sub control circuit process (see Fig. 210) will be described. Fig. 211 is a flow chart showing an example of the presentation mode determination process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

At S6531, the sub-CPU 301 executes a presentation pattern determination process to determine a presentation pattern. In this process, a presentation pattern is determined based on a command sent from the main CPU 201, the presentation pattern defining the type of display presentation to be displayed on the display device 7, the type of sound presentation to be output from the speaker 32, the operation type of the presentation button device 6310, etc. Details of this presentation mode determination process will be described later with reference to Figures 212 and 213. Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 moves the process to S6532.

In S6532, the sub-CPU 301 executes a process for generating an animation request. In this process, an animation request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S6531 above. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6533.

In S6533, the sub-CPU 301 executes a process for generating a drawing request. In this process, a drawing request is generated based on the animation request generated in S6532. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6534.

At S6534, the sub-CPU 301 executes a sound request generation process. In this process, a sound request is generated based on the performance pattern determined at S6531 above. Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6535.

In S6535, the sub-CPU 301 executes a lamp request generation process. In this process, a lamp request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S6531 above. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6536.

In S6536, the sub-CPU 301 executes a reel request generation process. In this process, a reel request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S6531 above. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6537.

At S6537, the sub-CPU 301 executes a process for generating a performance button actuation request. In this process, a performance button actuation request is generated based on the performance pattern determined at S6531 above. Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 ends the performance mode determination process and returns the process to the drawing control process (see FIG. 210).

[8-9-13. Presentation pattern determination process]
Next, referring to Fig. 212 and Fig. 213, the details of the effect pattern determination process executed by the sub-CPU 301 in S6531 during the effect mode determination process (see Fig. 211) will be described. Fig. 212 and Fig. 213 are a flow chart showing an example of the effect pattern determination process in the sixth pachinko game machine.

In S6531-1, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "first special symbol winning command."

If it is determined in S6531-1 that the command is a "first special symbol winning command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S6531-2. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "first special symbol winning command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S6531-7.

In S6531-2, the sub-CPU 301 performs a first reserved update display process to update the reserved number of the first special symbol and update and display the reserved image corresponding to the reserved number of the first special symbol. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6531-3.

In S6531-3, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the current gaming state is the "normal gaming state."

If it is determined in S6531-3 that the game is in the "normal game mode", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6531-4. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is not in the "normal game mode", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6531-7.

In S6531-4, the sub-CPU 301 performs a first half icon number determination process to determine the number of first half icons in the normal game state.

In the first half icon number determination process, the first half icon number determination table shown in FIG. 203 is referenced, and the number of first half icons is determined based on the winning command for the first special symbol and the third random number value. When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6531-5.

In S6531-5, the sub-CPU 301 performs an icon scenario determination process. In this icon scenario determination process, both a first half icon display scenario determination process that determines a first half icon display scenario, and a first half collection order scenario determination process that determines a first half collection order scenario are performed.

In the first half icon display scenario determination process, the first half icon display scenario determination table shown in FIG. 204 is referenced, and the first half icon display scenario is determined based on the winning command for the first special pattern, the number of first half icons determined in S6531-4 above, and the fourth random number value.

In the first half collection order scenario determination process, the first half icon collection order scenario determination table shown in FIG. 205 is referenced, and the first half collection order scenario is determined based on the winning command for the first special pattern, the number of first half icons determined in S6531-4 above, and the fifth random number value.

When both the first half icon display scenario determination process and the first half collection order scenario determination process are completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6531-6.

In S6531-6, the sub-CPU 301 performs a cherry blossom accumulation notification determination process to determine the cherry blossom accumulation notification in the normal game state.

In the cherry blossom accumulation notice determination process, the cherry blossom accumulation notice determination table shown in FIG. 206 is referenced, and the cherry blossom accumulation notice performance pattern is determined based on the number of reserved first special symbols, the number of character icons displayed in the cherry blossom accumulation notice according to the first half icon display scenario determined in S6531-5 above, and the sixth random number value. When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the performance pattern determination process, and moves the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

In S6531-7, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "winning command for the second special symbol."

If it is determined in S6531-7 that the command is a "winner command for the second special symbol", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S6531-8. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "winner command for the second special symbol", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S6531-10.

In S6531-8, the sub-CPU 301 performs a second reserved update display process to update the reserved number of the second special symbol and update and display the reserved image corresponding to the reserved number of the second special symbol. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6531-9.

In S6531-9, the sub-CPU 301 performs lotus flower announcement determination processing to determine the lotus flower announcement in the right-hit gaming state.

In the lotus flower announcement determination process, the lotus flower announcement determination table shown in FIG. 208 is referenced, and the lotus flower announcement performance pattern is determined based on the winning command for the second special symbol, the number of reserved second special symbols, and the eighth random value. When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the performance pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

In S6531-10, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "prize command for the big prize slot."

If it is determined in S6531-10 that the command is a "prize command for the large prize slot", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S6531-11. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "prize command for the large prize slot", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S6531-20.

In S6531-11, the sub-CPU 301 performs a fan prediction determination process to determine the fan prediction during the jackpot game state.

In the fan notice determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the game is in a jackpot game state for the first special symbol, and if it is not in a jackpot game state for the first special symbol, the fan notice determination process is terminated. Next, if the game is in a jackpot game state for the first special symbol, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved second special symbols is the upper limit of two, and if the number of reserved second special symbols is not the upper limit of two, the fan notice determination process is terminated. Then, if the game is in a jackpot game state for the first special symbol and the number of reserved second special symbols is the upper limit of two, the fan notice determination table shown in FIG. 209 is referenced, and the fan notice performance pattern is determined based on the start information stored in the first special symbol start memory area, the start information stored in the second special symbol start memory area, and the ninth random number value. When this process is terminated, the sub-CPU 301 terminates the performance pattern determination process and moves the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

In S6531-20, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol variation pattern command."

If it is determined in S6531-20 that the command is a "special symbol variation pattern command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S6531-21. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "special symbol variation pattern command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S6531-30.

In S6531-21, the sub-CPU 301 performs a process for determining the number of second-half icons to be used in the normal game state.

In the second half icon number determination process, the second half icon number determination table shown in FIG. 202 is referenced, and the second half icon number is determined based on the variable pattern command of the first special symbol and the second random number value. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6531-22.

In S6531-22, the sub-CPU 301 performs a pattern presentation pattern determination process to determine a pattern presentation pattern. Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6531-23.

In the symbol presentation pattern determination process, the game state is first referenced, and if it is a normal game state, the symbol presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 200 is determined, and if it is a right-hand play state, the symbol presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 201 is determined.

When the symbol presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 200 is determined, the symbol presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 200 is referenced, and if the first special symbol variation pattern command is a variation pattern command, the pre-reach presentation pattern and the reach presentation pattern are determined based on the first special symbol variation pattern command and the number of latter half icons determined in S6531-21 above. Also, if the game is in a normal game state and the second special symbol variation pattern command is a variation pattern command, a standby presentation pattern is determined.

In addition, in the normal game state, when a reach effect pattern is determined, the support icon display scenario determination table shown in FIG. 207 is referenced, and the support icon display scenario is determined based on the reach effect pattern and the number of second half icons determined in S6531-21 above.

When the symbol presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 201 is determined, the symbol presentation pattern is determined based on the special symbol variation pattern command and the first random number value by referring to the determined symbol presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 201.

In S6531-23, the sub-CPU 301 performs other preview performance pattern determination processing to determine the dialogue preview and button challenge preview. Upon completing this processing, the sub-CPU 301 ends the performance pattern determination processing and transfers processing to the animation request generation processing (see FIG. 211).

In the dialogue preview in the preview performance pattern determination process, a dialogue preview determination table (not shown) is referenced so that the dialogue of the displayed character can suggest the possibility of a jackpot, and the dialogue preview performance pattern is determined based on the variation pattern command of the first special symbol and a predetermined selection rate (such as the 10th random number value).

In addition, in the button challenge preview in the other preview performance pattern determination process, first, the first half icon display scenario determined in S6531-5 above is referenced, and if there is a number of character icons to be displayed in the button challenge preview according to the first half icon display scenario, a first button challenge preview performance pattern is determined in which the displayed number of character icons are displayed. In this first button challenge preview performance pattern, the displayed number of character icons are displayed by the player operating the performance button device 6310 multiple times, but even if the player does not operate the performance button device 6310, the displayed number of character icons will be displayed after the reception time for the performance button device 6310 has ended.

On the other hand, in the button challenge announcement in the other announcement performance pattern determination process, if there is no number of character icons displayed in the button challenge announcement due to the first half icon display scenario, a button challenge announcement determination table (not shown) is referenced so that character icons indicating the expected jackpot probability and the developing reach content can be displayed, and a second button challenge announcement performance pattern is determined based on the first special symbol variation pattern command and a predetermined selection rate (such as the 11th random number value). In this second button challenge announcement performance pattern, the character icons are displayed by the player operating the performance button device 6310 multiple times. Note that in the second button challenge announcement performance pattern, if the player does not operate the performance button device 6310, the character icons are not displayed, but the character icons may be displayed after the reception time for the performance button has ended.

In S6531-30, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "symbol designation command."

If it is determined in S6531-30 that the command is a "designation command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6531-31. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "designation command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6531-40.

In S6531-31, the sub-CPU 301 performs a decorative symbol determination process to determine the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed according to the type of symbol designation command. In addition, if the type of symbol designation command is a command corresponding to a jackpot symbol, the number of jackpot rounds data is set. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 ends the presentation pattern determination process, and moves the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

In S6531-40, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol effect stop command."

If it is determined in S6531-40 that the command is a "special symbol effect stop command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6531-41. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "special symbol effect stop command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6531-50.

In S6531-41, the sub-CPU 301 performs a decorative pattern stopping process to stop and display the decorative pattern. Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 ends the performance pattern determination process and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

In S6531-50, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "jackpot start display command."

If it is determined in S6531-50 that the command is a "jackpot start display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S6531-51. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "jackpot start display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S6531-60.

In S6531-51, the sub-CPU 301 performs a jackpot presentation determination process to determine a jackpot presentation pattern for performing a jackpot presentation. In this jackpot presentation determination process, the jackpot presentation pattern is determined according to the jackpot round count data set in S6531-31 above. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 ends the presentation pattern determination process and moves the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

In S6531-60, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "game state designation command."

If it is determined in S6531-60 that the command is a "game state designation command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S6531-61. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "game state designation command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S6531-70.

In S6531-61, the sub-CPU 301 performs a game state setting process to set the game state according to the type of game state designation command. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6531-62.

In S6531-62, the sub-CPU 301 performs a presentation mode determination process to determine the presentation mode.

In this presentation mode determination process, the presentation mode is set to "battle mode" in the "high probability time-saving game state", the presentation mode is set to "golden hour mode" in the "high probability non-time-saving game state", and the presentation mode is set to "dream mode" in the "low probability time-saving game state". In addition, in the "normal game state", the "West army mode" and the "East army mode" are alternately shifted based on a predetermined shift rate (12th random number, etc.). In addition, in the "normal game state", the "West army mode" and the "East army mode" may be configured to shift depending on a predetermined number of fluctuations of the special pattern, regardless of the predetermined shift rate (12th random number, etc.). In addition, in the normal game state, the presentation modes are not limited to the two, "West army mode" and "East army mode", and three or more presentation modes may be shifted. When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the presentation pattern determination process and moves the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

In S6531-70, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "demo display command."

If it is determined in S6531-70 that the command is a "demo display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6531-71. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "demo display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6531-73.

In S6531-71, the sub-CPU 301 performs a demo display effect pattern determination process to determine a demo display effect pattern for performing effects while the game is in standby. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6531-72.

In S6531-73, the sub-CPU 301 performs effect button initialization processing to instruct the button control circuit 310 to return the operation mode of the effect button device 6310 to the first operation mode (see FIG. 172(a)) as the initial operation mode. Upon completing this processing, the sub-CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination processing, and shifts processing to the animation request generation processing (see FIG. 211).

The effect button initialization process is configured to be performed when a "demo display command" is received, but in addition to this, it may also be configured to be performed when at least one of the following commands is received: "special symbol winning command," "special symbol variation pattern command," "special symbol effect stop command," or "jackpot start display command."

The effect button initialization process may also be configured to be performed according to the current game state and various commands. For example, the effect button initialization process is performed regardless of the game state when a "demo display command" is received, but may also be configured to be performed when any of the following commands is received in the normal game state: "special symbol winning command," "special symbol variation pattern command," or "special symbol effect stop command." In particular, since the average variation time of special symbols and the frequency of operation of the effect button device 6310 differ depending on the game state, the effect button device 6310 can be initialized taking into account the game state.

In S6531-13, the sub-CPU 301 determines a presentation pattern according to various other commands sent from the main CPU 201. Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 ends the presentation pattern determination process and transfers processing to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

[8-10. Production Contents]
Regarding the effects executed under the control of the main control circuit 200 and the sub-control circuit 300, etc., an example of the effects of the display image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 will be described below.

(Normal display image)
First, the normal display images of the "West Army Mode" and the "East Army Mode" in the normal game state will be described. Fig. 214 shows an example of the normal display images of the West Army Mode and the East Army Mode in the normal game state of the sixth pachinko game machine, Fig. 214(a) shows an example of the normal display image of the West Army Mode in the normal game state, and Fig. 214(b) shows an example of the normal display image of the East Army Mode in the normal game state.

As described above in FIG. 173, in the sixth pachinko gaming machine, a circular structure called a performance partition 6116 is disposed on the front side of the display area of the display device 7, and an upper display area 7a is formed inside the performance partition 6116 as the display area of the display device 7. Various icons, characters, etc., which will be described later, are displayed in this upper display area 7a.

As shown in FIG. 214(a), in the normal display image of the West Army mode in the normal game state, the left pattern 6071L, the middle pattern 6071C, and the right pattern 6071R are configured to be displayed as main patterns of the decorative pattern corresponding to the first special pattern in the center of the display area of the display device 7. In addition, the first sub-pattern 6071A as the sub-pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the first special pattern, and the second sub-pattern 6072A as the sub-pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern are configured to be displayed small in the right corner of the display area of the display device 7. In the normal game state, when the first special pattern is variably displayed, the left pattern 6071L, the middle pattern 6071C, the right pattern 6071R, and the first sub-pattern 6071A are variably displayed, but when the second special pattern is variably displayed, only the second sub-pattern 6072A is variably displayed.

In addition, in the normal display image of the Western Army mode, the number of reserved first special symbols can be displayed in the lower left of the display area of the display device 7, and depending on the number of reserved first special symbols, the following can be displayed: a first reserved special symbol image 6072a indicating that start information is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (1); a second reserved special symbol image 6072b indicating that start information is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (2); a third reserved special symbol image 6072c indicating that start information is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (3); and a fourth reserved special symbol image 6072d indicating that start information is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (4). Note that in this embodiment, the number of reserved second special symbols is not displayed, but numbers indicating the number of reserved second special symbols can also be displayed.

In the normal display image in the Western Army mode, a Western Army icon display section 6074L is formed on the left side of the display area of the display device 7, which indicates that a character icon is displayed. This Western Army icon display section 6074L is configured to be able to display an icon A display image 6074a indicating that a character icon A (for example, Western Army General A participates in the battle) is displayed, an icon B display image 6074b indicating that a character icon B (for example, Western Army General B participates in the battle) is displayed, an icon C display image 6074c indicating that a character icon C (for example, Western Army General C participates in the battle) is displayed, an icon D display image 6074d indicating that a character icon D (for example, Western Army General D participates in the battle) is displayed, and an icon E display image 6074e indicating that a character icon E (for example, Western Army General E participates in the battle) is displayed. As will be described in detail later, when each character icon is displayed, the icon display image of the Western Army icon display section 6074L corresponding to that character icon is lit up.

As shown in FIG. 214(b), in the normal display image of the East team mode in the normal game state, the left pattern 6071L, the middle pattern 6071C, the right pattern 6071R, the first sub-pattern 6071A, the second sub-pattern 6072A, the first reserved image of special 1 6072a, the second reserved image of special 1 6072b, the third reserved image of special 1 6072c, and the fourth reserved image of special 1 6072d can be displayed, just like in the West team mode.

In the normal display image in the East Army mode, an East Army icon display section 6074R is formed on the right side of the display area of the display device 7, which indicates that a character icon is displayed. This East Army icon display section 6074R is configured to be able to display an icon F display image 6074f indicating that a character icon F (e.g., East Army General F participating in the battle) is displayed, an icon G display image 6074g indicating that a character icon G (e.g., East Army General G participating in the battle) is displayed, an icon H display image 6074h indicating that a character icon H (e.g., East Army General H participating in the battle) is displayed, an icon I display image 6074i indicating that a character icon I (e.g., East Army General I participating in the battle) is displayed, and an icon J display image 6074j indicating that a character icon J (e.g., East Army General J participating in the battle) is displayed. As will be described in detail later, when each character icon is displayed, the icon display image of the East Army icon display section 6074R corresponding to that character icon is lit up.

In this embodiment, in the Western Army mode in the normal game state, character icons A to E correspond to the above-mentioned "first half icons," and the number of icon display images that are lit and displayed in the Western Army icon display unit 6074L corresponds to the above-mentioned "number of first half icons." Also, in the Eastern Army mode in the normal game state, character icons F to J correspond to the "first half icons," and the number of icon display images that are lit and displayed in the Eastern Army icon display unit 6074R corresponds to the above-mentioned "number of first half icons."

In this embodiment, the Western Army icon display section 6074L and the Eastern Army icon display section 6074R are configured as predetermined display images using the display device 7, but a separate LED display for presentation that can light up multiple areas individually may also be provided and configured using the LED display for presentation.

(Cherry Blossom Accumulation Announcement Production)
Next, the effect of the "cherry blossom accumulation notice" will be described. Figures 215 and 216 are examples of display images for explaining the effect of the cherry blossom accumulation notice in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when explaining the Sakura Accumulation Notice performance, the symbols given in Figure 214 will be omitted because the characters will be small and difficult to see, which may interfere with the explanation of the performance content. In addition, the first sub-pattern 6071A and second sub-pattern 6072A, which are displayed very small, will also be omitted. This also applies to the performances explained in Figures 217 to 227.

Using Figures 215 and 216, we will explain an example of a cherry blossom accumulation announcement presentation that corresponds to the cherry blossom accumulation 2-stage announcement-YK7 announcement presentation pattern (see Figure 206) in which the stage presentation in which cherry blossoms are gradually accumulated is carried out in two stages, the pre-change and the start of the change, and in which "two character icons" are displayed in the change, or an example of a cherry blossom accumulation announcement presentation that corresponds to the cherry blossom accumulation 2-stage announcement-YK24 announcement presentation pattern (see Figure 206) in which the stage presentation in which cherry blossoms are gradually accumulated is carried out in two stages, the pre-change and the start of the change, and in which "yakuza icon" is displayed in the change.

Figure 215(a) is an example of a display image when the number of reserved first special symbols is two and the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state. Also, as shown in Figure 215(a), none of the icon display images are lit up in the West Army icon display section.

Figure 215 (b) is an example of a display image when the display of the decorative pattern begins as a pre-change from the state of Figure 215 (a). As shown in Figure 215 (b), when the display of the decorative pattern begins, at the start of the pre-change, a display image is produced in which cherry blossoms dance across the entire display area of the display device 7, and the cherry blossoms are drawn into the upper display area 7a.

Figure 215(c) is an example of a display image when cherry blossoms are sucked into the upper display area 7a from the state of Figure 215(b) and the decorative pattern is displayed stationary. As shown in Figure 215(c), when cherry blossoms are sucked into the upper display area 7a, a one-stage accumulation image indicating that cherry blossoms have accumulated one stage is displayed in the upper display area 7a, and then the decorative pattern is displayed stationary. Note that in the case of a cherry blossom accumulation notice (cherry blossom accumulation 0-stage notice - YK0) in which cherry blossoms attempt to be sucked into the upper display area 7a but fail to accumulate the cherry blossoms, the one-stage accumulation image will not be displayed in the upper display area 7a.

Figure 215 (d) is an example of a display image when the display of the decorative pattern begins to change, either in the state of Figure 215 (c) or as the change in question. As shown in Figure 215 (d), when the display of the decorative pattern changes begins, at the start of the change in question, a display image is produced in which cherry blossoms dance across the entire display area of the display device 7, and the cherry blossoms are drawn into the upper display area 7a.

Figure 216(e) is an example of a display image when cherry blossoms are absorbed into the upper display area 7a from the state of Figure 215(d). As shown in Figure 216(e), when new cherry blossoms are absorbed into the upper display area 7a, a two-stage accumulation image is displayed in the upper display area 7a, indicating that cherry blossoms have accumulated in two stages.

Figure 216 (f) is an example of a display image when character icon A (for example, Western Army General A joins the battle) is displayed due to a button challenge notice or the like from the state of Figure 216 (e). As shown in Figure 216 (f), when character icon A (for example, Western Army General A joins the battle) is displayed due to a button challenge notice or the like different from the cherry blossom accumulation notice, the icon A display image is lit up in the Western Army icon display section, and a two-stage accumulation image and "1-person concentrated" are displayed in the upper display area 7a as a text image indicating the number of character icons.

Figure 216 (g) is an example of a display image when the cherry blossoms stored in the upper display area 7a are released. As shown in Figure 216 (g), at a specific timing, such as before a reach, the cherry blossoms stored in the upper display area 7a are released, and the entire display area is displayed as if they are covered by the cherry blossoms. Note that the timing at which the cherry blossoms stored in the upper display area 7a are released can be freely designed and modified as appropriate.

Figure 216 (h-1) is an example of a display image when a "Yakuza icon" is displayed after cherry blossoms are released, indicating that the game will progress to the Road to the Ultimate Showdown. As shown in Figure 216 (h-1), in the case of the two-stage cherry blossom accumulation notice -YK24, when the released cherry blossoms disappear, a "Yakuza icon" is displayed, indicating that the game will progress to the Road to the Ultimate Showdown. After that, the Road to the Ultimate Showdown performance will take place.

Figure 216 (h-2) is an example of a display image when two character icons are displayed after cherry blossoms are released. As shown in Figure 216 (h-2), in the case of the cherry blossom accumulation two-stage notice -YK7, when the released cherry blossoms disappear, two character icons, character icon B (for example, Western Army General B joins the battle) and character icon C (for example, Western Army General C joins the battle), are displayed. Then, the icon B display image and the icon C display image are lit up and displayed in the Western Army icon display section, and "Three people united" is displayed in the upper display area 7a as a text image indicating the number of character icons.

Note that in Figures 215 and 216, an example of the presentation of the Cherry Blossom Accumulation Notice corresponding to the notice presentation patterns of Cherry Blossom Accumulation 2-Stage Notice-YK7 and Cherry Blossom Accumulation 2-Stage Notice-YK24 is explained, but the same applies to other notice presentation patterns of the Cherry Blossom Accumulation Notice (see Figure 206).

In this way, the cherry blossom accumulation announcement of this embodiment gradually increases the sense of anticipation for the game by developing a staged presentation across the pre-change and the change itself (or just the change itself), and the displayed results also create interest, making the game even more exciting.

(Pseudo consecutive performance)
Next, the "pseudo consecutive winning performance" will be described. Figures 217 to 219 are examples of display images for explaining the pseudo consecutive winning performance in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

Using Figures 217 to 219, we will explain an example of a pseudo consecutive performance that corresponds to the first half icon display scenarios A38 and A39 (see Figure 204), in which two pseudo consecutive performances are performed, five character icons are displayed, and the game progresses to the path to the decisive battle. In addition, the display order of the character icons in the pseudo consecutive performance explained using Figures 217 to 219 is based on the first half collection order scenario 5-1 (see Figure 205), which corresponds to display order pattern 1.

Figure 217(a) is an example of a display image when all decorative patterns of the left pattern, center pattern, and right pattern are changing. As shown in Figure 217(a), the icon A display image and the icon B display image of the Western Army icon display section are lit up, and "Two people united" is displayed in the upper display area 7a as a text image indicating the number of character icons.

Figure 217 (b) is an example of a display image when the left pattern is displayed as a provisional stop, and then the right pattern is also displayed as a provisional stop.

Figure 217 (c) is an example of a display image when the right pattern, which is displayed as a temporary stop, starts to change again (right pattern slips) from the state shown in Figure 217 (b).

Figure 217(d) is an example of a display image when the first pseudo consecutive teasing performance is being performed, teasing whether or not a specific character icon will stop at the position of the center pattern. As shown in Figure 217(d), when the right pattern is being displayed in a variable manner, a display is performed to tease whether or not "character icon C (Western Army General C joins the battle)" will stop at the position of the center pattern.

Figure 218 (e) is an example of a display image when a specified character icon stops at the position of the middle pattern and the first pseudo consecutive stimulation performance is successful. As shown in Figure 218 (e), when the pseudo consecutive stimulation performance is successful and "character icon C (Western Army General C joins the battle)" stops at the position of the middle pattern, the icon C display image is lit up in the Western Army icon display section, and "3 people united" is displayed in the upper display area 7a as a text image indicating the number of character icons.

If the first pseudo consecutive teasing performance fails, the "Character Icon C (Western Army General C joins the battle)" will be erased, and after the right-hand pattern is temporarily stopped and a different type of pattern than the left-hand pattern is displayed, all decorative patterns will be stopped and it will be a "miss."

Figure 218 (f) is an example of a display image when a specific character icon stops at the position of the center symbol and the first pseudo consecutive performance is being performed. As shown in Figure 218 (f), for the first pseudo consecutive performance, "PSUI x 1" is displayed to indicate the first pseudo consecutive performance, and all decorative symbols of the left, center, and right symbols start to change in display.

Figure 218 (g) is an example of a display image when the second pseudo consecutive teasing performance is being performed. As shown in Figure 218 (g), when the left pattern is temporarily stopped, a display is displayed to tease whether "Character Icon D (Western Army General D joins the battle)" and "Character Icon E (Western Army General E joins the battle)" will stop at the position of the middle pattern.

Figure 218 (h) is an example of a display image when a specified character icon stops at the position of the middle pattern and the second pseudo consecutive teasing performance is successful. As shown in Figure 218 (h), when "character icon D (Western Army General D joins the battle)" and "character icon E (Western Army General E joins the battle)" stop at the position of the middle pattern, the icon D display image and the icon E display image are lit up and displayed in the Western Army icon display section, and "5 people concentrated" is displayed in the upper display area 7a as a text image indicating the number of character icons.

In addition, if the second pseudo consecutive teasing performance fails, "Character Icon D (Western Army General D joins the battle)" and "Character Icon E (Western Army General E joins the battle)" will be erased, and the right image will be displayed as a temporary stop image of the same type as the left image, resulting in a normal reach.

Figure 219(i) is an example of a display image when a specific character icon stops at the position of the center symbol and the second pseudo consecutive performance is being performed. As shown in Figure 219(i), for the second pseudo consecutive performance, "PSUI x 2 times" is displayed to indicate the second pseudo consecutive performance, and all decorative symbols of the left, center, and right symbols start to change in display.

Figure 219 (j) is an example of a display image when all icon display images are lit in the Western Army icon display section and a "path icon" is displayed indicating development to the path to the decisive battle. As shown in Figure 219 (j), after the second pseudo consecutive performance starts, as all icon display images are lit in the Western Army icon display section, a "path icon" is displayed indicating development to the path to the decisive battle. After that, the performance of the path to the decisive battle will be carried out.

Note that in Figures 217 to 219, an example of pseudo consecutive performances corresponding to the first half icon display scenario A38 or A39 and the first half set sequence scenario 5-1 has been described, but the same applies to pseudo consecutive performances corresponding to other first half icon display scenarios (see Figure 204) and other first half set sequence scenarios (see Figure 205).

In this way, the pseudo consecutive presentation of this embodiment adds new interest not only in whether or not a re-change will occur, but also in the number of character icons displayed during a re-change, the type of character icons, and the order in which the character icons are displayed, thereby making the game even more interesting.

(Direction of the road to the final battle)
Next, the effect of "Road to the Final Battle" will be described. Figures 220 and 221 are examples of display images for explaining the effect of "Road to the Final Battle" in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

Using Figures 220 and 221, we will explain an example of the presentation of the path to the decisive battle that develops from the Western Army mode, and corresponds to pre-reach presentation patterns 9, 12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, and 30 (see Figure 200), in which eight character icons are displayed and the path develops into a showdown reach.

Here, the Road to the Final Battle is an effect in which the player operates the effect button device 6310 a first number of times before a predetermined time has elapsed, aiming to collect 10 character icons, and an "operation effect time" is set in which the effect button device 6310 can be operated a first number of times. In this embodiment, the "operation effect time of the Road to the Final Battle" is set to 20 seconds so that the effect button device 6310 can be operated five times as the first number of operations, with one set (4 seconds) consisting of a 3-second reception time for the effect button device 6310 and a 1-second display time for displaying a predetermined icon based on the operation result. The operation effect time of the Road to the Final Battle and the configuration of the reception time for the effect button device 6310 will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 228.

As shown in Fig. 220 and Fig. 221, in the performance of the Road to the Decisive Battle, which is developed from the Western Army mode, it is assumed that all the icon display images in the Western Army icon display section are lit up, so a text image of "Western Army Assemble" is displayed near the Western Army icon display section, indicating that all the icon display images in the Western Army icon display section are lit up. Also, a "countdown display image" that counts down the number of seconds until the "Road to the Decisive Battle operation performance time" ends is displayed in the lower left of the display area of the display device 7. Note that in this embodiment, the "countdown display image" indicates the maximum number of times the performance button device 6310 can be operated (see Fig. 228), but instead of the countdown display image, a number image indicating the maximum number of times the performance button device 6310 can be operated may be displayed.

Fig. 220(a) is an example of a display image when it is possible to operate the effect button device 6310 for the first time. As shown in Fig. 220(a), when it is possible to operate the effect button device 6310, an effect button image is displayed to encourage the player to operate the effect button device 6310, and a gauge image is displayed below the effect button image, indicating the reception time of the effect button device 6310. This is also the case in the Road to Extreme Showdown performance.

Figure 220(b) is an example of when "Character Icon H (Eastern Army General H joins the battle)" is displayed as a specified icon when the effect button device 6310 is operated for the first time. As shown in Figure 220(b), when "Character Icon H (Eastern Army General H joins the battle)" is displayed, the icon H display image is lit up in the Eastern Army icon display section, and "6 people united" is displayed in the upper display area 7a as a text image indicating the number of character icons.

Figure 220 (c) is an example of a display image when it is possible to operate the performance button device 6310 a second time.

Figure 220 (d) is an example of a display image when the effect button device 6310 is operated a second time and "Approaching?!" is displayed as the specified icon. This "Approaching?!" icon is an icon that corresponds to a miss, where no character icon is displayed, and the icons displayed are adjusted based on the selection rate, scenario, etc. so that a predetermined number of character icons are ultimately displayed.

Figure 221 (e) is an example of a display image when the third and fourth operations of the performance button device 6310 have been completed and it is possible to perform the fifth (final) operation of the performance button device 6310.

Figure 221 (f) is an example of a display image when a specified icon is displayed when the effect button device 6310 is operated a fifth (final) time. As shown in Figure 221 (f), when "Character Icon G (Eastern Army General G joins the battle)" and "Character Icon F (Eastern Army General F joins the battle)" are displayed as the specified icon, the icon G display image and the icon F display image are lit up in the Eastern Army icon display section, and "8 people united" is displayed in the upper display area 7a as a text image indicating the number of character icons.

Figure 221 (g) is an example of the display image when the countdown display image reaches zero and the final number of character icons is displayed.

Figure 221 (h) is an example of a display image when, after the final number of character icons is displayed, a text image is displayed indicating that the game will progress to a showdown reach. Here, in the showdown reach, a performance is performed using the displayed character icons, so as shown in Figure 221 (h) the text image indicating the number of character icons continues to be displayed in the upper display area 7a. After the display shown in Figure 221 (h) is performed, the showdown reach performance will take place.

Note that in Figures 220 and 221, an example of the path to the decisive battle that develops from the Western Army mode and corresponds to pre-reach performance patterns 9, 12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, and 30 is described, but the same applies to the path to the decisive battle that develops from the Eastern Army mode and other pre-reach performance patterns that involve the path to the decisive battle (see Figure 200).

In this way, the Road to the Final Battle presentation in this embodiment aims for the player to collect 10 character icons by operating the presentation button device 6310 before a specified time has elapsed, encouraging the player to actively participate in the game and making it even more interesting.

(Direction of the road to the ultimate showdown)
Next, the effects of "The Road to the Ultimate Showdown" will be described. Fig. 222 is an example of a display image for explaining the effects of "The Road to the Ultimate Showdown" in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

Figure 222 shows an example of the presentation of the path to the ultimate showdown that develops from the Western Army mode, and corresponds to pre-reach presentation pattern 32 (see Figure 200) in which 10 character icons are displayed and the path develops into the ultimate showdown reach.

Here, Road to the Extreme Showdown is a specific presentation of the same type as Road to the Showdown, and is a presentation that aims to have the player operate the presentation button device 6310 the second number of times and collect 10 character icons before a specified time has elapsed, and an "operation presentation time" is set in which the presentation button device 6310 can be operated the second number of times. In this embodiment, the reception time of the presentation button device 6310 is 3 seconds, and the display time of 1 second to display a specified icon based on the operation result is set as one set (4 seconds), and the "operation presentation time of Road to the Extreme Showdown" is set to 40 seconds so that the presentation button device 6310 can be operated 10 times as the second number of operations, which is greater than the first number of operations.

As shown in FIG. 222, in the Road to the Ultimate Battle performance that develops from the Western Army mode, a "countdown display image" that counts down the number of seconds until the "Road to the Ultimate Battle operation performance time" ends is displayed in the lower left of the display area of the display device 7. Note that in this embodiment, the "countdown display image" indicates the maximum number of times the performance button device 6310 can be operated, but instead of the countdown display image, a number image indicating the maximum number of times the performance button device 6310 can be operated may be displayed.

Figure 222(a) is an example of a display image when it is possible to perform the first operation of the performance button device 6310. At the start of the performance of the Road to the Extreme Battle, the icon display image displayed as lit continues to be displayed in the Western Army icon display section until the performance of the Road to the Extreme Battle begins. In Figure 222(a), character icon A is already displayed by the time the performance of the Road to the Extreme Battle begins, and the icon A display image continues to be displayed as lit in the Western Army icon display section.

Figure 222 (b) is an example of a display image when a specific character icon D is displayed when the effect button device 6310 is operated for the first time. As shown in Figure 222 (b), when "character icon D (Western Army General D joins the battle)" and "character icon H (Western Army General H joins the battle)" are displayed as the specific icon, the icon D display image in the Western Army icon display section and the icon H display image in the Eastern Army icon display section are lit up, and "3 people united" is displayed in the upper display area 7a as a text image indicating the number of character icons.

Figure 222(c) is an example of a display image when the tenth operation of the effect button device 6310 is completed, the countdown display image reaches zero, and the final number of character icons is displayed. In Figure 222(c), all icon display images in the Western Army icon display section and the Eastern Army icon display section are lit up.

Figure 222 (d) is an example of a display image when a text image is displayed indicating that the game will progress to the Decisive Battle Reach after the final number of character icons is displayed. At this time, the text image indicating the number of character icons displayed in the upper display area 7a is erased. After the display shown in Figure 222 (d) is made, the Decisive Battle Reach will be performed.

In FIG. 222, an example of the presentation of the path to the ultimate battle that develops from the Western Army mode and corresponds to pre-reach presentation pattern 32 in which 10 character icons are displayed and the path develops into the Grand Battle Reach is described, but the same applies to the presentation of the path to the ultimate battle that develops from the Eastern Army mode and other pre-reach presentation patterns (see FIG. 200) that lead to the Grand Battle.

In this embodiment, in the Road to the Final Battle performance or the Road to the Ultimate Final Battle performance, the number of icon display images that are lit up in the Western Army icon display section and the Eastern Army icon display section corresponds to the "second half icon count" described above.

(The showdown reach production)
Next, the effects of the "showdown reach" will be described. Figures 223 and 224 are examples of display images for explaining the effects of the showdown reach in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

Using Figures 223 and 224, we will explain an example of a presentation corresponding to reach presentation patterns 4, 6, 12, and 14 (see Figure 200), in which a showdown reach is made after eight character icons are displayed.

Figure 223 (a) is an example of a display image when a showdown reach begins. As shown in Figure 223 (a) (and Figure 221 (h)), a text image indicating the number of character icons displayed in the Road to the Final Battle and Road to the Ultimate Showdown performances is continuously displayed in the upper display area 7a.

Figure 223 (b) is an example of a display image when the number of character icons displayed in the upper display area 7a is converted into the number of support icons displayed in the upper left corner of the display area of the display device 7. Note that the decorative pattern is displayed small and shifted to the lower right corner of the display area of the display device 7 so as not to spoil the character presentation.

Figure 223 (b) is an example of a display image when the number of character icons is converted and displayed as the number of support icons. As shown in Figure 223 (b), a display image is produced in which "8 people concentrated" is displayed as a text image indicating eight character icons in the upper display area 7a, which is converted and displayed as "Support x 8" as the number of support icons. Note that if "9 people concentrated" is displayed as a text image indicating nine character icons in the upper display area 7a, a display image is produced in which the number of support icons is converted and displayed as "Support x 9".

Figure 223 (c) is an example of the display image when an enemy character appears, following on from Figure 223 (b), when the eight character icons are converted and displayed as eight support icons.

Figure 223(d) is an example of a display image when an ally character is facing an enemy character and a support icon is displayed in the upper display area 7a. As shown in Figure 223(d), the upper display area 7a displays a support icon consisting of a "PUSH" character image to encourage the player to operate the performance button device 6310, and a face image (for example, the face of Western Army General A) corresponding to a character icon already displayed on the Road to the Decisive Battle or the Road to the Ultimate Decisive Battle.

Figure 224(e) is an example of a display image when an ally character is facing off against an enemy character, and when the effect button device 6310 is operated and a predetermined effect result is displayed in the upper display area 7a. In Figure 224(e), when a support icon is displayed in the upper display area 7a, the effect button device 6310 is operated and the word "opportunity" is displayed as the predetermined effect result. Note that the predetermined effect result is not limited to being "opportunity", and any of the following can be displayed based on the support icon display scenario (see Figure 207).

Figure 224(f) shows an example of a display image when an ally character is facing off against an enemy character, and is displayed when the effect button device 6310 is operated and the "Great Battle Icon" is displayed in the upper display area 7a. After the display shown in Figure 224(f) is displayed, the effect of the Great Battle Reach is performed.

Figure 224 (g) is an example of a display image when the support icon disappears and the ally character confronts the enemy character, displaying the final result. As shown in Figure 224 (h-1), if the ally character wins, it is a big win, and as shown in Figure 224 (h-2), if the ally character is defeated, it is a loss.

Note that in Figures 223 and 224, examples of presentations corresponding to reach presentation patterns 4, 6, 12, and 14, which perform a showdown reach, are explained, but the same applies to presentations of other reach presentation patterns (see Figure 200) which perform a showdown reach after nine character icons are displayed.

In this way, the presentation of the showdown reach in this embodiment can be controlled based on the number of character icons collected up until the showdown reach is reached (the presentation of the road to the showdown or the road to the ultimate showdown), making the game even more interesting.

(Lotus flower preview performance)
Next, the effect of the "Lotus Flower Notice" will be described. Figure 225 is an example of a display image for explaining the effect of the Lotus Flower Notice in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

Using Figure 225, we will explain an example of a lotus flower announcement presentation that corresponds to the announcement presentation pattern of the lotus flower success announcement (see Figure 208).

Figure 225 (a) is an example of a display image when a bud is displayed in advance during a fluctuation in the "Golden Hour Mode," which is a high probability non-time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 225(a), in the "Golden Hour Mode" which is a high probability non-time shortening game state, the following are displayed: a text image "Golden Hour" indicating the Golden Hour mode; a count display image "Jewel" which accumulates and counts the number of game balls that have entered and been paid out in the first large prize opening 6131 and the second large prize opening 6151 when in the right-hand hit state; and an operation instruction image "Right Hit" for performing a right-hand hit.

Figure 225 (b) is an example of a display image when the pre-change has ended but the bud continues to be displayed. In addition, the bud that has continued to be displayed since the pre-change will continue to be displayed when the change in the current change begins.

Here, the buds that have been continuously displayed since the pre-change will continue to be displayed from the pre-change to the small win game state to that change, even if the pre-change corresponds to a small win. Therefore, in the lotus flower announcement presentation of this embodiment, the small win game state that is likely to be entered when the game ball enters the second starting hole 6140 allows the player to continue enjoying the lotus flower announcement without interrupting the presentation.

Figure 225(c) is an example of a display image when the bud opens and is displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation started. The opening of this bud suggests that it will progress to the "door opening effect" shown in Figure 225(d).

Note that in Figure 225, an example of a lotus flower announcement performance corresponding to the preview performance pattern of a lotus flower success announcement is explained, but the same applies to the lotus flower announcement performance corresponding to the preview performance pattern of a lotus flower failure announcement (see Figure 208).

(Battle Reach Production)
Next, the effects of the "battle reach" will be described. Figures 226 and 227 are examples of display images for explaining the effects of the battle reach in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

Using Figures 226 and 227, we will explain an example of a battle reach presentation corresponding to the first symbol presentation patterns 3, 4, 8, and 9 (see Figure 201) in which the final operation mode of the presentation button device 6310 changes to the fourth operation mode or the fifth operation mode.

Figure 226 (a) is an example of a display image of a button promotion chance effect that is performed when a battle reach is started. In a battle reach, it is possible to perform a button promotion chance effect first.

As shown in FIG. 226(a), a "button operation icon" indicating the operation mode of the effect button device 6310 is displayed scrolling from left to right above the display area of the display device 7. In addition, a "effect button state image" indicating the current state of the operation mode of the effect button device 6310 is displayed in the center of the display area of the display device 7.

Figure 226 (b) is an example of a display image when the button operation icon is frozen and the operation mode of the effect button device 6310 changes.

As shown in FIG. 226(b), the upper display area 7a displays a frozen button operation icon for "Level 3 consecutive hits," which indicates the third operation mode of the effect button device 6310. Correspondingly, a change is made to the effect button state image displayed in the center of the display area of the display device 7, which indicates the state of the third operation mode of the effect button device 6310.

Figure 226(c) is an example of a display image when an ally character is facing off against an enemy boss.

As shown in FIG. 226(c), the upper display area 7a continuously displays the button operation icon for "Level 3 consecutive hits," which indicates the third operation mode of the effect button device 6310.

Figure 226(d) is an example of an image displayed when an attack by an ally character hits an enemy boss.

As shown in FIG. 226(d), when an attack by an ally character hits an enemy boss, the button operation icon displayed in the upper display area 7a rises by one level and changes to and is displayed as a "Level 4 One Strike" button operation icon indicating the fourth operation mode of the effect button device 6310. Note that if an attack by an ally character does not hit the enemy boss or if the enemy boss attacks an ally character, the button operation icon displayed in the upper display area 7a does not change.

Figure 227 (e) is an example of a display image when the operation mode of the effect button device 6310 changes, following Figure 226 (d).

As shown in FIG. 226(e), the button operation icon displayed in the upper display area 7a has changed to the "Level 4 One Strike" button operation icon, and the effect button state image indicating the fourth operation mode of the effect button device 6310 is displayed in the center of the display area of the display device 7.

Figure 227 (f-1) shows an example of a display image when the player operates the effect button device 6310 after repeated battles between an ally character and an enemy boss and the operation mode of the effect button device 6310 finally reaches the fourth operation mode.

Figure 227 (f-2) shows an example of a display image when the player operates the effect button device 6310 after repeated battles between an ally character and an enemy boss and the operation mode of the effect button device 6310 finally reaches the fifth operation mode.

Figure 227 (g-1) is an example of a display image in which the player operates the effect button device 6310 from the state of Figure 227 (f-1) or Figure 227 (f-1), causing the group of effect props 58 (see Figure 173) to fall (not shown), indicating a jackpot.

Figure 227 (g-2) is an example of a display image showing that when the player operates the effect button device 6310 from the state of Figure 227 (f-1) or Figure 227 (f-1), the group of effect props 58 (see Figure 173) does not fall (not shown), resulting in a miss.

Note that in Figures 226 and 227, an example of the battle reach presentation corresponding to first pattern presentation patterns 3, 4, 8, and 9 is explained, but the same applies to the battle reach presentation corresponding to first pattern presentation patterns 2 and 7 (see Figure 201).

In this way, the battle reach presentation of this embodiment changes the operation mode of the presentation button device 6310 depending on the result of the presentation content, so that the player can be aroused by the change in the operation mode of the presentation button device 6310 (growth of the presentation button) that he or she will now be directly operating, thereby making the game even more interesting.

[8-11. Configuration of operation performance time and reception time]
Next, an explanation will be given of the operation presentation time of the road to the decisive battle and the reception time of the presentation button device 6310. Fig. 228 is an example of a configuration diagram for explaining the configuration of the operation presentation time of the road to the decisive battle and the reception time of the presentation button device in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

Figure 228 (1) is a diagram explaining the composition of the operation presentation time for Road to the Final Battle.

As shown in FIG. 228 (1), the operation time of the button device 6310 once in the Road to the Final Battle performance is composed of 4 seconds, which is the sum of the 3 second reception time and the 1 second display time for displaying a specified icon depending on the operation result, and the "operation performance time of the Road to the Final Battle" is set to 20 seconds so that the button device 6310 can be operated 5 times. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 220 and FIG. 221, the "countdown display image" that counts down the number of seconds until the "operation performance time of the Road to the Final Battle" ends indicates the maximum number of times the button device 6310 can be operated. This is also true in the Road to the Extreme Final Battle performance, although the number of operations is different.

In addition, if the effect button device 6310 is operated within the reception time, a specified icon will continue to be displayed from the time of operation until the end of the display time, and if the effect button device 6310 is not operated within the reception time, the specified icon will be displayed from the end of the reception time until the end of the display time.

When the button device 6310 is operated within such a reception time, the reception time ends and a specific image is displayed from the time of the operation (a specific performance is performed). This type of performance related to the button device 6310 is called a "single operation performance", and the same is true for the performance on the road to the ultimate showdown.

Figure 228 (2a) is a diagram explaining the configuration of the reception time for a single operation performance.

As shown in FIG. 228 (2a), the reception time of the effect button device 6310 for a single operation effect is set such that a first period (e.g., 3 frames, 3/60 seconds, etc.) immediately after the start of the reception time is set as a "start invalid period" during which the operation of the effect button device 6310 is judged to be invalid, a second period (e.g., 3 frames, 3/60 seconds, etc.) immediately before the end of the reception time is set as an "end invalid period" during which the operation of the effect button device 6310 is judged to be invalid, and the period from the "start invalid period" to the "end invalid period" is set as a "valid period" during which the operation of the effect button device 6310 is judged to be valid.

As shown in FIG. 228 (2b), the "start invalid period" and "end invalid period" may not be included in the reception time, and the period immediately before the start of the reception time may be set as the "start invalid period", or the period immediately after the end of the reception time may be set as the "end invalid period". In this case, the reception time directly corresponds to the "valid time".

In contrast to this, in the case of "repeated press operation effects (for example, button challenge announcements, door opening effects, battle reach when the operation mode of the effect button device 6310 finally reaches the third operation mode (Level 3 repeated presses), etc.)" in which the reception time does not end even if the effect button device 6310 is operated within the reception time, and the effect button device 6310 can be operated multiple times within the reception time, the configuration of the reception time is different.

Figure 228 (3) is a diagram explaining the configuration of the reception time for the rapid-fire operation effect.

As shown in FIG. 228 (3), the acceptance time for the repeated hit operation effect is set to a "start invalid period," an "end invalid period," and an "effective period (initial)," which is the same as the configuration of the acceptance time for the single operation effect.

Then, if the effect button device 6310 is operated within the "valid period (initial)", the sub-CPU 301 will set a new "invalid operation period" during which the operation of the effect button device 6310 will be determined to be invalid for a specified period of time after the operation.

This "invalid operation period" is set by the sub-CPU 301 in accordance with the content of the effect triggered by the operation of the effect button device 6310. For example, when the effect is progressing, the effect button device 6310 vibrates and a third period (e.g., 5 frames, 5/60 seconds, etc.) is set as the "invalid operation period". In contrast, when the effect is not progressing, the effect button device 6310 does not vibrate and a fourth period (e.g., 4 frames, 4/60 seconds, etc.) that is shorter than the third period is set as the "invalid operation period".

In this way, in the rapid-fire operation performance, different periods are set depending on the performance content triggered by the operation of the performance button device 6310, so that the performance content triggered by the operation of the performance button device 6310 can be reliably performed.

[8-12. Signals output to outside the machine]
Next, we will explain the signals output from the external terminal board 184 (see Figure 6) to outside the sixth pachinko game machine (for example, the hall computer 186 (see Figure 6), the island computer (not shown) provided on each island).

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 generates "External Information 1" to "External Information 8" in the game state designation parameter setting process, and outputs the generated "External Information 1" to "External Information 8" to the external terminal board 184. The external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) has CH1 to CH12 as connectors for outputting signals to the outside of the sixth pachinko game machine, just like the first pachinko game machine. The signals output from each CH of the external terminal board 184 to the outside of the sixth pachinko game machine are, for example, various signals such as "prize ball information 1", "door/frame open", "external information 1" to "external information 8", "prize ball information 2" and "security". However, the types of signals output from each CH to the outside of the sixth pachinko game machine are not limited to these, and there may be other signals output to the outside of the machine in addition to these signals, or the sixth pachinko game machine may be configured not to output any of these signals.

Figure 229 is a table showing an example of the output conditions of signals output to the outside of the sixth pachinko gaming machine. In the sixth pachinko gaming machine, similar to the first pachinko gaming machine (see Figure 65), various signals of "prize ball information 1", "door/frame open", "external information 1" to "external information 8", "prize ball information 2" and "security" are output to the outside of the sixth pachinko gaming machine from each CH. However, compared to the first pachinko gaming machine, the sixth pachinko gaming machine differs in part in the output conditions of the "external information 3" signal output from CH3 of the connector. The output conditions of "external information 3" etc. are explained below.

As shown in FIG. 229, "External Information 3" is "output during all jackpots, during special probability periods, and during time-saving periods" just like the first pachinko game machine, and in addition, a new output condition has been added that "the special symbols that have started to change during special probability periods are output until the change ends."

Here, in a "simultaneous variable machine" in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed in parallel, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is started from a specific game state consisting of a high probability time-saving game state, a high probability non-time-saving game state, and a low probability time-saving game state. However, when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol ends, the game state may be shifted to the normal game state by the special symbol whose variable display ends first, and an error case may occur in which the special symbol whose variable display ends later is judged to be a jackpot or a miss in the normal game state. By adding the above-mentioned new output condition to "external information 3", the occurrence of the above-mentioned error case is eliminated, and in the "simultaneous variable machine", the number of jackpots and consecutive wins that were triggered by the specific game state can be accurately measured. This will be specifically explained using the timing chart of the signal of "external information 3" as an example.

Figure 230 is an example of a timing chart of the "External Information 3" signal, one of the signals output to the outside of the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

Figure 230 illustrates, from top to bottom, the variable display and stopped display of the first special symbol, the variable display and stopped display of the second special symbol, the output and stopping of external information 3, and the transition of the game state.

As shown in FIG. 230, in a high probability non-time-saving game state, which is one of the specific game states, the first special symbol starts variable display on the 119th spin after the end of the jackpot game state. After that, in a high probability non-time-saving game state, the second special symbol starts variable display on the 120th spin after the end of the jackpot game state.

The second special symbol will stop changing and will be displayed before the first special symbol. When this second special symbol stops, the game state will transition from the high probability non-time-saving game state to the normal game state.

The first special symbol is displayed variably in the high probability non-time-saving play state, but is displayed stationary in the normal play state.

Even if the game transitions from a high probability non-time-saving game state to a normal game state, external information 3 will continue to be output until the variable display of the first special symbol ends due to the new output condition of "outputting the special symbol that started to change during the high probability game state until that change ends."

As a result, even if a jackpot occurs with the first special symbol on the 119th spin, it can be counted as the number of jackpots triggered by a specific game state.

In this way, in the sixth pachinko game machine, as explained in FIG. 178 etc., the configuration of the game board unit (see FIG. 173), the lottery contents of the special symbols (see FIG. 175), the rules for transition to the game state (see FIG. 177), etc. are organically linked, so that at the end of all jackpot game states, the game transitions to a "(first half) high probability time-limited game state" where the expectation of consecutive jackpots is high, and when the high probability game state ends and the expectation of consecutive jackpots decreases, the game transitions to a "(second half) high probability non-time-limited game state: small jackpot rush", and in the "high probability non-time-limited game state: small jackpot rush" to which the game is transitioned, the player can expect the payout of game balls as well as the second special symbol jackpot, which guarantees transition to the next jackpot game state, creating unprecedented gameplay and improving the excitement of the game.

In addition, in the sixth pachinko gaming machine, as explained in FIG. 198 etc., when a Yakuza icon is displayed by performing a Sakura Accumulation Notice, it progresses to the Road to Extreme Showdown performance, and when five character icons are collected by performing a pseudo consecutive performance, it progresses to the Road to the Showdown performance. Then, when it progresses to the Road to Extreme Showdown performance or the Road to the Showdown performance, it is possible to execute a specific performance of the same type (a performance aiming to collect ten character icons). Therefore, by linking various performances, it is possible to further increase the excitement of the game.

In the sixth pachinko game machine, the "cherry blossom accumulation notice" is composed of a stage effect in which cherry blossoms are accumulated in stages, and an icon display effect in which the accumulated cherry blossoms are released to display a predetermined number of "character icons" or "Yakuza icons". The stage effect of the cherry blossom accumulation notice is configured to be executable throughout the pre-variation and the actual variation, and the icon display effect of the cherry blossom accumulation notice is configured to be executable during the actual variation. The stage effect of the cherry blossom accumulation notice is set so that the more cherry blossoms are accumulated, the higher the expectation of the "Yakuza icon" being displayed and the number of "character icons" being displayed.
For this reason, the "Cherry Blossom Accumulation Notice" of this embodiment gradually increases the sense of anticipation for the game by developing a stage-by-stage presentation across the pre-change and the change itself (or just the change itself), and the display results also create interest, making the game even more enjoyable.

In the sixth pachinko game machine, the "pseudo consecutive performance" is performed when any one of a plurality of character icons stops, and each time the pseudo consecutive performance is performed, it is possible to collect one or more character icons. When five character icons are collected, the performance progresses to the Road to the Final Battle. The content of the upcoming game is also suggested by the number of character icons collected, the type of character icons, the order in which the character icons are collected (display order), and the like.
For this reason, the "pseudo consecutive performance" of this embodiment adds new interest not only in whether or not a re-change occurs, but also in the number of character icons displayed during a re-change, the type of character icons, the display order of the character icons, etc., thereby making the game even more enjoyable.

In the sixth pachinko game machine, the "Road to the Final Battle" and "Road to the Ultimate Final Battle" are effects that allow the player to aim to collect 10 character icons by operating the effect button device 6310 before a predetermined time has elapsed. When 10 character icons are collected, the game progresses to the Great Final Battle Reach, which has the highest expectation of a big win. In addition, the number of character icons to be collected, the type of character icons, the order in which the character icons are collected (display order), and the like can suggest the content of the game to come.
For this reason, the "Road to the Final Battle Presentation" and "Road to the Ultimate Final Battle Presentation" of this embodiment encourage the player to actively participate in the game (by operating the presentation button device 6310), thereby making the game even more interesting.

In addition, in the sixth pachinko game machine, the "Confrontation Reach" converts the character icons collected up until the Confrontation Reach (the Road to the Final Battle performance or the Road to the Ultimate Final Battle) into support icons, and a performance using the support icons can be performed by operating the performance button device 6310.
Therefore, in the "showdown reach" of this embodiment, operation effects can be performed using the icons collected up until the showdown reach, which can further increase the entertainment value of the game.

In addition, in the sixth pachinko game machine, the "lotus flower notice" is configured to be executable throughout the pre-variation and the relevant variation, and even if the pre-variation is a variation corresponding to a small win, it is configured to be continuously displayed from the pre-variation through the small win game state to the relevant variation.
For this reason, in this embodiment of the invention, the "Lotus Flower Notice" allows the player to continue enjoying the Lotus Flower Notice without interrupting the presentation by entering a small win game state which is likely to occur when the game ball enters the second starting hole 6140.

In addition, in the sixth pachinko gaming machine, the "battle reach" is an effect in which the operation mode of the effect button device 6310 is changed depending on the result of the effect content.
For this reason, the "Battle Reach" of this embodiment can generate new interest in the change in the operation mode of the effect button device 6310, which the player will now be directly operating (the growth of the effect button), thereby making the game even more enjoyable.

(others)
The sixth pachinko gaming machine described above can apply the techniques of each embodiment, including modified examples. The above-mentioned embodiment does not limit the contents of the present invention, and modifications can be made to the extent that they do not deviate from the scope of the claims.

Furthermore, the effects described in the sixth pachinko gaming machine are merely a list of the most favorable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in each embodiment of the present invention.

Furthermore, the above [4. Expansion Example] can also be applied to the sixth pachinko gaming machine, as long as there is no inconsistency in its gameplay or control.

[9. The 7th Pachinko Game Machine]
Next, the seventh pachinko gaming machine will be described. The seventh pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine called a one-type two-type mixed machine, like the third pachinko gaming machine. The seventh pachinko gaming machine is different from the third pachinko gaming machine in terms of gameplay and presentation content, and accordingly, the configuration of various components arranged in the game area is also partially different.

The seventh pachinko gaming machine, like the third pachinko gaming machine, is a priority variable machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed in parallel, and the start condition of the second special symbol is established with priority over the start condition of the first special symbol. However, it is not limited to this, and may be a sequential variable machine as described above.

Hereinafter, when explaining the seventh pachinko gaming machine, the same components as those in the first pachinko gaming machine will be given the same symbols and step numbers, and detailed explanations of their configuration and processing will be omitted.

In this embodiment, "entering a game ball" into an entry port (e.g., a starting port or a big prize entry port) that can give the player a certain benefit (payout of game balls, transition of game state) is also referred to as "winning" as appropriate. Also, in this embodiment, the "variable display" of a pattern is a concept that includes both a "variable display" in which the pattern changes and is displayed, and a "stationary display" in which the pattern stops and is displayed, and the operation from the start of the variable display to the stationary display is referred to as one "variable display."

[9-1. Game board unit]
A game board unit 7010 provided in the seventh pachinko game machine will be described with reference to Fig. 231. This game board unit 7010 is also disposed in front of the base door 3 (see Fig. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see Fig. 2) like the first pachinko game machine.

Figure 231 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit 7010 equipped in a seventh pachinko game machine. The game board unit 7010 has a game panel 7100 as a game board, various components are arranged on the game panel 7100, and a game area 105 is formed on the front side of the game panel 7100, in which the released game balls can roll and flow down.

As shown in FIG. 231, the game board unit 7010 of the seventh pachinko gaming machine differs from the first pachinko gaming machine mainly in the configuration and arrangement of the passing gate 7126, the second starting port 7140, the normal electric role unit 7145, the first special electric role unit 7130, and the second special electric role unit 7150. The configuration and arrangement of each of these are explained below.

The first start hole 7120 located in the play area 105 of the seventh pachinko game machine is functionally the same as the first start hole 120 located in the play area 105 of the first pachinko game machine, but because of its relationship with the second start hole 7140, it will be explained again using a different reference number from that of the first pachinko game machine.

(Passing gate)
The passing gate 7126 is disposed above a normal electric role unit 7145 described later in the right side area 107, and allows game balls hit from the right to pass through (game balls hit from the left have difficulty or cannot pass through). The passing gate 7126 is provided with a passing gate switch 7127 (see FIG. 232 described later) that detects the passage of a game ball through the passing gate 7126.

When a game ball passes through the passing gate 7126, it is used for the normal symbol lottery (the process of determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol) and for the variable display of normal symbols. In this embodiment, even if a game ball passes through the passing gate 7126, no prize ball is paid out, but a predetermined prize ball (for example, one game ball) may be paid out.

The passing gate 7126 may also function as a trigger for activating a consecutive operation device for special features. Assuming that the condition device is in operation (the special symbol that will result in a jackpot is displayed frozen), the passing gate 7126 may activate the consecutive operation device for special features, causing a transition to a jackpot gaming state.

(First starting point)
The first starting hole 7120 is disposed in the game area 105 below the display area of the display device 7, and is configured so that game balls hit to the left can enter the hole, and game nails or the like make it difficult or impossible for game balls hit to the right to enter the hole. The first starting hole 7120 is provided with a first starting hole switch 7121 (see FIG. 232 described later) that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 7120.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 7120, a first special symbol lottery (a process for determining whether the first special symbol is a winning symbol), a variable display of the first special symbol, and a prize ball for the first starting hole (e.g., three game balls) are paid out. The process after the game ball enters the first starting hole 7120 will be described in detail later.

(Second starting hole)
The second starting hole 7140 is located in the right side area 107 below (downstream) the passing gate 7126 described later, and is provided in a normal electric role unit 7145 described later, so that game balls hit to the right can enter the hole (game balls hit to the left are difficult or impossible to enter the hole). The second starting hole 7140 is provided with a second starting hole switch 7141 (see FIG. 232 described later) that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 7140.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second starting opening 7140 is located below (downstream of) the passing gate 7126, so that a game ball that has passed through the passing gate 7126 can enter the second starting opening 7140 when the normal electric device 7146 described below is in operation.

When a game ball enters the second starting hole 7140, a second special symbol lottery (a process for determining whether the second special symbol is a winning symbol), a variable display of the second special symbol, and a prize ball for the second starting hole (for example, one game ball) are paid out. The process after the game ball enters the second starting hole 7140 will be described in detail later.

(Normal electric role unit)
The normal electric role unit 7145 is located in the right area 107 below (downstream of) the passing gate 7126, and is located so that the game ball hit to the right can pass through it. The normal electric role unit 7145 is a unit body that integrates the second start hole 7140, the second start hole switch 7141 that detects the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 7140, and the normal electric role 7146.

The normal electric device 7146 is equipped with a protruding plate-type normal power shutter 7147 that can move forward and backward, and a normal power solenoid 7148 (see FIG. 232 described below) that operates the normal power shutter 7147. The normal electric device 7146, i.e., the normal power shutter 7147, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy to insert a game ball into the second starting hole 7140, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to insert a game ball into the second starting hole 7140.

Specifically, the normal power shutter 7147 is composed of a substantially triangular ball entry prevention section disposed near the entrance of the second starting port 7140 and a flat ball entry guidance section inclined toward the second starting port 7140. When the normal power shutter 7147 is in the closed state, the substantially triangular ball entry prevention section is located in an opposing area facing the entrance of the second starting port 7140 and prevents balls from entering the second starting port 7140, and the flat ball entry guidance section is embedded in the surface of the game panel 7100 and allows game balls to flow downward without accepting game balls flowing down into the right side area 107. On the other hand, when the normal power shutter 7147 is in the open state, the approximately triangular ball entry prevention section is located in an avoidance area that does not face the entrance of the second starting hole 7140, and does not hinder the entry of balls into the second starting hole 7140, and the flat ball entry guidance section protrudes from the surface of the game panel 7100 to receive game balls flowing down to the right area 107 and guide the received game balls to the second starting hole 7140. Note that instead of the above-mentioned normal power shutter 7147 that can move forward and backward, a movable member called a so-called electric chute may be used.

In addition, when the second starting hole 7140 is open and a specified number of game balls (e.g., one) for normal power enter the hole, the normal electric device 7146 closes the second starting hole 7140 even if the opening time has not elapsed.

(First special electric feature unit)
The first special electric role unit 7130 is disposed below (downstream) the pass gate 7126, the normal electric role unit 7145, and the second special electric role unit 7150 described later in the right area 107. The first special electric role unit 7130 may be provided upstream of at least one of the pass gate 7126, the normal electric role unit 7145, and the second special electric role unit 7150 described later, or may be provided in the left area 106.

The first special electric device unit 7130 is a unitary body that integrates a first large prize opening 7131, a first large prize opening count switch 7132 (see FIG. 232 described below) that detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 7131, a first special electric shutter 7134 that can move back and forth, and a first special electric solenoid 7135 (see FIG. 232 described below) that operates the first special electric shutter 7134.

The first large prize opening 7131 is an opening that opens when a jackpot is hit, and the maximum number of winning balls that can enter the first large prize opening 7131 in one round of a jackpot is set (for example, 7 balls). Each time a ball enters the first large prize opening 7131, prize balls for the first large prize opening (for example, 15 game balls) are paid out.

The first large prize opening 7131 transitions from a closed state to an open state in the first route when a special stop display mode is derived indicating that the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a "big hit" and in the second route when a specific stop display mode is derived indicating that the result of the special pattern determination is a "small hit" and the second large prize opening 7151 opens, and a game ball that enters the opened second large prize opening 7151 enters the V prize opening within the second large prize opening 7151.

The first special electric shutter 7134 is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the first large winning opening 7131, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the first large winning opening 7131, by the operation of the first special electric solenoid 7135 (see Figure 232 described below).

Specifically, the first special electric shutter 7134 is composed of an opening and closing door with a pivot support at the bottom. When the first special electric shutter 7134 is in the open state, the opening and closing door falls to the front side to open the first large winning opening 7131, and receives game balls flowing down into the right side area 107 and guides the received game balls to the first large winning opening 7131. On the other hand, when the first special electric shutter 7134 is in the closed state, the opening and closing door is inverted to close the first large winning opening 7131, making it impossible or difficult for game balls to enter the first large winning opening 7131.

(Second special electric feature unit)
The second special electric role unit 7150 is provided below (downstream) the passing gate 7126 and the normal electric role unit 7145 in the right area 107. The second special electric role unit 7150 may be provided upstream of at least one of the passing gate 7126 or the normal electric role unit 7145, or may be provided in the left area 106.

The second special electric device unit 7150 includes a second large prize opening 7151 that is opened to allow game balls to enter the inside of the second special electric device unit 7150, a second large prize opening count switch 7152 that detects the entry of game balls into the second large prize opening 7151, a second special electric shutter 7154 that can open and close the second large prize opening 7151, a second special electric solenoid 7155 (see FIG. 232 described below) that operates the second special electric shutter 7154 to open and close the second large prize opening 7151, and a second special electric solenoid 7155 that operates the second special electric shutter 7154 to open and close the second large prize opening 7151. It is a unit that integrates a V winning opening 7156 through which game balls that enter the V winning opening 7156 can pass, a V winning opening switch 7157 that detects when a game ball has passed through the V winning opening 7156, a losing opening 7158 through which game balls that entered the second large winning opening 7151 but did not enter the V winning opening 7156 can pass, a V shutter 7159 that opens and closes the V winning opening 7156, and a V shutter solenoid 7160 (see FIG. 232 described below) that operates the V shutter 7159 to open and close the V winning opening 7156.

The second large prize opening 7151 is an opening that opens when a small win occurs, and the maximum number of winning balls that can enter the second large prize opening 7151 in one small win (for example, 10 balls) is specified. Each time one game ball enters this second large prize opening 7151, prize balls (for example, 10 game balls) for the second large prize opening are paid out.

The second special electric shutter 7154 is made of a protruding plate-shaped member that can move forward and backward, and is configured so that by operating the second special electric solenoid 7155 (see Figure 232 described below), the second special electric shutter 7154 can move forward to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second large winning opening 7151, and the second special electric shutter 7154 can move backward to an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second large winning opening 7151.

The V winning hole 7156 is a winning hole that can be opened and closed by the V shutter 7159, and is also a winning hole through which the game ball passes, triggering control of the jackpot game state via the second route described above.

When the game is controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route, the opening of the second large prize opening 7151 when the game ball passes through the V prize opening 7156 is counted as the first round, and after the game ball passes through the V prize opening 7156 (from the second round onwards), a round game is executed in which the first large prize opening 7131 transitions from a closed state to an open state. Note that when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route, a round game in which the second large prize opening 7151 transitions from a closed state to an open state may be executed for a predetermined number of rounds, even after the game ball passes through the V prize opening 7156 (from the second round onwards).

In addition, for example, a V entry port may be provided inside the first large entry port 7131, so that there is one V entry port and one attacker that is opened in the big win game state. In this case, when a stop display mode indicating a "small win" is derived, the first large entry port 7131 is opened, and when a game ball enters the V entry port provided inside the first large entry port 7131, the game is controlled to the big win game state (the big win game state via the second route).

The losing port 7158 is configured to allow game balls that have entered the second large winning port 7151 but have not passed through the V winning port 7156 to enter (pass through). Game balls that pass through the losing port 7158 are ejected outside the machine. Note that if all game balls that have entered the second large winning port 7151 pass through the losing port 7158 and no game balls pass through the V winning port 7156, the game will end without being controlled to a jackpot game state.

The V-shutter 7159 is configured to be able to transition between a closed state in which it is impossible (or difficult) for game balls to pass through the V-entry opening 7156, and an open state in which it is possible (or easy) for game balls to pass through the V-entry opening 7156, by the operation of the V-shutter solenoid 7160 (see Figure 232 described below).

[9-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the seventh pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 232. Fig. 232 is an example of a block diagram showing the control circuit of the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 232, the seventh pachinko gaming machine, like the first pachinko gaming machine, is mainly composed of a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 300 that controls the presentation according to the progress of the game, a payout/launch control circuit 400, and a power supply circuit 450.

However, the seventh pachinko gaming machine differs from the first pachinko gaming machine in some respects in the configuration of the devices connected to the main control circuit 200 and the sub-control circuit 300. The configuration and layout of each are explained below.

[9-2-1. Main control circuit]
Compared to the first pachinko game machine, the main control circuit 200 has slightly different configurations in the normal power solenoid 7148, the first special power solenoid 7135, the second special power solenoid 7155, the V shutter solenoid 7160, the first start port switch 7121, the second start port switch 7141, the passing gate switch 7127, the first large prize port count switch 7132, the second large prize port count switch 7152, and the V prize port switch 7157 which are connected to the main control circuit 200.

(Solenoid for general purpose)
The normal power solenoid 7148 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the normal power shutter 7147. When the normal power solenoid 7148 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it advances the normal power shutter 7147 forward to open the second starting port 7140, and when it is not energized (OFF) by the main CPU 201, it moves the normal power shutter 7147 backward to close the second starting port 7140.

(First special solenoid)
The first special electric solenoid 7135 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the first special electric shutter 7134, which is an opening and closing door. When the first special electric solenoid 7135 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it tilts the first special electric shutter 7134 forward to open the first large prize opening 7131, and when it is not energized (OFF) by the main CPU 201, it inverts the first special electric shutter 7134 backward to close the first large prize opening 7131.

(Second special solenoid)
The second special electric solenoid 7155 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the second special electric shutter 7154. When the main CPU 201 energizes the second special electric solenoid 7155 (ON), the second special electric solenoid 7155 moves the second special electric shutter 7154 backward to open the second large winning opening 7151, and when the main CPU 201 does not energize the second special electric solenoid 7155 (OFF), the second special electric shutter 7154 advances forward to close the second large winning opening 7151.

(Solenoid for V-shutter)
The V-shutter solenoid 7160 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the V-shutter 7159. When the V-shutter solenoid 7160 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it moves the V-shutter 7159 backward to open the V-winning opening 7156, and when it is not energized (OFF) by the main CPU 201, it moves the V-shutter 7159 forward to close the V-winning opening 7156. In addition, in this embodiment, the V-shutter solenoid 7160 operates in conjunction with the opening of the second large winning opening 7151 to open the V-winning opening 7156. That is, the V-shutter opening 7156 is in an open state when the second large winning opening 7151 is opened, and when a game ball enters the second large winning opening 7151, it will also pass through the V-winning opening 7156 in principle.

(First start switch)
The first start hole switch 7121 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 7120.

When the first start hole switch 7121 detects the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 7120, the main CPU 201 determines that the first start condition is met and acquires start information for the first special symbol (random number value for determining a jackpot, random number value for a symbol, random number value for determining a reach, random number value for selecting a performance, etc.). The acquired start information for the first special symbol is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (first special symbol start memory area (1) to first special symbol start memory area (4) in order) of the main RAM 203 up to the "reserved number of first special symbols (e.g., four)," and when the judgment start condition for the first special symbol (e.g., the special electric role is not in operation, the variable display of the special symbol is not being performed, etc.) is met, it is used for the hit judgment process for the first special symbol and the variable display of the first special symbol. In addition, when the first start hole switch 7121 detects the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 7120, the main CPU 201 instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of the prize balls for the first start hole (e.g., three game balls).

(Second start switch)
The second start hole switch 7141 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 7140.

When the second start hole switch 7141 detects the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 7140, the main CPU 201 determines that the second start condition is established and acquires start information for the second special symbol (random number value for jackpot determination, random number value for symbol, random number value for reach determination, random number value for effect selection, etc.). The acquired start information for the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol start memory area (second special symbol start memory area (1) to second special symbol start memory area (3) in order) of the main RAM 203 up to the "reserved number of second special symbols (e.g., 3)," and when the determination start condition for the second special symbol (e.g., the special electric role is not in operation, the variable display of the special symbol is not being performed, etc.) is established, it is used for the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. In addition, when the second start port switch 7141 detects the entry of a game ball into the second start port 7140, the main CPU 201 instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of a prize ball (e.g., one game ball) for the second start port.

In addition, in the embodiment, the winning judgment process for the first special pattern based on the start information of the first special pattern is also called the "lottery for the first special pattern," and the winning judgment process for the second special pattern based on the start information of the second special pattern is also called the "lottery for the second special pattern," and the lottery for the first special pattern and the lottery for the second special pattern are collectively called the "lottery for the special patterns."

(Passing gate switch)
The passing gate switch 7127 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the passage of a game ball through the passing gate 7126.

When the pass gate switch 7127 detects the passage of a game ball through the pass gate 7126, the main CPU 201 acquires the start information of the normal symbol (random number value for determining whether the normal symbol is a hit, random number value of the normal symbol, etc.). The acquired start information of the normal symbol is stored in the normal symbol start memory area (normal symbol start memory area (1) to normal symbol start memory area (4) in order) of the main RAM 203 up to the "reserved number of normal symbols (for example, 4)". When the normal symbol judgment start condition (for example, the normal electric role is not in operation, the variable display of the normal symbol is not being performed, etc.) is met, it is used for the normal symbol lottery (normal symbol hit judgment process) and the variable display of the normal symbol. Note that even if the pass gate switch 7127 detects the passage of a game ball through the pass gate 7126, the prize ball is not paid out.

(First prize slot count switch)
The first large prize opening count switch 7132 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 7131. When the first large prize opening count switch 7132 detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 7131, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls that have entered the first large prize opening 7131 per round, and instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of prize balls for the first large prize opening (e.g., 15 game balls).

(Second major prize slot count switch)
The second large prize opening count switch 7152 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of game balls into the second large prize opening 7151. When the second large prize opening count switch 7152 detects the entry of game balls into the second large prize opening 7151, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls that have entered the second large prize opening 7151 and instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of prize balls for the second large prize opening (e.g., 10 game balls).

(V prize entry switch)
The V winning hole switch 7157 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the passage of a game ball into the V winning hole 7156. When the V winning hole switch 7157 detects the entry of a game ball into the V winning hole 7156, the main CPU 201 performs control to transition to a big win game state. Note that even if the V winning hole switch 7157 detects the passage of a game ball into the V winning hole 7156, no prize balls are paid out.

[9-2-2. Sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 300, like the first pachinko game machine, is equipped with a sub-CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, a sound control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, a gimmick control circuit 307 and a command input port 308, but differs in that it further comprises a button control circuit 310 and a performance button 54.
(Button Control Circuit 310)
The button control circuit 310 is a circuit for driving the effect button 54. In other words, the button control circuit 310 is a circuit for changing the operation mode of the effect button 54 and vibrating the effect button 54. The button control circuit 310 drives the effect button 54 in response to a drive command from the sub-CPU 301.

The button control circuit 310 is also a circuit for inputting an operation signal related to a player's operation detected by the effect button 54. When the button control circuit 310 inputs an operation signal from the effect button 54, it outputs predetermined operation information to the sub-CPU 301.

[9-3. Basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the seventh pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Figures 233 to 245. The seventh pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function will be omitted below.

In the seventh pachinko gaming machine, although the probability variable control is not executed, a time-saving gaming state in which the time-saving control is executed and a normal gaming state in which the time-saving control is not executed are prepared, and the main CPU 201 is capable of progressing the game in the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. Note that, although the probability variable control is not executed in this seventh pachinko gaming machine, this is not essential, and it is also possible to execute the probability variable control by setting the probability variable flag on depending on the type of jackpot, etc., for example.

In this embodiment, in a general normal game state (the first normal game state described later), left-handed play is generally considered to be the normal game mode, while right-handed play is the normal game mode in the time-saving game state A and the time-saving game state B. When the time-saving game state A and the time-saving game state B are not differentiated, the time-saving game state A and the time-saving game state B are collectively referred to simply as the "time-saving game state." The sub-CPU 301 displays the play style that is considered to be the normal game mode, for example, in the display area of the display device 7.

[9-3-1. Special symbol winning judgment table]
233 is an example of a special symbol winning judgment table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol winning judgment table shown in FIG. 233 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table for determining whether a hit is a "big hit", "small hit" or "miss".

In the special symbol hit determination table, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a hit that is determined to be a "hit" or a "miss" and the corresponding hit/miss determination value data (hit determination value data, miss determination value data) is specified as the data used in the hit determination process of the first special symbol executed based on the ball entering the first starting hole 7120. In addition, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a hit that is determined to be a "hit", a "minor hit" or a "miss" and the corresponding hit/miss determination value data (hit determination value data, minor hit determination value data, miss determination value data) is specified as the data used in the hit determination process of the second special symbol executed based on the ball entering the second starting hole 7140. In addition, the total random number value of the random number value for determining a hit is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In other words, the random number value for determining a hit is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

As shown in FIG. 233, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 7120, the main CPU 201 determines the result of the special symbol hit determination process as a "big hit" with a selection rate of about 1/199.8 based on the hit determination process of the first special symbol using the random number value for the hit determination of the first special symbol, and determines the result as a "miss" otherwise. Also, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 7140, the main CPU 201 determines the result of the special symbol hit determination process as a "big hit" with a selection rate of about 1/199.8 based on the hit determination process of the second special symbol using the random number value for the hit determination of the second special symbol, and determines the result as a "miss" otherwise.

The range (width) of the random numbers that determine a "jackpot", i.e., the selection rate, is not limited to the above values and can be freely modified as needed.

In addition, the system may be configured so that a "small win" is determined when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed, but if a "small win" is determined, it is preferable to set a relatively low selection rate for the "small win" so that the determination made in the hit determination process for the second special symbol is more favorable than the determination made in the hit determination process for the first special symbol.

In addition, when the hit determination process for the first special symbol or the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed, a "time-saving hit" that transitions directly to a time-saving game state (C time-saving game state) without transitioning to a jackpot game state may be determined.

In addition, if the seventh pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, the selection rate of a big win and/or a small win may be set to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting. However, even if the seventh pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable that the selection rate of a time-saving win be set to a common probability for all settings.

In addition to or instead of changing the selection rate of a big win or a small win according to the set value, for example, the opening frequency or opening time of the V winning port 7156 may be changed for each set value to change the passage rate to the V winning port 7156, or the number of times the time-saving continuation may be changed for each set value. In other words, by adopting one or more of the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the probability of a big win, the probability of a small win, the opening frequency of the V winning port 7156 (i.e. the operation frequency of the second special electric shutter 7154), the opening time, and the number of times the time-saving continuation may be changed, the expected value controlled for the big win game state may be configured to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting.

[9-3-2. Special symbol determination table]
234 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 234 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is a table that determines the "selected symbol information" and "symbol designation command" that determine the special symbol that will be displayed in a stopped state.

The "selection symbol command" is a command for specifying the winning symbol determined according to the type of win when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a win, and the "symbol designation command" is a command for specifying the special symbol that will be displayed when it stops.

The special symbol determination table specifies the type of special symbol, the winning/losing determination value data described above, and the symbol random number value of the special symbol obtained when the game ball enters the first starting hole 7120 or the second starting hole 7140 in association with a "select symbol command" and a "symbol designation command." The symbol random number value of the special symbol is selected from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 234, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 0 and 89, the main CPU 201 determines "z1" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Also, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 90 and 99, the main CPU 201 determines "z2" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

In this way, in this embodiment, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the selected symbol command is likely to be determined in the order of "z2" < "z1" according to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 234.

In addition, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 0 and 19, the main CPU 201 determines "z3" as the selected symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. In addition, if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 20 and 79, the main CPU 201 determines "z4" as the selected symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. In addition, if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 80 and 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z5" as the selected symbol command and determines "zA3" as the symbol designation command.

In this way, in this embodiment, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, the selected symbol command is likely to be determined in the order of "z3" = "z5" < "z4" according to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 234.

In addition, when small win determination value data is obtained as a result of the win determination process for the second special symbol, if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 0 and 19, the main CPU 201 determines "z6" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command. In addition, if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 20 and 79, the main CPU 201 determines "z7" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command. In addition, if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 80 and 99, the main CPU 201 determines "z8" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

In this way, in this embodiment, when small win determination value data is obtained as a result of the win determination process for the second special pattern, the selected pattern command is likely to be determined in the order of "z6" = "z8" < "z7" according to the special pattern determination table shown in FIG. 234.

The range of the random number value of the special symbol that determines the "selected symbol command", i.e., the selection rate, is not limited to the above values and can be freely changed as needed.

Although the seventh pachinko gaming machine will not be described, the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 stores a special symbol stop mode determination table equivalent to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) described in the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table is a table that is referenced when determining the stop mode of the special symbol displayed in the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164 (see FIG. 232) when the special symbol is stopped, in response to a selection symbol command. In addition, the first special symbol display section 163 and the second special symbol display section 164 display the stop mode of a big win, a small win, or a miss, based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process. In addition, a decorative symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative symbol stop mode determination table described in the first pachinko game machine (see FIG. 12(B)) is also stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300.

[9-3-3. Winning Type Determination Table]
235 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the seventh pachinko gaming machine. The winning type determination table shown in FIG. 235 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

The hit type determination table is a table that determines the operation content of a hit, and is a table that determines the "state of the big hit game state," the "state of the small hit game state," and the "state of the subsequent game state (time-saving flag, A time-saving end condition)."

As shown in FIG. 235, the winning type determination table associates the selected symbol command with the "state of the big win game state," the "state of the small win game state," and the "state of the subsequent game state (time-saving flag, A time-saving end condition)."

"Opening mode of jackpot gaming state" indicates the opening mode of the first large prize winning port 7131 that is opened during a jackpot gaming state. In this embodiment, the maximum opening time (e.g., 28 seconds) and closing time (e.g., 2 seconds) per round during a jackpot gaming state are specified in advance, and the opening mode of the first large prize winning port 7131 indicates the maximum number of rounds during a jackpot gaming state. Note that the maximum opening time per round may be different, or the closing time (round interval time) of each round may be determined to be different. Furthermore, the number of openings and the opening time may be determined so that the first large prize winning port 6131 is opened and closed multiple times per round.

The "opening mode of the big win game state" corresponding to the "selected symbol command z6-8" of the small win of the second special symbol is the opening mode when the game ball that entered the second big winning hole 7151 opened in the small win game state passes through the V winning hole 7156 and transitions to the big win game state via the second route. When the game state transitions to the big win game state via this second route, the opening of the second big winning hole 7151 in the small win game state is the first round, and after the game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156 (from the second round onwards), a round game is executed to open the first big winning hole 7131. Also, when the game ball that entered the second big winning hole 7151 opened in the small win game state does not pass through the V winning hole 7156, the game state does not transition to the big win game state, and the mode of the game state thereafter is not determined.

"Opening mode in small win game state" indicates the opening mode of the second large prize opening 7151 that opens in a small win game state. In this embodiment, the maximum opening time (e.g., 0.1 seconds) and closing time (e.g., 0.6 seconds) per opening in a small win game state are specified in advance, and indicate the maximum number of openings in a small win game state. Note that the maximum opening time per opening may be determined differently, or the closing time for each opening may be determined differently.

Here, the total number of game balls that can be paid out in one small win game state (for example, 1 small win x 10 balls (second specified number) x 10 balls (number of prize balls) = 100 balls) is set to be less than the total number of game balls that can be paid out in one big win game state (for example, 5R x 7 balls (first specified number) x 15 balls (number of prize balls) = 525 balls), and it can be said that the big win game state is the advantageous "first special game state," and the small win game state is the "second special game state" that is less profitable than the big win game state.

In addition, the maximum opening time for one round in the big win game state (e.g., 0.1 seconds) is set shorter than the maximum opening time for one round in the big win game state (e.g., 28 seconds), so that in the big win game state, the first large prize winning port 7131 opens in a favorable "first opening mode," and in the small win game state, the second large prize winning port 7151 opens in a less favorable "second opening mode" than the first opening mode.

The "state of the subsequent game state" indicates the state of the game state after the end of the big win game state, and indicates the settings of the "time-saving flag" and "A time-saving end condition." In addition, in this embodiment, the settings of the "time-saving flag" and "A time-saving end condition" are configured to differ depending on the game state at the time of winning when it is determined that there is a big win or a small win (whether it is "normal game state" or "time-saving game state").

The "time-saving flag" is a flag that indicates whether or not a time-saving game state is being executed and the type of time-saving game state that is being executed, with a time-saving flag of 0 indicating a normal game state, a time-saving flag of 1 indicating an "A time-saving game state," and a time-saving flag of 2 indicating a "B time-saving game state." Note that in this embodiment, the C time-saving game state is not being executed, but if the C time-saving game state can be executed, a time-saving flag of 3 will indicate the C time-saving game state.

The "A time-saving end condition" is a special condition for ending the A time-saving game state as a time-saving game state, and when either the "total number of special symbol time-savings" which is the total number of times that either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the A time-saving game state, or the "number of time-savings of the second special symbol" which is the total number of times that the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the A time-saving game state, is met, the A time-saving game state ends and transitions to the normal game state.

In addition, in all time-saving game states (time-saving game state A, time-saving game state B), a "time-saving common ending condition" is set as a condition for transitioning to a big win game state or a small win game state. Therefore, in the time-saving game state A, if the "time-saving ending condition A" or the "time-saving common ending condition" is met, the time-saving game state will end and a transition to the normal game state will occur.

Here, the "A time-saving end condition" includes not only the "number of times the second special symbol has been shortened," but also the "total number of times the special symbol has been shortened," which is the cumulative number of times the first special symbol has changed display. This is to avoid an event in which, during normal play mode in which left-handed play is the regular play mode, the start information for the first special symbol may be stored up to the reserved number of first special symbols (e.g., four), and when switching from normal play mode to time-saving play mode, the player is unable to receive the benefit of the time-saving play mode for the "number of times the second special symbol has been shortened." For this reason, the "total number of times the special symbol has been shortened" is set to at least the sum of the "number of times the second special symbol has been shortened" and the "reserved number of first special symbols (e.g., four)," plus a safe number of times (e.g., two) to allow for some leeway.

Thus, even if we set the condition of the "total number of times the second special symbol has been shortened" which is the cumulative number of times the first special symbol has changed in addition to the "number of times the second special symbol has been shortened", in a time-shortened game state where right-hand hitting is the regular game mode, it is difficult for a game ball to enter the first starting hole 7120, but it is easy for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 7140. Therefore, except in irregular game modes, the condition of the "total number of times the second special symbol has been shortened" is not met, and the time-shortened game state ends when the condition of the "number of times the second special symbol has been shortened" is met.

The "A time-saving end condition" may be configured to include only the condition "number of times the time-saving feature of the second special symbol has occurred" without including the condition "total number of times the time-saving feature of the special symbol has occurred."

The main CPU 201 refers to the hit type determination table and determines the mode of the big hit game state, the mode of the small hit game state, the time-saving flag, and the A time-saving end condition based on the selected symbol command.

As shown in FIG. 235, in the normal game state, when the first special symbol hit determination process determines that a jackpot has been reached, the selected symbol command "z1" is selected 90% of the time, and the A time-saving end condition is easily determined after the end of the jackpot game state, with the condition that either the "total number of times that the special symbols have been shortened" = 7 times or the "second number of times that the second special symbols have been shortened" = 1 time being met. In contrast, in the time-saving game state, after the end of all jackpot game states, the A time-saving end condition is determined as the "second A time-saving end condition" that is more advantageous to the player than the "first A time-saving end condition", with the condition that either the "total number of times that the special symbols have been shortened" = 11 times or the "second number of times that the second special symbols have been shortened" = 5 times being met.

In this embodiment, when the A time-saving game state in the time-saving game state is further differentiated, the time-saving game state when the A time-saving end conditions are determined to be "total number of time-saving times for special symbols = 7" and "number of time-saving times for the second special symbol = 1" is also called the "first time-saving game state," and the time-saving game state when the A time-saving end conditions are determined to be "total number of time-saving times for special symbols = 11" and "number of time-saving times for the second special symbol = 5" is also called the "second time-saving game state." The B time-saving game state is also called the "third time-saving game state." As described above, the "A time-saving end condition" may be configured to include only the condition of the "second special symbol time-saving number of times" without including the condition of the "total number of times of time-saving for special symbols." Therefore, the first time-saving game state may be the time-saving game state when the "second special symbol time-saving number of times = 1" is determined, and the second time-saving game state may be the time-saving game state when the "second special symbol time-saving number of times = 5" is determined. In addition, when the "first time-saving game state" and the "second time-saving game state" are not clearly distinguished, they will continue to be called the "A time-saving game state," and when the "A time-saving game state" and the "B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state)" are not clearly distinguished, they will continue to be called the "time-saving game state."

[9-3-4. Special symbol variation pattern table]
236 and 237 are examples of the variation pattern table of the special symbols of the seventh pachinko game machine. Fig. 236 is an example of the variation pattern table of the special symbols in the normal game state of the seventh pachinko game machine, and Fig. 237 is an example of the variation pattern table of the special symbols in the time-saving game state of the seventh pachinko game machine. The variation pattern tables of the special symbols shown in Figs. 236 and 237 are stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the seventh pachinko game machine.

As shown in Figures 236 and 237, the special symbol variation pattern table associates the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win or lose), the random number value for reach determination, the random number value for effect selection, the special symbol variation pattern, and the special symbol variation display time. The reach determination random number value is selected, for example, from 0 to 249 (250 types), and the effect selection random number value is selected, for example, from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of the generated random number values is not limited to the above. Also, the "Notes" column in Figures 236 and 237 conveniently shows the time at which the special symbol is determined and the content of the effect execution, etc., for ease of understanding.

The main CPU 201 determines the special pattern variation pattern table of either FIG. 236 or FIG. 237 depending on the game status, etc., and refers to the determined special pattern variation pattern table to determine the special pattern variation pattern and the special pattern variation display time based on the type of special pattern, the result of the special pattern hit determination process, the reach determination random number value, and the performance selection random number value.

When the main CPU 201 determines the fluctuation pattern, it transmits a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern to the sub-CPU 301. The sub-CPU 301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effects output from the speaker 32 based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201. The fluctuation pattern command is configured to be able to identify whether the fluctuation pattern is triggered by a game ball entering the first starting hole 7120 or the second starting hole 7140.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in normal game state)
In this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 236, three special symbol variation pattern tables are provided as the special symbol variation pattern tables in the normal game state: special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in Fig. 236(1), special symbol variation pattern table T2 shown in Fig. 236(2), and special symbol variation pattern table T3 shown in Fig. 236(3). Note that the number of special symbol variation pattern tables in the normal game state is not limited to three, and may be one or two or more.

In this embodiment, when distinguishing between normal game states in detail, the normal game state in which left-handed hits are the normal game mode is referred to as the "first normal game state," and the normal game state during the control period of the second special symbol that is performed based on the start information of the second special symbol that was stored in the second special symbol start memory area of the main RAM 203 when the time-saving game state ends (i.e., the normal game state in which the reserved number of second special symbols stored in the time-saving game state is being consumed) is referred to as the "second normal game state."

The special symbol fluctuation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 236 (1) is a fluctuation pattern table selected in the first normal game state, and is a fluctuation pattern table selected in the general presentation state after the seventh pachinko game machine has been backed up and cleared (i.e., the initial value fluctuation pattern table) or after a predetermined number of special symbol fluctuation displays have been performed since the first normal game state began (i.e., after transitioning from the special symbol fluctuation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 236 (3) described below).

The special symbol fluctuation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 236 (2) is a fluctuation pattern table exclusively for the second special symbol that is selected in the second normal game state, and is a fluctuation pattern table that is selected in the "continuous battle" described below.

The special symbol variation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 236 (3) is a variation pattern table that is selected during the first normal game state, and is a variation pattern table that is selected during the limited presentation state from the start of the first normal game state until a predetermined number of special symbol variation displays are performed.

The transition relationship of the special symbol variation pattern tables T1 to T3 in the normal game state shown in Figures 236 (1) to (3) will be described in detail later using Figure 238.

Here, in the first normal game state where hitting from the left is considered the normal game mode, it is extremely difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 7140, and the variation pattern of the second special symbol should not be determined (the variation display of the second special symbol is not performed). However, in case the game ball irregularly enters the second starting hole 7140, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is specified.

In the special symbol fluctuation pattern table T1 in the first normal game state shown in FIG. 236 (1), the fluctuation display time of the second special symbol is set to the same time (for example, 15,000 ms) as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol, regardless of the result of the winning determination process of the second special symbol. However, as described below, even if the fluctuation display time of the second special symbol is the same, different performance contents are executed.

In this embodiment, the pattern determination time for the special symbol is determined based on the game state and the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win/lose), but in the normal game state, the pattern determination time is set to the same time (for example, 540 ms) regardless of the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win/lose).

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in time-saving game mode)
In this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 237, four special symbol variation pattern tables are provided as variation pattern tables of special symbols in the time-saving game state: a special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in Fig. 237(1), a special symbol variation pattern table J2 shown in Fig. 237(2), a special symbol variation pattern table J3 shown in Fig. 237(3), and a special symbol variation pattern table J4 shown in Fig. 237(4). Note that the number of special symbol variation pattern tables in the time-saving game state is not limited to four, and may be one or two or more.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 237 (1) is the fluctuation pattern table selected at the time of the final fluctuation of the first time-saving game state, and is the fluctuation pattern table selected at the time of the "Sengoku Entry Chance" described below.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 237 (2) is a fluctuation pattern table that is selected at times other than the final fluctuation of the first time-saving game state, and is a fluctuation pattern table that is selected at the time of the "Chance to Enter the Sengoku Period."

Here, other than the final change of the first time-saving game state, it is limited to when the first special pattern is displayed changing and neither of the conditions "time-saving number of times for the second special pattern = 1" nor "total time-saving number of times for special patterns = 7" is met (when the second special pattern is displayed changing, "time-saving number of times for the second special pattern = 1" is met, resulting in the final change), so the special pattern change pattern table J2 is a change pattern table exclusively for the first special pattern, and the change pattern of the second special pattern is not determined.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 237 (3) is a fluctuation pattern table that is selected at times other than the final fluctuation of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, and is a fluctuation pattern table that is selected during the "Sengoku Time" described below.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern table J4 shown in FIG. 237 (4) is the fluctuation pattern table selected at the time of the final fluctuation of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, and is the fluctuation pattern table selected during the "Sengoku Time" described below.

In this embodiment, the same variation pattern table is determined for the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state, but it may be configured so that different variation pattern tables are determined for the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state.

The transition relationship of the special symbol change pattern tables J1 to J4 in the time-saving play state shown in Figures 237 (1) to (4) will be described in detail later using Figure 238.

In the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J1 in the time-saving play state shown in FIG. 237 (1), the fluctuation display time of the special symbol is determined to be an extremely short first fluctuation display time (e.g., 200 ms) except when the hit determination process for the first special symbol results in a jackpot, and when the hit determination process for the first special symbol results in a jackpot, the fluctuation display time of the special symbol is determined to be a long second fluctuation display time (e.g., 89,000 ms). Also, at the time of the final fluctuation of the first time-saving play state, the pattern determination time of the special symbol is determined to be an extremely long pattern determination time (e.g., 89,000 ms).

This will be described in more detail later using Figure 244, but by determining the variable display time of the special symbol to be the extremely short first variable display time, the time-saving game state is quickly ended, and the specified number for normal power on the normal electric device 7146 is set to 1, etc., so that in the first time-saving game state, the reserved number of the second special symbol is not accumulated, and the winning determination process for the second special symbol (variable display of the second special symbol) can be performed only once.

In addition, as the "A time-saving end condition", the "total number of times the time-saving has occurred for the special symbols" is set to be equal to or greater than the sum of the "number of times the time-saving has occurred for the second special symbol" and the "number of reserved first special symbols (e.g., 4)" (see FIG. 235), and at the time of the final change in the time-saving play state, the change display of the first special symbol is made based on the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, which corresponds to the irregular play mode when the "total number of times the time-saving has occurred for the special symbols" is established.

In the special symbol variation pattern table J1 in the time-saving game state shown in FIG. 237(1), when it is based on the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, all the variable display times of the special symbols are configured to be determined to the same first variable display time (e.g., 200 ms), but they may be configured to be different from each other, or only some of them may be configured to be different. For example, when the hit determination process of the second special symbol results in a big hit, the variable display time of the special symbol may be determined to be the long variable display time A (e.g., 89,000 ms), when the hit determination process of the second special symbol results in a small hit, the variable display time of the special symbol may be determined to be the short variable display time B (e.g., 300 ms), and when the hit determination process of the second special symbol results in a miss, the variable display time of the special symbol may be determined to be the extremely short variable display time C (e.g., 200 ms).

In the special symbol variation pattern table J3 in the time-saving play state shown in FIG. 237(3), when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a small hit, the third variable display time (e.g., 2000 ms) in which the variable display time of the special symbol is short, or the fourth variable display time (e.g., 5000 ms, 12000 ms) longer than the third variable display time is determined. Also, in the special symbol variation pattern table J3 in the time-saving play state shown in FIG. 237(3), when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is based on the result, the third variable display time (e.g., 2000 ms) in which the variable display time of the special symbol is short is determined in order to quickly end the variable display of the first special symbol and to display the variable display of the second special symbol from the next time onwards.

In the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J3 in the time-saving play state shown in FIG. 237 (3), when a small win is the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, the special symbol fluctuation display time is configured to be determined as the third fluctuation display time or the fourth fluctuation display time, but the third fluctuation display time may be the same as the first fluctuation display time (e.g., 200 ms), and the fourth fluctuation display time may be the same as the second fluctuation display time (e.g., 89,000 ms).

In the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J4 in the time-saving play state shown in FIG. 237 (4), the fluctuation display time of the special symbol is the same as that in the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J3 in the time-saving play state shown in FIG. 237 (3), but the special symbol fluctuation pattern is configured so that if the hit determination process for the first special symbol or the second special symbol results in a miss, the content that is executed is different.

In addition, at the time of the final change between the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state, if the hit determination process for the first special pattern or the second special pattern results in a miss, the pattern determination time for the special pattern is determined to be longer (for example, 15,000 ms) than if the hit determination process for the first special pattern or the second special pattern results in a big hit or small hit.

In this way, in the final change of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, if the special symbol hit determination process results in a miss, a long symbol determination time (for example, 15,000 ms) is determined. This is because when a long symbol determination time is displayed, the game results (payout, number of consecutive wins, etc.) in "Sengoku Time" are displayed at the end of "Sengoku Time" (described below).

[9-3-5. Special symbol variation pattern table transition diagram]
Fig. 238 is an example of a transition diagram of the special symbol variation pattern table in the seventh pachinko game machine. The transition diagram of the special symbol variation pattern table shown in Fig. 238 shows an example of a transition diagram when a left hit is performed as a regular game mode in the first normal game state, and a right hit is performed as a regular game mode in the time-saving game state, and an irregular game mode is excluded.

(Normal gameplay state after power-on after initialization)
First, in the first normal game state after the power is turned on after initialization, as described above, the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 236(1) is selected.

In the first normal game state where hitting from the left is the normal game mode, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 7140, and when the game ball enters the first starting hole 7120, a hit determination process for the first special symbol (variable display of the first special symbol) is performed.

(When the selection symbol command "z1" is determined in normal game mode)
In the normal game state, when the first special symbol is judged as a jackpot as a result of the hit judgment process and the selected symbol command "z1" is determined, the game state transitions to the first time-saving game state in which the "second special symbol time-saving number of times" = 1 is determined after the end of the jackpot game state. In this first time-saving game state, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 7140, the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 237 (1) is selected.

In addition, during the first time-saving game state, if a game ball does not enter the second start hole 7140 and there are reserved numbers of the first special pattern, the special pattern variation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 237 (2) is selected, and if a game ball enters the second start hole 7140 after the reserved number of the first special pattern is consumed, the special pattern variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 237 (1) is selected.

After the first time-saving game state ends, the number of reserved second special symbols should not be stored, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 244. Therefore, after the first time-saving game state ends, the game transitions to the first normal game state, and the special symbol variation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 236 (3) is selected until the number of times the special symbol variation display has been performed reaches 20 spins since the first normal game state began.

Then, when the number of times the special symbol changes display exceeds 20 spins after the first normal game state is started, the special symbol change pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 236 (1) will be selected.

(When the selection symbol command "z1" is determined in the time-saving game state)
In the time-saving game state, if the first special symbol is judged to be a jackpot as a result of the hit judgment process and the selected symbol command "z1" is determined, the game moves to a second time-saving game state in which the "second special symbol time-saving number of times" = 5 is determined after the end of the jackpot game state. In this second time-saving game state, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 7140, the special symbol variation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 237 (3) is selected.

When the second time-saving game state reaches its final change, the special symbol change pattern table J4 shown in FIG. 237 (4) is selected.

After the second time-saving game state ends, the number of reserved second special symbols is generally stored, so the game transitions to the second normal game state after the second time-saving game state ends. During the control period of the second special symbol in the second normal game state, the special symbol variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 236 (2) is selected.

After the second normal game state ends (i.e., after the reserved number of second special symbols is consumed), the game transitions to the first normal game state, and the special symbol variation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 236 (3) is selected until the number of times the special symbol variation display has been performed reaches 20 spins since the first normal game state began.

Then, when the number of times the special symbol changes display exceeds 20 spins after the first normal game state is started, the special symbol change pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 236 (1) will be selected.

(When the selection command "z2-5" is confirmed)
If the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot and the selected symbol command "z2" is determined, and if the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot and the selected symbol command "z3-5" is determined, a transition to the second time-saving game state will occur, which is the same as when the selected symbol command "z1" is determined in the time-saving game state described above, so explanation will be omitted.

(When the selection command "z6-8" is confirmed)
If the hit determination process for the second special pattern determines that there has been a small hit, the game state will change depending on whether or not the game ball has passed through the V winning port 7156, and the variation pattern table of the selected special pattern will differ.

Here, the fact that the hit determination process for the second special symbol results in a small hit is premised on the premise that the time-saving game state in which the game ball can enter the second starting hole 7140 has been controlled. When the game state transitions to the small hit game state, the "time-saving common ending condition" is met as described above, and the time-saving game state ends once (the same applies when the game state transitions to the big hit game state). Then, if the game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156, the game state transitions to the big hit game state, and after the big hit game state ends, the game state transitions to the second time-saving game state. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the V winning hole 7156, the game state does not transition to the big hit game state, but transitions to the normal game state.

If the hit determination process for the second special symbol determines that there has been a small hit and the game ball has not passed through the V winning hole 7156, the number of reserved second special symbols is generally stored after the small hit game state ends, so after the time-saving game state ends, the game transitions to the second normal game state. During the control period of the second special symbol in the second normal game state, the special symbol variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 236 (2) is selected.

After the second normal game state ends (i.e., after the reserved number of second special symbols is consumed), the game transitions to the first normal game state, and the special symbol variation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 236 (3) is selected until the number of times the special symbol variation display has been performed reaches 20 spins since the first normal game state began.

Then, when the number of times the special symbol changes display exceeds 20 spins after the first normal game state is started, the special symbol change pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 236 (1) will be selected.

If the hit determination process for the second special symbol determines that there has been a small hit and the game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156, the game will transition to the second time-saving game state, which is the same as when the selected symbol command "z1" is determined in the time-saving game state described above, and so no further explanation will be given.

(When transitioning to B time-saving game mode)
As described later, after the number of times the special symbol variable display reaches a ceiling value (for example, 599 times) in the normal game state, the game state transitions to the B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state). Here, the "B time-saving end condition" of the B time-saving game state is that either the "total number of times of time-saving of special symbols" = 11 times or the "number of times of time-saving of second special symbols" = 5 times is established, and is set to be the same as the special condition for ending the second time-saving game state. Therefore, when the game state transitions to the B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state), the variable pattern table of the special symbol transitions in the same way as when the game state transitions to the second time-saving game state.

[9-3-6. Special symbol pre-reading related data]
FIG. 239 is an example of data related to the look-ahead of the special symbol in the seventh pachinko game machine. Here, "look-ahead" refers to analyzing the start information of the special symbol acquired before the lottery of the special symbol when the game ball enters the first start hole 7120 or the second start hole 7140 and the main control circuit 200 (main CPU 201) acquires the start information of the special symbol (random number value for jackpot judgment, random number value for symbol, random number value for reach judgment, random number value for performance selection, etc.). Then, the analyzed information (look-ahead command) is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300 (sub CPU 301), and the "look-ahead performance" can be executed based on the look-ahead command.

Figure 239 (1) is a look-ahead execution correspondence table that determines whether or not to execute look-ahead depending on the game status as data related to look-ahead of special patterns.

As shown in FIG. 239(1), in the normal game state, both pre-reading based on the start information of the first special symbol and pre-reading based on the start information of the second special symbol can be performed. Also, in the time-saving game state, big win game state, and small win game state, only pre-reading based on the start information of the second special symbol can be performed.

Figure 239 (2) shows an example of the configuration of a look-ahead command based on the analyzed information after analyzing the start information for a special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 239 (2), the look-ahead command is composed of the "type of special symbol" - either the first special symbol or the second special symbol - and multiple "parameters 1 to 3."

"Parameter 1" is the winning/losing information that is analyzed in advance to determine whether it is a big win, a small win, or a miss based on a random number value for determining a big win, and Figure 239 (3) is an example of a setting table for parameter 1.

"Parameter 2" is pattern information that is obtained by analyzing in advance the special pattern (selected pattern) that will be displayed when the reel stops based on the random number value for determining a jackpot and the random number value for the pattern. Figure 239 (4) is an example of a setting table for parameter 2.

"Parameter 3" is fluctuation information that analyzes the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol in advance based on the random number value for determining a jackpot, the random number value for determining a reach, and the random number value for selecting a performance. Figure 239 (5) is an example of a setting table for parameter 3.

In this embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol from when the start information of the special symbol is read ahead until the special symbol is drawn based on the start information of the special symbol is also called "pre-variation." Also, the variable display of the special symbol when the special symbol is drawn based on the start information of the special symbol is also called "the said variation."

[9-3-7. Normal symbol winning judgment table]
Fig. 240 is an example of a winning judgment table for normal symbols in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. The winning judgment table for normal symbols shown in Fig. 240 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol winning judgment table is a table referenced in the normal symbol winning judgment process, and is a table referenced when determining by lottery whether a "normal symbol winning" or "normal symbol losing" is made based on the normal symbol winning judgment random number value obtained when the game ball passes through the passing gate 7126.

The winning judgment table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 240 specifies the range (width) of random numbers for winning judgment of normal symbols and winning/losing judgment value data for normal symbols ("normal symbol win" or "normal symbol miss") in correspondence with each other. Note that the random numbers for winning judgment of normal symbols are obtained in the range of 0 to 65535 (65536 types), for example. However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the winning judgment table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 240, and determines the winning/losing judgment value data for the normal symbols based on the range (width) of the random number value for winning judgment for normal symbols.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 refers to the winning judgment table for the normal pattern shown in FIG. 240, and when the acquired random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern is any value between 1 and 65535, it judges it as a "normal pattern winning" and determines the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal pattern as "normal pattern winning/losing judgment value data". In addition, when the acquired random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern is 0, the main CPU 201 judges it as a "normal pattern losing" and determines the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal pattern as "normal pattern losing judgment value data".

In this way, in this embodiment, a "normal hit" is determined with a selection rate of approximately 1/1.00, and a "normal hit" is more likely to be determined than a "normal miss." Note that it is preferable that a "normal hit" is more likely to be determined than a "normal miss," and the selection rate of a "normal hit" is not limited to approximately 1/1.00.

In this embodiment, regardless of whether the game state is normal or time-saving, the selection rate for "normal symbol hits" is set to the same (the winning probability for normal symbol hits is the same), but by changing the opening pattern of the normal electric device 7146 depending on the game state, as described below, the degree of benefit given to the player is changed depending on the game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" is set to the same regardless of whether the game state is the normal game state or the time-saving game state, but the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" may be made different depending on the game state. When making the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" different depending on the game state, it is desirable to configure it so that the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" in the time-saving game state is higher than the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" in the normal game state. Furthermore, the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" may be made different depending on the type of time-saving game state between the A time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) and the B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state).

[9-3-8. Normal symbol determination table]
Fig. 241 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol determination table shown in Fig. 241 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol determination table is a table that is referenced when selecting "normal symbol selection symbol data" that determines the normal symbol stopping symbol based on the above-mentioned normal symbol winning/losing determination value data and the normal symbol random number value obtained when the game ball passes through the passing gate 7126.

The normal pattern determination table shown in FIG. 241 specifies the above-mentioned normal pattern winning/losing determination value data ("normal pattern win" or "normal pattern miss"), the normal pattern random number value, and the normal pattern selection pattern data in a corresponding relationship. Note that the normal pattern random number value is obtained, for example, from 0 to 100 (101 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal pattern determination table shown in FIG. 241 and determines the normal pattern selection pattern data based on the normal pattern hit determination value data and the pattern random number value of the normal pattern.

According to the normal pattern determination table shown in FIG. 241, when normal pattern hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal pattern hit determination process, for example, the normal pattern selection pattern data is selected as follows.

For example, when normal symbol winning judgment value data is obtained, the main CPU 201 selects "f1" as the normal symbol selection symbol data if the normal symbol random number value is any value between 0 and 49, and selects "f2" as the normal symbol selection symbol data if the normal symbol random number value is any value between 50 and 99. Also, when normal symbol losing judgment value data is obtained, the main CPU 201 selects "f3" as the normal symbol selection symbol data regardless of the normal symbol random number value.

In particular, in this embodiment, unlike the first pachinko gaming machine, the normal symbol selection symbol data is selected based on the normal symbol win/lose determination value data (the result of the normal symbol win determination process) and the normal symbol random number value, regardless of the gaming state. Note that, like the first pachinko gaming machine, the normal symbol selection symbol data may be selected depending on the gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the winning judgment table for the normal pattern (see FIG. 240) to determine the winning/losing judgment value data for the normal pattern based on the acquired random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern, and then refers to the normal pattern judgment table (see FIG. 241) to determine the normal pattern selection pattern data based on the pattern random number value of the normal pattern, but is not limited to this. For example, the winning/losing judgment value data for the normal pattern (whether the normal pattern is winning or losing) and the normal pattern selection pattern data may be determined together based on the acquired random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern and the pattern random number value of the normal pattern.

[9-3-9. Table for determining the opening pattern of normal electric accessories]
Fig. 242 is an example of a normal electric role opening pattern determination table in the seventh pachinko game machine. The normal electric role opening pattern determination table shown in Fig. 242 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the seventh pachinko game machine.

When normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol (in the case of a hit for a normal symbol), the opening pattern determination table for the normal electric device 7146 is referenced when determining the opening pattern of the normal electric device 7146 as the opening mode of the normal electric device 7146 according to the game state and the normal symbol selection symbol data.

The normal electric role opening pattern determination table shown in Figure 242 specifies the game state, the normal pattern selection pattern data, and the opening pattern of the normal electric role 7146 in correspondence with each other.

In this embodiment, the "opening pattern of the normal electric role 7146" is composed of the "first opening time" in the first opening state of the second starting port 7140, the "first waiting time" in the first closing state of the second starting port 7140, the "second opening time" in the second opening state of the second starting port 7140, the "second waiting time" in the second closing state of the second starting port 7140, and the "ending time" in which the second starting port 7140 is closed and the operation of the normal electric role 7146 is terminated. The opening pattern of the normal electric role 7146 is not limited to the above-mentioned configuration, and may be configured to be capable of repeating the opening state and the closing state three or more times, or may be configured to be composed of only one opening state. Furthermore, it may be configured to have an "opening time" in which the first opening of the second starting port 7140 is waited for before the "first opening time".

The main CPU 201 refers to the opening pattern determination table for the normal electric role shown in FIG. 242, and determines the opening pattern of the normal electric role 7146 based on the game state and the normal pattern selection pattern data. When the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern of the normal electric role 7146, it transmits to the sub-CPU 301 a normal electric role opening pattern command corresponding to the determined opening pattern of the normal electric role 7146.

According to the opening pattern determination table for normal electric roles shown in Figure 242, when a normal symbol is hit during normal play, regardless of the normal symbol selection symbol data, the opening pattern (91H01H) of the first normal electric role 7146 is determined to be a first opening time of 72 ms, no first wait time, no opening from the second time onwards, and an ending time of 12 ms.

In addition, according to the opening pattern determination table for normal electric devices shown in Figure 242, when a normal symbol is hit during time-saving play, regardless of the normal symbol selection symbol data, the opening pattern (91H02H) of the second normal electric device 7146 is determined to be a first opening time of 5400 ms, a first waiting time of 120 ms, a second opening time of 72 ms, and an ending time of 12 ms.

In this way, in this embodiment, the opening pattern of the normal electric device 7146 differs depending on the game state, and in the case of a normal symbol hit in the normal game state, an "unfavorable opening mode (also called a "short opening")" in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 7140 is determined, and in the case of a normal symbol hit in the time-saving game state, an "favorable opening mode (also called a "long opening")" in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 7140 is determined.

In addition, in this embodiment, regardless of which normal electric role 7146 opening pattern is activated, the specified number for normal power is set to one, and when one game ball enters the second start hole 7140 while the opening pattern of the normal electric role 7146 is in operation (while the second start hole 7140 is open), the operation of the opening pattern of that normal electric role 7146 ends (the second start hole 7140 closes). In other words, only one game ball can enter the second start hole 7140 for one normal pattern hit, and even if there is 5,400 ms of remaining opening time in the time-saving game state, the second start hole 7140 will close.

In this embodiment, the A time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) and the B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state) are treated as the same time-saving game state without distinction, and the same opening pattern of the normal electric device 7146 is determined. However, it may be configured to determine different opening patterns of the normal electric device 7146 for the A time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) and the B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state).

Furthermore, the opening pattern of the normal electric device 7146 may be different depending on the normal pattern selection pattern data. However, it is desirable that when a normal pattern is hit in the normal game state, the opening pattern is a group of "unfavorable opening patterns" compared to when a normal pattern is hit in the time-saving game state, and when a normal pattern is hit in the time-saving game state, the opening pattern is a group of "favorable opening patterns" compared to when a normal pattern is hit in the normal game state.

[9-3-10. Normal pattern variation table]
Fig. 243 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in Fig. 243 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 243 corresponds the game state, the normal symbol selection symbol data, the normal symbol variation pattern, and the normal symbol variation display time. Also, the "Notes" column in FIG. 243 conveniently shows the normal symbol pattern determination time for ease of understanding.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table and determines the normal symbol variation pattern and the normal symbol variation display time based on the game state and the normal symbol selection symbol data. Then, when the main CPU 201 determines the normal symbol variation pattern, it transmits to the sub-CPU 301 a normal symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the determined normal symbol variation pattern.

According to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 243, in the normal game state, the normal symbol variation display time is determined to be 414 ms, and in the time-saving game state, the normal symbol variation display time is determined to be 408 ms. Also, in this embodiment, the normal symbol pattern determination time is always determined to be the same time (for example, 540 ms) regardless of the game state or the result of the normal symbol winning determination process.

In this embodiment, the normal game state is configured so that all the same normal symbol variable display times and normal symbol fixed times are determined, but different normal symbol variable display times and normal symbol fixed times may be determined according to the normal symbol selection symbol data. Similarly, in the time-saving game state, the same normal symbol variable display times and normal symbol fixed times are determined, but different normal symbol variable display times and normal symbol fixed times may be determined according to the normal symbol selection symbol data. Furthermore, different normal symbol variable display times and normal symbol fixed times may be determined between the A time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) and the B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state).

Next, an example of the operation of the normal electric device 7146 in the first time-saving play state will be described with reference to the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 235, the special symbol variation pattern table J1 in the time-saving play state shown in FIG. 237, the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 241, the normal electric device release pattern determination table shown in FIG. 242, and the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 243.

[9-3-11. Operation of normal electric devices in the first time-saving game state]
Figure 244 shows an example of the operation of the normal electric device 7146 in the first time-saving play state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 244, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 7126 in the first time-saving game state, the first normal symbol variable display is started. At this time, the normal symbol is variably displayed in the normal symbol display section 161 for a variable display time of 408 ms by referring to the normal symbol variable pattern table shown in FIG. 243, and then the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (symbol fixed) for a symbol fixation time of 540 ms.

When the first normal pattern has been determined and a normal pattern has been hit, the normal electric device opening pattern determination table shown in Figure 242 is referenced and a long opening is determined as the opening pattern for the normal electric device 7146, and the second starting hole 7140 remains open for a maximum of 5400 ms.

And because the specified number of normal power devices for the normal electric device 7146 is one, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 7140, the operation of the normal electric device ends and the second starting hole 7140 closes.

When the game ball enters the second starting hole 7140, the second special symbol display section 164 displays a very short first display time of 200 ms by referring to the special symbol change pattern table J1 in the time-saving game state shown in FIG. 237.

When the variation of the second special symbol ends, the A time-saving end condition "number of times the second special symbol has been shortened = 1" is met, the first time-saving game state ends, and the game transitions to the normal game state (first normal game state). Therefore, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 7140, the first time-saving game state can be quickly ended.

Then, when the variation of the second special symbol has finished, the second special symbol will be displayed stationary (symbol determination) for an extremely long symbol determination time of 89,000 ms.

When the second special symbol is determined, which takes an extremely long time of 89,000 ms, a presentation (boss battle presentation) related to the result of the winning determination process for the second special symbol is performed on the display device 7, as described below.

In addition, even if the game ball enters the second starting hole 7140 and the operation of the normal electric device ends, if the reserved number of normal symbols is stored, the second display of the normal symbol variations will start immediately after the operation of the normal electric device ends. In other words, it is also possible for the second display of the normal symbol variations and the second special symbol variations to start approximately simultaneously in the first time-saving game state.

The variable display of the normal symbol in the first time-saving game state refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 243, and the normal symbol is displayed in a variable display time of 408 ms, after which the normal symbol is fixed (stopped display) in a pattern fixing time of 540 ms.

In this embodiment, the relationship is set such that the first variable display time of the second special symbol in the first time-saving game state (200 ms) ≦ the variable display time of the normal symbol (408 ms) holds. Therefore, even if the first time-saving game state is in effect when the second variable display of the normal symbol starts, the game state will have already transitioned to the normal game state (first normal game state) when the second variable display of the normal symbol ends.

For this reason, even if the second normal symbol determination is completed and a normal symbol is hit, the normal electric device opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. 242 is referenced and a short opening (72 ms) is determined as the opening pattern for the normal electric device 7146 in the normal game state, making it extremely difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 7140.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the variable display time of the second special symbol is set to the extremely short first variable display time to quickly end the first time-saving game state, the specified number for normal power on the normal electric device 7146 is set to one, and the variable display time of the normal symbol in the first time-saving game state is set to be equal to or longer than the first variable display time of the second special symbol, so that when the first time-saving game state is being controlled, a game state is controlled in which the start information of the second special symbol is not stored in the second special symbol start memory area of the main RAM 203 (the reserved number of the second special symbol is not stored), and the variable display of the second special symbol can be limited to only one time.

In contrast, when the second time-saving game state is being controlled, a game state is controlled in which the start information of the second special pattern can be stored in the second special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203 (the number of reserved second special patterns can be stored).

[9-3-12. Right-hand hit instruction period setting table]
245 is an example of a right-hit instruction period setting table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. The right-hit instruction period setting table shown in FIG. 245 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 245, three conditions are set as "right hit instruction conditions" for issuing a right hit instruction: the first right hit instruction condition is "during control of the big win game state or the small win game state", the second right hit instruction condition is "during control of the time-saving game state", and the third right hit instruction condition is "during the control period of the second special pattern after the time-saving game state ends".

The first right-hit instruction condition, "While controlling the big win game state or the small win game state," is a condition that is met during the period from the start to the end of the big win game state or the small win game state.

The second right-hit instruction condition "during control of the time-saving game state" is a condition that is met during the period from the "time-saving start condition" to the "time-saving end condition." Note that the time-saving game state here does not distinguish between time-saving game state A (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) and time-saving game state B (third time-saving game state). The same is true for the third right-hit instruction condition "during the control period of the second special symbol after the end of the time-saving game state."

The "time-saving start condition" refers to the end of the big win game state (including the end of the big win game state after the game ball passes through the V winning port 7156 from the small win game state). The "time-saving end condition" refers to either the start of the symbol determination time for the special symbol in the final change of the time-saving game state, the end of the big win game state, or the end of the small win game state.

The third right-hit instruction condition, "during the control period of the second special symbol after the time-saving play state ends", is a condition that is met when the reserved number of second special symbols is stored at the end of the time-saving play state, during the period until the variable display of all second special symbols corresponding to that reserved number of second special symbols ends (until all reserved numbers of second special symbols are used up). Note that even if the reserved number of second special symbols is forcibly saved after the control period of the second special symbol after the time-saving play state ends, the third right-hit instruction condition is not met and no right-hit instruction is issued.

When any of these first right hit instruction condition through third right hit instruction condition is met, a right hit instruction is issued to the player to make a right hit.

[9-4. Main control processing]
In the seventh pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 are the same as those in the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23), except for some special symbol control process and normal symbol control process. Therefore, the following will explain the special symbol control process and normal symbol control process, and will not explain the other processes executed by the main CPU 201.

Note that some of the processes performed in the special symbol control process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine are the same as those performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, the jackpot game state end process (Figures 42 and 259)), but below, the same processes as those performed in the first pachinko gaming machine will be explained again with different step numbers.

[9-4-1. Special symbol control process]
Next, the special symbol control process performed in the main control process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 246. Fig. 246 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol control process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 246, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S7001. The control state number of the special symbol is a number that indicates the state (status) of the control process related to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S7001, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7002.

Although not shown, when the main CPU 201 executes the special symbol control process, prior to the process of S7001, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process to set the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, etc., in a predetermined register.

In S7002, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S7001 is 0, i.e., whether the special symbol is in a variable display waiting state. If the main CPU 201 determines that the control number of the special symbol is not 0, it transfers the process to S7008, and if it determines that the control number of the special symbol is 0, it transfers the process to S7003.

In S7003, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not start information for the second special pattern is stored in the second special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203, i.e., whether or not there is a reserved number of second special patterns. If the main CPU 201 determines that start information for the second special pattern is not stored, it transfers processing to S7004, and if it determines that start information for the second special pattern is stored, it transfers processing to S7005.

In S7004, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start information for the first special pattern is stored in the first special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203, i.e., whether or not there is a reserved number of the first special pattern. If the main CPU 201 determines that the start information for the first special pattern is not stored, it transfers the process to S7007, and if it determines that the start information for the first special pattern is stored, it transfers the process to S7006.

In S7005, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process to shift the start information of the second special pattern stored in the second special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203 to the special pattern determination area (0) of the main RAM 203. In this shift process, the start information stored in the second special pattern start memory area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special pattern determination area (0), and the start information stored in the second special pattern start memory area (2) to the second special pattern start memory area (3) is shifted to the second special pattern start memory area (1) to the second special pattern start memory area (2).

In S7006, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process to shift the start information of the first special pattern stored in the first special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203 to the special pattern determination area (0) of the main RAM 203. In this shift process, the start information stored in the first special pattern start memory area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special pattern determination area (0), and the start information stored in the first special pattern start memory area (2) to the first special pattern start memory area (4) is shifted to the first special pattern start memory area (1) to the first special pattern start memory area (3).

In S7007, if the special symbol start information (reserved number of first and second special symbols) has not been stored in the first and second special symbol start memory areas of the main RAM 203 for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 201 performs a demo display command transmission reservation process. The demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. When the sub-control circuit 300 receives the demo display command, the sub-CPU 301 performs a demo display performance.

In S7008, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 247. After executing the processing of S7003, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIG. 20 to FIG. 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S7001 to S7008) within the interrupt prohibited section.

In this manner, in this embodiment, a priority variable machine in which the special symbol management process is executed with a higher priority than the first special symbol when start information for the second special symbol is stored has been described as the seventh pachinko gaming machine, but this is not limited to this. For example, when start information for the first special symbol is stored, the priority variable machine may be one in which the special symbol management process is executed with a higher priority than the second special symbol, or a sequential variable machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winning (ball entry order) into the first start port 7120 or the second start port 7140.

[9-4-2. Special design management process]
Next, a special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol control process (see Fig. 246) will be described with reference to Fig. 247. Fig. 247 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

The numbers ("0" to "7") written in parentheses to the right of each process in FIG. 247 are the control state numbers of the special symbols that are the subject of the process. The main CPU 201 progresses the special symbol game by executing each process that corresponds to the control state number.

In S7011, the main CPU 201 determines whether the waiting time for the special pattern is 0. This waiting time for the special pattern is set as the waiting time for various processes in the special pattern management process, and is decremented as a special pattern timer counter within the system timer interrupt process that is performed at 2 msec intervals, for example. If the main CPU 201 determines that the waiting time for the special pattern is not 0, it ends the special pattern management process and returns the process to the special pattern control process (see FIG. 246), and if it determines that the waiting time for the special pattern is 0, it transfers the process to S7012.

In S7012, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S7012, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7013. The main CPU 201 performs the process from S7013 onwards based on the control state number read in the process of S7012.

In S7013, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This S7013 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 248. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S7014.

In S7014, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. This S7014 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 250. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S7015.

In S7015, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game determination process. This process of S7015 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 253. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7016.

In S7016, the main CPU 201 performs a small win game state setting process. This process of S7016 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this small win game state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 255. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7017.

In S7017, the main CPU 201 performs a small win game state control process. This S7017 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this small win game state control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 256. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7018.

In S7018, the main CPU 201 performs a process for preparing to open the large prize opening. This process of S7018 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this process for preparing to open the large prize opening will be described later with reference to FIG. 257. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7019.

In S7019, the main CPU 201 performs a large prize opening control process. This process of S7019 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". Details of this large prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 258. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7020.

In S7020, the main CPU 201 performs a process to end the jackpot game state. This process of S7020 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". Details of this process to end the jackpot game state will be described later with reference to FIG. 259.

After completing steps S7013 to S7020, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 246). In this case, the process returns to the process from which the special symbol management process was called.

[9-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247) will be described with reference to Fig. 248. Fig. 248 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display start process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S7021, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", it ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "0", it transfers the process to S7022.

In S7022, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol hit determination process to determine whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss. In this special symbol hit determination process, the special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 233 is referenced, and a hit determination of the special symbol is made based on the random number value for big hit determination of the special symbol as the starting information of the special symbol shifted to the special symbol determination area (0), and a hit/lose determination value data is determined according to the determination result. After executing the process of S7022, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7023.

In S7023, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol determination process to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol. In this special symbol determination process, the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 234 is referenced, and a "select symbol command" or a "symbol designation command" is determined based on the hit/lose determination value data as the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process in S7022 and the special symbol random number value as the start information of the special symbol shifted to the special symbol determination area (0). After executing the process of S7023, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7024.

In S7024, the main CPU 201 performs a win type determination process. This process is a process for determining the type of win when the result of the special symbol win determination process is a win (big win or small win). In this win type determination process, the win type determination table shown in FIG. 235 is referenced, and the type of win is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process of S7023. Furthermore, in order to determine the number of time-saving times and the like based on the game state at the time of the win after the end of the big win game state, the main CPU 201 sets the game state data at the time of the win, which indicates the game state at the time of the win when it is determined that there is a big win or a small win, in the win state area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S7024, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7025.

In S7025, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variation pattern determination process to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this special symbol variation pattern determination process, a special symbol variation pattern table of either FIG. 236 or FIG. 237 is determined depending on the game state, etc., and the determined special symbol variation pattern table is referenced to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the reach determination random number value, and the performance selection random number value. Details of this special symbol variation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 249. After executing the process of S7025, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7026.

In S7026, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display time setting process to set the variable display time of the special symbol. In this special symbol variable display time setting process, the special symbol variable display time setting process refers to the special symbol variable pattern table determined in the special symbol variable pattern determination process in S7025 above, and determines the variable display time of the special symbol based on the determined special symbol variable pattern. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 sets the determined variable display time of the special symbol to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, and causes the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 to start displaying the variable special symbol. After executing the process of S7026, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7027.

In S7027, the main CPU 201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1", after the special symbol variable display start process ends, a special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 247) is performed. After executing the process of S7027, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7028.

In S7028, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, confirmation and update processes of parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203 are performed. Then, a process of reserving transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state is performed. Note that the game state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (Figure 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S7028, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7029.

In S7029, the main CPU 201 performs game status management processing. This processing mainly involves updating various flags related to game status management (e.g., time-saving flags, etc.). After executing S7029, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S7030.

In S7030, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for the special symbol effect start command. In this process, the transmission reservation process for the "symbol designation command" and the "special symbol variation pattern command" is performed as the special symbol effect start command. In the pattern designation command transmission reservation process, the symbol designation command determined in S7023 is transmitted. In addition, in the special symbol variation pattern command transmission reservation process, the special symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern determined in S7025 is transmitted so that the type of special symbol can be identified. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process (particularly the game state management process (S7029) and the special symbol presentation start command transmission reservation process (S7030)) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[9-4-4. Special symbol variation pattern determination process]
Next, the details of the special symbol variation pattern determination process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol variable display start process (see FIG. 248) will be described with reference to Fig. 249. Fig. 249 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variation pattern determination process in the seventh pachinko game machine.

In S7025-1, the main CPU 201 determines whether the current gaming state is a normal gaming state. If the main CPU 201 determines that the current gaming state is a normal gaming state, it transfers processing to S7025-2, and if it determines that the current gaming state is not a normal gaming state (i.e., it is a time-saving gaming state), it transfers processing to S7025-4.

In S7025-2, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is in the control period for the second special symbol after the time-saving game state ends. More specifically, in the second normal game state after the time-saving game state ends (when the special 2 control period flag is on), it determines whether or not it is a special symbol control process when the start information for the second special symbol stored in the second special symbol start memory area of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special symbol determination area (0). If the main CPU 201 determines that it is in the control period for the second special symbol after the time-saving game state ends, it transfers the process to S7025-3, and if it determines that it is not in the control period for the second special symbol after the time-saving game state ends, it transfers the process to S7025-4.

In S7025-3, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 236 (2).

In S7025-4, the main CPU 201 performs a performance variation counter update process in which the performance variation counter in the main RAM 203 is updated by subtracting 1 from it. Here, the "performance variation counter" is set to a predetermined number of times (e.g., 20 times) when the control period for the second special symbol ends after the time-saving game state ends, as described below. In addition, after the seventh pachinko gaming machine has been backed up and cleared, the performance variation counter is also cleared, and the performance variation counter becomes 0.

In S7025-5, the main CPU 201 determines whether the performance change counter in the main RAM 203 is equal to 0. If the main CPU 201 determines that the performance change counter is equal to 0, it transfers processing to S7025-6, and if it determines that the performance change counter is not equal to 0, it transfers processing to S7025-7.

In S7025-6, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 236 (1).

In S7025-7, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 236 (2).

In S7025-8, the main CPU 201 determines whether the current game state is the first time-shortened game state. If the main CPU 201 determines that the current game state is the first time-shortened game state, it transfers processing to S7025-9, and if it determines that the current game state is not the first time-shortened game state, it transfers processing to S7025-12.

In S7025-9, the main CPU 201 determines whether the current change in the special symbol is the final change in the first time-saving game state. If the main CPU 201 determines that the current change in the special symbol is the final change in the first time-saving game state, it transfers processing to S7025-10, and if the main CPU 201 determines that the current change in the special symbol is not the final change in the first time-saving game state, it transfers processing to S7025-11.

In S7025-10, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 237 (1).

In S7025-11, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 237 (2).

In S7025-12, the main CPU 201 determines whether the current change in the special symbol is the final change in the time-saving game state. If the main CPU 201 determines that the current change in the special symbol is the final change in the time-saving game state, it transfers processing to S7025-13, and if the main CPU 201 determines that the current change in the special symbol is not the final change in the time-saving game state, it transfers processing to S7025-14.

In S7025-13, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table J4 shown in FIG. 237 (4).

In S7025-14, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 237 (3).

In S7025-15, the main CPU 201 refers to the variation pattern table of the determined special symbol, and determines the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the type of special symbol (type of starting information), the result of the special symbol winning determination process in S7022, and the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for effect selection as the starting information of the special symbol shifted to the special symbol determination area (0).

[9-4-5. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, a special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247) will be described with reference to Fig. 250. Fig. 250 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display end process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S7041, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", it ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "1", it transfers the process to S7042.

In S7042, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol determination time setting process to set the symbol determination time for the special symbol. In this special symbol determination time setting process, the symbol determination time for the special symbol is determined based on the game state and the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win or lose). In this embodiment, as shown in the special pattern change pattern tables of Figures 236 and 237, when in a normal game state, the pattern determination time of the special pattern is determined to be the first pattern determination time of 540 ms, when it is the final change of the first time-saving game state, the pattern determination time of the special pattern is determined to be the extremely long second pattern determination time of 89,000 ms, when it is the final change of the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state and the special pattern hit determination process results in a miss, the pattern determination time of the special pattern is determined to be the third pattern determination time of 15,000 ms, and when it is a time-saving game state other than those mentioned above, the pattern determination time of the special pattern is determined to be the fourth pattern determination time of 540 ms. After that, the main CPU 201 sets the symbol determination time of the determined special symbol to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, and causes the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 to display the special symbol in a stopped state. After executing the process of S7042, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7043.

The time it takes for the special symbol to be determined may be determined based on the variation pattern of the special symbol, or based only on the game state. Furthermore, a predetermined symbol determination time (e.g., 540 msec) may be determined.

In S7043, the main CPU 201 performs time-saving management processing. In the seventh pachinko game machine, when the variable display of the special symbol is finished, a ceiling counter update processing is performed in which 1 is added to the ceiling counter, and a time-saving counter update processing is performed in which 1 is subtracted from the time-saving count counter. When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the time-saving flag is set to 2 (the time-saving flag is turned on), which indicates the B time-saving game state, and the time-saving count counter is set to a specified number of times, and transition control is performed to the B time-saving game state. In addition, when the time-saving count counter becomes 0, the time-saving flag is cleared (the time-saving flag is set to 0), and transition control is performed from the time-saving game state to the normal game state. Details of this time-saving management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 251. After executing the processing of S7043, the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S7044.

In S7044, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", after the special symbol variable display end process is completed, the special symbol game determination process (see S7015 in FIG. 247) is performed. After executing the process of S7044, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7045.

In S7045, the main CPU 201 executes a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect stop command. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S7045, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7046.

In S7046, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the determined symbol counter. As described above in the explanation of the first to third pachinko gaming machines, the determined symbol counter is a counter for counting the number of times a special symbol has been determined (the number of times a special symbol game has been played), but it may also manage the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions, such as the number of times a special symbol game has remained or the number of times a time-saving game has remained. After executing the process of S7046, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247).

[9-4-6. Time-saving management process]
Next, a time-saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol variable display end process (see Fig. 250) will be described with reference to Fig. 251. Fig. 251 is a flow chart showing an example of the time-saving management process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S7043-1, the main CPU 201 performs a time-saving counter update process to update the time-saving counter. In particular, the seventh pachinko gaming machine differs in that the "time-saving counter" in the main RAM 203 is made up of two types of counters: a "first time-saving counter" corresponding to the total number of time-saving times for the special symbols, and a "second time-saving counter" corresponding to the number of time-saving times for the second special symbol. Details of this time-saving counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 252. After executing the process of S7043-1, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7043-2.

In S7043-2, the main CPU 201 performs a ceiling counter update process to update the ceiling counter. This ceiling counter update process adds 1 to the ceiling counter when the ceiling count prohibition flag is off, and is the same as the ceiling counter update process shown in FIG. 35 of the first pachinko gaming machine. After executing the process of S7043-2, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7043-3.

In S7043-3, the main CPU 201 performs a time-saving transition judgment process to judge whether to transition to the B time-saving game state. This time-saving transition judgment process is a process for preparing to transition to the B time-saving game state by turning on the ceiling flag and the ceiling count prohibition flag when the ceiling counter reaches a ceiling value (for example, 599 times), and is similar to the time-saving transition judgment process shown in FIG. 37 for the first pachinko game machine. However, since the seventh pachinko game machine is not controlled to a high probability game state, the time-saving transition judgment process executed in the seventh pachinko game machine does not turn on the probability variable flag, and the on/off judgment of the probability variable flag is judged as "probability variable flag off". After executing the process of S7043-3, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7043-4.

In S7043-4, the main CPU 201 performs a time-saving transition process to transition to the B time-saving gaming state. This time-saving transition process transitions to the B time-saving gaming state when the ceiling flag is on, and is the same as the time-saving transition process shown in FIG. 38 of the first pachinko gaming machine. After executing the process of S7043-4, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7043-5.

However, the time-saving transition process executed in the seventh pachinko gaming machine differs in some respects from the time-saving transition process shown in Figure 38 of the first pachinko gaming machine.
The first difference is that since the seventh pachinko gaming machine is not controlled to a high probability gaming state, the time-saving transition process executed in the seventh pachinko gaming machine does not turn on the high probability flag, and the on/off determination of the high probability flag is determined as "high probability flag off."
In addition, as a second difference, since the seventh pachinko gaming machine is not controlled to the C time-saving gaming state, the on/off determination of the time-saving hit flag is always determined as "the time-saving hit flag is off."
As a third difference, the setting contents set in the B time-saving control mode determination process (S208 shown in FIG. 38) are different. In the B time-saving control mode determination process of the seventh pachinko game machine, the time-saving flag = 2 indicating the B time-saving game state is set (the time-saving flag is on), and the "first time-saving counter = 11 (total number of time-saving times of special symbols = 11)" and the "second time-saving counter = 5 (number of time-saving times of the second special symbol = 5)" are determined so as to be the same end condition as the A time-saving end condition of the second time-saving game state. In addition, the number of time-saving times may be determined for the first time-saving counter and the second time-saving counter so as to be the end condition different from the A time-saving end condition of the second time-saving game state.

In S7043-5, the main CPU 201 determines whether the first time-saving counter or the second time-saving counter is equal to 0. If the main CPU 201 determines that the time-saving counter is equal to 0, the process proceeds to S7043-6. If the main CPU 201 determines that the time-saving counter is not equal to 0, the process proceeds to S7043-10.

In S7043-6, the main CPU 201 clears the time-saving information. Here, the time-saving information includes clearing (setting to 0) the "first time-saving counter", the "second time-saving counter", the "time-saving flag" for identifying whether the game state is a normal game state, an A-time-saving game state, or a B-time-saving game state, and the "A-time-saving flag" for identifying the A-time-saving game state as a first time-saving game state or a second time-saving game state. After executing the process of S7043-6, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7043-7.

In S7043-7, the main CPU 201 refers to the second special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203 and determines whether the reserved number of second special patterns is > 0 (whether start information for the second special pattern is stored in any of the second special pattern start memory areas (1) to (3)). If the main CPU 201 determines that the reserved number of second special patterns is > 0, it transfers processing to S7043-8, and if it determines that the reserved number of second special patterns is not > 0, it transfers processing to S7043-10.

In S7043-8, the main CPU 201 turns on the special 2 control period flag. This "special 2 control period flag" is a flag that identifies whether or not the "second normal game state" is in effect, and when the special 2 control period flag is on, it indicates that the second normal game state is in effect. After executing the process of S7043-8, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7043-10.

In S7043-10, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203 are confirmed and updated. Then, a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state is performed. In particular, in this embodiment, depending on whether the special 2 control period flag is on or off, the normal game state can be identified as being the "first normal game state" or the "second normal game state" and a game state designation command can be generated. After executing the process of S7043-10, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7043-11.

In S7043-11, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a time-saving transition command when transitioning to a time-saving gaming state. The time-saving transition command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After processing S7043-11, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving management process and returns the process to the special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 250).

[9-4-7. Time-saving counter update process]
Next, a time-saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 during the time-saving management process (see FIG. 251) will be described with reference to Fig. 252. Fig. 252 is a flow chart showing an example of the time-saving counter update process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S7043-21, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time-saving flag is on (time-saving flag is other than 0). If the main CPU 201 determines that the time-saving flag is on, it transfers the process to S7043-22, and if it determines that the time-saving flag is not on, it ends the current time-saving counter update process.

In S7043-22, the main CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the "first time-saving counter" in the main RAM 203 to update it. After executing the process of S7043-22, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7043-23.

In S7043-23, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start information shifted to the special symbol determination area (0) of the main RAM 203 is start information for the second special symbol.
If the main CPU 201 determines that it is start information for the second special pattern, it transfers processing to S7043-24, and if it determines that it is not start information for the second special pattern, it terminates this time-saving counter update processing.

In S7043-24, the main CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the "second time-saving counter" in the main RAM 203 to update it. After executing the process of S7043-24, the main CPU 201 ends the current time-saving counter update process.

[9-4-8. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, a special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247) will be described with reference to Fig. 253. Fig. 253 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game determination process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S7051, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", it ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "2", it transfers the process to S7052.

In S7052, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot. If the main CPU 201 determines that a jackpot has been reached, it transfers processing to S7054, and if it determines that a jackpot has not been reached, it transfers processing to S7061.

In S7054, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for a jackpot. In this processing, an external signal (e.g., a jackpot signal according to the type of special symbol) is generated that is output to the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 232 for both) via the external terminal board 184 when a jackpot occurs. The generated external signal is then output to the external terminal board 184. After executing the processing of S7054, the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S7055.

In S7055, the main CPU 201 refers to the win type determination table shown in FIG. 235, determines the maximum number of rounds in the jackpot game state according to the jackpot "selection symbol command", and performs processing to set the determined maximum number of rounds as the upper limit value of the number of jackpot rounds in the main RAM 203. After executing processing of S7055, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S7056.

In S7056, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot status display process. In this jackpot status display process, round display LED data corresponding to the maximum number of rounds determined as described above is set, and right hit instruction data that notifies the player to hit to the right is set. After executing the process of S7056, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7057.

In S7057, the main CPU 201 performs game status management processing. In the game status management processing when it is determined that a jackpot has been reached, the main CPU 201 performs processing to clear the time-saving flag and the time-saving counters (the first time-saving counter and the second time-saving counter). After executing the processing of S7057, the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S7058.

In S7058, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S7058, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7059.

In S7059, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", the process of preparing to open the large prize opening (see S7018 in FIG. 247) will be performed after the special symbol game determination process is completed. After executing the process of S7059, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7059.

In S7060, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a jackpot start display command. After executing the process of S7060, the main CPU 201 ends the current special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247).

In S7061, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not there has been a small win. If the main CPU 201 determines that there has been a small win, it transfers processing to S7063, and if it determines that there has not been a small win (i.e., a miss), it transfers processing to S7071.

In S7063, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for a small win. In this processing, an external signal (e.g., a small win signal, etc.) is generated that is output to the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 232 for both) via the external terminal board 184 when a small win occurs. The generated external signal is then output to the external terminal board 184.
After executing the process of S7063, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7064.

In S7064, the main CPU 201 refers to the win type determination table shown in FIG. 235, determines the maximum number of times to be opened in the small win game state in response to the "selected symbol command", and performs processing to set the determined maximum number of times to the upper limit of the number of times to be opened for small wins in the main RAM 203. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of times to be opened for small wins set in this processing is, for example, 16 times. After executing the processing of S7064, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S7066.

In S7065, the main CPU 201 performs a small win status display process. In this small win status display process, right hit instruction data is set to notify the player that a right hit is to be performed. After executing the process of S7065, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7066.

In S7066, the main CPU 201 performs game status management processing. In the game status management processing when it is determined that a small win has occurred, the main CPU 201 performs processing to clear the time-saving flag and the time-saving counters (the first time-saving counter and the second time-saving counter). After executing the processing of S7066, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S7067.

In S7067, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S7067, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7068.

In S7068, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "3". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", the small win game state setting process (see S7016 in FIG. 247) will be performed after the special symbol game determination process is completed. After executing the process of S7068, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7069.

In S7069, the main CPU 201 processes the transmission reservation process for the small win start display command. After executing the process of S7069, the main CPU 201 ends the current special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247).

In S7071, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 254. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 247).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S7051 to S7071) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[9-4-9. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, a special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 253) will be described with reference to FIG. 254. FIG. 254 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game ending process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S7072, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game ends and it becomes possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, i.e., the next special symbol game. After executing the process of S7072, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7073.

In S7073, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. In addition, in the game state designation parameter setting process in the special pattern game end process, the start information stored in the special pattern determination area (0) in the main RAM 203 is cleared. After executing the process of S7073, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7074.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the game state designation parameter setting process in the special pattern game end process, the second special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203 is referenced, and if the start information of the second special pattern is not stored in any of the second special pattern start memory areas (1) to (3) (number of reserved second special patterns = 0), the flag is turned off during the special 2 control period.

In S7074, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol game end command. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After processing S7074, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 253).

[9-4-10. Small hit game state setting process]
Next, referring to Fig. 255, the small win game state setting process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 247) will be described. Fig. 255 is a flow chart showing an example of the small win game state setting process in the seventh pachinko game machine.

In S7081, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", it ends the small win game state setting process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "3", it transfers the process to S7082.

In S7082, the main CPU 201 refers to the win type determination table shown in FIG. 235 and determines the opening mode of the second large prize opening 7151 as the opening mode of the small prize game state, as well as the operation mode of the V shutter 7159 that opens and closes the V prize opening 7156. In this embodiment, the operation mode of the V shutter 7159 is determined to be an operation mode that opens the V prize opening 7156 from the time the second large prize opening 7151 is opened. After executing the process of S7082, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7083.

In S7083, the main CPU 201 performs a second large prize opening opening/closing control process. In this second large prize opening opening/closing control process, opening/closing pattern data (e.g., time-series control data such as the opening time, wait time, and maximum number of openings of the second large prize opening 7151) is generated to open and close the second large prize opening 7151 based on the opening mode of the determined small win game state. Then, control based on the generated opening/closing pattern data is started. After executing the process of S7083, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7084.

In S7084, the main CPU 201 performs V prize opening/closing control processing. In this V prize opening/closing control processing, operation pattern data (e.g., time-series control data such as the opening time, wait time, and maximum number of openings of the V prize opening 7156) is generated for opening and closing the V prize opening 7156 based on the determined operation mode of the V shutter 7159. Then, control based on the generated operation pattern data is started. After executing the processing of S7084, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S7085.

In S7085, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S7085), the small win game state control process (see S7017 in FIG. 247) will be performed after the small win game state setting process is completed. After executing the process of S7085, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7086.

In S7086, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. The main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs a process of confirming and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, the main CPU 201 performs a process of reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S7086, the main CPU 201 ends the small win game state setting process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247).

[9-4-11. Small hit game state control process]
Next, referring to Fig. 256, the small win game state control process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 247) will be described. Fig. 256 is a flow chart showing an example of the small win game state control process in the seventh pachinko game machine.

In S7091, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", it ends the small win game state control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "4", it transfers the process to S7092.

In S7092, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of game balls that entered the second large prize opening 7151 (number of winning balls in the second large prize opening 7151) is the maximum number of winning balls when the second large prize opening 7151 is opened by the operation of the second special power shutter 7154. In this process, it is determined whether the value of the second large prize opening counter counted by the second large prize opening count switch 7152 (see FIG. 232) is the predetermined maximum number of winning balls for the second large prize opening 7151 (e.g. 10 balls).

If the main CPU 201 determines in S7092 that the number of winnings at the second large winning slot 7151 is not the maximum number of winnings, it transfers processing to S7093, and if the main CPU 201 determines in S7092 that the number of winnings at the second large winning slot 7151 is the maximum number of winnings, it transfers processing to S7094.

In S7093, the main CPU 201 determines whether all opening modes of the second large prize opening 7151 have been completed. In this process, it is determined whether control based on the opening/closing pattern data generated in the process of S7084 (see FIG. 255) has been completed.

If the main CPU 201 determines in S7093 that all opening modes of the second large prize opening 7151 have not been completed, it ends the small win game state control process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 247), and if it determines in S7093 that all opening modes of the second large prize opening 7151 have been completed, it transfers the process to S7094.

In S7094, the main CPU 201 performs processing to close the second large prize opening 7151. After executing processing of S7094, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S7095.

In S7095, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a V winning has been detected. In this process, it determines whether or not a game ball has passed through the V winning hole 7156 within a specified time (i.e., whether or not detection has occurred by the V winning hole switch 7157).

If the main CPU 201 determines in S7095 that a V winning was detected, it transfers processing to S7097, and if it determines in S7095 that a V winning was not detected, it transfers processing to S7105.

In S7097, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for a jackpot from the second route. In this processing, an external signal (e.g., a jackpot signal according to the type of special symbol) is generated that is output to the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 232 for both) via the external terminal board 184 when a jackpot occurs. The generated external signal is then output to the external terminal board 184. After executing the processing of S7097, the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S7098.

In S7098, the main CPU 201 refers to the win type determination table shown in FIG. 235, determines the maximum number of rounds in the big win game state according to the "selection symbol command" of the small win, and performs processing to set the determined maximum number of rounds as the upper limit value of the number of big win rounds in the main RAM 203. After executing the processing of S7098, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S7099.

In S7099, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. By performing this process, the opening of the second large prize opening 7151 (i.e., the operation of the second special electric shutter 7154), which was first performed based on a small prize, is processed as the first round of round play. In other words, the large prize play state that is executed when it is determined that a V prize has been detected (S7095 is determined as YES), will start from the second round of round play. After performing the process of S7099, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7100.

In S7100, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot status display process. In this jackpot status display process, round display LED data corresponding to the maximum number of rounds determined as described above is set, and right hit instruction data that notifies the player to hit to the right is set. After executing the process of S7100, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7101.

In S7101, the main CPU 201 performs game status management processing. In the game status management processing when it is determined that a jackpot has been hit, the main CPU 201 performs processing to clear the time-saving flag and the time-saving counters (the first time-saving counter and the second time-saving counter). After executing the processing of S7101, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S7102.

In S7102, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S7102, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7103.

In S7103, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", the process of preparing to open the large prize opening (Figure 247) will be performed after the special symbol game judgment process is completed. After executing the process of S7103, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7104.

In S7104, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a V hit start display command. After executing the process of S7104, the main CPU 201 ends the small hit game state control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247).

In S7105, the main CPU 201 performs processing to reserve the transmission of a small win end display command. After executing processing in S7105, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S7106.

In S7106, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this processing, the special symbol game end processing described with reference to FIG. 254 is performed. After executing the processing of S7106, the main CPU 201 ends the small win game state control processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 247).

[9-4-12. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, referring to Fig. 257, a special prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 247) will be described. Fig. 257 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening preparation process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S7111, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5." If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5," it ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "5," it transfers the process to S7112.

In S7112, the main CPU 201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of rounds played in the jackpot game state. The round counter count value (round counter value) is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S7112, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7113.

In S7113, the main CPU 201 determines whether the loaded round counter value is the upper limit for the number of jackpot rounds.

If the main CPU 201 determines in S7113 that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened is the upper limit, it transfers processing to S7114, and if the main CPU 201 determines in S7113 that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened is not the upper limit, it transfers processing to S7117.

In S7114, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "7." In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7," the jackpot game state end process (FIG. 247) is performed after the jackpot opening preparation process is completed. After executing S7114, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7115.

In S7115, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S7115, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7116.

In S7116, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a jackpot end display command. The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After processing S7116, the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247).

In S7117, the main CPU 201 performs processing to add 1 to the round counter value. After executing processing of S7117, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S7118.

In S7118, the main CPU 201 performs a process of selecting the large prize opening to be opened. In this process, the first large prize opening 7131 is selected as the large prize opening to be opened for the large prize game state. Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a large prize and the large prize game control process is started because the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small prize, and if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small prize and the large prize game control process is started because a V win has been detected, the second large prize opening 7151 may be selected as the large prize opening to be opened instead of the first large prize opening 7131. After executing the process of S7118, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7119.

In S7119, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the large prize opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the first large prize opening 7131 is opened, the maximum opening time of the first large prize opening 7131, the maximum number of prizes won by the first large prize opening 7131, etc. are set. Note that this is not intended to exclude cases where the first large prize opening 7131 is opened multiple times in one round. In this case, however, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of times the first large prize opening 7131 is opened and closed as separate processes. After executing the process of S7119, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7120.

In S7120, the main CPU 201 performs a process for generating opening control data. In this process, opening control data for opening the first large prize opening 7131 is generated based on the information set in the large prize opening related various setting process in S7119 above. Then, control based on the generated opening control data is started. After executing the process of S7120, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7121.

In S7121, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "6". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6", the large prize opening opening control process (see FIG. 247) will be performed after the large prize opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S7121, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7122.

In S7122, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S7122, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7123.

In S7123, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of the large prize opening display command. The large prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S7123, the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247).

[9-4-13. Large prize opening control process]
Next, referring to Fig. 258, a special prize opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 247) will be described. Fig. 258 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening control process in the seventh pachinko game machine.

In S7131, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "6". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", it ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "6", it transfers the process to S7132.

In S7132, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of game balls that entered the first large prize opening 7131 when the first large prize opening 7131 was opened (number of winning balls in the first large prize opening 7131) is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value of the first large prize opening counter counted by the first large prize opening count switch 7132 (see FIG. 232) is the predetermined maximum number of winning balls for the first large prize opening 7131 (e.g., 7 balls).

If the main CPU 201 determines in S7132 that the number of winnings at the first large winning slot 7131 is not the maximum number of winnings, it transfers processing to S7133, and if the main CPU 201 determines in S7132 that the number of winnings at the first large winning slot 7131 is the maximum number of winnings, it transfers processing to S7134.

In S7133, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the first large prize opening 7131 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the large prize opening related various setting process (see S7119 in FIG. 257) has elapsed.

If the main CPU 201 determines in S7133 that the maximum opening time of the first large prize opening 7131 has not elapsed, it ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247). Also, if the main CPU 201 determines in S7133 that the maximum opening time of the first large prize opening 7131 has elapsed, it transfers the process to S7134.

In S7134, the main CPU 201 performs processing to close the first large prize opening 7131. After executing processing of S7134, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S7135.

In S7135, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the large prize opening control processing is completed, the large prize opening opening preparation processing (see FIG. 257) is performed again. After executing the processing of S7135, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S7136.

In S7136, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S7136, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7137.

In S7137, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving transmission of an inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S7137, the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening control process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247).

[9-4-14. Big win game state end process]
Next, a big win game state end process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247) will be described with reference to Fig. 259. Fig. 259 is a flow chart showing an example of a big win game state end process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S7141, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "7." If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "7," it ends the jackpot game state end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "7," it transfers the process to S7142.

In S7142, the main CPU 201 executes a special symbol game end setting process. In this special symbol game end setting process, various flag data used in the big win game state and the values of various counters (e.g., round counter, big prize slot winning counter, etc.) are set or reset. After executing S7142, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7143.

In S7143, the main CPU 201 performs a state setting process after the end of the jackpot. In this state setting process after the end of the jackpot, the main CPU 201 refers to the win type determination table shown in FIG. 235, and determines the mode of the game state after the jackpot game state (time-saving flag and number of time-saving times) based on the selected symbol command determined in the special symbol determination process in S7023 above and the game state data at the time of winning that indicates the game state at the time of winning set in the win type determination process in S7024 above, and sets the data of the determined game state mode. After executing the process of S7143, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7144.

Specifically, if the game state at the time of winning is normal game state and the selected symbol command is "z1", the time-saving flag is set to 1 (time-saving flag is turned on), the first time-saving count counter is set to 7, and the second time-saving count counter is set to 1. Also, if the game state at the time of winning is normal game state and the selected symbol command is "z2-8", the time-saving flag is set to 1 (time-saving flag is turned on), the first time-saving count counter is set to 11, and the second time-saving count counter is set to 5. And, if the game state at the time of winning is time-saving game state, the time-saving flag is set to 1 (time-saving flag is turned on) for all selected symbol commands, the first time-saving count counter is set to 7, and the second time-saving count counter is set to 1.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the A time-saving flag is set to 1 in order to identify the A time-saving game state in which the first time-saving counter is set to 7 and the second time-saving counter is set to 1 as the "first time-saving game state," and the A time-saving flag is set to 2 in order to identify the A time-saving game state in which the first time-saving counter is set to 11 and the second time-saving counter is set to 5 as the "second time-saving game state." Then, a game state designation command can be generated based on the A time-saving flag.

In S7144, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this processing, the special symbol game end processing described with reference to FIG. 254 is performed. After executing the processing of S7144, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot game state end processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 187).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 set an interrupt prohibited section and perform the above-mentioned jackpot game state end processing within the interrupt prohibited section.

[9-6-15. Normal symbol control process]
Next, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 in the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 260. It goes without saying that, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in Fig. 260, the main CPU 201 stores the start information of the normal symbol, and judges whether the judgment start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, as in the special symbol control process.

Figure 260 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. Note that the numbers ("0" to "4") written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in Figure 260 are control state numbers for the normal symbols. The main CPU 201 progresses the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the waiting time for normal symbols is 0 (S7300).

If it is determined in S7300 that the waiting time for the normal symbol is not 0, the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process and transfers the process to S41 (see FIG. 21) of the main control main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7301.

In S7301, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing the process of S7301, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7310. The main CPU 201 performs the process of S7310 and subsequent processes based on the control state number read in the process of S7301.

In S7310, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display start processing. This S7310 processing is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". Details of this normal symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 261. Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S7320.

In S7320, the main CPU 201 performs processing to end the variable display of normal symbols. This processing of S7320 is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S7330.

In this normal symbol variable display end process, the main CPU 201 judges whether the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, and when it judges that the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, it sets the predetermined normal symbol pattern determination time (for example, 540 msec as shown in FIG. 243) to the waiting time of the normal symbol in the main RAM 203, and sets the control state number of the normal symbol to "2". This waiting time of the normal symbol is subtracted as a normal symbol timer counter in the system timer interrupt process that is performed at a cycle of, for example, 2 msec. If the variable display time of the normal symbol has not ended, it holds the control state number of the normal symbol at "1" and waits for the variable display time of the normal symbol to end.

The pattern determination time for normal patterns may differ depending on the type of normal pattern, or may differ depending on the game state. For example, in the normal game state, the pattern determination time may be the fifth pattern determination time (e.g., 540 msec), and in the time-saving game state, the pattern determination time may be the sixth pattern determination time (e.g., 132 msec) that is shorter than the fifth pattern determination time.

In S7330, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol gameplay determination processing. This S7330 processing is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S7340.

In this normal symbol game judgment process, the main CPU 201 performs a judgment process of the derived result of the normal symbol (for example, normal symbol hit or normal symbol miss). Then, if the result of the normal symbol hit judgment process is a normal symbol hit, the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric device 7146 is performed, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "3". On the other hand, if the result of the normal symbol hit judgment process is a miss, the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric device 7146 is not performed, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "0".

In the process of setting the opening pattern of the normal electric device 7146, the opening pattern (number of times to open, opening time, wait time, etc.) of the normal electric device 7146 is determined based on the game state and the normal symbol selection symbol data by referring to the opening pattern determination table of the normal electric device shown in FIG. 242, and the determined opening pattern is set. After that, the main CPU 201 transmits to the sub-CPU 301 a normal electric device opening pattern command corresponding to the determined opening pattern of the normal electric device 7146.

In S7340, the main CPU 201 performs the normal electric role release process. This S7340 process is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7350.

In this normal electric device opening process, the main CPU 201 opens the second start hole 7140 according to the opening pattern of the normal electric device 7146 determined in the normal symbol game judgment process of S7330, and closes the second start hole 7140 when a specified number of game balls for normal power (e.g., one ball) enter the second start hole 7140 or when all opening patterns of the normal electric device 7146 have ended. Then, when the opening process of the normal electric device 7146 has ended, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "4".

In S7350, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit end processing. This S7350 processing is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 ends this normal symbol hit end processing, it sets the control state number of the normal symbol to "0", ends the normal symbol control processing, and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see Figures 20 to 23).

In this normal symbol winning end process, the main CPU 201 performs a process to reset (clear) various parameters related to the normal symbol determined in steps S7310 to S7340 above, and various random number values stored in the normal symbol determination area.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the normal symbol control process (S7300 to S7350) described above within the interrupt prohibited section.

[9-6-16. Normal symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to Fig. 261, details of the normal symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in the normal symbol control process (see Fig. 260) will be described. Fig. 261 is a flow chart showing an example of the normal symbol variable display start process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 261, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the normal pattern is "0" (S7311).

If it is determined in S7311 that the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 260). On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the normal symbol is "0", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7312.

In S7312, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of the start information of the normal pattern. In this process, the start information stored in the normal pattern start memory area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the normal pattern determination area (0), and the start information stored in the normal pattern start memory area (2) to the normal pattern start memory area (4) is shifted to the normal pattern start memory area (1) to the normal pattern start memory area (3). After executing the process of S7312, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7313.

In S7313, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol winning judgment process. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol winning judgment table shown in FIG. 240, and determines winning/losing judgment value data ("normal symbol winning" or "normal symbol losing") based on the game state and the normal symbol winning judgment random number value stored in the normal symbol judgment area (0). After executing S7313, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7314.

In S7314, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol determination process. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 241, and determines the "normal symbol selection symbol data" based on the above-mentioned winning/losing determination value data (the result of the normal symbol winning/losing determination process) and the normal symbol random number value stored in the normal symbol determination area (0). After executing S7314, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7315.

In S7315, the main CPU 201 performs processing to determine the normal symbol variation pattern. In this processing, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 243, and determines the normal symbol variation pattern and normal symbol variation display time based on the game state and the normal symbol selection symbol data. After executing the processing of S7315, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S7316.

In S7316, the main CPU 201 performs a process for setting the variable display time of the normal pattern. In this process, the variable display time of the normal pattern determined in the normal pattern variable pattern determination process (S7315) is set to the waiting time of the normal pattern in the main RAM 203, and the normal pattern display unit 161 is caused to start displaying the variable normal pattern. This waiting time of the normal pattern is decremented as a normal pattern timer counter in a system timer interrupt process that is performed, for example, at 2 msec intervals. After executing the process of S7316, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7317.

In S7317, the main CPU 201 performs a process to set the control state number of the normal symbol to "1". In this way, by performing a process to set the control state number of the normal symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after this normal symbol variable display start process is completed, a normal symbol variable display end process (see S7320 in FIG. 260) is performed. After executing the process of S7317, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7318.

In S7318, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of the normal symbol variation pattern command. The normal symbol variation pattern command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

[9-4-17. Switch input detection process]
Next, a switch input detection process executed by the main CPU 201 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 45) will be described with reference to Fig. 262. Fig. 262 is a flow chart showing an example of the switch input detection process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

Compared to the first pachinko game machine, the seventh pachinko game machine has the additional configuration of a first large prize slot count switch 7132, a second large prize slot count switch 7152, and a V prize slot switch 7157, and therefore some of the above processing has been added.

In S7381, the main CPU 201 executes the first start port winning detection process. After executing the process of S7381, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7382.

In this first start port winning detection process, when the main CPU 201 detects a game ball entering the first start port 7120 by the first start port switch 7121, it sets payout information corresponding to the first start port 7120 and determines whether there is any free space in the first special pattern start memory area (1) to the first special pattern start memory area (4).
When it is determined that there is free space in the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory area (4), various random number values (for example, random number values for jackpot determination, random number values for symbol random number, random number values for reach determination, random number values for effect selection, etc.) are obtained as start information for the first special symbol, and the various random number values obtained are stored in one first special symbol determination area in a FIFO (First In, First Out) format. Then, a transmission reservation process is performed for a winning command for the first special symbol indicating the winning of the first start port 7120 and the number of reserved first special symbols. The winning command for the first special symbol reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in any of the first special pattern start memory areas (1) to (4), the first start port winning detection process will be terminated without acquiring various random number values.

In S7382, the main CPU 201 executes the second start port winning detection process. After executing the process of S7382, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7383.

In this second start port winning detection process, when the main CPU 201 detects a game ball entering the second start port 7140 by the second start port switch 7141, it sets payout information corresponding to the second start port 7140 and determines whether there is any free space in the second special pattern start memory area (1) to the second special pattern start memory area (3).
When it is determined that there is free space in the second special symbol start memory area (1) to the second special symbol start memory area (3), various random numbers (for example, random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for symbol random numbers, random numbers for reach determination, random numbers for effect selection, etc.) are obtained as start information for the second special symbol, and the various random numbers obtained are stored in a single second special symbol determination area in a FIFO format. Then, a transmission reservation process is performed for a winning command for the second special symbol indicating the winning of the second start port 7140 and the number of reserved second special symbols. The winning command for the second special symbol reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in any of the second special pattern start memory areas (1) to (3), the second start port winning detection process will be terminated without acquiring various random number values.

In addition, in this embodiment, there are four first special symbol start memory areas for the first special symbol, but there are three first special symbol start memory areas for the second special symbol. Therefore, the number of reserved first special symbols is four, and the number of reserved second special symbols is three. Note that the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols can be freely changed as needed, but it is preferable to keep it within four.

In S7383, the main CPU 201 performs a general prize opening passage detection process. In the general prize opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts etc. is set when a prize is won through the general prize opening 122. After executing the process of S7383, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7384.

In S7384, the main CPU 201 performs a first large prize opening passage detection process. In the first large prize opening passage detection process, when the first large prize opening count switch 7132 detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 7131, the main CPU 201 sets payout information corresponding to the first large prize opening 7131 and adds 1 to the first large prize opening counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the first large prize opening 7131 to update it. Then, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for a first large prize opening entry command indicating an entry into the first large prize opening 7131. The first large prize opening entry command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S7384, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7385.

In S7385, the main CPU 201 performs a second large prize opening passage detection process. In the second large prize opening passage detection process, when the second large prize opening count switch 7152 detects the entry of a game ball into the second large prize opening 7151, the main CPU 201 sets payout information corresponding to the second large prize opening 7151 and adds 1 to the second large prize opening counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the second large prize opening 7151 to update it. Then, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for a second large prize opening entry command indicating an entry into the second large prize opening 7151. The second large prize opening entry command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S7385, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7386.

In S7386, the main CPU 201 performs a V prize opening passage detection process. In the V prize opening passage detection process, when the main CPU 201 detects the passage of a gaming ball into the V prize opening 7156 by the V prize opening switch 7157, it turns on the V prize opening passage flag. Then, it performs a transmission reservation process for a V passage command indicating that the gaming ball has passed through the V prize opening 7156. The V passage command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Note that even if the gaming ball passes through the V prize opening 7156, no payout information is set. After executing the process of S7386, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7387.

In S7387, the main CPU 201 performs gate passage detection processing. After executing S7387, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S7388.

In this gate passage detection process, when the main CPU 201 detects the passage of the game ball through the passing gate 7126 by the passing gate switch 7127, it determines whether there is any free space in the normal pattern start memory area (1) to the normal pattern start memory area (4).
When it is determined that there is free space in the normal pattern start memory area (1) to the normal pattern start memory area (4), various random number values (for example, random number values for determining whether the normal pattern is a hit, pattern random number values of the normal pattern, etc.) are obtained as start information for the normal pattern, and the various obtained random number values are stored in one normal pattern start memory area in FIFO format.
On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in any of the normal pattern start memory areas (1) to (4), the gate passage detection process will be terminated without acquiring various random number values.

In S7388, the main CPU 201 performs a look-ahead command generation process. After executing the process of S7388, the main CPU 201 ends the current switch input detection process.

In this look-ahead command generation process, the look-ahead related data in FIG. 239 is referenced, and the various random number values obtained in the current first start port winning detection process or second start port winning detection process are analyzed based on the game state, and a look-ahead command is generated. As shown in the look-ahead related data in FIG. 239, in the time-saving game state, big win game state, and small win game state, only look-ahead commands based on the various random number values obtained in the second start port winning detection process (look-ahead commands for the second special pattern) can be generated. Then, a look-ahead command transmission reservation process is performed to transmit the generated look-ahead command to the sub-control circuit 300. The look-ahead command reserved for transmission in this process will be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

[9-5-1. Game state transition diagram]
Next, a transition of a game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 263. Fig. 263 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing a transition of a game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As described above, the "first normal game state" is a normal game state in which hitting from the left is considered the normal game mode, and while it is easy for a game ball to enter the first starting hole 7120, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 7140.

The "second normal game state" is the normal game state during the control period of the second special symbol that is performed based on the start information of the second special symbol that was stored in the second special symbol start memory area of the main RAM 203 when the time-saving game state ended (i.e., the normal game state during which the reserved number of second special symbols stored in the time-saving game state is being consumed). Here, the second normal game state may be either left-handed or right-handed as the regular game mode, but since the return rate of transitioning back to the second time-saving game state during the consumption of the reserved number of second special symbols is high (about 70%), right-handed play is set as the regular game mode (see FIG. 245).

In the time-saving game state consisting of the first to third time-saving game states, right-hand play is the normal game mode in all cases, and while it is difficult for a game ball to enter the first starting hole 7120, it is easy for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 7140. As described above, the time-saving game state when "time-saving number of times for the second special symbol = 1" is determined as the A time-saving end condition is called the "first time-saving game state", the time-saving game state when "time-saving number of times for the second special symbol = 5" is determined as the A time-saving end condition is called the "second time-saving game state", and the time-saving game state B is called the "third time-saving game state".

(Transition Control of First Normal Gaming State)
As shown in Fig. 263, in the first normal game state, when a game ball enters the first start hole 7120, a "jackpot" or "miss" is determined based on the start information of the first special symbol (see Fig. 233), and when a "jackpot" is determined, a jackpot game state is entered. Then, after the jackpot game state triggered by the start information of the first special symbol in the first normal game state ends, 90% of the game state is entered into the first time-saving game state, and 10% of the game state is entered into the second time-saving game state according to the selected symbol command (see Figs. 234 and 235).

Although not shown, in the first normal game state, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 7140 due to an irregular game mode or the like, a "big win", "small win" or "miss" is determined based on the start information of the second special pattern (see FIG. 233). If a "big win" is determined, the game state transitions to a big win game state, and if a "small win" is determined, the game state transitions to a small win game state. Then, after the big win game state triggered by the start information of the second special pattern in the first normal game state ends, all game states transition to the second time-saving game state (see FIG. 235).

In addition, in the first normal game state (including the second normal game state), after the number of times the special symbol changes display reaches 599, the game state transitions from the normal game state to the third time-saving game state.

(Transition Control of the First Time-Reduction Gaming State)
In the first time-saving game state, when a game ball enters the second start hole 7140, a "big win", a "small win" or a "miss" is determined (see FIG. 233), and if a "big win" is determined based on the start information of the second special symbol, the game state transitions to a big win game state, and if a "small win" is determined, the game state transitions to a small win game state. In particular, in this embodiment, when based on the start information of the second special symbol, a "small win" is determined with a high probability of about 1/3 regardless of the game state, and it is configured to be possible to transition to the big win game state via the second route from the small win game state.

Here, in the first time-saving game state, it is difficult for a game ball to enter the first start hole 7120, but there are cases where the reserved number of first special symbols stored during the normal game state remains. In such cases, a "jackpot" or "miss" is determined based on the start information of the first special symbol (see FIG. 233), and if a "jackpot" is determined, the game transitions to the jackpot game state.

If the game state when a big win or small win occurs is the first time-saving game state, the game will transition to the second time-saving game state after the big win game state ends (see Figure 235).

In addition, when in the first time-saving game state, if a "miss" is determined (non-winning) based on the start information of the second special symbol, the game state will transition from the first time-saving game state to the first normal game state.

Furthermore, when the A time-saving end condition "total number of times the special symbols have been shortened = 7 times" is met due to an irregular game mode or the like in the first time-saving game state, that is, when the game ball does not enter the second starting hole 7140 and 7 "miss" judgments (7 changes in the first special symbol) are made based on the start information of the first special symbol, the game state will transition from the first time-saving game state to the first normal game state.

(Transition control between second and third time-saving gaming states)
In the second time-saving play state or the third time-saving play state, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 7140, a "jackpot,""smallhit," or "miss" is determined based on the start information of the second special pattern (see Figure 233), and if a "jackpot" is determined, the game state transitions to a big hit game state, and if a "small hit" is determined, the game state transitions to a small hit game state.

Here, in the second or third time-saving game state, it is difficult for a game ball to enter the first starting hole 7120, but there are cases where the reserved number of first special symbols stored in the normal game state before transitioning to the second or third time-saving game state remains. In such cases, a "jackpot" or "miss" is determined based on the start information of the first special symbol (see FIG. 233), and if a "jackpot" is determined, a transition is made to the jackpot game state.

If the game state when a big win or small win is won is the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, the game state will transition to the second time-saving game state after the big win game state ends (see Figure 235).

In addition, if five "miss" judgments (five changes in the first special symbol) are made based on the start information of the second special symbol, or eleven "miss" judgments (eleven changes in the special symbol) are made based on the start information of the first special symbol or the start information of the second special symbol, the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state ends.

When the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state ends, if there are reserved numbers of the second special symbol (start information for the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol start memory area of the main RAM 203), the game state transitions to the second normal game state. On the other hand, when the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state ends, if there are no reserved numbers of the second special symbol (start information for the second special symbol is not stored in the second special symbol start memory area of the main RAM 203), the game state transitions to the first normal game state.

(Transition Control of Second Normal Gaming State)
In the second normal game state, a "big hit,""smallhit," or "miss" is determined based on the starting information of the second special pattern (see Figure 233), and if a "big hit" is determined, the game state transitions to a big hit game state, and if a "small hit" is determined, the game state transitions to a small hit game state.

Then, after the end of the jackpot gaming state triggered by the start information of the second special symbol in the second normal gaming state, the game transitions again to the second time-saving gaming state (see FIG. 235).

In addition, when the reserved number of second special symbols at the end of the second time-saving game state is consumed (when all the start information for the second special symbol stored in the second special symbol start memory area of the main RAM 203 is determined to be a "miss" and erased), the second normal game state ends and the game transitions to the first normal game state.

[9-5-2. Production flow]
Next, the outline of the effects performed in the seventh pachinko gaming machine will be described using the overall flow of the effects. Figure 264 shows an example of the flow of effects in the gaming state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

The effects performed in the seventh pachinko gaming machine include a variable effect consisting of a variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to special symbols displayed in the display area of the display device 7, a display effect of characters, etc., a sound effect output from the speaker 32, a lamp effect emitted from the group of LEDs 46, a special effect effect that drives the group of special effect symbols 58, and an effect of changing the operation mode of the effect button 54. Note that in this embodiment, the decorative symbols are composed of three main symbols, a left symbol, a center symbol, and a right symbol, and a sub-symbol that is much smaller than the main symbols. Note that the number and type of decorative symbols are not limited to this.

In addition, in the embodiment, the effect based on the drawing of the first special symbol is also called the "first special symbol effect," and the effect based on the drawing of the second special symbol is also called the "second special symbol effect."

(Effects in the First Normal Gaming State)
In the first normal game state, the effects that can be executed are different between the general effect state and the limited effect state.

In the general presentation state of the first normal game state, at least "normal variation," "normal reach," "super reach," and "ultra super reach" are configured to be executable as "first special symbol presentations," and at least "normal variation" and "card presentation" are configured to be executable as "second special symbol presentations."

In addition, in the limited presentation state of the first normal game state, at least "normal fluctuation" and "step-up reach" are configured to be executable as the "first special symbol presentation," and at least "normal fluctuation" and "card presentation" are configured to be executable as the "second special symbol presentation."

In addition, in the first normal game state, when the number of times the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner reaches the ceiling value of 599 spins, a "door effect" can be executed. Note that the "door effect" can also be executed in other game states.

In addition, as a preview effect of the "first special symbol effect" in the first normal game state, a "window preview" is configured to be executable during the change, and a "hold change preview" and a "flash preview" are configured to be executable as pre-reading effects during the advance change.

"Normal change" is a change in which all decorative symbols start changing at high speed and stop displaying in order, and can be performed when the special symbol lottery is lost.

"Normal reach", "super reach", and "ultra super reach" are exclusive effects for the first special symbol that can be executed in the normal performance state, and are reach effects that suggest that the lottery result for the first special symbol may be a jackpot. A "normal reach" is a reach effect that occurs when the left and right symbols are temporarily displayed as the same type of symbol, and as an example, it is a reach effect in which the middle symbol changes display at a slow speed. In a "normal reach", if the middle symbol is displayed as a different type of symbol from the left and right symbols, it is a miss, and if the middle symbol is displayed as the same type of symbol as the left and right symbols, it is a jackpot. In addition, a "normal reach" may develop into a "super reach" without the middle symbol being displayed as a stationary symbol, and is configured so that a "super reach" can further develop into a "ultra super reach".

According to the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 236(1),
The random number values for selecting the effects are set so that the expected probability of a jackpot increases in the order of "Normal Reach"<"SuperReach"<"Super Super Reach".

The "card effect" is an effect exclusive to the second special symbol, and is a reach effect that suggests that the lottery result for the second special symbol may be a big hit or a small hit. One example of the "card effect" is an effect in which a card with a specified pattern is displayed, and when the card is slowly flipped over, text suggesting a big hit or a small hit is displayed.

The "step-up reach" is a special effect for the first special symbol that can be executed in the limited effect state, and is a reach effect that suggests that the lottery result for the first special symbol may be a jackpot. As an example of a "step-up reach", a specific character is displayed that can grow from STEP 1 to STEP 3, and if it finally grows to STEP 3, it is a jackpot, and if it only grows to STEP 1 or STEP 2, it is a miss.

The "door effect" is an effect that can be executed regardless of the type of special symbol, its duration is indefinitely specified (there is no end time specified), and it is also an effect that suggests a transition between different game states. As an example of the "door effect", half-open doors are displayed from the left and right, and the half-open doors are displayed rattling for a specified period of time. When the doors close completely and then open completely again, the background etc. changes, and it is announced that the game state has transitioned.

In the first normal game state, when the number of times the special symbol changes display reaches the ceiling value of 599 spins, a "door effect" is executed, and from the next special symbol (600 spins), a notification is issued that the game has transitioned to the B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state).

A "window preview" is a presentation that, when a special symbol is being displayed in a changing state, predicts a change in the stage, the presentation content of the symbol presentation pattern, or the result of the special symbol drawing. As an example of a "window preview," a window is displayed in the display area of the display device 7, and a predetermined preview content is displayed in the window.

"Reserved change notice" is an example of a look-ahead effect, which suggests the results of the special symbol lottery and information about changes in the special symbols before the special symbol lottery is held by the display mode of a reserved image showing the number of reserved special symbols.

The "flash preview" is an example of a pre-reading effect, in which the LED group 46 emits a predetermined amount of light from the time when the winning ball enters the first starting hole 7120 until the fluctuation starts.

(Effects in the first time-saving gaming state)
In the first time-saving game state, at least a "boss battle effect," a "super-shortened variation," and a "door effect" are executable as the "first special pattern effect," and at least a "boss battle effect" is executable as the "second special pattern effect."

"Ultra-short change" refers to a change pattern in which all decorative patterns start to change at high speed and independently, and then all decorative patterns stop changing in an extremely short time (e.g. 200 ms).

The "boss battle effect" is a special effect that can be executed in the first time-saving play state, and is a reach effect that suggests that the result of the special pattern lottery may be a big hit or a small hit. As an example of a "boss battle effect", a boss character appears and faces off against the main character; if the main character wins ("boss battle effect (win)"), a big hit or a small hit will be obtained, and if the main character loses ("boss battle effect (lose)"), a miss will be obtained.

As described above, in the first time-saving play state, since "time-saving count for second special symbol = 1" is determined as the A time-saving end condition, a lottery is held for the second special symbol, and if it is a big win or a small win, the game moves to the second time-saving play state, and if it is a miss, the game moves to the first normal play state. Then, in the first time-saving play state, a lottery is held for the second special symbol, and if it is a big win or a small win, a "boss battle performance (win)" is executed, and if it is a miss, a "boss battle performance (lose)" is executed.

In addition, in the first time-saving game state, if there are still reserved numbers of the first special symbol stored during the normal game state remaining, a lottery is held for the first special symbol, and if there is a jackpot, a "boss battle performance (victory)" is executed, and if there is a miss, an "ultra-shortened time variation" is executed.

When the A time-saving end condition "total number of times special symbols have been shortened = 7 times" is met due to an irregular game mode or the like in the first time-saving game state, that is, when the game ball does not enter the second starting hole 7140 and the first special symbol is drawn 7 times, if there is a jackpot, a "boss battle effect (victory)" is executed, and if there is a miss, a "door effect" is executed. Here, when the "door effect" is executed in the first time-saving game state, a transition to the first normal game state is announced.

(Effects in the second and third time-saving game states)
At least a "Sengoku time effect" is configured to be executable other than the final change of the special symbols in the second time-shortened game state or the third time-shortened game state, and at least a "Sengoku time effect," a "door effect," and a "continuous battle entry effect" are configured to be executable in the final change of the special symbols in the second time-shortened game state or the third time-shortened game state.

"Sengoku Time Effects" refers to a series of effects that take place from the second or third time-saving game state to the small win game state, and the period that takes place from the second or third time-saving game state to the small win game state is also called "Sengoku Time." Details of this "Sengoku Time Effects" will be described later using Figures 288 and 289.

The "Continuous Battle Entry Effect" is a special effect that can be executed in the second or third time-saving play state, and is an effect that notifies the player that the second or third time-saving play state has ended (Sengoku Time has ended) and that a consecutive battle reach will be performed next time.

As described above, when the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state ends, if there are reserved numbers of the second special pattern, the game state transitions to the second normal game state, and if there are no reserved numbers of the second special pattern, the game state transitions to the first normal game state. Then, at the final change of the special pattern in the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, if there are reserved numbers of the second special pattern, a "continuous battle entry effect" is executed, and if there are no reserved numbers of the second special pattern, a "door effect" is executed. Here, when a "door effect" is executed in the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, a transition to the first normal game state is notified.

(Effects in the Second Normal Gaming State)
In the second normal gaming state, at least a "continuous battle presentation" is executable as the "second special symbol presentation".

The "continuous battle effect" is a special effect that can be executed in the second normal game state, and is a reach effect that suggests that the result of the lottery for the special symbol may be a big hit or a small hit. As an example of the "continuous battle effect", a rival character appears and the main character and the rival character face off against each other up to three times in succession; if the main character wins any of the battles ("continuous battle effect (win)"), it results in a big hit or a small hit, and if the main character loses ("continuous battle effect (lose)"), it results in a miss.

In addition to the effects shown in FIG. 264, this embodiment also includes various other effects during a jackpot, as well as multiple detailed stages that serve as the basis for the effects (the motifs of the effects), but these will be described in more detail later.

[9-6. Sub-control circuit]
In order to execute the above-mentioned effects, the control contents of the sub-control circuit 300 based on various commands etc. transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub-control circuit 300 will be described.

First, the details of the various tables stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 will be explained using Figures 265 to 277.

[9-6-1. Symbol Presentation Pattern Determination Table for First Normal Game State]
A symbol presentation pattern determination table E1 for determining a symbol presentation pattern in the first normal gaming state will be described. Fig. 265 shows an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table in the first normal gaming state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

"Performance pattern" refers to information that defines the display performance of characters, etc., audio performance, and performance of changes in the operation mode of the performance button 54. Also, "design performance pattern" refers to information that defines the display performance of related characters, audio performance, and performance of changes in the operation mode of the performance button 54, centering on the changing mode of the decorative pattern corresponding to the special pattern. In addition to the design performance pattern, various display performances such as preview performance patterns can be superimposed and executed.

As shown in FIG. 265, the symbol presentation pattern determination table E1 for the first normal game state associates the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200, the presentation stage that determines the presentation display state, the number of times the special symbol variation display has occurred counted since the normal game state began, the selection rate (first random number value), and the symbol presentation pattern.

Here, a "presentation stage" is information that defines the presentation display state of the presentation background, motif, etc. For example, "presentation stage 0" indicates the mountain village stage in the general presentation state of the first normal game state, "presentation stage 1" indicates the castle town stage in the general presentation state of the first normal game state, and "presentation stage 2" indicates the seaside stage in the limited presentation state of the first normal game state. Note that in this embodiment, only two stages are provided in the general presentation state of the first normal game state, but three or more different stages may be provided.

In addition, the "selection rate" corresponds to the first random number being within a predetermined range for the first random number value consisting of the first random number range, but for ease of explanation, it is described as selection rate. Note that the selection rate may include 0% in addition to 1-100%, and the term "selection rate of 0%" is not excluded. The above also applies to the "selection rate" in the tables shown in Figures 267 to 277, etc. In this embodiment, multiple types of random number values with different random number ranges are provided, and explanations of the types of random number values will be omitted as appropriate.

According to the symbol presentation pattern determination table E1 for the first normal game state shown in FIG. 265, even if the variation pattern command for the same special symbol is used, different symbol presentation patterns (different presentations) can be determined depending on the presentation stage.

According to the symbol presentation pattern determination table E1 in the first normal game state shown in FIG. 265, even if the special symbol variation pattern command is the same, different symbol presentation patterns (different presentations) can be determined according to the number of times the special symbol is varied. And when the number of times the special symbol is varied is 599 and the special symbol is selected by lottery as a "miss" (i.e., when moving to the B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state)), presentation pattern 100 for executing a door presentation is determined. Even if the number of times the special symbol is varied is 599, when the special symbol is selected by lottery as a "big hit" or "small hit", the game does not move to the B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state) but moves to the big hit game state or small hit game state, so that a symbol presentation pattern for executing a presentation suggesting a big hit or small hit (a card presentation in the case of the second special symbol presentation) is determined. Note that performance stage 2 is a dedicated stage in the limited performance state, and the number of times the special symbol is displayed will never be 599, so performance pattern 100 that executes the door performance will never be determined.

[9-6-2. Second normal game state start determination table]
When the second normal game state starts, a start time determination table for determining a symbol effect pattern determination table will be described. Figure 266 shows an example of a start time determination table for the second normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine.

In the second normal game state, when the second normal game state starts, i.e., when the first variable display of the second special symbol in the second normal game state starts, one symbol presentation pattern determination table is determined from among the multiple symbol presentation pattern determination tables, and when the variable display of the second special symbol starts thereafter, the symbol presentation pattern determination table that was already determined when the second normal game state started is referenced.

As shown in FIG. 266, the start determination table for the second normal game state associates the number of reserved second special symbols, the number of winning symbols among the reserved number of second special symbols, pull-back information, and symbol presentation pattern determination tables E2 to E8.

Here, "the number of winning symbols among the reserved number of second special symbols" refers to the number of start information (random number value for determining a big win) that is determined to be a big win or a small win stored in the second special symbol start memory area of the main RAM 203, and since the reserved number of second special symbols is set to a maximum of three, when the variable display of the second special symbol starts (one is subtracted), the reserved number of second special symbols is a maximum of two.

"Return information" refers to the change information that is determined to be a big hit or small hit first among the start information including the first change and reserved memory in the second normal game state, and the information that is determined to be a big hit or small hit first when the second special pattern change is displayed in the second normal game state is set to "1", the information that is determined to be a big hit or small hit first when the second special pattern change is displayed for the second time is set to "2", the information that is determined to be a big hit or small hit first when the second special pattern change is displayed for the third time is set to "3", and when there is no information that is determined to be a big hit or small hit, it is set to "0".

Then, from the "number of winning symbols among the reserved symbols of the second special symbol" and the "pullback information", it is possible to determine the "number of consecutive reserved symbols" that correspond to the number of times a jackpot or small jackpot will be determined again after the current jackpot game state (the jackpot game state transitioned from the small jackpot state) ends.

For this reason, the start time determination table for the second normal game state shown in FIG. 266 can be said to determine the pattern presentation pattern determination table for the second normal game state according to the order (number of times) of the variable display of the second special pattern that is first determined to be a big win or small win in the second normal game state and the number of reserved consecutive stocks.

[9-6-3. Second normal game state symbol effect pattern determination table]
The symbol presentation pattern determination tables E2 to E8 for determining the symbol presentation pattern in the second normal gaming state will be described below. Fig. 267 shows an example of the symbol presentation pattern determination table in the second normal gaming state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

The symbol presentation pattern determination table E2 in the second normal game state shown in FIG. 267 (1) is a table that is determined when all symbols are misses (pull-back information 0) and the number of reserved consecutive stocks is 0, and corresponds to the variation pattern command of the second special symbol received from the main control circuit 200, the number of reserved symbols of the second special symbol, the selection rate (first random number value), and the symbol presentation pattern.

In addition, according to the symbol presentation pattern determination table E2 for the second normal game state shown in FIG. 267 (1), even if the variation pattern command for the same special symbol is used, different symbol presentation patterns (different presentations) can be determined depending on the number of reserved second special symbols, and when the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 (final variation of the second normal game state), symbol presentation pattern R3 is determined in which a presentation indicating the end of the second normal game state is executed.

As shown in FIG. 267 (2), the symbol presentation pattern determination table E3 for the second normal game state is a table that is determined when one variation hit occurs (pull-back information 1) and the number of reserved consecutive stocks is 0, and the variation pattern command for the second special symbol received from the main control circuit 200, the selection rate (first random number value), and the symbol presentation pattern are associated with each other.

The symbol presentation pattern determination table E4 in the second normal game state shown in FIG. 267 (3) is a table that is determined when there is one variation hit (pull-back information 1) and the number of reserved consecutive stocks = 1, and corresponds to the variation pattern command of the second special symbol received from the main control circuit 200, the selection rate (first random number value), and the symbol presentation pattern.

The symbol presentation pattern determination table E5 in the second normal game state shown in FIG. 267 (4) is a table that is determined when there is one variation hit (pull-back information 1) and the number of reserved consecutive stocks = 2, and corresponds to the variation pattern command of the second special symbol received from the main control circuit 200, the selection rate (first random number value), and the symbol presentation pattern.

The symbol presentation pattern determination table E6 in the second normal game state shown in FIG. 267 (5) is a table that is determined when there is a 2-variation hit (pull-back information 2) and the number of reserved consecutive stocks = 0, and corresponds to the variation pattern command of the second special symbol received from the main control circuit 200, the selection rate (first random number value), and the symbol presentation pattern.

The symbol presentation pattern determination table E7 in the second normal game state shown in FIG. 267 (6) is a table that is determined when there is a 2-variation hit (pull-back information 2) and the number of reserved consecutive stocks = 1, and corresponds to the variation pattern command of the second special symbol received from the main control circuit 200, the selection rate (first random number value), and the symbol presentation pattern.

The symbol presentation pattern determination table E8 in the second normal game state shown in FIG. 267 (7) is a table that is determined when a 3-variation hit occurs (pull-back information 3) and the number of reserved consecutive stocks is 0, and corresponds to the variation pattern command of the second special symbol received from the main control circuit 200, the selection rate (first random number value), and the symbol presentation pattern.

And according to the symbol presentation pattern determination tables E2 to E8 for the second normal game state shown in FIG. 267, different symbol presentation patterns can be determined depending on the order of the variable display of the second special symbol that is first determined to be a big win or a small win (pull-back information) and the number of reserved consecutive stocks ("number of winning symbols among the reserved number of second special symbols" and "pull-back information").

[9-6-4. Symbol Presentation Pattern Determination Table for First Time-Reduction Game State]
A symbol presentation pattern determination table E9 for determining a symbol presentation pattern in the first time-saving gaming state will be described. Fig. 268 shows an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table in the first time-saving gaming state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 268, the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200 is associated with the selection rate (first random number value) and the symbol presentation pattern.

In addition, according to the symbol presentation pattern determination table E9 for the first time-saving game state shown in FIG. 268, when an irregular game mode is played and a first special symbol change pattern command (83H12H, see FIG. 237) corresponding to a miss transmitted at the final change of the first time-saving game state is received, a presentation pattern 100 for executing a door presentation is determined.

In addition, in this embodiment, the symbol presentation patterns C4 to C9 of the second special symbol determined at the time of the final change of the first time-saving game state are configured to execute a boss battle presentation over the variable display time of the second special symbol and the symbol determination time. Similarly, the presentation pattern 100 determined at the time of the final change of the first time-saving game state is configured to execute a door presentation over the variable display time of the first special symbol and the symbol determination time.

In addition, in this embodiment, the pattern presentation pattern C1 of the first special symbol corresponding to a jackpot is configured so that a boss battle presentation is executed over the time that the first special symbol is displayed, and when the first time-saving game state reaches its final change, the boss battle presentation is executed again over the time that the first special symbol is determined (the boss battle presentation is executed in a loop).

[9-6-5. Symbol presentation pattern determination table for the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state]
The symbol presentation pattern determination tables E10 and E11 for determining the symbol presentation pattern in the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state will be described. Fig. 269 is an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table other than the final change of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. Fig. 270 is an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table at the final change of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state in the seventh pachinko game machine.

(Other than the final change of the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state)
Except for the final change of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, the symbol presentation pattern determination table E10 shown in FIG. 269 is referenced.

The symbol presentation pattern determination table E10 shown in FIG. 269 associates the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200 with the presentation stage, the selection rate (first random number value), and the symbol presentation pattern.

Here, "presentation stage 30" indicates the male character stage in the second and third time-saving play states, and "presentation stage 31" indicates the female character stage in the second and third time-saving play states. These "presentation stage 30" and "presentation stage 31" are stages that can be selected by the player when a predetermined selection condition is met. Note that in this embodiment, only two stages are provided as stages that can be selected by the player in the second and third time-saving play states, but three or more different stages may be provided.

In addition, "presentation stage 40" indicates a premier stage for female characters that suggests the number of reserved consecutive stocks is ≧1 in the second and third time-saving play states, "presentation stage 41" indicates premier stage 1 for male characters that suggests the number of reserved consecutive stocks = 1 in the second and third time-saving play states, and "presentation stage 42" indicates premier stage 2 for male characters that suggests the number of reserved consecutive stocks is ≧2 in the second and third time-saving play states.

According to the symbol presentation pattern determination table E10 for the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state shown in FIG. 269, even if the variation pattern command for the same special symbol is used, different symbol presentation patterns (presentations with different background display modes) can be determined depending on the presentation stage.

However, the symbol presentation patterns associated with the symbol presentation pattern determination table E10 for the second time-saving play state and the third time-saving play state shown in FIG. 269 have different background display modes and character presentations depending on the presentation stage, but the presentation mode of the decorative symbols is a normal presentation mode in which, except for some jackpots (movie presentation of the variation pattern command 84H14H), all decorative symbols start to vary at high speed independently, and the left and right symbols do not temporarily stop in sequence, but all decorative symbols stop and display approximately simultaneously. This is also the case for the symbol presentation patterns associated with the symbol presentation pattern determination table E11 for the second time-saving play state and the third time-saving play state shown in FIG. 270, except when the special symbol lottery is a "miss."

(At the time of the final change of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state)
At the time of final change of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, the symbol presentation pattern determination table E11 shown in FIG. 270 is referenced.

The symbol presentation pattern determination table E11 for the second time-saving play state and the third time-saving play state shown in FIG. 270 associates the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200, the presentation stage, the number of reserved second special symbols, and the symbol presentation pattern.

According to the symbol presentation pattern determination table E11 for the second time-saving play state and the third time-saving play state shown in FIG. 270, even if the variation pattern command for the same special symbol is used, it is possible to determine different symbol presentation patterns (different presentations) depending on the number of reserved second special symbols.

In the case where the lottery for the special symbol is a "miss" at the time of the final change of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, if the reserved number of the second special symbol is ≧1 (when there is a reserved number of the second special symbol), a result presentation showing the game result of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state is performed, and then one of the symbol presentation patterns F10-13 for executing a consecutive battle entry presentation is determined, and if the reserved number of the second special symbol is 0 (when there is no reserved number of the second special symbol), then a result presentation is performed, and then one of the symbol presentation patterns F20-23 for executing a door presentation is determined. Note that presentation stages 40-42 are dedicated stages with a reserved consecutive stock number, and the lottery for the special symbol is never a "miss" at the time of the final change of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, the pattern presentation patterns F10-13 and F20-23 that are determined when the special symbol lottery result is a "miss" at the time of the final change in the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state execute a result presentation while the special symbol is being displayed, and execute a consecutive battle entry presentation or a door presentation while the special symbol shape is being displayed, but a consecutive battle entry presentation or a door presentation may also be executed while the special symbol is being displayed.

[9-6-6. Window notice effect pattern determination table for first normal gaming state]
A notice presentation pattern determination table for determining a notice presentation pattern of a window notice in the first normal game state will be described. Figure 271 is an example of a notice presentation pattern determination table of a window notice in the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 271, the preview performance pattern determination table for the window preview in the first normal game state corresponds the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200, the performance stage that determines the performance display state, the selection rate (second random number value), and the preview performance pattern.

In this embodiment, the preview performance patterns include preview performance pattern 1, in which the word "Stage Change" is displayed to indicate a change in stage, preview performance pattern 2, in which the word "Reach" is displayed as the performance content of the pattern performance pattern to suggest a reach, and preview performance pattern 3, in which the word "Super Hot" is displayed as the lottery result of the special pattern lottery to suggest a high possibility of a jackpot. Note that, although only three types of preview performance patterns are provided in this embodiment, the preview content may be subdivided to provide four or more display modes.

When preview presentation pattern 1 is determined, in which the word "Stage Change" is displayed to indicate a change in stage, presentation stage 0 and presentation stage 1 in the first normal game state are alternately switched. Note that if the general presentation state of the first normal game state has three or more different stages, the switching can be done according to a predetermined rule (for example, a predetermined order).

[9-6-7. Hold notice performance pattern determination table for hold change notice in first normal gaming state]
A reserve notice performance pattern determination table for determining a reserve notice performance pattern of the reserve change notice in the first normal game state will be described. Figure 272 is an example of a reserve notice performance pattern determination table of the reserve change notice in the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 272, the hold notice presentation pattern determination table for the hold change notice in the first normal game state corresponds the look-ahead command (see FIG. 239) received from the main control circuit 200, the selection rate (third random number value), and the hold notice presentation pattern.

As described below, when a special symbol winning command is received, a reserved image is displayed in a predetermined display mode based on the current presentation stage and the number of reserved special symbols. In this embodiment, when the first normal game state is in the general presentation state (presentation stages 0 and 1), "Normal Reserve 1" is displayed as the predetermined display mode, and when the first normal game state is in the limited presentation state (presentation stage 2), "Normal Reserve 2" is displayed as the predetermined display mode.

In this embodiment, the display mode of the reserve change notice is configured to be changeable to "special reserve 1" which suggests a reach or higher as the special pattern change information, or "special reserve 2" which suggests a super reach or higher and a high possibility of a jackpot as the result of the lottery for the special pattern when the first normal game state is in the general presentation state (presentation stage 0, 1), and to "special reserve 3" which suggests a reach or higher as the special pattern change information and a high possibility of a jackpot as the result of the lottery for the special pattern when the first normal game state is in the limited presentation state (presentation stage 2). Note that, although only three display modes are provided as the display mode of the reserve change notice in this embodiment, the contents suggested in advance may be subdivided to provide four or more display modes.

For example, in the case of hold notice presentation pattern 10, when the first starting gate 7120 is won, "Normal Hold 1" is displayed as the display mode of the hold image, and when the change occurs, "Normal Hold 1" is changed to "Special Hold 1." In the case of hold notice presentation pattern 11, "Special Hold 1" will continue to be displayed as the display mode of the hold image from the time of winning the first starting gate 7120 until the change occurs.

In addition, in the case of hold notice presentation pattern 20, when the first starting gate 7120 is won, "Normal hold 1" is displayed as the display mode of the hold image, and when the change occurs, "Normal hold 1" is changed to "Special hold 2." In the case of hold notice presentation pattern 21, "Special hold 2" will continue to be displayed as the display mode of the hold image from the time of winning the first starting gate 7120 until the change occurs.

In addition, in the case of hold notice presentation pattern 30, when the first starting gate 7120 is won, "Normal hold 2" is displayed as the display mode of the hold image, and when the change occurs, "Normal hold 2" is changed to "Special hold 3." In the case of hold notice presentation pattern 21, "Special hold 3" will continue to be displayed as the display mode of the hold image from the time of winning the first starting gate 7120 until the change occurs.

[9-6-8. First normal game state flash notice winning time notice performance pattern determination table]
A winning notice performance pattern determination table for determining a winning notice performance pattern of the flash notice in the first normal game state will be described. Figure 273 is an example of a winning notice performance pattern determination table of the flash notice in the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 273, the winning notice presentation pattern determination table for the flash notice in the first normal game state corresponds the look-ahead command (see FIG. 239) received from the main control circuit 200, the selection rate (fourth random number value), and the winning notice presentation pattern.

In this embodiment, the winning notice performance patterns include winning notice performance pattern 1, in which the LED group 46 emits white light from the time of winning at the first starting port 7120 until the fluctuation starts, and winning notice performance pattern 2, in which the LED group 46 emits rainbow light from the time of winning at the first starting port 7120 until the fluctuation starts. Note that, although this embodiment has only two types of winning notice performance patterns, it is also possible to configure it with three or more types of winning notice performance patterns by subdividing the suggested content.

In this embodiment, when winning preview performance pattern 1 is determined and the LED group 46 emits white light, it indicates that there is a high possibility of a jackpot as the result of the lottery for the special symbol, and when winning preview performance pattern 2 is determined and the LED group 46 emits rainbow light, it indicates that the lottery for the special symbol will result in a jackpot.

[9-6-9. Table for setting prohibition conditions for pre-reading effects]
A table for setting a forbidden condition for a foreseeing performance for determining whether or not to execute a foreseeing performance (reserved change notice, flash notice) in the first normal game state will be described. Figure 274 is an example of a forbidden condition setting table for a foreseeing performance in the seventh pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 274, the prohibition conditions for prohibiting the execution of the pre-reading performance include a "common prohibition condition" that prohibits the execution of both the hold change notice and the flash notice, and a "first prohibition condition" that prohibits the execution of only the flash notice.

There are five common prohibition conditions, common prohibition conditions 1 to 5. "Common prohibition condition 1" is met when there are reserved numbers of the second special symbol, "common prohibition condition 2" is met during the control period of the second special symbol (during the variable display of the second special symbol), "common prohibition condition 3" is met within five variable displays before and after the stage is switched, "common prohibition condition 4" is met when a full rotation effect is being displayed, and "common prohibition condition 5" is met when the same look-ahead effect is already being executed by referring to the look-ahead flag.

If any of the common prohibition conditions 1 to 5 is met, neither the hold change notice nor the flash notice will be executed.

The first prohibited condition is set to four prohibited conditions, first prohibited condition 1 to 4. "First prohibited condition 1" is met when the first start gate 7120 is won when a variable performance other than normal variable is being performed, "First prohibited condition 2" is met when the first start gate 7120 is won during the period from 1500 ms before the first special symbol is determined to when the symbol is being determined, "First prohibited condition 3" is met when the first start gate 7120 is won within 500 ms from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, and "First prohibited condition 4" is met when the first start gate 7120 is won during demo display.

If any of the first prohibition conditions 1 to 4 is met, the flash notice will not be executed, but the hold change notice will be executable.

[9-6-10. Small hit performance pattern determination table]
A small win presentation pattern determination table for determining a presentation pattern in a small win gaming state will be described. Figure 275 shows an example of a small win presentation pattern determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 275, the small win presentation pattern determination table includes a small win start presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 275(1) and a small win end presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 275(2).

The small win start presentation pattern determination table shown in Figure 275 (1) corresponds the small win start display command received from the main control circuit 200, the game state information (presentation stage) at the time of winning when it is determined that there is a big win or small win, the number of reserved consecutive stocks, the selection rate (fifth random number value), and the small win start presentation pattern.

Here, the "small win start presentation pattern" refers to the presentation that is performed at the start of a small win game state, and refers to information that specifies the display presentation of characters, etc., audio presentation, and presentation of changes in the operation mode of the presentation button 54, etc.

In this embodiment, the small win start performance patterns determined when a small win start display command is received include a small win start performance pattern 1 in which a normal character instructs the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 7156 in a small win game state, a small win start performance pattern 10 in which a male character instructs the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 7156 in a background A1 (e.g., blue background) in a small win game state, a small win start performance pattern 11 in which a male character instructs the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 7156 in a background A2 (e.g., red background) in a small win game state, a small win start performance pattern 20 in which a female character instructs the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 7156 in a background A1 (e.g., blue background) in a small win game state, and a small win start performance pattern 21 in which a female character instructs the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 7156 in a background A2 (e.g., red background) in a small win game state.

And according to the small win start presentation pattern determination table shown in Figure 275 (1), when the game is in the first normal game state (presentation stages 0 to 2), the second normal game state (presentation stage 10), or the first time-saving game state (presentation stage 20), small win start presentation pattern 1 is determined as the normal small win presentation.

In contrast, in the second time-saving game state, a different small win start presentation pattern (different presentation) can be determined based on the stages "presentation stage 30" and "presentation stage 31" selectable by the player.
Specifically, when it is the "presentation stage 30" of a male character, small win start presentation pattern 10 or small win start presentation pattern 11 is determined, and when it is the "presentation stage 31" of a female character, small win start presentation pattern 20 or small win start presentation pattern 21 is determined.

In addition, as described below, "Production Stage 41" and "Production Stage 42" are only transitioned from "Production Stage 30" of the male character selected by the player, and "Production Stage 40" is only transitioned from "Production Stage 31" of the female character selected by the player. Therefore, when it is "Production Stage 41" or "Production Stage 42", small win start production pattern 10 or small win start production pattern 11 is determined, similar to "Production Stage 30" of the male character, and when it is "Production Stage 40", small win start production pattern 20 or small win start production pattern 21 is determined, similar to "Production Stage 31" of the female character.

Furthermore, in the second time-saving game state, different small win start presentation patterns (different presentations) can be determined based on the number of reserved consecutive stocks.
Specifically, the greater the number of reserved consecutive stocks, the more likely it is that small win start presentation pattern 11 will be determined rather than small win start presentation pattern 10 when the presentation stage is for a male character (30, 41, 42), and the more likely it is that small win start presentation pattern 21 will be determined rather than small win start presentation pattern 20 when the presentation stage is for a female character (31, 40).

As a result, when in the second time-saving play state, the number of reserved consecutive stocks can be suggested by the small win start presentation pattern.

The small win end presentation pattern determination table shown in Figure 275 (2) corresponds the small win end display command received from the main control circuit 200, the reserved number of second special symbols, the presentation pattern for executing the door presentation, and the presentation stage after the small win ends.

Here, the "small win end presentation pattern" refers to the presentation that is performed when the small win game state ends, and refers to information that defines the display presentation of characters, etc., audio presentation, and presentation of changes in the operation mode of presentation button 54. Also, as described above, the small win end display command is a command that is sent when the small win game state ends without the game ball passing through the V winning hole 7156 (see S7105 in FIG. 256), and also results in the time-saving game state ending.

In this embodiment, the small win end presentation patterns include presentation pattern 101, which executes a door presentation and then executes a stage change presentation to presentation stage 2, and presentation pattern 102, which executes a consecutive battle entry presentation and then executes a door presentation.

According to the small win end presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 275 (2), when there are no reserved second special symbols at the end of the small win game state, presentation pattern 101 and presentation stage 2 are determined, and when there are reserved second special symbols at the end of the small win game state, presentation pattern 102 and presentation stage 10 are determined.

In this embodiment, the presentation pattern 101 and presentation pattern 102 determined as the small win end presentation pattern are performed in the end interval time when the small win game state ends, but part of the presentation may be performed in the variable display of the special symbol immediately after the end of the small win game state. For example, a door presentation may be performed in the end interval time of the small win game state, and a stage change presentation or continuous battle entry presentation may be performed in the variable display of the special symbol immediately after the end of the small win game state.

[9-6-11. V Passing Performance Pattern Determination Table]
A V-passing performance pattern determination table for determining a V-passing performance pattern in a small winning gaming state will be described. Figure 276 is an example of a V-passing performance pattern determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

The "V-passing effect pattern" refers to an effect that is performed when the game ball passes through the V-entry port 7156 during a small win game state, and refers to information that specifies the display effects of characters, etc., audio effects, changes in the operation mode of the effect button 54, etc.

As shown in FIG. 276, the V-passing performance pattern determination table associates the V-passing command received from the main control circuit 200, the game state information (performance stage) at the time of winning when a big win or small win is determined, the number of reserved consecutive stocks, the selection rate (sixth random number value), and the V-passing performance pattern.

In this embodiment, the V passing performance patterns include V passing performance pattern 1 which displays V in the normal display mode, V passing performance pattern 10 which displays V in the first display mode, V passing performance pattern 11 which displays V in the first display mode and displays "STOCK1" suggesting that the number of reserved consecutive stocks = 1, V passing performance pattern 12 which displays V in the first display mode and displays "STOCK2" suggesting that the number of reserved consecutive stocks = 2, V passing performance pattern 20 which displays V in the second display mode, and V passing performance pattern 21 which displays V in the special display mode suggesting that the number of reserved consecutive stocks ≧ 1.

And according to the V-passing presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 276, when the game is in the first normal game state (presentation stages 0-2), the second normal game state (presentation stage 10), or the first time-saving game state (presentation stage 20), V-passing presentation pattern 1 is determined as the normal V-passing presentation.

In contrast, in the second time-saving game state, a different V-passing presentation pattern (different presentation) can be determined based on the presentation stage.
Specifically, when the male character is on "performance stage 30, 41, 42", V-passing performance pattern 10, V-passing performance pattern 11 or V-passing performance pattern 12 is determined, and when the female character is on "performance stage 31, 40", V-passing performance pattern 20 or V-passing performance pattern 21 is determined.

Furthermore, when in the second time-saving game state, a different V-passing presentation pattern (different presentation) can be determined based on the number of reserved consecutive stocks.
Specifically, in the case of a male character's performance stage (30, 41, 42), when the number of reserved consecutive stocks is 1, V-pass performance pattern 11 is more likely to be determined than V-pass performance pattern 10, and when the number of reserved consecutive stocks is ≧2, V-pass performance pattern 12 is more likely to be determined than V-pass performance pattern 10. Also, in the case of a female character's performance stage (31, 40), when the number of reserved consecutive stocks is ≧1, V-pass performance pattern 21 is more likely to be determined than V-pass performance pattern 20.

As a result, when in the second time-saving play state, the number of reserved consecutive stocks can be indicated by the V-passing presentation pattern.

In addition, according to the small win start presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 275 (1) and the V-pass presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 276, presentations based on the same presentation stage selected in the second time-saving play state are performed from the second time-saving play state to the small win play state. This allows a series of presentations to be performed from the second time-saving play state to the small win play state, further enhancing the excitement of the game. More details will be provided later using FIG. 288 and FIG. 289.

[9-6-12. Stage selection table after jackpot game state ends]
A description will be given of a presentation stage selection table for determining the presentation stage to be performed after the big win gaming state ends. Figure 277 shows an example of a presentation stage selection table for the seventh pachinko gaming machine after the big win gaming state ends.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 277, there are two presentation stage selection tables after the end of the jackpot game state: presentation stage selection table 1 after the end of the jackpot game state in the first normal game state, the second normal game state, and the first time-saving game state shown in FIG. 277 (1), and presentation stage selection table 2 after the end of the jackpot game state in the second time-saving game state shown in FIG. 277 (2).

As shown in FIG. 277 (1), the presentation stage selection table 1 after the end of the big win game state corresponds to the game state at the time of winning when a big win or small win is determined, the winning pattern, and the presentation stage.

Here, the "selection permission flag ON" shown in FIG. 277 (1) indicates that the selection permission flag that allows the player to select "performance stage 30" for a male character or "performance stage 31" for a female character is on (permitted).

According to the presentation stage selection table 1 after the end of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 277 (1), if the game state at the time of winning is the first normal game state (presentation stages 0 to 2), and the winning symbol is the "first special symbol_5R jackpot symbol 1" corresponding to the symbol designation command "zA1", the game will transition to the first time-saving game state, and "presentation stage 20", which indicates the Sengoku entry chance stage in the first time-saving game state, will be selected.

According to the presentation stage selection table 1 after the end of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 277 (1), if the game state at the time of winning is the first normal game state (presentation stages 0-2) and the winning symbol corresponds to the symbol designation command "zA2-4", if the game state at the time of winning is the second normal game state (presentation stage 10), or if the game state at the time of winning is the first time-limited game state (presentation stage 20), in either case, a transition to the second time-limited game state will occur as a so-called first win or a pull-back win, and therefore the "selection permission flag is ON" to allow the player to select "presentation stage 30" or "presentation stage 31".

As shown in FIG. 277 (2), the presentation stage selection table 2 after the end of the big win game state corresponds to information on the game state (presentation stage) at the time of winning when a big win or small win is determined, the V passing presentation pattern described above, the number of reserved consecutive stocks, and the presentation stage.

According to the presentation stage selection table 2 after the end of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 277 (2), the presentation stage selected after the end of the jackpot game state differs depending on whether or not the number of reserved consecutive stocks has been notified by the V-pass presentation pattern.

Specifically, if the game state at the time of winning is presentation stage 30, and the number of reserved consecutive stocks is not announced by V-pass presentation pattern 10, presentation stage 30 is selected again (presentation stage 30 continues), and when the number of reserved consecutive stocks = 1 is announced by V-pass presentation pattern 11, presentation stage 41 is selected, and when the number of reserved consecutive stocks = 2 is announced by V-pass presentation pattern 12, presentation stage 42 is selected.

In addition, if the game state at the time of winning is presentation stage 41, and the number of reserved consecutive stocks is not announced by V-pass presentation pattern 10, presentation stage 30 is selected, and when the number of reserved consecutive stocks = 1 is announced by V-pass presentation pattern 11, presentation stage 41 is selected (presentation stage 41 continues), and when the number of reserved consecutive stocks = 2 is announced by V-pass presentation pattern 12, presentation stage 42 is selected.

In addition, if the game state at the time of winning is presentation stage 42, and the number of reserved consecutive stocks is not announced by V-pass presentation pattern 10 and the number of reserved consecutive stocks is 1, presentation stage 41 is selected, and if the number of reserved consecutive stocks is not announced by V-pass presentation pattern 10 but the number of reserved consecutive stocks is 2, presentation stage 42 is selected (presentation stage 42 continues), and if the number of reserved consecutive stocks is announced by V-pass presentation pattern 11 and 1, presentation stage 42 is selected (presentation stage 42 continues).

As a result, "presentation stage 41", which is premier stage 1 for male characters, can suggest at least the number of reserved consecutive stocks = 1 in the second and third time-saving play states, and "presentation stage 42", which is premier stage 2 for male characters, can suggest at least the number of reserved consecutive stocks ≧ 2 in the second and third time-saving play states. Therefore, when the presentation by presentation stages 41 and 42 is being executed, the player can know the number of reserved consecutive stocks and can play with peace of mind.

In addition, if the game state at the time of winning is in presentation stage 31, if the number of reserved consecutive stocks is not announced by V-pass presentation pattern 20, presentation stage 31 is selected (presentation stage 31 continues), and if the number of reserved consecutive stocks is announced by V-pass presentation pattern 21 as being equal to or greater than 1, presentation stage 40 is selected.

In addition, if the game state at the time of winning is presentation stage 40, and the number of reserved consecutive stocks is not announced by V-pass presentation pattern 20 and the number of reserved consecutive stocks = 0, presentation stage 31 is selected, and if the number of reserved consecutive stocks is not announced by V-pass presentation pattern 20 but is ≧ 1, presentation stage 40 is selected (presentation stage 40 continues), and also when the number of reserved consecutive stocks ≧ 1 is announced by V-pass presentation pattern 21, presentation stage 40 is selected (presentation stage 40 continues).

As a result, "production stage 40," the premier stage for female characters, can suggest that the number of reserved consecutive stocks is ≥ 1 in the second and third time-saving play states. Therefore, when the production by production stage 40 is being performed, it is possible to make the player interested in how many reserved consecutive stocks there are and how long production stage 40 will continue.

[9-7-1. Sub-control circuit processing]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control circuit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 278. Fig. 278 is a flow chart showing an example of the sub-control circuit process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 278, the sub-CPU 301 first performs an initialization process (S7500). In this initialization process, for example, RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, etc. are performed. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7510.

The initialization process (S7500) described above is executed when the power is turned on or the backup is cleared. After the power is turned on, the processes S7510 to S7580 described below are executed repeatedly.

In S7510, the sub-CPU 301 performs a data input process to input data. In this data input process, both the command input port 308 reading process and the effect button 54 input process are performed.

The command input port 308 read process reads the command sent from the main control circuit 200 that is set in the command input port 308.

In addition, in the input process of the effect button 54, operation information regarding the player's operation detected by the effect button 54 is input from the button control circuit 310. In addition, when the sub-CPU 301 inputs operation information from the button control circuit 310, it determines whether to validate the input operation information or discard it as invalid, and sets the acceptance time during which input of operation information is permitted, the validity time during which the input operation information is valid, and the invalidity period during which the input operation information is invalid, depending on the current situation such as the effect.

When the reading process of the command input port 308 and the input process of the effect button 54 are completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7520.

In S7520, the sub-CPU 301 executes a command analysis process. In this process, the command read in the process of S7510 is analyzed. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7530.

At S7530, the sub-CPU 301 executes a presentation mode determination process. In this process, for example, a presentation pattern is determined based on a command sent from the main CPU 201, and various requests for operating various presentation devices (for example, a drawing request, a sound request, a lamp request, a role request, a presentation button activation request, etc.) are generated based on the determined presentation pattern. Details of this presentation mode determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 279. Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 moves the process to S7540.

In S7540, the sub-CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this processing, the sub-CPU 301 transmits a drawing request to the display control circuit 304. The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control for displaying an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on the message (drawing request) transmitted from the sub-CPU 301. When this processing ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the processing to S7550.

At S7550, the sub-CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this processing, the sub-CPU 301 transmits a sound request to the audio control circuit 305. The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control to output audio from the speaker 32 based on the message (sound request) transmitted from the sub-CPU 301. When this processing ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the processing to S7560.

In S7560, the sub-CPU 301 executes an LED control process. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 sends an LED request to the LED control circuit 306. Based on the message (LED request) sent from the sub-CPU 301, the LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control to light up or blink all or a portion of the LEDs that make up the LED group 46. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7570.

At S7570, the sub-CPU 301 executes a reel control process. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 sends a reel request to the reel control circuit 307. Based on the message (reel request) sent from the sub-CPU 301, the reel control circuit 307 performs drive control to operate the performance drive motors (not shown) for all or some of the reels that make up the performance reel group 58. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7580.

At S7580, the sub-CPU 301 executes effect button control processing. In this processing, the sub-CPU 301 sends an effect button drive request to the button control circuit 310. Based on the message (effect button drive request) sent from the sub-CPU 301, the button control circuit 310 performs drive control such as changing the operation mode of the effect button 54 and vibrating the effect button 54. When this processing ends, the sub-CPU 301 ends the sub-control circuit processing.

[9-7-2. Presentation mode determination process]
Next, the details of the presentation mode determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 in the sub control circuit process (see FIG. 278) will be described with reference to Fig. 279. Fig. 279 is a flow chart showing an example of the presentation mode determination process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

At S7531, the sub-CPU 301 executes a presentation pattern determination process to determine a presentation pattern. In this process, a presentation pattern is determined based on a command sent from the main CPU 201, the presentation pattern defining the type of display presentation to be displayed on the display device 7, the type of sound presentation to be output from the speaker 32, the operation type of the presentation button 54, etc. Details of this presentation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to Figures 280 to 283. Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 moves the process to S7532.

In S7532, the sub-CPU 301 executes a process for generating an animation request. In this process, an animation request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S7531 above. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7533.

In S7533, the sub-CPU 301 executes a drawing request generation process. In this process, a drawing request is generated based on the animation request generated in S7532. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7534.

At S7534, the sub-CPU 301 executes a sound request generation process. In this process, a sound request is generated based on the performance pattern determined at S7531 above. Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7535.

In S7535, the sub-CPU 301 executes a lamp request generation process. In this process, a lamp request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S7531 above. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7536.

In S7536, the sub-CPU 301 executes a reel request generation process. In this process, a reel request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S7531 above. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7537.

At S7537, the sub-CPU 301 executes a process for generating a performance button actuation request. In this process, a performance button actuation request is generated based on the performance pattern determined at S7531 above. Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 ends the performance mode determination process and returns the process to the drawing control process (see FIG. 278).

[9-7-3. Presentation pattern determination process]
Next, with reference to Figures 280 to 282, the details of the effect pattern determination process executed by the sub-CPU 301 in the effect mode determination process (see Figure 279) will be described. Figures 280 to 282 are flow charts showing an example of the effect pattern determination process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S7531-1, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol winning command."

If it is determined in S7531-1 that the command is a "special symbol winning command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S7531-2. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "special symbol winning command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S7531-3.

In S7531-2, the sub-CPU 301 performs a process to add the number of reserved special symbols, etc.

In this reserved number addition process for special symbols, it is determined whether the command is a "winning command for the first special symbol" or a "winning command for the second special symbol", and when the command is a "winning command for the first special symbol", 1 is added to the reserved number of the first special symbol (reserved number counter for the first special symbol) in the work RAM 303, and when the command is a "winning command for the second special symbol", 1 is added to the reserved number of the second special symbol (reserved number counter for the second special symbol) in the work RAM 303. Also, by referring to the performance stage storage area in the work RAM 303, a display mode of the reserved image is determined based on the current performance stage and the reserved number of the special symbol added this time, and a reserved display pattern for displaying the reserved image in the determined display mode on the display device 7 is determined.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

In S7531-3, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "pre-read command" for a special symbol.

If it is determined in S7531-3 that the command is a "read-ahead command," the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S7531-4. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "read-ahead command," the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S7531-10.

In S7531-4, the sub-CPU 301 performs pending information storage processing to store the contents of the start information for the special symbol.

In this pending information storage process, it is determined whether it is a ``first special pattern pre-read command'' or a ``second special pattern pre-read command'', and various parameters of the pre-read command (see Figure 239) are stored in the decorative pattern determination area, first decorative pattern start memory area, and second decorative pattern start memory area of the work RAM 303 so as to correspond to the special pattern determination area, first special pattern start memory area, and second special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S7531-5.

In S7531-5, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead performance determination process to determine a look-ahead performance. The details of this look-ahead performance determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

In S7531-10, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "symbol designation command."

If it is determined in S7531-10 that the command is a "designation command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7531-11. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "designation command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7531-20.

In S7531-11, the sub-CPU 301 performs a decorative pattern determination process to determine a decorative pattern.

In this decorative symbol determination process, a stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined based on the type of the symbol designation command and the state information (current game state) stored in the game state storage area of the work RAM 303, and the determined stop symbol is stored in the stop symbol storage area of the work RAM 303. When the type of the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command indicating a big win or a small win, information on the current game state is stored in the win-time state storage area of the work RAM 303 in order to hold the game state at the time of winning. Furthermore, if the game state at the time of winning is not the first normal game state (i.e., the second normal game state or the first to third time-saving game states), 1 is added to the consecutive win counter of the work RAM 303, and if the game state at the time of winning is the first normal game state, the consecutive win counter of the work RAM 303 is cleared (set to 0).
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

In S7531-20, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol variation pattern command."

If it is determined in S7531-20 that the command is a "special symbol variation pattern command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S7531-21. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "special symbol variation pattern command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S7531-30.

In S7531-21, the sub-CPU 301 performs a process to subtract the number of reserved special symbols, etc.

In this reserved number subtraction process for special symbols, it is determined whether the command is a "first special symbol variation pattern command" or a "second special symbol variation pattern command", and when the command is a "first special symbol variation pattern command", 1 is subtracted from the reserved number counter for the first special symbol in the work RAM 303, and when the command is a "second special symbol variation pattern command", 1 is subtracted from the reserved number counter for the second special symbol in the work RAM 303. In addition, a reserved shift display pattern for shifting and displaying the reserved image of the special symbol subtracted this time is determined.
Furthermore, various parameters stored in the decorative pattern determination area, first decorative pattern start memory area, and second decorative pattern start memory area of the work RAM 303 are shifted in the same manner as the special pattern determination area, first special pattern start memory area, and second special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-22.

In S7531-22, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the state information (current game state) stored in the game state storage area of the work RAM 303, and performs a count counter update process to update various count counters.

In this count counter update process, in the normal game state, the "normal variable display count counter" of the work RAM 303, which counts the number of times the special symbol is variably displayed in the normal game state, is updated by adding 1.
In addition, when the game is in a time-saving game state, if the command is a variation pattern of the first special symbol, 1 is subtracted from the "first time-saving number sub-counter" and the "second time-saving number sub-counter" of the work RAM 303, and if the command is a variation pattern of the second special symbol, 1 is subtracted from the "second time-saving number sub-counter" of the work RAM 303.
Furthermore, when a first look-ahead flag indicating that a pending change notice is being executed is on, the "first look-ahead count counter" in the work RAM 303 is updated by subtracting 1 from it, and when a second look-ahead flag indicating that a flash notice is being executed is on, the "second look-ahead count counter" in the work RAM 303 is updated by subtracting 1 from it. Note that when the first look-ahead count counter = 0, the first look-ahead flag is turned off, and when the second look-ahead count counter = 0, the second look-ahead flag is turned off.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S7531-23.

In S7531-23, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the state information (current game state) stored in the game state storage area of the work RAM 303, and determines whether the current game state is the "first normal game state."

If it is determined in S7531-23 that the game is in the "first normal game state", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7531-24. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is not in the "first normal game state", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7531-26.

In S7531-24, the sub-CPU 301 performs a first symbol presentation pattern determination process that determines the symbol presentation pattern in the first normal gaming state.

In this first pattern presentation pattern determination process, after obtaining the first random number value, the pattern presentation pattern determination table E1 shown in FIG. 265 is referenced to determine the pattern presentation pattern based on the received special pattern variation pattern command, the presentation stage stored in the presentation stage memory area of the work RAM 303, the number of times the special pattern has been varied and displayed stored in the normal variation display number counter of the work RAM 303, and the obtained first random number value.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S7531-25.

At S7531-25, the sub-CPU 301 performs a preview presentation pattern determination process to determine the preview presentation pattern of the window preview in the first normal game state.

In this preview performance pattern determination process, after obtaining the second random number value, a preview performance pattern is determined based on the received special symbol variation pattern command, the performance stage stored in the performance stage storage area of the work RAM 303, and the obtained second random number value, with reference to a preview performance pattern determination table for window preview shown in Fig. 271. Here, when preview performance pattern 1 indicating a change of stage is determined, performance stage 0 stored in the performance stage storage area of the work RAM 303 is switched to performance stage 1, or performance stage 1 is switched to performance stage 0 for update.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

In S7531-26, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the state information (current game state) stored in the game state storage area of the work RAM 303, and determines whether the current game state is the "second normal game state."

If it is determined in S7531-26 that the game is in the "second normal game state", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7531-27. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is not in the "second normal game state", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7531-29.

In S7531-27, the sub-CPU 301 performs a symbol presentation pattern table determination process to determine the symbol presentation pattern determination table for the second normal game state.

In this pattern presentation pattern table determination process, first, various parameters stored in the decorative pattern determination area and the second decorative pattern start memory area of the work RAM 303 are referenced to calculate the "number of winning symbols within the reserved number of second special symbols" and "pull-back information."
Then, by referring to the start determination table for the second normal game state shown in FIG. 266, one of the pattern presentation pattern determination tables E2 to E8 is determined based on the number of reserved second special symbols stored in the reserved number counter for the second special symbol in the work RAM 303, the calculated "number of winning symbols within the reserved number of second special symbols" and the "pull-back information."
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S7531-28.

In S7531-28, the sub-CPU 301 performs a second symbol presentation pattern determination process to determine the symbol presentation pattern in the second normal gaming state.

In this second symbol presentation pattern determination process, after obtaining the first random number value, the symbol presentation pattern determination table determined in S7531-27 above is referenced to determine the symbol presentation pattern based on the received special symbol variation pattern command, the number of reserved second special symbols stored in the reserved number counter for the second special symbol in the work RAM 303, and the obtained first random number value.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

In S7531-29, the sub-CPU 301 performs a third symbol presentation pattern determination process that determines the symbol presentation pattern in the time-saving game state.

In this third symbol presentation pattern determination process, the game state storage area of the work RAM 303 is first referenced to determine whether the game state is the first time-saving game state or the second or third time-saving game state.

In the third symbol presentation pattern determination process, if the game is in the first time-saving game state, after obtaining the first random number value, the symbol presentation pattern determination table E9 shown in FIG. 268 is referenced to determine the symbol presentation pattern based on the received special symbol variation pattern command and the obtained first random number value. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process and moves the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

In the third symbol presentation pattern determination process, if the second or third time-saving game state is selected, it is determined whether or not the time-saving game state is in its final change. Here, the "first time-saving count sub-counter" and "second time-saving count sub-counter" in the work RAM 303 are referenced to determine whether or not the time-saving game state is in its final change. If either time-saving count sub-counter is 0, it is determined that the change is in its final change.

In the third symbol presentation pattern determination process, when the second or third time-saving play state is in effect and other than the final change in the time-saving play state, the symbol presentation pattern determination table E10 shown in FIG. 269 is referenced to determine the symbol presentation pattern based on the received special symbol change pattern command and the presentation stage stored in the presentation stage memory area of the work RAM 303. When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

In the third symbol presentation pattern determination process, when the second or third time-saving play state is in the second or third time-saving play state, if it is the final change in the time-saving play state, the symbol presentation pattern determination table E11 shown in FIG. 269 is referenced to determine the symbol presentation pattern based on the received special symbol change pattern command, the presentation stage stored in the presentation stage memory area of the work RAM 303, and the reserved number of second special symbols stored in the reserved number counter of the work RAM 303. When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process and moves the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

In S7531-30, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol effect stop command."

If it is determined in S7531-30 that the command is a "special symbol effect stop command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7531-31. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "special symbol effect stop command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7531-32.

In S7531-31, the sub-CPU 301 performs a pattern presentation end process to end the pattern presentation.

In this pattern presentation end processing, the game state storage area of the work RAM 303, the "first time-saving count sub-counter" and the "second time-saving count sub-counter" are referenced to determine whether or not this is the final change of the first to third time-saving game states. If this is other than the final change of the first to third time-saving game states, pattern presentation execution end data is created to end the execution of the presentation by the pattern presentation pattern and the presentation pattern 100 of the door presentation. If this is the final change of the first to third time-saving game states, the pattern presentation end processing is ended without creating pattern presentation execution end data in order to execute the presentation over the special pattern variation display time and the pattern determination time.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

In S7531-32, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol game end command."

If it is determined in S7531-32 that the command is a "special symbol game end command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S7531-33. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "special symbol game end command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S7531-40.

In S7531-33, the sub-CPU 301 performs a full effect end process to end all effects related to the lottery for special symbols, excluding some effects such as the background.

In this all-effects end process, all-effects execution end data for ending the execution of all effects related to the lottery of special symbols is created. Even if the symbol effect execution end data is not created in the above S7531-31 when the first to third time-saving game states are the final change, the execution of the effect by the symbol effect pattern when the first to third time-saving game states are the final change is ended by this all-effects execution end data.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

In S7531-40, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "small win start display command."

If it is determined in S7531-40 that the command is a "small win start display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S7531-41. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "small win start display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S7531-42.

In S7531-41, the sub-CPU 301 performs a small win start effect determination process to determine the small win start effect pattern for performing a small win start effect.

In this process of determining the small win effect, first, various parameters stored in the second decorative pattern start memory area of the work RAM 303 are referenced, and the "number of reserved consecutive stocks", which is the number of parameters that will result in a big win or a small win, is calculated, and the calculated "number of reserved consecutive stocks" is overwritten and stored in the reserved consecutive stock number counter of the work RAM 303.
Then, after obtaining the fifth random number value, the small win start presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 275 (1) is referenced, and a small win start presentation pattern is determined based on the game state information stored in the winning state memory area of the work RAM 303, the presentation stage stored in the presentation stage memory area of the work RAM 303, the number of reserved consecutive stocks stored in the reserved consecutive stock number counter of the work RAM 303, and the obtained fifth random number value.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

In S7531-42, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "V pass command."

If it is determined in S7531-42 that the command is a "V pass command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7531-43. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "V pass command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7531-44.

In S7531-43, the sub-CPU 301 performs a V-passing effect determination process to determine a V-passing effect pattern for performing a V-passing effect.

In this V passing performance determination process, after obtaining the sixth random number value, the V passing performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 276 is referenced, and a V passing performance pattern is determined based on the game state information stored in the winning state memory area of the work RAM 303, the performance stage stored in the performance stage memory area of the work RAM 303, the number of reserved consecutive stocks stored in the reserved consecutive stock number counter of the work RAM 303, and the obtained sixth random number value.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

In S7531-44, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "small win end display command."

If it is determined in S7531-44 that the command is a "small win end display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S7531-45. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "small win end display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S7531-50.

In S7531-45, the sub-CPU 301 performs a small win end effect determination process to determine the effect pattern for performing the small win end effect.

In this small win end performance determination process, the small win end performance pattern determination table shown in Fig. 275 (2) is referenced, and the small win end performance pattern and performance stage are determined based on the reserved number of the second special symbol stored in the reserved number counter of the second special symbol in the work RAM 303. Then, the information of the determined performance stage is overwritten and stored in the performance stage storage area of the work RAM 303.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

In S7531-50, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "jackpot start display command."

If it is determined in S7531-50 that the command is a "jackpot start display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S7531-51. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "jackpot start display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S7531-52.

In S7531-51, the sub-CPU 301 performs a jackpot start effect determination process to determine an effect pattern for performing a jackpot start effect. In this jackpot start effect determination process, the stop symbol storage area of the work RAM 303 is referenced, and the effect pattern of the jackpot start effect is determined according to the stop symbol (winning symbol).
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

In S7531-52, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "jackpot end display command."

If it is determined in S7531-52 that the command is a "jackpot end display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S7531-53. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "jackpot end display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S7531-70.

In S7531-53, the sub-CPU 301 performs a presentation stage determination process to determine the presentation stage after the big win game state ends.

In this production stage determination process, the winning state memory area of the work RAM 303 is referenced to determine whether the game state at the time of winning is the second time-saving game state.

If the game state at the time of winning is not the second time-limited game state in the presentation stage determination process (if it is the first normal game state, the second normal game state, or the first time-limited game state), the presentation stage selection table 1 after the end of the big win game state shown in FIG. 277 (1) is referenced, and a new presentation stage (presentation stage 20 or selection permission flag ON) is determined based on the game state information stored in the winning state memory area of the work RAM 303 and the winning pattern stored in the stopping pattern memory area of the work RAM 303.

When a new performance stage 20 is determined, the information about the performance stage 20 is overwritten and stored in the performance stage storage area of the work RAM 303, the current performance stage determination process ends, and processing proceeds to S7531-54.

When the selection permission flag is set to ON, a valid operation time is set within the end interval time at the end of the jackpot game state, and the initial selection stage is set to presentation stage 30, with the selection stage being switched between presentation stage 30 and presentation stage 31 each time the player operates presentation button 54. When the valid operation time has elapsed, the selection permission flag is set to OFF, the presentation stage selected as the selection stage is newly determined, and the information of the newly determined presentation stage is overwritten and stored in the presentation stage storage area of work RAM 303. Note that if the game state at the time of winning is the second time-saving game state, the selection permission flag will not be set to ON. When this process is completed, the process moves to S7531-54.

In addition, if the game state at the time of winning in the performance stage determination process is the second time-saving game state, first, various parameters stored in the second decorative pattern start memory area of the work RAM 303 are referenced, and the "number of reserved consecutive stocks", which is the number of parameters that will result in a big hit or a small hit, is calculated, and the calculated "number of reserved consecutive stocks" is overwritten and stored in the reserved consecutive stock number counter of the work RAM 303.
Then, referring to the performance stage selection table 2 after the end of the big win game state shown in Fig. 277 (2), a new performance stage is determined based on the performance stage stored in the performance stage storage area of the work RAM 303, the V-pass performance pattern determined (executed) in the above S7531-43, and the number of reserved consecutive stocks stored in the reserved consecutive stock number counter of the work RAM 303. After that, the information of the newly determined performance stage is overwritten and stored in the performance stage storage area of the work RAM 303.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7531-54.

In S7531-54, the sub-CPU 301 performs a big win end effect determination process to determine an effect pattern for performing a big win end effect. In this big win end effect determination process, the effect pattern of the big win end effect is determined according to the stop symbol (winning symbol) stored in the stop symbol storage area of the work RAM 303, the effect stage newly determined in the above S7531-53, and the selection permission flag ON/OFF.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

In S7531-70, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "game state designation command."

If it is determined in S7531-70 that the command is a "game state designation command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S7531-71. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "game state designation command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S7531-80.

In S7531-71, the sub-CPU 301 performs a state information update process to update and store state information indicating the current game state in the game state storage area of the work RAM 303 according to the type of game state designation command. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7531-72.

In addition, in the state information update process of this embodiment, when the state information is updated from the normal game state to the first time-shortened game state (when the first time-shortened game state starts), the "first time-shortened number sub-counter" in the work RAM 303 is set to 7, and the "second time-shortened number sub-counter" is set to 1, and when the state information is updated from the normal game state to the second time-shortened game state (when the second time-shortened game state starts), the "first time-shortened number sub-counter" in the work RAM 303 is set to 11, and the "second time-shortened number sub-counter" is set to 5.

At S7531-72, the sub-CPU 301 performs a production stage transition determination process to determine whether or not to transition to a production stage.

In this presentation stage transition determination process, first, it is determined whether or not there has been a change in the state information stored in the game state storage area of the work RAM 303, and when the state information is changed from the first to third time-saving game states or the second normal game state to the first normal game state (when transitioning to the first normal game state), presentation stage 2 is determined, when the state information is changed from the second or third time-saving game state to the second normal game state (when transitioning to the second normal game state), presentation stage 10 is determined, and when the state information is changed from the first normal game state to the third time-saving game state (when transitioning to the B time-saving game state), presentation stage 30 is determined. Next, the normal variable display count counter of the work RAM 303 is referenced, and when the variable display of the special symbol has been performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) in the first normal game state, presentation stage 0 is determined.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

In S7531-80, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "demo display command."

If it is determined in S7531-80 that the command is a "demo display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7531-81. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "demo display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7531-90.

In S7531-81, the sub-CPU 301 executes a demo display presentation pattern determination process for determining a demo display presentation pattern for performing presentation during standby of a game.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

In S7531-90, the sub-CPU 301 determines a presentation pattern according to various commands sent from the main CPU 201. For example, the sub-CPU 301 updates the cumulative payout information of game balls in response to receiving the first large prize opening winning command and the first large prize opening winning command. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 ends the presentation pattern determination process and moves the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).
[9-7-4. Pre-reading performance decision process]
Next, with reference to Fig. 283, the details of the look-ahead effect determination process executed by the sub-CPU 301 in the effect pattern determination process (see Fig. 280) will be described. Fig. 283 is a flow chart showing an example of the look-ahead effect determination process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S7601, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the state information (current game state) stored in the game state storage area of the work RAM 303, and determines whether the current game state is the "first normal game state."

If it is determined in S7601 that the game is in the "first normal game state", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7602. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is not in the "first normal game state", the sub-CPU 301 ends the current pre-reading performance determination process and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see Figures 279 and 280).

In S7602, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the forbidden condition setting table for the look-ahead performance shown in FIG. 274, and determines whether any of the forbidden conditions among the common forbidden conditions 1 to 4 has not yet been satisfied.

If it is determined in S7602 that none of the common prohibition conditions 1 to 4 is satisfied, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7603. On the other hand, if it is determined that none of the common prohibition conditions 1 to 4 is satisfied, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7606.

In S7603, the sub-CPU 301 performs hold change notice presentation determination processing to determine the hold change notice presentation pattern for the hold change notice.

In this reserve change notice performance determination process, after obtaining the third random number value, the reserve notice performance pattern determination table for the reserve change notice shown in FIG. 272 is referred to, and the reserve notice performance pattern is determined based on the received look-ahead command (see FIG. 239) and the obtained third random number value. Then, when the reserve notice performance pattern for the reserve change notice is determined, in order to determine whether the common prohibition condition 5 (see FIG. 274) is satisfied, it is determined whether the first look-ahead flag is already set in the flag storage area of the work RAM 303 (whether the reserve change notice is being executed or not). If the first look-ahead flag is already set, the reserve notice performance pattern determined this time is discarded and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the first look-ahead flag is not set, the first look-ahead flag is set in the flag storage area of the work RAM 303 (the first look-ahead flag is turned on), and the number of times corresponding to the number of reserved first special symbols is set in the first look-ahead number counter of the work RAM 303 with reference to the reserved number counter of the first special symbol of the work RAM 303, and this process is terminated.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S7604.

In S7604, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the prohibition condition setting table for the look-ahead performance shown in FIG. 274, and determines whether any of the first prohibition conditions 1 to 4 has not been satisfied.

If it is determined in S7604 that none of the first prohibition conditions 1 to 4 is satisfied, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7603. On the other hand, if it is determined that none of the first prohibition conditions 1 to 4 is satisfied, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7606.

In S7605, the sub-CPU 301 performs a winning preview performance determination process to determine the winning preview performance pattern of the flash preview.

In this winning notice performance determination process, after obtaining the fourth random number value, the winning notice performance pattern is determined based on the received look-ahead command (see FIG. 239) and the obtained fourth random number value by referring to the winning notice performance pattern determination table for flash notice shown in FIG. 273. Then, when the winning notice performance pattern for performing flash notice is determined, in order to determine whether the common prohibition condition 5 (see FIG. 274) is satisfied, it is determined whether the second look-ahead flag is already set in the flag storage area of the work RAM 303 (whether the flash notice is being executed or not). If the second look-ahead flag is already set, the winning notice performance pattern determined this time is discarded and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the second look-ahead flag is not set, the second look-ahead flag is set in the flag storage area of the work RAM 303 (the second look-ahead flag is turned on), and the number of times corresponding to the reserved number of the first special symbol is set in the second look-ahead number counter of the work RAM 303 by referring to the reserved number counter of the first special symbol of the work RAM 303.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S7606.

In S7606, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the received look-ahead command is a look-ahead command for the second special symbol, i.e., whether a game ball has entered the second start hole 7140 in the first normal game state.

If it is determined in S7606 that the received look-ahead command is a look-ahead command for the second special symbol, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7607. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received look-ahead command is not a look-ahead command for the second special symbol, the current look-ahead performance determination process is terminated, and the process is transferred to the animation request generation process (see Figures 279 and 280).

In S7607, the sub-CPU 301 performs a process of erasing the pre-reading information of the first special symbol. In this process, the first pre-reading flag, the second pre-reading flag, the first pre-reading count counter, the second pre-reading count counter, the pending preview performance pattern, and the winning preview performance pattern are erased (=0).

Even if a pre-reading effect such as a hold change notice or a flash notice is being performed in the first normal game state, if a game ball enters the second start hole 7140, the execution of the pre-reading effect is stopped.

[9-8. Production Contents]
Regarding the effects executed under the control of the main control circuit 200 and the sub-control circuit 300, etc., an example of the effects of the display image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 will be described below.

(Normal display image)
First, a normal display image in the first normal gaming state will be described with reference to Fig. 284. Fig. 284 is an example of a normal display image in the first normal gaming state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 284, in the normal display image in the first normal game state, the left pattern 7071L, the middle pattern 7071C, and the right pattern 7071R are configured to be displayed as main patterns of decorative patterns corresponding to the first special pattern at the center of the display area of the display device 7.

In addition, the right corner of the display area of the display device 7 is configured to be able to display a small first sub-pattern 7072 as a sub-pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the first special pattern, and a small second sub-pattern 7073 as a sub-pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern.

In this embodiment, when the special symbol is displayed in the first normal game state, in addition to the main symbols, left symbol 7071L, middle symbol 7071C, and right symbol 7071R, the sub-symbols, first sub-symbol 7072 or second sub-symbol 7073, are displayed in accordance with the type of special symbol. This is the same for the second normal game state and the first to third time-saving game states. However, when the special symbol is displayed in the first time-saving game state, the main symbols, left symbol 7071L, middle symbol 7071C, and right symbol 7071R, are not displayed, and only the first sub-symbol 7072 or second sub-symbol 7073 are displayed in accordance with the type of special symbol.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main symbols of the left symbol 7071L, the middle symbol 7071C, and the right symbol 7071R are composed of numbers "1-9" or character symbols, and when a big win or small win occurs, the same symbols are all displayed in a stopped state. In contrast, the sub-symbols of the first sub-symbol 7072 and the second sub-symbol 7073 are composed of symbols such as "circle, cross, square, or triangle," and are configured so that different combinations of symbols are displayed in a stopped state even when a big win or small win occurs.

In the lower left of the display area of the display device 7, a reserved image corresponding to the reserved number of the first special pattern can be displayed, and a first reserved image 7074a indicating that start information is stored in the first special pattern start memory area (1), a second reserved image 7074b indicating that start information is stored in the first special pattern start memory area (2), a third reserved image 7074c indicating that start information is stored in the first special pattern start memory area (3), and a fourth reserved image 7074d indicating that start information is stored in the first special pattern start memory area (4) can be displayed according to the reserved number of the first special pattern. Also, in response to the reserved image, the reserved image 7075 indicating that the variable display of the special pattern is being performed is displayed. Note that in this embodiment, a reserved image corresponding to the reserved number of the second special pattern is not displayed, but a reserved image corresponding to the reserved number of the second special pattern may be displayed.

(Card and door effects)
Next, the card presentation and the door presentation when the second special symbol is displayed in the first normal game state will be described with reference to Fig. 285. Fig. 285 is an example of a display image for explaining the card presentation and the door presentation in the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine.

In addition, when explaining the card effects, the symbols in Figure 284 will be omitted because the characters will be small and difficult to see, which may interfere with the explanation of the effect content. In addition, the first sub-pattern 7072 and second sub-pattern 7073, which are displayed very small, will also be omitted. This also applies to the effects explained in Figures 286 to 292.

The left columns (a), (b-1), (c-1), and (d-1) in Figure 285 are examples of card presentations that are executed in the symbol presentation pattern A14 (see Figure 265) when the number of times the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner is 599 in the first normal game state and the lottery result for the second special symbol is a jackpot.

The right columns (a), (b-2), (c-2), and (d-2) in Figure 285 are examples of door presentations that are executed in presentation pattern 100 (see Figure 265) without executing a card presentation when the number of times the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner is 599 in the first normal game state and the lottery result for the second special symbol is a miss.

Figure 285 (a) is an example of a display image before the variable display of the second special symbol begins on the 599th spin in the first normal gaming state.

Figure 285 (b-1) shows an example of a display image when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the card presentation has begun. As shown in Figure 285 (b-1), when symbol presentation pattern A14 (see Figure 265) is determined and the card presentation begins, chance cards with the words "big win," "small win," and "miss" written on them are shuffled face down and a presentation is given in which one of the cards is selected. In addition, the main symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols that were displayed large in the center of the display area are displayed in a reduced size in the bottom right of the display area so as not to interfere with the card presentation and are easily distinguishable by the player.

Figure 285 (c-1) shows an example of a display image when the second special symbol is displayed in a varying manner and the result of the card presentation is displayed. As shown in Figure 285 (c-1), when one card is selected in the card presentation, the card is slowly flipped over and a chance card with the word "jackpot" written on it is displayed.

Figure 285 (d-1) is an example of a display image in which, when the variable display of the second special symbol has finished, a jackpot has been reached as the result of the lottery for the second special symbol. As shown in Figure 285 (d-1), when a chance card with the word jackpot written on it is displayed, the main symbols of the left, middle and right symbols, which are displayed in reduced size in the bottom right of the display area, are displayed large in the center of the display area, and all the main symbols are displayed as the same symbol, notifying the player that a jackpot has been reached.

Figure 285 (b-2) is an example of a display image when the variable display of the second special symbol is being performed and the door effect is started without executing a card effect. As shown in Figure 285 (b-2), when effect pattern 100 (see Figure 265) is determined and the door effect is started, half-open doors are displayed on the left and right of the display area, and the half-open doors are made to rattle for a predetermined period of time. Here, the end time of the door effect effect pattern is not specified, and the effect of the half-open doors rattling is repeated for a predetermined period of time until an instruction to end the effect is given.

Figure 285 (c-2) is an example of a display image when the variable display of the second special pattern ends and the door effect ends. As shown in Figure 285 (c-2), when the variable display of the second special pattern ends (when the special pattern effect stop command is received), the door is closed and all decorative patterns are displayed stationary.

Figure 285 (d-2) is an example of a display image when the display of the special symbol changes at the 600th spin is started, continuing from Figure 285 (c-2). As shown in Figure 285 (d-2), when the display of the special symbol changes at the 600th spin is started from the first normal game state, a door is opened, and the transition from the first normal game state to the B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state) is notified by the background, etc. Note that, as described above in S7531-72 of Figure 285, when the transition from the first normal game state to the B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state) occurs, the male character's presentation stage 30 is determined as the initial presentation stage.

(Chance to enter the Sengoku Period)
Next, the presentation of the Sengoku entry chance in the first time-saving gaming state will be described with reference to Fig. 286. Fig. 286 is an example of a display image for explaining the presentation of the Sengoku entry chance in the first time-saving gaming state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

Figure 286 shows an example of a boss battle presentation executed with symbol presentation patterns C4 to C7 (see Figure 268) as a presentation of a chance to enter the Sengoku period when the result of the lottery for the second special symbol in the first time-saving game state is a big win or a small win.

Figure 286 (a) is an example of a display image when the Sengoku Entry Chance in the first time-saving game state starts. As shown in Figure 286 (a), in the Sengoku Entry Chance in the first time-saving game state, as an example, an operation instruction image for causing the player to hit to the right is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area, and the background of "presentation stage 20" showing the stage for the Sengoku Entry Chance is displayed.

Figure 286 (b) is an example of a display image of a boss battle effect that is performed when the game ball enters the second starting hole 7140 in the first time-saving game state and the second special pattern is being displayed in a variable manner.

Here, as described above in FIG. 237(1) and FIG. 268, the lottery for the second special symbol, which is conducted by the game ball entering the second starting hole 7140 in the first time-saving game state, occurs at the final change time of the first time-saving game state, and the change display time of the second special symbol is determined to be an extremely short change display time (0.2 seconds), and the pattern determination time of the second special symbol is determined to be an extremely long pattern determination time (89 seconds).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 286(b), when a game ball enters the second starting hole 7140 in the first time-saving game state, the main symbol is not displayed, and the variable display of the second sub-symbol 7073 is immediately stopped. At this time, the boss battle presentation that started when the variable display of the second special symbol was started is not terminated in conjunction with the stopped display of the second special symbol, and the boss character continues to be displayed.

Figure 286 (c) is an example of a display image of a boss battle effect that is performed when the second special symbol is being displayed as a confirmed symbol. As shown in Figure 286 (c), when the second special symbol is being displayed as a confirmed symbol, an effect in which a player fights a boss character is performed, and the boss battle effect that started during the variable display of the second special symbol continues to be executed.

Figure 286 (d) is an example of a display image when the result of the boss battle effect that is performed while the second special symbol is being displayed as determined. As shown in Figure 286 (d), when the player wins the battle against the boss character, it is announced that the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a big win or a small win, and the game moves to a big win game state or a small win game state.

Then, when the big win game state (including the case where the small win game state is passed through) from the first time-saving game state ends, the selection permission flag turns ON, allowing the player to select the Sengoku Time presentation stage.

(Selection of Production Stage by Player)
Next, the selection of the performance stage in Sengoku Time by the player will be described with reference to Fig. 287. Fig. 287 is an example of a display image for explaining the selection of the performance stage by the player in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As described above in FIG. 277(1), if the game state at the time of winning is the first normal game state and the winning symbol corresponds to the symbol designation command "zA2-4", if the game state at the time of winning is the second normal game state, or if the game state at the time of winning is the first time-limited game state, in either case, a transition to the second time-limited game state will occur as a so-called first win or a pull-back win, allowing the player to select the Sengoku Time presentation stage during the ending interval at the end of the jackpot game state.

Figure 287 (a) is an example of a display image when selecting the Sengoku Time presentation stage in the end interval at the end of the jackpot game state. As shown in Figure 286 (a), in the end interval at the end of the jackpot game state, an operation instruction image for the player to hit to the right, a presentation button operation image showing the operation of the presentation button 54, a remaining time image showing the remaining time of the effective operation time of the presentation button 54, an operation explanation image explaining the operation method of stage selection using the presentation button 54, and a stage selection image showing the selection between the male character stage (presentation stage 30) and the female character stage (presentation stage 30) are displayed.

Figure 287 (b) is an example of a display image when the Sengoku Time presentation stage is determined in the end interval at the end of the jackpot gaming state. As shown in Figure 286 (b), when the effective operation time for the presentation button 54 has elapsed (when the remaining time image becomes zero) in the end interval at the end of the jackpot gaming state, the presentation stage that was selected will be determined as the Sengoku Time presentation stage.

(Sengoku Time Production)
Next, the Sengoku Time presentation will be described with reference to Fig. 288 and Fig. 289. Fig. 288 is an example of a display image for explaining the Sengoku Time presentation when a male character stage is selected in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. Fig. 289 is an example of a display image for explaining the Sengoku Time presentation when a female character stage is selected in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

Figure 288(a) is an example of a display image when the Sengoku Time presentation in the second time-saving game state is started. As shown in Figure 288(a), in the Sengoku Time presentation in the second time-saving game state, as an example, a remaining number image showing the remaining number of variable display times (second time-saving number) of Sengoku Time is displayed in the upper left of the display area, an operation instruction image for the player to hit to the right, and the background of the presentation stage of Sengoku Time are displayed. Note that Figure 288(a) displays a star pattern background of "presentation stage 41" showing Premier Stage 1 (number of reserved consecutive stocks = 1) for male characters. Also, "presentation stage 30" showing the normal stage for male characters has a plain background.

Figure 288 (b) is an example of a display image of the Sengoku Time effect (for example, an effect executed by the pattern effect patterns P10, P13, and P16 (see Figures 269 and 270)) that is performed when the game ball enters the second starting hole 7140 in the second time-saving game state and the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. As shown in Figure 288 (b), a male character and a star pattern background are displayed corresponding to the "effect stage 41", and the main symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols that were displayed large in the center of the display area are displayed in a reduced size in the lower right of the display area so that the player can distinguish them. At this time, as a decorative symbol effect, the main symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols all start to display a high-speed variable display separately, and the left and right symbols do not stop temporarily in order, but all symbols stop and display approximately simultaneously, in a normal variable mode effect.

Figure 288 (c) is an example of a display image of a Sengoku Time presentation (for example, a presentation executed by the pattern presentation patterns P10, P13, and P16) in which, when the variable display of the second special pattern ends, it is announced that the special pattern lottery result is a big win or a small win. As shown in Figure 288 (c), the main patterns of the left, middle, and right patterns displayed in a reduced size at the bottom right of the display area are displayed large in the center of the display area, and all the main patterns are displayed as the same pattern, announcing that the lottery for the second special pattern has resulted in a big win or a small win. Note that, if the lottery for the second special pattern is a miss, the main patterns of the left, middle, and right patterns are displayed in a reduced size at the bottom right of the display area and are displayed as different patterns.

Figure 288 (d) is an example of a display image of a Sengoku Time presentation (for example, a presentation executed by small win start presentation pattern 10 (see Figure 275)) that is performed when a male character presentation stage is selected and a small win game state is started. As shown in Figure 288 (d), in the small win game state, a presentation is performed in which a male character instructs the player to pass the game ball through the V winning hole 7156 against background A1 (for example, a blue background). At this time, the number of reserved consecutive stocks can be suggested in advance by background A1 (for example, a blue background) or background A2 (for example, a red background).

Figure 288 (e) is an example of a display image of a Sengoku Time effect (for example, an effect executed by V passage effect pattern 11 (see Figure 276)) that is performed when a male character's effect stage is selected and the game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156 in a small win game state. As shown in Figure 288 (e), when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156 in a small win game state, a V is displayed in the first display mode, and if the number of reserved consecutive stocks is 1, "STOCK1" can be displayed, indicating that the number of reserved consecutive stocks is 1. In this way, when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156 in a male character's effect stage, the number of reserved consecutive stocks can be notified.

Figure 289(a) is an example of a display image when the Sengoku Time presentation in the second time-saving play state is started. As shown in Figure 289(a), in the Sengoku Time presentation in the second time-saving play state, as an example, a remaining number image indicating the remaining number of variable display times (second time-saving number) of Sengoku Time is displayed in the upper left of the display area, an operation instruction image for the player to hit to the right, and the background of the Sengoku Time presentation stage are displayed. Note that Figure 289(a) displays a heart-patterned background for "presentation stage 40," which indicates the premier stage for female characters (number of reserved consecutive stocks ≧1). Also, "presentation stage 31," which indicates the normal stage for female characters, has a plain background.

Figure 289 (b) is an example of a display image of the Sengoku Time effect (for example, an effect executed by the pattern effect patterns P12, P15, and P18 (see Figures 269 and 270)) that is performed when the game ball enters the second starting hole 7140 in the second time-saving game state and the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. As shown in Figure 289 (b), a female character and a heart-patterned background are displayed corresponding to the "effect stage 40", and the main symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols that were displayed large in the center of the display area are displayed in a reduced size in the lower right of the display area so that the player can distinguish them. At this time, the main symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols start to display a variable manner at high speed separately as a decorative symbol effect, and a normal variable mode effect is performed in which all symbols stop and display approximately simultaneously without the left and right symbols temporarily stopping in sequence.

Figure 289 (c) is an example of a display image of a Sengoku Time presentation (for example, a presentation executed by the pattern presentation patterns P12, P15, and P18) in which, when the variable display of the second special pattern ends, it is announced that the special pattern lottery result is a big win or a small win. As shown in Figure 289 (c), the main left, middle, and right patterns displayed in a reduced size at the bottom right of the display area are displayed large in the center of the display area, and all the main patterns are displayed as the same pattern, announcing that the lottery for the second special pattern has resulted in a big win or a small win. Note that, if the lottery for the second special pattern is a miss, the main left, middle, and right patterns are displayed in a reduced size at the bottom right of the display area and are displayed as different patterns.

Figure 289 (d) is an example of a display image of a Sengoku Time presentation (e.g., a presentation executed by small win start presentation pattern 20 (see Figure 275)) that is performed when a female character presentation stage is selected and a small win game state is started. As shown in Figure 289 (d), in the small win game state, a presentation is performed in which a female character instructs the player to pass the game ball through the V winning opening 7156 in background A1 (e.g., a blue background). At this time, the number of reserved consecutive stocks can be suggested in advance by background A1 (e.g., a blue background) or background A2 (e.g., a red background).

Figure 289 (e-1) is an example of a display image of a Sengoku Time effect (for example, an effect executed by V-passing effect pattern 20 (see Figure 276)) that is performed when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156 in a small win game state when a female character's performance stage is selected and the number of reserved consecutive stocks is 0. As shown in Figure 289 (e-1), when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156 when the number of reserved consecutive stocks is 0, a V can be displayed in the second display mode.

Figure 289 (e-2) is an example of a display image of a Sengoku Time effect (for example, an effect executed by V-passing effect pattern 21) that is performed when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156 in a small win game state when a female character's performance stage is selected and the number of reserved consecutive stocks is ≧1. As shown in Figure 289 (e-2), when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156 when the number of reserved consecutive stocks is ≧1, a V can be displayed in a special display mode.

In this way, when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156 in the female character's performance stage, it is possible to notify the player that the number of reserved consecutive stocks is ≥ 1 (whether or not there are any reserved consecutive stocks).

(Small hit game state: punctured)
Next, referring to Fig. 290, the effect that is performed when the game ball does not pass through the V winning hole 7156 in the small winning game state (so-called blowout) will be described. Fig. 290 is an example of a display image that explains the effect that is performed when the game ball does not pass through the V winning hole in the small winning game state in the seventh pachinko game machine.

Figure 290 (a) is an example of a display image of the Sengoku Time presentation that is performed when a male character presentation stage is selected and a small win game state is started. As shown in Figure 290 (a), in a small win game state, a presentation is performed in which the male character instructs the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 7156, but it is assumed that the game ball does not pass through the V winning hole 7156 because the player does not perform a right hit, etc.

Figure 290 (b) is an example of a display image of an effect (for example, an effect executed by effect patterns 101 and 102 (see Figure 275)) that is performed when the small win game state ends without the game ball passing through the V winning opening 7156. As shown in Figure 290 (b), during the interval time at the end of the small win game state, a half-open door is displayed on the left and right of the display area, and after the half-open door rattles for a predetermined period of time, a door effect is performed in which the door closes.

Figure 290 (c-1) is an example of a display image of an effect (for example, an effect executed by effect pattern 102) that is performed when there are reserved second special symbols at the end of the small win game state after the door effect is performed. As shown in Figure 290 (c-1), when there are reserved second special symbols at the end of the small win game state, the door is opened and a continuous battle entry effect is performed to notify the player of a transition to a dedicated stage (effect stage 10) for continuous battles in the second normal game state.

Figure 290 (c-2) is an example of a display image of an effect (for example, an effect executed by effect pattern 101) that is performed when there are no reserved second special symbols at the end of the small win game state after the door effect has been performed. As shown in Figure 290 (c-2), when there are no reserved second special symbols at the end of the small win game state, the door is opened and a stage change effect is performed to notify the player of a transition to the seaside stage (effect stage 2) of the limited effect state in the first normal game state.

(End of Sengoku Time)
Next, the effects performed when the Sengoku time ends will be described with reference to Fig. 291. Fig. 291 is an example of a display image for explaining the effects performed when the Sengoku time ends in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

Figure 291 (a) is an example of a display image of the Sengoku Time effect that is performed when the display of the special symbols begins at the final change of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state. As shown in Figure 291 (a), a male character and a plain background are displayed corresponding to "performance stage 30," and the main symbols of the left, center, and right symbols are displayed in reduced size at the bottom right of the display area.

Figure 291 (b) is an example of a display image of the Sengoku Time result presentation (for example, presentation executed by the pattern presentation patterns F10-F13, F20-F23 (see Figure 270)) which is performed when the special pattern lottery is determined to be a miss and the special pattern variation display is being performed. As shown in Figure 291 (b), the game results of Sengoku Time include information on the number of jackpots and points acquired which indicate the number of game balls paid out to the player, and when the variation display of the special pattern ends, the main patterns of the left, center, and right patterns, which are displayed in reduced size at the bottom right of the display area, are displayed as stopped patterns.

Figure 291 (c-1) is an example of a display image of the consecutive battle entry effect that is performed during the determined special pattern display when there are reserved numbers of the second special pattern when the variable display of the special pattern ends. As shown in Figure 291 (c-1), during the determined special pattern display, a consecutive battle entry effect is performed to notify the player of a transition to a dedicated stage (effect stage 10) for consecutive battles in the second normal game state.

Figure 291 (c-2) is an example of a display image of a door effect that is performed during the determined special pattern display when there are no reserved second special patterns when the variable display of the special pattern ends. As shown in Figure 291 (c-2), during the determined special pattern display, half-open doors are displayed on the left and right of the display area, and after the half-open doors rattle for a predetermined period of time, the doors close.

(Continuous battle scenes)
Next, the presentation of the continuous battle in the second normal gaming state will be described with reference to Fig. 292. Fig. 292 is an example of a display image for explaining the presentation of the continuous battle in the second normal gaming state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

Figure 292 shows an example in which, when the second variation is a winning combination as a result of the lottery for the second special symbol in the second normal game state, the first variation is a continuous battle presentation using symbol presentation pattern R2 (see Figure 267), and the second variation is a continuous battle presentation using symbol presentation patterns R10 and R11 (see Figure 267).

Figure 292 (a) is an example of a display image when the presentation of the continuous battle in the second normal game state starts. As shown in Figure 292 (a), in the presentation of the continuous battle in the second normal game state, as an example, an operation instruction image for the player to hit to the right is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area, a display image of rounds 1 to 3 corresponding to the number of times the second special symbol is displayed in the left side of the display area, and the background of the dedicated stage (presentation stage 10) for the continuous battle, which imitates an arena, is displayed in the center of the display area. In addition, the main symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols are displayed in a reduced size in the lower right corner of the display area to an extent that they can be identified by the player so as not to interfere with the presentation of the continuous battle.

Figure 292 (b) is an example of a display image of a continuous battle effect that is performed when the display of the second special symbol for the first change begins in the second normal game state. As shown in Figure 292 (b), the continuous battle effect is an effect in which the main character and a rival character appear and face off against each other (continuous battle effect using symbol effect pattern R2).

Figure 292 (c) is an example of a display image of the continuous battle effect that is performed when the display of the second special symbol for the first change ends in the second normal game state. As shown in Figure 292 (c), the result of the continuous battle effect is an effect in which the battle is not concluded but the main character has the advantage and the game ends in a draw.

Figure 292 (d) is an example of a display image of a continuous battle effect that is performed when the display of the second special symbol for the second change begins in the second normal game state. As shown in Figure 292 (d), the continuous battle effect is an effect in which the main character and the rival character continue to face off against each other (continuous battle effect using symbol effect patterns R10 and R11).

Figure 292 (e) is an example of a display image of the continuous battle presentation that is performed when the display of the second special symbol for the second change in the second normal game state ends. As shown in Figure 292 (e), the result of the continuous battle presentation is a presentation in which the battle is concluded and the main character is victorious. In addition, the main symbols of the left, middle and right symbols, which are displayed in reduced size in the bottom right of the display area, are all displayed as the same symbol and temporarily stopped. After that, the main symbols, all of which are the same symbol and temporarily stopped, are displayed large in the center of the display area, and the player is notified that a big win or a small win has occurred.

In this way, the seventh pachinko gaming machine allows transitions between the first normal gaming state, the second normal gaming state, the first time-saving gaming state, the second time-saving gaming state, and the third time-saving gaming state, and provides appropriate presentations according to each gaming state, thereby further increasing the excitement of the game.

In addition, in the seventh pachinko gaming machine, in the look-ahead performance (hold change notice, flash notice) in the first normal game state, as explained in FIG. 274, etc., whether or not to execute the look-ahead performance is determined depending on the game situation, etc., so that the look-ahead performance can be executed at an appropriate timing, further increasing the excitement of the game.

In addition, in the seventh pachinko gaming machine, even when an irregular game mode is played, appropriate presentation patterns are executed in accordance with the transition of the game state due to the irregular game mode, thereby maintaining and improving gameplay.

In addition, in the seventh pachinko gaming machine, as explained in FIG. 244 etc., the variable display time of the second special symbol is set to the extremely short first variable display time to quickly end the first time-saving gaming state, the specified number for normal power for the normal electric device 7146 is set to one, and the variable display time of the normal symbol in the first time-saving gaming state is set to be equal to or longer than the first variable display time of the second special symbol, so that the first time-saving gaming state can be controlled so that the reserved number of the second special symbol is not stored. Also, it is possible to control the second time-saving gaming state so that the reserved number of the second special symbol is stored.

In addition, in the seventh pachinko gaming machine, as explained in FIG. 286 etc., in the presentation of the Sengoku Entry Chance in the first time-saving gaming state, the presentation is executed over the time for which the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the time for which the symbol is determined, thereby improving the freedom of presentation and making the game more interesting.

In addition, in the seventh pachinko game machine, as explained in Figures 288 and 289, etc., in "Sengoku Time," which is the period from the second or third time-saving game state to the small win game state, presentations based on the same presentation stage are performed, so that a series of presentations can be executed from the second or third time-saving game state to the small win game state, further enhancing the entertainment value of the game. Furthermore, in the Sengoku Time presentation, the small win start presentation pattern and the V-pass presentation pattern can suggest the number of reserved consecutive stocks, further enhancing the entertainment value of the game.

(others)
The seventh pachinko gaming machine described above can apply the techniques of each embodiment, including modified examples. The above-mentioned embodiments do not limit the contents of the present invention, and modifications can be made to the extent that they do not deviate from the scope of the claims.

Furthermore, the effects described in the seventh pachinko gaming machine are merely a list of the most favorable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in each embodiment of the present invention.

Furthermore, the above [4. Expansion Example] can also be applied to the seventh pachinko gaming machine, as long as there is no inconsistency in its gameplay or control.

[10. The 8th Pachinko Game Machine]
Next, the eighth pachinko gaming machine will be described. The eighth pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine called a one-type two-type mixed machine, like the third pachinko gaming machine. The eighth pachinko gaming machine is different from the third pachinko gaming machine in terms of gameplay and presentation content, and accordingly, the configuration of various components arranged in the game area is also partially different.

The eighth pachinko gaming machine, like the third pachinko gaming machine, is a priority variable machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed in parallel, and the start condition of the second special symbol is established in priority over the start condition of the first special symbol. However, this is not limited to this, and the machine may be a sequential variable machine as described above.

The eighth pachinko game machine also counts the number of consecutive jackpots that transition to a jackpot game state under specific conditions (time-saving game state), and is equipped with a "number limiter function" that partially restricts the game state to which the game transitions after the jackpot game state ends when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined limiter number (e.g., 100 times). Furthermore, in addition to the "number limiter function," the eighth pachinko game machine also counts the cumulative number of jackpot balls paid out in the jackpot game state per day, and is equipped with a "ball payout limiter function" that partially restricts the game state to which the game transitions after the jackpot game state ends when the cumulative number of jackpot balls paid out reaches a predetermined number of balls to be played (e.g., 100,000 balls).

Hereinafter, when explaining the eighth pachinko gaming machine, the same components as those in the first pachinko gaming machine will be given the same symbols and step numbers, and detailed explanations of their configuration and processing will be omitted.

In this embodiment, "entering a game ball" into an entry port (e.g., a starting port or a big prize entry port) that can give the player a certain benefit (payout of game balls, transition of game state) is also referred to as "winning" as appropriate. Also, in this embodiment, the "variable display" of a pattern is a concept that includes both a "variable display" in which the pattern changes and is displayed, and a "stationary display" in which the pattern stops and is displayed, and the operation from the start of the variable display to the stationary display is referred to as one "variable display."

[10-1. Game board unit]
A game board unit 8010 provided in the eighth pachinko game machine will be described with reference to Fig. 293. This game board unit 8010 is also disposed in front of the base door 3 (see Fig. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see Fig. 2) like the first pachinko game machine.

Figure 293 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit 8010 equipped in the eighth pachinko game machine. The game board unit 8010 has a game panel 8100 as a game board, various components are arranged on the game panel 8100, and a game area 105 is formed on the front side of the game panel 8100, in which the released game balls can roll and flow down.

As shown in FIG. 293, the game board unit 8010 of the eighth pachinko gaming machine differs from the first pachinko gaming machine mainly in the configuration and arrangement of the passing gate 8126, the second starting port 8140, the normal electric role unit 8145, the first special electric role unit 8130, and the second special electric role unit 8150. The configuration and arrangement of each of these are explained below.

The first starting hole 8120 located in the play area 105 of the eighth pachinko game machine is functionally the same as the first starting hole 120 located in the play area 105 of the first pachinko game machine, but because of its relationship with the second starting hole 8140, it will be described again using a different reference number than in the first pachinko game machine.

(Passing gate)
The passing gate 8126 is disposed above a normal electric accessory unit 8145 described later in the right-side area 107, and allows a game ball hit from the right side to pass through (a game ball hit from the left side has difficulty or cannot pass through). The passing gate 8126 is provided with a passing gate switch 8127 (see FIG. 294 described later) that detects the passage of a game ball through the passing gate 8126. In this embodiment, the passing gate 8126 is disposed above the normal electric accessory unit 8145 in the right-side area 107, but the passing gate 8126 may be disposed below the normal electric accessory unit 8145 in the right-side area 107.

When a game ball passes through the passing gate 8126, it is used for the normal symbol lottery (a process for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol) and for the variable display of normal symbols. In this embodiment, even if a game ball passes through the passing gate 8126, no prize balls are paid out, but it may be a winning gate from which a predetermined prize ball (for example, one game ball) is paid out.

The passing gate 8126 may also function as a trigger for activating a consecutive operation device for special features. Assuming that the condition device is in operation (the special symbol that will result in a jackpot is displayed frozen), the passing gate 8126 may activate the consecutive operation device for special features, causing a transition to a jackpot gaming state.

(First starting point)
The first starting hole 8120 is disposed in the game area 105 below the display area of the display device 7, and is configured so that game balls hit to the left can enter the hole, and game nails or the like make it difficult or impossible for game balls hit to the right to enter the hole. The first starting hole 8120 is provided with a first starting hole switch 8121 (see FIG. 294 described later) that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 8120.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 8120, a first special symbol lottery (a process for determining whether the first special symbol is a winning symbol), a variable display of the first special symbol, and a prize ball for the first starting hole (e.g., three game balls) are paid out. The process after the game ball enters the first starting hole 8120 will be described in detail later.

(Second starting hole)
The second starting hole 8140 is located in the right side area 107 below (downstream) the passing gate 8126 described later, and is provided in a normal electric role unit 8145 described later, so that game balls hit to the right can enter the hole (game balls hit to the left are difficult or impossible to enter the hole). The second starting hole 8140 is provided with a second starting hole switch 8141 that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 8140.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second starting opening 8140 is located below (downstream) the passing gate 8126, so that a game ball that has passed through the passing gate 8126 can enter the second starting opening 8140 when the normal electric device 8146 described below is in operation.

When a game ball enters the second starting hole 8140, a second special symbol lottery (a process for determining whether the second special symbol is a winning symbol), a variable display of the second special symbol, and a prize ball for the second starting hole (for example, one game ball) are paid out. The process after the game ball enters the second starting hole 8140 will be described in detail later.

(Normal electric role unit)
The normal electric role unit 8145 is located in the right area 107 below (downstream of) the passing gate 8126, and is located so that the game ball hit to the right can pass through it. The normal electric role unit 8145 is a unit body that integrates the second start hole 8140, the second start hole switch 8141 that detects the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 8140, and the normal electric role 8146.

The normal electric device 8146 is equipped with a protruding plate-type normal power shutter 8147 that can move forward and backward, and a normal power solenoid 8148 (see FIG. 294 described below) that operates this normal power shutter 8147. The normal electric device 8146, i.e., the normal power shutter 8147, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy to insert a game ball into the second starting hole 8140, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to insert a game ball into the second starting hole 8140.

Specifically, the normal power shutter 8147 is composed of a substantially triangular ball entry prevention section disposed near the entrance of the second starting port 8140 and a flat ball entry guidance section inclined toward the second starting port 8140. When the normal power shutter 8147 is in the closed state, the substantially triangular ball entry prevention section is located in an opposing area facing the entrance of the second starting port 8140 and prevents balls from entering the second starting port 8140, and the flat ball entry guidance section is embedded in the surface of the game panel 8100 and allows game balls to flow downward without accepting game balls flowing down into the right side area 107. On the other hand, when the normal power shutter 8147 is in the open state, the approximately triangular ball entry prevention section is located in an avoidance area (for example, the gap from the top of the game nail to the protective glass 43) that does not face the entrance of the second starting hole 8140, and does not hinder the ball from entering the second starting hole 8140, and the flat ball entry guide section protrudes from the surface of the game panel 8100 to receive the game ball flowing down to the right area 107 and guide the received game ball to the second starting hole 8140. Note that instead of the above-mentioned normal power shutter 8147 that can move forward and backward, a movable member called a so-called electric chute may be used.

In addition, when the second starting hole 8140 is open and a specified number of game balls (e.g., one) for normal power enter the hole, the normal electric device 8146 closes the second starting hole 8140 even if the opening time has not elapsed.

(First special electric feature unit)
The first special electric role unit 8130 is disposed below (downstream) the pass gate 8126, the normal electric role unit 8145, and the second special electric role unit 8150 described later in the right area 107. The first special electric role unit 8130 may be disposed upstream of at least one of the pass gate 8126, the normal electric role unit 8145, and the second special electric role unit 8150 described later in the right area 107, or may be disposed in the left area 106.

The first special electric device unit 8130 is a unitary body that integrates a first large prize opening 8131, a first large prize opening count switch 8132 (see FIG. 294 described below) that detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 8131, a first special electric shutter 8134 that can move back and forth, and a first special electric solenoid 8135 (see FIG. 294 described below) that operates the first special electric shutter 8134.

The first large prize opening 8131 is an opening that opens when a jackpot is hit, and the maximum number of winning balls that can enter the first large prize opening 8131 in one round of a jackpot (for example, 10 balls) is specified. Each time one game ball enters the first large prize opening 8131, prize balls for the first large prize opening (for example, 15 game balls) are paid out.

The first large prize opening 8131 transitions from a closed state to an open state in the first route when a special stop display mode is derived indicating that the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a "big hit" and in the second route when a specific stop display mode is derived indicating that the result of the special pattern determination is a "small hit" and the second large prize opening 8151 opens, and a game ball that enters the opened second large prize opening 8151 enters the V prize opening 8156 within the second large prize opening 8151.

The first special electric shutter 8134 is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the first large winning opening 8131, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the first large winning opening 8131, by the operation of the first special electric solenoid 8135 (see Figure 294 described below).

Specifically, the first special electric shutter 8134 is configured as an opening and closing door with a pivot support at the bottom. When the first special electric shutter 8134 is in the open state, the opening and closing door is tilted forward to open the first large winning opening 8131, which receives the game balls flowing down to the right area 107 and guides the received game balls to the first large winning opening 8131. On the other hand, when the first special electric shutter 8134 is in the closed state, the opening and closing door is inverted to close the first large winning opening 8131, making it impossible or difficult for the game balls to enter the first large winning opening 8131. Note that instead of the above-mentioned first special electric shutter 8134, a movable member that is pivotally supported at the bottom and can be tilted to either the left or right side may be used.

(Second special electric feature unit)
The second special electric role unit 8150 is provided below (downstream) the passing gate 8126 and the normal electric role unit 8145 in the right area 107. The second special electric role unit 8150 may be provided upstream of at least one of the passing gate 8126 or the normal electric role unit 8145, or may be provided in the left area 106.

The second special electric device unit 8150 includes a second large prize opening 8151, a second large prize opening count switch 8152 that detects the entry of a game ball into the second large prize opening 8151, a second special electric shutter 8154 that can open and close the second large prize opening 8151, a second special electric solenoid 8155 (see FIG. 294 described below) that operates the second special electric shutter 8154 to open and close the second large prize opening 8151, and a V-entrance through which a game ball that has entered the second large prize opening 8151 can pass. It is a unitary body that integrates a prize opening 8156, a V winning opening switch 8157 that detects when a game ball has passed through the V winning opening 8156, a losing opening 8158 through which game balls that have entered the second large winning opening 8151 but have not entered the V winning opening 8156 can pass, a V shutter 8159 that opens and closes the V winning opening 8156, and a V shutter solenoid 8160 (see Figure 294 described below) that operates the V shutter 8159 to open and close the V winning opening 8156.

The second large prize opening 8151 is an opening that opens when a small win occurs, and the maximum number of winning balls that can enter the second large prize opening 8151 in one small win (for example, 10 balls) is specified. Each time one game ball enters this second large prize opening 8151, prize balls for the second large prize opening (for example, 15 game balls) are paid out.

The second special electric shutter 8154 is made of a protruding plate-shaped member that can move forward and backward, and is configured so that by operating the second special electric solenoid 8155 (see Figure 294 described below), the second special electric shutter 8154 can be advanced forward to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second large winning opening 8151, and the second special electric shutter 8154 can be retracted backward to an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second large winning opening 8151.

The V winning hole 8156 is a winning hole that can be opened and closed by the V shutter 8159, and is also a winning hole through which the game ball passes, triggering control of the jackpot game state via the second route described above.

When the game is controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route, the opening of the second large prize opening 8151 when the game ball passes through the V prize opening 8156 is regarded as the first round, and after the game ball passes through the V prize opening 8156 (from the second round onwards), a round game is executed in which the first large prize opening 8131 transitions from a closed state to an open state. Note that when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route, a round game in which the second large prize opening 8151 transitions from a closed state to an open state may be executed for a predetermined number of rounds even after the game ball passes through the V prize opening 8156 (from the second round onwards).

Also, for example, a V entry port may be provided inside the first large prize opening 8131, so that there is one V entry port and one attacker that is opened in the big win game state. In this case, when a stop display mode indicating a "small win" is derived, the first large prize opening 8131 is set to an open state, and when a game ball enters the V entry port provided inside the first large prize opening 8131, the game is controlled to a big win game state (a big win game state via the second route).

The losing port 8158 is configured to allow game balls that have entered the second large winning port 8151 but have not passed through the V winning port 8156 to enter (pass through). Game balls that pass through the losing port 8158 are ejected outside the machine. Note that when a small win occurs, if all game balls that have entered the open second large winning port 8151 pass through the losing port 8158 and no game balls pass through the V winning port 8156, the game will not transition from the small win game state to the big win game state.

The V-shutter 8159 is configured to be able to transition between a closed state in which it is impossible (or difficult) for game balls to pass through the V-entry opening 8156, and an open state in which it is possible (or easy) for game balls to pass through the V-entry opening 8156, by the operation of the V-shutter solenoid 8160 (see Figure 294 described below).

In particular, in the eighth pachinko game machine, even if it is the same small win (small win game state), the operating mode of the V shutter 8159 (operation timing of the V shutter solenoid 8160) creates different types of small wins: a "fall small win" in which it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through to the V winning hole 8156, and a "V small win" in which it is possible (or easy) for the game ball to pass through to the V winning hole 8156.

[10-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the eighth pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 294. Fig. 294 is an example of a block diagram showing the control circuit of the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 294, the eighth pachinko gaming machine, like the first pachinko gaming machine, is mainly composed of a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 300 that controls the presentation according to the progress of the game, a payout/launch control circuit 400, and a power supply circuit 450.

However, compared to the first pachinko game machine, the eighth pachinko game machine differs in some respects in the configuration of the device connected to the main control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 300, and the payout/launch control circuit 400. The configuration and layout of each of these components are explained below.

[10-2-1. Main control circuit]
Compared to the first pachinko game machine, the main control circuit 200 has slightly different configurations in the normal power solenoid 8148, the first special power solenoid 8135, the second special power solenoid 8155, the V shutter solenoid 8160, the first start port switch 8121, the second start port switch 8141, the passing gate switch 8127, the first large prize port count switch 8132, the second large prize port count switch 8152, and the V prize port switch 8157 which are connected to the main control circuit 200.

(Solenoid for general purpose)
The normal power solenoid 8148 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the normal power shutter 8147. When the normal power solenoid 8148 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it advances the normal power shutter 8147 forward to open the second starting port 8140, and when it is not energized (OFF) by the main CPU 201, it moves the normal power shutter 8147 backward to close the second starting port 8140.

(First special solenoid)
The first special electric solenoid 8135 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the first special electric shutter 8134, which is an opening and closing door. When the main CPU 201 energizes the first special electric solenoid 8135 (ON), the first special electric shutter 8134 is tilted forward to open the first large prize opening 8131, and when the main CPU 201 does not energize the first special electric solenoid 8135 (OFF), the first special electric shutter 8134 is inverted backward to close the first large prize opening 8131.

(Second special solenoid)
The second special electric solenoid 8155 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the second special electric shutter 8154. When the main CPU 201 energizes the second special electric solenoid 8155 (ON), the second special electric solenoid 8155 moves the second special electric shutter 8154 backward to open the second large winning opening 8151, and when the main CPU 201 does not energize the second special electric solenoid 8155 (OFF), the second special electric shutter 8154 advances forward to close the second large winning opening 8151.

(Solenoid for V-shutter)
The V shutter solenoid 8160 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the V shutter 8159. When the V shutter solenoid 8160 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it moves the V shutter 8159 backward to open the V winning opening 8156, and when it is not energized (OFF) by the main CPU 201, it moves the V shutter 8159 forward to close the V winning opening 8156.

(First start switch)
The first starting hole switch 8121 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 8120.

When the first start hole switch 8121 detects the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 8120, the main CPU 201 determines that the first start condition is met and acquires start information for the first special symbol (random number value for determining a jackpot, random number value for a symbol, random number value for determining a reach, random number value for selecting a performance, etc.). The acquired start information for the first special symbol is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (first special symbol start memory area (1) to first special symbol start memory area (4) in order) of the main RAM 203 up to the "reserved number of first special symbols (e.g., four)," and when the judgment start condition for the first special symbol (e.g., the special electric role is not in operation, the variable display of the special symbol is not being performed, etc.) is met, it is used for the hit judgment process for the first special symbol and the variable display of the first special symbol. In addition, when the first start port switch 8121 detects the entry of a game ball into the first start port 8120, the main CPU 201 instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of the prize balls for the first start port (e.g., three game balls).

(Second start switch)
The second starting hole switch 8141 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 8140.

When the second start hole switch 8141 detects the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 8140, the main CPU 201 determines that the second start condition is met and acquires start information for the second special symbol (random number value for determining a big win, random number value for symbol, random number value for reach determination, random number value for effect selection, etc.). The acquired start information for the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol start memory area (second special symbol start memory area (1) to second special symbol start memory area (4) in order) of the main RAM 203 up to the "reserved number of second special symbols (e.g., four)," and when the judgment start condition for the second special symbol (e.g., the special electric role is not in operation, the variable display of the special symbol is not being performed, etc.) is met, it is used for the hit judgment process for the second special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. In addition, when the second start port switch 8141 detects the entry of a game ball into the second start port 8140, the main CPU 201 instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of a prize ball (e.g., one game ball) for the second start port.

In addition, in the embodiment, the winning judgment process for the first special pattern based on the start information of the first special pattern is also called the "lottery for the first special pattern," and the winning judgment process for the second special pattern based on the start information of the second special pattern is also called the "lottery for the second special pattern," and the lottery for the first special pattern and the lottery for the second special pattern are collectively called the "lottery for the special patterns."

(Passing gate switch)
The passing gate switch 8127 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the passage of a game ball through the passing gate 8126.

When the pass gate switch 8127 detects the passage of a game ball through the pass gate 8126, the main CPU 201 acquires the start information of the normal symbol (random number value for determining whether the normal symbol is a hit, random number value of the normal symbol, etc.). The acquired start information of the normal symbol is stored in the normal symbol start memory area (normal symbol start memory area (1) to normal symbol start memory area (4) in order) of the main RAM 203 up to the "reserved number of normal symbols (for example, 4)". When the normal symbol judgment start condition (for example, the normal electric role is not in operation, the variable display of the normal symbol is not being performed, etc.) is satisfied, it is used for the normal symbol lottery (normal symbol hit judgment process) and the variable display of the normal symbol. Note that even if the pass gate switch 8127 detects the passage of a game ball through the pass gate 8126, the prize ball is not paid out.

(First prize slot count switch)
The first large prize opening count switch 8132 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 8131. When the first large prize opening count switch 8132 detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 8131, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls that enter the first large prize opening 8131 per round, and instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of prize balls for the first large prize opening (for example, 15 game balls).

(Second major prize slot count switch)
The second large prize opening count switch 8152 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of game balls into the second large prize opening 8151. When the second large prize opening count switch 8152 detects the entry of game balls into the second large prize opening 8151, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls that have entered the second large prize opening 8151 and instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of prize balls for the second large prize opening (e.g., 15 game balls).

(V prize entry switch)
The V winning hole switch 8157 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the passage of a game ball into the V winning hole 8156. When the V winning hole switch 8157 detects the entry of a game ball into the V winning hole 8156, the main CPU 201 performs control to transition to a big win game state. Note that even if the V winning hole switch 8157 detects the passage of a game ball into the V winning hole 8156, no prize balls are paid out.

[10-2-2. Sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 300, like the first pachinko game machine, is equipped with a sub-CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, a sound control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, a gimmick control circuit 307 and a command input port 308, but differs in that it further comprises a button control circuit 310 and a performance button 54.
(Button Control Circuit 310)
The button control circuit 310 is a circuit for driving the effect button 54. In other words, the button control circuit 310 is a circuit for changing the operation mode of the effect button 54 and vibrating the effect button 54. The button control circuit 310 drives the effect button 54 in response to a drive command from the sub-CPU 301.

The button control circuit 310 is also a circuit for inputting an operation signal related to a player's operation detected by the effect button 54. When the button control circuit 310 inputs an operation signal from the effect button 54, it outputs predetermined operation information to the sub-CPU 301.

[10-2-3. Payout/launch control circuit]
The payout/launch control circuit 400, like the first pachinko game machine, controls the payout/launch of game balls, and this payout/launch control circuit 400 is connected to a payout device 82 capable of paying out game balls, a launch device 6 capable of launching game balls, a card unit 180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like.

Furthermore, in the payout/launch control circuit 400 of the eighth pachinko game machine, when the cumulative number of game balls paid out during a jackpot game state per day reaches a predetermined number of balls to be stopped (for example, 100,000 balls), the "ball payout limiter function" is activated, and control related to the game-disabled state is performed, such as stopping the firing of game balls by the launch device 6 (stopping the supply of power to the launch solenoid) and prohibiting the payout of prize balls from the payout device 82. The control related to the game-disabled state will be described in more detail later.

[10-3. Basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the eighth pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Figures 295 to 306. The eighth pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function will be omitted below.

In the eighth pachinko gaming machine, although the special probability control is not executed, a time-saving gaming state in which the time-saving control is executed and a normal gaming state in which the time-saving control is not executed are prepared, and the main CPU 201 is capable of progressing the game in the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. Note that, although the eighth pachinko gaming machine does not execute the special probability control, this is not essential, and for example, the special probability control may be executed by setting the special probability flag to ON depending on the type of jackpot, etc.

In addition, in the eighth pachinko game machine, as described later, as time-saving game states distinguished from the viewpoint of time-saving end conditions, there are a "special time-saving game state" in which the next jackpot is practically guaranteed, and a "general time-saving game state" in which the next jackpot is not guaranteed. In addition, as time-saving game states distinguished from the viewpoint of time-saving transition conditions (time-saving occurrence conditions), there are an "A time-saving game state" which is transitioned to after the end of the jackpot game state triggered by a jackpot, and a "B time-saving game state" which is transitioned to after the variable display count of the special pattern reaches the ceiling value without being triggered by a jackpot. As described later in detail, in this embodiment, from the viewpoint of time-saving end conditions and time-saving transition conditions, the "general time-saving game state" is composed of the "A time-saving game state" consisting of the first time-saving end condition, and the "special time-saving game state" is composed of the "B time-saving game state" consisting of the second time-saving end condition, or the "A time-saving game state" consisting of the second time-saving end condition. In addition, in this embodiment, when there is no distinction between the special time-saving game state, the general time-saving game state, the A time-saving game state, and the B time-saving game state, they are simply referred to as the "time-saving game state."

In addition, in this embodiment, in a typical normal game state (the first normal game state described below), left-handed hitting is generally considered to be the normal game mode, and in a time-saving game state, right-handed hitting is the normal game mode. The sub-CPU 301 displays the hitting method that is considered to be the normal game mode, for example, in the display area of the display device 7.

[10-3-1. Special symbol winning judgment table]
295 is an example of a special symbol winning determination table in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol winning determination table shown in FIG. 295 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table for determining whether a hit is a "big hit", "small hit" or "miss".

In the special symbol hit determination table, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a hit that is determined to be a "hit" or a "miss" and the corresponding hit/miss determination value data (hit determination value data, miss determination value data) is specified as the data used in the hit determination process of the first special symbol executed based on the ball entering the first starting hole 8120. In addition, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a hit that is determined to be a "hit", a "minor hit" or a "miss" and the corresponding hit/miss determination value data (hit determination value data, minor hit determination value data, miss determination value data) is specified as the data used in the hit determination process of the second special symbol executed based on the ball entering the second starting hole 8140. In addition, the total random number value of the random number value for determining a hit is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In other words, the random number value for determining a hit is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

As shown in FIG. 295, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 8120, the main CPU 201 judges the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol to be a "big hit" with a selection rate of about 1/319.7 based on the hit determination process of the first special symbol using the random number value for the hit determination of the first special symbol, and judges the result as a "miss" otherwise. Also, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 8140, the main CPU 201 judges the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol to be a "big hit" with a selection rate of about 1/319.7 based on the hit determination process of the second special symbol using the random number value for the hit determination of the second special symbol, and judges the result as a "miss" otherwise.

The range (width) of the random numbers that determine whether a "big hit" or "small hit" occurs, i.e., the selection rate, is not limited to the above values and can be freely designed and modified as appropriate.

In addition, the system may be configured to determine a "small win" when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed, but if a "small win" is determined, it is preferable to determine a "small win" with a relatively low selection rate so that the determination made in the hit determination process for the second special symbol is more favorable than the determination made in the hit determination process for the first special symbol.

In addition, when the hit determination process for the first special symbol or the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed, a "time-saving hit" that transitions directly to the time-saving game state (C time-saving game state) without transitioning to the jackpot game state may be determined.

In addition, if the eighth pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, the selection rate of a big win and/or a small win may be set to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting. However, even if the eighth pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable that the selection rate of a time-saving win be set to a common probability for all settings.

In addition to or instead of changing the selection rate of a big win or a small win according to the set value, for example, the opening frequency or opening time of the V winning port 8156 may be changed for each set value to change the passing rate to the V winning port 8156, or the time-saving end condition (number of small wins, etc.) may be changed for each set value. In other words, by adopting one or more of the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the probability of a big win, the probability of a small win, the opening frequency of the V winning port 8156 (i.e. the operation frequency of the second special electric shutter 8154), the opening time, and the time-saving end condition, the expectation value controlled to the big win game state may be configured to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting.

[10-3-2. Special symbol determination table]
Fig. 296 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol determination table shown in Fig. 296 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is a table that determines the "special symbol selection symbol" and "symbol designation command" that determine the special symbol that will be stopped and displayed.

The "selected special symbol" is information for determining the special symbol that will be displayed when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit, and the "symbol designation command" is a command sent to the sub-control circuit 300 to display a decorative symbol that corresponds to the special symbol that will be displayed in the display area of the display device 7.

The special symbol determination table specifies the type of special symbol, the winning/losing determination value data described above, and the symbol random number value of the special symbol obtained when the game ball enters the first starting hole 8120 or the second starting hole 8140 in association with the "special symbol selection symbol" and the "symbol designation command." The symbol random number value of the special symbol is selected from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 296, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 0 and 19, the main CPU 201 determines "z1" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA1" as the symbol designation command. If the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 20 and 59, the main CPU 201 determines "z2" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA2" as the symbol designation command. Also, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 60 and 99, the main CPU 201 determines "z3" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA3" as the symbol designation command.

When jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, regardless of the value of the symbol random number value for the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 determines "z4" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

When small win determination value data is obtained as a result of the win determination process for the second special symbol, if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any of 0 to 5, the main CPU 201 determines "z5" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA5" as the symbol designation command. Also, if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any of 6 to 75, the main CPU 201 determines "z6" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA5" as the symbol designation command. Also, if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any of 76 to 99, the main CPU 201 determines "z7" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA6" as the symbol designation command.

In this way, in this embodiment, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 296 is configured so that the relationship of the selection rate of the special symbols is "z1" < "z2" = "z3".

As will be described in more detail later with reference to FIG. 298, when small win determination value data is obtained, if "z5" or "z6" is determined as the selected special symbol, a small win game state of a "V small win" in which it is possible (or easy) for the game ball to pass through to the V winning hole 8156 is performed, and when "z7" is determined as the selected special symbol, a small win game state of a "fall small win" in which it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through to the V winning hole 8156 is performed. When a small win game state of a "V small win" is performed, the game ball passes through the V winning hole 8156, resulting in a transition to a big win game state from the second route. In contrast, when a small win game state is played as a "fall small win", it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 8156, and the game does not transition to a big win game state. If the game is in a time-saving game state, the number of small wins won as the A time-saving ending condition described below is deducted, and this also triggers the end of the time-saving game state.

The right column of the special symbol determination table in Fig. 296 shows for reference the "combined probability" of each selected symbol of the special symbol calculated by combining the "random number value for determining a big win (see Fig. 295)" and the "symbol random number value (see Fig. 296)." In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 8140, the combined probability of the selected symbols "z5, z6" of the special symbols corresponding to a "V small win" is approximately 1/48.2, and the combined probability of the selected symbol "z7" of the special symbol corresponding to a "fall small win" is approximately 1/152.6. In addition, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 8140, the combined probability of the selected special pattern "z4" corresponding to a "big win" on the first route and the selected special patterns "z5, z6" corresponding to a "V small win" on the second route, that is, the actual probability of transitioning to a big win game state via the first route and the second route when a game ball enters the second starting hole 8140, is configured to be approximately 1/41.9.

Although the eighth pachinko gaming machine will not be described, the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 stores a special symbol stop mode determination table equivalent to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) described in the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table is a table that is referenced when determining the stop mode of the special symbol displayed in the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164 (see FIG. 294) when the special symbol is stopped, according to the "selected special symbol". In addition, the first special symbol display section 163 and the second special symbol display section 164 display the stop mode of a big win, a small win, or a miss, based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process. In addition, a decorative symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative symbol stop mode determination table described in the first pachinko game machine (see FIG. 12(B)) is also stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300.

The range of the random number value of the special pattern that determines the "selected special pattern", i.e., the selection rate, is not limited to the above values and can be freely changed as needed.

[10-3-3. Jackpot Type Determination Table]
297 is an example of a big win type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the eighth pachinko gaming machine. The big win type determination table shown in FIG. 297 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

The jackpot type determination table is a table that determines the operation content of the jackpot game state, and is a table that determines the "opening mode of the jackpot game state." In the eighth pachinko game machine, different jackpot type determination tables are referenced depending on whether or not a limiter number is set by the number of times limiter function (whether or not a limiter operation flag, described later), and the remaining number of times the limiter number in the number of times limiter function is set.

The jackpot type determination table 1 shown in FIG. 297(a) is a jackpot type determination table that is referenced when the jackpot limiter number is not set (when the limiter activation flag = 0). In other words, it is a jackpot type determination table that is referenced at the time of the first jackpot (the so-called first hit) in a game state other than the A time-saving game state (normal game state or B time-saving game state).

The jackpot type determination table 2 shown in FIG. 297(b) is a jackpot type determination table that is referenced when the limiter activation flag is set to 1 and the remaining number of jackpot limiter counts is 91 or more.

The jackpot type determination table 3 shown in FIG. 297(c) is a jackpot type determination table that is referenced when the limiter activation flag is set to 1 and the remaining number of jackpot limiter counts is 90 or less.

As shown in FIG. 297, in the jackpot type determination tables 1 to 3, the "opening mode of the jackpot game state" is associated with the selected special symbol.

The "opening mode in the jackpot gaming state" specifies the maximum number of rounds of the first large prize opening 8131 that is opened in the jackpot gaming state, and the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 8131. The opening pattern of the first large prize opening 8131 specifies the OP waiting time (opening time), the maximum opening time of each round, the closing time of each round, the ED waiting time (ending time), etc. Note that the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 8131 may specify a different maximum opening time for each round, or a different closing time for each round (round interval time). Furthermore, the number of openings and the opening time may be specified so that the first large prize opening 6131 is opened and closed multiple times per round.

Here, the "opening mode of the jackpot game state" corresponding to the "selected special pattern z5-7" of the small jackpot of the second special pattern is the opening mode when the game ball that entered the second large prize opening 8151 that was opened during the small jackpot game state passes through the second route of the V prize opening 8156 and transitions to the jackpot game state. When transitioning to the jackpot game state via this second route, the opening of the second large prize opening 8151 during the small jackpot game state is counted as the first round, and from the second round onwards, the jackpot game state in which the first large prize opening 8131 is opened is initiated.

In addition, if the game ball that enters the second large prize opening 8151 that is opened during the small prize game state does not pass through the V prize opening 8156, the big prize game state will not be executed. In particular, in this embodiment, when the selected special pattern "z7" corresponding to the "fall small prize" is determined, it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V prize opening 8156, and the big prize game state will not be executed in essence.

As shown in FIG. 297, according to jackpot type determination tables 1 to 3, the OP waiting time (opening time) and ED waiting time (ending time) in the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 8131 are configured to differ depending on whether or not a limiter count is set by the count limiter function and the remaining number of limiter counts in the count limiter function.

In particular, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 297, the fewer the remaining limiter counts in the count limiter function (the more consecutive jackpots are counted), the shorter the OP waiting time (opening time) and ED waiting time (ending time) in the opening pattern of the first large winning port 8131 become.

In this embodiment, the OP waiting time (opening time) and ED waiting time (ending time) in the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 8131 are configured to differ depending on whether or not a limiter count is set by the count limiter function and the remaining number of limiter counts in the count limiter function. However, the jackpot type determination tables 1 to 3 may be configured so that only the OP waiting time (opening time) or only the ED waiting time (ending time) is different.

Furthermore, the jackpot type determination tables 1 to 3 may be configured so that at least one of the OP waiting time (opening time) in the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 8131, the maximum opening time of each round, the closing time of each round, and the ED waiting time (ending time) differ depending on whether or not a limiter count is set by the count limiter function and the remaining number of limiter counts in the count limiter function.

[10-3-4. Small Win Type Determination Table]
298 is an example of a small win type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the eighth pachinko gaming machine. The small win type determination table shown in FIG. 298 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

The small win type determination table is a table that determines the operation content of the small win game state, and is a table that determines the "opening mode of the small win game state." In the eighth pachinko game machine, different small win type determination tables are referenced depending on whether or not a limiter number is set by the number limiter function (whether or not a limiter operation flag, described later), and the remaining number of limiter numbers in the number limiter function.

The small win type determination table 1 shown in FIG. 298(a) is a small win type determination table that is referenced when the limiter number of big wins is not set (when the limiter activation flag = 0). In other words, it is a small win type determination table that is referenced at the time of the first small win (the so-called first win) in a game state other than the A time-saving game state (normal game state or B time-saving game state).

The small win type determination table 2 shown in FIG. 298(b) is a small win type determination table that is referenced when the limiter activation flag is set to 1 and the remaining number of big win limiter counts is 91 or more.

The small win type determination table 3 shown in FIG. 298(c) is a small win type determination table that is referenced when the limiter activation flag is set to 1 and the remaining number of big win limiter counts is 90 or less.

As shown in FIG. 298, in small win type determination tables 1 to 3, the "opening mode of the small win game state" is associated with the selected special pattern.

The "opening mode in the small win game state" specifies the maximum number of times the second large winning opening 8151 is opened during the small win game state, the opening pattern of the second large winning opening 8151, and the opening pattern of the V winning opening 8156. The opening pattern of the second large winning opening 8151 specifies the OP waiting time (opening time), the maximum opening time for each number of times, the closing time for each number of times, the ED waiting time (ending time), etc. In addition, the opening pattern of the V winning opening 8156 specifies the opening waiting time, opening time, etc. Note that the opening pattern of the V winning opening 8156 may specify multiple opening times and closing times so that the V winning opening 8156 is opened and closed multiple times, like the opening pattern of the second large winning opening 8151.

At the start of the small win game state, the OP waiting time (opening time) in the opening pattern of the second large prize winning port 8151 and the opening waiting time in the opening pattern of the V prize winning port 8156 are timed simultaneously.

When the special symbol selection patterns "z5, z6" corresponding to a "V small win" are determined, the second large winning opening 8151 opens a maximum of 16 times, and when the second large winning opening 8151 opens for the second or subsequent times, the opening waiting time in the opening pattern of the V winning opening 8156 has elapsed, making it possible (or easy) for the game ball to pass through to the V winning opening 8156. Therefore, when the special symbol selection patterns "z5, z6" corresponding to a "V small win" are determined, a favorable operation mode is determined as the opening mode of the small win game state.

In addition, when the special symbol selection pattern "z7" corresponding to a "small fall win" is determined, the second large prize opening 8151 opens once, and when the second large prize opening 8151 opens for the first time, the opening waiting time in the opening pattern of the V prize opening 8156 has not elapsed, making it impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through to the V prize opening 8156. For this reason, when the special symbol selection pattern "z7" corresponding to a "small fall win" is determined, an unfavorable operation mode is determined as the opening mode of the small win game state.

In this embodiment, the advantageous and disadvantageous operating modes in the opening mode of the small win game state are configured using the opening timing of the second large winning opening 8151 (the operation timing of the second special electric solenoid 8155) and the opening timing of the V winning opening 8156 (the operation timing of the V shutter solenoid 8160), but the advantageous and disadvantageous operating modes may be configured to vary the opening frequency or opening time of the V winning opening 8156 to vary the passage rate to the V winning opening 8156.

And, as shown in FIG. 298, according to small win type determination tables 1 to 3, the OP waiting time (opening time), ED waiting time (ending time) in the opening pattern of the second large winning port 8151, and the opening waiting time in the opening pattern of the V winning port 8156 are configured to differ depending on whether or not a limiter count is set by the count limiter function and the remaining number of limiter counts in the count limiter function.

In particular, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 298, the fewer the remaining limiter counts in the count limiter function (the more consecutive jackpots are counted), the shorter the OP waiting time (opening time) in the opening pattern of the second large prize opening 8151, the ED waiting time (ending time), and the opening waiting time in the opening pattern of the V prize opening 8156 become.

In this embodiment, the OP waiting time (opening time), ED waiting time (ending time) in the opening pattern of the second large winning opening 8151, and the opening waiting time in the opening pattern of the V winning opening 8156 are configured to differ depending on whether or not a limiter count is set by the count limiter function and the remaining number of limiter counts in the count limiter function. However, the small win type determination tables 1 to 3 may be configured so that at least one of the OP waiting time (opening time), ED waiting time (ending time) in the opening pattern of the second large winning opening 8151, and the opening waiting time in the opening pattern of the V winning opening 8156 are different.

Furthermore, the small win type determination tables 1 to 3 may be configured so that at least one of the OP waiting time (opening time) in the opening pattern of the second large winning port 8151, the maximum opening time for each number, the closing time for each number, the ED waiting time (ending time), and the opening waiting time, opening time, and closing time in the opening pattern of the V winning port 8156 differ depending on whether or not a limiter count is set by the count limiter function and the remaining number of limiter counts in the count limiter function.

In addition, the maximum opening time for one round in the big win game state (e.g., 0.1 seconds) is set shorter than the maximum opening time for one round in the big win game state (e.g., 28 seconds), so that in the big win game state, the first large prize winning port 8131 opens in a favorable "first opening mode," and in the small win game state, the second large prize winning port 8151 opens in a less favorable "second opening mode" than the first opening mode.

[10-3-5. Game Status Related Setting Table]
299 is an example of a game state related setting table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the eighth pachinko gaming machine. The game state related setting table shown in FIG. 299 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

The game state related setting table is a table for setting the game state after the end of a jackpot game state. In the eighth pachinko game machine, different game state related setting tables are referenced depending on whether or not a limiter number has been set by the number limiter function (whether or not a limiter activation flag is set) and the remaining number of limiter numbers in the number limiter function.

(Game Status Related Setting Table 1)
299(a) is a game state related setting table that is referred to when the jackpot limiter number is not set (when the limiter activation flag is 0). That is, it is a game state related setting table that is referred to at the time of the first jackpot (so-called first win) in a game state other than the A time-saving game state (normal game state or B time-saving game state) after the end of the jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 299(a), the game state related setting table 1 associates a "game state setting" consisting of a "state flag" and an "A time-saving end condition," a "limiter activation flag," and a "limiter count" based on the game state (game state at the time of winning) when the selected special symbol is determined to be a big hit or a small hit.

The "state flag" is a flag that indicates the type of game state, and is stored in a specified memory area of the main RAM 203. A state flag of 0 indicates a "normal game state", a state flag of 1 indicates an "A time-shortened game state", and a state flag of 2 indicates a "B time-shortened game state". Note that in this embodiment, the C time-shortened game state is not executed, but if the C time-shortened game state is executable, a state flag of 3 indicates the C time-shortened game state.

The "A time-saving end condition" is a special condition that ends the A time-saving play state as a time-saving play state, and is composed of two end conditions: the "number of small wins" and the "number of time-saving play times." When either the "number of small wins" or the "number of time-saving play times" end conditions are met, the A time-saving play state ends and transitions to the normal play state.

In this embodiment, the "A time-saving end condition" is composed of two end conditions, the "number of small wins" and the "number of time-saving times", but it may be composed of only the "number of small wins" or only the "number of time-saving times". This also applies to the "B time-saving end condition" described later.

The "number of small wins" indicates the number of times a small win has been won in the time-saving play state, and is counted without distinguishing between the above-mentioned "V small win" and "falling small win". When a "V small win" is won, it is possible (or easy) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 8156, and it becomes possible to transition to a big win play state, but when a "falling small win" is won, it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 8156, and there is no transition to a big win play state, the number of small wins is deducted, and this triggers the end of the time-saving play state.

For example, if the number of small wins is set to 1, and a "fall small win" is won before a "V small win", it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 8156, and the time-saving game state ends without transitioning to a big win game state. In contrast, if the number of small wins is set to 255, the probability of winning a "V small win (approximately 1/48.2)" is higher than a "fall small win (approximately 1/152.6)", and at least a "V small win" can be won by the time 255 small wins have been won, so the time-saving game state does not end and it is possible to transition to a big win game state, and the next big win is essentially guaranteed. In this embodiment, the time-saving game state when the number of small wins is set to 1 or 2 as the first time-saving end condition is called the "general time-saving game state," and the time-saving game state when the number of small wins is set to 255 as the second time-saving end condition is called the "special time-saving game state."

In addition, when the main CPU 201 sets the number of small wins to 255, it sets the special time-saving flag to 1 (special time-saving flag on) to identify that the game is in the special time-saving game mode. Similarly, when the main CPU 201 sets the number of small wins to 1 or 2, it sets the special time-saving flag to 0 (special time-saving flag off) to identify that the game is in the general time-saving game mode.

The "time-saving number of times" indicates the total number of times that either the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be variably displayed during the time-saving game mode.

In this embodiment, when the state flag is set to 1 (A time-saving game state), the number of time-saving times is set to 10,000, which is a number at which the end condition of the "time-saving number of times" cannot actually be met. However, it is also possible to set the number of time-saving times to 100, which is a number at which the end condition of the "time-saving number of times" can be met.

The "limiter operation flag" is a flag that indicates whether or not the number of consecutive jackpots that have transitioned to a jackpot game state in a time-saving game state due to the number of times limiter function is being counted, and a limiter operation flag = 1 indicates that the number of consecutive jackpots due to the number of times limiter function is being counted, and a limiter operation flag = 0 indicates that the number of consecutive jackpots due to the number of times limiter function is not being counted. The limiter operation flag also corresponds to a status flag, and is configured so that when a status flag = 1 indicating the A time-saving game state is set, the limiter operation flag = 1 is set, and when a status flag = 0 indicating the normal game state is set, the limiter operation flag = 0 is set.

The "limiter count" indicates the number of times that is set at the time of the first jackpot in a game state other than the A time-saving game state (normal game state or B time-saving game state). When the limiter activation flag = 1 is set, the limiter count is decremented each time the time-saving game state transitions to the jackpot game state, and when the limiter activation flag = 1 and the limiter count = 0, the count limiter function is activated and game state related setting table 4 shown in Figure 299 (d) described below is referenced.

According to the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299(a), when the game state at the time of winning is the normal game state, if the game ball enters the first starting hole 8120 and the lottery result for the first special symbol is a jackpot, after the jackpot game state ends, if the selected symbol for the first special symbol is "z1", the status flag is set to 1, the number of small jackpot wins is set to 255, the number of time-saving times is set to 10,000, the limiter activation flag is set to 1, and the number of limiter times is set to 98. If the selected symbol for the first special symbol is "z2", the status flag is set to 1, the number of small jackpot wins is set to 1, the number of time-saving times is set to 10,000, the limiter activation flag is set to 1, and the number of limiter times is set to 100. If the selected symbol for the first special symbol is "z3", the status flag is set to 0, and the limiter activation flag is set to 0.

According to the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299(a), when the game state at the time of winning is the normal game state, if the game ball enters the second starting hole 8140 and the lottery result for the second special pattern is a big win or a small win, after the big win game state (including the big win game state from a V small win) ends, if the selected pattern for the second special pattern is "z4", "z5" or "z6", the following settings are set: status flag = 1, number of small wins = 1, number of time-saving times = 10,000, limiter activation flag = 1, number of limiters = 90; and when the selected pattern for the second special pattern is "z7", the following settings are set: status flag = 1, number of small wins = 1, number of time-saving times = 10,000, limiter activation flag = 1, number of limiters = 1.

In addition, according to the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299(a), when the game state at the time of winning is the time-saving game state, if the game ball enters the first starting hole 8120 and the lottery result for the first special symbol is a jackpot, after the jackpot game state ends, if the selected symbol for the first special symbol is "z1", the following settings are set: status flag = 1, number of small wins = 255, number of time-saving times = 10,000, limiter activation flag = 1, and number of limiters = 97; and if the selected symbol for the first special symbol is "z2" or "z3", the following settings are set: status flag = 1, number of small wins = 1, number of time-saving times = 10,000, limiter activation flag = 1, and number of limiters = 99.

According to the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299(a), when the game state at the time of winning is the time-saving game state, if the game ball enters the second starting hole 8140 and the lottery result for the second special pattern is a big win or a small win, after the big win game state (including the big win game state from a V small win) ends, if the selected pattern for the second special pattern is "z4", "z5" or "z6", the following settings are made: status flag = 1, number of small wins = 1, number of time-saving times = 10,000, limiter activation flag = 1, number of limiters = 96; and when the selected pattern for the second special pattern is "z7", the following settings are made: status flag = 1, number of small wins = 1, number of time-saving times = 10,000, limiter activation flag = 1, number of limiters = 1.

In addition, if the game ball enters the second starting hole 8140 and the lottery result for the second special symbol is a small hit, and the selected symbol for the second special symbol corresponding to a "small fall hit" is determined to be "z7", it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 8156, and there is no transition to a big hit game state, and the game state, limiter activation flag, and limiter count are not set. This is also true for game state related setting tables 2 to 4 described below.

Next, by summarizing the situation of the lottery for special symbols in each game state for which the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299(a) is referenced, the time-saving game state when the jackpot limiter number of times has not been set is limited to the B time-saving game state, which is entered after the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed reaches the ceiling value, without being triggered by a jackpot. In other words, "the game state at the time of winning is the time-saving game state" in the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299(a) indicates that the game state at the time of winning is the "B time-saving game state."

Here, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is performed as the regular game mode, and the game ball can enter the first starting hole 8120, but it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 8140. Also, in the time-saving game state (B time-saving game state), right-handed hitting is performed as the regular game mode, and the game ball can enter the second starting hole 8140, but it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first starting hole 8120.

For this reason, in the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299(a), when the game state at the time of winning is the normal game state and the result of the lottery for the first special symbol is a jackpot, this corresponds to a case in which the lottery for the first special symbol is determined to be the first jackpot in the first normal game state described below.

In addition, during normal game play, it is essentially possible for a game ball to enter the first starting hole 8120, and it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 8140; however, immediately after the time-saving game play ends and the game transitions to the normal game play state, the reserved number of second special symbols stored in the time-saving game play state is consumed.

For this reason, in the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299(a), when the game state at the time of winning is the normal game state, if the lottery result for the second special symbol is a big win or a small win, this corresponds to the fact that in the second normal game state described below, the lottery for the second special symbol determines that it is a big win or a small win immediately after the time-saving game state ends, and the big win or small win is won back.

In addition, when in the B time-saving game state, it is essentially possible for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 8140, and it is difficult for a game ball to enter the first starting hole 8120. However, immediately after switching from the normal game state to the time-saving game state, the reserved number of the first special symbol stored in the normal game state may be consumed, or, despite being in the time-saving game state (B time-saving game state), an irregular game mode may be performed in which a left hit is made, causing the game ball to enter the first starting hole 8120.

For this reason, in the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299(a), when the game state at the time of winning is the time-saving game state (B time-saving game state), the case where the lottery result for the first special symbol is a jackpot corresponds to the case where the reserved number of first special symbols stored in the normal game state is consumed in the B time-saving game state, or the B time-saving game state in which the player is hitting from the left as an irregular game mode, and the lottery result for the first special symbol is determined to be the first jackpot.

In addition, in the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299(a), when the game state at the time of winning is the time-saving game state (B time-saving game state), the case where the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big win or a small win corresponds to the case where the lottery result of the second special symbol is determined to be the first big win in the B time-saving game state during right-hand play.

(Limiter frequency characteristics)
Next, the characteristics of the limiter count set by the game state related setting table 1 shown in Figure 299 (a) will be explained.

When the first special symbol is selected in the first normal game state to determine that the first jackpot has been won and the limiter number of times is set, a different limiter number (98 times or 100 times) will be set depending on the selected first special symbol.

In the second normal game state, a big win or small win is determined immediately after the time-saving game state ends by drawing the second special symbol, and when the limiter number of times is set, a different limiter number (1 time or 90 times) is set according to the selected second special symbol.

When the first big win is determined by the drawing of the first special symbol during the B time-saving play state and the limiter number of times is set, a different limiter number (97 times or 99 times) will be set depending on the selected first special symbol.

When the first big win is determined by the drawing of the second special symbol during the B time-saving play state and the limiter number of times is set, a different limiter number (96 times or 1 time) will be set depending on the selected second special symbol.

In this way, according to the game state related setting table 1 shown in Figure 299 (a), different "limiter counts" are set depending on the game state at the time of winning and the selected special pattern.

In particular, according to the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299(a), after the end of the jackpot game state resulting from the lottery of a special symbol in the B time-saving game state, it is possible to set a limiter number (97 times, 99 times, or 96 times) different from the limiter number (98 times, 100 times, or 90 times) set after the end of the jackpot game state resulting from the lottery of a special symbol in the normal game state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a large jackpot or small jackpot is determined by drawing the second special symbol in the second normal game state immediately after the time-saving game state ends and the limiter number is set (when a large jackpot or small jackpot is returned), the game state related setting table 1 is configured so that a smaller limiter number (90 times) is set than when a first large jackpot is determined by drawing the first special symbol in the first normal game state and when a first large jackpot is determined by drawing a special symbol in the B time-saving game state. In particular, the limiter number that is set when a big win or small win is determined by the drawing of the second special symbol in the second normal game state immediately after the time-saving game state ends corresponds to the remaining number of big win limiter numbers that determine the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J2 (see FIG. 310) described below, and when the game state is returned to the general time-saving game state after the big win game state ends, a special symbol fluctuation pattern table that ends (consumes) the variable display of the special symbol more quickly can be adopted.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a small win and the selected symbol "z7" of the second special symbol corresponding to the "small fall win" is determined, it is essentially impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 8156, and the game does not transition to a big win game state, and the game state is not set. However, if the game ball passes through the V winning hole 8156 due to fraudulent or irregular behavior and transitions to a big win game state, the game state related setting table 1 is configured to set the limiter number of times (0 times) less than the number of times (90 times or 96 times) set when the selected symbol of the second special symbol "z4 to 6" corresponding to the "V small win" is selected.

In this embodiment, the limiter count is set to different values depending on the game state at the time of winning and the selected special symbol, but it may be set to the same limiter count (for example, all 100 times).

(Characteristics of the number of small wins)
According to the game state related setting table 1 shown in Fig. 299 (a), the "number of times of winning small wins" in the A time-saving end condition is configured to differ depending on the game state at the time of winning and the selected special symbol. The game state related setting table 1 may be configured so that the "number of times of winning small wins" in the A time-saving end condition is different depending on the game state at the time of winning or the selected special symbol.

In addition, in the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299(a), the number of times that a small win is won can be set to 255 times according to the selected pattern of the first special pattern by the lottery of the first special pattern, and a transition from the lottery of the first special pattern to the special time-saving game state is possible. However, the game state related setting table 1 may be configured so that the number of times that a small win is won can be set to 255 times according to the selected pattern of the second special pattern by the lottery of the second special pattern, and a transition from the lottery of the second special pattern to the special time-saving game state may be possible. However, when the number of times that a small win is won can be set to 255 times according to the selected pattern of the second special pattern, it is preferable that the selection rate at which the number of times that a small win is won to 255 times according to the selected pattern of the second special pattern is lower than the selection rate at which the number of times that a small win is won to 255 times according to the selected pattern of the first special pattern.

Furthermore, according to game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299(a), two types of numbers are set for the number of times that a small win can be won: 1 time or 255 times, depending on the selected special symbol. However, as shown in game state related setting table 2 described later, the number of times that a small win can be won may be set to three or more types: 1 time, 2 times, or 255 times. However, it is preferable that the number of times that a small win can be won is set to 255 times when the selected first special symbol is the first special symbol selected by lottery.

In this embodiment, the "number of times small wins can be won" in the A time-saving end condition is configured to differ depending on the game state at the time of winning and the selected special symbol, but it may also be configured so that the same "number of times small wins can be won" are set for all.

(Game Status Related Setting Table 2)
The game state related setting table 2 shown in Fig. 299(b) is a game state related setting table that is referenced when the limiter activation flag = 1 is set and the remaining number of jackpot limiter times is 91 or more. Since the limiter activation flag = 1 is set, the game state related setting table 2 shown in Fig. 299(b) is a game state related setting table that is referenced only when the game state at the time of winning is a time-saving game state (time-saving game state A). The same applies to the game state related setting table 3 and game state related setting table 4 described later.

As shown in FIG. 299(b), in the game state related setting table 2, the selected special symbol is associated with a "game state setting," a "limiter activation flag," and a "limiter count subtraction value."

According to game state related setting table 2 shown in FIG. 299(b), when a game ball enters the first starting hole 8120 and the lottery result for the first special symbol is a jackpot, after the jackpot game state ends, the "game state setting" and "limiter activation flag" are set in the same manner as game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299(a), but when the selected symbol for the first special symbol is "z1" or "z2", 1 is subtracted from the limiter count.

As mentioned above, the limiter operation flag also corresponds to the state flag, and when the limiter operation flag = 1 is set, the state flag = 1 indicating the A time-saving game state is set. In the time-saving game state, right-handed play is performed as a regular game mode, and it is essentially impossible (or difficult) for a game ball to enter the first start hole 8120, but it is possible for a game ball to enter the first start hole 8120 by left-handed play as an irregular game mode (disadvantageous to the player) in the time-saving game state. Therefore, the case where the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot in the game state related setting table 2 shown in FIG. 299 (b) corresponds to the case where a left-handed play is performed as an irregular game mode in the time-saving game state, a game ball enters the first start hole 8120, and a jackpot is determined. This is also the case where the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot in the game state related setting table 3 shown in FIG. 299 (c).

According to the game state related setting table 2 shown in FIG. 299(b), when a game ball enters the second starting hole 8140 and the lottery result for the second special symbol is a big win or a small win, if the selected symbol for the second special symbol is "z4" after the big win game state (including the big win game state from a V small win) ends, the status flag is set to 1, the number of small wins is set to 2, the number of time-saving times is set to 10,000, and the limiter activation flag is set to 1, and 3 is added to the limiter count. When the selected symbol for the second special symbol is "z5", the status flag is set to 1, the number of small wins is set to 2, the number of time-saving times is set to 10,000, and the limiter activation flag is set to 1, and 2 is subtracted from the limiter count. When the selected symbol for the second special symbol is "z6" or "z7", the status flag is set to 1, the number of small wins is set to 1, the number of time-saving times is set to 10,000, and the limiter activation flag is set to 1, and 1 is subtracted from the limiter count.

In this way, according to the game state related setting table 2 shown in Figure 299 (b), the "number of small wins" and the "limiter number of deductions" in the A time-saving end condition are configured to differ depending on the selected second special symbol.

In this embodiment, the game state related setting table 2 is configured so that the "number of small wins" and the "limiter count subtraction value" in the A time-saving end condition differ depending on the selected symbol of the second special symbol. However, the game state related setting table 2 may be configured so that only the "number of small wins" or only the "limiter count subtraction value" in the A time-saving end condition differs depending on the selected symbol of the second special symbol.

Furthermore, the game state related setting table 2 may be configured so that the "limiter count subtraction value" differs depending on the selected first special symbol.

Furthermore, the game state related setting table 2 may be configured so that the same "limiter count subtraction value (e.g., all 1)" is subtracted regardless of the selected second special symbol (selected first special symbol).

(Game Status Related Setting Table 3)
The game status related setting table 3 shown in Figure 299 (c) is a game status related setting table which is referenced when the limiter activation flag is set to 1 and the remaining number of jackpot limiter hits is 1 to 90.

As shown in FIG. 299(c), in the game state related setting table 3, similar to the game state related setting table 2, the "game state setting," the "limiter activation flag," and the "limiter count subtraction value" are associated with the selected special symbol.

According to game state related setting table 3 shown in FIG. 299(c), when a game ball enters the first starting hole 8120 and the lottery result for the first special symbol is a jackpot, after the jackpot game state ends, the "game state setting" and the "limiter activation flag" will be set, and the limiter count will be decremented, in the same manner as game state related setting table 2 shown in FIG. 299(b).

In addition, according to the game state related setting table 3 shown in FIG. 299(c), when a game ball enters the second starting hole 8140 and the lottery result for the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, after the big hit game state (including a big hit game state from a V small hit) ends, regardless of which second special symbol is selected, the status flag will be set to 1, the number of small hits won will be 1, the number of time-saving times will be 10,000, and the limiter activation flag will be set to 1, and 1 will be subtracted from the limiter count.

In this way, according to game status related setting table 2 in FIG. 299(b) and game status related setting table 3 in FIG. 299(c), the "number of small wins" and the "subtraction value of the limiter number" in the A time-saving end condition are configured to differ depending on the remaining number of big win limiter numbers.

In this embodiment, the "number of small wins" and the "limiter count subtraction value" in the A time-saving end condition are configured to differ depending on the remaining number of jackpot limiter counts, but it is also possible to configure only the "number of small wins" or only the "limiter count subtraction value" in the A time-saving end condition to differ depending on the remaining number of jackpot limiter counts.

Furthermore, the "number of small wins" and "limiter count subtraction value" in the A time-saving end condition may be configured not to differ depending on the remaining number of jackpot limiter counts. If configured in this way, game state related setting table 2 in FIG. 299(b) may be deleted, and game state related setting table 3 in FIG. 299(c) may be set as the game state related setting table referenced when the limiter activation flag is set to 1 and the remaining number of jackpot limiter counts is not 0 (jackpot limiter count ≠ 0).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the remaining number of jackpot limiter counts reaches 90 (hereinafter also referred to as the "first switching count"), the game status related setting table is configured to switch (be referenced) from game status related setting table 2 in FIG. 299(b) to game status related setting table 3 in FIG. 299(c), but the first switching count can be freely redesigned as appropriate.

(Game Status Related Setting Table 4)
The game status related setting table 4 shown in Figure 299 (d) is a game status related setting table which is referenced when the number limiter function is activated (the limiter activation flag is set to 1 and the remaining number of jackpot limiter counts is 0).

As shown in FIG. 299(d), in the game state related setting table 4, all selected special symbols are associated with "state flag = 0" which sets the game state to the normal game state.

In this way, according to game state related setting table 4 in FIG. 299(d), when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined limit in the time-saving game state, the game state after the jackpot game state ends is forcibly transitioned to the normal game state, so that the game state after the jackpot game state ends can be regulated.

In this embodiment, the game state related setting table 4 is configured so that when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined limit in the time-saving game state, the game state is forcibly switched to the normal game state after the jackpot game state ends. However, the game state related setting table 4 may be configured so that when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined limit in the time-saving game state, the game state is forcibly switched to the non-playing state after the jackpot game state ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, except for game state related setting table 4 which is referenced when the number limiter function is activated, game state related setting tables 1 to 3 are configured to transition to a "special time-shortened game state", a "general time-shortened game state" or a "normal game state" after the jackpot game state resulting from the drawing of the first special symbol ends, and are configured to transition only to the "general time-shortened game state" without transitioning to a "special time-shortened game state" or a "general time-shortened game state" after the jackpot game state resulting from the drawing of the second special symbol ends.

In this embodiment, after the jackpot game state by the lottery of the first special symbol is ended, the game state is changed to the "special time-saving game state", the "general time-saving game state", or the "normal game state". However, after the jackpot game state by the lottery of the first special symbol is ended, the game state may be changed to either (a) the "special time-saving game state" only, (b) the "special time-saving game state" or the "general time-saving game state", or (c) the "special time-saving game state" or the "normal game state". Furthermore, after the jackpot game state by the lottery of the second special symbol is ended, the game state is changed to the "general time-saving game state" only, but the game state may be changed to (a) the "general time-saving game state" or the "special time-saving game state", (b) the "general time-saving game state" or the "normal game state", or (c) the "general time-saving game state", the "special time-saving game state" or the "normal game state".

In this embodiment, except for game state related setting table 4 that is referenced when the count limiter function is activated, game state related setting tables 1 to 3 are configured to transition to a "special time-saving game state" at a first rate that is relatively higher after the end of a jackpot game state resulting from the drawing of a first special symbol, than after the end of a jackpot game state resulting from the drawing of a second special symbol. Also, after the end of a jackpot game state resulting from the drawing of a second special symbol, the game state is configured to transition to a "general time-saving game state" at a second rate that is relatively higher than after the end of a jackpot game state resulting from the drawing of a first special symbol. Note that the first rate and second rate do not exclude the intention that the rates to be compared are 0% and 100%.

[10-3-6. Special symbol variation pattern table]
300 and 301 are examples of a variation pattern table of special symbols of the eighth pachinko game machine. 300 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in a normal game state or a special time-saving game state of the eighth pachinko game machine, and 301 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in a normal time-saving game state of the eighth pachinko game machine. The variation pattern tables of special symbols shown in 300 and 301 are stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the eighth pachinko game machine.

The special symbol change pattern table is a table that determines the "special symbol change pattern" and "special symbol change display time" as the change manner of the special symbol.

The main CPU 201 determines the special pattern variation pattern table of either Figure 300 or Figure 301 depending on the game status, etc., and refers to the determined special pattern variation pattern table to determine the special pattern variation pattern and the special pattern variation display time based on the type of special pattern, the result of the special pattern hit determination process, the selected special pattern, etc.

When the main CPU 201 determines the fluctuation pattern, it transmits a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern to the sub-CPU 301. The sub-CPU 301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effects output from the speaker 32 based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201. The fluctuation pattern command is configured to be able to identify whether the fluctuation pattern is triggered by a game ball entering the first starting hole 8120 or the second starting hole 8140.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in normal game state)
The special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 300(a) is a special symbol variation pattern table that is determined during normal game play.

As shown in FIG. 300(a), the special symbol variation pattern table T1 associates the type of special symbol, the lottery result (win or lose) of the special symbol, the selected special symbol, a random number value for reaching the limit, a random number value for selecting a performance, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the variation display time of the special symbol. Note that the random number value for reaching the limit is selected from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for selecting a performance is selected from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of the generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

As described above, in the normal game mode, left-handed shots are performed as the regular game mode, so that a game ball can actually enter the first starting hole 8120, but it is impossible (or difficult) for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 8140. However, immediately after the time-saving game mode ends and the normal game mode is entered, the reserved number of second special symbols stored in the time-saving game mode is consumed.

In this embodiment, when distinguishing between normal game states in detail, the normal game state during the control period of the first special symbol based on the start information of the first special symbol is called the "first normal game state", and the normal game state in which the reserved number of second special symbols stored in the time-saving game state is being consumed immediately after the time-saving game state ends and the game transitions to the normal game state (the normal game state during the control period of the second special symbol based on the start information of the second special symbol) is called the "second normal game state".

According to the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 300(a), in the first normal game state (first special symbol), different special symbol variation patterns can be determined according to the special symbol lottery result (win or lose) and the selected special symbol. However, in the second normal game state (second special symbol), when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a small win and the selected second special symbol "z7" corresponding to a "fall small win" is determined, and when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a loss, the same variation pattern (00H) that executes normal variation can be determined.

In the present embodiment, in the second normal game state, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small win and the selected pattern of the second special symbol "z7" corresponding to the "fall small win" is determined, and when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a miss, the same variation pattern is determined. However, a different variation pattern may be determined. Furthermore, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small win and the selected pattern of the second special symbol "z7" corresponding to the "fall small win" is determined, the same variation pattern (0AH) for executing the door opening performance (miss) may be determined without determining the same variation pattern (00H) for executing the normal variation.

(Special symbol variation pattern table for special time-saving game state)
The special symbol variation pattern table S1 shown in FIG. 300(b) is a variation pattern table of the special symbol determined in the special time-saving game state. Therefore, the special symbol variation pattern table S1 shown in FIG. 300(b) is also a variation pattern table of the special symbol determined in the A time-saving game state in which the number of small wins is set to 255 as the second time-saving end condition, or in the B time-saving game state in which the number of small wins is set to 255 as the second time-saving end condition.

As shown in FIG. 300(b), the special pattern variation pattern table S1 associates the type of special pattern, the lottery result (win or lose) of the special pattern, the selected special pattern, a random number value for selecting the performance, the variation pattern of the special pattern, and the variation display time of the special pattern.

As described above, in the special time-saving game state, a right-handed hit is performed as a regular game mode, and it is essentially impossible (or difficult) for a game ball to enter the first starting hole 8120. However, in the special time-saving game state, a left-handed hit is performed as an irregular game mode (which is disadvantageous to the player) and the game ball can enter the first starting hole 8120. Therefore, the first special symbol fluctuation pattern in the special symbol fluctuation pattern table S1 in FIG. 300(b) corresponds to the special symbol fluctuation pattern determined when a left-handed hit is performed as an irregular game mode in the special time-saving game state and the game ball enters the first starting hole 8120. This is also true for the special symbol fluctuation pattern tables J1 to J3 shown in FIG. 300, which are determined in the general time-saving game state.

According to the special symbol variation pattern table S1 shown in FIG. 300(b), in the special time-saving game state, if the lottery result for the special symbol is a miss, a special symbol variation pattern (10H) consisting of a very short special symbol variation display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) can be determined compared to the normal game state. As a result, in the special time-saving game state, the variable display of the special symbol can be ended (consumed) much faster than in the normal game state.

Furthermore, according to the special symbol variation pattern table S1 shown in FIG. 300(b), if the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a small win and the selected symbol "z7" for the second special symbol corresponding to a "fall small win" is determined, it is treated as a miss and the same variation pattern (10H) as the variation pattern determined when the lottery for the second special symbol is a miss is determined. This is because, in the special time-saving game state, the number of times that a small win can be won in the A time-saving ending condition is set to 255, and the time-saving game state does not actually end due to a "fall small win".

In this embodiment, when the number of small wins in the A time-saving end condition is set to 255, the time-saving game state will not actually end due to a "falling small win". However, for security reasons, when the number of small wins is the 255th falling small win (when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a small win, the selected symbol "z7" of the second special symbol corresponding to the "falling small win" is determined, and the remaining number of small wins is 1), a variation pattern that executes an effect that ends the time-saving game state (for example, variation pattern 43H that executes a card effect described below) may be determined.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in general time-saving game mode)
The special symbol variation pattern table in the general time-saving game state includes three variation pattern tables: a special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in Fig. 301(a), a special symbol variation pattern table J2 shown in Fig. 301(b), and a special symbol variation pattern table J3 shown in Fig. 301(c). Note that the number of special symbol variation pattern tables in the general time-saving game state is not limited to three, and may be one or two or more.

The special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 301(a) is a special symbol variation pattern table that is determined when the general time-saving game mode is in effect, the limiter activation flag is set to 1, and the remaining number of jackpot limiter hits is 91 or more.

As shown in FIG. 301(a), the special pattern change pattern table J1 associates the type of special pattern, the lottery result (win or lose) of the special pattern, the selected special pattern, the "remaining number of small wins as the A time-saving end condition," a random number value for reach determination, a random number value for effect selection, the special pattern change pattern, and the special pattern change display time.

According to the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 301(a), in the general time-saving game state when the remaining number of jackpot limiters is 91 or more, if the lottery result for the special symbol is a miss, a special symbol variation pattern (11H) consisting of a shorter special symbol variation display time (e.g., 3.0 seconds) than in the normal game state can be determined. As a result, in the general time-saving game state, the variable display of the special symbol can be ended (consumed) more quickly than in the normal game state.

According to the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 301(a), in the general time-saving play state when the remaining number of the jackpot limiter count is 91 or more, when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a small win and the selected second special symbol pattern "z5, z6" corresponding to a "V small win" is determined, and when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a miss, a special symbol variation pattern (40H or 41H) in which a common "battle performance" is executed can be determined. This allows the player to feel reassured that they have not won the "fall small win" that would cause the general time-saving play state to end, while giving them hope that they have won the "V small win" that would cause the game to transition to a jackpot play state.

Furthermore, according to the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 301(a), in the general time-saving play state when the remaining number of the jackpot limiter number is 91 or more, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small win and the selected pattern of the second special symbol "z5, z6" corresponding to the "V small win" or the selected pattern of the second special symbol "z7" corresponding to the "fall small win" is determined, and when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a miss, a variation pattern of the special symbol (30H, 31H, 32H, 3FH) in which a common "card performance" is executed can be determined. This allows the player to be interested in whether the "fall small win" that triggers the end of the general time-saving play state, the "V small win" that triggers the transition to the jackpot play state, or the "miss" has been won.

In this way, according to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 301(a), in the general time-saving game state when the remaining number of jackpot limiters is 91 or more, more variety of effects can be executed, and the excitement of the game is further increased, compared to the general time-saving game state when the remaining number of jackpot limiters is 90 or less, which corresponds to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 301(b) described later.

The special symbol variation pattern table J2 shown in Figure 301 (b) is a special symbol variation pattern table that is determined when the general time-saving game mode is in effect, the limiter activation flag is set to 1, and the remaining number of jackpot limiter hits is between 1 and 90.

As shown in FIG. 301(b), the special pattern change pattern table J2 associates the type of special pattern, the lottery result (win or lose) of the special pattern, the selected special pattern, the "remaining number of small wins as the A time-saving end condition," a random number value for reach determination, a random number value for effect selection, the special pattern change pattern, and the special pattern change display time.

According to the special symbol variation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 301(b), in the general time-saving play state when the remaining number of jackpot limiter times is 90 or less, if the lottery result for the special symbol is a miss, a special symbol variation pattern consisting of a shorter special symbol variation display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) can be determined than in the general time-saving play state when the remaining number of jackpot limiter times is 91 or more. As a result, in the general time-saving play state, as the remaining number of jackpot limiter times decreases, the variable display of the special symbol can be ended (consumed) more quickly.

In addition, according to the special symbol variation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 301(b), in the general time-saving game state when the remaining number of jackpot limiters is 90 or less, unlike the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 301(a), the special symbol variation pattern (40H or 41H) in which a "battle effect" with a long special symbol variation display time is executed is not determined. As a result, in the general time-saving game state when the remaining number of jackpot limiters is 90 or less, the special symbol variation pattern consisting of a long special symbol variation display time is not determined, and the variable display of the special symbol can be ended (consumed) more quickly than in the general time-saving game state when the remaining number of jackpot limiters is 91 or more.

In this embodiment, when the remaining number of times of the jackpot limiter reaches 90 (hereinafter referred to as the "second switching number"), the special symbol variation pattern table is switched (determined) from the special symbol variation pattern table J1 in FIG. 301(a) to the special symbol variation pattern table J2 in FIG. 301(b). However, the second switching number can be freely changed as desired. In particular, if the second switching number is designed to be the number of times that is obtained by subtracting 10% or less (1 to 10 times) from the limiter number (100 times) set at the time of the first jackpot, it becomes possible to switch at an earlier timing to the special symbol variation pattern table that ends (consumes) the variable display of the special symbol more quickly, which increases the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the second number of times the special symbol variation pattern table is switched is set to the same number (90) as the first number of times the game state related setting table is switched, but the first number of times and the second number of times may be set to a number different from each other.

The special pattern variation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 301(c) is a special pattern variation pattern table that is determined when the general time-saving game state is in effect, the limiter activation flag is set to 1, and the remaining number of jackpot limiter counts is 0. In other words, the special pattern variation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 301(c) is a special pattern variation pattern table that is determined when the count limiter function is activated.

As shown in FIG. 301(c), the special pattern change pattern table J3 associates the type of special pattern, the lottery result (win or lose) of the special pattern, the selected special pattern, the "remaining number of small wins as the A time-saving end condition," the special pattern change pattern, and the special pattern change display time.

According to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 301(c), in the general time-saving game state when the count limiter function is activated, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, a different special symbol fluctuation pattern (50H, 51H) is determined compared to the general time-saving game state when the count limiter function is not activated (special symbol fluctuation pattern table J1, J2). As a result, in the general time-saving game state when the count limiter function is activated, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, a special dedicated performance (ending success reach) can be executed.

[10-3-7. Special symbol pre-reading related data]
FIG. 302 is an example of data related to the look-ahead of the special symbol in the eighth pachinko game machine. Here, "look-ahead" refers to analyzing the start information of the special symbol acquired before the lottery of the special symbol when the game ball enters the first start hole 8120 or the second start hole 8140 and the main control circuit 200 (main CPU 201) acquires the start information of the special symbol (random number value for determining a big win, random number value for a symbol, random number value for determining a reach, random number value for selecting a performance, etc.). The analyzed information (look-ahead command) is then transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 (sub-CPU 301), and the "look-ahead performance" can be executed based on the look-ahead command.

Figure 302 (a) is a look-ahead execution correspondence table that determines whether or not to execute look-ahead depending on the game status as data related to look-ahead of special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 302(a), in the normal game state, both pre-reading based on the start information of the first special symbol and pre-reading based on the start information of the second special symbol can be performed. In the time-saving game state, the big win game state, and the small win game state, only pre-reading based on the start information of the second special symbol can be performed.

Figure 302 (b) shows an example of the configuration of a look-ahead command as analyzed information after analyzing the start information of a special pattern.

As shown in FIG. 302(b), the look-ahead command is composed of a "special symbol type" (either the first special symbol or the second special symbol) and multiple "parameters 1 to 3."

"Parameter 1" is the winning/losing information that is analyzed in advance to determine whether it is a big win, a small win, or a miss based on a random number value for determining a big win, and Figure 302 (c) is an example of a setting table for parameter 1.

"Parameter 2" is pattern information that is obtained by analyzing in advance the special pattern (selected pattern) that will be displayed when the reel stops based on the random number value for determining a jackpot and the random number value for the pattern. Figure 302 (d) is an example of a setting table for parameter 2.

"Parameter 3" is fluctuation information that analyzes the fluctuation pattern of the special symbols in advance based on the random number value for determining a jackpot, the random number value for determining a reach, and the random number value for selecting a performance. Figure 302 (e) is an example of a setting table for parameter 3.

In this embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol from when the start information of the special symbol is read ahead until the special symbol is drawn based on the start information of the special symbol is also called "pre-variation." Also, the variable display of the special symbol when the special symbol is drawn based on the start information of the special symbol is also called "the said variation."

[10-3-8. Normal symbol winning judgment table]
303 is an example of a winning judgment table for normal symbols in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. The winning judgment table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 303 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol winning judgment table is a table referenced in the normal symbol winning judgment process, and is a table referenced when determining by lottery whether a "normal symbol winning" or "normal symbol losing" is made based on the normal symbol winning judgment random number value obtained when the game ball passes through the passing gate 8126.

The winning judgment table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 303 specifies the range (width) of random numbers for winning judgment of normal symbols and winning/losing judgment value data for normal symbols ("normal symbol win" or "normal symbol miss") in correspondence with each other. Note that the random numbers for winning judgment of normal symbols are obtained in the range of 0 to 65535 (65536 types), for example. However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the winning judgment table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 303, and determines the winning/losing judgment value data for the normal symbols based on the range (width) of the random number value for winning judgment for normal symbols.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 refers to the winning judgment table for the normal pattern shown in FIG. 303, and if the acquired random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern is any value between 1 and 65535, it judges it as a "normal pattern winning" and determines the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal pattern as "normal pattern winning/losing judgment value data". In addition, if the acquired random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern is 0, the main CPU 201 judges it as a "normal pattern losing" and determines the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal pattern as "normal pattern losing judgment value data".

In this way, in this embodiment, a "normal hit" is determined with a selection rate of approximately 1/1.00, and a "normal hit" is more likely to be determined than a "normal miss." Note that it is preferable that a "normal hit" is more likely to be determined than a "normal miss," and the selection rate of a "normal hit" is not limited to approximately 1/1.00.

In this embodiment, the selection rate for "normal symbol hit" is set to the same regardless of whether the game state is normal or time-saving, but the opening pattern of the normal electric device 8146 is changed depending on the game state, as described below, to give the player different benefits depending on the game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" is set to the same regardless of whether the game state is the normal game state or the time-saving game state, but the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" may be made different depending on the game state. When making the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" different depending on the game state, it is desirable to configure it so that the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" in the time-saving game state is higher than the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" in the normal game state. Furthermore, the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" may also be made different depending on the type of time-saving game state, between time-saving game state A and time-saving game state B, or between special time-saving game state and general time-saving game state.

[10-3-9. Normal symbol determination table]
304 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 304 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol determination table is a table that is referenced when selecting a "selected normal symbol" that determines the stopping symbol of the normal symbol based on the winning/losing determination value data of the normal symbol described above and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol obtained when the game ball passes through the passing gate 8126.

The normal pattern determination table shown in FIG. 304 specifies the above-mentioned normal pattern winning/losing determination value data ("normal pattern win" or "normal pattern miss"), the normal pattern random number value, and the selected normal pattern, which are associated with each other. Note that the normal pattern random number value is obtained, for example, from 0 to 100 (101 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal pattern determination table shown in FIG. 304 and determines the selected normal pattern based on the normal pattern hit determination value data and the pattern random number value of the normal pattern.

According to the normal pattern determination table shown in Figure 304, when normal pattern hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal pattern hit determination process, for example, the selected normal pattern is selected as follows.

For example, when normal symbol winning judgment value data is obtained, the main CPU 201 selects "f1" as the selected normal symbol if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 0 and 49, and selects "f2" as the selected normal symbol if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 50 and 99. Also, when normal symbol losing judgment value data is obtained, the main CPU 201 selects "f3" as the selected normal symbol, regardless of the symbol random number value of the normal symbol.

In particular, in this embodiment, unlike the first pachinko gaming machine, the selected normal symbol is selected based on the winning/losing judgment value data for the normal symbol (the result of the winning/losing judgment process for the normal symbol) and the random number value for the normal symbol, regardless of the gaming state. Note that, like the first pachinko gaming machine, the selected normal symbol may be selected depending on the gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the winning judgment table for the normal pattern (see FIG. 303) and determines the winning/losing judgment value data for the normal pattern based on the obtained random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern, and then refers to the normal pattern judgment table (see FIG. 304) and determines the selected pattern for the normal pattern based on the pattern random number value for the normal pattern, but this is not limited to this. For example, the winning/losing judgment value data for the normal pattern (whether the normal pattern is winning or losing) and the selected pattern for the normal pattern may be determined together based on the obtained random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern and the pattern random number value for the normal pattern.

[10-3-10. Table for determining the opening pattern of normal electric accessories]
Fig. 305 is an example of a normal electric role opening pattern determination table in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. The normal electric role opening pattern determination table shown in Fig. 305 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

When normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process (in the case of a normal symbol hit), the normal electric device opening pattern determination table is referenced when determining the opening pattern of the normal electric device 8146 as the opening mode of the normal electric device 8146 according to the game state and the selected normal symbol.

The opening pattern determination table for the normal electric device shown in Figure 305 specifies the game state, the selected normal symbol, and the opening pattern of the normal electric device 8146 in correspondence with each other.

In this embodiment, the "opening pattern of the normal electric role 8146" is composed of the "first opening time" in the first opening state of the second starting port 8140, the "first waiting time" in the first closing state of the second starting port 8140, the "second opening time" in the second opening state of the second starting port 8140, the "second waiting time" in the second closing state of the second starting port 8140, and the "ending time" in which the second starting port 8140 is closed and the operation of the normal electric role 8146 is terminated. The opening pattern of the normal electric role 8146 is not limited to the above-mentioned configuration, and may be configured to be capable of repeating the opening state and the closing state three or more times, or may be configured to be composed of only one opening state. Furthermore, it may be configured to have an "opening time" in which the first opening of the second starting port 8140 is waited for before the "first opening time".

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal electric role opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. 305, and determines the opening pattern of the normal electric role 8146 based on the game state and the selected normal pattern. When the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern of the normal electric role 8146, it transmits to the sub-CPU 301 a normal electric role opening pattern command corresponding to the determined opening pattern of the normal electric role 8146.

According to the opening pattern determination table for normal electric roles shown in Figure 305, when a normal symbol is hit during normal play, regardless of which normal symbol is selected, the opening pattern (91H01H) of the first normal electric role 8146 is determined to be a first opening time of 72 ms, no first wait time, no opening from the second time onwards, and an ending time of 12 ms.

In addition, according to the opening pattern determination table for normal electric devices shown in Figure 305, when a normal symbol is hit during time-saving play, the opening pattern (91H02H) of the second normal electric device 8146 is determined to be a first opening time of 5400 ms, a first waiting time of 120 ms, a second opening time of 72 ms, and an ending time of 12 ms, regardless of which normal symbol is selected.

In this way, in this embodiment, the opening pattern of the normal electric device 8146 differs depending on the game state, and in the case of a normal symbol hit in the normal game state, an "unfavorable opening mode (also called a "short opening")" in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 8140 is determined, and in the case of a normal symbol hit in the time-saving game state, an "advantageous opening mode (also called a "long opening")" in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 8140 is determined.

In addition, in this embodiment, regardless of which normal electric role device 8146 opening pattern is activated, the specified number for normal power is set to one, and when one game ball enters the second start hole 8140 while the opening pattern of the normal electric role device 8146 is in operation (while the second start hole 8140 is open), the operation of the opening pattern of that normal electric role device 8146 ends (the second start hole 8140 closes). In other words, only one game ball can enter the second start hole 8140 for one normal pattern hit, and even if there is 5,400 ms of remaining opening time in the time-saving game state, the second start hole 8140 will close.

In this embodiment, the same opening pattern of the normal electric device 8146 is determined for the same time-saving game state without distinction between the A time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state, or between the special time-saving game state and the normal time-saving game state. However, it may be configured to determine different opening patterns of the normal electric device 8146 for the A time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state, or between the special time-saving game state and the normal time-saving game state.

Furthermore, the opening pattern of the normal electric device 8146 may be different depending on the selected normal symbol. However, it is desirable that when a normal symbol is hit in the normal game state, the opening pattern is a more "disadvantageous opening pattern" group than when a normal symbol is hit in the time-saving game state, and when a normal symbol is hit in the time-saving game state, the opening pattern is a more "advantageous opening pattern" group than when a normal symbol is hit in the normal game state.

[10-3-11. Normal pattern variation table]
306 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 306 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in Figure 306 corresponds the game state, the selected normal symbol, the normal symbol variation pattern, and the normal symbol variation display time.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table and determines the normal symbol variation pattern and the normal symbol variation display time based on the game state and the selected normal symbol. Then, when the main CPU 201 determines the normal symbol variation pattern, it transmits to the sub-CPU 301 a normal symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the determined normal symbol variation pattern.

According to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 306, in the normal game state, the normal symbol variation display time is determined to be 414 ms, and in the time-saving game state, the normal symbol variation display time is determined to be 408 ms. Also, in this embodiment, the normal symbol pattern determination time is always determined to be the same time (for example, 540 ms) regardless of the game state or the result of the normal symbol winning determination process.

In this embodiment, the normal game state is configured so that all the same normal symbol variable display times and normal symbol fixed times are determined, but different normal symbol variable display times and normal symbol fixed times may be determined depending on the selected normal symbol. Similarly, in the time-saving game state, the same normal symbol variable display times and normal symbol fixed times are determined, but different normal symbol variable display times and normal symbol fixed times may be determined depending on the selected normal symbol. Furthermore, different normal symbol variable display times and normal symbol fixed times may be determined between the A time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state, or between the special time-saving game state and the general time-saving game state.

[10-4. Main control processing]
In the eighth pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 are the same as those in the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23), except for some of the special symbol control process, normal symbol control process, and system timer interrupt process. Therefore, the following will explain the special symbol control process, normal symbol control process, and system timer interrupt process, and will not explain the other processes executed by the main CPU 201.

Note that some of the processing performed in the special symbol control process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine is the same as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine, but below, the same processing as that performed in the first pachinko gaming machine will be explained again with different step numbers.

[10-4-1. Special symbol control process]
Next, the special symbol control process performed in the main control process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 307. Fig. 307 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol control process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 307, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S8001. The control state number of the special symbol is a number that indicates the state (status) of the control process related to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S8001, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8002.

Although not shown, when the main CPU 201 executes the special symbol control process, prior to the processing of S8001, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process to set the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, etc., in a predetermined register.

In S8002, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S8001 is 0, i.e., whether the special symbol is in a state waiting for variable display. If the main CPU 201 determines that the control number of the special symbol is not 0, it transfers processing to S8008, and if it determines that the control number of the special symbol is 0, it transfers processing to S8003.

In S8003, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not start information for the second special pattern is stored in the second special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203, i.e., whether or not there is a reserved number of second special patterns. If the main CPU 201 determines that start information for the second special pattern is not stored, it transfers processing to S8004, and if it determines that start information for the second special pattern is stored, it transfers processing to S8005.

In S8004, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not start information for the first special pattern is stored in the first special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203, i.e., whether or not there is a reserved number of first special patterns. If the main CPU 201 determines that start information for the first special pattern is not stored, it transfers processing to S8007, and if it determines that start information for the first special pattern is stored, it transfers processing to S8006.

In S8005, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process to shift the start information of the second special pattern stored in the second special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203 to the special pattern determination area (0) of the main RAM 203. In this shift process, the start information stored in the second special pattern start memory area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special pattern determination area (0), and the start information stored in the second special pattern start memory area (2) to the second special pattern start memory area (4) is shifted to the second special pattern start memory area (1) to the second special pattern start memory area (3).

In S8006, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process to shift the start information of the first special pattern stored in the first special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203 to the special pattern determination area (0) of the main RAM 203. In this shift process, the start information stored in the first special pattern start memory area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special pattern determination area (0), and the start information stored in the first special pattern start memory area (2) to the first special pattern start memory area (4) is shifted to the first special pattern start memory area (1) to the first special pattern start memory area (3).

In S8007, if the special symbol start information (reserved number of first and second special symbols) has not been stored in the first and second special symbol start memory areas of the main RAM 203 for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 201 performs a demo display command transmission reservation process. The demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 324) during the next system timer interrupt process. When the sub-control circuit 300 receives the demo display command, the sub-CPU 301 performs a demo display performance.

In S8008, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 308. After executing the processing of S8003, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIG. 20 to FIG. 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S8001 to S8008) within the interrupt prohibited section.

In this manner, in this embodiment, as the eighth pachinko gaming machine, a priority variable machine in which the special pattern management process is executed with a higher priority than the first special pattern when the start information of the second special pattern is stored has been described, but this is not limited to this. For example, when the start information of the first special pattern is stored, the priority variable machine may be one in which the special pattern management process is executed with a higher priority than the second special pattern, or a sequential variable machine in which the special pattern management process is executed in the order of winning (ball entry order) into the first start port 8120 or the second start port 8140.

[10-4-2. Special symbol management process]
Next, a special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol control process (see Fig. 307) will be described with reference to Fig. 308. Fig. 308 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

The numbers ("0" to "7") written in parentheses to the right of each process in FIG. 308 are the control state numbers of the special symbols that are the subject of the process. The main CPU 201 progresses the special symbol game by executing each process that corresponds to the control state number.

In S8011, the main CPU 201 determines whether the waiting time for the special pattern (special pattern timer counter) is 0. This waiting time for the special pattern is set as the waiting time for various processes in the special pattern management process, and is decremented as the special pattern timer counter within the system timer interrupt process that is performed, for example, at 2 msec intervals. If the main CPU 201 determines that the waiting time for the special pattern is not 0, it ends the special pattern management process and returns the process to the special pattern control process (see FIG. 307), and if it determines that the waiting time for the special pattern is 0, it transfers the process to S8012.

In S8012, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S8012, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8013. The main CPU 201 performs the process of S8013 and subsequent steps based on the control state number read in the process of S8012.

In S8013, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This S8013 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 309. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S8014.

In S8014, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. This S8014 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 311. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S8015.

In S8015, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game determination process. This S8015 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 313. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8016.

In S8016, the main CPU 201 performs small win game closure processing. This S8016 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this small win game closure processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 316. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S8017.

In S8017, the main CPU 201 performs processing during the opening of the small win game. This processing of S8017 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this processing during the opening of the small win game will be described later with reference to FIG. 317. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S8018.

In S8018, the main CPU 201 performs a process for preparing to open the large prize opening. This process of S8018 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this process for preparing to open the large prize opening will be described later with reference to FIG. 318. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8019.

In S8019, the main CPU 201 performs a large prize opening control process. This process of S8019 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". Details of this large prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 319. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8020.

In S8020, the main CPU 201 performs a process to end the jackpot game state. This process of S8020 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". Details of this process to end the jackpot game state will be described later with reference to FIG. 320.

After completing steps S8013 to S8020, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 307). In this case, the process returns to the process from which the special symbol management process was called.

[10-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 308) will be described with reference to Fig. 309. Fig. 309 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display start process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

In S8021, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", it ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "0", it transfers the process to S8022.

In S8022, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol hit determination process to determine whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss. In this special symbol hit determination process, the special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 295 is referenced, and a hit determination of the special symbol is made based on the random number value for big hit determination of the special symbol as the starting information of the special symbol shifted to the special symbol determination area (0), and a hit/lose determination value data is determined according to the determination result. After executing the process of S8022, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8023.

In S8023, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol determination process to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol. In this special symbol determination process, the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 296 is referenced, and the selected symbol and symbol designation command for the special symbol are determined based on the hit/loss determination value data as the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process in S8022 and the special symbol random number value as the start information of the special symbol shifted to the special symbol determination area (0). After executing the process of S8023, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8024.

In S8024, the main CPU 201 performs a hit type determination process. This process is a process for determining the type of hit when the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a hit (big hit or small hit). In this hit type determination process, if the hit determination process for the special symbol is a big hit, one of the big hit type determination tables 1 to 3 shown in FIG. 297 is determined based on the limiter operation flag and the remaining number of limiter times in the number limiter function (the "limiter number counter" of the main RAM 203 described later). Also, if the hit determination process for the special symbol is a small hit, one of the small hit type determination tables 1 to 3 shown in FIG. 298 is determined based on the limiter operation flag and the remaining number of limiter times in the number limiter function (the limiter number counter). Furthermore, in order to set the game state etc. based on the game state at the time of winning after the end of the big win game state, the game state data at the time of winning, which indicates the game state at the time of winning when it is determined that there is a big win or a small win, is set in the game state storage area at the time of winning of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S8024, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8025.

In S8025, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variation pattern determination process to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this special symbol variation pattern determination process, a special symbol variation pattern table of either FIG. 300 or FIG. 301 is determined depending on the game state, etc., and the determined special symbol variation pattern table is referenced to determine the special symbol variation pattern and the special symbol variation pattern command based on the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process, and the selected special symbol, etc. Details of this special symbol variation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 310. After executing the process of S8025, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8026.

In S8026, the main CPU 201 performs a special pattern variable display time setting process to set the variable display time of the special pattern. In this special pattern variable display time setting process, the special pattern variable display time setting process refers to the special pattern variable pattern table determined in the special pattern variable pattern determination process in S8025 above, and determines the variable display time of the special pattern based on the determined special pattern variable pattern. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 sets the determined variable display time of the special pattern to the waiting time of the special pattern in the main RAM 203, and causes the first special pattern display unit 163 or the second special pattern display unit 164 to start variable display of the special pattern. After executing the process of S8026, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8027.

In S8027, the main CPU 201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1", after the special symbol variable display start process ends, a special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 308) is performed. After executing the process of S8027, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8028.

In S8028, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, confirmation and update processes of parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203 are performed. Then, a process of reserving transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state is performed. Note that the game state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (Figure 324) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S8028, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8029.

In S8029, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for the special symbol effect start command. In this process, the transmission reservation process for the "symbol designation command" and the "special symbol variation pattern command" is performed as the special symbol effect start command. In the pattern designation command transmission reservation process, the symbol designation command determined in S8023 is transmitted. In addition, in the special symbol variation pattern command transmission reservation process, the special symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern determined in S8025 is transmitted so that the type of special symbol can be identified. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 324) during the next system timer interrupt process.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process within the interrupt prohibited section.

[10-4-4. Special symbol variation pattern determination process]
Next, the details of the special symbol variation pattern determination process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol variable display start process (see FIG. 309) will be described with reference to Fig. 310. Fig. 310 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variation pattern determination process in the eighth pachinko game machine.

In S8025-1, the main CPU 201 refers to the status flag and determines whether or not the current gaming status is a normal gaming status. In other words, it determines whether or not the status flag indicating the normal gaming status is 0. If the main CPU 201 determines that the current gaming status is a normal gaming status, it transfers processing to S8025-2, and if it determines that the current gaming status is not a normal gaming status (i.e., it is a time-saving gaming status), it transfers processing to S8025-3.

In S8025-2, if the current gaming state is a normal gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 300(a). After executing the process of S8025-2, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8025-12.

In S8025-3, the main CPU 201 refers to the state flag and determines whether the current game state (time-shortened game state) is the B time-shortened game state. In other words, it determines whether the state flag indicating the B time-shortened game state is 2. If the main CPU 201 determines that the current game state is the B time-shortened game state, it transfers processing to S8025-4, and if it determines that the current game state is not the B time-shortened game state (i.e., it is the A time-shortened game state), it transfers processing to S8025-5.

In S8025-4, if the current gaming state is the B time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table S1 shown in FIG. 300(b). After executing the process of S8025-4, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8025-12.

In S8025-5, the main CPU 201 refers to the special time-saving flag and determines whether or not the current game state (A time-saving game state) is a special time-saving game state. That is, it determines whether or not the special time-saving flag indicating a special time-saving game state is 1. If the main CPU 201 determines that the current game state is a special time-saving game state, it transfers processing to S8025-6, and if it determines that the current game state is not a special time-saving game state (that is, it is a general time-saving game state), it transfers processing to S8025-7.

In S8025-6, if the current gaming state is a special time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table S1 shown in FIG. 300(b). After executing the process of S8025-6, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8025-12.

In S8025-7, if the main CPU 201 is in the general time-saving game state, it determines whether the remaining number of jackpot limiter times (the "limiter number counter" in the main RAM 203 described later) is 91 or more. If the main CPU 201 determines that the remaining number of jackpot limiter times is 91 or more, it transfers processing to S8025-8, and if it determines that the remaining number of jackpot limiter times is not 91 or more (i.e., the remaining number of jackpot limiter times is 90 or less), it transfers processing to S8025-9.

In S8025-8, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 301(a). After executing the process of S8025-8, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8025-12.

In S8025-9, when the main CPU 201 is in the general time-saving game state, it determines whether the remaining number of jackpot limiter times (the "limiter number counter" in the main RAM 203 described later) is between 1 and 90. If the main CPU 201 determines that the remaining number of jackpot limiter times is between 1 and 90, it transfers processing to S8025-10, and if it determines that the remaining number of jackpot limiter times is not between 1 and 90 (i.e., the remaining number of jackpot limiter times = 0), it transfers processing to S8025-11.

In S8025-10, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 301(b). After executing the process of S8025-10, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8025-12.

In S8025-11, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 301(c). After executing the process of S8025-11, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8025-12.

In S8025-12, the main CPU 201 refers to the variation pattern table of the determined special symbol, and determines the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the type of special symbol (type of starting information), the result of the special symbol winning determination process in S8022, the selected special symbol, and the reach determination random number value and effect selection random number value, etc., as the starting information of the special symbol shifted to the special symbol determination area (0). After executing the process of S8025-12, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8025-13.

In S8025-13, the main CPU 201 refers to the determined special symbol variation pattern table and determines the special symbol variation pattern command based on the determined special symbol variation pattern. After executing the process of S8025-13, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variation pattern determination process and moves the process to S8026 of the special symbol variable display start process (see FIG. 309).

[10-4-5. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, a special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308) will be described with reference to Fig. 311. Fig. 311 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display end process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

In S8041, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", it ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "1", it transfers the process to S8042.

In S8042, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol determination time setting process to set the symbol determination time for the special symbol. In this special symbol determination time setting process, the special symbol determination time (e.g., 540 ms) is determined based on the game state and the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win or lose). The main CPU 201 then sets the determined special symbol determination time to the special symbol waiting time in the main RAM 203, and causes the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 to display the special symbol in a stopped state. After executing the process of S8042, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8043.

The time it takes for the special symbol to be determined may be determined based on the variation pattern of the special symbol, or based only on the game state. Furthermore, a single predetermined symbol determination time (e.g., 540 ms) may be determined.

In S8043, the main CPU 201 performs time-saving management processing. In the eighth pachinko gaming machine, when the variable display of the special symbol is finished, a process is performed to update the "time-saving count counter" for counting the number of time-saving times as a condition for ending the time-saving game state, and the "ceiling counter" for counting the number of times the special symbol is variably displayed, which transitions to the B time-saving game state. When the time-saving count counter = 0, transition control from the time-saving game state to the normal game state is performed, and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, transition control to the B time-saving game state is performed. Details of this time-saving management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 312. After executing the process of S8043, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8044.

In S8044, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", after the special symbol variable display end process is completed, the special symbol game determination process (see S8015 in FIG. 308) is performed. After executing the process of S8044, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8045.

In S8045, the main CPU 201 executes a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect stop command. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 324) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S8045, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8046.

In S8046, the main CPU 201 increments the value of the determined symbol counter by 1. As described above in the explanation of the first to third pachinko gaming machines, the determined symbol counter is a counter for counting the number of times a special symbol has been determined (the number of times a special symbol game has been played), but it may also manage the number of games of a special symbol game played under a specific condition, such as the number of times remaining in the special symbol mode or the number of times remaining in the time-saving mode. After executing the process of S8046, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308).

[10-4-6. Time-saving management process]
Next, a time-saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 311) will be described with reference to Fig. 312. Fig. 312 is a flow chart showing an example of the time-saving management process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

In S8043-1, the main CPU 201 performs a time-saving count counter update process to update the time-saving count counter. In this time-saving count counter update process, if a time-saving game state is set (if state flag = 1 or 2 is set), the "time-saving count counter" in the main RAM 203 is updated by subtracting 1. After executing the process of S8043-1, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8043-2.

In S8043-2, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time-saving counter = 0. If the main CPU 201 determines that the time-saving counter = 0, it transfers processing to S8043-3, and if it determines that the time-saving counter = 0 is not, it transfers processing to S8043-4.

In S8043-3, the main CPU 201 clears the time-saving information and transitions from the time-saving game state to the normal game state. Here, the time-saving information is cleared by clearing (setting to 0) the status flag, the special time-saving flag, the time-saving count counter, and the small win count counter described below. After executing the process of S8043-3, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8043-4.

In S8043-4, the main CPU 201 performs a ceiling counter update process to update the ceiling counter. In this ceiling counter update process, the ceiling counter is updated by adding 1. After executing the process of S8043-4, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8043-5.

In S8043-5, the main CPU 201 determines whether the ceiling counter is equal to the ceiling value (for example, 999 times). If the main CPU 201 determines that the ceiling counter is equal to the ceiling value, it transfers processing to S8043-6, and if it determines that the ceiling counter is not equal to the ceiling value, it transfers processing to S8043-9.

In S8043-6, the main CPU 201 clears the ceiling counter (sets it to 0). After executing the process of S8043-6, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8043-7.

In S8043-7, the main CPU 201 executes a B time-saving game state setting process to transition to the B time-saving game state. In this B time-saving game state setting process, the state flag indicating the B time-saving game state is set to 2, and the number of small wins won is set to 255, and the number of time-saving times is set to 10,000, as the "B time-saving end condition" so as to transition to the "special time-saving game state". Then, the special time-saving flag is set to 1 so that it is possible to identify that the special time-saving game state is in effect. Note that in the B time-saving game state setting process, the number of small wins won may be set to 1, the number of time-saving times may be set to 10,000, and the special time-saving flag may be set to 0 so as to transition to the "normal time-saving game state". After executing the process of S8043-7, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8043-8.

In S8043-8, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a time-saving transition command when starting the B time-saving gaming state. The time-saving transition command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 324) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S8043-8, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8043-9.

In S8043-9, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, processing such as confirmation and update of parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203 is performed. Then, processing is performed to reserve the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the processing of S8043-9, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving management processing and returns the processing to the special pattern variable display end processing (see FIG. 311).

[10-4-7. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, a special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308) will be described with reference to Fig. 313. Fig. 313 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game determination process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

In S8051, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", it ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "2", it transfers the process to S8052.

In S8052, the main CPU 201 refers to the selected special symbol and determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is the selected special symbol corresponding to a jackpot. If the main CPU 201 determines that a jackpot has been reached, it transfers processing to S8054, and if it determines that a jackpot has not been reached, it transfers processing to S8061.

In S8054, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for a jackpot. In this external signal processing for a jackpot, the selected special symbol is referenced, and a "jackpot signal corresponding to the selected special symbol" is generated as an external signal that is output to the hall computer 186 via the external terminal board 184 when a jackpot occurs. The generated "jackpot signal corresponding to the selected special symbol" is then output to the external terminal board 184. After executing the processing of S8054, the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S8055.

In S8055, the main CPU 201 performs the first route jackpot start preparation setting process. In this first route jackpot start preparation setting process, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 297 determined in S8024 above is referenced, the maximum number of rounds is determined based on the "special symbol selected" of the jackpot, and the determined maximum number of rounds is set as the upper limit of the number of jackpot rounds in the main RAM 203. Furthermore, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 297 determined in S8024 above is referenced, the OP waiting time (opening time) is determined based on the "special symbol selected" of the jackpot, and the determined OP waiting time (opening time) is set as the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S8055, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8056.

In S8056, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot status display process. In this jackpot status display process, round display LED data corresponding to the maximum number of rounds determined as described above is set, and right hit instruction data that notifies the player to hit to the right is set. After executing the process of S8056, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8057.

In S8057, the main CPU 201 performs game status management processing. In the game status management processing when it is determined that a jackpot has been hit, the main CPU 201 performs processing to clear the status flag, the special time-saving flag, the time-saving count counter, and the small jackpot win count counter. After executing the processing of S8057, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S8058.

In S8058, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S8058, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8059.

In S8059, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", the process of preparing to open the large prize opening (see S8018 in FIG. 308) will be performed after the special symbol game determination process is completed. After executing the process of S8059, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8059.

In S8060, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a jackpot start display command. After executing the process of S8060, the main CPU 201 ends the current special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308).

In S8061, the main CPU 201 refers to the selected special symbol and determines whether or not it is a small win, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is the selected special symbol corresponding to a small win. If the main CPU 201 determines that it is a small win, it transfers processing to S8063, and if it determines that it is not a small win (i.e., a miss), it transfers processing to S8071.

In S8063, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for a small win. In this external signal processing for a small win, the selected special symbol is referenced, and when the selected second special symbol "z5, z6" corresponding to the "V small win" is determined, a "small win signal" is generated as an external signal to be output to the hall computer 186 via the external terminal board 184. The generated small win signal is then output to the external terminal board 184. In this embodiment, the "small win signal" is not generated when the selected second special symbol "z7" corresponding to the "fall small win" is determined, but the "small win signal" may be generated even when the selected second special symbol "z7" corresponding to the "fall small win" is determined. After executing the processing of S8063, the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S8064.

In S8064, the main CPU 201 performs a small win start preparation setting process. In this small win start preparation setting process, the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 298 determined in S8024 is referenced, the maximum number of openings is determined based on the "selected special pattern", and the determined maximum number of openings is set as the upper limit of the number of small win openings in the main RAM 203. Next, the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 298 determined in S8024 is referenced, the OP waiting time (opening time) is determined based on the "selected special pattern", and the determined OP waiting time (opening time) is set as the waiting time of the special pattern in the main RAM 203. Furthermore, the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 298 determined in S8024 is referenced, and the opening waiting time is determined as the opening pattern of the V winning hole 8156 based on the "selected special pattern", and the determined opening waiting time is set in the V winning hole closing timer counter in the main RAM 203, and the V operation flag is turned on. In addition, the V winning control process for the V shutter solenoid 8160 that opens and closes the V winning port 8156 is performed in the system timer interrupt process (FIGS. 324 and 325) described below. After executing the process of S8064, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8066.

In S8065, the main CPU 201 performs a small win status display process. In this small win status display process, right hit instruction data is set to notify the player that a right hit is to be performed. After executing the process of S8065, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8066.

In S8066, the main CPU 201 performs a small win count update process to count the number of small wins that have been won as a condition for ending the time-saving game state, and update the "small win count counter" that indicates the remaining number of small wins. Details of this small win count update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 314. After executing the process of S8066, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8067.

In S8067, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S8067, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8068.

In S8068, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "3". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", the small win game closure process (see S8016 in FIG. 308) will be performed after the special symbol game determination process is completed. After executing the process of S8068, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8069.

In S8069, the main CPU 201 processes the transmission reservation process for the small win start display command. After executing the process of S8069, the main CPU 201 ends the current special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308).

In S8071, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 315. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 308).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S8051 to S8071) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[10-4-8. Small win count update process]
Next, referring to Fig. 314, a small win winning count update process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol game determination process (see Fig. 313) will be described. Fig. 314 is a flow chart showing an example of a small win winning count update process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

In S8066-1, the main CPU 201 determines whether the current game state is a time-saving game state or not, i.e., whether the state flag is 1 or 2. If the main CPU 201 determines that the current game state is a time-saving game state, it transfers processing to S8066-2, and if it determines that the current game state is not a time-saving game state, it ends the small win count update processing and transfers processing to S8067 of the special symbol game determination processing (see FIG. 313).

In S8066-2, the main CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the "small win count counter" in the main RAM 203 to update it. After executing the process of S8066-2, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8066-3.

In S8066-3, the main CPU 201 determines whether the small win count counter is 0. If the main CPU 201 determines that the small win count counter is 0, it transfers processing to S8066-4, and if it determines that the small win count counter is not 0, it ends the small win count update processing and transfers processing to S8067 of the special symbol game determination processing (see FIG. 313).

In S8066-4, the main CPU 201 clears the time-saving information and transitions from the time-saving game state to the normal game state. Here, the time-saving information is cleared by clearing (setting to 0) the status flag, special time-saving flag, time-saving count counter, and small win count counter. After executing the process of S8066-4, the main CPU 201 ends the small win count update process, and moves the process to S8067 of the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 313).

[10-4-9. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, a special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 313) will be described with reference to FIG. 315. FIG. 315 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game ending process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

In S8072, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game ends and it becomes possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, i.e., the next special symbol game. After executing the process of S8072, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8073.

In S8073, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. In addition, in the game state designation parameter setting process in the special pattern game end process, the start information stored in the special pattern determination area (0) in the main RAM 203 is cleared. After executing the process of S8073, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8074.

In S8074, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol game end command. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 324) during the next system timer interrupt process. After processing S8074, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 313).

[10-4-10. Processing during small win game closure]
Next, referring to Fig. 316, a description will be given of a small win game closing process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 308). Fig. 316 is a flow chart showing an example of a small win game closing process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

In S8081, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", it ends the small win game closure process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "3", it transfers the process to S8082.

In S8082, the main CPU 201 loads the "small win opening count counter value." The "small win opening count counter" is a counter that counts the number of small win openings. The count value of the small win opening count counter (small win opening count counter value) is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S8082, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8083.

In S8083, the main CPU 201 determines whether the loaded small win opening count counter value is the upper limit of the small win opening count. If the main CPU 201 determines that it is the upper limit of the small win opening count, it transfers processing to S8089, and if it determines that it is not the upper limit of the small win opening count, it transfers processing to S8084.

In S8084, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the second large prize opening 8151 in the small win game state (the number of winning balls in the second large prize opening 8151) is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value of the second large prize opening counter counted by the second large prize opening count switch 8152 is the predetermined maximum number of winning balls for the second large prize opening 8151 (for example, 10 balls). If the main CPU 201 determines that the number of winning balls in the second large prize opening 8151 is not the maximum number of winning balls, it transfers the process to S8085, and if it determines that the number of winning balls in the second large prize opening 8151 is the maximum number of winning balls, it transfers the process to S8089.

In S8085, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the small win opening count counter value. After executing the process of S8085, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8086.

In S8086, the main CPU 201 performs a second large prize opening setting process to open the second large prize opening 8151. In this second large prize opening setting process, the small prize type determination table shown in FIG. 298 determined in S8024 is referenced, and the maximum opening time of the second large prize opening 8151 is determined based on the "selected special symbol" of the small prize and the current opening count (small prize opening count counter value), and the determined maximum opening time is set as the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. Then, second large prize opening opening control data is generated for the second special electric solenoid 8155 to open the second large prize opening 8151. After executing the process of S8086, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8087.

In S8087, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4", after the small win game closed process ends, the small win game open process (see FIG. 317) is performed. After executing the process of S8087, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8088.

In S8088, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. The main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs a process of confirming and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process of reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S8088, the main CPU 201 ends the small win game closure process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308).

In S8089, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a V winning has been detected. In this process, it determines whether or not a game ball has passed through the V winning port 8156 within a specified time (i.e., whether or not there has been detection by the V winning port switch 8157). If the main CPU 201 determines that a V winning has been detected, it transfers the process to S8090, and if it determines that a V winning has not been detected, it transfers the process to S8098.

In S8090, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for a jackpot from the second route. In this processing, the selected special symbol is referenced, and a "jackpot signal corresponding to the selected special symbol" is generated as an external signal that is output to the hall computer 186 via the external terminal board 184 in the event of a jackpot. The generated "jackpot signal corresponding to the selected special symbol" is then output to the external terminal board 184. After executing the processing of S8090, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S8101.

In S8091, the main CPU 201 performs the second route jackpot start preparation setting process. In this second route jackpot start preparation setting process, first, based on the limiter operation flag and the remaining number of limiter times in the number limiter function (the "limiter number counter" of the main RAM 203 described later), one of the jackpot type determination tables 1 to 3 shown in FIG. 297 is determined. Then, referring to the determined jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 297, the maximum number of rounds is determined based on the "selected special pattern" of the jackpot, and the determined maximum number of rounds is set as the upper limit value of the number of jackpot rounds in the main RAM 203. Furthermore, referring to the determined jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 297, the OP waiting time (opening time) is determined based on the "selected special pattern" of the jackpot, and the determined OP waiting time (opening time) is set as the waiting time of the special pattern in the main RAM 203. After executing processing of S8101, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S8092.

In S8092, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. By performing this process, the jackpot game state from the second route starts from the second round of round play. After executing the process of S8092, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8093.

In S8093, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot status display process. In this jackpot status display process, round display LED data corresponding to the maximum number of rounds determined as described above is set, and right hit instruction data that notifies the player to hit to the right is set. After executing the process of S8093, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8094.

In S8094, the main CPU 201 performs game status management processing. In the game status management processing when it is determined that a big win has occurred, the main CPU 201 performs processing to clear the status flag, the special time-saving flag, the time-saving count counter, and the small win count counter. After executing the processing of S8094, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S8095.

In S8095, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S8095, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8096.

In S8096, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", the large prize opening preparation process (Fig. 308) will be performed after the small prize game closure process ends. After executing the process of S8096, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8097.

In S8097, the main CPU 201 performs processing to reserve the transmission of a V hit start display command. After executing the processing of S8097, the main CPU 201 ends the processing during the small hit game opening, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 308).

In S8098, the main CPU 201 performs a small win end preparation setting process. In this small win end preparation setting process, the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 298 determined in S8024 above is referenced, the ED waiting time (ending time) is determined based on the "selected special pattern" of the small win, and the determined ED waiting time (ending time) is set as the waiting time for the special pattern in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S8098, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8099.

In S8099, the main CPU 201 performs processing to reserve the transmission of a small win end display command. After executing processing in S8099, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S8100.

In S8100, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this processing, the special symbol game end processing described with reference to FIG. 315 is performed. After executing the processing of S8100, the main CPU 201 ends the small win game closure processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 308).

[10-4-11. Processing during small win game opening]
Next, referring to Fig. 317, a small win game open process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 308) will be described. Fig. 317 is a flow chart showing an example of a small win game open process in the eighth pachinko game machine.

In S8101, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", it ends the small win game open process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "4", it transfers the process to S8102.

In S8102, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the second large prize opening 8151 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the second large prize opening opening setting process (see S8086 in FIG. 316) has elapsed. If the main CPU 201 determines that the maximum opening time of the second large prize opening 8151 has not elapsed, it ends the small win game opening process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 308). If the main CPU 201 determines that the maximum opening time of the second large prize opening 8151 has elapsed, it transfers the process to S8103.

In S8103, the main CPU 201 performs a second large prize opening closure setting process to close the second large prize opening 8151. In this second large prize opening closure setting process, the small prize type determination table shown in FIG. 298 determined in S8024 above is referenced, and the current closure time of the second large prize opening 8151 is determined based on the "selected special pattern" of the small prize and the current number of openings (small prize opening count counter value), and the determined closure time is set as the waiting time of the special pattern in the main RAM 203. Then, second large prize opening closure control data is generated for the second special electric solenoid 8155 to close the second large prize opening 8151. After executing the process of S8103, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8104.

In S8104, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", after the small win game open process ends, the small win game closed process (see FIG. 316) is performed. After executing the process of S8104, the main CPU 201 ends the small win game open process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308).

[10-4-12. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, referring to Fig. 318, a special prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 308) will be described. Fig. 318 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening preparation process in the eighth pachinko game machine.

In S8111, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5." If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5," it ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "5," it transfers the process to S8112.

In S8112, the main CPU 201 loads the "round counter value." The "round counter" is a counter that counts the number of rounds played in a jackpot game state. The count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S8112, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8113.

In S8113, the main CPU 201 determines whether the loaded round counter value is the upper limit of the number of jackpot rounds. If the main CPU 201 determines that the number of jackpot rounds is the upper limit, it transfers processing to S8114, and if it determines that the number of jackpot rounds is not the upper limit, it transfers processing to S8118.

In S8114, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot end preparation setting process. In this jackpot end preparation setting process, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 297 determined in S8024 or S8101 above is referenced, an ED waiting time (ending time) is determined based on the "selected special symbol" of the jackpot, and the determined ED waiting time (ending time) is set as the waiting time for the special symbol in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S8114, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8115.

In S8115, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "7." In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7," the jackpot game state end process (FIG. 308) is performed after the jackpot opening preparation process is completed. After executing S8115, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8116.

In S8116, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S8116, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8117.

In S8117, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a jackpot end display command. The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 324) during the next system timer interrupt process. After processing S8117, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308).

In S8118, the main CPU 201 performs processing to add 1 to the round counter value. After executing processing of S8118, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S8119.

In S8119, the main CPU 201 performs a first large prize opening setting process to open the first large prize opening 8131. In this first large prize opening setting process, the main CPU 201 refers to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 297 determined in S8024 or S8101 above, and determines the maximum opening time of the first large prize opening 8131 in this round based on the "selected special symbol" of the jackpot and the current round number (round counter value), and sets the determined maximum opening time to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. Then, it generates first large prize opening opening control data for the first special electric solenoid 8135 to open the first large prize opening 8131. After executing the process of S8119, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8120.

In S8120, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "6". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6", the large prize opening opening control process (see FIG. 308) will be performed after the large prize opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S8120, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8121.

In S8121, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S8121, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8122.

In S8122, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of the large prize opening display command. The large prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 324) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S8122, the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308).

[10-4-13. Large prize opening control process]
Next, referring to Fig. 319, a special prize opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 308) will be described. Fig. 319 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening control process in the eighth pachinko game machine.

In S8131, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "6." If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6," it ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "6," it transfers the process to S8132.

In S8132, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of winning balls that entered the first large prize opening 8131 in one round when the first large prize opening 8131 was opened is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value of the first large prize opening counter counted by the first large prize opening count switch 8132 is the predetermined maximum number of winning balls for the first large prize opening 8131 (e.g., 10 balls).

If the main CPU 201 determines in S8132 that the number of winnings at the first large winning slot 8131 is not the maximum number of winnings, it transfers processing to S8133, and if the main CPU 201 determines in S8132 that the number of winnings at the first large winning slot 8131 is the maximum number of winnings, it transfers processing to S8134.

In S8133, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the first large prize opening 8131 in one round has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the opening setting process for the first large prize opening (see S8119 in FIG. 318) has elapsed.

If the main CPU 201 determines in S8133 that the maximum opening time of the first large prize opening 8131 has not elapsed, it ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308). If the main CPU 201 determines in S8133 that the maximum opening time of the first large prize opening 8131 has elapsed, it transfers the process to S8134.

In S8134, the main CPU 201 performs a first large prize opening closure setting process to close the first large prize opening 8131. In this first large prize opening closure setting process, the main CPU 201 refers to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 297 determined in S8024 or S8101 above, and determines the closure time of the first large prize opening 8131 in this round based on the "selected special pattern" of the jackpot and the current round number (round counter value), and sets the determined closure time to the waiting time of the special pattern in the main RAM 203. Then, the main CPU 201 generates first large prize opening closure control data for the first special power solenoid 8135 to close the first large prize opening 8131. After executing the process of S8134, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8135.

In S8135, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5", the large prize opening preparation processing (see FIG. 318) will be performed again after this large prize opening control processing is completed. After executing the processing of S8135, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S8136.

In S8136, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S8136, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8137.

In S8137, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of an inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 324) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S8137, the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening control process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308).

[10-4-14. Big win game state end process]
Next, a big win game state end process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308) will be described with reference to Fig. 320. Fig. 320 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win game state end process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

In S8141, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "7." If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "7," it ends the jackpot game state end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "7," it transfers the process to S8142.

In S8142, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot game information initialization process. In this jackpot game information initialization process, various flags and data used in the jackpot game state and the values of various counters (e.g., round counter, big prize slot winning counter, etc.) are set or reset. After executing S8142, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8143.

In S8143, the main CPU 201 performs a state setting process after the jackpot ends to set the game state after the jackpot game state ends. In this state setting process after the jackpot ends, one of the game state related setting tables 1 to 4 shown in FIG. 299 is selected based on the remaining number of jackpot limiter times (the value of the "limiter number counter" described later), and the game state (state flag, number of small jackpot wins, number of time-saving times, special time-saving flag) is set based on the game state at the time of the win and the selected special pattern by referring to the selected game state related setting table. After executing the process of S8143, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8145.

In this embodiment, first, the limiter activation flag is referenced, and if the limiter activation flag is 0, the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299(a) is determined. Also, if the limiter activation flag is 1, when the "limiter count counter" is 91 or more (when the remaining number of the jackpot limiter count is 91 or more), the game state related setting table 2 shown in FIG. 299(b) is determined, when the "limiter count counter" is 1 to 90 (when the remaining number of the jackpot limiter count is 1 to 90), the game state related setting table 3 shown in FIG. 299(c) is determined, and when the "limiter count counter" is 0 (when the remaining number of the jackpot limiter count is 0), the game state related setting table 4 shown in FIG. 299(d) is determined. Then, the determined game state related setting table is referenced, and the game state (state flag, number of small wins, number of time-saving times, special time-saving flag) is set based on the selected pattern of the special pattern.

In this embodiment, when the limiter count counter = 0 and the game state related setting table 4 shown in Figure 299 (d) is determined, "state flag = 0" is set to set the normal game state for all selected special symbols, and the game will be forcibly switched to the normal game state after the big win game state ends.

In S8144, the main CPU 201 performs a limiter information update process to set and update the limiter information, including a "limiter activation flag" and a "limiter count counter" that corresponds to the remaining number of jackpot limiter counts and counts the number of consecutive jackpots in the time-saving game mode. Details of this limiter information update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 321. After executing the process of S8144, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8145.

In S8145, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this processing, the special symbol game end processing described with reference to FIG. 315 is performed. After executing the processing of S8145, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot game state end processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 187).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 set an interrupt prohibited section and perform the above-mentioned jackpot game state end processing within the interrupt prohibited section.

[10-4-15. Limiter information update process]
Next, the limiter information update process executed by the main CPU 201 during the big win game state end process (see Fig. 320) will be described with reference to Fig. 321. Fig. 321 is a flow chart showing an example of the limiter information update process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

In S8144-1, the main CPU 201 determines whether the selected special symbol at the end of the jackpot game state is the selected special symbol for transitioning to the time-saving game state. If the main CPU 201 determines that it is the selected special symbol for transitioning to the time-saving game state, it transfers processing to S8144-4, and if it determines that it is not the selected special symbol for transitioning to the time-saving game state, it transfers processing to S8144-2.

In S8144-2, the main CPU 201 clears the limiter count counter in the main RAM 203 (sets the limiter count counter to 0). After executing the process of S8144-2, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8144-3.

In S8144-3, the main CPU 201 sets the limiter activation flag to 0. After executing the process of S8144-3, the main CPU 201 ends the limiter information update process and transfers the process to S8145 for the jackpot game state end process (see FIG. 320).

In S8144-4, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is counting the number of consecutive jackpots that have transitioned to a jackpot game state in the time-saving game state, i.e., whether or not the limiter activation flag is 1. If the main CPU 201 determines that it is counting the number of consecutive jackpots that have transitioned to a jackpot game state in the time-saving game state, it transfers processing to S8144-7, and if it determines that it is not counting the number of consecutive jackpots that have transitioned to a jackpot game state in the time-saving game state, it transfers processing to S8144-5.

In S8144-5, if the main CPU 201 is not counting the number of consecutive jackpots that have transitioned to the jackpot game state in the time-saving game state (if the limiter activation flag = 0), the main CPU 201 performs a limiter number setting process to set a limiter number in the limiter number counter in the main RAM 203. In this limiter number setting process, the game state related setting table 1 shown in Figure 299 (a) is referenced, the limiter number is determined based on the selected special pattern, and the determined limiter number is set in the limiter number counter. After executing the process of S8144-5, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8144-6.

In S8144-6, if the main CPU 201 sets a new limiter count, it sets the limiter activation flag to 1. After executing the process of S8144-6, the main CPU 201 ends the limiter information update process and moves the process to S8145 for the jackpot game state end process (see FIG. 320).

In S8144-7, if the main CPU 201 is counting the number of consecutive jackpots that have transitioned to the jackpot game state in the time-saving game state (if the limiter activation flag is 1), it performs a subtraction process of the limiter number. In this subtraction process of the limiter number, it determines one of the game state related setting tables 1 to 4 shown in FIG. 299 based on the remaining number of jackpot limiter numbers (the current value of the limiter number counter), and determines the subtraction value of the limiter number based on the selected special pattern by referring to the determined game state related setting table. Then, it subtracts the determined subtraction value of the limiter number from the limiter number counter in the main RAM 203 to update it. After executing the process of S8144-7, the main CPU 201 ends the limiter information update process and moves the process to S8145 of the jackpot game state end process (see FIG. 320).

[10-6-16. Normal symbol control process]
Next, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 in the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 322. It goes without saying that, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in Fig. 322, the main CPU 201 stores the start information of the normal symbol and judges whether the judgment start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, as in the special symbol control process.

Figure 322 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the numbers ("0" to "4") written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in Figure 322 are control state numbers for the normal symbols. The main CPU 201 progresses the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol.

In S8200, the main CPU 201 determines whether the waiting time for the normal pattern is 0. This waiting time for the normal pattern is set as the waiting time for various processes in the normal pattern control process, and is decremented as a normal pattern timer counter in the system timer interrupt process that is performed at 2 msec intervals, for example. If the main CPU 201 determines that the waiting time for the normal pattern is not 0, it ends the normal pattern control process and returns the process to S41 (see FIG. 21) of the main control main process, and if it determines that the waiting time for the normal pattern is 0, it transfers the process to S8201.

In S8201, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing the process of S8201, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8210. The main CPU 201 performs the process of S8210 and subsequent processes based on the control state number read in the process of S8201.

In S8210, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display start processing. This S8210 processing is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". Details of this normal symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 323. Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S8220.

In S8220, the main CPU 201 performs processing to end the variable display of normal symbols. This processing of S8220 is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S8230.

In this normal symbol variable display end process, the main CPU 201 judges whether the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, and when it judges that the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, it sets the predetermined normal symbol pattern determination time (e.g., 540 msec) to the waiting time of the normal separate symbol in the main RAM 203, and sets the control state number of the normal symbol to "2". If the variable display time of the normal symbol has not ended, it holds the control state number of the normal symbol at "1" and waits for the variable display time of the normal symbol to end.

In S8230, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol gameplay determination processing. This S8230 processing is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S8240.

In this normal symbol game judgment process, the main CPU 201 performs a judgment process of the selected symbol (e.g., normal symbol win or normal symbol miss) of the stopped normal symbol. Then, if the selected symbol of the stopped normal symbol corresponds to a normal symbol win, the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric device 8146 is performed, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "3". On the other hand, if the result of the normal symbol hit judgment process is a miss, the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric device 8146 is not performed, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "0".

In the process of setting the opening pattern of the normal electric device 8146, the opening pattern (number of times to open, opening time, wait time, etc.) of the normal electric device 8146 is determined based on the game state and the selected normal symbol by referring to the opening pattern determination table of the normal electric device shown in FIG. 305, and the determined opening pattern is set. After that, the main CPU 201 transmits to the sub-CPU 301 a normal electric device opening pattern command corresponding to the determined opening pattern of the normal electric device 8146.

In S8240, the main CPU 201 performs a normal electric role release process. This S8240 process is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8250.

In this normal electric device opening process, the main CPU 201 opens the second start hole 8140 according to the opening pattern of the normal electric device 8146 determined in the normal symbol game play determination process of S8230 above, and closes the second start hole 8140 when a specified number of game balls for normal power (e.g., one ball) enter the second start hole 8140 or when all opening patterns of the normal electric device 8146 have ended. Then, when the opening process of the normal electric device 8146 has ended, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "4".

In S8250, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit end processing. This S8250 processing is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 ends this normal symbol hit end processing, it sets the control state number of the normal symbol to "0", ends the normal symbol control processing, and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see Figures 20 to 23).

In this normal symbol winning end process, the main CPU 201 performs a process to reset (clear) various parameters related to the normal symbol determined in steps S8210 to S8240 above, and various random number values stored in the normal symbol determination area.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the normal symbol control process (S8200 to S8250) described above within the interrupt prohibited section.

[10-6-17. Normal symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to Fig. 323, details of the normal symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in the normal symbol control process (see Fig. 322) will be described. Fig. 323 is a flow chart showing an example of the normal symbol variable display start process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 323, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the normal pattern is "0" (S8211).

If it is determined in S8211 that the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 322). On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the normal symbol is "0", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8212.

In S8212, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of the start information of the normal pattern. In this process, the start information stored in the normal pattern start memory area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the normal pattern determination area (0), and the start information stored in the normal pattern start memory area (2) to the normal pattern start memory area (4) is shifted to the normal pattern start memory area (1) to the normal pattern start memory area (3). After executing the process of S8212, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8213.

In S8213, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol winning judgment process. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol winning judgment table shown in FIG. 303, and determines winning/losing judgment value data ("normal symbol winning" or "normal symbol losing") based on the game state and the normal symbol winning judgment random number value stored in the normal symbol judgment area (0). After executing S8213, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8214.

In S8214, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol determination process. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 304, and determines the "selected normal symbol" based on the above-mentioned winning/losing determination value data (the result of the normal symbol winning/losing determination process) and the normal symbol random number value stored in the normal symbol determination area (0). After executing S8214, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8215.

In S8215, the main CPU 201 performs processing to determine the normal symbol variation pattern. In this processing, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 306, and determines the normal symbol variation pattern and normal symbol variation display time based on the game state and the selected normal symbol. After executing the processing of S8215, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S8216.

In S8216, the main CPU 201 executes a process for setting the variable display time of the normal pattern. In this process, the variable display time of the normal pattern determined in the variable pattern determination process of the normal pattern (S8215) is set to the waiting time of the normal pattern in the main RAM 203, and the normal pattern display unit 161 is caused to start displaying the variable display of the normal pattern. After executing the process of S8216, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8217.

In S8217, the main CPU 201 performs a process to set the control state number of the normal symbol to "1". In this way, by performing a process to set the control state number of the normal symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after this normal symbol variable display start process is completed, a normal symbol variable display end process (see S8220 in FIG. 322) is performed. After executing the process of S8217, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8218.

In S8218, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of the normal symbol variation pattern command. The normal symbol variation pattern command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 324) during the next system timer interrupt process.

[10-6-18. System timer interrupt processing]
Next, with reference to Fig. 324 and Fig. 325, a system timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 201 at an interrupt period of, for example, 2 msec will be described. Fig. 324 and Fig. 325 are a flow chart showing an example of the system timer interrupt process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

In S8311, the main CPU 201 performs a process of saving the protection register. After executing the process of S8311, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8312.

In S8312, the main CPU 201 determines whether the XINT detection flag is off. If the main CPU 201 determines that the XINT detection flag is not off (i.e., a power interruption has been detected), the process proceeds to S8332. If the main CPU 201 determines that the XINT detection flag is off (i.e., a power interruption has not been detected), the process proceeds to S8313.

In S8313, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing S8313, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S8314.

In S8314, the main CPU 201 performs processing to read the state of the input port of the I/O port 205. After executing processing of S8314, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S8315.

In S8315, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted based on the game permission flag. The game permission flag indicates a game permitted state when it is on (=1), and indicates a game not permitted state when it is off (=0). As explained in the first pachinko game machine, the game permission flag is a flag that is set to off (=game not permitted state) as the start-up state when the power is turned on during recovery from power interruption and during RAM clearing, and is set to on (=play permitted state) after power is restored and RAM clearing is executed. If the main CPU 201 determines that the game is permitted, it transfers the process to S8317, and if it determines that the game is not permitted, it transfers the process to S8332.

In S8317, the main CPU 201 executes processing to increment the value of the interrupt counter by 1. The interrupt counter is a counter for counting (managing) interrupt prohibited sections during the main control main processing (see Figures 20 to 23), and the count value of the interrupt counter is stored in an interrupt counter area in the work area of the main RAM 203. After executing processing of S8317, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S8318.

In S8318, the main CPU 201 performs an update process for the interrupt cycle timer. In the update process for the interrupt cycle timer, various timer counters in the working area of the main RAM 203, such as the special pattern timer counter, the normal pattern timer counter, the V prize opening timer counter, and the V prize opening timer counter, are decremented. After executing the process of S8318, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8319.

In S8319, the main CPU 201 performs a random number update process. In this random number update process, various random number counters (for example, a random number counter for determining a jackpot of a random value for determining a jackpot, etc.) are updated. In this way, by performing the random number update process at a predetermined cycle (2 msec in this embodiment), it is possible to ensure the reliability of various random numbers, which are an important factor in determining the number of balls dispensed. After executing the process of S8319, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8320.

In S8320, the main CPU 201 performs switch input detection processing. Details of this switch input detection processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 326. After executing the processing of S8320, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S8321.

In S8321, the main CPU 201 executes a winning information command setting process. In this process, a winning information command (payout information) setting process is performed. After executing S8321, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8322.

In S8322, if the V operation flag is on, the main CPU 201 performs a V winning control process to open and close the V winning hole 8156. In this V winning control process, if the V operation flag is on and the opening waiting time has elapsed (V winning hole closing timer counter = 0), the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 298 determined in S8024 is referenced, and the opening time is determined as the opening pattern of the V winning hole 8156 based on the "selected special pattern", and the determined opening time is set in the V winning hole opening timer counter in the main RAM 203, and V winning hole opening control data for opening the V winning hole 8156 is output to the V shutter solenoid 8160. The V winning hole opening control data is continuously output unless the V winning hole opening timer counter is 0. Then, when the V operation flag is on and the V prize opening control data is being output, if the opening time has elapsed (V prize opening timer counter = 0), the output of the V prize opening control data is stopped and the V operation flag is turned off. After executing the process of S8322, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8323.

In S8323, the main CPU 201 refers to the "cumulative jackpot payout ball counter" which counts the cumulative number of jackpot payout balls of game balls paid out in a jackpot game state per day, and determines whether the cumulative jackpot payout ball counter is greater than or equal to 99,900. If the main CPU 201 determines that the cumulative jackpot payout ball counter is greater than or equal to 99,900, it transfers processing to S8324, and if it determines that the cumulative jackpot payout ball counter is not greater than or equal to 99,900, it transfers processing to S8328.

The "cumulative jackpot ball output counter" is a counter in the working area of the main RAM 203, and is configured to be initialized when the power is turned on (starting from 0 when the power is turned on). The "cumulative jackpot ball output counter" may also be configured not to be initialized when the power is turned on, but to be initialized each time the corresponding number of game balls fired or outs (e.g., 3,000 balls) are counted in a day.

In S8324, the main CPU 201 executes a process for reserving the transmission of a "play-disabled state preparation command" to notify the display device 7, speaker 32, etc. that a transition to a play-disabled state will soon occur. After executing the process of S8324, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8325.

In this embodiment, the game disallowed state preparation command is sent when the cumulative jackpot payout number, which is the condition for switching to the game disallowed state, is 99,900 or more, which is 100 less than 100,000 (100,000). However, the game disallowed state preparation command may be sent when the cumulative jackpot payout number is less than the cumulative jackpot payout number (100,000) that is the condition for switching to the game disallowed state, and is equal to or greater than the cumulative jackpot payout number (100,000) that is the condition for switching to the game disallowed state minus the maximum payout number that can be paid out in one jackpot game state (for example, 10R x 10 counts x 15 prize balls = 1,500).

In S8325, the main CPU 201 refers to the "cumulative jackpot payout ball counter" and determines whether the cumulative jackpot payout ball counter is greater than or equal to 100,000. If the main CPU 201 determines that the cumulative jackpot payout ball counter is greater than or equal to 100,000, it transfers processing to S8326, and if it determines that the cumulative jackpot payout ball counter is not greater than or equal to 100,000, it transfers processing to S8328.

In S8326, the main CPU 201 performs a game disallowed state setting process to transition to a game disallowed state as the operation of the ball payout limiter function. In this game disallowed state setting process, the game permission flag is turned off (=0), the cumulative jackpot payout ball counter is set to 0, and the special symbol control state number is set to 0 to end the special symbol game. Furthermore, game disallowed information is output to the payout/launch control circuit 400 to control the stopping of the launching of game balls by the launching device 6 and the prohibition of the payout of prize balls from the payout device 82. The game disallowed state will then transition to a game allowed state by clearing the RAM. After executing the process of S8326, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8327.

In S8327, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a "game disallowed state command" to notify the display device 7, speaker 32, etc. that a transition to a game disallowed state has occurred. After executing the process of S8327, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8328.

In this way, according to this embodiment, when the cumulative number of game balls paid out in a jackpot game state per day reaches the number of balls that can be dispensed at any one time (for example, 100,000 balls), the game state is forcibly shifted from the jackpot game state to a game non-permitted state, and the game state after the jackpot game state ends can be partially restricted.

In this embodiment, when the cumulative number of balls dispensed from a jackpot reaches the limit number of balls dispensed, the machine is forcibly switched from the jackpot game state to a non-playing state. However, it may be configured to forcibly switch to the normal game state after the jackpot game state ends when the cumulative number of balls dispensed from a jackpot reaches the limit number of balls dispensed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the game is not permitted, various switches through which game balls enter or pass (excluding the backup clear switch 176, etc.) are disabled, and the launch of game balls from the launching device 6 and the payout of prize balls from the payout device 82 are prohibited. However, it may be configured to at least one of disable various switches, prohibit the launch of game balls from the launching device 6 and prohibit the payout of prize balls from the payout device 82.

In addition, in this embodiment, the machine is configured to transition to a state in which play is not permitted when the cumulative number of balls dispensed from a jackpot reaches 100,000 (one hundred thousand balls) or more, but the cumulative number of balls dispensed from a jackpot that transitions to a state in which play is not permitted can be freely modified as appropriate.

In S8328, the main CPU 201 performs a performance control command transmission process. In this process, the command that has been scheduled for transmission is transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub-control circuit 300. After executing the process of S8328, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8329.

In S8329, the main CPU 201 performs a register save process. After executing S8329, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8330.

At S8330, the main CPU 201 performs a performance display monitor control process. In this process, game judgment process, prize ball addition judgment process, display content update process for the performance display monitor 170, etc. are performed. The data stored in this process is stored in an area separate from (outside) the working area in which data necessary for game progress is stored, that is, in an area that is backed up and where the data is not cleared even if, for example, the RAM is cleared. After executing the process of S8330, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8331.

In S8331, the main CPU 201 performs a process of restoring the registers that were saved in S8329. After executing the process of S8331, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8332.

In S8332, the main CPU 201 performs the process of restoring the protection registers that were saved in S8311, and ends the system timer interrupt process.

[10-4-19. Switch input detection process]
Next, a switch input detection process executed by the main CPU 201 during the system timer interrupt process (see Fig. 324) will be described with reference to Fig. 326. Fig. 326 is a flow chart showing an example of the switch input detection process in the eighth pachinko game machine.

Compared to the first pachinko game machine, the eighth pachinko game machine has the additional configuration of a first large prize slot count switch 8132, a second large prize slot count switch 8152, and a V prize slot switch 8157, and therefore some of the above processing has been added.

In S8401, the main CPU 201 executes the first start port winning detection process. After executing the process of S8401, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8402.

In this first start port winning detection process, when the first start port switch 8121 detects the entry of a game ball into the first start port 8120, the main CPU 201 sets payout information corresponding to the first start port 8120 and judges whether there is free space in the first special pattern start memory area (1) to the first special pattern start memory area (4). If it is judged that there is free space in the first special pattern start memory area (1) to the first special pattern start memory area (4), various random number values (for example, random number values for jackpot determination, pattern random number values, random number values for reach determination, random number values for performance selection, etc.) are obtained as start information for the first special pattern, and the various obtained random number values are stored in one first special pattern determination area in a FIFO (First In, First Out) format. Then, a transmission reservation process is performed for a first special pattern winning command indicating the winning into the first start port 8120 and the number of reserved first special patterns. The winning command for the first special symbol reserved for transmission in this process is sent to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 324) during the next system timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in any of the first special symbol start memory areas (1) to (4), the first start port winning detection process will end without acquiring various random number values.

In S8402, the main CPU 201 executes the second start port winning detection process. After executing the process of S8402, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8403.

In this second start port winning detection process, when the second start port switch 8141 detects the entry of a game ball into the second start port 8140, the main CPU 201 sets payout information corresponding to the second start port 8140 and judges whether there is free space in the second special pattern start memory area (1) to the second special pattern start memory area (4). If it is judged that there is free space in the second special pattern start memory area (1) to the second special pattern start memory area (4), various random number values (for example, random number values for jackpot determination, pattern random number values, random number values for reach determination, random number values for performance selection, etc.) are obtained as start information for the second special pattern, and the various obtained random number values are stored in a single second special pattern determination area in a FIFO format. Then, a transmission reservation process is performed for a winning command for the second special pattern indicating the winning of the second start port 8140 and the number of reserved second special patterns. The winning command for the second special symbol reserved for transmission in this process is sent to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 324) during the next system timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in any of the second special symbol start memory areas (1) to (4), the second start port winning detection process will end without acquiring various random number values.

In S8403, the main CPU 201 performs a general prize opening passage detection process. In the general prize opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts etc. is set when a prize is won through the general prize opening 122. After executing the process of S8403, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8404.

In S8404, the main CPU 201 performs a first large prize opening passage detection process. In the first large prize opening passage detection process, when the first large prize opening count switch 8132 detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 8131, the main CPU 201 sets payout information corresponding to the first large prize opening 8131 and adds 1 to the first large prize opening counter for counting the number of game balls entering the first large prize opening 8131 to update it. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the game is in a jackpot game state (when the control state number of the special pattern is 5 or 6), the "cumulative jackpot payout ball counter" in the main RAM 203 is updated by adding the number of prize balls (for example, 15 balls) of the game balls paid out when the ball enters the first large prize opening 8131. Then, a transmission reservation process of a first large prize opening entry command indicating entry into the first large prize opening 8131 is performed. The first large prize slot winning command scheduled for transmission in this process is sent to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command sending process (see FIG. 324) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S8404, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8405.

In S8405, the main CPU 201 performs a second large prize opening passage detection process. In the second large prize opening passage detection process, when the second large prize opening count switch 8152 detects the entry of a game ball into the second large prize opening 8151, the main CPU 201 sets payout information corresponding to the second large prize opening 8151 and adds 1 to the second large prize opening counter for counting the number of game balls entering the second large prize opening 8151 to update it. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a jackpot game state is in progress, the "cumulative jackpot payout ball counter" in the main RAM 203 is updated by adding the number of prize balls (e.g., 15 balls) of the game balls paid out when the ball enters the second large prize opening 8151. Then, a transmission reservation process for a second large prize opening entry command indicating entry into the second large prize opening 8151 is performed. The second large prize winning slot winning command scheduled for transmission in this process is sent to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command sending process (see FIG. 324) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S8405, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8406.

In this embodiment, when a jackpot game state is reached, the "cumulative jackpot payout ball counter" in the main RAM 203 is configured to add the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first large prize opening 8131 and the second large prize opening 8151; however, in addition to when a jackpot game state is reached, the counter may also be configured to add the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first large prize opening 8131 and the second large prize opening 8151 when a small prize game state is reached (when the control state number of the special pattern is 3 or 4). Furthermore, when in a jackpot game state (when the control state number of the special symbol is 5 or 6), or when in a jackpot game state including a small jackpot game state (when the control state number of the special symbol is 3 to 6), the "cumulative jackpot payout ball counter" of the main RAM 203 may be configured to add the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the first large prize winning hole 8131 and the second large prize winning hole 8151, as well as the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the first start hole 8120, the second start hole 8140, and the general prize winning hole 122.

In S8406, the main CPU 201 performs a V prize opening passage detection process. In the V prize opening passage detection process, when the main CPU 201 detects the passage of a game ball into the V prize opening 8156 by the V prize opening switch 8157, it turns on the V prize opening passage flag. Then, it performs a transmission reservation process for a V passage command indicating that the game ball has passed through the V prize opening 8156. The V passage command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 324) during the next system timer interrupt process. Note that payout information is not set even if the game ball passes through the V prize opening 8156. After executing the process of S8406, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8407.

In S8407, the main CPU 201 performs gate passage detection processing. After executing the processing of S8407, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S8408.

In this gate passage detection process, when the main CPU 201 detects the passage of the game ball through the passing gate 8126 by the passing gate switch 8127, it judges whether there is free space in the normal pattern start memory area (1) to the normal pattern start memory area (4). If it judges that there is free space in the normal pattern start memory area (1) to the normal pattern start memory area (4), it acquires various random number values (for example, random number values for determining whether the normal pattern is a hit, pattern random number values of the normal pattern, etc.) as start information for the normal pattern, and stores the various acquired random number values in a single normal pattern start memory area in FIFO format. On the other hand, if it judges that there is no free space in any of the normal pattern start memory areas (1) to (4), it ends the gate passage detection process without acquiring various random number values.

In S8408, the main CPU 201 performs a look-ahead command generation process. After executing the process of S8408, the main CPU 201 ends the current switch input detection process.

In this look-ahead command generation process, the look-ahead related data in FIG. 302 is referenced, and the various random number values obtained in the current first start port winning detection process or second start port winning detection process are analyzed based on the game state, and a look-ahead command is generated. As shown in the look-ahead related data in FIG. 302, in the time-saving game state, big win game state, and small win game state, only look-ahead commands based on the various random number values obtained in the second start port winning detection process (look-ahead commands for the second special pattern) can be generated. Then, a look-ahead command transmission reservation process is performed to transmit the generated look-ahead command to the sub-control circuit 300. The look-ahead command reserved for transmission in this process will be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 324) during the next system timer interrupt process.

[10-5. Sub-control circuit]
Next, the control contents of the sub-control circuit 300 based on various commands etc. transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub-control circuit 300 will be described.

[10-5-1. Time-saving game state advance notice pattern determination table]
First, the details of the notice presentation pattern determination table stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 327. Fig. 327 is an example of the notice presentation pattern determination table for the time-saving game state in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 327, the advance notice presentation pattern determination table for the time-saving game state associates the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200, the type of time-saving game state (special time-saving game state or general time-saving game state), the selection rate (first random number value), and the advance notice presentation pattern.

Here, "effect pattern" refers to information that defines the display effects of characters, etc., audio effects, effects that change the operation mode of the effect button 54, etc. Also, "preview effect pattern" refers to information on effects that, among the effect patterns, give advance indications of the results of the lottery for special symbols and the content of the effects that will be executed. In addition to the preview effect pattern, various effects such as the symbol effect pattern described below can be executed in a superimposed manner.

The term "selection rate (first random number value)" corresponds to the second random number value being within a predetermined range for the second random number value consisting of the second random number range, but for ease of explanation, it is described as the selection rate. Note that the selection rate may include 0% in addition to 1-100%, and the term "selection rate of 0%" is not excluded.

In this embodiment, the preview performance patterns include "preview performance pattern A" which suggests in advance a "fall small hit", "preview performance pattern B1" which suggests in advance the possibility of a "V small hit", and "preview performance pattern B2" which develops from preview performance pattern B1 and suggests in advance that there is a high possibility that a "battle performance" will be executed. Note that, although only three types of preview performance patterns are provided in this embodiment, the preview content may be subdivided to provide four or more types of display modes.

The sub-CPU 301 refers to the preview presentation pattern determination table for the time-saving game state shown in FIG. 327, and determines the preview presentation pattern based on the special symbol variation pattern command, the type of time-saving game state (special time-saving game state or general time-saving game state), and the selection rate (first random number value).

According to the preview performance pattern determination table for the time-saving game state shown in Figure 327, a selection rate (first random number value) is associated with each preview performance pattern so that the possibility of a "V small hit" increases in the order of "preview performance pattern A" < "preview performance pattern B1" < "preview performance pattern B2".

Furthermore, according to the preview performance pattern determination table for the time-saving game state shown in FIG. 327, if the lottery result for the second special symbol in the special time-saving game state is a miss, the preview performance pattern is not determined (executed).

In addition, according to the advance notice pattern determination table for the time-saving game state shown in FIG. 327, in the special time-saving game state, the "advance notice pattern A," which suggests a "small fall win" in advance, is configured not to be determined (executed).

In addition, according to the preview performance pattern determination table for the time-saving game state shown in Figure 327, the "preview performance pattern B2" is determined (executed) only when a special symbol change pattern command that executes a battle performance is received.

In the time-saving game state preview performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 327, the "preview performance pattern A" which suggests a "small fall win" in advance is configured to be determined (executed) when a special symbol change pattern command which executes a battle performance or a special symbol change pattern command which executes a card performance is received, but the "preview performance pattern A" may be configured to be determined (executed) only when a special symbol change pattern command which executes a card performance is received.

[10-5-2. Sub-control circuit processing]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control circuit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 328. Fig. 328 is a flow chart showing an example of the sub-control circuit process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 328, the sub-CPU 301 first performs an initialization process (S8500). In this initialization process, for example, RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, etc. are performed. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S8510.

The initialization process (S8500) described above is executed when the power is turned on or the backup is cleared. After the power is turned on, the processes S8510 to S8580 described below are executed repeatedly.

In S8510, the sub-CPU 301 performs a data input process to input data. In this data input process, both the command input port 308 reading process and the effect button 54 input process are performed.

The command input port 308 read process reads the command sent from the main control circuit 200 that is set in the command input port 308.

In addition, in the input process of the effect button 54, operation information regarding the player's operation detected by the effect button 54 is input from the button control circuit 310. In addition, when the sub-CPU 301 inputs operation information from the button control circuit 310, it determines whether to validate the input operation information or discard it as invalid, and sets the acceptance time during which input of operation information is permitted, the validity time during which the input operation information is valid, and the invalidity period during which the input operation information is invalid, depending on the current situation such as the effect.

When the reading process of the command input port 308 and the input process of the effect button 54 are completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S8520.

In S8520, the sub-CPU 301 executes a command analysis process. In this process, the command read in the process of S8510 is analyzed. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S8530.

At S8530, the sub-CPU 301 executes a presentation mode determination process. In this process, for example, a presentation pattern is determined based on a command sent from the main CPU 201, and various requests for operating various presentation devices (for example, a drawing request, a sound request, a lamp request, a role request, a presentation button activation request, etc.) are generated based on the determined presentation pattern. Details of this presentation mode determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 329. Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 moves the process to S8540.

In S8540, the sub-CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this processing, the sub-CPU 301 transmits a drawing request to the display control circuit 304. The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control for displaying an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on the message (drawing request) transmitted from the sub-CPU 301. When this processing ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the processing to S8550.

In S8550, the sub-CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this processing, the sub-CPU 301 transmits a sound request to the audio control circuit 305. The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control to output audio from the speaker 32 based on the message (sound request) transmitted from the sub-CPU 301. When this processing ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the processing to S8560.

In S8560, the sub-CPU 301 executes an LED control process. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 sends an LED request to the LED control circuit 306. Based on the message (LED request) sent from the sub-CPU 301, the LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control to light up or blink all or a portion of the LEDs that make up the LED group 46. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S8570.

At S8570, the sub-CPU 301 executes a reel control process. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 sends a reel request to the reel control circuit 307. Based on the message (reel request) sent from the sub-CPU 301, the reel control circuit 307 performs drive control to operate the performance drive motors (not shown) for all or some of the reels that make up the performance reel group 58. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S8580.

At S8580, the sub-CPU 301 executes effect button control processing. In this processing, the sub-CPU 301 sends an effect button drive request to the button control circuit 310. Based on the message (effect button drive request) sent from the sub-CPU 301, the button control circuit 310 performs drive control such as changing the operation mode of the effect button 54 and vibrating the effect button 54. When this processing ends, the sub-CPU 301 ends the sub-control circuit processing.

[10-5-3. Presentation mode determination process]
Next, the details of the presentation mode determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 in the sub control circuit process (see FIG. 328) will be described with reference to Fig. 329. Fig. 329 is a flow chart showing an example of the presentation mode determination process in the eighth pachinko game machine.

In S8531, the sub-CPU 301 executes a presentation pattern determination process for determining a presentation pattern. In this presentation pattern determination process, a presentation pattern is determined that defines the display presentation mode displayed on the display device 7, the sound presentation mode output from the speaker 32, the operation mode of the presentation button 54, etc., based on the type of command received from the main CPU 201. Specifically, if the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol variation pattern command", a "symbol presentation pattern" is determined based on the received special symbol variation pattern command. In addition, when the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol variation pattern command" during a time-saving game state, a "preview presentation pattern" is determined based on the special symbol variation pattern command, the type of time-saving game state (special time-saving game state or general time-saving game state), and the selection rate (first random number value) by referring to the pre-notification presentation pattern determination table for the time-saving game state shown in FIG. 327. In addition, a presentation pattern is determined according to various commands transmitted from the main CPU 201. When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S8532.

In S8532, the sub-CPU 301 executes a process for generating an animation request. In this process, an animation request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S8531 above. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S8533.

In S8533, the sub-CPU 301 executes a drawing request generation process. In this process, a drawing request is generated based on the animation request generated in S8532. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S8534.

In S8534, the sub-CPU 301 executes a sound request generation process. In this process, a sound request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S8531 above. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S8535.

In S8535, the sub-CPU 301 executes a lamp request generation process. In this process, a lamp request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S8531 above. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S8536.

In S8536, the sub-CPU 301 executes a reel request generation process. In this process, a reel request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S8531 above. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S8537.

At S8537, the sub-CPU 301 executes a process for generating a performance button actuation request. In this process, a performance button actuation request is generated based on the performance pattern determined at S8531 above. Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 ends the performance mode determination process and transfers the process to the drawing control process (see FIG. 328).

[10-6. Game state transition diagram]
The game states to which the game is changed by the various processes executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 as described above will be explained with reference to a game state transition diagram. Figure 330 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state in the eighth pachinko game machine.

The eighth pachinko gaming machine has a normal gaming state (first normal gaming state, second normal gaming state), a time-saving gaming state (special time-saving gaming state, general time-saving gaming state), and a non-playable state as gaming states.

As described above, the "first normal game state" is the normal game state during the control period of the first special symbol that is performed based on the start information of the first special symbol, and is a normal game state in which hitting from the left is the normal game mode. Therefore, in the first normal game state, it is easy for a game ball to enter the first start hole 8120, but it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second start hole 8140.

The "second normal game state" is a normal game state during the control period of the second special symbol based on the start information of the second special symbol, and is a normal game state in which the reserved number of second special symbols stored in the time-saving game state is being consumed immediately after the time-saving game state ends and the game state transitions to the normal game state. Here, the second normal game state specifies left-hand hitting as the normal game mode, but since the rate of return to the general time-saving game state is high while the reserved number of second special symbols is being consumed, right-hand hitting may also be specified as the normal game mode. In this way, since the second normal game state may specify left-hand hitting or right-hand hitting, it is preferable not to have the display device 7 notify the normal game mode during the second normal game state, and to have the display device 7 notify the left-hand hitting as the normal game mode when the game state transitions from the second normal game state to the first normal game state.

The "special time-saving game state" is a time-saving game state in which the number of small wins = 255 is set as the second time-saving end condition, and since the probability of winning a "V small win (approximately 1/48.2)" is higher than a "fall small win (approximately 1/152.6)," and since at least a V small win can be won before 255 small wins have been won, it is a time-saving game state in which the next big win is essentially guaranteed. In addition, when the special time-saving game state is entered after the end of a big win game state, it becomes the A time-saving game state, and when it is entered after the variable display number of special symbols reaches the ceiling value, it also becomes the B time-saving game state.

The "general time-saving play state" is a time-saving play state in which the first time-saving end condition is set to the number of small wins = 1 or 2, and if all the small wins are fall small wins, the time-saving play state ends without transitioning to the big win play state, so it is a time-saving play state in which the next big win is not guaranteed.

In both the special time-saving game state and the general time-saving game state, right-hand hits are considered the normal game mode, and while it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first start hole 8120, it is easy for the game ball to enter the second start hole 8140.

The "game not permitted state" is a game state in which the player is unable to play, and as described above, the various switches through which game balls enter or pass are disabled, game balls are prohibited from being launched from the launching device 6, and prize balls are prohibited from being paid out from the payout device 82.

(Transition Control of First Normal Gaming State)
As shown in Fig. 330, in the first normal game state, when a game ball enters the first start hole 8120, a "jackpot" or "miss" is determined based on the start information of the first special symbol (see Fig. 295), and when a "jackpot" is determined, a transition to a jackpot game state occurs. Then, after the end of the jackpot game state triggered by the start information of the first special symbol in the first normal game state, depending on the selected symbol of the special symbol, a transition to a "special time-saving game state" occurs with a selection rate of 20%, a transition to a "general time-saving game state" occurs with a selection rate of 40%, and a transition to a "normal game state" occurs with a selection rate of 40% (see Figs. 296 and 299).

In addition, in the first normal game state (including the second normal game state), after the number of times the special symbol changes display reaches 999 times, the game state transitions from the normal game state to a "special time-saving game state."

(Transition control of special time-saving game state)
In the special time-saving game state, when a game ball enters the second start port 8140, a "big win", a "small win" or a "miss" is determined based on the start information of the second special symbol (see FIG. 295). If a "big win" is determined, the game state transitions to a big win game state, and if a "small win" is determined, the game state transitions to a small win game state. In particular, in this embodiment, when a small win game state is played as a V small win, it becomes possible (or easy) for the game ball to pass through the V winning port 8156, and when the game ball passes through the V winning port 8156, the game state transitions to a big win game state from the second route.

In addition, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 8140, the actual probability of transitioning to a jackpot game state via the first route or the second route is configured to be approximately 1 in 41.9 (see Figure 296).

In the special time-saving game state, after a game ball enters the second starting hole 8140 and the game state transitions to a jackpot game state, all games will transition to the general time-saving game state (see FIG. 299). As described above, in the special time-saving game state, after a game ball enters the second starting hole 8140 and the game state transitions to a jackpot game state, the game state may be configured to transition back to the special time-saving game state at a predetermined rate.

(Transition control of general time-saving gaming state)
In the general time-saving play state, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 8140, a "jackpot,""smallhit," or "miss" is determined based on the start information of the second special pattern (see Figure 295), and if a "jackpot" is determined, the game transitions to a big hit play state, and if a "small hit" is determined, the game transitions to a small hit play state.

In the general time-saving game state, the "number of small wins" is subtracted as the A time-saving end condition without distinguishing between V small wins and fall small wins, but if all the small wins won are fall small wins, the game cannot transition to the big win game state and transitions from the general time-saving game state to the second normal game state. Also, if the small win won is a V small win, the game will transition to a small win game state as a V small win in which it is possible (or easy) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 8156, and when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 8156, the game will transition to the big win game state from the second route.

In the general time-saving game state, after transitioning to the jackpot game state via the first route or the second route, if the number of consecutive jackpots due to the count limiter function has not reached the limiter number, the game state transitions back to the general time-saving game state, and if the number of consecutive jackpots due to the count limiter function has reached the limiter number, the game state transitions to the second normal game state (see FIG. 299). As described above, in the general time-saving game state, after a game ball enters the second starting hole 8140 and transitions to the jackpot game state, the game state may be configured to transition back to the special time-saving game state at a predetermined rate.

(Transition Control of Second Normal Gaming State)
In the second normal game state, a "big win", a "small win" or a "miss" is determined based on the start information of the second special symbol stored during the general time-saving game state (see FIG. 295), and if a "big win" is determined, the game state transitions to a big win game state, and if a "small win" is determined, the game state transitions to a small win game state. If the winning small win is a V small win, a small win game state is performed as a V small win in which the game ball can (or easily) pass through the V winning hole 8156, and when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 8156, the game state transitions to a big win game state from the second route.

Then, in the second normal game state, after transitioning to the jackpot game state via the first route or the second route, the game state will transition back to the general time-saving game state (see FIG. 299).

In addition, in the second normal game state, the start information for all second special symbols stored during the general time-saving game state is determined to be a "miss" or a "small hit by falling," and when all reserved numbers of second special symbols stored in the general time-saving game state are consumed, the second normal game state ends and transitions to the first normal game state.

(Transition control of gaming disallowed state)
Regardless of the current game state, when the cumulative number of balls paid out in a jackpot game state per day reaches a predetermined number of balls (for example, 100,000 balls), the game state will be forcibly shifted from the jackpot game state to a game-disallowed state. When the RAM is cleared or a setting change process is performed, this game-disallowed state will be shifted to the first normal game state, which is a game-allowed state. In addition, the shift to the game-disallowed state will be executed as the highest priority process in the shift control in each game state.

[10-7. Production flow]
Next, an outline of the presentation executed under the control of the main control circuit 200 and the sub control circuit 300 will be described using a flow of the entire presentation. Fig. 331 shows an example of a presentation flow in the game state in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

The effects performed in the eighth pachinko gaming machine include a variable effect consisting of a variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to special symbols displayed in the display area of the display device 7, a display effect of characters, etc., a sound effect output from the speaker 32, a lamp effect emitted from the group of LEDs 46, a special effect effect that drives the group of special effect devices 58, and an effect of changing the operation mode of the effect button 54. Note that in this embodiment, the decorative symbols are composed of three main symbols, a left symbol, a center symbol, and a right symbol, and a sub-symbol that is much smaller than the main symbols. Note that the number and type of decorative symbols are not limited to this.

In addition, in the embodiment, the effect based on the lottery of the first special symbol is also called the "first special symbol effect," and the effect based on the lottery of the second special symbol is also called the "second special symbol effect."

(Effects in the First Normal Gaming State)
In the first normal game state, at least "normal variation,""normalreach,""superreach,""ultra super reach," and "full rotation reach" are configured to be executable as "first special pattern presentations."

"Normal change" refers to a change in which all decorative symbols start changing at high speed and stop displaying in order, and can be performed when the special symbol lottery result is a miss.

"Normal reach", "super reach" and "ultra super reach" are reach effects that suggest that the result of the lottery for the first special symbol may be a jackpot. A "normal reach" is a reach effect that occurs when the left and right symbols are temporarily displayed as the same type of symbol, and as an example, it is a reach effect in which the middle symbol changes display at a slow speed. In a "normal reach", if the middle symbol is displayed as a different type of symbol from the left and right symbols, it is a miss, and if the middle symbol is displayed as the same type of symbol as the left and right symbols, it is a jackpot. Also, in a "normal reach", the middle symbol may not be displayed as a stationary symbol, and it is configured so that a "super reach" can further develop into a "super super reach".

"Full rotation reach" refers to a state in which multiple decorative symbols indicating a jackpot fluctuate slowly when all of them are in line. In this embodiment, this is an effect that is only executed when the result of the lottery for the first special symbol is a jackpot and the selected symbol "z1" for the first special symbol that transitions to a special time-saving game state is determined.

According to the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in Figure 300(a), the random number values for effect selection, etc. are set so that the expectation of transitioning to a jackpot game state increases in the following order: "Normal Reach" < "Super Reach" < "Ultra Super Reach" < "Full Rotation Reach".

In addition, in the first normal game state, the "card effect" and "battle effect" described below may be configured to be executed at a predetermined rate. When the "card effect" or "battle effect" is executed in the first normal game state, the random number value for effect selection, etc. is set so that the expectation of transitioning to the jackpot game state is high.

(Effects during special time-saving game mode)
In the special time-saving game state, at least a "super-shortened variation," a "instant win effect," and a "battle effect" can be executed as the "second special symbol effect."

"Ultra-short variation" refers to a variation mode presentation in which all decorative symbols start to vary at high speed separately, and in an extremely short time (for example, 0.5 seconds), all decorative symbols stop and display different types of symbols, and is a presentation that can be executed when the lottery result for the special symbol is a miss. Also, in the special time-saving game state, "ultra-short variation" is configured to be executable even when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a small hit and the selected symbol "z7" of the second special symbol corresponding to a "fall small hit" is determined (see Figure 300 (b)).

The "instant win effect" is an effect in which all decorative symbols start to change rapidly and independently, and in an extremely short time (for example, 0.5 seconds), all decorative symbols stop and display the same type of symbol. This effect can be executed when the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a big win, or when the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a small win and the selected symbols "z5, z6" of the second special symbol corresponding to the "V small win" are determined.

The "battle effect" is an effect that can be executed when the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a miss, or when the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a small hit and the selected second special symbol "z5, z6" corresponding to a "V small hit" is determined. The "battle effect" is an effect that suggests whether the "V small hit" that triggers the transition to a big hit game state has been won or has been a "miss" without suggesting that the "fall small hit" that triggers the end of the general time-saving game state has been won, and as an example, an effect in which an enemy character appears and the main character and the enemy character face off against each other, and if the main character wins, a V small hit is announced, and if the main character loses, a miss is announced.

(Presentation during normal time-saving game mode)
In the general time-saving game state, different presentations can be executed according to the remaining number of jackpot limiter times.

Specifically, when the remaining number of jackpot limiter times in the general time-saving play state is 91 or more (hereinafter also referred to as the "first half of the number limiter"), "shortened variation", "instant win effect", "card effect", and "battle effect" are configured to be executable. Also, when the remaining number of jackpot limiter times in the general time-saving play state is 90 or less (hereinafter also referred to as the "second half of the number limiter"), "ultra-shortened variation", "instant win effect", and "card effect" are configured to be executable. Also, when the remaining number of jackpot limiter times in the general time-saving play state is 0 (hereinafter also referred to as "when the number limiter is activated"), "ultra-shortened variation" and "ending effect" are configured to be executable.

"Shortened fluctuation" is a special effect during the "first half of the count limiter" in the general time-saving game mode, in which all decorative symbols start to fluctuate at high speed and stop displaying different types of symbols in a short period of time (e.g. 3 seconds) that is shorter than normal fluctuation and longer than ultra-shortened fluctuation, and is an effect that can be executed when the lottery result for the special symbol is a miss. Note that during the "second half of the count limiter" and "when the count limiter is activated" in the general time-saving game mode, "shortened fluctuation" will switch to the above-mentioned "ultra-shortened fluctuation."

The "card effect" is a special effect for the "first half of the count limiter" and the "second half of the count limiter" in the general time-saving play state, and is an effect that can be executed when the result of the lottery for the special pattern is a small win or a miss. The "card effect" is an effect that suggests whether the "fall small win" that triggers the end of the general time-saving play state has been won, the "V small win" that triggers the transition to the big win play state has been won, or it has been a "miss". As an example, it is an effect in which a card with a specified pattern is displayed, and when the card is slowly flipped over, text suggesting the result of the lottery for the second special pattern is displayed.

An "ending effect" is a special effect that occurs when the "number of times limiter is activated" in the general time-saving play state, and can be executed when the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. An "ending effect" is an effect that suggests whether a "big hit" that transitions to a big hit play state has been won, a "V small hit" that triggers a transition to a big hit play state has been won, or a "fall small hit" that triggers the end of the general time-saving play state has been won. As an example, it is an effect in which a specified story is displayed, and when the story is completed, a big hit or V small hit is announced, and when the story ends midway, a fall small hit is announced.

(Effects in the Second Normal Gaming State)
In the second normal game state, at least a "normal variation" and a "door opening effect" are executable as the "second special symbol effect".

As described above in the first normal game state, the "normal variation" is an effect that can be executed when the lottery result for the special symbol is a miss, but in the second normal game state, it is also configured to be executable when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a small win and the selected symbol "z7" of the second special symbol corresponding to the "fall small win" is determined (see Figure 300 (a)).

The "door opening effect" is an effect exclusive to the second normal game state, and can be executed when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a big hit, when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a small hit and the selected second special symbol patterns "z5, z6" corresponding to a "V small hit" are determined, or when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a miss. As an example, the "door opening effect" displays a half-open door from the left and right, and displays the half-open door rattling for a predetermined period of time, and when there is a big hit or a V small hit, the door is displayed as being completely closed, and when there is a miss, the door is displayed as not being completely closed.

In this embodiment, when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a small win and the selected pattern "z7" of the second special symbol corresponding to a "fall small win" is determined during the second normal game state, a "normal change" is executable, but a "door opening effect" may also be executable. When the lottery result for the second special symbol is a small win and the selected pattern "z7" of the second special symbol corresponding to a "fall small win" is determined during the second normal game state, when the "door opening effect" is executed, the same effect as when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a loss may be performed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the "door opening effect" is configured to be executable as a special effect for the second normal game state, but the above-mentioned "battle effect" may be configured to be executable instead of the "door opening effect."

[10-8. Display contents of the performance]
The display contents of the effects executed under the control of the main control circuit 200 and the sub-control circuit 300 etc. will be described using display images displayed in the display area of the display device 7.

(Battle effects)
First, a battle effect that can be executed in the first half of the number limiter in the special time-saving game state or the general time-saving game state will be described with reference to Fig. 332. Fig. 332 is an example of a display image that explains a battle effect in the eighth pachinko game machine.

The battle effect shown in Figure 332 is an effect based on a pattern effect pattern executed based on the special pattern change pattern command (31H, 32H) that executes the battle effect, as shown in the special pattern change pattern table S1 in Figure 300 (b) and the special pattern change pattern table J1 in Figure 301 (a).

Figure 332 (a) is an example of a display image when a battle performance starts. As shown in Figure 332 (a), when a battle performance starts, a performance is performed in which a main character and a rival character appear and face off against each other. In addition, the decorative patterns of the left, middle, and right patterns are displayed in a reduced size at the bottom right of the display area so as not to interfere with the battle performance and so as to be easily distinguishable by the player.

Figure 332 (b-1) is an example of a display image of a battle effect that is performed when the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a V small hit (when the special symbol variation pattern command is 31H). As shown in Figure 332 (b-1), as a result of the battle effect, the showdown is concluded and an effect is performed in which the main character is victorious. In addition, the decorative symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols, which are displayed in reduced size in the bottom right of the display area, are all displayed as the same symbol and temporarily stopped. After that, the decorative symbols, all of which are the same symbol and temporarily stopped, are displayed large in the center of the display area, and the player is notified that a V small hit has occurred.

Figure 332 (b-2) is an example of a display image of a battle effect that is performed when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a miss (when the variable pattern command for the special symbol is 32H). As shown in Figure 332 (b-2), the battle effect results in a showdown and an effect in which the main character is defeated is performed. In addition, the decorative symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols, which are displayed in reduced size at the bottom right of the display area, are displayed in a stopped state so that they are not all the same symbol.

In this way, the battle effects executed in the general time-saving play state in this embodiment are not executed when a "fall small hit" occurs, which is the trigger for ending the general time-saving play state. This gives the player a sense of security that the general time-saving play state will continue, while also giving the player a sense of anticipation for a V small hit, making the game even more exciting.

(Card presentation)
Next, a card effect that can be executed in the general time-saving gaming state will be described with reference to Fig. 333. Fig. 333 is an example of a display image that explains the card effect in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

The card presentation shown in Figure 333 is based on a pattern presentation pattern that is executed based on the special pattern variation pattern command (40H, 41H, 42H, 43H) that executes the card presentation, as shown in the special pattern variation pattern tables J1 and J2 in Figure 301.

Figure 333(a) is an example of a display image when the card presentation starts. As shown in Figure 333(a), when the card presentation starts, a chance card is displayed with the words "Hit" indicating a V hit, "Mode Continue" indicating a miss and the continuation of the general time-saving play state, and "Mode End" indicating a small fall hit and the end of the general time-saving play state, and then a presentation is performed in which the chance card is turned over and shuffled. In addition, the decorative patterns of the left, middle, and right patterns that were displayed large in the center of the display area are displayed in a reduced size in the bottom right of the display area so as not to interfere with the card presentation and are easy for the player to distinguish.

Figure 333(b) is an example of a common display image from when the card presentation starts until the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is indicated. As shown in Figure 333(b), when the chance cards are turned face down and shuffled, a presentation is given in which one of the cards is selected.

Figure 333 (c-1) is an example of a display image of a card presentation that is performed when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a V small hit (when the special symbol variation pattern command is 41H). As shown in Figure 332 (c-1), when one card is selected in the card presentation, the card is slowly flipped over and a chance card with the word "hit" written on it is displayed. In addition, the decorative symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols, which are displayed in reduced size in the bottom right of the display area, are all displayed as the same symbol and temporarily stopped. After that, the decorative symbols, all of which are the same symbol and temporarily stopped, are displayed large in the center of the display area, and the player is notified that a V small hit has occurred.

Figure 333 (c-2) is an example of a display image of a card effect that is performed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small fall win (when the variable pattern command of the special symbol is 42H or 43H). As shown in Figure 332 (c-2), when one card is selected in the card effect, the card is slowly flipped over and an effect is performed in which a chance card with the words "mode end" is displayed. In addition, the decorative symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols, which are displayed in reduced size at the bottom right of the display area, are displayed in a stopped state so that they are not all the same symbol.

Although not shown in the figure, when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a miss (when the special symbol variation pattern command is 40H), when one card is selected in the card presentation, the card is slowly flipped over and a chance card with the words "mode continue" written on it is displayed.

Figure 333 (d-2) is an example of a display image of a card presentation that follows Figure 333 (c-2) when the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a small drop hit and the remaining number of small hit wins is two or more (when the special symbol variation pattern command is 42H). As shown in Figure 332 (d-2), after a chance card with the words "mode end" is displayed, a female character is displayed and a presentation is performed indicating the continuation of the general time-saving game state.

In addition, even if the lottery result for the second special symbol is a miss (when the variation pattern command for the special symbol is 40H), as shown in Figures 332 (c-2) and 332 (d-2), a chance card with the words "mode end" written on it may be displayed first, and then a female character may be displayed and a performance indicating the continuation of the general time-saving game state may be executed at a predetermined rate.

Furthermore, when the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a small V hit (when the special symbol variation pattern command is 41H), a chance card with the words "mode ended" or "mode continued" is displayed, and then a specific character is displayed, and a revival performance announcing a V hit is executed at a predetermined rate.

In this way, according to the card presentation executed in the general time-saving play state in this embodiment, whether it is a "fall small hit" that will trigger the end of the general time-saving play state, a "miss" that will cause the general time-saving play state to continue, or a "V small hit" that will trigger a transition to a big hit play state, the player can hope that it is not a "fall small hit" and be interested in the possibility of a "miss," thereby further increasing the enjoyment of the game.

(Ending performance)
Next, an ending effect that can be executed when the number limiter is activated in the general time-saving gaming state will be described with reference to Fig. 334. Fig. 334 is an example of a display image that explains the ending effect in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

The ending effect shown in Figure 334 is an effect based on a pattern effect pattern executed based on the special pattern change pattern command (50H, 51H, 52H) that executes the ending effect, as shown in the special pattern change pattern table J3 in Figure 301.

Figure 334(a) is an example of a display image when an ending performance starts. As shown in Figure 334(a), when an ending performance starts, a performance is performed in which a predetermined story is displayed. In addition, the decorative patterns of the left, middle, and right patterns that were displayed large in the center of the display area are displayed in a reduced size in the bottom right of the display area so as not to interfere with the card performance and to be distinguishable by the player.

Figure 334 (b-1) is an example of a display image of an ending performance (successful ending performance) that is performed when the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a big win or a V small win (when the variable pattern command of the special symbol is 51H or 52H). As shown in Figure 334 (b-1), the story is concluded, and the decorative symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols, which are displayed in reduced size at the bottom right of the display area, are all displayed as the same symbol in a temporary stop state.

Figure 334 (c-1) is an example of a display image of the ending presentation that follows Figure 334 (b-1). As shown in Figure 334 (c-1), after the story is completed, all the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are displayed as the same symbol large and stopped in the center of the display area, notifying the player that they have won a big prize or a V small prize.

Figure 334 (b-2) is an example of a display image of an ending effect (ending failure effect) that is performed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small fall hit (when the variation pattern command of the special symbol is 50H). As shown in Figure 334 (b-2), the display screen breaks down and a message is displayed indicating that the story has ended midway.

Figure 334 (c-2) is an example of a display image of the ending presentation that follows on from Figure 334 (b-2). As shown in Figure 334 (c-2), after the story ends midway, the decorative patterns of the left, middle, and right patterns are displayed large and statically in the center of the display area so that they are not all the same pattern. Then, the words "Mode Ended" are displayed to indicate that the general time-saving play state has ended.

In this way, the ending presentation executed in the general time-saving game state in this embodiment not only allows the player to recognize that the game state to which the player transitions after the end of the jackpot game state in the general time-saving game state is regulated by the number of times limiter function (transition to the normal game state), but also adds interest in whether the jackpot has been a jackpot, V-small jackpot, or drop jackpot, thereby making the game even more entertaining.

(Door opening performance)
Next, a door opening effect executable in the second normal gaming state will be described with reference to Fig. 335. Fig. 335 is an example of a display image for explaining a door opening effect in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

The door opening effect shown in Figure 335 is an effect based on a pattern effect pattern executed based on the special pattern change pattern command (08H, 09H, 0AH) that executes the door opening effect, as shown in the special pattern change pattern table T1 in Figure 300 (a).

Figure 335(a) is an example of a display image when the door-opening effect starts. As shown in Figure 335(a), when the door-opening effect starts, half-open doors are displayed from the left and right, and the half-open doors are displayed rattling for a predetermined period of time. In addition, the decorative left, middle, and right patterns that were displayed large in the center of the display area are displayed in a reduced size in the bottom right of the display area so that they are easy for the player to distinguish and do not interfere with the door-opening effect.

Figure 335 (b-1) is an example of a display image of the door opening effect that is performed when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a big win or a V small win (when the special symbol variation pattern command is 08H or 09H). As shown in Figure 335 (b-1), after a display of a half-open door rattling for a predetermined period of time, the door is displayed as being completely closed.

Figure 335 (c-1) is an example of a display image of the door opening effect that follows Figure 335 (b-1). As shown in Figure 335 (c-1), after the door is displayed as being completely closed, the door opens again and all the decorative patterns of the left, middle and right patterns are displayed large and stopped in the center of the display area as the same pattern, notifying the player that they have won a big win or a V small win.

Figure 335 (b-2) is an example of a display image of a door opening effect that is performed when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a miss (when the special symbol variation pattern command is 0AH). As shown in Figure 335 (b-2), after a display of a half-open door rattling is displayed for a predetermined period of time, a display is displayed of the door not completely closing.

Figure 335 (c-2) is an example of a display image of the door opening effect that follows Figure 335 (b-2). As shown in Figure 335 (c-2), after the door is displayed as not being completely closed, the decorative patterns of the left, middle, and right patterns are displayed large and stopped in the center of the display area so that they are not all the same pattern.

In this way, the door opening effect executed in the second normal game state in this embodiment results in a big win or V small win after the normal time-saving game state ends, giving the player the expectation of returning to the normal time-saving game state again, further increasing the interest in the game.

(Preview performance)
Next, a notice effect that can be executed in the time-saving gaming state will be described with reference to Fig. 336. Fig. 336 is an example of a display image that explains a notice effect in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

The preview performance shown in Figure 336 is a performance that includes "preview performance pattern A," which suggests in advance a small drop hit, "preview performance pattern B1," which suggests in advance that there is a possibility of a small V hit, and "preview performance pattern B2," which develops from preview performance pattern B1 and suggests in advance that there is a high possibility that a battle performance will be executed, as shown in the preview performance pattern determination table in Figure 327.

Figure 336 (a) is an example of a display image before the preview performance is executed. As shown in Figure 336 (a), the decorative patterns of the left pattern, center pattern, and right pattern are displayed in a changing manner in the center of the display area.

Figure 336 (b-1) is an example of a display image when a preview performance according to preview performance pattern A is executed. As shown in Figure 336 (b-1), the word "DANGER" is displayed to indicate in advance the possibility of a small hit.

Figure 336 (b-2) is an example of a display image when preview performances according to preview performance pattern B1 and preview performance pattern B2 are executed. As shown in Figure 336 (b-2), to suggest in advance that there is a possibility of a V small hit, a male character is displayed from a window, and the word "CHANCE" is also displayed.

Figure 336 (c-2) is an example of a display image when a preview performance according to preview performance pattern B2, which follows on from Figure 336 (b-2), is executed. As shown in Figure 336 (c-2), to indicate in advance that there is a high possibility that a battle performance will be executed, the window becomes larger, and a female character is displayed in the enlarged window along with the word "BATTLE."

In this way, according to the preview effect executed in the time-saving game mode in this embodiment, the content suggested by the preview effect allows players to guess the lottery results for the special symbols and the content of the effect that will be executed, thereby making the game even more interesting.

In this way, the eighth pachinko gaming machine allows transitions between the first normal gaming state, the second normal gaming state, the special time-saving gaming state, and the general time-saving gaming state, and provides appropriate effects according to each gaming state, thereby further increasing the excitement of the game.

The eighth pachinko game machine also has a "special time-saving game state" in which the time-saving end condition is set to 255 small wins, essentially guaranteeing the next big win, and a "general time-saving game state" in which the time-saving end condition is set to 1 or 2 small wins, not guaranteeing the next big win, creating unprecedented gameplay and making the game even more exciting.

<Modification of the eighth pachinko gaming machine>
In the eighth pachinko game machine, the "ball output limiter function" counts the cumulative number of jackpot balls paid out in the jackpot game state "per day", and when the cumulative number of jackpot balls reaches a "predetermined number of balls to be played (e.g., 100,000 balls)", the game state to which the game state to which the game state transitions after the jackpot game state ends is partially restricted. However, the "ball output limiter function" may be configured to count the cumulative number of jackpot balls paid out in the jackpot game state under specific conditions (time-saving game state) like the "count limiter function", and when the cumulative number of jackpot balls reaches a "predetermined number of consecutive balls to be played (e.g., 50,000 balls)", the game state to which the game state to which the game state transitions after the jackpot game state ends is partially restricted.

If the "ball payout limiter function" is configured to count the cumulative number of jackpot balls paid out of game balls paid out in a jackpot game state under specific conditions (time-saving game state), and to partially restrict the game state to which the player transitions after the jackpot game state ends when the cumulative number of jackpot balls reaches a specified number of consecutive balls paid out, then the processing can be modified as follows.
First, in S8325 of the system timer interruption process (FIG. 324), the "cumulative jackpot payout ball counter" in the main RAM 203 is referred to, and it is determined whether the value of the cumulative jackpot payout ball counter is equal to or greater than the "predetermined consecutive payout ball number (for example, 50,000 balls)". If it is determined that the value of the cumulative jackpot payout ball counter is equal to or greater than the "predetermined consecutive payout ball number", the process proceeds to S8326, and a setting process for a game non-permitted state is performed. In addition, in S8323 of the system timer interruption process (FIG. 324), it is determined whether the value is less than the predetermined consecutive payout ball number (for example, 49,000 balls). This allows the cumulative jackpot payout ball number to be switched from the "predetermined number of balls to be played (for example, 100,000 balls)" per day to the "predetermined consecutive payout ball number".
Next, in the jackpot end state setting process of S8323 in the jackpot end game state end process (see FIG. 320), it is determined whether the selected special symbol at the end of the jackpot game state is the selected special symbol for the time-saving game state. If it is not the selected special symbol for the time-saving game state (if it is the selected special symbol for the normal game state), the cumulative jackpot payout ball counter is cleared (the cumulative jackpot payout ball counter is set to 0). As a result, after the jackpot game state that transitions to the normal game state is ended, the cumulative jackpot payout ball counter is cleared, and the cumulative jackpot payout ball number of the game balls paid out in the jackpot game state under a specific condition (time-saving game state) can be counted.

In the eighth pachinko game machine, as shown in S8325 and S8326 of the system timer interrupt processing (Fig. 324), the main CPU 201 counts the cumulative number of balls dispensed in a jackpot, and the main control circuit 200 and the payout/launch control circuit 400 control the "ball dispense limiter function". However, it may also be configured so that the payout/launch control circuit 400 counts the cumulative number of balls dispensed in a jackpot, and only the payout/launch control circuit 400 controls the "ball dispense limiter function".

The eighth pachinko gaming machine is equipped with two functions, a "count limiter function" and a "ball payout limiter function", to partially restrict the gaming state to which the game transitions after the end of the big win gaming state, but it may be configured with only the "count limiter function" or only the "ball payout limiter function".

The technology described in the eighth embodiment of the pachinko game machine may be applied to a slot machine. When applied to a slot machine, the various effects executed in the eighth pachinko game machine may be replaced with effects by a display device, reels, etc. provided in the slot machine. In addition, the time-saving game state (special time-saving game state, general time-saving game state) may be replaced with any of the following states: replay time (RT state) in which the probability of replaying a replay is improved, assist time (AT state) in which a predetermined small role or the operation content of the stop button is notified, and assist replay time (ART state) in which the replay time and assist time are controlled simultaneously. In addition, the big win and small win (V small win, fall small win) may be replaced with any of the following: winning a specific role, a specific combination of symbols being stopped and displayed (a specific combination of symbols being awarded), winning an entry win into the RT state, winning an entry win into the AT state, and winning an entry win into the ART state. Furthermore, the number of times limiter function can be replaced with the number of times playable in either the RT state, AT state, or ART state, and the ball payout limiter function can be replaced with the number of gaming media (medals and balls) paid out under specific conditions (advantageous zones that can notify of specific minor winnings or the operation of the stop button).

(others)
The eighth pachinko gaming machine described above can apply the techniques of each embodiment, including modified examples. The above-mentioned embodiment does not limit the contents of the present invention, and modifications can be made to the extent that they do not deviate from the scope of the claims.

Furthermore, the effects described in the eighth pachinko gaming machine are merely a list of the most favorable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in each embodiment of the present invention.

Furthermore, the above [4. Expansion Example] can also be applied to the eighth pachinko gaming machine, as long as there is no inconsistency in its gameplay or control.

[11. The 9th Pachinko Game Machine]
Next, the ninth pachinko gaming machine will be described. The ninth pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine called a one-type two-type mixed machine, similar to the third pachinko gaming machine. The ninth pachinko gaming machine is different from the third pachinko gaming machine in terms of gameplay and presentation content, and accordingly, the configuration of various components arranged in the game area is also partially different.

In particular, the ninth pachinko gaming machine differs from the third pachinko gaming machine in that in the time-saving gaming state, the gameplay is mainly composed of the variable display of normal symbols, and the condition for ending the time-saving gaming state is composed of the number of times that the variable display of normal symbols has occurred, not the number of times that the variable display of special symbols has occurred.

The ninth pachinko gaming machine, like the third pachinko gaming machine, is a priority variable machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed in parallel, and the start condition of the second special symbol is established in priority over the start condition of the first special symbol. However, this is not limited to this, and the machine may be a sequential variable machine as described above.

Hereinafter, when explaining the ninth pachinko gaming machine, the same components as those in the first pachinko gaming machine will be given the same symbols and step numbers, and detailed explanations of their configuration and processing will be omitted.

In this embodiment, "entering a game ball" into an entry port (e.g., a starting port or a big prize entry port) that can give the player a certain benefit (payout of game balls, transition of game state) is also referred to as "winning" as appropriate. Also, in this embodiment, the "variable display" of a pattern is a concept that includes both a "variable display" in which the pattern changes and is displayed, and a "stationary display" in which the pattern stops and is displayed, and the operation from the start of the variable display to the stationary display is referred to as one "variable display."

[11-1. Game board unit]
A game board unit 9010 provided in the ninth pachinko game machine will be described with reference to Fig. 337. This game board unit 9010 is also disposed in front of the base door 3 (see Fig. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see Fig. 2) like the first pachinko game machine.

Figure 337 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit 9010 provided in the ninth pachinko game machine. The game board unit 9010 has a game panel 9100 as a game board, various components are arranged on the game panel 9100, and a game area 105 is formed on the front side of the game panel 9100, in which the released game balls can roll and flow down.

As shown in FIG. 337, the game board unit 9010 of the ninth pachinko gaming machine differs from the first pachinko gaming machine mainly in the configuration and arrangement of the normal operation area 9126 in place of the passing gate, the second starting opening 9140, the normal electric role unit 9145, the first special electric role unit 9130, and the second special electric role unit 9150. The configuration and arrangement of each are explained below.

The first start hole 9120 located in the play area 105 of the ninth pachinko game machine is functionally the same as the first start hole 120 located in the play area 105 of the first pachinko game machine, but because of its relationship with the second start hole 9140, it will be described again using a different reference number from that of the first pachinko game machine.

(First starting point)
The first starting hole 9120 is disposed in the game area 105 below the display area of the display device 7, and is configured so that game balls hit to the left can enter the hole, and game nails or the like make it difficult or impossible for game balls hit to the right to enter the hole. The first starting hole 9120 is provided with a first starting hole switch 9121 (see FIG. 338 described later) that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 9120.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 9120, a first special symbol lottery (a process for determining whether the first special symbol is a winning symbol), a variable display of the first special symbol, and a prize ball for the first starting hole (e.g., three game balls) are paid out. The process after the game ball enters the first starting hole 9120 will be described in detail later.

(Second starting hole)
The second starting hole 9140 is located in the right side area 107 below (downstream) the first special electric role unit 9130 described later and above (upstream) the normal operation area 9126 and the second special electric role unit 9150, and is provided in the normal electric role unit 9145 described later, so that game balls hit to the right can enter the hole (game balls hit to the left are difficult or impossible to enter the hole). The second starting hole 9140 is provided with a second starting hole switch 9141 that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 9140.

When a game ball enters the second starting hole 9140, a second special symbol lottery (a process for determining whether the second special symbol is a winning symbol), a variable display of the second special symbol, and a prize ball for the second starting hole (for example, one game ball) are paid out. The process after the game ball enters the second starting hole 9140 will be described in detail later.

(Normal operating range)
Unlike the passing gate of the first pachinko game machine, the normal map operation area 9126 is configured with a winning port (also called a "normal map operation port") through which game balls that have passed through the normal map operation area 9126 are collected by the game machine without returning to the game area 105 (right side area 107), and prize balls for the normal map operation area (for example, one game ball) are paid out. The normal map operation area 9126 is located below (downstream) the first special electric role unit 9130, the normal electric role unit 9145, and the second special electric role unit 9150 in the right side area 107, which will be described later, and game balls hit to the right can pass through (game balls hit to the left have difficulty or cannot pass through).

For this reason, when a game ball flowing down the right side area 107 does not enter the first large winning hole 9131 of the first special electric role unit 9130, the second starting hole 9140 of the normal electric role unit 9145, or the second large winning hole 9151 of the second special electric role unit 9150, it can pass through the normal figure operation area 9126. As a result, when a right hit is being performed in a jackpot game state, a game ball flowing down the right side area 107 is more likely to enter the first large winning hole 9131 due to the operation of the first special electric role unit 9130 arranged above, and the number of game balls passing through the normal figure operation area 9126 is reduced, so that the normal electric role unit 9145 is operated by the passage of the game ball into the normal figure operation area 9126, and it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second starting hole 9140 unexpectedly outside the design of the game. In addition, when a right hit is performed as an irregular game mode in the normal game state, the normal game operation area 9126 is not a passing gate but also a normal game operation port (winning port), so the game ball that passes through the normal game operation area 9126 will not enter the second starting port 9140.

The normal map operation area 9126 is also provided with a normal map operation switch 9127 (see FIG. 338 described below) that detects the passage of a game ball into the normal map operation area 9126. When a game ball passes through the normal map operation area 9126, the normal map operation switch 9127 detects the passage of the game ball into the normal map operation area 9126, a prize ball for the normal map operation area (for example, one game ball) is paid out, and a normal pattern lottery (a process for determining whether a normal pattern is a winning pattern) and a variable display of the normal pattern are performed.

In this embodiment, the normal map operation area 9126 is configured as a normal map operation port, but it may also be configured as a passing gate as in the first pachinko game machine.

The passage of the game ball into the normal symbol operation area 9126 may also be made to function as a trigger for activating the consecutive operation device of the special device. Assuming that the condition device is in operation (the special symbol that will result in a jackpot is displayed frozen), the passing of the game ball into the normal symbol operation area 9126 may activate the consecutive operation device of the special device, transitioning to a jackpot game state.

(Normal electric role unit)
The normal electric role unit 9145 is disposed below (downstream side) the first special electric role unit 9130 described later in the right side area 107 and above (upstream side) the normal play area 9126 and the second special electric role unit 9150, and is disposed so that the game ball hit to the right can pass through it. The normal electric role unit 9145 is a unit body that integrates the second start hole 9140, the second start hole switch 9141 that detects the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 9140, the upper and lower two-stage normal power shutter 9147 that can move forward and backward, and the normal power solenoid 9148 (see FIG. 338 described later) that operates the normal power shutter 9147.

The normal power shutter 9147 is configured to be displaceable between an open state in which it is possible or easy to insert a game ball into the second starting hole 9140 by moving backwards when the normal power solenoid 9148 is activated, and a closed state in which it is difficult or impossible to insert a game ball into the second starting hole 9140 by moving forwards.

Specifically, the normal power shutter 9147 has a roughly U-shape when viewed in cross section from the front-to-rear direction, and is configured with an upper upper plate 9147U on which the game ball can roll, a lower lower plate 9147D on which the game ball can roll, and a support plate that connects and supports the upper plate 9147U and the lower plate 9147D. In addition, the upper plate 9147U and the lower plate 9147D of the normal power shutter 9147 are configured to be gently inclined (for example, 5 to 10 degrees) toward a center line perpendicular to the left-right direction of the play area 105.

When the normal power shutter 9147 advances forward and is in a closed state, the upper plate 9147U and the lower plate 9147D protrude from the surface of the game panel 9100, and the protruding lower plate 9147D closes the second starting hole 9140, making it impossible or difficult for a game ball flowing down the right side area 107 to enter the second starting hole 9140. Also, when the normal power shutter 9147 is in a closed state, the game ball rolling on the upper plate 9147U is guided downstream to the general winning hole 122, the second special electric role unit 9150, or the normal map operation area 9126, and the game ball rolling on the lower plate 9147D is guided downstream to the second special electric role unit 9150 or the normal map operation area 9126.

The gaming panel 9100 is configured such that when the normal power shutter 9147 is closed by a gaming nail or the like, the gaming ball flowing down the right side area 107 is basically not guided onto the lower panel 9147D, but is guided onto the upper panel 9147U.

In addition, when the normal power shutter 9147 is retracted backward and in an open state, the upper panel 9147U and the lower panel 9147D are recessed into the game panel 9100, and the second starting hole 9140 is opened.

When the normal power shutter 9147 is in an open state for a predetermined time or longer, a game ball flowing down the right side area 107 passes through the upper plate 9147U and the lower plate 9147D, a game ball rolling on the upper plate 9147U falls toward the lower plate 9147D, or a game ball rolling on the lower plate 9147D falls toward the second starting hole 9140, thereby allowing the game ball to enter the second starting hole 9140.

On the other hand, when the normal power shutter 9147 is in an open state for an opening time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 seconds or less), even if a game ball rolling on the upper plate 9147U falls toward the lower plate 9147D, the opening time ends immediately, causing the lower plate 9147D to protrude from the surface of the game panel 9100, and the game ball that fell from the upper plate 9147U will roll on the lower plate 9147D (and be caught by the lower plate 9147D), making it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 9140. In addition, the game ball rolling on the lower panel 9147D falls toward the second starting hole 9140, allowing the game ball to enter the second starting hole 9140. However, as described above, when the normal power shutter 9147 is in the closed state, the game ball is not guided to the lower panel 9147D, and the game ball is not basically rolling on the lower panel 9147D. Therefore, if the normal power shutter 9147 is only displaced to the open state once for a short opening time, it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 9140.

In addition, in this embodiment, the route R1 that the game ball launched from the launching device 6 (see FIG. 338 described later) takes to reach the normal electric role unit 9145 (second starting hole 9140) is predetermined by the configuration of the game board unit 9010, as shown by the dashed line in FIG. 337. For this reason, in this embodiment, the average arrival time of the game ball launched from the launching device 6 to reach the normal electric role unit 9145 (second starting hole 9140) can be calculated to be an average of 5 seconds (approximately 4 to 6 seconds), depending on the launch strength of the launching device 6. It goes without saying that the average arrival time of the game ball launched from the launching device 6 to reach the normal electric role unit 9145 (second starting hole 9140) varies depending on the configuration of the game board unit 9010.

In addition, in this embodiment, the normal power shutter 9147 is configured as a two-stage shutter with an upper plate 9147U and a lower plate 9147D that can move back and forth in the front and rear directions, but the normal power shutter 9147 may be configured as a one-stage shutter with a lower plate 9147D that opens and closes the second starting port 9140, without the upper plate 9147U. Furthermore, instead of a shutter that can move back and forth in the front and rear directions, the normal power shutter 9147 may be configured as a movable member that can move left and right, called an electric chute.

(First special electric feature unit)
The first special electric role unit 9130 is located in the right side area 107 above (upstream) the normal operation area 9126, the normal electric role unit 9145, and the second special electric role unit 9150 described later.

The first special electric device unit 9130 is a unitary body that integrates a first large prize opening 9131, a first large prize opening count switch 9132 (see FIG. 338 described below) that detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 9131, a first special electric shutter 9134 that can move left and right, and a first special electric solenoid 9135 (see FIG. 338 described below) that operates the first special electric shutter 9134.

The first large prize opening 9131 is a large prize opening that opens when a jackpot is hit, and the maximum number of winning balls that can enter the first large prize opening 9131 in one round of a jackpot is set (for example, 10 balls). Each time one game ball enters the first large prize opening 9131, prize balls for the first large prize opening (for example, 15 game balls) are paid out.

The first large prize opening 9131 transitions from a closed state to an open state in the first route when a special stop display mode is derived indicating that the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a "big hit" and in the second route when a specific stop display mode is derived indicating that the result of the special pattern determination is a "small hit" and the second large prize opening 9151 opens, and a game ball that enters the opened second large prize opening 9151 enters the V prize opening 9156 within the second large prize opening 9151.

The first special electric shutter 9134 is configured to be displaceable between an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the first large winning opening 9131 and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the first large winning opening 9131, by the operation of the first special electric solenoid 9135.

Specifically, the first special electric shutter 9134 is roughly fan-shaped when viewed from the front, is supported at the bottom by a pivot, and is made up of a blade member that can move left and right.

When the first special electric shutter 9134 is movable to the right and in an open state, the first large prize opening 9131 opens, receives game balls flowing down into the right area 107, and guides the received game balls to the first large prize opening 9131. On the other hand, when the first special electric shutter 9134 is movable to the left and in a closed state, the first large prize opening 9131 closes, making it impossible or difficult for game balls to enter the first large prize opening 9131. Note that instead of the above-mentioned first special electric shutter 9134, a door member that displaces approximately parallel and approximately perpendicular to the surface of the game panel 9100, or a protruding plate member that can advance and retreat in the forward and backward directions relative to the surface of the game panel 9100 may be used.

(Second special electric feature unit)
The second special electric device unit 9150 is located below (downstream) the first special electric device unit 9130 and the normal electric device unit 9145 in the right-side area 107 and above (upstream) the normal operating area 9126, and is positioned so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through it.

The second special electric device unit 9150 includes a second large prize opening 9151, a second large prize opening count switch 9152 that detects the entry of a game ball into the second large prize opening 9151, a second special electric shutter 9154 that can open and close the second large prize opening 9151, a second special electric solenoid 9155 (see FIG. 338 described below) that operates the second special electric shutter 9154 to open and close the second large prize opening 9151, and a V prize opening 915 through which a game ball that has entered the second large prize opening 9151 can pass. 6, a V entry port switch 9157 (see FIG. 338 described below) that detects when a game ball has passed through the V entry port 9156, a normal port 9158 through which game balls that have entered the second large entry port 9151 but have not entered the V entry port 9156 can pass, a V shutter 9159 that opens and closes the V entry port 9156, and a V shutter solenoid 9160 (see FIG. 338 described below) that operates the V shutter 9159 to open and close the V entry port 9156.

The second large prize opening 9151 is a large prize opening that opens when a small prize is won, and the maximum number of winning balls that can enter the second large prize opening 9151 in one small prize is specified (for example, 10 balls). Each time one game ball enters this second large prize opening 9151, prize balls for the second large prize opening (for example, 15 game balls) are paid out.

The second special electric shutter 9154 is made of a protruding plate-shaped member that can move forward and backward, and is configured so that by operating the second special electric solenoid 9155, the second special electric shutter 9154 can be moved forward to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second large winning opening 9151, and the second special electric shutter 9154 can be moved backward to an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second large winning opening 9151.

The V winning hole 9156 is a winning hole that can be opened and closed by the V shutter 9159, and is also a winning hole through which the game ball passes, triggering control of the jackpot game state via the second route described above.

When the game is controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route, the opening of the second large prize opening 9151 when the game ball passes through the V prize opening 9156 is counted as the first round, and after the game ball passes through the V prize opening 9156 (from the second round onwards), a round game is executed in which the first large prize opening 9131 transitions from a closed state to an open state. Note that when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route, a round game in which the second large prize opening 9151 transitions from a closed state to an open state may be executed for a predetermined number of rounds even after the game ball passes through the V prize opening 9156 (from the second round onwards).

In addition, for example, a V entry port may be provided inside the first large prize opening 9131, so that there is one V entry port and one attacker that is opened in the big win game state. In this case, when a stop display mode indicating a "small win" is derived, the first large prize opening 9131 is opened, and when a game ball enters the V entry port provided inside the first large prize opening 9131, the game is controlled to the big win game state (the big win game state via the second route).

The normal opening 9158 is configured to allow game balls that have entered the second large prize opening 9151 but have not passed through the V prize opening 9156 to enter (pass through) it. Note that in the small prize game state, if all game balls that have entered the open second large prize opening 9151 pass through the normal opening 9158 and no game balls pass through the V prize opening 9156, there will be no transition from the small prize game state to the big prize game state.

The V-shutter 9159 is configured to be displaceable between a closed state in which it is impossible (or difficult) for game balls to pass through the V-winning opening 9156 and an open state in which it is possible (or easy) for game balls to pass through the V-winning opening 9156 by the operation of the V-shutter solenoid 9160.

In particular, in the ninth pachinko game machine, when a small win game state is reached, the V shutter solenoid 9160 is activated to open the V winning hole 9156, and the game ball that enters the second large winning hole 9151 is configured to be able to pass through the V winning hole 9156.

In addition, in this embodiment, the route taken by the game ball launched from the launching device 6 to reach the second special electric role unit 9150 is predetermined, similar to route R1, and the average arrival time taken by the game ball launched from the launching device 6 to reach the second special electric role unit 9150 can be calculated to be an average of 6 seconds (approximately 5 to 7 seconds), depending on the launch strength of the launching device 6. It goes without saying that the average arrival time taken by the game ball launched from the launching device 6 to reach the second special electric role unit 9150 varies depending on the configuration of the game board unit 9010.

The relative positions of the first special electric role unit 9130, the normal electric role unit 9145, the second special electric role unit 9150, and the normal operation area 9126 arranged in the right area 107 can be freely changed as desired.

[11-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the ninth pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 338. Fig. 338 is an example of a block diagram showing the control circuit of the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 338, the ninth pachinko gaming machine, like the first pachinko gaming machine, is mainly composed of a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 300 that controls the presentation according to the progress of the game, a payout/launch control circuit 400, and a power supply circuit 450.

However, the ninth pachinko gaming machine differs from the first pachinko gaming machine in some respects in the configuration of the devices connected to the main control circuit 200 and the sub-control circuit 300. The configuration and layout of each are explained below.

[11-2-1. Main control circuit]
Compared to the first pachinko game machine, the main control circuit 200 has slightly different configurations in the normal power solenoid 9148, the first special power solenoid 9135, the second special power solenoid 9155, the V shutter solenoid 9160, the first start port switch 9121, the second start port switch 9141, the normal operation switch 9127, the first large prize port count switch 9132, the second large prize port count switch 9152, and the V prize port switch 9157 which are connected to the main control circuit 200.

(Solenoid for general purpose)
The normal power solenoid 9148 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the normal power shutter 9147. When the normal power solenoid 9148 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it moves the normal power shutter 9147 backward to open the second starting port 9140, and when it is not energized (OFF) by the main CPU 201, it moves the normal power shutter 9147 forward to close the second starting port 9140.

(First special solenoid)
The first special electric solenoid 9135 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the first special electric shutter 9134. When the first special electric solenoid 9135 is energized by the main CPU 201 (ON), it moves the first special electric shutter 9134 to the right to open the first large winning opening 9131, and when it is not energized by the main CPU 201 (OFF), it moves the first special electric shutter 9134 to the left to close the first large winning opening 9131.

(Second special solenoid)
The second special electric solenoid 9155 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the second special electric shutter 9154. When the main CPU 201 applies electricity to the second special electric solenoid 9155 (ON), the second special electric solenoid 9155 moves the second special electric shutter 9154 backward to open the second large winning opening 9151, and when the main CPU 201 does not apply electricity to the second special electric solenoid 9155 (OFF), the second special electric shutter 9154 advances forward to close the second large winning opening 9151.

(Solenoid for V-shutter)
The V shutter solenoid 9160 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the V shutter 9159. When the V shutter solenoid 9160 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it moves the V shutter 9159 backward to open the V winning opening 9156, and when it is not energized (OFF) by the main CPU 201, it moves the V shutter 9159 forward to close the V winning opening 9156.

(First start switch)
The first start hole switch 9121 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 9120.

When the first start hole switch 9121 detects the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 9120, the main CPU 201 determines that the first start condition is met and acquires start information for the first special symbol (random number value for determining a big win, random number value for a symbol, random number value for determining a reach, random number value for selecting a performance, etc.). The acquired start information for the first special symbol is stored in the special symbol determination memory area (0) or is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (first special symbol start memory area (1) to first special symbol start memory area (4) in order) of the main RAM 203 up to the "reserved number of first special symbols (for example, four)". When the start condition for the first special symbol (for example, the special electric role is not in operation, the variable display of the special symbol is not being performed, etc.) is met, it is used for the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the variable display of the first special symbol. In addition, when the first start hole switch 9121 detects the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 9120, the main CPU 201 instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of the prize balls for the first start hole (e.g., three game balls).

(Second start switch)
The second start hole switch 9141 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 9140.

When the second start hole switch 9141 detects the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 9140, the main CPU 201 determines that the second start condition is met and acquires start information for the second special symbol (random number value for determining a big win, random number value for a symbol, random number value for determining a reach, random number value for selecting a performance, etc.). The acquired start information for the second special symbol is stored in the special symbol determination memory area (0) or is stored in the second special symbol start memory area (second special symbol start memory area (1) to second special symbol start memory area (2) in order) of the main RAM 203 up to the "reserved number of second special symbols (e.g., two)." When the start condition for the second special symbol (e.g., the special electric role is not in operation, the variable display of the special symbol is not being performed, etc.) is met, the information is used for the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. In addition, when the second start hole switch 9141 detects the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 9140, the main CPU 201 instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of a prize ball (e.g., one game ball) for the second start hole.

In addition, in the embodiment, the winning judgment process for the first special pattern based on the start information of the first special pattern is also called the "lottery for the first special pattern," and the winning judgment process for the second special pattern based on the start information of the second special pattern is also called the "lottery for the second special pattern," and the lottery for the first special pattern and the lottery for the second special pattern are collectively called the "lottery for the special patterns."

(Normal operation switch)
The normal ball activation switch 9127 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the passage of a game ball into the normal ball activation area 9126.

When the normal symbol activation switch 9127 detects the passage of the game ball into the normal symbol activation area 9126, the main CPU 201 acquires normal symbol start information (random number value for determining whether the normal symbol is a hit, random number value for the normal symbol, etc.). The acquired normal symbol start information is stored in the normal symbol start memory area (normal symbol start memory area (1) to normal symbol start memory area (4) in order) of the main RAM 203 up to the "reserved number of normal symbols (for example, 4)". When the normal symbol determination start condition (for example, the normal electric role is not in operation, the normal symbol variable display is not being performed, etc.) is met, it is used for the normal symbol lottery (normal symbol hit determination process) and the normal symbol variable display. In addition, when the normal play operation switch 9127 detects the passage of a game ball into the normal play operation area 9126, the main CPU 201 instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of a prize ball (e.g., one game ball) for the normal play operation area.

(First prize slot count switch)
The first large prize opening count switch 9132 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of game balls into the first large prize opening 9131. When the first large prize opening count switch 9132 detects the entry of game balls into the first large prize opening 9131, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls that enter the first large prize opening 9131 per round, and instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of prize balls for the first large prize opening (e.g., 15 game balls).

(Second major prize slot count switch)
The second large prize opening count switch 9152 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of game balls into the second large prize opening 9151. When the second large prize opening count switch 9152 detects the entry of game balls into the second large prize opening 9151, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls that have entered the second large prize opening 9151 and instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of prize balls for the second large prize opening (e.g., 15 game balls).

(V prize entry switch)
The V winning hole switch 9157 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the passage of a game ball into the V winning hole 9156. When the V winning hole switch 9157 detects the entry of a game ball into the V winning hole 9156, the main CPU 201 performs control to transition to a big win game state. Note that even if the V winning hole switch 9157 detects the passage of a game ball into the V winning hole 9156, no prize balls are paid out.

[11-2-2. Sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 300, like the first pachinko game machine, is equipped with a sub-CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, a sound control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, a gimmick control circuit 307 and a command input port 308, but differs in that it further comprises a button control circuit 310 and a performance button 54.
(Button Control Circuit 310)
The button control circuit 310 is a circuit for driving the effect button 54. In other words, the button control circuit 310 is a circuit for changing the operation mode of the effect button 54 and vibrating the effect button 54. The button control circuit 310 drives the effect button 54 in response to a drive command from the sub-CPU 301.

The button control circuit 310 is also a circuit for inputting an operation signal related to a player's operation detected by the effect button 54. When the button control circuit 310 inputs an operation signal from the effect button 54, it outputs predetermined operation information to the sub-CPU 301.

[11-3. Basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the ninth pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Figures 339 to 350. The ninth pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function will be omitted below.

In the ninth pachinko gaming machine, although the probability variable control is not executed, a time-saving gaming state in which the time-saving control is executed and a normal gaming state in which the time-saving control is not executed are prepared, and the main CPU 201 is capable of progressing the game in the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. Note that, although the probability variable control is not executed in this ninth pachinko gaming machine, this is not essential, and it is also possible to execute the probability variable control by setting the probability variable flag on depending on the type of jackpot, etc., for example.

As described later, the ninth pachinko game machine has two time-saving game states, which are distinguished from the viewpoint of time-saving transition conditions (time-saving occurrence conditions): an "A time-saving game state" which is entered after the end of the jackpot game state triggered by a jackpot, and a "B time-saving game state" which is entered after the variable display count of the special symbol reaches a ceiling value without being triggered by a jackpot. The "A time-saving game state" is also distinguished from the viewpoint of time-saving termination conditions and the operation mode during the time-saving game state (operation pattern of the normal power shutter 9147), which are the "first time-saving game state", the "second time-saving game state" which is easier to transition to the next jackpot game state than the first time-saving game state, and the "third time-saving game state" which is practically guaranteed to transition to the next jackpot game state. In addition, in this embodiment, when there is no distinction between the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the third time-saving game state, they are simply referred to as "time-saving game states."

In addition, in this embodiment, in a typical normal game state (the first normal game state described below), left-handed hitting is generally considered to be the normal game mode, and in a time-saving game state, right-handed hitting is the normal game mode. The sub-CPU 301 displays the hitting method that is considered to be the normal game mode, for example, in the display area of the display device 7.

[11-3-1. Special symbol winning judgment table]
339 is an example of a special symbol winning determination table in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol winning determination table shown in FIG. 339 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table for determining whether a hit is a "big hit", "small hit" or "miss".

In the special symbol hit determination table, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a hit that is determined to be a "hit" or a "miss" and the corresponding hit/miss determination value data (hit determination value data, miss determination value data) is specified as the data used in the hit determination process of the first special symbol executed based on the ball entering the first starting hole 9120. In addition, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a hit that is determined to be a "hit", a "minor hit" or a "miss" and the corresponding hit/miss determination value data (hit determination value data, minor hit determination value data, miss determination value data) is specified as the data used in the hit determination process of the second special symbol executed based on the ball entering the second starting hole 9140. In addition, the total random number value of the random number value for determining a hit is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In other words, the random number value for determining a hit is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

As shown in FIG. 339, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 9120, the main CPU 201 judges the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol to be a "big hit" with a selection rate of about 1/231.6 based on the hit determination process of the first special symbol using the random number value for the hit determination of the first special symbol, and judges the result as a "miss" otherwise. Also, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 9140, the main CPU 201 judges the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol to be a "big hit" with a selection rate of about 1/231.6 based on the hit determination process of the second special symbol using the random number value for the hit determination of the second special symbol, and judges the result as a "small hit" with a selection rate of about 1/1.004, and judges the result as a "miss" otherwise.

The range (width) of the random number value that determines whether a "big hit" or a "small hit", i.e., the selection rate, is not limited to the above values and can be freely modified as appropriate. In particular, the process of determining whether a "miss" is determined for the second special symbol may be configured so that a "miss" is not determined. In other words, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 9140, either a "big hit" or a "small hit" is determined.

In addition, the system may be configured to determine a "small win" when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed, but if a "small win" is determined, it is preferable to determine a "small win" with a relatively low selection rate so that the determination made in the hit determination process for the second special symbol is more favorable than the determination made in the hit determination process for the first special symbol.

In addition, when the hit determination process for the first special symbol or the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed, a "time-saving hit" that transitions directly to the time-saving game state (C time-saving game state) without transitioning to the jackpot game state may be determined.

In addition, if the ninth pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, the selection rate of a big win and/or a small win may be set to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting. However, even if the ninth pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable that the selection rate of a time-saving win be set to a common probability for all settings.

In addition to or instead of changing the selection rate of a big win or a small win according to the set value, for example, the opening frequency or opening time of the V winning port 9156 may be changed for each set value to change the passing rate to the V winning port 9156, or the time-saving end condition (number of small wins, etc.) may be changed for each set value. In other words, by adopting one or more of the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the probability of a big win, the probability of a small win, the opening frequency of the V winning port 9156 (i.e. the operation frequency of the second special electric shutter 9154), the opening time, and the time-saving end condition, the expectation value controlled to the big win game state may be configured to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting.

[11-3-2. Special symbol determination table]
340 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 340 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is a table that determines the "special symbol selection symbol" and "symbol designation command" that determine the special symbol that will be stopped and displayed.

The "selected special symbol" is information for determining the special symbol that will be displayed when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit, and the "symbol designation command" is a command sent to the sub-control circuit 300 to display a decorative symbol that corresponds to the special symbol that will be displayed in the display area of the display device 7.

The special symbol determination table specifies the type of special symbol, the winning/losing determination value data described above, and the symbol random number value of the special symbol obtained when the game ball enters the first starting hole 9120 or the second starting hole 9140 in association with the "special symbol selection symbol" and the "symbol designation command." The symbol random number value of the special symbol is selected, for example, from 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 340, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any of 0 to 9, the main CPU 201 determines "z1" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA1" as the symbol designation command. If the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any of 10 to 54, the main CPU 201 determines "z2" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA2" as the symbol designation command. Also, if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any of 55 to 99, the main CPU 201 determines "z3" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA3" as the symbol designation command.

When jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, regardless of the value of the symbol random number value for the special symbol, the main CPU 201 determines "z4" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

When small win determination value data is obtained as a result of the win determination process for the second special symbol, if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any of 0 to 9, the main CPU 201 determines "z5" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA5" as the symbol designation command. Also, if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any of 10 to 19, the main CPU 201 determines "z6" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA6" as the symbol designation command. Also, if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any of 20 to 99, the main CPU 201 determines "z7" as the selected symbol for the special symbol and determines "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

In this way, in this embodiment, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the random number value of the special symbol in the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 340 is configured so that the relationship of the selection rate of the special symbol is established as "z1" < "z2" = "z3". Note that the selection rate of the special symbol determined when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol may be configured to only be two types, "z1" and "z2", so that the relationship of the selection rate of "z1" < "z2" is established.

In addition, when small win determination value data is obtained as a result of the win determination process for the second special symbol, the special symbol random number value in the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 340 is configured so that the relationship of the selection rate of the special symbol is "z5+z6" < "z7". It is also possible to configure so that the relationship of the selection rate of the special symbol is "z5" < "z6" < "z7".

Although the explanation of the ninth pachinko gaming machine is omitted, the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 stores a special symbol stop mode determination table equivalent to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) explained in the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table is a table that is referenced when determining the stop mode of the special symbol displayed in the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164 (see FIG. 338) when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, according to the "selected special symbol". In addition, the first special symbol display section 163 and the second special symbol display section 164 display the stop mode of a big win, a small win, or a miss, based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. In addition, a decorative symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative symbol stop mode determination table described in the first pachinko game machine (see FIG. 12(B)) is also stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300.

The range of the random number value of the special pattern that determines the "selected special pattern", i.e., the selection rate, is not limited to the above values and can be freely changed as needed.

[11-3-3. Jackpot Type Determination Table]
341 is an example of a big win type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the ninth pachinko gaming machine. The big win type determination table shown in FIG. 341 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

The jackpot type determination table is a table that determines the operation content of the jackpot game state, and is a table that determines the "opening mode of the jackpot game state."

As shown in FIG. 341, the jackpot type determination table associates the "opening mode of the jackpot game state" with the selected special symbol.

The "opening mode of the jackpot game state" specifies the maximum number of rounds of the first large prize opening 9131 that is opened during the jackpot game state, and the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 9131. The opening pattern of the first large prize opening 9131 specifies the OP waiting time (opening time) which is the waiting state for the start of the jackpot game state, the maximum opening time of each round, the closing time of each round, the ED waiting time (ending time), etc. Note that the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 9131 may specify a different maximum opening time for each round, or a different closing time (round interval time) for each round. Furthermore, the number of openings and the opening time may be specified so that the first large prize opening 6131 is opened and closed multiple times per round.

Here, the "opening mode of the big win game state" corresponding to the "selected special pattern z5-7" determined when the small win judgment value data of the second special pattern is obtained is the opening mode when the game ball that entered the second large winning opening 9151 opened in the small win game state passes through the second route of the V winning opening 9156 and transitions to the big win game state. When transitioning to the big win game state via this second route, the opening of the second large winning opening 9151 in the small win game state is regarded as the first round, and from the second round onwards, the big win game state in which the first large winning opening 9131 is opened is started. Note that if the game ball that entered the second large winning opening 9151 opened in the small win game state does not pass through the V winning opening 9156, the big win game state is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 341, according to the jackpot type determination table, when the jackpot determination value data for the first special symbol is obtained, the "special symbol selection symbols z1-3" are determined to have the first number of rounds (8 rounds) as the maximum number of rounds. Note that a different maximum number of rounds may be determined depending on the "special symbol selection symbols z1-3".

Also, as shown in FIG. 341, according to the big win type determination table, when the "special pattern selection pattern z5-7" is determined when the small win determination value data of the second special pattern is obtained, the maximum number of rounds is determined to be the third number of rounds (10 rounds) or a fourth number of rounds (4 rounds) less than the third number of rounds, depending on the selected special pattern. In particular, according to the special pattern determination table shown in FIG. 340 above, the selected special pattern is configured so that the relational equation of the selection rate of "z5+z6"<"z7" is established, so that the fourth number of rounds (4 rounds) is more likely to be determined than the third number of rounds (10 rounds).

When the special symbol is selected as z5 to z7, a different number of rounds other than 10 rounds or 4 rounds may be determined, or the same maximum number of rounds may be determined for all of them.

In addition, depending on the special symbol selected, either the OP waiting time (opening time) or the ED waiting time (ending time) in the opening pattern of the first large winning opening 9131 may be configured to be different.

[11-3-4. Small Win Type Determination Table]
342 is an example of a small win type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the ninth pachinko gaming machine. The small win type determination table shown in FIG. 342 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

The small win type determination table is a table that determines the operation content of the small win game state, and is a table that determines the "opening mode of the small win game state."

As shown in FIG. 342, the small win type determination table associates the "opening mode of the small win game state" with the selected special pattern.

The "opening mode of the small win game state" specifies the maximum number of times the second large winning opening 9151 is opened during the small win game state, the opening pattern of the second large winning opening 9151, and the opening pattern of the V winning opening 9156. The opening pattern of the second large winning opening 9151 specifies the OP waiting time (opening time) which is the waiting state for the start of the small win game state, the maximum opening time for each number, the closing time for each number, the ED waiting time (ending time), etc. Furthermore, the opening pattern of the V winning opening 9156 specifies the opening waiting time, opening time, etc.

When the small win game state starts, the OP waiting time (opening time) in the opening pattern of the second large winning opening 9151 and the opening waiting time in the opening pattern of the V winning opening 9156 are timed simultaneously, and when the second large winning opening 9151 is open, the V winning opening 9156 is also open. Therefore, when the small win game state is performed, it is possible (or easy) for the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 9156. Note that the opening pattern of the V winning opening 9156 may be specified as multiple opening and closing times so that the V winning opening 9156 is opened and closed multiple times, as in the opening pattern of the second large winning opening 9151.

The small win type determination table may be configured so that at least one of the OP waiting time (opening time), the maximum opening time for each number of times, the closing time for each number of times, and the ED waiting time (ending time) in the opening pattern of the second large winning port 9151, and the opening waiting time, opening time, and closing time in the opening pattern of the V winning port 9156 are different depending on the special pattern selected.

In particular, the small win type determination table may be configured to vary the opening pattern of the V winning hole 9156 depending on the selected special symbol, and to determine a favorable operating mode in which it is possible (or easy) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 9156 and an unfavorable operating mode in which it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 9156.

In addition, the maximum opening time for one round in the big win game state (e.g., 0.1 seconds) is set shorter than the maximum opening time for one round in the big win game state (e.g., 28 seconds), so that in the big win game state, the first large prize winning opening 9131 opens in a favorable "first opening mode," and in the small win game state, the second large prize winning opening 9151 opens in a less favorable "second opening mode" than the first opening mode.

[11-3-5. Game status related setting table]
Fig. 343 is an example of a game state related setting table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the ninth pachinko gaming machine. The game state related setting table shown in Fig. 343 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

The game state related setting table is a table for setting the game state after the big win game state ends.

As shown in FIG. 343, the game state related setting table associates the "game state setting" consisting of the "state flag," "normal power operation pattern," and "A time-saving end condition" based on the game state when the selected special symbol is determined to be a big hit or a small hit (game state at the time of winning).

The "state flag" is a flag that indicates the type of game state, and is stored in a specified memory area of the main RAM 203. A state flag of 0 indicates a "normal game state", a state flag of 1 indicates an "A time-shortened game state", and a state flag of 2 indicates a "B time-shortened game state". Note that in this embodiment, the C time-shortened game state is not executed, but if the C time-shortened game state is executable, a state flag of 3 indicates a "C time-shortened game state".

The "normal power operation pattern" is information that defines the opening pattern of the second starting port 9140, and is stored in a specified memory area of the main RAM 203. Normal power operation pattern = 00 indicates a state in which the "long opening pattern" described below is difficult to determine and the "short opening pattern" described below is likely to be determined, normal power operation pattern = 01 indicates a state in which the "long opening pattern" and the "short opening pattern" are determined, and normal power operation pattern = 02 indicates a state in which the "long opening pattern" is more likely to be determined and the "short opening pattern" is more difficult to determine than when normal power operation pattern = 01.

In addition, in this embodiment, the "normal power operation pattern" has a corresponding relationship with the "status flag (game state)", and is configured so that when the status flag indicating the normal game state is 0, the normal power operation pattern is set to 00, when the status flag indicating the A time-saving game state is 1, the normal power operation pattern is set to 01 or 02, and when the status flag indicating the B time-saving game state is 2, the normal power operation pattern is set to 02.

The "A time-saving end condition" is the end condition for the A time-saving game state, and the "variable number of times that normal symbols are displayed" is set as the end condition for the number of times that the time-saving game state is to be played. When the end condition for the "variable number of times that normal symbols are displayed" is met, the A time-saving game state ends and the game transitions to the normal game state.

In this embodiment, the variable number of times the normal symbol is displayed is set as the A time-saving end condition, but in addition to the end condition of "the variable number of times the normal symbol is displayed," the "A time-saving end condition" may be set from multiple end conditions such as "the number of times a small jackpot is won" and "the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed," and when any of the end conditions is met, the A time-saving game state ends and the game transitions to the normal game state. This also applies to the B time-saving end condition described below.

When setting an end condition for the "variable number of times special symbols are displayed" in addition to the end condition for the "variable number of times regular symbols are displayed" as the A time-saving end condition or the B time-saving end condition, it is preferable to set the end condition for the "variable number of times special symbols are displayed" to a variable number of times that is less than the variable number of times that is set as the end condition for the "variable number of times regular symbols are displayed". For example, when the end condition for the "variable number of times regular symbols are displayed" is set to 50 times, it is preferable to set the end condition for the "variable number of times special symbols are displayed" to a total variable number of times that the first special symbols and the second special symbols are displayed = 10 times, or to set the end condition to be satisfied when either the variable number of times that the first special symbols are displayed = 5 times or the variable number of times that the second special symbols are displayed = 5 times.

According to the game state related setting table shown in FIG. 343, when the variable display number of normal symbols in the A time-saving end condition is set to 100 times, which is the "first time-saving number," depending on the selected symbol of the special symbol, the status flag is set to 1 and the normal power operation pattern is set to 01, and when the variable display number of normal symbols in the A time-saving end condition is set to 120 times, which is the "second time-saving number," or 10,000 times, which is the "third time-saving number," the status flag is set to 1 and the normal power operation pattern is set to 02.

In this embodiment, the time-saving game state in which the status flag = 1, normal power operation pattern = 01, and the first time-saving number of times (100 times) are set is called the "first time-saving game state." In addition, the time-saving game state in which the status flag = 1, normal power operation pattern = 02, and the second time-saving number of times (120 times) are set is called the "second time-saving game state" which is easier to transition to the next jackpot game state than the first time-saving game state. In addition, the time-saving game state in which the status flag = 1, normal power operation pattern = 02, and the third time-saving number of times (10,000 times) are set is called the "third time-saving game state" which is essentially guaranteed to transition to the next jackpot game state.

In this embodiment, the number of times of time-saving (the number of times of variable display of normal symbols) of the A time-saving end condition in the first time-saving game state is configured to be set to 100 times as the first time-saving number, but the first time-saving number can be freely changed in design as needed. In addition, the number of times of variable display of normal symbols of the A time-saving end condition in the second time-saving game state is configured to be set to 120 times as the second time-saving number, but as long as the normal power operation pattern = 01 is set in the first time-saving game state and the normal power operation pattern = 02 is set in the second time-saving game state, the second time-saving number can be freely changed in design as needed as long as it is equal to or greater than the first time-saving number. Furthermore, the number of times of variable display of normal symbols of the A time-saving end condition in the third time-saving game state is configured to be set to 10,000 times as the third time-saving number, but the third time-saving number can be freely changed in design as needed as long as it is a number that practically guarantees a transition to the next big win game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the normal power operation pattern is provided, but the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the third time-saving game state may be provided only from the difference in the number of time-saving times (the number of times that the normal pattern is variably displayed) of the A time-saving end condition, without providing the normal power operation pattern. In this case, the first time-saving number of times (e.g., 50 times) < the second time-saving number of times (e.g., 100 times) < the third time-saving number of times (e.g., 10,000 times).

According to the game state related setting table shown in FIG. 343, after the jackpot game state resulting from the drawing of the first special symbol ends, the game state is configured to transition to a "first time-shortened game state" or a "second time-shortened game state" depending on the selected special symbol, and after the jackpot game state resulting from the drawing of the second special symbol ends, the game state is configured to transition to a "second time-shortened game state" or a "third time-shortened game state" depending on the selected special symbol.

In this embodiment, after the end of the jackpot game state due to the drawing of the second special symbol, the game state is configured to transition to the "second time-shortened game state" at a first rate that is relatively higher than after the end of the jackpot game state due to the drawing of the first special symbol. After the end of the jackpot game state due to the drawing of the second special symbol, the game state is configured to transition to the "third time-shortened game state" at a second rate that is relatively higher than after the end of the jackpot game state due to the drawing of the first special symbol. After the end of the jackpot game state due to the drawing of the second special symbol, the game state is configured to transition to the "second time-shortened game state" at a third rate that is relatively higher than the "third time-shortened game state". Note that the above first rate, second rate, and third rate do not exclude the idea that the rates to be compared are 0% and 100%.

In this embodiment, after the jackpot game state resulting from the drawing of the first special symbol ends, the game is configured to transition to the "first time-shortened game state" or the "second time-shortened game state". However, after the jackpot game state resulting from the drawing of the first special symbol ends, the game may be configured to transition to (a) only the "first time-shortened game state", (b) the "first time-shortened game state" or the "normal game state", (c) the "first time-shortened game state" or the "third time-shortened game state", (d) the "first time-shortened game state", "normal game state" or the "second time-shortened game state", (e) the "first time-shortened game state", "normal game state" or the "third time-shortened game state", (f) the "first time-shortened game state", "second time-shortened game state" or the "third time-shortened game state", (g) the "first time-shortened game state", "normal game state", "second time-shortened game state" or the "third time-shortened game state".

Furthermore, in this embodiment, after the jackpot game state resulting from the lottery for the second special symbol ends, the game state is configured to transition to a "second time-shortened game state" or a "third time-shortened game state", but the game state may be configured to transition to (a) only the "second time-shortened game state", (b) the "second time-shortened game state" or the "normal game state", (c) the "second time-shortened game state" or the "first time-shortened game state", (d) the "second time-shortened game state", "normal game state" or the "first time-shortened game state", (e) the "second time-shortened game state", "normal game state" or the "third time-shortened game state", (f) the "second time-shortened game state", "first time-shortened game state" or the "third time-shortened game state", or (g) the "second time-shortened game state", "normal game state", "first time-shortened game state" or the "third time-shortened game state". However, even if it is possible to transition to various game states as described above, it is desirable to maintain the relationship between the first ratio, second ratio, and third ratio described above.

In this embodiment, the game state related setting table is configured so that the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is set to the same state when the "game state at the time of winning is the normal game state" and when the "game state at the time of winning is the time-saving game state", but the game state after the end of the jackpot game state may be configured to differ depending on the game state at the time of winning.

[11-3-6. Special symbol variation pattern table]
344 and 345 are examples of a variation pattern table of special symbols of the ninth pachinko game machine. FIG. 344 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in a normal game state of the ninth pachinko game machine, and FIG. 345 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in a time-saving game state of the ninth pachinko game machine. The variation pattern tables of special symbols shown in FIG. 344 and FIG. 345 are stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the ninth pachinko game machine.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern table is a table that determines the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol and the fluctuation display time of the special symbol. "Special symbol fluctuation pattern" is information that defines the fluctuation mode of the special symbol, and at least the fluctuation display time of the special symbol is defined.

The main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table of either FIG. 344 or FIG. 345 depending on the game status, etc., and determines the special symbol variation pattern based on the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol winning determination process, the selected special symbol, etc., by referring to the determined special symbol variation pattern table. The main CPU 201 then determines the special symbol variation display time based on the determined special symbol variation pattern.

When the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern, it transmits a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined special symbol variation pattern to the sub-CPU 301. The sub-CPU 301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effects output from the speaker 32 based on the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201. The special symbol variation pattern command is configured to be able to distinguish whether it is a first special symbol variation pattern triggered by a game ball entering the first starting hole 9120 or a second special symbol variation pattern triggered by a game ball entering the second starting hole 9140, and when distinguishing between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is also called the first special symbol variation pattern command or the second special symbol variation pattern command.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in normal game state)
The special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 344 is a special symbol variation pattern table that is determined during normal game play.

Here, in the normal game mode, left-handed shots are performed as the regular game mode, so essentially a game ball can enter the first starting hole 9120, but it is impossible (or difficult) for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 9140. However, immediately after the time-saving game mode ends and transitions to the normal game mode, the reserved number of second special symbols stored in the time-saving game mode will be consumed.

In this embodiment, when distinguishing between normal game states in detail, the normal game state during the control period of the first special symbol, which is performed based on the start information of the first special symbol, is called the "first normal game state", and the normal game state during the control period of the second special symbol, which is performed based on the start information of the second special symbol (the normal game state during the control period of the second special symbol, which is performed when the variable display number of the normal symbol is the final time-saving number in the time-saving game state, the second start hole 9140 is opened based on the lottery of the normal symbol, and a game ball enters the second start hole 9140) is called the "second normal game state".

As shown in FIG. 344, according to the special symbol variation pattern table T1, in the first normal game state (first special symbol), the lottery result (win/lose) of the special symbol, the selected special symbol, the random number value for reach determination, the random number value for effect selection, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the variation display time of the special symbol are associated with each other. Note that the random number value for reach determination is selected from, for example, 0-249 (250 types), and the random number value for effect selection is selected from, for example, 0-99 (100 types). However, the range of the generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In addition, in the second normal game state (second special symbol), the lottery result (win or lose) of the special symbol, the selected special symbol, the number of reserved second special symbols when the start condition of the second special symbol is met, the change pattern of the special symbol, and the change display time of the special symbol are associated with each other, and in the second normal game state (second special symbol), different change patterns of the special symbol and the change display time of the special symbol can be determined according to the number of reserved second special symbols when the start condition of the second special symbol is met.

Here, the "start condition of the second special symbol" specifically means that, at least under the condition that the special electric device is not operating (not in a big win game state or a small win game state) and the variable display of the second special symbol is not being performed, the start information of the second special symbol is stored in either the special symbol determination memory area (0) or the second special symbol start memory area (1) to the second special symbol start memory area (2) of the main RAM 203.

The "number of reserved second special symbols when the start condition for the second special symbol is satisfied" refers to the number of reserved second special symbols immediately before the start information for the second special symbol stored in the second special symbol start memory area (1) to the second special symbol start memory area (2) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special symbol determination memory area (0).

For example, when three game balls enter the second start hole 9140 in succession under conditions that are not a big win or small win game state and the variable display of the second special symbol is not being performed, the start information of the second special symbol based on the first game ball that entered the second start hole 9140 is stored in the special symbol determination memory area (0), and the start condition of the second special symbol is immediately established, so that the "number of reserved second special symbols when the start condition of the second special symbol is established" = 0. Also, the start information of the second special symbol based on the second game ball that entered the second start hole 9140 is stored in the second special symbol start memory area (1), and the start information of the second special symbol based on the third game ball that entered the second start hole 9140 is stored in the second special symbol start memory area (2). Then, when the start condition of the second special symbol is established for the start information of the second special symbol based on the second game ball, the start information of the second special symbol is stored up to the second special symbol start memory area (2), so the number of reserved second special symbols just before being shifted to the special symbol determination memory area (0) is 2, and the "number of reserved second special symbols when the start condition of the second special symbol is established" = 2. Also, when the start condition of the second special symbol is established for the start information of the second special symbol based on the third game ball, the start information of the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol start memory area (1), so the number of reserved second special symbols just before being shifted to the special symbol determination memory area (0) is 1, and the "number of reserved second special symbols when the start condition of the second special symbol is established" = 1.

In this embodiment, in the case of the second normal game state (second special symbol), when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, if the number of reserved second special symbols = 0 when the start condition for the second special symbol is met, a "first special symbol change pattern (0AH)" can be determined in which a "BONUS entry effect" that notifies the player of entry into the BONUS state described below is executed, and if the number of reserved second special symbols > 0 when the start condition for the second special symbol is met, a "second special symbol change pattern (1AH)" can be determined in which a "BONUS continuation effect" in which the BONUS effect executed in the big hit game state and the small hit game state continues is executed.

In addition, the "first variable display time (e.g., 10 seconds)" associated with the first special symbol variable pattern (0AH) for executing the BONUS entry performance is set longer than the average arrival time (e.g., 5 seconds; hereinafter also referred to as the "normal electric average arrival time") for the game ball launched from the launching device 6 to reach the normal electric role unit 9145 (second starting port 9140).
Furthermore, the above-mentioned "first variable display time (e.g., 10 seconds)" is set to be longer than the average arrival time (e.g., 6 seconds) for the game ball launched from the launching device 6 to reach the second special electric gimmick unit 9150 (second large winning port 9151).

In addition, the "second variable display time (e.g., 1 second)" associated with the variable pattern (1AH) of the second special symbol in which the BONUS continuation performance is executed is set to be shorter than the "normal power average arrival time."
Furthermore, the above-mentioned "second variable display time (e.g., 1 second)" is set so that the variable display time of the special pattern is less than the OP waiting time (opening time, e.g., 2 seconds) of the jackpot game state and the OP waiting time (opening time, e.g., 2 seconds) of the small jackpot game state, in order to make it appear as if multiple jackpot game states or small jackpot game states are continuing.

In this way, when the start condition for the second special pattern is met and the number of reserved second special patterns = 0, the variable display time of the second special pattern is set longer than the "normal power average arrival time", and when the start condition for the second special pattern is met and the number of reserved second special patterns > 0, the variable display time of the second special pattern is set shorter than the "normal power average arrival time". Therefore, depending on the number of reserved second special patterns when the start condition for the second special pattern is met, the ball entry rate at which the game balls launched from the launching device 6 enter the normal electric role unit 9145 (second starting hole 9140) can be varied, and balls according to the design value can be provided to the player.

In addition, if the number of reserved second special symbols is greater than 0 when the start condition for the second special symbol is met, the variable display time of the second special symbol is set to be short. When multiple (up to three) jackpot game states are played consecutively in the BONUS state described below, the variable display time of the second special symbol played between the multiple jackpot game states is shortened, making it possible to make the multiple jackpot game states appear seamless (as if they were a group of jackpot game states).

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in time-saving game mode)
The special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 345 is a special symbol variation pattern table that is determined during the time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 345, the special pattern change pattern table J1 associates the type of special pattern, the lottery result (win or lose) of the special pattern, the selected special pattern, the number of second special patterns reserved when the start condition of the second special pattern is met, the change pattern of the special pattern, and the change display time of the special pattern.

Here, in the time-saving game state, a right-handed hit is performed as a regular game mode, and it is essentially impossible (or difficult) for a game ball to enter the first starting hole 9120, but it is possible for a game ball to enter the first starting hole 9120 by a left-handed hit as an irregular game mode (that is disadvantageous to the player) in the time-saving game state. For this reason, the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 345 corresponds to the variation pattern of the special symbol that is determined when a left-handed hit is performed as an irregular game mode in the time-saving game state and the game ball enters the first starting hole 9120.

In the special pattern fluctuation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 345, when the type of special pattern is the second special pattern, similarly to the special pattern fluctuation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 344, the "first special pattern fluctuation pattern (0AH)" and the "second special pattern fluctuation pattern (1AH)" can be determined by referring to the number of reserved second special patterns when the start condition of the second special pattern is satisfied.

[11-3-7. Special symbol pre-reading related data]
FIG. 346 is an example of data related to the look-ahead of the special symbol in the ninth pachinko game machine. Here, "look-ahead" refers to analyzing the start information of the special symbol acquired before the lottery of the special symbol when the game ball enters the first start hole 9120 or the second start hole 9140 and the main control circuit 200 (main CPU 201) acquires the start information of the special symbol (random number value for determining a big win, random number value for a symbol, random number value for determining a reach, random number value for selecting a performance, etc.). The analyzed information (look-ahead command) is then transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 (sub-CPU 301), and the "look-ahead performance" can be executed based on the look-ahead command.

Figure 346 (a) is a look-ahead execution correspondence table that determines whether or not to perform look-ahead depending on the game status as data related to look-ahead of special patterns.

As shown in FIG. 346(a), in the normal game state, both pre-reading based on the start information of the first special symbol and pre-reading based on the start information of the second special symbol can be performed. In the time-saving game state, the big win game state, and the small win game state, only pre-reading based on the start information of the second special symbol can be performed.

Figure 346 (b) shows an example of the configuration of a look-ahead command based on the analyzed information after analyzing the start information for a special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 346(b), the look-ahead command is composed of a "special symbol type" (either the first special symbol or the second special symbol) and multiple "parameters 1 to 3."

"Parameter 1" is the winning/losing information that is analyzed in advance to determine whether it is a big win, a small win, or a miss based on a random number value for determining a big win, and Figure 346 (c) is an example of a setting table for parameter 1.

"Parameter 2" is pattern information that is obtained by analyzing in advance the special pattern (selected pattern) that will be displayed when the reel stops, based on the random number value for determining a jackpot and the random number value for the pattern. Figure 346 (d) is an example of a setting table for parameter 2.

"Parameter 3" is fluctuation information that analyzes the fluctuation pattern of the special symbols in advance based on the random number value for determining a jackpot, the random number value for determining a reach, and the random number value for selecting a performance. Figure 346 (e) is an example of a setting table for parameter 3.

In this embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol from when the start information of the special symbol is read ahead until the special symbol is drawn based on the start information of the special symbol is also called "pre-variation." Also, the variable display of the special symbol when the special symbol is drawn based on the start information of the special symbol is also called "the said variation."

[11-3-8. Normal symbol winning judgment table]
Fig. 347 is an example of a winning judgment table for normal symbols in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. The winning judgment table for normal symbols shown in Fig. 347 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table referenced in the normal symbol hit determination process, and is a table referenced when determining by lottery whether a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss" is made based on the normal symbol hit determination random number value obtained when the game ball passes through the normal symbol operation area 9126.

The winning judgment table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 347 specifies the range (width) of the random number value for winning judgment of normal symbols and the winning/losing judgment value data for normal symbols ("normal symbol win" or "normal symbol miss") in correspondence with each other. Note that the random number value for winning judgment of normal symbols is obtained in the range of 0 to 65535 (65536 types), for example. However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the winning/losing determination table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 347, and determines the winning/losing determination value data for normal symbols based on the range (width) of the random number value for normal symbol winning determination.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 refers to the winning judgment table for the normal pattern shown in FIG. 347, and when the acquired random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern is any value between 0 and 956, it judges it as a "normal pattern winning", and determines the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal pattern as the "normal pattern winning/losing judgment value data". Therefore, in this embodiment, the "normal pattern winning" is determined with a selection rate of approximately 1/68.5. Also, when the acquired random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern is 957 to 65535, the main CPU 201 judges it as a "normal pattern losing", and determines the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal pattern as the "normal pattern losing judgment value data".

The range (width) of the random number value for determining whether a normal pattern is a hit or a miss, i.e., the selection rate, is not limited to the above values and can be freely designed and modified as appropriate.

In addition, in this embodiment, the selection rate for "normal symbol hits" is set to the same (the winning probability for normal symbol hits is the same) regardless of whether the game state is normal game state or time-saving game state, but by varying the opening pattern of the second start hole 9140 depending on the game state (normal power operation pattern) as described below, the degree of profit given to the player is varied depending on the game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" is set to the same regardless of whether the game state is the normal game state or the time-saving game state, but the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" may be made different depending on the game state. When making the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" different depending on the game state, it is desirable to configure it so that the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" in the time-saving game state is higher than the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" in the normal game state. Furthermore, the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" may be made different depending on the type of game state, time-saving game state A and time-saving game state B.

[11-3-9. Normal symbol determination table]
348 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 348 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol determination table is a table that is referenced when selecting a "selected normal symbol" that determines the normal symbol stopping pattern based on the normal symbol winning/losing determination value data described above and the normal symbol random number value obtained when the game ball passes through the normal symbol operation area 9126.

The normal pattern determination table shown in FIG. 348 specifies the above-mentioned normal pattern winning/losing determination value data ("normal pattern winning determination value data" or "normal pattern losing determination value data"), the normal pattern random number value, and the selected normal pattern, in correspondence with each other. Note that the normal pattern random number value is obtained, for example, from 0 to 100 (101 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal pattern determination table shown in FIG. 348 and determines the selected normal pattern based on the normal pattern hit determination value data and the pattern random number value of the normal pattern.

According to the normal pattern determination table shown in FIG. 348, when normal pattern winning determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal pattern winning determination process, for example, the selected normal pattern is selected as follows.

For example, when normal symbol winning judgment value data is obtained, the main CPU 201 selects "f1" as the selected normal symbol if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 0 and 49, and selects "f2" as the selected normal symbol if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 50 and 99. Also, when normal symbol losing judgment value data is obtained, the main CPU 201 selects "f3" as the selected normal symbol, regardless of the symbol random number value of the normal symbol.

The range (width) of the random number value of the normal pattern from which the "selected normal pattern" is selected, i.e., the selection rate, is not limited to the above value and can be freely designed and modified as appropriate.

In particular, in this embodiment, unlike the first pachinko gaming machine, the selected normal symbol is selected based on the winning/losing judgment value data for the normal symbol (the result of the winning/losing judgment process for the normal symbol) and the random number value for the normal symbol, regardless of the gaming state. Note that, like the first pachinko gaming machine, the selected normal symbol may be selected depending on the gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the winning judgment table for the normal pattern (see FIG. 347) to determine the winning/losing judgment value data for the normal pattern based on the acquired random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern, and then refers to the normal pattern judgment table (see FIG. 348) to determine the selected pattern for the normal pattern based on the pattern random number value for the normal pattern, but is not limited to this. For example, the winning/losing judgment value data for the normal pattern (whether the normal pattern is winning or losing) and the selected pattern for the normal pattern may be determined together based on the acquired random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern and the pattern random number value for the normal pattern.

[11-3-10. Second starting hole opening pattern determination table]
Fig. 349 is an example of a second start hole opening pattern determination table in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. The second start hole opening pattern determination table shown in Fig. 349 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

When it is determined that a normal symbol has been hit, the second start hole opening pattern determination table is referenced when determining the opening pattern of the second start hole 9140 as the operation mode of the normal power shutter 9147 according to the game state (normal power operation pattern) and the selected normal symbol.

The second start hole opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. 349 specifies the game state (normal power operation pattern), the selected normal symbol, and the opening pattern of the second start hole 9140 in correspondence with each other.

The "second start port opening pattern" is composed of a "first opening time" when the second start port 9140 is in the first open state, a "first wait time" when the second start port 9140 is in the first closed state, a "second opening time" when the second start port 9140 is in the second open state, a "second wait time" when the second start port 9140 is in the second closed state, and an "ending time" that closes the second start port 9140 and ends the operation of the normal power shutter 9147.

The main CPU 201 refers to the second start hole opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. 349 and determines the opening pattern of the second start hole 9140 based on the game state (normal power operation pattern) and the selected normal pattern. When the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern of the second start hole 9140, it transmits to the sub-CPU 301 a second start hole opening pattern command corresponding to the determined opening pattern of the second start hole 9140.

In this embodiment, there are two types of opening patterns for the second starting port: a disadvantageous "short opening pattern (91H01H)" in which the opening time of the second starting port 9140 is short, and an advantageous "long opening pattern (91H02H)" in which the opening time of the second starting port 9140 is long. Note that the second starting port may be configured to have three or more opening patterns.

In particular, in this embodiment, the opening time of the "short opening pattern (91H01H)" is set to an extremely short time (e.g., 0.072 seconds) during which, even if a game ball rolling on the upper plate 9147U of the normal power shutter 9147 falls toward the lower plate 9147D, the lower plate 9147D immediately protrudes, and the game ball that fell from the upper plate 9147U rolls on the lower plate 9147D (is caught by the lower plate 9147D). For this reason, even if a normal pattern is determined to be a hit, when the "short opening pattern (91H01H)" is performed, it becomes impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 9140, and it is essentially treated as a miss.

The opening time of the "long opening pattern (91H02H)" is set to a long time (e.g., 5.4 seconds) so that even if a game ball rolling on the upper panel 9147U of the normal power shutter 9147 falls toward the lower panel 9147D, the lower panel 9147D does not protrude and the game ball passes through the lower panel 9147D, allowing it to enter the second starting hole 9140.

According to the second start hole opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. 349, when the normal power operation pattern associated with the normal game state is 00, the "short opening pattern (91H01H)" is determined as the second start hole opening pattern even when the selected normal pattern is "f1" or when the selected normal pattern is "f2" (the "long opening pattern (91H02H)" is not determined).

In addition, when the normal power operation pattern associated with the first normal game state is 01, when the selected normal symbol is "f1", the "short opening pattern (91H01H)" is determined as the opening pattern for the second starting hole, and when the selected normal symbol is "f2", the "long opening pattern (91H02H)" is determined as the opening pattern for the second starting hole.

In addition, when the normal power operation pattern associated with the second normal game state and the third normal game state is 02, the "long opening pattern (91H02H)" is determined as the opening pattern for the second starting hole when the selected normal symbol is "f1" or when the selected normal symbol is "f2."

For this reason, normal power operation pattern = 00 indicates a state in which the "long opening pattern" is difficult to determine and the "short opening pattern" is likely to be determined, normal power operation pattern = 01 indicates a state in which both the "long opening pattern" and the "short opening pattern" are determined, and normal power operation pattern = 02 indicates a state in which the "long opening pattern" is more likely to be determined and the "short opening pattern" is more difficult to determine than when normal power operation pattern = 01.

In addition, in the right column of the opening pattern determination table for the second starting hole shown in Figure 349, the "long opening probability" at which the "long opening pattern" is executed is shown for reference, which is calculated by adding up the "random number value for determining whether a normal pattern is a hit (see Figure 347)" and the "pattern random number value for a normal pattern (see Figure 348)". In this embodiment, when the normal power operation pattern = 00, the normal pattern hit is about 1/68.5, but the long opening pattern is never determined, so the "long opening probability" is 0. In addition, when the normal power operation pattern = 01, the normal pattern hit is about 1/68.5, and the selection rate of the selected pattern "f2" of the normal pattern that determines the long opening pattern is 51/101, so the "long opening probability" is about 1/135.6. Also, when the normal power operation pattern is 01, the normal symbol hit rate is approximately 1/68.5, and the long opening pattern is determined for all selected normal symbols (101/101), so the "long opening probability" is approximately 1/68.5.

In addition, in this embodiment, the specified number for normal power is set to three, and even if the opening pattern of any of the second start ports is determined and the second start port 9140 is open, when three game balls enter the second start port 9140, the opening pattern of that second start port ends (the second start port 9140 closes). In other words, only three game balls can enter the second start port 9140 for one normal pattern hit, and even if there is 5,400 ms of remaining opening time in the time-saving game state, the second start port 9140 will close.

[11-3-11. Normal pattern variation table]
FIG. 350 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 350 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern table is a table that determines the normal symbol fluctuation pattern and the normal symbol fluctuation display time. "Normal symbol fluctuation pattern" is information that defines the normal symbol fluctuation mode, and at least the normal symbol fluctuation display time is defined.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal pattern variation pattern table and determines the normal pattern variation pattern based on the game state, the selected normal pattern, the current opening pattern of the second start hole, the previous opening pattern of the second start hole, the random number value for normal pattern performance, and the number of reserved normal patterns.The main CPU 201 then determines the normal pattern variation display time based on the determined normal pattern variation pattern.In addition, when the main CPU 201 determines the normal pattern variation pattern, it transmits a normal pattern variation pattern command corresponding to the determined normal pattern variation pattern to the sub CPU 301.

The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 350 corresponds to the game state, the selected normal symbol, the current opening pattern of the second start hole, the previous opening pattern of the second start hole, the random number value for the normal symbol performance, the number of reserved normal symbols, the normal symbol variation pattern, and the normal symbol variation display time. Note that in this embodiment, the time-saving game state is the same for all of the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the third time-saving game state without distinction.

According to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 350, in the normal game state, the effects related to the normal symbol are not executed, and a normal symbol variation pattern (01H or 02H) associated with a normal symbol variation display time that is relatively longer than that in the time-saving game state can be determined. However, the normal symbol variation pattern (01H) associated with the longest normal symbol variation display time that can be determined in the normal game state (e.g., 30 seconds) is a normal symbol variation pattern associated with a shorter normal symbol variation display time than the normal symbol variation pattern (16H) associated with the longest normal symbol variation display time that can be determined in the time-saving game state (e.g., 60 seconds).

In addition, according to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 350, in the time-saving game state, the opening pattern of the second starting hole is associated with the selected normal symbol (f1, f2) determined when the normal symbol hits, and when the opening pattern of the second starting hole is the "long opening pattern (91H02H)", the normal symbol variation pattern (13H-16H) that executes a winning effect in the time-saving game state is determined. Also, even if the selected normal symbol (f1, f2) is determined when the normal symbol hits, when the opening pattern of the second starting hole is the "short opening pattern (91H01H)", the normal symbol variation pattern (11H, 12H) that executes a losing effect in the time-saving game state is determined.

And according to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 350, in the time-saving game state, when the selected normal symbol is the selected normal symbol (f1, f2) determined when the normal symbol hits, a normal symbol variation pattern (13H, 15H or 16H) associated with a relatively longer normal symbol variation display time (for example, 40 seconds, 60 seconds) can be determined when the opening pattern of the current second starting hole is a "long opening pattern (91H02H)" rather than a "short opening pattern (91H01H)."

In this way, in the time-saving game state, the variable display time of the normal pattern is relatively longer for the "long opening pattern" than for the "short opening pattern," so it is possible to implement a presentation that makes the player look forward to the "long opening pattern," thereby increasing the interest of the game in the time-saving game state.

In addition, according to the normal pattern variation pattern table shown in FIG. 350, in the time-saving game state, when the selected normal pattern is the selected normal pattern (f1, f2) determined when the normal pattern hits, if the previous opening pattern of the second starting hole is "no opening" or "short opening pattern (91H01H)", a normal pattern variation pattern (13H-15H) associated with the third variable display time (e.g., 15 seconds, 12 seconds, 40 seconds) can be determined as the normal pattern variation display time, and if the previous opening pattern of the second starting hole is "long opening pattern (91H02H)", a normal pattern variation pattern (16H) associated with the fourth variable display time (e.g., 60 seconds) longer than the third variable display time can be determined as the normal pattern variation display time.

In this way, in the time-saving game mode, when "long opening patterns" are performed consecutively, a relatively long variable display time of the normal pattern is performed, so that by performing "long opening patterns" consecutively within a short period of time, it is possible to prevent more game balls than expected from entering the second starting hole 9140.

In this embodiment, the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the third time-saving game state are all treated as a common time-saving game state without any distinction being made, but it is also possible to configure the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the third time-saving game state so that different normal symbol variation patterns are determined.

[11-4. Main control processing]
In the ninth pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 are the same as those executed by the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23), except for some of the special symbol control process, normal symbol control process, and system timer interrupt process. Therefore, the following will explain the special symbol control process, normal symbol control process, and system timer interrupt process, and will not explain the other processes executed by the main CPU 201.

Note that some of the processing performed in the special symbol control process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine is the same as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine, but below, the same processing as that performed in the first pachinko gaming machine will be explained again with different step numbers.

[11-4-1. Special symbol control process]
Next, the special symbol control process performed in the main control process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 351. Fig. 351 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol control process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 351, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S9001. The control state number of the special symbol is a number that indicates the state (status) of the control process related to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S9001, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9002.

Although not shown, when the main CPU 201 executes the special symbol control process, prior to the process of S9001, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process to set the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, etc., in a predetermined register.

In S9002, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S9001 is 0, i.e., whether the special symbol is in a state of waiting for variable display. If the main CPU 201 determines that the control number of the special symbol is not 0, it transfers processing to S9008, and if it determines that the control number of the special symbol is 0, it transfers processing to S9003.

In S9003, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not start information for the second special pattern is stored in the second special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203, i.e., whether or not there is a reserved number of second special patterns. If the main CPU 201 determines that start information for the second special pattern is not stored, it transfers processing to S9004, and if it determines that start information for the second special pattern is stored, it transfers processing to S9005.

In S9004, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not start information for the first special pattern is stored in the first special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203, i.e., whether or not there is a reserved number of first special patterns. If the main CPU 201 determines that start information for the first special pattern is not stored, it transfers processing to S9007, and if it determines that start information for the first special pattern is stored, it transfers processing to S9006.

In S9005, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process to shift the start information of the second special pattern stored in the second special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203 to the special pattern determination memory area (0) of the main RAM 203. In this shift process, the start information stored in the second special pattern start memory area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special pattern determination memory area (0), and the start information stored in the second special pattern start memory area (2) is shifted to the second special pattern start memory area (1). In this embodiment, the reserved number of second special patterns before the start information is shifted is temporarily stored in the main RAM 203 as the "reserved number of second special patterns when the start condition of the second special pattern is satisfied."

In S9006, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process to shift the start information of the first special pattern stored in the first special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203 to the special pattern determination memory area (0) of the main RAM 203. In this shift process, the start information stored in the first special pattern start memory area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special pattern determination memory area (0), and the start information stored in the first special pattern start memory area (2) to the first special pattern start memory area (4) is shifted to the first special pattern start memory area (1) to the first special pattern start memory area (3).

In S9007, if the special symbol start information (reserved number of first and second special symbols) has not been stored in the first and second special symbol start memory areas of the main RAM 203 for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 201 performs a demo display command transmission reservation process. The demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process. When the sub-control circuit 300 receives the demo display command, the sub-CPU 301 performs a demo display performance.

In S9008, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 352. After executing the processing of S9003, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIG. 20 to FIG. 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S9001 to S9008) within the interrupt prohibited section.

In this manner, in this embodiment, as the ninth pachinko gaming machine, a priority variable machine in which the special pattern management process is executed with a higher priority than the first special pattern when start information for the second special pattern is stored has been described, but this is not limited to this. For example, when start information for the first special pattern is stored, the priority variable machine may be one in which the special pattern management process is executed with a higher priority than the second special pattern, or a sequential variable machine in which the special pattern management process is executed in the order of winning (ball entry order) into the first start port 9120 or the second start port 9140.

[11-4-2. Special design management process]
Next, a special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol control process (see Fig. 351) will be described with reference to Fig. 352. Fig. 352 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

The numbers ("0" to "7") written in parentheses to the right of each process in FIG. 352 are the control state numbers of the special symbols that are the subject of the process. The main CPU 201 progresses the special symbol game by executing each process that corresponds to the control state number.

In S9011, the main CPU 201 determines whether the waiting time for the special pattern (special pattern timer counter) is 0. This waiting time for the special pattern is set as the waiting time for various processes in the special pattern management process, and is decremented as the special pattern timer counter within the system timer interrupt process that is performed at 2 msec intervals, for example. If the main CPU 201 determines that the waiting time for the special pattern is not 0, it ends the special pattern management process and returns the process to the special pattern control process (see FIG. 351), and if it determines that the waiting time for the special pattern is 0, it moves the process to S9012.

In S9012, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S9012, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9013. The main CPU 201 performs the process of S9013 and subsequent steps based on the control state number read in the process of S9012.

In S9013, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This S9013 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 353. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S9014.

In S9014, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. This S9014 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 354. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S9015.

In S9015, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game determination process. This S9015 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 356. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9016.

In S9016, the main CPU 201 performs small win game closure processing. This S9016 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this small win game closure processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 358. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S9017.

In S9017, the main CPU 201 performs processing during the opening of the small win game. This processing of S9017 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this processing during the opening of the small win game will be described later with reference to FIG. 359. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S9018.

In S9018, the main CPU 201 performs a process for preparing to open the large prize opening. This process of S9018 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this process for preparing to open the large prize opening will be described later with reference to FIG. 360. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9019.

In S9019, the main CPU 201 performs a large prize opening control process. This S9019 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". Details of this large prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 361. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9020.

In S9020, the main CPU 201 performs a process to end the jackpot game state. This process of S9020 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". Details of this process to end the jackpot game state will be described later with reference to FIG. 362.

After completing steps S9013 to S9020, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 351). In this case, the process returns to the process from which the special symbol management process was called.

[11-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352) will be described with reference to Fig. 353. Fig. 353 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display start process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

In S9021, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", it ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "0", it transfers the process to S9022.

In S9022, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol hit determination process to determine whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss. In this special symbol hit determination process, the special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 339 is referenced, and a hit determination of the special symbol is made based on the special symbol hit determination random number value as the starting information for the special symbol shifted to the special symbol determination memory area (0), and a hit/lose determination value data is determined according to the determination result. After executing the process of S9022, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9023.

In S9023, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol determination process to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol. In this special symbol determination process, the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 340 is referenced, and the selected symbol and symbol designation command for the special symbol are determined based on the hit/loss determination value data as the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process in S9022 and the special symbol random number value as the start information of the special symbol shifted to the special symbol determination memory area (0). After executing the process of S9023, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9024.

In S9024, the main CPU 201 performs a win type determination process. This process is a process for determining the type of win when the result of the special symbol win determination process is a win (big win or small win). In this win type determination process, if the special symbol win determination process is a big win, the big win type determination table shown in FIG. 341 is determined, and if the special symbol win determination process is a small win, the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 342 is determined. Furthermore, in order to set the game state etc. based on the game state at the time of winning after the end of the big win game state, the game state data at the time of winning, which indicates the game state at the time of winning when it is determined to be a big win or a small win, is set in the game state storage area at the time of winning of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S9024, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9025.

In S9025, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variation pattern determination process to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this special symbol variation pattern determination process, a special symbol variation pattern table of either FIG. 344 or FIG. 345 is determined depending on the game state, etc., and the determined special symbol variation pattern table is referenced to determine the special symbol variation pattern and the special symbol variation pattern command based on the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the selected special symbol, the number of second special symbols reserved when the start condition of the second special symbol is established, etc. Specifically, when the state flag is referenced and the game is in a normal game state, the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 344 is determined, and the determined special symbol variation pattern table T1 is referenced, and the special symbol variation pattern and the special symbol variation pattern command are determined based on the type of the special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win or lose), the selected special symbol, the number of reserved second special symbols when the start condition of the second special symbol is established, the reach determination random number value, and the performance selection random number value. Also, when the game is in a time-saving game state, the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 345 is determined, and the determined special symbol variation pattern table J1 is referenced, and the special symbol variation pattern and the special symbol variation pattern command are determined based on the type of the special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win or lose), the selected special symbol, and the number of reserved second special symbols when the start condition of the second special symbol is established. After executing processing of S9025, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S9026.

In S9026, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display time setting process to set the variable display time of the special symbol. In this special symbol variable display time setting process, the special symbol variable display time setting process refers to the special symbol variable pattern table determined in the special symbol variable pattern determination process in S9025 above, and determines the variable display time of the special symbol based on the determined special symbol variable pattern. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 sets the determined variable display time of the special symbol to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, and causes the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 to start variable display of the special symbol. After executing the process of S9026, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9027.

In S9027, the main CPU 201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1", after the special symbol variable display start process ends, a special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 352) is performed. After executing the process of S9027, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9028.

In S9028, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, confirmation and update processes of parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203 are performed. Then, a process of reserving transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state is performed. Note that the game state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S9028, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9029.

In S9029, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for the special symbol effect start command. In this process, the transmission reservation process for the "symbol designation command" and the "special symbol variation pattern command" is performed as the special symbol effect start command. In the pattern designation command transmission reservation process, the symbol designation command determined in S9023 is transmitted. In addition, in the special symbol variation pattern command transmission reservation process, the special symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern determined in S9025 is transmitted so that the type of special symbol can be identified. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process within the interrupt prohibited section.

[11-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, a special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352) will be described with reference to Fig. 354. Fig. 354 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display end process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

In S9041, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1." If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1," it ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "1," it transfers the process to S9042.

In S9042, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol determination time setting process to set the symbol determination time for the special symbol. In this special symbol determination time setting process, the special symbol determination time (e.g., 540 ms) is determined based on the game state and the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win or lose). The main CPU 201 then sets the determined special symbol determination time to the special symbol waiting time in the main RAM 203, and causes the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 to stop displaying the special symbol. After executing the process of S9042, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9043.

The time it takes for the special symbol to be determined may be determined based on the variation pattern of the special symbol, or based only on the game state. Furthermore, a single predetermined symbol determination time (e.g., 540 ms) may be determined.

In S9043, the main CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether to transition to the B time-shortened game state. In the ninth pachinko gaming machine, when the variable display of the special symbol ends, a "ceiling counter" for counting the number of times the special symbol is variable displayed, which transitions to the B time-shortened game state, is updated, and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, transition control to the B time-shortened game state is performed. Details of this process of determining whether to transition to the B time-shortened game state will be described later with reference to FIG. 355. After executing the process of S9043, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9044.

In S9044, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", after the special symbol variable display end process is completed, the special symbol game determination process (see S9015 in FIG. 352) is performed. After executing the process of S9044, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9045.

In S9045, the main CPU 201 executes a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect stop command. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S9045, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9046.

In S9046, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the determined symbol counter. As described above in the explanation of the first to third pachinko gaming machines, the determined symbol counter is a counter for counting the number of times a special symbol has been determined (the number of times a special symbol game has been played), but it may also manage the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions, such as the number of times a special symbol game has remained or the number of times a time-saving game has remained. After executing the process of S9046, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352).

[11-4-5. B Time-saving gaming state transition determination process]
Next, referring to Fig. 355, the B time-saving game state transition judgment process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol variable display end process (see Fig. 354) will be described. Fig. 355 is a flow chart showing an example of the B time-saving game state transition judgment process in the ninth pachinko game machine.

In S9043-4, the main CPU 201 performs a ceiling counter update process to update the ceiling counter. In this ceiling counter update process, the ceiling counter is updated by adding 1. After executing the process of S9043-4, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9043-5.

In S9043-5, the main CPU 201 determines whether the ceiling counter is equal to the ceiling value (for example, 600 times). If the main CPU 201 determines that the ceiling counter is equal to the ceiling value, it transfers processing to S9043-6, and if it determines that the ceiling counter is not equal to the ceiling value, it transfers processing to S9043-9.

In S9043-6, the main CPU 201 clears the ceiling counter (sets it to 0). After executing the process of S9043-6, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9043-7.

In S9043-7, the main CPU 201 performs a B time-saving game state setting process to transition to the B time-saving game state. In this B time-saving game state setting process, the state flag indicating the B time-saving game state is set to 2, the normal power operation pattern is set to 02, and the number of times that the normal symbols are variable displayed = 600 times is set in the time-saving count counter as the "B time-saving end condition". Note that in the B time-saving game state setting process, the normal power operation pattern may be set to 01, or any number of times such as 100 times, 120 times, or 10,000 times may be set as the "B time-saving end condition". After executing the process of S9043-7, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9043-8.

In S9043-8, the main CPU 201 executes a process for reserving the transmission of a time-saving transition command when starting the B time-saving gaming state. The time-saving transition command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S9043-8, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9043-9.

In S9043-9, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, confirmation and update processes are performed for parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, a transmission reservation process is performed for a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S9043-9, the main CPU 201 ends the B time-saving game state transition determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 354).

[11-4-6. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, a special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352) will be described with reference to FIG. 356. FIG. 356 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game determination process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

In S9051, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", it ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "2", it transfers the process to S9052.

In S9052, the main CPU 201 refers to the selected special symbol and determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is the selected special symbol corresponding to a jackpot. If the main CPU 201 determines that a jackpot has been reached, it transfers processing to S9054, and if it determines that a jackpot has not been reached, it transfers processing to S9061.

In S9054, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for a jackpot. In this external signal processing for a jackpot, the selected special symbol is referenced, and a "jackpot signal corresponding to the selected special symbol" is generated as an external signal that is output to the hall computer 186 via the external terminal board 184 during a jackpot gaming state. The generated "jackpot signal corresponding to the selected special symbol" is then output to the external terminal board 184. After executing the processing of S9054, the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S9055.

In S9055, the main CPU 201 performs the first route jackpot start preparation setting process. In this first route jackpot start preparation setting process, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 341 determined in S9024 above is referenced, the maximum number of rounds is determined based on the "special symbol selected" of the jackpot, and the determined maximum number of rounds is set as the upper limit of the number of jackpot rounds in the main RAM 203. Furthermore, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 341 determined in S9024 above is referenced, the OP waiting time (opening time) is determined based on the "special symbol selected" of the jackpot, and the determined OP waiting time (opening time) is set as the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S9055, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9056.

In S9056, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot status display process. In this jackpot status display process, round display LED data corresponding to the maximum number of rounds determined as described above is set, and right hit instruction data that notifies the player to hit to the right is set. After executing the process of S9056, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9057.

In S9057, the main CPU 201 performs game status management processing. In the game status management processing when it is determined that a jackpot has been reached, the main CPU 201 performs processing to clear the status flag, the normal power operation pattern, and the time-saving count counter. After executing the processing of S9057, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S9058.

In S9058, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S9058, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9059.

In S9059, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", the process of preparing to open the large prize opening (see S9018 in FIG. 352) will be performed after the special symbol game determination process is completed. After executing the process of S9059, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9059.

In S9060, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a jackpot start display command. After executing the process of S9060, the main CPU 201 ends the current special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352).

In S9061, the main CPU 201 refers to the selected special symbol and determines whether or not it is a small win, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is the selected special symbol corresponding to a small win. If the main CPU 201 determines that it is a small win, it transfers processing to S9063, and if it determines that it is not a small win (i.e., a miss), it transfers processing to S9071.

In S9063, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for a small win. In this external signal processing for a small win, the selected special symbol is referenced, and a "small win signal corresponding to the selected special symbol" is generated as an external signal that is output to the hall computer 186 via the external terminal board 184 during a small win gaming state. The generated small win signal is then output to the external terminal board 184. After executing the processing of S9063, the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S9064.

In S9064, the main CPU 201 performs a small win start preparation setting process. In this small win start preparation setting process, the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 342 determined in S9024 above is referenced, the maximum number of openings is determined based on the "selected special symbol", and the determined maximum number of openings is set as the upper limit of the number of small win openings in the main RAM 203. Next, the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 342 determined in S9024 above is referenced, the OP waiting time (opening time) is determined based on the "selected special symbol", and the determined OP waiting time (opening time) is set as the waiting time for the special symbol in the main RAM 203.

Furthermore, in the small win start preparation setting process, the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 342 determined in S9024 above is referenced, and the opening waiting time is determined as the opening pattern of the V winning hole 9156 based on the "selected special pattern", and the determined opening waiting time is set in the V winning hole closing timer counter in the main RAM 203, and the V operation flag is turned on. Note that the V winning control process for the V shutter solenoid 9160 that opens and closes the V winning hole 9156 is performed in the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 366) described later. After executing the process of S9064, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9066.

In S9065, the main CPU 201 performs a small win status display process. In this small win status display process, right hit instruction data is set to notify the player that a right hit is to be performed. After executing the process of S9065, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9067.

In S9067, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S9067, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9068.

In S9068, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "3". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", the small win game closure process (see S9016 in FIG. 352) will be performed after the special symbol game determination process ends. After executing the process of S9068, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9069.

In S9069, the main CPU 201 processes the transmission reservation process for the small win start display command. After executing the process of S9069, the main CPU 201 ends the current special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352).

In S9071, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 357. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 352).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S9051 to S9071) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[11-4-7. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, a special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 356) will be described with reference to FIG. 357. FIG. 357 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game ending process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

In S9072, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game ends and it becomes possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, i.e., the next special symbol game. After executing the process of S9072, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9073.

In S9073, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process of reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. In addition, in the game state designation parameter setting process in the special pattern game end process, the start information stored in the special pattern determination memory area (0) in the main RAM 203 is cleared. After executing the process of S9073, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9074.

In S9074, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol game end command. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process. After processing S9074, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 356).

[11-4-8. Processing during small win game closure]
Next, referring to Fig. 358, a description will be given of a small win game closing process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 352). Fig. 358 is a flow chart showing an example of a small win game closing process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

In S9081, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", it ends the small win game closure process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "3", it transfers the process to S9082.

In S9082, the main CPU 201 loads the "small win opening count counter value." The "small win opening count counter" is a counter that counts the number of small win openings. The count value of the small win opening count counter (small win opening count counter value) is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S9082, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9083.

In S9083, the main CPU 201 determines whether the loaded small win opening count counter value is the upper limit value for the number of small win openings. If the main CPU 201 determines that it is the upper limit value for the number of small win openings, it transfers processing to S9089, and if it determines that it is not the upper limit value for the number of small win openings, it transfers processing to S9084.

In S9084, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the second large prize opening 9151 in the small win game state (the number of winning balls in the second large prize opening 9151) is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value of the second large prize opening counter counted by the second large prize opening count switch 9152 is the predetermined maximum number of winning balls for the second large prize opening 9151 (e.g., 10 balls). If the main CPU 201 determines that the number of winning balls in the second large prize opening 9151 is not the maximum number of winning balls, it transfers the process to S9085, and if it determines that the number of winning balls in the second large prize opening 9151 is the maximum number of winning balls, it transfers the process to S9089.

In S9085, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the small win opening count counter value. After executing the process of S9085, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9086.

In S9086, the main CPU 201 performs a second large prize opening setting process to open the second large prize opening 9151. In this second large prize opening setting process, the small prize type determination table shown in FIG. 342 determined in S9024 is referenced, and the maximum opening time of the second large prize opening 9151 is determined based on the "selected special pattern" of the small prize and the current opening count (small prize opening count counter value), and the determined maximum opening time is set as the waiting time of the special pattern in the main RAM 203. Then, second large prize opening opening control data for opening the second large prize opening 9151 is generated for the second special electric solenoid 9155. This causes the second large prize opening 9151 to open. After executing the process of S9086, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9087.

In S9087, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4", after the small win game closed process ends, the small win game open process (see FIG. 359) is performed. After executing the process of S9087, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9088.

In S9088, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. The main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs a process of confirming and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process of reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S9088, the main CPU 201 ends the small win game closure process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352).

In S9089, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a V winning has been detected. In this process, it determines whether or not a game ball has passed through the V winning port 9156 within a specified time (i.e., whether or not there has been detection by the V winning port switch 9157). If the main CPU 201 determines that a V winning has been detected, it transfers the process to S9090, and if it determines that a V winning has not been detected, it transfers the process to S9098.

In S9090, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for a jackpot from the second route. In this processing, the selected special symbol is referenced, and a "jackpot signal corresponding to the selected special symbol" is generated as an external signal that is output to the hall computer 186 via the external terminal board 184 in the event of a jackpot. The generated "jackpot signal corresponding to the selected special symbol" is then output to the external terminal board 184. After executing the processing of S9090, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S9101.

In S9091, the main CPU 201 performs a second route jackpot start preparation setting process. In this second route jackpot start preparation setting process, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 341 is referenced, the maximum number of rounds is determined based on the "selected special symbol" of the jackpot, and the determined maximum number of rounds is set as the upper limit of the number of jackpot rounds in the main RAM 203. Furthermore, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 341 is referenced, the OP waiting time (opening time) is determined based on the "selected special symbol" of the jackpot, and the determined OP waiting time (opening time) is set as the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S9101, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9092.

In S9092, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. By performing this process, the jackpot game state from the second route starts from the second round of round play. After executing the process of S9092, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9093.

In S9093, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot status display process. In this jackpot status display process, round display LED data corresponding to the maximum number of rounds determined as described above is set, and right hit instruction data that notifies the player to hit to the right is set. After executing the process of S9093, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9094.

In S9094, the main CPU 201 performs game status management processing. In the game status management processing when it is determined that a jackpot has been hit, the main CPU 201 performs processing to clear the status flag, the normal power operation pattern, and the time-saving count counter. After executing the processing of S9094, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S9095.

In S9095, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S9095, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9096.

In S9096, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5." By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5," the large prize opening preparation process (FIG. 352) will be performed after the small prize game closure process ends. After executing the process of S9096, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9097.

In S9097, the main CPU 201 performs processing to reserve the transmission of a V hit start display command. After executing the processing of S9097, the main CPU 201 ends the processing during the small hit game opening, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 352).

In S9098, the main CPU 201 performs a small win end preparation setting process. In this small win end preparation setting process, the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 342 determined in S9024 above is referenced, the ED waiting time (ending time) is determined based on the "selected special pattern" of the small win, and the determined ED waiting time (ending time) is set as the waiting time of the special pattern in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S9098, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9099.

In S9099, the main CPU 201 performs processing to reserve the transmission of a small win end display command. After executing processing in S9099, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S9100.

In S9100, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this processing, the special symbol game end processing described with reference to FIG. 357 is performed. After executing the processing of S9100, the main CPU 201 ends the small win game closure processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 352).

[11-4-9. Processing during small win game opening]
Next, referring to Fig. 359, a small win game open process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 352) will be described. Fig. 359 is a flow chart showing an example of a small win game open process in the ninth pachinko game machine.

In S9101, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", it ends the small win game open process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "4", it transfers the process to S9102.

In S9102, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the second large prize opening 9151 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the second large prize opening opening setting process (see S9086 in FIG. 358) has elapsed. If the main CPU 201 determines that the maximum opening time of the second large prize opening 9151 has not elapsed, it ends the small win game opening process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 352). If the main CPU 201 determines that the maximum opening time of the second large prize opening 9151 has elapsed, it transfers the process to S9103.

In S9103, the main CPU 201 performs a second large prize opening closure setting process to close the second large prize opening 9151. In this second large prize opening closure setting process, the main CPU 201 refers to the small prize type determination table shown in FIG. 342 determined in S9024 above, and determines the current closure time of the second large prize opening 9151 based on the "selected special pattern" of the small prize and the current opening count (small prize opening count counter value), and sets the determined closure time to the waiting time of the special pattern in the main RAM 203. Then, the second large prize opening closure control data for closing the second large prize opening 9151 is generated for the second special electric solenoid 9155. This causes the second large prize opening 9151 to close. After executing the process of S9103, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9104.

In S9104, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", after the small win game open process ends, the small win game closed process (see FIG. 358) is performed. After executing the process of S9104, the main CPU 201 ends the small win game open process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352).

[11-4-10. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, referring to Fig. 360, a special prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 352) will be described. Fig. 360 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening preparation process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

In S9111, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5." If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5," it ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "5," it transfers the process to S9112.

In S9112, the main CPU 201 loads the "round counter value." The "round counter" is a counter that counts the number of rounds played in the jackpot game state. The count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S9112, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9113.

In S9113, the main CPU 201 determines whether the loaded round counter value is the upper limit of the number of jackpot rounds. If the main CPU 201 determines that the number of jackpot rounds is the upper limit, it transfers processing to S9114, and if it determines that the number of jackpot rounds is not the upper limit, it transfers processing to S9118.

In S9114, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot end preparation setting process. In this jackpot end preparation setting process, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 341 determined in S9024 or S9101 above is referenced, an ED waiting time (ending time) is determined based on the "selected special pattern" of the jackpot, and the determined ED waiting time (ending time) is set as the waiting time of the special pattern in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S9114, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9115.

In S9115, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "7." In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7," the jackpot game state end process (FIG. 352) is performed after the jackpot opening preparation process is completed. After executing S9115, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9116.

In S9116, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S9116, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9117.

In S9117, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a jackpot end display command. The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process. After processing S9117, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352).

In S9118, the main CPU 201 performs processing to add 1 to the round counter value. After executing processing of S9118, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S9119.

In S9119, the main CPU 201 performs a first large prize opening setting process to open the first large prize opening 9131. In this first large prize opening setting process, the main CPU 201 refers to the big prize type determination table shown in FIG. 341, and determines the maximum opening time of the first large prize opening 9131 in this round based on the "selected special pattern" of the big prize and the current round number (round counter value), and sets the determined maximum opening time to the waiting time of the special pattern in the main RAM 203. Then, the main CPU 201 generates first large prize opening opening control data for the first special power solenoid 9135 to open the first large prize opening 9131. This opens the first large prize opening 9131. After executing the process of S9119, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9120.

In S9120, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "6". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6", the large prize opening opening control process (see FIG. 352) will be performed after the large prize opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S9120, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9121.

In S9121, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S9121, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9122.

In S9122, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of the large prize opening display command. The large prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S9122, the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352).

[11-4-11. Big prize opening control process]
Next, referring to Fig. 361, a special prize opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 352) will be described. Fig. 361 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening control process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

In S9131, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "6". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", it ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "6", it transfers the process to S9132.

In S9132, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of winning game balls that entered the first large prize opening 9131 in one round when the first large prize opening 9131 was opened is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value of the first large prize opening counter counted by the first large prize opening count switch 9132 is the predetermined maximum number of winning balls for the first large prize opening 9131 (e.g., 10 balls).

If the main CPU 201 determines in S9132 that the number of winnings at the first large winning slot 9131 is not the maximum number of winnings, it transfers processing to S9133, and if the main CPU 201 determines in S9132 that the number of winnings at the first large winning slot 9131 is the maximum number of winnings, it transfers processing to S9134.

In S9133, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the first large prize opening 9131 in one round has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the opening setting process for the first large prize opening (see S9119 in FIG. 360) has elapsed.

If the main CPU 201 determines in S9133 that the maximum opening time of the first large prize opening 9131 has not elapsed, it ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352). If the main CPU 201 determines in S9133 that the maximum opening time of the first large prize opening 9131 has elapsed, it transfers the process to S9134.

In S9134, the main CPU 201 performs a first large prize opening closure setting process to close the first large prize opening 9131. In this first large prize opening closure setting process, the main CPU 201 refers to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 341, and determines the closure time of the first large prize opening 9131 in this round based on the jackpot "selected special pattern" and the current round number (round counter value), and sets the determined closure time to the waiting time of the special pattern in the main RAM 203. Then, the main CPU 201 generates first large prize opening closure control data for the first special power solenoid 9135 to close the first large prize opening 9131. This closes the first large prize opening 9131. After executing the process of S9134, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9135.

In S9135, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the large prize opening control processing is completed, the large prize opening opening preparation processing (see FIG. 360) is performed again. After executing the processing of S9135, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S9136.

In S9136, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S9136, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9137.

In S9137, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of an inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S9137, the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening control process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352).

[11-4-12. Big win game state end processing]
Next, a big win game state end process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352) will be described with reference to FIG. 362. FIG. 362 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win game state end process in the ninth pachinko game machine.

In S9141, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "7." If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "7," it ends the jackpot game state end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "7," it transfers the process to S9142.

In S9142, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot game information initialization process. In this jackpot game information initialization process, various flags and data used in the jackpot game state and the values of various counters (e.g., round counter, big prize slot winning counter, etc.) are set or reset. After executing S9142, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9143.

In S9143, the main CPU 201 performs a post-jackpot end state setting process to set the game state after the end of the jackpot game state. In this post-jackpot end state setting process, the game state related setting table shown in FIG. 343 is referenced, and the game state (state flag, normal power operation pattern, and variable display count of normal symbols as the number of time-saving times) is set based on the game state at the time of winning and the selected special symbol. After executing the process of S9143, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9144.

In this embodiment, if the selected special symbol is "z1", the status flag indicating the A time-saving game state is set to 1, the normal power operation pattern is set to 02, and the variable display count of the normal symbol is set to 120 in the time-saving count counter. If the selected special symbol is "z2" or "z3", the status flag indicating the A time-saving game state is set to 1, the normal power operation pattern is set to 01, and the variable display count of the normal symbol is set to 100 in the time-saving count counter. If the selected special symbol is "z4", "z6", or "z7", the status flag indicating the A time-saving game state is set to 1, the normal power operation pattern is set to 02, and the variable display count of the normal symbol is set to 120 in the time-saving count counter. In addition, if the selected special symbol is "z5", the state flag indicating the A time-saving game state is set to 1, the normal power operation pattern is set to 02, and the variable display count of the normal symbol is set to 10,000 times in the time-saving count counter.

In S9144, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this processing, the special symbol game end processing described with reference to FIG. 357 is performed. After executing the processing of S9144, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot game state end processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 187).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 set an interrupt prohibited section and perform the above-mentioned jackpot game state end processing within the interrupt prohibited section.

[11-4-13. Normal symbol control process]
Next, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 in the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 363. It goes without saying that, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in Fig. 363, the main CPU 201 stores the start information of the normal symbol and judges whether the judgment start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, as in the special symbol control process.

Figure 363 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the numbers ("0" to "4") written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in Figure 363 are control state numbers for the normal symbols. The main CPU 201 progresses the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol.

In S9200, the main CPU 201 determines whether the waiting time for the normal pattern is 0. This waiting time for the normal pattern is set as the waiting time for various processes in the normal pattern control process, and is decremented as a normal pattern timer counter in the system timer interrupt process that is performed at 2 msec intervals, for example. If the main CPU 201 determines that the waiting time for the normal pattern is not 0, it ends the normal pattern control process and returns the process to S41 (see FIG. 21) of the main control main process, and if it determines that the waiting time for the normal pattern is 0, it transfers the process to S9201.

In S9201, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing the process of S9201, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9210. The main CPU 201 performs the process of S9210 and subsequent steps based on the control state number read in the process of S9201.

In S9210, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display start processing. This S9210 processing is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". In this normal symbol variable display start processing, a win determination process for the normal symbol, a normal symbol determination process, a process for determining the opening pattern of the second start port, a process for determining the variation pattern of the normal symbol, etc. are performed, but details will be described later with reference to FIG. 364. Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S9220.

In S9220, the main CPU 201 performs processing to end the variable display of normal symbols. This processing of S9220 is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S9230.

In this normal symbol variable display end process, the main CPU 201 judges whether the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, and when it judges that the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, it sets the predetermined normal symbol pattern determination time (e.g., 540 msec) to the waiting time of the normal separate symbol in the main RAM 203, and sets the control state number of the normal symbol to "2". If the variable display time of the normal symbol has not ended, it holds the control state number of the normal symbol at "1" and waits for the variable display time of the normal symbol to end.

In S9230, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol game play determination process. This S9230 process is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9240.

In this normal symbol game judgment process, the main CPU 201 performs a judgment process of the selected symbol of the stopped normal symbol (for example, a normal symbol winning or a normal symbol losing). If the main CPU 201 judges that the selected symbol of the stopped normal symbol corresponds to a normal symbol winning, it sets the control state number of the normal symbol to "3", and if it judges that the result of the normal symbol winning judgment process corresponds to a losing, it sets the control state number of the normal symbol to "0".

In S9240, the main CPU 201 performs the normal electric role release process. This S9240 process is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9250.

In this normal electric device opening process, the main CPU 201 refers to the second start hole opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. 349, and operates the normal power shutter 9147 to open and close the second start hole 9140 according to the operation of the second start hole opening pattern determined in the second start hole opening pattern determination process of S9215 (FIG. 364) described later. Then, when a specified number of game balls for normal power (e.g., three balls) enter the second start hole 9140 or all the operations of the determined second start hole opening pattern are completed, the second start hole 9140 is closed, the control state number of the normal pattern is set to "4", and the normal electric device opening process is terminated.

In S9250, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit end processing. This S9250 processing is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". In this normal symbol hit end processing, the number of time-saving times is updated and a determination is made as to when the time-saving times have ended, but details will be described later with reference to FIG. 365. Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIG. 20 to FIG. 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the normal symbol control process (S9200 to S9250) described above within the interrupt prohibited section.

[11-4-14. Normal symbol variable display start process]
Next, details of the normal symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 363) will be described with reference to FIG. 364. FIG. 364 is a flow chart showing an example of the normal symbol variable display start process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 364, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the normal pattern is "0" (S9211).

If it is determined in S9211 that the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 363). On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the normal symbol is "0", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9212.

In S9212, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of the start information of the normal pattern. In this process, the start information stored in the normal pattern start memory area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the normal pattern determination area (0), and the start information stored in the normal pattern start memory area (2) to the normal pattern start memory area (4) is shifted to the normal pattern start memory area (1) to the normal pattern start memory area (3). After executing the process of S9212, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9213.

In S9213, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol winning judgment process. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol winning judgment table shown in FIG. 347, and determines the winning/losing judgment value data for the normal symbol ("normal symbol winning" or "normal symbol losing") based on the normal symbol winning judgment random number value stored in the normal symbol judgment area (0). After executing the process of S9213, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9214.

In S9214, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol determination process. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 348, and determines the "selected normal symbol" based on the winning/losing determination value data (the result of the normal symbol winning/losing determination process) and the normal symbol random number value stored in the normal symbol determination area (0). After executing S9214, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9215.

In S9215, the main CPU 201 performs processing to determine the opening pattern of the second starting hole. After executing processing of S9215, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S9216.

In the process of determining the second start port opening pattern, the main CPU 201 first shifts the data of the second start port opening pattern stored in the start port opening pattern memory area (0) of the main RAM 203 to the start port opening pattern memory area (1). The data of the second start port opening pattern stored in the start port opening pattern memory area (1) is overwritten and erased by shifting the data of the second start port opening pattern. As a result, the data of the second start port opening pattern stored in the start port opening pattern memory area (0) corresponds to the "second start port opening pattern determined this time," and the data of the second start port opening pattern stored in the start port opening pattern memory area (1) corresponds to the "second start port opening pattern determined previously."

In addition, in the process of determining the opening pattern of the second start hole, when the main CPU 201 determines that a normal symbol has been hit, after shifting the data of the opening pattern of the second start hole, it refers to the opening pattern determination table of the second start hole shown in FIG. 349, and determines the opening pattern of the second start hole based on the game state (normal power operation pattern) and the selected normal symbol, and stores the opening pattern of the second start hole determined this time in the start hole opening pattern memory area (0) of the main RAM 203.

In S9216, the main CPU 201 performs a process of determining the normal pattern variation pattern. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal pattern variation pattern table shown in FIG. 350, and determines the normal pattern variation pattern based on the game state, the selected normal pattern, the current second start opening pattern stored in the start opening pattern memory area (0), the previous second start opening pattern stored in the start opening pattern memory area (1), the random number value for normal pattern performance, and the number of reserved normal patterns. Then, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal pattern variation pattern table shown in FIG. 350, and determines the normal pattern variation display time based on the determined normal pattern variation pattern. After executing the process of S9216, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9217.

In S9217, the main CPU 201 executes a process for setting the variable display time of the normal pattern. In this process, the variable display time of the normal pattern determined in the variable pattern determination process of the normal pattern (S9216) is set to the waiting time of the normal pattern in the main RAM 203, and the normal pattern display unit 161 is caused to start displaying the variable display of the normal pattern. After executing the process of S9217, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9218.

In S9218, the main CPU 201 performs a process to set the control state number of the normal symbol to "1". In this way, by performing a process to set the control state number of the normal symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after this normal symbol variable display start process is completed, a normal symbol variable display end process (see S9220 in FIG. 363) is performed. After executing the process of S9218, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9219.

In S9219, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a normal symbol variation pattern command. The normal symbol variation pattern command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S9219, the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 363).

[11-4-15. End processing of normal pattern]
Next, with reference to Fig. 365, details of the normal symbol winning end process executed by the main CPU 201 in the normal symbol control process (see Fig. 363) will be described. Fig. 365 is a flow chart showing an example of the normal symbol winning end process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

In S9251, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the normal symbol is not "4", it ends the normal symbol win end process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 363), and if it determines that the control state number of the normal symbol is "4", it transfers the process to S9252.

In S9252, the main CPU 201 executes a time-saving count counter update process to update the time-saving count counter. In this time-saving count counter update process, if a time-saving game state is set (if state flag = 1 or 2 is set), the "time-saving count counter" in the main RAM 203 is updated by subtracting 1. This makes it possible to count the number of times the normal pattern is variable displayed as the number of time-saving plays. After executing the process of S9252, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9253.

In S9253, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time-saving counter is 0. If the main CPU 201 determines that the time-saving counter is 0, the process proceeds to S9254. If the main CPU 201 determines that the time-saving counter is not 0, the process proceeds to S9255.

In S9254, the main CPU 201 clears the time-saving information and transitions from the time-saving game state to the normal game state. Here, the time-saving information is cleared by clearing (setting to 0) the status flag, normal power operation pattern, and time-saving count counter. After executing the process of S9254, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9255.

In S9255, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S9255, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9256.

In S9256, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the normal symbol to "0". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "0", after the normal symbol hit end process is completed, the normal symbol variable display start process (see S9210 in FIG. 363) is performed. After executing the process of S9256, the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol hit end process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 363).

In this embodiment, the normal symbol hit end process is configured to perform the time-saving counter update process and the time-saving end determination process as shown in S9252 to S9254 above, but it may also be configured to perform these processes in the normal symbol variable display end process (S9220 in FIG. 363).

[11-4-16. System timer interrupt processing]
Next, a system timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 201 at an interrupt period of, for example, 2 msec will be described with reference to Fig. 366. Fig. 366 is a flow chart showing an example of the system timer interrupt process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

In S9311, the main CPU 201 performs a process of saving the protected register. After executing the process of S9311, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9312.

In S9312, the main CPU 201 determines whether the XINT detection flag is off. If the main CPU 201 determines that the XINT detection flag is not off (i.e., a power interruption has been detected), the process proceeds to S9344. If the main CPU 201 determines that the XINT detection flag is off (i.e., a power interruption has not been detected), the process proceeds to S9313.

In S9313, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing S9313, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S9314.

In S9314, the main CPU 201 performs processing to read the state of the input port of the I/O port 205. After executing processing of S9314, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S9315.

In S9315, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted based on the game permission flag. The game permission flag indicates a game permitted state when it is on (=1), and indicates a game not permitted state when it is off (=0). As described in the first pachinko gaming machine, the game permission flag is a flag that is set to off (=game not permitted state) as the start-up state when the power is turned on during recovery from power interruption and during RAM clearing, and is set to on (=play permitted state) after power is restored and RAM clearing is executed. If the main CPU 201 determines that the game is permitted, it transfers the process to S9317, and if it determines that the game is not permitted, it transfers the process to S9344.

In S9317, the main CPU 201 executes processing to increment the value of the interrupt counter by 1. The interrupt counter is a counter for counting (managing) interrupt prohibited intervals during the main control main processing (see Figures 20 to 23), and the count value of the interrupt counter is stored in an interrupt counter area in the work area of the main RAM 203. After executing processing of S9317, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S9318.

In S9318, the main CPU 201 performs an update process for the interrupt cycle timer. In the update process for the interrupt cycle timer, various timer counters in the working area of the main RAM 203, such as the special pattern timer counter, the normal pattern timer counter, the V prize opening timer counter, and the V prize opening timer counter, are decremented. After executing the process of S9318, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9319.

In S9319, the main CPU 201 performs a random number update process. In this random number update process, various random number counters (for example, a random number counter for determining a jackpot of a random value for determining a jackpot, etc.) are updated. In this way, by performing the random number update process at a predetermined cycle (2 msec in this embodiment), it is possible to ensure the reliability of various random numbers, which are an important factor in determining the number of balls dispensed. After executing the process of S9319, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9320.

In S9320, the main CPU 201 performs switch input detection processing. Details of this switch input detection processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 367. After executing the processing of S9320, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S9330.

In S9330, when the V operation flag is on, the main CPU 201 performs a V winning control process to open and close the V winning hole 9156. In this V winning control process, when the V operation flag is on and the opening waiting time has elapsed (V winning hole closing timer counter = 0), the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 342 is referenced, and the opening time is determined as the opening pattern of the V winning hole 9156 based on the "selected special pattern", and the determined opening time is set in the V winning hole opening timer counter in the main RAM 203, and V winning hole opening control data for opening the V winning hole 9156 is output to the V shutter solenoid 9160. The V winning hole opening control data is continuously output unless the V winning hole opening timer counter is 0. Then, when the V operation flag is on and the V winning hole opening control data is output, if the opening time has elapsed (V winning hole opening timer counter = 0), the output of the V winning hole opening control data is stopped and the V operation flag is turned off. After executing processing of S9330, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S9340.

At S9340, the main CPU 201 performs a performance control command transmission process. In this process, the command that has been scheduled for transmission is transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub-control circuit 300. After executing the process of S9340, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9341.

In S9341, the main CPU 201 performs a register save process. After executing S9341, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9342.

At S9342, the main CPU 201 performs a performance display monitor control process. In this process, game judgment process, prize ball addition judgment process, display content update process for the performance display monitor 170, etc. are performed. The data stored in this process is stored in an area separate from (outside) the working area in which data necessary for game progress is stored, that is, in an area that is backed up and where the data is not cleared even if, for example, the RAM is cleared. After executing the process of S9342, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9343.

In S9343, the main CPU 201 performs a process of restoring the registers that were saved in S9341. After executing the process of S9343, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9344.

In S9344, the main CPU 201 performs the process of restoring the protection registers that were saved in S9311, and ends the system timer interrupt process.

[11-4-17. Switch input detection process]
Next, a switch input detection process executed by the main CPU 201 during the system timer interrupt process (see Fig. 366) will be described with reference to Fig. 367. Fig. 367 is a flow chart showing an example of the switch input detection process in the ninth pachinko game machine.

Compared to the first pachinko game machine, the ninth pachinko game machine has the additional configuration of a first large prize slot count switch 9132, a second large prize slot count switch 9152, and a V prize slot switch 9157, and therefore some of the above processing has been added.

In S9401, the main CPU 201 executes the first start port winning detection process. After executing the process of S9401, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9402.

In this first start port winning detection process, when the first start port switch 9121 detects the entry of a game ball into the first start port 9120, the main CPU 201 sets payout information corresponding to the first start port 9120 and determines whether there is free space in any of the special symbol determination memory area (0) or the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory area (4). If it is determined that there is free space in any of the special symbol determination memory area (0) or the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory area (4), it obtains various random number values (e.g., random number values for jackpot determination, pattern random number values, random number values for reach determination, random number values for performance selection, etc.) as start information for the first special symbol, and stores the various obtained random number values in a single memory area in FIFO (First In, First Out) format. Then, a process is performed to reserve the transmission of a winning command for the first special symbol, which indicates a winning entry into the first start port 9120 and the number of reserved first special symbols. The winning command for the first special symbol reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in any of the first special symbol start memory areas (1) to (4), the first start port winning detection process is terminated without acquiring various random number values.

In S9402, the main CPU 201 executes the second start port winning detection process. After executing the process of S9402, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9403.

In this second start port winning detection process, when the second start port switch 9141 detects the entry of a game ball into the second start port 9140, the main CPU 201 sets payout information corresponding to the second start port 9140 and determines whether there is free space in any of the special symbol determination memory area (0), the second special symbol start memory area (1) to the second special symbol start memory area (2). If it is determined that there is free space in any of the special symbol determination memory area (0), the second special symbol start memory area (1) to the second special symbol start memory area (2), it obtains various random number values (for example, random number values for jackpot determination, pattern random number values, random number values for reach determination, random number values for performance selection, etc.) as start information for the second special symbol, and stores the various obtained random number values in a single memory area in FIFO format. Then, it performs a transmission reservation process for a winning command for the second special symbol indicating the winning of the second start port 9140 and the number of reserved second special symbols. The winning command for the second special symbol reserved for transmission in this process is sent to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in any of the second special symbol start memory areas (1) to (4), the second start port winning detection process will end without acquiring various random number values.

In S9403, the main CPU 201 performs a general prize opening passage detection process. In the general prize opening passage detection process, for example, when a prize is won through the general prize opening 122, payout information indicating the number of payouts, etc. is set. After executing the process of S9403, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9404.

In S9404, the main CPU 201 performs a first large prize opening passage detection process. In the first large prize opening passage detection process, when the first large prize opening count switch 9132 detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 9131, the main CPU 201 sets payout information corresponding to the first large prize opening 9131 and adds 1 to the first large prize opening counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the first large prize opening 9131 to update it. Then, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for a first large prize opening entry command indicating an entry into the first large prize opening 9131. The first large prize opening entry command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S9404, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9405.

In S9405, the main CPU 201 performs a second large prize opening passage detection process. In the second large prize opening passage detection process, when the second large prize opening count switch 9152 detects the entry of a game ball into the second large prize opening 9151, the main CPU 201 sets payout information corresponding to the second large prize opening 9151 and adds 1 to the second large prize opening counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the second large prize opening 9151 to update it. Then, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for a second large prize opening entry command indicating an entry into the second large prize opening 9151. The second large prize opening entry command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S9405, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9406.

In S9406, the main CPU 201 performs a V prize opening passage detection process. In the V prize opening passage detection process, when the main CPU 201 detects the passage of a game ball into the V prize opening 9156 by the V prize opening switch 9157, it turns on the V prize opening passage flag. Then, it performs a transmission reservation process for a V passage command indicating that the game ball has passed through the V prize opening 9156. The V passage command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process. Note that even if a game ball passes through the V prize opening 9156, no payout information is set. After executing the process of S9406, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9407.

In S9407, the main CPU 201 performs gate passage detection processing. After executing the processing of S9407, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S9408.

In this gate passage detection process, when the main CPU 201 detects the passage of the game ball into the normal symbol operation area 9126 by the normal symbol operation switch 9127, it judges whether there is free space in the normal symbol start memory area (1) to the normal symbol start memory area (4). If it judges that there is free space in the normal symbol start memory area (1) to the normal symbol start memory area (4), it acquires various random number values (for example, random number values for determining whether the normal symbol is a hit, pattern random number values of the normal symbol, etc.) as start information for the normal symbol, and stores the various acquired random number values in a single normal symbol start memory area in FIFO format. On the other hand, if it judges that there is no free space in any of the normal symbol start memory areas (1) to (4), it ends the gate passage detection process without acquiring various random number values.

In S9408, the main CPU 201 performs a look-ahead command generation process. After executing the process of S9408, the main CPU 201 ends the current switch input detection process.

In this look-ahead command generation process, the look-ahead related data in FIG. 346 is referenced, and the various random number values obtained in the current first start port winning detection process or second start port winning detection process are analyzed based on the game state, and a look-ahead command is generated. As shown in the look-ahead related data in FIG. 346, in the time-saving game state, big win game state, and small win game state, only look-ahead commands based on the various random number values obtained in the second start port winning detection process (look-ahead commands for the second special pattern) can be generated. Then, a look-ahead command transmission reservation process is performed to transmit the generated look-ahead command to the sub-control circuit 300. The look-ahead command reserved for transmission in this process will be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process.

[11-5. Sub-control circuit]
Next, the control contents of the sub-control circuit 300 that performs control based on various commands and the like transmitted from the main control circuit 200 will be described.

[11-5-1. Sub-control circuit processing]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 301 of the sub control circuit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 368. Fig. 368 is a flow chart showing an example of the sub control circuit process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 368, the sub-CPU 301 first performs an initialization process (S9500). In this initialization process, for example, RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, etc. are performed. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S9510.

The initialization process (S9500) described above is executed when the power is turned on or the backup is cleared. After the power is turned on, the processes S9510 to S9580 described below are executed repeatedly.

In S9510, the sub-CPU 301 performs a data input process to input data. In this data input process, both the command input port 308 reading process and the effect button 54 input process are performed.

The command input port 308 read process reads the command sent from the main control circuit 200 that is set in the command input port 308.

In addition, in the input process of the effect button 54, operation information regarding the player's operation detected by the effect button 54 is input from the button control circuit 310. In addition, when the sub-CPU 301 inputs operation information from the button control circuit 310, it determines whether to validate the input operation information or discard it as invalid, and sets the acceptance time during which input of operation information is permitted, the validity time during which the input operation information is valid, and the invalidity period during which the input operation information is invalid, depending on the current situation such as the effect.

When the reading process of the command input port 308 and the input process of the effect button 54 are completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S9520.

In S9520, the sub-CPU 301 executes a command analysis process. In this process, the command read in the process of S9510 is analyzed. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S9530.

In this command analysis process, if the read command is a winning command for the first special symbol, the sub CPU 301 sets the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the winning command for the first special symbol in the "sub side first special symbol reserved number counter" of the work RAM 303, and if the command is a winning command for the second special symbol, the sub CPU 301 sets the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the winning command for the second special symbol in the "sub side second special symbol reserved number counter" of the work RAM 303. Also, if the read command is a game state designation command, the sub CPU 301 sets game state information corresponding to the game state designation command in the "sub side game state area" of the work RAM 303.

In particular, in this embodiment, when the read command is a variation pattern command for the second special symbol, the sub-CPU 301 first sets and holds (ON) the BONUS flag in the "BONUS state flag area" of the work RAM 303. Next, in order to count the number of consecutive small win game states and big win game states in the BONUS state described below, the "consecutive number counter" of the work RAM 303 is incremented by 1. Note that the "BONUS flag" and "consecutive number counter" clear the stored information (set to OFF or 0) when the last big win game state in the BONUS state ends (when the read command is a big win end display command and the sub-side second special symbol reserved number counter = 0).

Furthermore, if the read command is the first large prize slot entry command or the second large prize slot entry command, the sub-CPU 301 adds the payout information (the number of paid-out game balls) corresponding to the first large prize slot entry command or the second large prize slot entry command to the "acquired game ball count counter" in the work RAM 303 so that the game balls are counted and displayed in the acquired game ball count image described below. The "acquired game ball count counter" is cleared when the sub-CPU 301 determines that the game status information in the "sub-side game status area" is the normal game status and the "sub-side second special symbol reserved number counter" is 0.

At S9530, the sub-CPU 301 executes a presentation mode determination process. In this process, for example, a presentation pattern is determined based on a command sent from the main CPU 201, and various requests for operating various presentation devices (for example, a drawing request, a sound request, a lamp request, a role request, a presentation button activation request, etc.) are generated based on the determined presentation pattern. Details of this presentation mode determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 369. Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 moves the process to S9540.

At S9540, the sub-CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this processing, the sub-CPU 301 transmits a drawing request to the display control circuit 304. The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control for displaying an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on the message (drawing request) transmitted from the sub-CPU 301. Upon completing this processing, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the processing to S9550.

At S9550, the sub-CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this processing, the sub-CPU 301 transmits a sound request to the audio control circuit 305. The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control to output audio from the speaker 32 based on the message (sound request) transmitted from the sub-CPU 301. When this processing ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the processing to S9560.

In S9560, the sub-CPU 301 executes an LED control process. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 sends an LED request to the LED control circuit 306. Based on the message (LED request) sent from the sub-CPU 301, the LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control to light up or blink all or a portion of the LEDs that make up the LED group 46. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S9570.

At S9570, the sub-CPU 301 executes a reel control process. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 sends a reel request to the reel control circuit 307. Based on the message (reel request) sent from the sub-CPU 301, the reel control circuit 307 performs drive control to operate the performance drive motors (not shown) for all or some of the reels that make up the performance reel group 58. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 moves the process to S9580.

At S9580, the sub-CPU 301 executes effect button control processing. In this processing, the sub-CPU 301 sends an effect button drive request to the button control circuit 310. Based on the message (effect button drive request) sent from the sub-CPU 301, the button control circuit 310 performs drive control such as changing the operation mode of the effect button 54 and vibrating the effect button 54. When this processing ends, the sub-CPU 301 ends the sub-control circuit processing.

[11-5-2. Presentation mode determination process]
Next, the details of the presentation mode determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 in the sub control circuit process (see FIG. 368) will be described with reference to Fig. 369. Fig. 369 is a flow chart showing an example of the presentation mode determination process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

At S9531, the sub-CPU 301 executes a presentation pattern determination process to determine a presentation pattern. In this presentation pattern determination process, a presentation pattern is determined based on the type of command received from the main CPU 201, the presentation pattern defining the display presentation of the characters and the like displayed on the display device 7, the sound presentation output from the speaker 32, the operation of the presentation button 54, and the like. Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S9532.

Here, as described above, "presentation pattern" refers to information that defines the display presentation of characters, audio presentation, operation mode of presentation button 54, etc., while "symbol presentation pattern" refers to "variable presentation" information that, among presentation patterns, causes a predetermined decorative pattern to be variably displayed (variable display and stationary display) in a predetermined variable manner at least on display device 7 during the variable display of special or normal symbols, and notifies a predetermined lottery result based on the stop mode of the stationary decorative pattern. In addition, there are two types of predetermined decorative patterns: a "first decorative pattern (main pattern)" that is displayed large so that it is easy for the player to recognize, and a "second decorative pattern (sub-pattern)" that is displayed small so that it is difficult for the player to recognize. Note that, depending on the type of symbol presentation pattern, in addition to the variable display of the predetermined decorative pattern, information that causes a predetermined character to be displayed is also included.

The "small hit presentation pattern" refers to the information on the presentation that is performed in a small hit game state among the presentation patterns, and the "big hit presentation pattern" refers to the information on the presentation that is performed in a big hit game state among the presentation patterns. In addition to the symbol presentation pattern, small hit presentation pattern, and big hit presentation pattern, various presentation patterns are provided, and the presentation of various presentation patterns can be executed in a superimposed manner.

(An example of a process for determining a performance pattern when a command for changing a first special symbol is received)
In this embodiment, in the presentation pattern determination process, when the command received from the main CPU 201 is a variation pattern command for the first special symbol, in the normal game state, a "first symbol presentation pattern" is determined in which the first decorative symbol (main symbol) and the second decorative symbol (sub-symbol) are variably displayed so that the presentation contents shown in the "remarks" column of the special symbol variation pattern table T1 in Fig. 344 are executed. Also, when the command received from the main CPU 201 is a variation pattern command for the first special symbol, in the time-saving game state, a "second symbol presentation pattern" is determined in which the first decorative symbol (main symbol) is not displayed and the second decorative symbol (sub-symbol) is variably displayed so that the presentation contents shown in the "remarks" column of the special symbol variation pattern table J1 in Fig. 345 are executed.

In this way, when in the time-saving play state, a "second pattern presentation pattern" is determined in which the first decorative pattern (main pattern) is not displayed and the second decorative pattern (sub-pattern) is variably displayed as a variable presentation related to the lottery result of the first special pattern, so that a presentation using the first decorative pattern (main pattern) is not performed, and it is possible to prevent the variable presentation related to the lottery result of the first special pattern from interfering with the variable presentation related to the lottery result of the normal pattern using the sixth pattern presentation pattern described below.

(An example of a process for determining a performance pattern when a command for changing a second special symbol is received)
In addition, in the presentation pattern determination process, when the command received from the main CPU 201 is a variation pattern command of the second special symbol, if it corresponds to the "variation pattern (0AH) of the first special symbol," a BONUS entry presentation that notifies the entry into the BONUS state described later is executed as shown in FIG. 344, and a "third symbol presentation pattern" is determined in which the first decorative symbol (main symbol) is not displayed and the second decorative symbol (sub-symbol) is variably displayed. In addition, if it corresponds to the "variation pattern (1AH) of the second special symbol," a BONUS continuation presentation is executed as shown in FIG. 344, and a "fourth symbol presentation pattern" is determined in which the first decorative symbol (main symbol) is not displayed and the second decorative symbol (sub-symbol) is variably displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, in the extremely rare case (1/65536), when the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a special symbol variation pattern (00H) corresponding to a miss, a "fifth symbol presentation pattern" is determined in which the first decorative symbol (main symbol) is not displayed and the second decorative symbol (secondary symbol) is variably displayed.

In this way, when the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the third symbol presentation pattern (BONUS entry presentation) or the fourth symbol presentation pattern (BONUS continuation presentation) is determined as the variable presentation, and presentations related to the "small hit presentation pattern" and the "big hit presentation pattern" are executed as shown in FIG. 372 described below, so that the variable presentation related to the result of the lottery for the second special symbol, the winning presentation performed in the small hit game state, and the winning presentation performed in the big hit game state can be made to look like a series of winning presentations (BONUS presentations), further increasing the interest of the game.

(An example of a process for determining a performance pattern when a normal symbol variation pattern command is received)
Also, in the presentation pattern determination process, if the command received from the main CPU 201 is a normal pattern variation pattern command, in the normal game state, the presentation pattern is not determined so that a presentation related to the normal pattern (first decorative pattern presentation) is not executed, but in the time-saving game state, a "sixth pattern presentation pattern" is determined that variably displays the first decorative pattern (main pattern) so that the presentation content shown in the "Remarks column" of the normal pattern variation pattern table in Figure 350 is executed based on the received normal pattern variation pattern command.

In this way, when in the normal game mode, no variable presentation is performed for the normal symbols, but when in the time-saving game mode, the sixth symbol presentation pattern is determined as the variable presentation for the lottery result for the normal symbols, and a presentation using the first decorative symbol (main symbol) is performed.

Furthermore, when in the time-saving play state, the third or fourth pattern presentation pattern is determined as the variable presentation when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a big win or a small win, so that both the variable presentation related to the normal symbol and the variable presentation related to the lottery result for the second special symbol can be executed, further increasing the interest of the game in the time-saving play state.

(An example of the presentation pattern determination process when a small win start display command is received)
In addition, in the presentation pattern determination process, when the command received from the main CPU 201 is a small win start display command, the "continuous number counter" in the work RAM 303 is referenced, and a "small win presentation pattern" in which the first BONUS presentation is executed is determined. In particular, in this embodiment, when the "continuous number counter" = 1 (when the first small win game state is entered from the BONUS state), a "first small win presentation pattern" in which the "first BONUS presentation (first time)" is executed as shown in FIG. 372 (b) described later is determined, and when the "continuous number counter" = 2 or more (when the second or subsequent small win game state is entered from the BONUS state), a "second small win presentation pattern" in which the "first BONUS presentation (second or subsequent time)" is executed as shown in FIG. 372 (f) described later is determined.

Also, as described above, in the small win game state, when the passage of the game ball to the V winning hole 9156 is detected, the main CPU 201 sends a V pass command to the sub-control circuit 300. In the performance pattern determination process, if the command received from the main CPU 201 is a V pass command, the sub-CPU 301 determines a "V pass notification performance pattern" in which a V pass notification performance is executed. In addition, in this performance pattern determination process, if the command received from the main CPU 201 is a V pass command, it is desirable to refer to the "continuous number counter" in the work RAM 303, and determine the "V pass notification performance pattern" when the "continuous number counter" = 1 (when the game state is the first small win game state from the BONUS state), and not determine the "V pass notification performance pattern" when the "continuous number counter" = 2 or more (when the game state is the second or subsequent small win game state from the BONUS state).

(An example of a process for determining a presentation pattern when a jackpot start display command is received)
In addition, in the presentation pattern determination process, when the command received from the main CPU 201 is a jackpot start display command, the "consecutive number counter" in the work RAM 303 is referenced, and a "jackpot presentation pattern" in which the second BONUS presentation is executed is determined. In particular, in this embodiment, when the "consecutive number counter" = 1 (when the first jackpot game state is entered from the BONUS state), a "first jackpot presentation pattern" in which the "second BONUS presentation (start)" and "second BONUS presentation (opening)" are executed as shown in Figs. 372(c) and (d) described later is determined, and when the "consecutive number counter" = 2 or more (when the second or subsequent jackpot game state is entered from the BONUS state), a "second jackpot presentation pattern" in which the "second BONUS presentation (opening)" is executed as shown in Fig. 372(d) described later is determined.

At S9532, the sub-CPU 301 executes a process for generating an animation request. In this process, an animation request is generated based on the performance pattern determined at S9531 above. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S9533.

In S9533, the sub-CPU 301 executes a drawing request generation process. In this process, a drawing request is generated based on the animation request generated in S9532. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S9534.

At S9534, the sub-CPU 301 executes a sound request generation process. In this process, a sound request is generated based on the performance pattern determined at S9531 above. Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S9535.

In S9535, the sub-CPU 301 executes a lamp request generation process. In this process, a lamp request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S9531 above. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S9536.

At S9536, the sub-CPU 301 executes a reel request generation process. In this process, a reel request is generated based on the performance pattern determined at S9531 above. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S9537.

At S9537, the sub-CPU 301 executes a process for generating a performance button actuation request. In this process, a performance button actuation request is generated based on the performance pattern determined at S9531 above. Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 ends the performance mode determination process and transfers the process to the drawing control process (see FIG. 368).

[11-6. Game state transition diagram]
The game states to which the game is changed by the various processes executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 as described above will be explained with reference to a game state transition diagram. Figure 370 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state in the ninth pachinko game machine.

The ninth pachinko gaming machine has two game states: a normal game state in which the gameplay is mainly related to the drawing of the first special symbol, and a time-saving game state in which the gameplay is mainly related to the drawing of the normal symbol.

When distinguishing between normal game states in detail, the normal game state during the control period of the first special symbol, which is performed based on the start information of the first special symbol, is called the "first normal game state," and the normal game state during the control period of the second special symbol, which is performed based on the start information of the second special symbol, is called the "second normal game state."

As described above, the "first normal game state" is the normal game state during the control period of the first special symbol that is performed based on the start information of the first special symbol, and is a normal game state in which hitting from the left is the normal game mode. Therefore, in the first normal game state, it is easy for a game ball to enter the first start hole 9120, but it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second start hole 9140.

The "second normal game state" is a normal game state during the control period of the second special symbol that is performed based on the start information of the second special symbol, and is a normal game state during the control period of the second special symbol that is performed when the variable display number of the normal symbol is the final time-saving number in the time-saving game state, the second start hole 9140 is opened based on a lottery for the normal symbol, and a game ball enters the second start hole 9140. Here, the second normal game state specifies left-handed hitting as the regular game mode, but when the variable display of the second special symbol starts, the pullback rate that transitions back to the time-saving game state is extremely high, so right-handed hitting may also be specified as the regular game mode. In this way, since the second normal game state may specify left hitting or right hitting, it is desirable not to have the display device 7 notify the normal game mode in the second normal game state, but to have the display device 7 notify the left hitting as the normal game mode when transitioning from the second normal game state to the first normal game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the gaming state during the control period of the second special pattern, which is carried out based on the start information of the second special pattern, is also called the "BONUS state", and the "BONUS state" refers to a state that includes the above-mentioned "second normal gaming state", the time-saving gaming state during the control period of the second special pattern, which is carried out based on the start information of the second special pattern, the big win gaming state, and the small win gaming state.

As described above, the time-saving game state is distinguished from the viewpoint of the time-saving transition condition (time-saving occurrence condition), and includes the "A time-saving game state" which is transitioned to after the end of the jackpot game state triggered by a jackpot, and the "B time-saving game state" which is transitioned to after the variable display count of the special pattern reaches the ceiling value without being triggered by a jackpot. In addition, the "A time-saving game state" is distinguished from the viewpoint of the time-saving end condition and the operation mode during the time-saving game state (operation pattern of the normal power shutter 9147), and includes the "first time-saving game state", the "second time-saving game state" which is easier to transition to the next jackpot game state than the first time-saving game state, and the "third time-saving game state" which is practically guaranteed to transition to the next jackpot game state.

The "first time-saving game state" is a time-saving game state in which the state flag = 1 and the normal power operation pattern = 01 are set, and the first time-saving number (the number of times that the normal pattern is displayed = 100) is set as the time-saving number of times for the A time-saving end condition, and the time-saving game state in which right-hand hitting is the normal game mode. In the first time-saving game state, the normal power operation pattern = 01 is set, and the first long opening probability in which the long opening pattern is executed based on the normal pattern hit judgment process, normal pattern determination process, and second start hole opening pattern determination process (hereinafter referred to as "normal pattern lottery, etc.") shown in FIG. 364 is set to about 1/135.6 (see FIG. 349). As described above, even if the short opening pattern is executed, it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to enter the second start hole 9140, and even if it is determined that the normal pattern is a hit, it is configured to be treated as a loss.

The "second time-saving game state" is a time-saving game state in which the state flag = 1 and the normal power operation pattern = 02 are set, and the second time-saving number (the number of times that the normal symbol is displayed = 120) is set as the time-saving number of times for the A time-saving end condition, and the right hit is the normal game mode. In the second time-saving game state, the normal power operation pattern = 02 is set, and the second long opening probability based on the lottery of the normal symbol is set to about 1/68.5. In addition, the second time-saving game state is set to a second long opening probability higher than the first long opening probability of the first time-saving game state, and the second time-saving number is set to a number higher than the first time-saving number of the first time-saving game state, so that it is a time-saving game state that is easier to transition to the next big win game state than the first time-saving game state.

The "third time-saving game state" is a time-saving game state in which the state flag = 1 and the normal power operation pattern = 02 are set, and the third time-saving number (the number of times that the normal pattern is displayed variable = 10,000 times) is set as the number of times of time-saving for the A time-saving end condition, and it is a time-saving game state in which right-hand hit is the normal game mode. In the third time-saving game state, the normal power operation pattern = 02 is set, and the second long opening probability based on the lottery of the normal pattern is set to about 1/68.5. In the third time-saving game state, the third time-saving number (the number of times that the normal pattern is displayed variable = 10,000 times) is set as the number of times of time-saving, which is substantially guaranteed to transition to the next big win game state, and it is a time-saving game state in which transition to the next big win game state is substantially guaranteed.

The "B time-saving game state" is a time-saving game state in which the state flag = 2 and normal power operation pattern = 02 are set, and the fourth time-saving number (the number of times the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner = 600 times) is set as the time-saving number of times for the B time-saving end condition, and it is a time-saving game state in which right-hand hits are the regular game mode. In the B time-saving game state, the normal power operation pattern = 02 is set, and the probability of opening the second long, based on the lottery of the normal symbol, is set to approximately 1/68.5.

(Transition Control of First Normal Gaming State)
As shown in FIG. 370, in the first normal game state, when a game ball enters the first start hole 9120, a "jackpot" or "miss" is determined based on the start information of the first special symbol (see FIG. 339), and when a "jackpot" is determined, a jackpot game state is entered. Then, after the jackpot game state triggered by the start information of the first special symbol in the first normal game state ends, depending on the selected special symbol, a "first time-saving game state" is entered with a selection rate of 90%, and a "second time-saving game state" is entered with a selection rate of 10% (see FIG. 343).

In addition, in the first normal game state (including the second normal game state), after the number of times the special symbol changes display reaches 600 times, the game state transitions from the normal game state to the "B time-saving game state."

(Transition control of first time-saving gaming state)
In the first time-saving game state, when a game ball passes through the normal symbol operation area 9126 and the first long opening probability (approximately 1/135.6) is won based on a normal symbol lottery, etc., the second starting hole 9140 opens, allowing the game ball to enter the second starting hole 9140.

When a game ball enters the second start hole 9140, start information for the second special pattern is acquired, and the acquired start information for the second special pattern is stored in a FIFO format in either the special pattern determination memory area (0), the second special pattern start memory area (1), or the second special pattern start memory area (2). In other words, when a game ball enters the second start hole 9140, it is possible to store start information for the second special pattern up to three times, the amount of change and the number of reserved second special patterns (2). Then, when a game ball enters the second start hole 9140, the state transitions from the "first time-saving game state" to the "BONUS state".

In addition, in the first time-saving game state, if the variable display of the normal symbols for the first time-saving number of times ends without a game ball entering the second starting hole 9140, the game state will transition from the "first time-saving game state" to the "first normal game state."

(Transition control of second time-saving gaming state)
In the second time-saving game state, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol operation area 9126 and the second long opening probability (approximately 1/68.5) is won based on a normal symbol lottery, etc., the second starting hole 9140 opens, allowing the game ball to enter the second starting hole 9140.

When a game ball enters the second start hole 9140, start information for up to three second special symbols is stored, similar to the first time-saving game state, and the game transitions from the "second time-saving game state" to the "BONUS state."

In addition, in the second time-saving game state, if the variable display of the normal pattern for the second time-saving number of times ends without a game ball entering the second starting hole 9140, the game state will transition from the "second time-saving game state" to the "first normal game state."

(Transition control of the third time-saving gaming state)
In the third time-saving game state, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol operation area 9126 and the second long opening probability (approximately 1/68.5) is won based on a normal symbol lottery, etc., the second starting hole 9140 opens, allowing the game ball to enter the second starting hole 9140.

When a game ball enters the second start hole 9140, start information for up to three second special symbols is stored, similar to the first time-saving game state, and the game transitions from the "third time-saving game state" to the "BONUS state."

In addition, in the third time-saving game state, the third time-saving number (the number of times that the normal symbols are variable displayed = 10,000 times) is the number of times that essentially guarantees a transition to the next big win game state, and there is essentially no transition from the "third time-saving game state" to the "first normal game state."

(Transition control of B time-saving gaming state)
In the B time-saving game state, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol operation area 9126 and the second long opening probability (approximately 1/68.5) is won based on a normal symbol lottery, etc., the second starting hole 9140 opens, allowing the game ball to enter the second starting hole 9140.

When a game ball enters the second start hole 9140, the start information for up to three second special symbols is stored, similar to the first time-saving game state, and the game transitions from the "B time-saving game state" to the "BONUS state."

In addition, even in the B time-saving game state, the fourth time-saving number (the number of times that the normal symbols are variable displayed = 600 times) is the number of times that essentially guarantees a transition to the next big win game state, and there is essentially no transition from the "B time-saving game state" to the "first normal game state."

(BONUS State Transition Control)
In the BONUS state, first, a lottery for the second special symbol is performed based on start information for the second special symbol.

Here, in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability of a big win is set to approximately 1/231.6, but the probability of a small win is set to approximately 1/1.004, so that a big win or small win is determined with a combined probability of 65535/65536 (see FIG. 339). In this embodiment, when a small win game state is played due to a small win being won, the game ball that enters the second big win opening 9151 is configured to be able to pass through the V win opening 9156 (see FIG. 337 and FIG. 342), and when the game ball passes through the V win opening 9156, the game transitions to a big win game state from the second route.

For this reason, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 9140, there is a 1/1 (65535/65536) chance of transitioning to a jackpot game state, and the game state during the control period of the second special symbol, which is carried out based on the start information of the second special symbol, corresponds to a BONUS state, just like the jackpot game state and the small jackpot game state.

In the BONUS state, after the second special symbol is selected, the jackpot game state will be played from the first route triggered by a jackpot, or the jackpot game state will be played from the second route triggered by a small jackpot. In addition, in the BONUS state, the start information for up to three second special symbols is stored, so that up to three jackpot game states can be played consecutively.

In the BONUS state, when all jackpot game states triggered by the start information of the second special symbol have ended, depending on the selected symbol of the second special symbol, there is a 90% selection rate for transition to the "second time-saving game state," and a 10% selection rate for transition to the "third time-saving game state" (see Figure 343).

In this way, in this embodiment, the game is composed of a first game feature in which the player aims to enter a jackpot game state by drawing a first special symbol during normal game play, and a second game feature in which the player aims to open the second starting hole 9140 long by drawing a normal symbol during time-saving game play. This not only combines a so-called type 1 pachinko game machine with a so-called type 2 pachinko game machine, but also creates unprecedented gameplay and can increase the excitement of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of a long reel opening differs depending on the normal power operation pattern during the time-saving game state, so multiple time-saving game states with different long reel opening probabilities can be enjoyed, further increasing the excitement of the game.

In particular, in this embodiment, the lottery for the second special symbol (the game ball entering the second starting hole 9140) is configured to allow a substantial (approximately 1/1) transition to a jackpot game state, so that when in the time-saving game state, the second gameplay of aiming for a long opening of the second starting hole 9140 by the lottery for a normal symbol and the transition results to multiple time-saving game states can be made even more interesting, and the excitement of the game can be further increased.

[11-7. Display contents of the performance]
The display contents of the effects executed under the control of the main control circuit 200 and the sub-control circuit 300 etc. will be described using display images displayed in the display area of the display device 7.

(Basic configuration of display image)
First, the basic configuration of a display image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 will be described with reference to Fig. 371. Fig. 371 is an example of an explanatory diagram of the basic configuration of a display image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. Fig. 371(a) shows the basic configuration of a display image in the first normal gaming state, and Fig. 371(b) shows the basic configuration of a display image in a time-saving gaming state excluding the BONUS state.

(Basic Configuration of Display Image in First Normal Gaming State)
As shown in Figure 371 (a), the basic configuration of the display image in the first normal game state is configured so that a left pattern 9071L, a middle pattern 9071C, and a right pattern 9071R can be displayed as main patterns of decorative patterns corresponding to the first special pattern at the center of the display area of the display device 7.

In addition, the right corner of the display area of the display device 7 is configured to be able to display small first sub-pattern 9072 as a sub-pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the first special pattern, second sub-pattern 9073 as a sub-pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern, and third sub-pattern 9075 as a sub-pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the normal pattern.

In this embodiment, when the first special symbol is displayed in the first normal game state, in addition to the main symbols, the left symbol 9071L, the middle symbol 9071C, and the right symbol 9071R, the first sub-symbol 9072 is also displayed in a variable manner. When the normal symbol is displayed in the first normal game state, only the third sub-symbol 9075 is displayed in a variable manner, and the main decorative symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is not displayed. When the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, as will be described later in the BONUS state, only the second sub-symbol 9073 is displayed in a variable manner, and the main decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is not displayed.

In the lower left of the display area of the display device 7, a reserved image corresponding to the reserved number of the first special symbol can be displayed, and a first reserved image 9074a indicating that start information is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (1), a second reserved image 9074b indicating that start information is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (2), a third reserved image 9074c indicating that start information is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (3), and a fourth reserved image 9074d indicating that start information is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (4) can be displayed according to the reserved number of the first special symbol. Also, in response to the reserved image, the reserved image 9075 indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is being performed is displayed. In this embodiment, a reserved image corresponding to the reserved number of the second special symbol is not displayed in the first normal game state, but a reserved image corresponding to the reserved number of the second special symbol may be displayed.

(Basic configuration of display image in time-saving game state)
As shown in Figure 371 (b), the basic configuration of the display image in a time-saving game state excluding the BONUS state is such that a left pattern 9076L, a middle pattern 9076C and a right pattern 9076R can be displayed as main patterns of decorative patterns corresponding to normal patterns at the center of the display area of the display device 7.

In addition, in the right corner of the display area of the display device 7, a first sub-pattern 9072 corresponding to the first special pattern, a second sub-pattern 9073 corresponding to the second special pattern, and a third sub-pattern 9075 corresponding to the normal pattern can be displayed small, just as in the first normal game state.

In this embodiment, when the variable display of normal symbols is performed during time-saving play, in addition to the variable display of the main symbols, left symbol 9076L, middle symbol 9076C, and right symbol 9076R, the variable display of the third sub-symbol 9075 is also performed. Also, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed during time-saving play, only the variable display of the first sub-symbol 9072 is performed, and the main symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is not displayed.

In the lower left of the display area of the display device 7, a reserved image corresponding to the reserved number of normal symbols can be displayed, and a first reserved image 9077a indicating that start information is stored in the normal symbol start memory area (1), a second reserved image 9077b indicating that start information is stored in the normal symbol start memory area (2), a third reserved image 9077c indicating that start information is stored in the normal symbol start memory area (3), and a fourth reserved image 9077d indicating that start information is stored in the normal symbol start memory area (4) can be displayed according to the reserved number of normal symbols. Also, the reserved image 9078 indicating that the variable display of the normal symbol is being performed is displayed in response to the reserved image. In this embodiment, reserved images corresponding to the reserved number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed in the time-saving game state, but reserved images corresponding to the reserved number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be displayed.

The upper right corner of the display area of the display device 7 is configured to display a right-hit instruction image 9079 that instructs right-hitting as the correct game mode.

The upper left corner of the display area of the display device 7 is configured to be able to display a time-saving count image 9080 indicating the remaining number of times the time-saving count is reached under the time-saving end condition. When the third time-saving count (the number of times the normal symbols are variable displayed = 10,000) is set in the third time-saving game state, the infinity symbol "∞" is displayed as the time-saving count image 9080 to indicate that a transition to the next big win game state is guaranteed.

In this way, in the first normal game state, the main symbol and reserved image of the decorative symbol correspond to the first special symbol so that it is easy to recognize the first game characteristic of aiming for a jackpot game state by drawing the first special symbol, and in the time-saving game state, the main symbol and reserved image of the decorative symbol correspond to the normal symbol so that it is easy to recognize the second game characteristic of aiming for a long opening of the second starting hole 9140 by drawing the normal symbol. Then, in the time-saving game state, a variable performance of the main symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the normal symbol (left symbol 9076L, middle symbol 9076C, and right symbol 9076R) is performed. In other words, the first decorative symbol (main symbol) becomes a symbol corresponding to the first special symbol in the normal game state, and is replaced with a symbol corresponding to the normal symbol in the time-saving game state.

(BONUS state effect)
Next, referring to Figure 372, we will explain the game state during the control period of the second special pattern, which is carried out based on the start information of the second special pattern, and the presentation of the BONUS state, including the big win game state and the small win game state.

In addition, in the presentation of the BONUS state, the first sub-pattern 9072, second sub-pattern 9073, third sub-pattern 9075, and right-hit instruction image 9079 described in FIG. 371 are displayed small, and since there is a risk of interfering with the explanation of the presentation contents, the symbols are omitted in the illustration. Also, the first sub-pattern 9072, second sub-pattern 9073, and third sub-pattern 9075 are configured to be always displayable in the game state (second normal game state and time-saving game state) during the control period of the second special pattern performed based on the start information of the second special pattern, but are configured to be hidden in the big win game state and small win game state.

Figure 372 (a) shows an example of a display image of a "BONUS entry effect" that can be executed during the initial variable display of the second special pattern when the game ball enters the second starting hole 9140, the number of reserved second special patterns is 0 when the starting condition of the second special pattern is met, and the "first special pattern variable pattern (0AH)" is determined.

As shown in FIG. 372(a), in the "BONUS entry performance", as an example, a right-hit instruction image 9079 and a congratulatory image announcing entry into the BONUS state are displayed in the display area. This "BONUS entry performance" can be executed over the "first variable display time (e.g., 10 seconds)" and "symbol determination time (e.g., 540 ms)" associated with the variable pattern (0AH) of the first special symbol. Also, in the "BONUS entry performance", only the second sub-symbol 9073, which is a sub-symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol, is variably displayed, and the main symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is not displayed.

Figure 372 (b) is an example of a display image of the "first BONUS effect (first time)" that is performed when the variable display of the second special pattern ends and the game moves from the BONUS state to the first small win game state.

As shown in FIG. 372(b), in the "first BONUS performance (first time)", as an example, a right hit instruction image 9079, a specific character image, a specific background image, and a V instruction image such as "Aim for the V!" which instructs a right hit and instructs the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 9156 in the second large winning hole 9151 are displayed in the display area. Also, although not shown, in the "first BONUS performance (first time)", when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 9156, a V passing notification effect can also be executed which notifies the player that the game ball has passed through the V winning hole 9156.

Figure 372 (c) is an example of a display image of the "Second Bonus Presentation (at the start)" which is performed at the start of the first big win game state (the opening time of the first big win game state) after the game ball passes through the V winning port 9156 in the first small win game state.

As shown in FIG. 372(c), in the "second BONUS performance (at the start)," as an example, a right-hit instruction image 9079 and an image of the number of game balls to be acquired, such as "4500 BONUS!!," which indicates the number of game balls that the player can acquire in the BONUS state, are displayed in the display area.

As mentioned above, when the game transitions to the BONUS state, a maximum of three consecutive jackpot game states can be played. In this embodiment, the image of the number of game balls to be acquired shows the number of game balls that the player can acquire in a maximum of three jackpot game states (including the number of game balls that can be acquired in the small jackpot game state) (4,500 balls = 1,500 balls x 3 times).

The image of the number of game balls to be acquired displayed in this manner is configured to be able to display all combinations of the number of game balls to be acquired that correspond to the number of game balls that the player can acquire in a maximum of three jackpot game states. For example, in the case where the winning allocation of the second special symbol in the above-mentioned FIG. 343 is 10R in which 1500 balls can be acquired and 4R in which 600 balls can be acquired, an image corresponding to 4500 balls for three times per 10R, an image corresponding to 3600 balls for two times per 10R and one time per 4R, an image corresponding to 2700 balls for one time per 10R and two times per 4R, and an image corresponding to 1800 balls for three times per 4R are respectively able to be displayed.

If the player is unable to get the maximum three game balls to enter the second starting hole 9140 due to ball jamming or other reasons, an image corresponding to one win (an image corresponding to 1500 balls or an image corresponding to 600 balls) or an image corresponding to two wins (an image corresponding to 3000 balls, an image corresponding to 2100 balls, an image corresponding to 1200 balls) may be displayed. In this case, the player may lose interest because he or she is not awarded the maximum number of jackpots, but by accurately displaying the number of balls expected to be won, it is possible to prevent this loss of interest.

In this embodiment, the image of the number of game balls expected to be won is configured to be displayed in the "second BONUS presentation (start)" at the start of the first big win game state, but it may also be configured to be displayed in the "first BONUS presentation (first time)" after the game ball passes through the V winning hole 9156 during the first small win game state.

Figure 372 (d) is an example of a display image of the "Second Bonus Presentation (Opening)" that is performed in the jackpot gaming state after the opening time of the first jackpot gaming state has elapsed (during a round of the jackpot gaming state).

As shown in FIG. 372(d), in the "Second BONUS Presentation (Open)", as an example, the display area is configured to display a right-hit instruction image 9079, a specific character image, a specific background image, and an acquired ball count image that displays the cumulative number of game balls acquired by the player as a result of game balls entering the first large prize opening 9131 and the second large prize opening 9151.

In this embodiment, the acquired game ball number image is configured to display the cumulative number of game balls acquired by the player as a result of game balls entering the first large prize winning port 9131 and the second large prize winning port 9151 as the number of game balls acquired by the player in the small win game state and the big win game state, but it may be configured to display the cumulative number of game balls acquired by the player as a result of game balls entering the first large prize winning port 9131 as the number of game balls acquired by the player in the big win game state. Furthermore, the acquired game ball number image may be configured to display the cumulative number of game balls acquired by the player as a result of game balls entering the first large prize winning port 9131, the second large prize winning port 9151, and the general prize winning port 122.

Figure 372 (e) shows an example of a display image of a "BONUS continuation effect" that is executable during the variable display of the second special pattern from the second time onwards, when the number of reserved second special patterns > 0 when the start condition of the second special pattern is met after the big win game state ends (i.e., when the start information of the second special pattern is stored in the second special pattern start memory area (1) or the second special pattern start memory area (2)), and the "variable pattern of the second special pattern (1AH)" is determined.

As shown in FIG. 372(e), in the "BONUS continuation effect", as an example, a right-hit instruction image 9079, a specific character image, a specific background image, and an image of the number of acquired game balls are displayed in the display area, and the effect is configured to be such that the BONUS effect performed in the big win game state or the small win game state is continuing. This "BONUS continuation effect" can be executed over the "second variable display time (e.g., 1 second)" and the "pattern determination time (e.g., 540 ms)" associated with the variable pattern (1AH) of the second special pattern. In addition, in the "BONUS continuation effect", only the second sub-pattern 9073 as the sub-pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern is displayed in a variable manner, and the main pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern is not displayed.

Figure 372 (f) is an example of a display image of the "First Bonus Presentation (2nd or later)" that is performed when the variable display of the second special symbol ends and the game transitions to the 2nd or later small win game state.

As shown in FIG. 372(f), in the "first BONUS effect (second or later)," as an example, a right hit instruction image 9079, a specific character image, a V instruction image, and an acquired game ball number image are displayed in the display area. Also, as described above, when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 9156 while FIG. 372(b) is displayed, the V passing notification effect can be executed. However, even if the game ball passes through the V winning hole 9156 while FIG. 372(f) is displayed, it is preferable not to execute the V passing notification effect. When the V passing notification effect is not executed, it becomes possible to show the player multiple jackpot game states seamlessly, which can increase the interest of the game.

Note that the V-passing notification performance may be executed when FIG. 372(f) is displayed, but when executing the V-passing notification performance when FIG. 372(f) is displayed, it is desirable to execute the V-passing notification performance in an execution time that is shorter than the execution time of the V-passing notification performance executed when FIG. 372(b) is displayed.

After the game ball passes through the V winning hole 9156 in the second or subsequent small win game state, the game state transitions to the big win game state. However, at the start of the second or subsequent big win game state, the "second BONUS effect (at the start)" as shown in FIG. 372(c) is not performed, and even during the opening time of the big win game state, the "second BONUS effect (during opening)" as shown in FIG. 372(d) is performed.

In this way, as the effect of the BONUS state, a "BONUS entry effect" or a "BONUS continuation effect" is executed as a variable effect during the variable display of the second special symbol, a "first BONUS effect" is executed in a small win game state, and a "second BONUS effect" is executed in a big win game state. And, because the effects executed in the "BONUS entry effect", "first BONUS effect", "second BONUS effect" and "BONUS continuation effect" are related to each other, a group of cohesive effects can be executed as an effect of one BONUS state, which can further increase the interest of the game.

In particular, during the second or subsequent variable display of the second special pattern and during the small win and big win game states, no special effects like those in Fig. 372(a)-(c) are performed, but an effect similar to the "second BONUS effect (open)" in the big win game state as shown in Fig. 372(d) is performed, so that multiple big win game states can be made to appear seamless (like a group of big win game states), further enhancing the excitement of the game.

In addition, during the initial variable display of the second special pattern and during the small win and big win game states, special effects such as those shown in Fig. 372 (a)-(c) are performed, so that it is possible to notify the player that they have entered the BONUS state, and to notify them in advance of the number of game balls that they can win in the BONUS state, which increases the player's delight and makes the game even more enjoyable.

<Ninth modified example of pachinko game machine>
The technology described in the embodiment of the ninth pachinko game machine may be applied to a slot machine. When applied to a slot machine, the various effects executed in the ninth pachinko game machine may be replaced with effects by a display device, reels, etc. provided in the slot machine. In addition, the time-saving game state (A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state, and third time-saving game state) may be replaced with any of the following states: replay time (RT state) in which the replay probability of replay is improved, assist time (AT state) in which a predetermined small role or the operation content of the stop button is notified, and assist replay time (ART state) in which the replay time and assist time are controlled simultaneously. In addition, the big win and small win may be replaced with any of the following: winning a specific role, a specific combination of symbols being stopped and displayed (a specific combination of symbols being awarded), winning an entry win in the RT state, winning an entry win in the AT state, and winning an entry win in the ART state.

(others)
The above-mentioned ninth pachinko gaming machine can apply the technology of each embodiment including the modified examples. The above-mentioned embodiment does not limit the contents of the present invention, and can be modified to the extent that it does not deviate from the scope of the claims.

In addition, the effects described in the ninth pachinko gaming machine are merely a list of the most favorable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in each embodiment of the present invention.

Furthermore, the above [4. Expansion Example] can also be applied to the ninth pachinko gaming machine, as long as there is no inconsistency in its gameplay or control.

The following additionally describes techniques related to the present invention.
<Additional Note: The Fourth Pachinko Machine>
2. Background Art
Conventionally, there are known gaming machines that, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole, display a variable special pattern on a pattern display device, and control the jackpot gaming state on the condition that the display result becomes a predetermined specific display mode (so-called Type 1 pachinko gaming machines), and gaming machines that, based on the gaming ball entering the starting hole, change a movable member of a variable winning device (large winning hole) from a state in which it is difficult for the gaming ball to enter to a state in which it is easier, and control the jackpot gaming state on the condition that the gaming ball that entered the variable winning device enters a specific area provided within the variable winning device (so-called Type 2 gaming machines).

In addition to the jackpot and starting hole, the game area is also provided with a gate for activating a normal symbol, and when the game ball passes through the gate, a lottery for a normal symbol is held. If the lottery for a normal symbol is won, a movable member (a so-called electric tulip) provided at a specific starting hole opens.
In order to increase the interest of the game, most gaming machines equipped with such movable members have a time-saving game state in which the movable members are more likely to open per unit time, and a non-time-saving game state in which the movable members are less likely to open per unit time (see Patent Document 1).

[Prior Art Literature]
[Patent Documents]
[Patent Document 1] JP 2009-273866 A

Summary of the Invention
[Problem to be solved by the invention]
However, with regard to the operation of the movable member provided at a specific starting port, the only thing of interest was whether the game ball passed through the passing gate when in a time-saving game state, or whether the game ball passed through the passing gate when in a non-time-saving game state, and there was room for further improvement in order to increase the interest of the game.

The objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the enjoyment of gaming.

[Means for solving the problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine of the present invention comprises a gaming board (e.g., gaming panel 3100, 4100) in which a gaming area through which gaming balls flow down is formed, a starting area detection means (e.g., first starting area switch 3121) for detecting the entry of a gaming ball into a starting area (e.g., first starting area 3120) provided in the gaming area, a passing area detection means (e.g., first passing gate switch 3127A) for detecting the entry of a gaming ball into a passing area (first passing gate 3126A) provided in the gaming area, a starting variable winning device (e.g., normal electric device 3146) provided in the gaming area and changeable between an open state which makes it easier to accept a gaming ball and a closed state which makes it harder to accept a gaming ball, normal game determination means (e.g., main CPU 201) for making an opening/closing determination as to whether or not to change the starting variable winning device from a closed state to an open state on the condition that a gaming ball has been detected by the passing area detection means, and a variable display of a normal pattern on a normal pattern display device. and after a predetermined variable display time has elapsed, a normal symbol display control means (e.g., the main CPU 201) that performs control to stop and display a normal symbol on the normal symbol display device; an opening mode determination means (e.g., the main CPU 201) that determines an opening mode that changes the start variable winning device to the open state and the closed state; a start opening/closing control means (e.g., the main CPU 201) that performs opening/closing control to change the start variable winning device to the open state and the closed state according to the opening mode determined by the opening mode determination means when a specific normal symbol is stopped and displayed by the normal symbol display control means; and a game state control means (e.g., the main CPU 201) that transitions to a predetermined game state (e.g., a C time-saving game state) and controls the transitioned game state when a special condition (e.g., a C time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed) is established in response to the detection of a game ball by the start area detection means.
The normal game judgment means performs the opening/closing judgment based on the game state when the variable display of the normal pattern is started by the normal pattern display control means, and the opening mode determination means is capable of determining the opening mode based on the game state when a specific normal pattern is stopped and displayed by the normal pattern display control means.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises: a start variable winning device detection means (e.g., a second start port switch 3141) for detecting the entry of a gaming ball into the start variable winning device; a first special game control means (e.g., the main CPU 201) for controlling a special game advantageous to a player when a first transition condition (e.g., when a stop display mode indicating a "jackpot" is derived) is established in response to the detection of a gaming ball by the start area detection means; and a second special game control means (e.g., the main CPU 201) for controlling the special game when a second transition condition (e.g., when a gaming ball that has entered the V attacker 3152 passes through the V winning port) is established in response to the detection of a gaming ball by the start variable winning device detection means.
It is desirable that the second transition condition is set to be more likely to be satisfied than the first transition condition.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises: a special game determination means (e.g., the main CPU 201) which determines whether or not to control a special game advantageous to a player on condition that a gaming ball has been detected by the starting area detection means; and a special symbol display control means (e.g., the main CPU 201) which causes the special symbol display device to start variable display of special symbols, and controls the special symbol display device to stop displaying special symbols after a predetermined variable display time has elapsed.
It is desirable that the game state control means transitions to a specific game state (e.g., a time-saving game state consisting of a time-saving game state A, a time-saving game state B, and a time-saving game state C) when the special game judgment means determines that the special game will not be controlled and the special pattern display control means stops and displays a specific special pattern (e.g., a time-saving game state C, etc.), thereby being able to control the specific game state.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises: a variable time table storage means (e.g., the main ROM 202) storing a plurality of variable time tables (e.g., the variable pattern tables of special symbols shown in Figs. 113 to 116) in which the selection rate of the variable display time of each special symbol is different for the variable display times of a plurality of special symbols including at least a first variable display time of the special symbol that is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol and a second variable display time of the special symbol that is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol; a variable time table determination means (e.g., the main CPU 201) for determining one variable time table from the plurality of variable time tables stored in the variable time table storage means according to a predetermined change condition (e.g., small win symbol switching information, the presence or absence of operation of the limiter function, etc.); and a special symbol variable time determination means (e.g., the main CPU 201) for determining the variable display time of the special symbol;
It is preferable that the special symbol variation time determining means is capable of determining a variable display time of the special symbol based on the variation time table determined by the variation time table determining means.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises a special symbol determination means (e.g., the main CPU 201) for determining the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device according to the result of the determination by the special game determination means;
The special symbol determination means is capable of determining a first special symbol (e.g., a big win symbol) when it is determined by the special game determination means that a first special game capable of providing a first benefit is to be controlled, and is capable of determining a second special symbol (e.g., a "hit symbol for opening a special device" corresponding to small win symbol switching information) when it is determined by the special game determination means that a second special game capable of providing a second benefit having a lower profit rate than the first benefit is to be controlled, and it is desirable that the variable time table determination means is capable of determining a special variable time table from among a plurality of variable time tables (e.g., variable pattern tables T1 to T3 of special symbols in a normal game state shown in Figs. 113(1) to (3), and variable pattern tables C1 to C3 of special symbols in a C-time-saving game state shown in Figs. 114(1) to (3)) stored in the variable time table storage means when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed by the special symbol display control means, in determining the variable display time of the special symbol from the next time onwards.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a special game number counting means (e.g., the main CPU 201) for counting the number of times the control of the special game is performed under a specific condition (A time-shortened gaming state),
It is desirable that the game state control means, when a specific number of times (e.g., a limiter number) is counted by the special game counting means, transition to a normal game state which is disadvantageous to the player, and that the variable time table determination means, when a specific number of times is counted by the special game counting means, is capable of determining a specific variable time table (e.g., special pattern variable pattern tables Z1, Z2 shown in FIG. 116) in which the second variable display time of the special pattern is executed more frequently than the first variable display time of the special pattern until a predetermined termination condition is met.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the specific special symbol (e.g., C time-saving symbol) is stopped and displayed by the special symbol display control means, the game state control means transitions to the specific game state (e.g., a time-saving game state consisting of A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, and C time-saving game state, mainly C time-saving game state), and terminates control of the specific game state after a first termination condition is established (e.g., one variable display of a special symbol), and when the first special special symbol (e.g., a jackpot symbol) is stopped and displayed by the special symbol display control means, the game state transitions to the specific game state (e.g., a time-saving game state consisting of A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, and C time-saving game state, mainly A time-saving game state), and terminates control of the specific game state after a second termination condition is established (e.g., 100 variable displays of a special symbol), and it is preferable that the first termination condition and the second termination condition are different termination conditions.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the gaming board is provided in the gaming area close to the starting area in the direction of travel of the gaming ball that has passed through the passing area, and the gaming ball that has passed through the passing area is configured to be able to pass through the starting area.

〔Effect of the invention〕
According to the present invention, it is possible to further increase the enjoyment of the game.

<Additional Note: The Fifth Pachinko Machine>
2. Background Art
Conventionally, a starting hole and a big prize hole are provided in the game area where the game ball flows down, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, a lottery for a special symbol is held, and when the lottery for the special symbol is won, the big prize game state is controlled (so-called type 1 pachinko game machine), and when the game ball enters the starting hole, the big prize hole is changed to an open state, and the big prize game state is controlled on the condition that the game ball that entered the big prize hole enters a specific area (so-called type 2 game machine). When controlled to such a big prize game state, the big prize hole is opened in an advantageous opening mode (for example, opening time 29 seconds x 10 rounds, etc.) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter, and prize balls corresponding to the game ball that entered the big prize hole are paid out, so that the player can acquire the game ball.

In addition to the big prize opening and the starting opening, the game area is also provided with a passing opening that activates normal symbols, and when a game ball passes through the passing opening, a lottery for normal symbols is held. If the lottery for the normal symbol is won, a movable member (a so-called electric tulip) provided at a specific starting opening opens. To increase the interest of the game, most gaming machines equipped with such movable members have a time-saving game state in which the movable member is more likely to open per unit time, and a non-time-saving game state in which the movable member is less likely to open per unit time, and in the time-saving game state, the chances of drawing special symbols are increased (see Patent Document 1).

[Prior Art Literature]
[Patent Documents]
[Patent Document 1] JP 2009-273866 A

Summary of the Invention
[Problem to be solved by the invention]
However, even in a gaming machine equipped with a time-saving game mode as in Patent Document 1, if the only opportunity for a player to win a game ball is through a lottery for a special symbol, the gameplay becomes monotonous, and there is still room for improvement in order to increase the interest of the game.

The objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the enjoyment of gaming.

[Means for solving the problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine of the present invention comprises a gaming board (e.g., a gaming panel 5100) in which a gaming area through which gaming balls flow down is formed, normal area detection means (e.g., a first passing port switch 5127A, a second passing port switch 5127B) for detecting the entry of gaming balls into a normal area (e.g., a first passing port 5126A, a second passing port 5126B) provided in the gaming area, a first variable winning device (e.g., a normal electric device 5146) provided in the gaming area and changeable between an open state which makes it easy to receive gaming balls and a closed state which makes it difficult to receive gaming balls, and a second variable winning device (e.g., a special electric device 5133) provided in the gaming area and changeable between an open state which makes it easy to receive gaming balls and a closed state which makes it difficult to receive gaming balls, and an opening/closing determination as to whether or not to change the first variable winning device to an open state on the condition that a gaming ball is detected by the normal area detection means. a first variable winning device detection means (e.g., a start switch 5141) for detecting an entry of a game ball into the first variable winning device; a benefit awarding determination means (e.g., the main CPU 201) for determining whether or not to award one of a plurality of types of benefits including a special benefit (e.g., a small win) for opening the second variable winning device on the condition that a game ball has been detected by the first variable winning device detection means, and a status benefit (e.g., a time-saving win) for controlling a predetermined game status without opening the second variable winning device; and a game status control means (e.g., the main CPU 201) for controlling the execution of a normal game status in which the first variable winning device is unlikely to be opened, or a specific game status (e.g., a time-saving game status) in which the first variable winning device is likely to be opened.
The advantage awarding determination means is more likely to determine that either the special advantage or the state advantage will be awarded than to determine that neither the special advantage nor the state advantage will be awarded, and the game state control means is characterized in that it becomes possible to execute the specific game state when the advantage awarding determination means determines that the state advantage will be awarded.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the benefit awarding determination means determines whether to award any of a plurality of types of benefits, including a first special game (e.g., a big win game state) that changes the second variable winning device between an open state and a closed state according to a first opening mode, a second special game (e.g., a small win game state) that changes the second variable winning device between an open state and a closed state according to a second opening mode that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first opening mode, and the state benefit, and it is desirable that the means is more likely to determine that the second special game should be awarded than the first special game.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the benefit awarding determination means judges a predetermined number of times (e.g., one time of time-saving), the normal gaming state can be executed from the specific gaming state, and if the benefit awarding determination means judges that the state benefit will be awarded before the judgment of the predetermined number of times is made, it is desirable that the specific gaming state can be executed until the judgment of the predetermined number of times is made again.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific game state includes a first specific game state (e.g., time-saving game state A) that can be executed after the benefit-granting determination means has determined that the special benefit will be granted, and a second specific game state (e.g., time-saving game state C) that can be executed after the benefit-granting determination means has determined that the state benefit will be granted, the first specific game state being a game state that is more advantageous to the player (e.g., has a greater number of time-saving plays) than the second specific game state, and it is desirable that the game state control means, when executing the first specific game state, is capable of continuing to execute the first specific game state without executing the second specific game state if the benefit-granting determination means has determined that the state benefit will be granted.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a presentation means for performing a predetermined presentation (for example, a sub-control circuit 300 and a sub-CPU 301 for controlling the display device 7, the speaker 32, and the LED group 46),
It is desirable that, when the special benefit is awarded, the presentation means is capable of performing a common special effect (e.g., a basic bonus time effect or a specialized bonus time effect) that can be executed across a plurality of the special benefits, and, when the benefit awarding determination means determines that the state benefit will be awarded, is capable of performing a continuing special effect (e.g., a rewind effect) that suggests that the special effect will be further extended and continued.

〔Effect of the invention〕
According to the present invention, it is possible to further increase the enjoyment of the game.

<Additional Note: The 6th Pachinko Machine>
2. Background Art
Conventionally, a starting hole and a big prize hole are provided in the game area where the game ball flows down, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, a lottery for a special symbol is held, and when the lottery for the special symbol is won, the big prize game state is controlled (so-called type 1 pachinko game machine), and when the game ball enters the starting hole, the big prize hole is changed to an open state, and the big prize game state is controlled on the condition that the game ball that entered the big prize hole enters a specific area (so-called type 2 game machine). When controlled to such a big prize game state, the big prize hole is opened in an advantageous opening mode (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds x 10 rounds, etc.) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter, and a prize ball (game ball) corresponding to the game ball that entered the big prize hole can be paid out.

In addition, there is a known gaming machine that performs a first reach performance (long reach, SP reach) and then performs a second reach performance (SPSP reach) based on the results of a lottery for special symbols in order to increase the excitement of the game (see Patent Document 1).

[Prior Art Literature]
[Patent Documents]
[Patent Document 1] JP 2013-236850 A

Summary of the Invention
[Problem to be solved by the invention]
However, it has been desired to increase the relevance of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, and the like, and to further improve the reach effect and other effects, thereby further increasing the interest in the game.

The objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the enjoyment of gaming.

[Means for solving the problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of performing a variable display of an identification symbol when a predetermined start condition is satisfied,
A performance execution means (e.g., a sub-control circuit 300 and a sub-CPU 301 that control the display device 7, the speaker 32, the LED group 46, the performance accessory group 58, and the performance button device 6310) that performs a predetermined performance when the variable display of the identification pattern is being performed;
The effect execution means is capable of executing a second effect (e.g., the road to the extreme showdown) when a first effect execution condition (e.g., obtaining the Road to the Extreme Showdown icon) is met by performing a first effect (e.g., a cherry blossom accumulation announcement), and is capable of executing a fourth effect (e.g., the road to the showdown) when a second effect execution condition (e.g., displaying five character icons) is met by performing a third effect (e.g., a pseudo-consecutive effect) different from the first effect, and is characterized in that the second effect and the fourth effect are capable of executing specific effects of the same type (e.g., an effect aiming to collect ten character icons).

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the effect execution means is capable of performing, as the first effect, a step effect in which the effect progresses step by step (e.g., a cherry blossom accumulation notice) and a first development display effect capable of displaying predetermined development information (e.g., a character icon) (e.g., a display of a text image indicating the number of character icons such as "1-man concentrated", or an icon display image being lit up in the Western Army icon display section, etc.).

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the effect execution means is capable of performing a pseudo consecutive effect multiple times as the third effect, in which the identification pattern that is being displayed in a varying manner is temporarily temporarily stopped and then the identification pattern that was temporarily stopped is again displayed in a varying manner, and it is also desirable that each time the pseudo consecutive effect is performed, a second development display effect that can display predetermined development information (e.g., a character icon) (e.g., an effect in which one or more character icons are displayed in a stopped state, or an icon display image is displayed lit up in the Western Army icon display section, etc.) can be performed.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a performance operation unit (for example, a first performance operation unit 6311 and a second performance operation unit 6312 of a performance button device 6310) is provided, by which a player can perform operations for the performance,
The presentation execution means is capable of performing an operation presentation (for example, a one-operation presentation in the Road to the Final Battle or the Road to the Extreme Final Battle) as the specific presentation, which has the player perform a predetermined number of operations on the presentation operation unit, and it is desirable that the number of operations in the operation presentation in the second presentation be greater than the number of operations in the operation presentation in the fourth presentation.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the effect execution means is capable of executing a fifth effect (e.g., a showdown reach) when a third effect execution condition (e.g., less than 10 character icons) is met by performing the second effect or the fourth effect, and as the specific effect, it is capable of displaying predetermined development information and performing a development progression effect that progresses according to the displayed development information (e.g., a performance aiming to collect 10 character icons), and it is desirable that as the fifth effect, it is capable of performing a development effect related to the development information displayed as it progresses in the development progression effect (e.g., a performance using support icons).

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a start information acquisition means (e.g., the main CPU 201) for acquiring start information when the predetermined start condition is established, a first special game determination means (e.g., the main CPU 201) for determining whether or not to control a first special game (e.g., a big win game) that is advantageous to a player based on the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means, a second special game determination means (e.g., the main CPU 201) for determining whether or not to control a second special game (e.g., a small win game) that is less advantageous than the first special game based on the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means, and a special game control means (e.g., the main CPU 20 a reserve storage means (e.g., a main RAM 203 having a special symbol start storage area) capable of storing the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of reserved items when the predetermined start condition is established in a state in which the first special game determination means and the second special game determination means cannot make a determination; a pre-determination means (e.g., a main CPU 201) capable of determining whether or not to control the first special game or the second special game based on the start information stored in the reserve storage means before the first special game determination means and the second special game determination means make a determination; and a pre-effect execution means (e.g., a sub-control circuit 300 and a sub-CPU 301 for controlling a display device 7, a speaker 32, an LED group 46, a performance accessory group 58, and a performance button device 6310) capable of performing a pre-effect (e.g., a lotus flower notice) for a predetermined effect period based on a determination result by the pre-determination means,
It is desirable that the pre-performance execution means be able to continue performing the pre-performance even if the special game control means controls the second special game during the specified performance period.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, there are provided a start information acquisition means (e.g., the main CPU 201) for acquiring start information when a first start condition or a second start condition is established, a special game determination means (e.g., the main CPU 201) for determining whether or not to control a special game advantageous to a player based on the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means, a first reservation storage means (e.g., the main RAM 203 having first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4)) capable of storing the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means up to a first reservation number when the first start condition is established in a state in which the special game determination means is unable to make a determination, and a special game determination means (e.g., the main RAM 203 having first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4)) capable of storing the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means up to a first reservation number when the second start condition is established in a state in which the special game determination means is unable to make a determination. a second reserved storage means (e.g., a main RAM 203 having second special symbol start storage areas (1) and (2)) capable of storing the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means up to a second reserved number; a pre-judgment means (e.g., a main CPU 201) capable of making a judgment as to whether or not to control the special game based on the start information stored in the first reserved storage means or the second reserved storage means before the special game judgment means makes a judgment; and a pre-performance execution means (e.g., a sub-control circuit 300 and a sub-CPU 301 for controlling a display device 7, a speaker 32, an LED group 46, a performance accessory group 58, and a performance button device 6310) capable of performing a reserved pre-performance (e.g., a folding fan notice) based on a judgment result by the pre-judgment means,
It is desirable that the pre-performance execution means is capable of performing a hold pre-performance based on the start information stored in the first hold memory means when a predetermined number of hold start information (e.g., two) is stored in the second hold memory means.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention further comprises a performance operation unit (e.g., a first performance operation unit 6311 and a second performance operation unit 6312 of the performance button device 6310) by which the player can operate the performance, operation detection means (e.g., first to third operation unit detection switches of the performance button device 6310) for detecting operations on the performance operation unit, and operation determination means (e.g., the sub-CPU 301) for determining whether the operations detected by the operation detection means are valid or invalid,
When there is a reception time during which multiple operations can be accepted on the performance operation unit, the operation judgment means judges the operation on the performance operation unit to be invalid during a start preparation period set at the start of the reception time, judges the operation on the performance operation unit to be invalid during an end preparation period set at the end of the reception time, and judges the operation on the performance operation unit to be valid during a valid operation period set from the end of the start preparation period to the start of the end preparation period, but it is desirable that an operation invalid period can be set from when an operation detected during the valid operation period is judged to be valid to when the next operation is judged to be valid, and that the operation invalid period be set to a different period depending on the performance based on the operation judged to be valid during the valid operation period.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a presentation operation section (e.g., a presentation button device 6310) that allows a player to perform operations for presentations and that can execute a plurality of types of operation modes, and an operation display presentation execution means (e.g., a sub-control circuit 300 and a sub-CPU 301 that control the display device 7, the speaker 32, the group of LEDs 46, the group of presentation props 58, and the presentation button device 6310) that can execute an operation display presentation (e.g., display of a presentation button state image) that displays the presentation operation section,
It is desirable that the operation display performance execution means performs the operation display performance in response to a change in the operation mode of the performance operation unit to be operated.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a presentation operation unit (e.g., presentation button device 6310) that allows the player to operate the presentation and is capable of executing a plurality of types of operation modes, and an operation mode return means (e.g., button control circuit 310, sub-control circuit 300, and sub-CPU 301) that returns the operation mode of the presentation operation unit to the initial operation mode when a predetermined condition is met, including the passage of a predetermined time since the player performed a predetermined game.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a first annunciation symbol display control means (e.g., the main CPU 201) is provided for starting a variable display of a first annunciation symbol (e.g., a first special symbol) when a first start condition is established, and for displaying the first annunciation symbol in a stopped state in a predetermined manner after a predetermined variable time has elapsed, and a second annunciation symbol display control means (e.g., the main CPU 201) is provided for starting a variable display of a second annunciation symbol (e.g., a second special symbol) when a second start condition is established, and for displaying the second annunciation symbol in a stopped state in a predetermined manner after a predetermined variable time has elapsed. a second annunciation symbol display control means (e.g., the main CPU 201); a game state control means (e.g., the main CPU 201) for controlling a normal game state to a specific game state when the first annunciation symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stopping manner by the first annunciation symbol display control means or the second annunciation symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stopping manner by the second annunciation symbol display control means; and an external information output means (e.g., the external terminal board 184) for outputting external information relating to the game to a predetermined external device,
The first annunciation symbol display control means can execute the variable display of the first annunciation symbol and the variable display of the second annunciation symbol by the second annunciation symbol display control means in parallel, and the game state control means controls the specific game state to the normal game state when the stopped display of the first annunciation symbol and the second annunciation symbol is performed a predetermined number of times in the specific game state, and the external information output means outputs specific external information during an output period from when the specific game state is controlled by the game state control means to when the normal game state is controlled. In addition to continuously outputting a notification (e.g., external information 3), it is desirable to continuously output the specific external information also during a first additional period until the first notification pattern is displayed stationary when the first notification pattern display control means starts to display the varying first notification pattern while the specific game state is controlled, and during a second additional period until the second notification pattern is displayed stationary when the second notification pattern display control means starts to display the varying second notification pattern while the specific game state is controlled.

In addition, "development information" refers to information that is displayed as the game or presentation progresses, such as text information showing the content of the upcoming presentation, character icon information showing a specific character, number information showing the number of displayed character icons, number information showing the number of pseudo-consecutives that have already taken place, and time information until the upcoming presentation, and refers to development patterns consisting of numbers, letters, figures, symbols, etc.

〔Effect of the invention〕
According to the present invention, it is possible to further increase the enjoyment of the game.

<Addendum: The 7th Pachinko Game Machine (Part 1)>
2. Background Art
Conventionally, a starting hole and a big prize hole are provided in the game area where the game ball flows down, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, a lottery for a special symbol is held, and when the lottery for the special symbol is won, the big prize game state is controlled (so-called type 1 pachinko game machine), and when the game ball enters the starting hole, the big prize hole is changed to an open state, and the big prize game state is controlled on the condition that the game ball that entered the big prize hole enters a specific area (so-called type 2 pachinko game machine) are known. Furthermore, a game machine (a reel type game machine called a slot machine) is also known in which a predetermined number of medals or the like are inserted, a start lever is operated to rotate multiple reels, and a special prize such as a specific number of medals or a bonus game is awarded based on the combination of symbols on the reels that are stopped and displayed.

In addition, in order to increase the interest of the game, pachinko gaming machines are provided with multiple game states, such as game states with different probability of winning special symbols (low probability game state, high probability game state) and game states with different rates of balls entering the starting hole (time-saving game state, non-time-saving game state) (see Patent Document 1).

[Prior Art Literature]
[Patent Documents]
[Patent Document 1] JP 2013-59682 A

Summary of the Invention
[Problem to be solved by the invention]
It has been desired to provide appropriate effects according to the gaming state and game situation of the gaming machine, thereby further increasing the entertainment value of the game.

The objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the enjoyment of gaming.

[Means for solving the problems]
In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, a seventh pachinko gaming machine) is a gaming machine capable of variably displaying identification symbols,
The game machine includes a performance execution means (e.g., a sub-control circuit 300 and a sub-CPU 301 that control the display device 7, the speaker 32, and the LED group 46) that executes a predetermined performance, and a game state control means (e.g., a main CPU 201) that transitions the game state and controls the transitioned game state,
The game state control means is capable of transitioning to a special game state (e.g., a big win game state or a small win game state) in which a player can be given a special benefit when the execution result of the variable display of the identification pattern satisfies a special condition, and is capable of controlling at least a normal game state (e.g., a first normal game state) and a specific game state (e.g., the first to third time-saving game states and the second normal game state) which are more advantageous to the player than the normal game state as game states in which the variable display of the identification pattern can be executed, and the performance execution means is capable of executing one normal performance (e.g., a normal reach performance or the like executed when hitting from the left) out of a plurality of types of normal performances in the normal game state, and is capable of executing one specific performance (e.g., a boss battle performance, a Sengoku time performance, a battle performance, or the like executed when hitting from the right) out of a plurality of types of specific performances in the specific game state.

Preferably, the multiple types of normal effects of the gaming machine according to the present invention include at least multiple types of normal effects that can be executed by the variable display of the identification pattern that satisfies the special condition (e.g., window preview effects, normal reach effects, etc. in the variation) and multiple types of pre-normal effects that can be executed by the variable display of the identification pattern prior to the variable display of the identification pattern that satisfies the special condition (e.g., pre-reading effects in the pre-variation).

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the multiple types of pre-regular effects include at least a first pre-regular effect (e.g., a flash notice when the ball enters the starting hole) and a second pre-regular effect (e.g., a hold change notice), and it is desirable that the effect execution means is capable of executing the second pre-regular effect while not executing the first pre-regular effect when a predetermined condition is met at the start of the pre-regular effect (e.g., when the ball enters the starting hole).

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, if a specific condition different from the predetermined condition (for example, common prohibited condition 1, "when there is a reserved number of second special symbols") is satisfied at the start of the pre-regular performance, the performance execution means will not execute either the first pre-regular performance or the second pre-regular performance.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific gaming state (e.g., the second time-saving gaming state) is a gaming state in which a normal display state (e.g., a male character stage or a female character stage) and a special display state (e.g., a premier stage indicating the number of reserved consecutive stocks) whose display state is different from the normal display state can be executed, the specific effects include a first specific effect (e.g., an effect based on the background display mode of the male character stage) and a second specific effect (e.g., an effect based on the background display mode of the female character stage), and while the effect execution means is capable of executing either the first specific effect or the second specific effect in the normal display state, it is preferable that the effect execution means does not execute either the first specific effect or the second specific effect in the special display state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific game state includes at least a first specific game state (e.g., a second time-saving game state) that can be executed after the special game state ends, and a second specific game state (e.g., a second normal game state) that is different from the first specific game state, and the presentation execution means has a presentation mode execution means that executes one of a plurality of presentation modes that define the presentation state, and a presentation mode selection means that selects the presentation mode executed by the presentation mode execution means, and the presentation mode execution means can execute one of a plurality of specific presentation modes that include at least a first specific presentation mode (e.g., a male character stage) and a second specific presentation mode (e.g., a female character stage) that is different from the first mode in the first specific game state, and it is preferable that the presentation mode selection means allows the player to select at least one of the first specific presentation mode and the second specific presentation mode when a predetermined selection condition is met.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the predetermined selection condition can be established in the special gaming state transitioned to based on the special condition when the special condition is satisfied in the variable display of the identification pattern executed in the second specific gaming state, but it is preferable that the predetermined selection condition cannot be established in the special gaming state transitioned to based on the special condition when the special condition is satisfied in the variable display of the identification pattern executed in the first specific gaming state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the special condition is satisfied by the variable display of the identification pattern executed in the first specific game state, the presentation mode execution means continues to execute the presentation mode executed when the special condition is satisfied in the first specific game state after the special game state ends.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises: a start information acquisition means for acquiring start information when a predetermined start condition is established; a special condition determination means for determining whether or not the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means satisfies the special condition; and a reservation storage means for storing up to a predetermined reservation number of start information acquired by the start information acquisition means when the variable display of the identification pattern has already been executed or the variable display of the identification pattern cannot be executed;
The effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect (for example, displaying the number of reserved consecutive stocks using a V-passing effect pattern) when start information satisfying the special condition is stored in the reserve memory means in the special game state, and when the special condition is satisfied by the variable display of the identification pattern executed in the first specific game state, the special effect can be executed in the special game state entered based on the special condition, whereas when the special condition is satisfied by the variable display of the identification pattern executed in the second specific game state, it is desirable not to execute the special effect in the special game state entered based on the special condition, even if start information satisfying the special condition is stored in the reserve memory means.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes at least a first predetermined condition fulfillment pattern that can be fulfilled depending on the execution state of the variable display of the identification pattern being executed at the start of the pre-regular performance (e.g., first prohibited condition 3, "when the first start gate is won within 500 ms from the start of the variable display of the first special pattern"), and a second predetermined condition fulfillment pattern that can be fulfilled when the variable display of the identification pattern is not being executed at the start of the pre-regular performance (e.g., first prohibited condition 4, "when the first start gate is won during demo display").

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises: a first identification symbol variable display control means for variably displaying the first identification symbol up to a predetermined variation time and then stopping the first identification symbol in a predetermined stopped manner as execution of the variable display of the first identification symbol; a variation pattern table switching means for switching to one of a plurality of variation pattern tables in which a plurality of variation patterns for determining at least the variation time of the first identification symbol are defined; and a variation time determination means for determining a variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern table switched by the variation pattern table switching means and determining the variation time of the first identification symbol based on the determined variation pattern,
It is desirable that the patterns in which the specific condition can be satisfied include a first specific condition satisfaction pattern which can be satisfied when a specified normal performance is being executed with the variable display of the identification pattern being executed at the start time of the pre-normal performance (for example, common prohibited conditions 4 and 5, ``when the same pre-reading performance is already being executed while a full rotation performance is being displayed''), and a second specific condition satisfaction pattern which can be satisfied when the specified number of times after or before the switching of the variable pattern table by the variable pattern table switching means is performed at the start time of the pre-normal performance (for example, common prohibited condition 3, ``when within five variable displays before and after the stage is switched'').

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises: a first identification symbol variable display control means for variably displaying the first identification symbol for a predetermined variation time and then statically displaying the first identification symbol in a predetermined stopped manner as the execution of the variable display of the first identification symbol; and a second identification symbol variable display control means for variably displaying the second identification symbol for a predetermined variation time and then statically displaying the second identification symbol in a predetermined stopped manner as the execution of the variable display of the second identification symbol;
It is desirable that the patterns in which the specific condition can be established include a third specific condition establishment pattern which can be established when the variable display of the identification pattern being executed at the start time of the pre-normal performance is variably displaying the second identification pattern by the second identification pattern variable display control means (for example, ``during the control period of the second special pattern (during the variably display of the second special pattern)'', which is common prohibited condition 2).

〔Effect of the invention〕
According to the present invention, it is possible to further increase the enjoyment of the game.

<Addendum: The 7th Pachinko Machine (Part 2)>
2. Background Art
Conventionally, a starting hole and a big prize hole are provided in the game area where the game ball flows down, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, a lottery for a special symbol is held, and when the lottery for the special symbol is won, the big prize game state is controlled (so-called type 1 pachinko game machine), and when the game ball enters the starting hole, the big prize hole is changed to an open state, and the big prize game state is controlled on the condition that the game ball that entered the big prize hole enters a specific area (so-called type 2 pachinko game machine) are known. Furthermore, a game machine (a reel type game machine called a slot machine) is also known in which a predetermined number of medals or the like are inserted, a start lever is operated to rotate multiple reels, and a special prize such as a specific number of medals or a bonus game is awarded based on the combination of symbols on the reels that are stopped and displayed.

In addition, in order to increase the interest of the game, pachinko gaming machines are provided with multiple game states, such as game states with different probability of winning special symbols (low probability game state, high probability game state) and game states with different rates of balls entering the starting hole (time-saving game state, non-time-saving game state) (see Patent Document 1).

[Prior Art Literature]
[Patent Documents]
[Patent Document 1] JP 2013-59682 A

Summary of the Invention
[Problem to be solved by the invention]
It has been desired to maintain and improve gameplay by setting an appropriate game state according to the gameplay of the gaming machine and by carrying out appropriate processing.

The objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can maintain and improve playability.

[Means for solving the problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes: an identification symbol variable display control means (e.g., the main CPU 201) for variably displaying at least one of a first identification symbol (e.g., a first special symbol) and a second identification symbol (e.g., a second special symbol) for a predetermined variation time, and then stopping and displaying the identification symbol in a predetermined stopped state; an effect execution means (e.g., the sub-control circuit 300 and the sub-CPU 301 for controlling the display device 7, the speaker 32, and the LED group 46) for executing a predetermined effect; and a game state control means (e.g., the main CPU 201) for shifting a game state and controlling the shifted game state,
The game state control means is capable of transitioning to a special game state (e.g., a big win game state or a small win game state) in which a special benefit can be given to a player when a stop mode of at least one of the first and second identification patterns satisfies a special condition, and is provided with at least a normal game state (e.g., a normal game state) and a specific game state (e.g., a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to a player than the normal game state, as game states in which the variable display of the identification pattern can be executed, and the normal game state is a first normal game state (e.g., a first normal game state) and and a second normal game state (e.g., a second normal game state) different from the first normal game state, and the specific game state includes a first specific game state (e.g., a first time-saving game state), a second specific game state (e.g., a second time-saving game state) different from the first specific game state, and a third specific game state (e.g., a third time-saving game state) different from the first specific game state and the second specific game state, and the game state control means is capable of transitioning from the normal game state to the third specific game state when the number of times the varying display of the identification pattern has been performed reaches a predetermined specific number.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first normal gaming state is a gaming state in which the first identification symbol is primarily displayed in a variable manner, the second normal gaming state is a gaming state in which the second identification symbol is primarily displayed in a variable manner, and at least one of the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state, and the third specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the second identification symbol is primarily displayed in a variable manner.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the gaming state control means is capable of transitioning to the second normal gaming state after the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state has ended, and is capable of transitioning to the first normal gaming state after the second normal gaming state has ended.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the identification symbol variable display control means is capable of variably displaying the first identification symbol in the first specific gaming state when the first identification symbol is variably displayed in a first variation time (e.g., 0.2 seconds) when the first identification symbol is variably displayed in a state where the stopped state of the first identification symbol does not satisfy the special condition (e.g., a miss), variably displaying the first identification symbol in a second variation time (e.g., 89 seconds) longer than the first variation time when the first identification symbol is variably displayed in a state where the stopped state of the first identification symbol satisfies the special condition (e.g., in the case of a big win or a small win), and variably displaying the second identification symbol in a variation time longer than the first variation time and shorter than the second variation time (e.g., 0.2 seconds) when the second identification symbol is variably displayed in a state where the stopped state of the second identification symbol satisfies the special condition (e.g., in the case of a big win or a small win).

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the identification symbol variable display control means variably displays the second identification symbol in the second specific gaming state such that the stopping mode of the second identification symbol satisfies the special condition (for example, in the case of a big win or a small win), the identification symbol variable display control means is capable of variably displaying the second identification symbol with any of a third variable time (for example, 2 seconds) and a fourth variable time (for example, 5 seconds or 12 seconds) that is longer than the third variable time, and when the stopping mode of the first identification symbol satisfies the special condition ( For example, when the first identification pattern, which is a winning combination (in the case of a big win or a small win), is variably displayed, it is possible to variably display the first identification pattern using the third variation time, while not variably displaying the first identification pattern using the fourth variation time, and it is desirable that the performance execution means be able to execute the same performance (for example, a performance of a normal variation mode as a decorative pattern performance) when the second identification pattern is variably displayed using the third variation time and when the first identification pattern is variably displayed using the fourth variation time.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the identification pattern variable display control means variably displays the second identification pattern when the number of variations reaches the specific number, the identification pattern variable display control means is capable of variably displaying the second identification pattern using the same fifth variation time (e.g., 15 seconds) regardless of the stopping state of the second identification pattern, and when the second identification pattern variably displays when the number of variations reaches the specific number, the performance execution means is capable of executing different performances (e.g., a card performance or a door opening performance) when the second identification pattern is variably displayed using the fifth variation time depending on whether the stopping state of the second identification pattern satisfies the special condition or does not satisfy the special condition.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises: a start information acquisition means for acquiring start information when a predetermined start condition is established; a special condition determination means for determining whether or not the special condition is satisfied based on the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means; and a reservation storage means for storing up to a predetermined reservation number of start information acquired by the start information acquisition means when the display of changes in the identification symbols has already been executed or the display of changes in the identification symbols cannot be executed;
It is desirable that, in the second normal game state, the presentation pattern determination means is capable of determining different presentation patterns depending on the number of start information items that satisfy the special condition stored in the pending memory means and the determination result by the special condition determination means.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect (e.g., a door opening effect) in which the end time of the effect is not specified.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises: a start information acquisition means for acquiring start information when a predetermined start condition is established; a special condition determination means for determining whether or not the special condition is satisfied based on the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means; and a reservation storage means for storing up to a predetermined reservation number of start information acquired by the start information acquisition means when the display of changes in the identification symbols has already been executed or the display of changes in the identification symbols cannot be executed;
When the game state control means controls at least one of the first specific game state or the second specific game state, and the first identification pattern is variably displayed when an end condition for the first specific game state or the second specific game state being controlled is satisfied, it is desirable that the effect execution means executes a first transition effect (e.g., a continuous battle entry effect) for transitioning to the second normal game state if start information corresponding to the second identification pattern is stored in the pending memory means, and executes the special effect (e.g., a door opening effect) without executing the first transition effect if start information corresponding to the second identification pattern is not stored in the pending memory means.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the game state control means controls the third specific game state and the first identification pattern is displayed in a variable manner when the end condition of the controlled third specific game state is satisfied, the effect execution means is capable of executing the special effect at the start of the variable display of the first identification pattern, and desirably ends the execution of the special effect when the first identification pattern is displayed stationary.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises: a start information acquisition means for acquiring start information when a predetermined start condition is established; a special condition determination means for determining whether or not the special condition is satisfied based on the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means; and a reservation storage means for storing up to a predetermined reservation number of start information acquired by the start information acquisition means when the display of changes in the identification symbols has already been executed or the display of changes in the identification symbols cannot be executed;
The effect execution means is capable of executing the special effect when a specific condition is not met (for example, when the ball does not pass through a V winning port) while the special game state (for example, a small win game state) is being controlled, and when start information corresponding to the second identification pattern is stored in the pending memory means, it is desirable to execute a first transition effect (for example, a continuous battle entry effect) for transitioning to the second normal game state after the special effect ends, and when start information corresponding to the second identification pattern is not stored in the pending memory means, it is desirable to execute a first transition effect (for example, a stage change effect) for transitioning to the first normal game state after the special effect ends.

〔Effect of the invention〕
According to the present invention, it is possible to maintain and improve playability.

<Additional Note: The 8th Pachinko Machine>
2. Background Art
Conventionally, a starting hole and a large prize hole are provided in the game area where the game ball flows down, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, a lottery for a special pattern is held, and when the lottery for this special pattern is won, the large prize hole is controlled, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, the large prize hole is changed to an open state, and the large prize hole is controlled on the condition that the game ball that entered the large prize hole enters a specific area, and there are also known game machines (so-called type 2 pachinko game machines).

Furthermore, in order to increase the interest of pachinko machines, so-called type 1/type 2 pachinko machines are also known, which are a combination of a so-called type 1 pachinko machine and a so-called type 2 pachinko machine (see Patent Document 1).

[Prior Art Literature]
[Patent Documents]
[Patent Document 1] JP 2009-178259 A

Summary of the Invention
[Problem to be solved by the invention]
However, rather than merely mixing the so-called type 1 pachinko gaming machines with the so-called type 2 pachinko gaming machines, it was desired to create unprecedented gameplay and to increase the interest of the game.

The objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the enjoyment of gaming.

[Means for solving the problems]
In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention (e.g., an eighth pachinko gaming machine) is a gaming machine including a main control means (e.g., a main control circuit 200, a main CPU 201) capable of executing control related to the progress of a game, and a presentation control means (e.g., a sub-control circuit 300, a sub-CPU 301) capable of executing control related to presentation,
the main control means comprises: a game execution means capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition; a special condition determination means for determining whether or not a result of the execution of the game satisfies a special condition; a special game state control means for controlling a special game state in which a predetermined game value can be awarded to a player after the end of the game when it is determined that the special condition is satisfied; a game state control means for controlling a game state in which the game is executed; and a game execution mode determination means for determining an execution mode of the game (e.g., a variation pattern of a special symbol) to be executed based on the game execution means and to notify the result of the execution of the game,
The presentation control means is capable of executing any one of a plurality of presentations in a predetermined presentation execution means, and the game state control means is capable of controlling the game state to at least one of a normal game state and a specific game state (e.g., a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the special game state includes a predetermined special game state (e.g., a small win game state) and a specific special game state (e.g., a big win game state) in which the game value awarded to the player is relatively higher than that of the predetermined special game state, and it is desirable that the specific special game state includes a first specific special game state (e.g., a big win game state for selected symbol z1) and a second specific special game state different from the first specific special game state (e.g., a big win game state for selected symbol z2).

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a threshold determination means capable of determining whether the number of times the special gaming state has been executed (e.g., the number of consecutive jackpots) or the number of gaming values granted to the player (e.g., the cumulative number of jackpot balls) has reached a predetermined threshold, and a limiting means (e.g., a main control circuit 200 that controls a number limiter function or a ball output limiter function) capable of controlling the gaming state controlled by the gaming state control means to the normal gaming state based on the determination by the threshold determination means.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a game state control means capable of controlling the game state to a non-playable state (e.g., a non-playable state) that disables the player from playing, a threshold determination means capable of determining whether the number of times the special game state has been executed (e.g., the number of consecutive jackpots) or the number of game values granted to the player (e.g., the cumulative number of jackpot balls) has reached a predetermined threshold, and a limiting means (e.g., a main control circuit 200 that controls a number-of-times limiter function or a ball-out limiter function) capable of controlling the game state controlled by the game state control means to the non-playable state based on the determination of the threshold determination means.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the presentation control means does not issue a notification related to the threshold before the threshold determination means determines that the predetermined threshold has been reached, but when the threshold determination means determines that the threshold has been reached, it is desirable for the predetermined presentation execution means to notify that the predetermined threshold has been reached (for example, by executing an ending presentation).

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a table storage means (e.g., a main ROM 202) for storing at least a first table (e.g., a special symbol variation pattern table J1) to which the game execution mode is associated, and a second table (e.g., a special symbol variation pattern table J2) different from the first table,
The game execution mode determination means is capable of determining an execution mode including an execution time of the game as an execution mode of the game by using any of the tables stored in the table storage means, and it is desirable that the second table is a table to which an execution mode including an execution time of the game that is relatively shorter than that of the first table (for example, a special pattern variation pattern 10H) is associated.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the game execution mode determination means is capable of determining the execution mode of the game using the first table when the remaining threshold until the predetermined threshold is reached (for example, the remaining number of jackpot limiter times) is a predetermined value, and is capable of determining the execution mode of the game using the second table when the remaining threshold until the predetermined threshold is a specific value different from the predetermined value.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the threshold determination means is capable of setting a first threshold value (e.g., a limiter count of 98 times) as the predetermined threshold value when the first specific special gaming state is executed, and is capable of setting a second threshold value different from the first threshold value (e.g., a limiter count of 100 times) as the predetermined threshold value when the second specific special gaming state is executed.

Preferably, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the gaming state control means is capable of controlling the gaming state to the normal gaming state after the end of the specified special gaming state when the specified special gaming state is executed a specified number of times (e.g., the number of small wins is 1 or 255, etc.) while controlled to the specific gaming state, and the threshold determination means is capable of executing a process of counting a specified count value (e.g., a value obtained by subtracting the number of limiter times) on the threshold based on the transition to the specified special gaming state, and then determining whether the counted threshold value has reached the specified threshold value.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the predetermined special game state includes a first predetermined special game state (e.g., a small win game state of the selected symbol z5) and a second predetermined special game state different from the first predetermined special game state (e.g., a small win game state of the selected symbol z6), and the threshold value determination means, when transitioning to the first predetermined special game state, counts a first count value (e.g., the subtraction value of the limiter count is 2) as the predetermined count value to the threshold value, and, when transitioning to the second predetermined special game state, desirably counts a second count value (e.g., the subtraction value of the limiter count is 1) that is a value different from the first count value to the threshold value.

Preferably, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the game state control means sets the predetermined number of times to a first specified number (e.g., one small win) when the remaining threshold until the predetermined threshold is reached is a predetermined value, and sets the predetermined number of times to a second specified number greater than the first specified number (e.g., two small wins) when the remaining threshold until the predetermined threshold is reached is a specific value different from the predetermined value.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific game state includes a first specific game state (e.g., time-saving game state A) that can be executed after the special game state ends, and a second specific game state (e.g., time-saving game state B) that can be executed without going through the special game state, and the threshold value determination means is capable of setting a third threshold value (e.g., a limiter count of 98 or 100) as the predetermined threshold value when the special game state (e.g., a first win) first entered from a game state other than the first specific game state is a special game state entered from the normal game state, and is capable of setting a fourth threshold value different from the third threshold value (e.g., a limiter count of 99) as the predetermined threshold value when the special game state (e.g., a first win) first entered from a game state other than the first specific game state is a special game state entered from the second specific game state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific game state includes a first specific game state (e.g., time-saving game state A) that can be executed after the special game state ends, and a second specific game state (e.g., time-saving game state B) that can be executed without going through the special game state, and the game execution mode determination means is capable of determining the game execution mode (e.g., the special symbol fluctuation pattern according to special symbol fluctuation pattern tables J1 to J4) based on the threshold determined by the threshold determination means during the execution of the first specific game state, while being capable of determining the game execution mode (e.g., the special symbol fluctuation pattern according to special symbol fluctuation pattern table S1) regardless of the threshold determined by the threshold determination means during the execution of the second specific game state.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises a special game control mode determination means for determining a control mode of the special game state (for example, an opening mode of a big win game state or a small win game state),
It is preferable that the special game control mode determination means is capable of determining the control mode of the special game state based on a remaining threshold value until the predetermined threshold value is reached.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention (e.g., an eighth pachinko gaming machine) is a gaming machine including main control means (e.g., a main control circuit 200, a main CPU 201) capable of executing control related to the progress of a game, and presentation control means (e.g., a sub-control circuit 300, a sub-CPU 301) capable of executing control related to presentations executed by a presentation execution means,
the main control means comprises: a game execution means capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition; a special condition determination means for determining whether or not a result of the execution of the game satisfies a special condition; a special game state control means for controlling a special game state in which a predetermined game value can be awarded to a player after the end of the game when it is determined that the special condition is satisfied; and a game state control means for controlling a game state in which the game is executed;
The game state control means is capable of controlling the game state to any one of a normal game state and a specific game state (e.g., a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and the specific game state includes at least a normal specific game state (e.g., a general time-saving game state) which can be terminated when a first termination condition (e.g., one small win is won) is satisfied, and a special specific game state (e.g., a special time-saving game state) which can be terminated when a second termination condition different from the first termination condition (e.g., 255 small wins is won) is satisfied.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the special game state includes a predetermined special game state (e.g., a small win game state) to which a player can be shifted when a predetermined special condition is met, and a specific special game state (e.g., a big win game state) to which a player can be shifted when a specific special condition is met and in which the game value given to the player is relatively higher than that of the predetermined special game state, and the specific special game state includes a first specific special game state (e.g., a big win game state with selected symbol z2) and a second specific special game state (e.g., a big win game state with selected symbol z1) different from the first specific special game state, and it is preferable that the game state control means is capable of controlling the game state to the normal specific game state after the first specific special game state ends, and is capable of controlling the game state to the special specific game state after the second specific special game state ends.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first end condition is an end condition that is met relatively more frequently than the second end condition.

Preferably, the special game state of the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a predetermined special game state (e.g., a small win game state) to which a player can enter when a predetermined special condition is met, and a specific special game state (e.g., a big win game state) to which a player can enter when a specific special condition is met and in which the game value awarded to the player is relatively higher than that of the predetermined special game state, and the specific special game state includes a first specific special game state (e.g., a big win game state for the selected symbol z2) and a second specific special game state (e.g., a big win game state for the selected symbol z2) that is different from the first specific special game state. and a second specific special game state (e.g., a big win game state of the selected symbol z1), and the first termination condition is a condition that is established when the specific special game state is executed a first specified number of times (e.g., one small win is won) during the execution of the normal specific game state, and the second termination condition is a condition that is established when the specific special game state is executed a second specified number of times that is greater than the first number of times (e.g., 255 small wins are won) during the execution of the special specific game state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the game state control means is capable of terminating either the normal specific game state or the special specific game state that is being executed when a third termination condition different from either the first termination condition or the second termination condition (e.g., the number of time-saving times is 10,000) is met during execution of the normal specific game state or the special specific game state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the third end condition is an end condition that is met at a relatively lower rate than the first end condition is met during the execution of the normal specific gaming state.

Preferably, the game machine according to the present invention includes a first game execution means capable of executing a first game (e.g., drawing a lottery for a first special symbol) when a first start condition among the predetermined start conditions is established, and a second game execution means capable of executing a second game (e.g., drawing a lottery for a second special symbol) different from the first game when a second start condition different from the first start condition among the predetermined start conditions is established,
It is desirable that a transition to the special game state based on the execution result of the first game execution means results in a relatively higher rate of transition to the special specific game state after the end of the special game state than a transition to the special game state based on the execution result of the second game execution means.

Preferably, the game machine according to the present invention includes a first game execution means capable of executing a first game (e.g., drawing a lottery for a first special symbol) when a first start condition among the predetermined start conditions is established, and a second game execution means capable of executing a second game (e.g., drawing a lottery for a second special symbol) different from the first game when a second start condition different from the first start condition among the predetermined start conditions is established,
It is desirable that a transition to the special game state based on the execution result of the second game execution means results in a relatively higher rate of transition to the normal specific game state after the end of the special game state than a transition to the special game state based on the execution result of the first game execution means.

Preferably, the game machine according to the present invention includes a first game execution means capable of executing a first game (e.g., drawing a lottery for a first special symbol) when a first start condition among the predetermined start conditions is established, and a second game execution means capable of executing a second game (e.g., drawing a lottery for a second special symbol) different from the first game when a second start condition different from the first start condition among the predetermined start conditions is established,
When a transition to the special game state is made based on the execution result of the first game execution means, it is possible to transition to any of the normal game state, the normal specific game state, and the special specific game state at a predetermined rate after the special game state ends, while when a transition to the special game state is made based on the execution result of the second game execution means, it is desirable to transition to the normal specific game state after the special game state ends without transitioning to the normal game state or the special specific game state.

Preferably, the special game state of the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a predetermined special game state (e.g., a small win game state) to which a player can enter when a predetermined special condition is met, and a specific special game state (e.g., a big win game state) to which a player can enter when a specific special condition is met and in which the game value awarded to the player is relatively higher than that of the predetermined special game state, and the specific special game state includes a first specific special game state (e.g., a big win game state for the selected symbol z2) and a second specific special game state (e.g., a big win game state for the selected symbol z2) and a third specific special game state (e.g., a big win game state for the selected symbol z2) and a fourth specific special game state (e.g., a big win game state for the selected symbol z2). and a second specific special game state (e.g., a big win game state of the selected symbol z1) different from the special game state of the first specific game state. The specific special game state includes a first specific special game state (e.g., a small win game state of a small win of a small win of a falling game) which can be entered when a first specific condition (e.g., a small win of a falling game of the selected symbol z7) among the specific special conditions is satisfied, and a second specific special game state (e.g., a small V win of the selected symbols z5 and z6) different from the first specific condition among the specific special conditions is satisfied. , and a second predetermined special game state (for example, a small win game state of a V small win) that is more advantageous to the player than the first predetermined special game state, and the presentation control means has a predetermined presentation execution means capable of executing a predetermined presentation (for example, a continuation end presentation by a card presentation) related to the establishment of the first predetermined condition when the first predetermined condition is established, and a specific presentation execution means capable of executing a specific presentation (for example, a victory presentation by a battle presentation, or a door opening presentation) related to the establishment of the second predetermined condition when the second predetermined condition is established, and the specific presentation execution means is capable of executing the specific presentation when the second predetermined condition can be established in either the normal specific game state or the special specific game state, and it is preferable that the predetermined presentation execution means is capable of executing the predetermined presentation when the first predetermined condition can be established in the normal specific game state, but does not execute the predetermined presentation when the first predetermined condition can be established in the special specific game state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific performance execution means is capable of executing the specific performance if the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the gaming machine is controlled to the normal gaming state, while the predetermined performance execution means is capable of not executing the predetermined performance if the first predetermined condition is satisfied when the gaming machine is controlled to the normal gaming state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the effect control means is provided with a special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect (for example, a notice effect by notice effect pattern B1 or notice effect pattern B2) having a relatively high expectation of transitioning to the special game state,
When the special effect execution means is controlled to the normal specific gaming state, it is possible to execute the special effect in both games in which the special condition is met and games in which the special condition is not met, whereas when the special effect execution means is controlled to the special specific gaming state, it is possible to execute the special effect in games in which the special condition is met, but it is desirable not to execute the special effect in games in which the special condition is not met.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the main control means includes a game execution time determination means capable of determining an execution time of the game executed based on the game execution means (for example, a variable display time of a special symbol);
It is preferable that the game execution time determination means is capable of determining a game in which the normal specific game state has a relatively longer variable time than the special specific game state in a game in which the special condition is not established.

〔Effect of the invention〕
According to the present invention, it is possible to further increase the enjoyment of the game.

<Additional Note: The 9th Pachinko Machine>
2. Background Art
Conventionally, a starting port and a large prize port are provided in the game area where the game ball flows down, and when the game ball enters the starting port, a lottery for a special pattern is held, and when the lottery for this special pattern is won, the large prize port is controlled to control the large prize game state (so-called type 1 pachinko game machine), and when the game ball enters the starting port, the large prize port is changed to an open state, and the large prize game state is controlled on the condition that the game ball that entered the large prize port enters a specific area (so-called type 2 pachinko game machine) are known.

Furthermore, in order to increase the interest of pachinko machines, so-called type 1/type 2 pachinko machines are also known, which are a combination of a so-called type 1 pachinko machine and a so-called type 2 pachinko machine (see Patent Document 1).

[Prior Art Literature]
[Patent Documents]
[Patent Document 1] JP 2009-178259 A

Summary of the Invention
[Problem to be solved by the invention]
However, rather than merely mixing the so-called type 1 pachinko gaming machines with the so-called type 2 pachinko gaming machines, it was desired to create unprecedented gameplay and to increase the interest of the game.

The objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the enjoyment of gaming.

[Means for solving the problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention (e.g., the ninth pachinko gaming machine) comprises: a start variable display game execution means (e.g., a main control circuit 200 and a sub-control circuit 300, etc.) capable of executing a start variable display game (e.g., variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols corresponding to the special symbols, etc.) based on the passage of a gaming medium into a start area (e.g., a first start port 9120 or a second start port 9140); a specific variable display game execution means (e.g., a main control circuit 200 and a sub-control circuit 300, etc.) capable of executing a specific variable display game (e.g., variable display of normal symbols and decorative symbols corresponding to the normal symbols, etc.) based on the passage of a gaming ball into a specific area (e.g., a normal symbol operation area 9126); a special judgment means (e.g., a main CPU 201 that performs a lottery for special symbols) that judges whether the start variable display game satisfies a special result; and a specific judgment means (e.g., a normal symbol operation area 9126) that judges whether the specific variable display game satisfies a predetermined result. a first displacement device operation control means (e.g., the main CPU 201) capable of displacing a first displacement device (e.g., the first special electric role unit 9130 or the second special electric role unit 9150) provided in the game area from a state in which it is difficult for the game medium to win a prize to a state in which it is easy for the game medium to win a prize when it is determined based on the determination result of the special determination means that the execution result of the start variable display game satisfies the special result; a second displacement device operation control means (e.g., the main CPU 201) capable of displacing a second displacement device (e.g., the normal electric role unit 9145) provided in the game area from a state in which it is difficult for the game medium to win a prize to a state in which it is easy for the game medium to win a prize when it is determined based on the determination result of the specific determination means that the execution result of the specific variable display game satisfies the predetermined result; and a game state control means (e.g., the main CPU 201) capable of controlling a game state.
The game state control means is capable of controlling the game state to any one of a normal game state and a specific game state (e.g., a time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to a player than the normal game state,
The special results include at least a first special result (e.g., a big win) and a second special result (e.g., a small win) which is relatively less game value awarded to the player than the first special result, and the predetermined results include at least a first predetermined result (e.g., a short opening of the second starting hole 9140) and a second predetermined result (e.g., a long opening of the second starting hole 9140) which takes a relatively longer time to make the second displacement device easier to win than the first predetermined result.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the gaming state control means, when controlled to the specific gaming state, is capable of controlling to the normal gaming state on the condition that the specific variable display game has been executed a specific number of times.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific game state includes at least a first specific game state (e.g., a first time-saving game state) and a second specific game state (e.g., a second time-saving game state or a third time-saving game state) in which the rate at which the specific determination means determines the second predetermined result is relatively higher than in the first specific game state.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a reserve means (e.g., a main RAM 203 having a special symbol start memory area) capable of reserving a predetermined number of executions of the start variable display game, and a start variable display mode determination means (e.g., a main CPU 201) capable of determining the variable display mode (e.g., the variable pattern of the special symbol) of the start variable display game,
It is desirable that the start variable display mode determination means be capable of determining a first variable display mode (e.g., a first special pattern variable pattern 0AH) that can vary over a first time period (e.g., 10 seconds) when the start variable display game is not held by the holding means when the start condition of the start variable display game is satisfied, and of determining a second variable display mode (e.g., a second special pattern variable pattern 1AH) that can vary over a second time period (e.g., 1 second) that is shorter than the first time period when the start variable display game is held by the holding means when the start condition of the start variable display game is satisfied.

Preferably, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the first time is a time longer (e.g., the first variable display time of 10 seconds) than the average time it takes for the gaming medium launched from the launching device to reach the second displacement device (e.g., the normal average arrival time of 5 seconds), and the second time is a time shorter (e.g., the second variable display time of 1 second) than the average time it takes for the gaming medium launched from the launching device to reach the second displacement device.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the second displacement device is provided downstream of the first displacement device and upstream of the specific area, and the specific area is provided below the gaming area below the first displacement device and the second displacement device, and it is desirable that the frequency of passing through the specific area is relatively low by the first displacement device or the second displacement device being in a state where it is easy to win.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a specific variable display mode determination means (e.g., main CPU 201) capable of determining the variable display mode of the specific variable display game (e.g., the normal symbol variable pattern), and the specific variable display mode determination means is capable of determining a variable display mode (e.g., normal symbol variable pattern 13H, 15H or 16H) that can vary over a relatively longer period of time (e.g., 15 seconds, 40 seconds or 60 seconds) when it is determined that the second predetermined result is satisfied based on the judgment result of the specific judgment means than when it is determined that the first predetermined result is satisfied based on the judgment result of the specific judgment means.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a specific variable display mode determination means (e.g., the main CPU 201) capable of determining the variable display mode (e.g., the normal symbol variable pattern) of the specific variable display game, and the specific variable display mode determination means is capable of determining a third variable display mode (e.g., normal symbol variable pattern 13H to 15H) that can vary over a third time (e.g., 15 seconds, 12 seconds, or 40 seconds) when the execution result of the previously changed specific variable display game is a losing result that does not satisfy the predetermined result or the first predetermined result, and is capable of determining a fourth variable display mode (e.g., normal symbol variable pattern 16H) that can vary over a fourth time (e.g., 60 seconds) that is longer than the third time when the execution result of the previously changed specific variable display game is the second predetermined result.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a specific variable display mode determination means (e.g., main CPU 201) capable of determining the variable display mode of the specific variable display game (e.g., the normal pattern variable pattern), and the specific variable display mode determination means is capable of determining a variable display mode (e.g., normal pattern variable patterns 10H, 11H, etc.) that can vary over a relatively shorter variable time (e.g., 3 seconds, 10 seconds, etc.) in the specific game state than in the normal game state, and it is desirable that the variable display mode (e.g., normal pattern variable pattern 01H) that can vary over the longest variable time (e.g., 30 seconds) that can be determined in the normal game state is a variable display mode with a shorter variable time than the variable display mode (e.g., normal pattern variable pattern 16H) that can vary over the longest variable time (e.g., 60 seconds) that can be determined in the specific game state.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a presentation execution means (e.g., a sub-control circuit 300 and a sub-CPU 301 for controlling the display device 7, the speaker 32 and the group of LEDs 46) capable of executing a predetermined presentation, and the presentation execution means is capable of executing a presentation relating to the variable display of the start variable display game in the normal gaming state while not executing a presentation relating to the variable display of the specific variable display game, and is capable of executing a presentation relating to the variable display of the specific variable display game in the specific gaming state, and is also capable of executing a presentation relating to the variable display of the start variable display game when the execution result of the specific variable display game becomes the predetermined result.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a presentation execution means capable of executing a predetermined presentation (e.g., a sub-control circuit 300 and a sub-CPU 301 that control the display device 7, the speaker 32, and the LED group 46) and a hold means capable of holding a predetermined number of executions of the start variation display game (e.g., a main RAM 203 having a special pattern start memory area), and the presentation execution means executes a first presentation (e.g., a BONUS entry presentation) if the start variation display game satisfies the special result and the start variation display game is not held by the hold means when the start condition of the start variation display game is established, and executes a second presentation (e.g., a BONUS continuation presentation) different from the first presentation if the start variation display game satisfies the special result and the start variation display game is held by the hold means when the start condition of the start variation display game is established.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance (e.g., a sub-control circuit 300 and a sub-CPU 301 that control the display device 7, the speaker 32, and the LED group 46), a hold means capable of holding a predetermined number of executions of the start variable display game (e.g., a main RAM 203 having a special pattern start memory area), and a special game state control means (e.g., the main CPU 201) that can control the start variable display game executed by the start variable display game execution means to a special game state (e.g., a jackpot game state) in which a predetermined number of game values can be awarded to the player after the special result is established when the special result is established, and the performance execution means controls the start variable display game when the special result is satisfied. If the start variable display game is not held by the holding means when the start condition of the start variable display game is satisfied, it is preferable that the start variable display game be capable of displaying the number of game media expected to be acquired (for example, displaying an image of the number of game balls expected to be acquired) relating to the number of game values that the player can acquire at the start of the special game state, and if the start variable display game is held by the holding means when the start condition of the start variable display game is satisfied, the start variable display game when the special result is satisfied be capable of displaying the number of acquired game media (for example, displaying an image of the number of acquired game balls) relating to the number of game values acquired in the special game state previously executed at the start of the special game state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the start variable display game execution means is a first start variable display game execution means capable of executing a first start variable display game (e.g., variable display of a first special symbol and a decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, etc.) based on the passage of a gaming medium through a first start area (e.g., a first start opening 9120), and a second start variable display game execution means capable of executing a second start variable display game (e.g., variable display of a second special symbol and a decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol, etc.) based on the passage of a gaming medium through a second start area (e.g., a second start opening 9140). and the effect execution means executes a first effect if the second start variation display game satisfies the special result and the second start variation display game is not on hold by the hold means when the start condition of the second start variation display game is established, and executes a second effect different from the first effect if the second start variation display game satisfies the special result and the second start variation display game is on hold by the hold means when the start condition of the second start variation display game is established.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the start variable display game execution means has a first start variable display game execution means capable of executing a first start variable display game (e.g., variable display of a first special symbol and a decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, etc.) based on the passage of a gaming medium into a first start area (e.g., a first start opening 9120), and a second start variable display game execution means capable of executing a second start variable display game (e.g., variable display of a second special symbol and a decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol, etc.) based on the passage of a gaming medium into a second start area (e.g., a second start opening 9140), and the special determination means is a first start variable display game execution means capable of executing a second start variable display game (e.g., variable display of a second special symbol and a decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol, etc.) based on the passage of a gaming medium into a second start area (e.g., a second start opening 9140). The game has a first special determination means (e.g., the main CPU 201 that draws the first special symbol) that determines whether the game satisfies the special result or is a miss that does not satisfy the special result, and a second special determination means (e.g., the main CPU 201 that draws the second special symbol) that determines whether the second start variable display game satisfies the special result or is a miss, and it is desirable that the first special determination means has a relatively higher probability of determining that the game is a miss than that the game satisfies the special result, and that the second special determination means has a relatively higher probability of determining that the game is a miss than that the game is a miss.

Preferably, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the second time is set to be equal to or less than the time it takes for the first displacement device to reach a state in which it is easy to win (e.g., 2 seconds).

〔Effect of the invention〕
According to the present invention, it is possible to further increase the enjoyment of the game.

7 Display device 200 Main control circuit 201 Main CPU
202 Main ROM
203 Main RAM
300 Sub control circuit 301 Sub CPU
9010 Game board unit 9100 Game panel 9120 First start hole 9126 Normal play area 9130 First special electric accessory unit 9131 First large prize hole 9140 Second start hole 9145 Normal electric accessory unit 9150 Second special electric accessory unit 9151 Second large prize hole 9156 V prize hole

Claims (1)

a start variable display game execution means capable of executing a start variable display game based on the passage of the game medium into the start area;
A specific variable display game execution means capable of executing a specific variable display game based on the passage of a game medium into a specific area;
A determination means capable of determining the result of the start variable display game or the specific variable display game;
a displacement device operation control means for displacing a displacement device provided in a game area from a state where it is difficult for the game medium to win to a state where it is easy for the game medium to win when it is determined that the specific variable display game satisfies a predetermined result based on the determination result of the determination means;
A performance control means for controlling a performance execution means capable of executing a performance;
A game state control means capable of controlling a game state;
A specific variable display mode determination means capable of determining a variable display mode of the specific variable display game;
A special game state control means for controlling the start variable display game to a special game state in which a predetermined number of game values can be awarded to a player after the special result is established when the start variable display game satisfies a special result;
The performance control means includes a decorative symbol control means for displaying a decorative symbol corresponding to the start variable display game or the specific variable display game,
The game state control means is capable of controlling the game state to any one of a normal game state and a specific game state having a different degree of advantage for a player from the normal game state,
The predetermined result includes at least a first predetermined result and a second predetermined result that makes the displacement device easier to win than the first predetermined result,
The specific variable display mode determination means
When the execution result of the specific variable display game that has been previously changed in the specific gaming state is the first predetermined result, a first variable display mode that can be changed over a first time period after the derivation of the first predetermined result is determined ;
When the execution result of the specific variable display game which has been previously changed in the specific gaming state is the second predetermined result, a second variable display mode which can be changed over a second time period which is longer than the first time period after the derivation of the second predetermined result is determined ;
The performance control means includes:
A predetermined display relating to the number of game values that can be acquired in a plurality of special game states to which the game state can be shifted after the second predetermined result is derived by the specific variable display game can be displayed;
The decorative pattern control means
A first decorative pattern can be displayed in a first area of the display means, and a second decorative pattern can be displayed in a second area of the display means that is smaller than the first area,
A gaming machine characterized in that, at a predetermined timing before the first of the multiple special game states is executed and before the predetermined display is displayed, a decorative pattern corresponding to the start variable display game can be displayed in the second area without being displayed in the first area.